STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR

BUILDING WORKS
AND
OTHER INSTALLATIONS
(2004 EDITION)

BLDG04/ind.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Published by Housing and Development Board, Republic of Singapore.

No part of this document may be reproduced or copied in any form or by
any means without the prior permission of the publisher.

BLDG04/ind.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR BUILDING WORKS

AND OTHER INSTALLATIONS
CONTENTS
Page
SECTION 1

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

1-1

to 1-72

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 2

PILING

2-1

to 2-10

SECTION 3

EXCAVATION

3-1

to 3-10

SECTION 4

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

4-1

to 4-17

SECTION 5

METAL FORMWORK

5-1

to 5-4

SECTION 6

SEMI-PRECAST CONCRETE

6-1

to 6-18

SECTION 7

PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

7-1

to 7-8

SECTION 8

HOUSEHOLD SHELTER

8-1

to 8-4

SECTION 9

REINFORCED CONCRETE WATER TANK

9-1

to 9-6

SECTION 10

PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE PARTITION

10-1

to 10-4

SECTION 11

NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

11-1

to 11-3

SECTION 12

BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK

12-1

to 12-6

SECTION 13

ROOFING

13-1

to 13-4

SECTION 14

CONCRETE FLAT ROOF

14-1

to 14-9

SECTION 15

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

15-1

to 15-17

SECTION 16

IRONMONGERY

16-1

to 16-9

SECTION 17

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

17-1

to 17-5

SECTION 18

METALWORK

18-1

to 18-30

SECTION 19

FLOOR FINISHES

19-1

to 19-17

SECTION 20

WALL FINISHES

20-1

to 20-11

SECTION 21

ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE AND CATV INSTALLATION

21-1

to 21-2

SECTION 22

GLAZING

22-1

SECTION 23

PAINTING AND DECORATING

23-1

to 23-7

The contents of this index on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into
consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.

BLDG04/ind.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR BUILDING WORKS

AND OTHER INSTALLATIONS
CONTENTS
Page
SECTION 24

UNDERGROUND PIPE SYSTEM FOR LOW TENSION

RETICULATION CABLE AND TELECOMMUNICATION CABLE

24-1

to 24-9

SECTION 25

CHILDREN'S PLAYGROUND, FITNESS STATION AND HARDCOURT

25-1

to 25-5

SECTION 26

TREE PLANTING AND TURFING

26-1

to 26-15

SECTION 27

MULTI-STOREY CARPARK

27-1

to 27-5

SECTION 28

ELECTRICAL SUB-STATION / UTILITIES CENTRE /

DUSTBIN COMPOUND

28-1

to 28-6

SECTION 29

EATING HOUSE

29-1

to 29-3

SECTION 30

MISCELLANEOUS (BUILDING)

30-1

SECTION 31

RESERVED

31-1

SECTION 32

RESERVED

31-1

SECTION 33

RESERVED

31-1

SECTION 34

RESERVED

31-1

SECTION 35

RESERVED

31-1

SECTION 36

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SANITARY, WATER, GAS

AND OTHER PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS

36-1

to 36-6

SECTION 37

SANITARY INSTALLATION

37-1

to 37-16

SECTION 38

WATER INSTALLATION

38-1

to 38-15

SECTION 39

GAS PIPE INSTALLATION

39-1

to 39-8

SECTION 40

EATING ESTABLISHMENT, MARKET FACILITIES, RETAIL AND

SERVICES FACILITIES

40-1

to 40-5

SECTION 41

MISCELLANEOUS (SANITARY & WATER INSTALLATION)

41-1

SECTION 42

TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM AND TELEMONITORING SYSTEM

INSTALLATION

42-1

to 42-16

SECTION 43

BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

43-1

to 43-7

SECTION 44

DRY/WET RISING MAIN INSTALLATION

44-1

to 44-16

SECTION 45

FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATION

45-1

to 45-21

SECTION 46

RESERVED

46-1

The contents of this index on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into
consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.

BLDG04/ind.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR BUILDING WORKS

AND OTHER INSTALLATIONS
CONTENTS
Page
SECTION 47

RESERVED

46-1

SECTION 48

RESERVED

46-1

SECTION 49

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

49-1

to 49-7

SECTION 50

SWITCHBOARDS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND SWITCHGEARS

50-1

to 50-11

SECTION 51

MAINS AND SUB-MAINS CABLES

51-1

to 51-4

SECTION 52

CABLES SUPPORTING SYSTEMS

52-1

to 52-8

SECTION 53

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES AND FIXTURES

53-1

to 53-2

SECTION 54

LUMINARIES

54-1

to 54-5

SECTION 55

EARTHING SYSTEM

55-1

to 55-3

SECTION 56

LIGHTNING PROTECTION

56-1

to 56-3

SECTION 57

PUBLIC LIGHTING

57-1

SECTION 58

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF DWELLING UNITS AND PREMISES

58-1

SECTION 59

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION TO MULTI-STOREY CARPARKS (MSCP),

GARAGES AND PLANT ROOMS

59-1

SECTION 60

OUTDOOR AMENITIES LIGHTING

60-1

to 60-7

SECTION 61

CENTRAL ANTENNAE TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEM INSTALLATION

61-1

to 61-23

SECTION 62

TELEPHONE CABLING

62-1

to 62-2

SECTION 63

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

63-1

to 63-10

SECTION 64

VENTILATION SYSTEM

64-1

to 64-13

SECTION 65

FANS FOR GENERAL VENTILATION

65-1

to 65-8

SECTION 66

REFUSE HANDLING PLANT INSTALLATION

66-1

to 66-8

SECTION 67

RESERVED

67-1

SECTION 68

RESERVED

67-1

SECTION 69

RESERVED

67-1

SECTION 70

LISTS OF APPENDICES

70-1

to 58-4

to 70-2

The contents on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into consideration
in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.

BLDG04/ind.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

SECTION 1 : GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS
Page
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.5
1.1.6
1.1.7
1.1.8
1.1.9
1.1.10
1.1.11
1.1.12
1.1.13
1.1.14
1.1.15
1.1.16
1.1.17
1.1.18
1.1.19
1.1.20
1.1.21
1.1.22
1.1.23
1.1.24
1.1.25
1.1.26
1.1.27
1.1.28
1.1.29
1.1.30
1.1.31
1.1.32
1.1.33
1.1.34
1.1.35
1.1.36
1.1.37
1.1.38
1.1.39
1.1.40
1.1.41
1.1.42
1.1.43
1.1.44
1.1.45
1.1.46
1.1.47
1.1.48
1.1.49
1.1.50
1.1.51

GENERAL
Definitions, Abbreviations And Interpretations
Reserved
Payment Of Employer's Bills Expenses, Etc
Contract Payment By GIRO/EPS
Diversion of Services
Stamp Duties
TOL Fee For Land Outside Contract Boundary
Liquidated Damages For Delay In Completion
Provisional Sum Items
Prime Cost Sums
Overclaim Leading To Overpayment
Carriage By Sea
Setting Out Of Building Reference Gridlines
Reserved
Work Method And Trade Demonstration
Reserved
Site Layout Plan
Site Offices And Canteens
Provision Of Equipment, Apparatus Devices, Etc
Provision Of Lunch
Provision Of Transport
Provision Of Temporary Site Facilities/Utilities
Protective Roof For Temporary Site Structures
Signboards
Site Management
Employment of Contractor's Site Personnel
Contractor's Work In Connection With Subsidiary Contracts
Cables/Services Detection
Reserved
Damage To Public/Private Property
General House Keeping
Reserved
Time Required For Contractor For Preparation Of Handing Over Inspection
Restriction On Use Of Project Information For Publicity, Etc
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Research Work
Earlier Completion Of MDF Rooms, Consumer Switch Rooms, Pump Rooms
And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms
Handing Over Of Completed Works And Certification Of Substantial Completion
Reserved
Management Of Defects Rectification
Reserved
Works Within Railway Protection Zone And Railway Safety Zone
Recovery Of Legal Costs For Court Proceedings
Novation, Assignment And Direct Submission Of Warranties And Agreements
Completion Of Site Works
Erection Of Temporary Buildings
Goods And Services Tax
Works And Materials Warranty
Cost Of Water And Electricity

1-1
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-9
1-12
1-12
1-12
1-14
1-15
1-15
1-15
1-20
1-20
1-20
1-20
1-21
1-21
1-21
1-21
1-22
1-22
1-22
1-22
1-22
1-23
1-24
1-24
1-26
1-26
1-26
1-26
1-27
1-27
1-27
1-28
1-28

The contents on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into consideration
in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.

BLDG04/ind.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

SECTION 1 : GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS
Page
1.1
1.1.52
1.1.53
1.1.54
1.1.55
1.1.56
1.1.57
1.1.58
1.1.59
1.1.60
1.1.61
1.1.62
1.1.63
1.1.64
1.1.65
1.1.66
1.1.67
1.1.68

GENERAL (CONT'D)
Site Control And Security
Assessment Of Extension Of Time Due To Exceptionally Inclement Weather
Shortfall In Floor Area
Trade Subcontractors
Insurance Policies
Contract Documents And Reference Material On Site
Reserved
Reserved
Lightning Protection To Temporary Structures And Metal Structures
Computer Hardware And Software
Electronic Submission To Superintending Officer
Assignment Of Copyright Of Photographs, Etc
Provision Of Keys Envelopes During Handover
Scheduling Of PE Submission
Reserved
Environmental Public Health Measures At Construction Sites
Material Samples Display Room

1-28
1-31
1-32
1-32
1-33
1-34
1-35
1-35
1-35
1-35
1-39
1-41
1-42
1-42
1-43
1-44
1-50

1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.2.10
1.2.11
1.2.12
1.2.13

MATERIALS
Metric Components
Materials And Workmanship
Credit Terms And Conditions For Employer's Materials
Reserved
Approval Of Samples And Trade Names
Sample Unit
PSB Quality Certificate
Storage Facility For Cement
Precautions Against Materials Being Taken Out Of Site
Ready-Mixed Concrete From Approved Suppliers
Water
Supply Of Concreting Materilas From The Employer
Material Price Protection

1-51
1-51
1-51
1-52
1-52
1-52
1-52
1-53
1-53
1-53
1-53
1-54
1-54

1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5

LABOUR
Labour Laws
Keeping Records Of Workmen
Employment Of Illegal Immigrants
Employment/Training Of Construction Brigade (CB) Men/Trainees
Allocation Of Man-Year Entitlements

1-56
1-56
1-56
1-56
1-57

1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5

CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
Provision Of Construction Equipment
Technical Specification
Recovery For Non-Provision
Maintenance
Approved Construction Equipment

1-58
1-58
1-59
1-60
1-62

1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3

SAFETY
Site Safety Measures
Safety Infringement
Reporting Of Accidents And Dangerous Occurrence

1-63
1-72
1-73

1.6

NUISANCE AND IRREGULARITIES

1-74

The contents on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into consideration
in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.

BLDG04/ind.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Bldg Spec
Page 1-1
SECTION 1
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1

GENERAL

1.1.1

Definitions, Abbreviations And Interpretations

In the Specifications, the following words and expressions shall have the meanings hereby assigned
to them except where the context otherwise requires :
"SO Rep"

shall mean the Superintending Officer's Representative.

"as approved"

shall mean as approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative.

"as directed"

shall mean as directed by the Superintending Officer's Representative.

"or other
approved"

shall mean as approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative and

as further defined in subclause 1.2.5 "Approval Of Samples And Trade
Names" of the General Specifications.

"as required" or
"as shown" or
"as indicated" or
"as specified"

shall mean as required or as shown or as indicated or as specified in the

Drawings and/or Specifications.

"Approved List"

shall mean the Housing & Development Board's List Of Approved Materials
And Suppliers.

The following abbreviations are used in the Specifications :

ABGSM
AC or ac
AISI
Amp or amp
AMCA
ANSI
AS
ASTM
BCA
BS
cm
cm or cm2

cm or cm3
CPF
CP
dB
DC or dc
DIN
DU or du
EIA
EMA
ENV
EPR
FSSD
GS or gs
g
HDB
HRC
HVAC
Hz
IDA
IEC
IECEE
IP
ISO
ITE
JIS
KA or kA
BLDG04/S1.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Association of British Generating Set Manufacturers

alternating current
American Iron & Steel Institute
Ampere
Air Movement and Control Association
American National Standard Institute
Australian Standard
American Society for Testing and Material
Building And Construction Authority
British Standard
centimetre
square centimetre
cubic centimetre
Central Provident Fund Board
Code of Practice
decibel
direct current
Deutche Industrie - Normen
dwelling units
Electronic Industry Association
Energy Market Authority
Ministry of the Environment
Ethylene Propylene Rubber
Fire Safety and Shelter Department
Galvanised Steel
gram
Housing & Development Board
High Rupturing Capacity
Heating Ventilation Air-Conditioning
Hertz
Info-Communications Development Authority of Singapore
International Electrotechnical Commission
IEC System for Conformity Testing and Certification of Electrical Equipment
Index of Protection
International Organization for Standardization
Institute of Technical Education
Japanese Industrial Standard
Kilo Ampere

Bldg Spec
Page 1-2
1.1.1

Definitions, Abbreviations And Interpretations (Cont'd)

kg
KN or kN
kPa or KPa
KV or kV
kW or KW
Kwh or kWh
LEW
MCB
MCCB
MSSL
MW
m
Max or max
Min or min
ml
mm
mV
m or m2
mm or mm2
m or m3
mm or mm3
MHz
MOM
MRT
MS or ms
N
No. or no.
Pa
ONORM
PBTS
PE

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

PLS
PowerGrid or Grid
PSB
PTL
PUB
PVC or pvc
RC or rc
RCCB
rms
SAC
SCV
SINGLAS
SMRT
SPSL
SS
SWA
SWG
SingTel
TIA
UHF
UL
Fm
uPVC or UPVC
FV
V
VHF
v/v
W
w/w

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
==
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

BLDG04/S1.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

kilogram
kilonewton
kilopascal
kilovolt
kilowatt
Kilowatt hour
Licensed Electrical Worker
Miniature Circuit Breaker
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
Market Support Services Licensee
Megawatt
metre
maximum
minimum
millilitre
millimetre
millivolt
square metre
square millimetre
cubic metre
cubic millimetre
Megahertz
Ministry of Manpower
Mass Rapid Transit
mild steel
newton
number
pascal
Osterreichisches Normangsinstitut (Austrian Standard)
Public Basic Telecommunications Service Operators
Professional Engineer registered under the Professional Engineers Board,
Singapore
Product Listing Scheme of PSB Corporation Ltd
PowerGrid Ltd
PSB Corporation Ltd
Public Telecommunication Licensees
Public Utilities Board
Polyvinylchloride
Reinforced Concrete
Residual Current Circuit Breaker
root mean square
Singapore Accreditation Council
StarHub Cable Vision Pte Ltd
Singapore Laboratory Accreditation Scheme
Singapore MRT Ltd
SP Services Ltd
Singapore Standard
Steel wire armoured
Standard Wire Gauge (British)
Singapore Telecommunications Ltd
Telecommunications Industry Association
Ultra High Frequency
Underwriters Laboratories Inc
micrometre
Unplasticised Polyvinylchloride
microvolt
Volt
Very High Frequency
measured by volume
watt
measured by weight

Bldg Spec
Page 1-3
1.1.1

Definitions, Abbreviations And Interpretations (Cont'd)

XLPE
C
%

or <
or >
<
>

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Cross linked polyethylene

degree Celsius
percent
plus or minus
less than or equal to
greater than or equal to
is less than
is greater than

Words importing the singular shall also include the plural and vice versa where the context requires.
The clause or subclause headings in the Specifications shall not be deemed to be part thereof or be
taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.
All clauses including all subclauses under them in the Specifications shall be deemed to be directed at
the Contractor unless expressly specified otherwise to the contrary and the Contractor shall perform
and/or comply with such instructions, directions, requirements and obligations specified in the
Specifications and required under the Contract.
All Acts of Parliament, statutes, regulations, bye-laws, orders, local and foreign standards and codes
of practice specified shall be deemed to refer to the latest and shall be deemed to include any
amendments, and/or modifications and/or additions and/or re-enactments thereto.
1.1.2

Reserved

1.1.3

Payment Of Employer's Bills, Expenses, Etc

The Contractor shall duly and punctually pay to the Employer the billed and any other expenses
incurred by the Employer in respect of the supply of materials, services, etc.
The Contractor shall also pay to the Employer interest at the rate of six point five percent per annum
(6.5% pa) or such other rate as may be determined from time to time by the Employer in respect of
any arrears of payment or other outstanding sums due and payable to the Employer, from the due
dates until payment in full is received by the Employer.
The Employer reserves the right to set off such bills and expenses against monies due or becoming
due to the Contractor before payment of the balance, if any, to the Contractor. In this respect, all
Employer's bills and other expenses due from the Contractor shall have priority over debts due to third
parties.

1.1.4

Contract Payment By GIRO/EPS

All payments under the Contract by the Employer to the Contractor shall be effected through the Interbank GIRO System and/or other Electronic Payment Systems.
The Contractor shall submit all the necessary forms, such as Inter-bank GIRO (IBG) form, etc., duly
completed and signed, to the Finance Department, HDB, HDB Hub, 480 Lorong 6 Toa Payoh,
Singapore 310480; within fourteen days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance to effect payments
through such Systems.
In the event the payment arrangement through such Systems terminates for whatever reasons, the
Contractor shall re-submit all the necessary forms to the Finance Department within 14 days from the
date of the termination.
The preceding requirements shall not be applicable to payments by the Employer to the Contractor in
approved foreign currencies, where required under the Contract. Under such a case, the provisions
under the clause "Tenders In Approved Foreign Currencies" including all subclauses under it shall
apply.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-4
1.1.5

Diversion of Services
Where in the case the SO Rep is of the opinion that it becomes essential to divert permanently any
sewer, drain, pipe, cable, or other services, the cost for the diversion shall be borne by the Employer.
Provided always that such diversion does not form part of the Works.

1.1.6

Stamp Duties
The Contractor shall have all documents required by or arising out of or in connection with this
Contract properly stamped to comply with the Stamp Duties Act. The cost and expense arising out of
this obligation, including all stamp duties required, shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be
deemed to have been allowed for in the Contract Sum.

1.1.7

TOL Fee For Land Outside Contract Boundary

Where the Contractor requires land outside the contract boundary for the setting up of Construction
Equipment and other temporary facilities for the Works, the Contractor shall check on the availability
of such land and apply to the relevant Authority or Lands Management Section of HDB for the use of
such land. In the event the relevant Authority or HDB's Lands Management Section allows the
Contractor the use of such land, the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense comply with all the
terms and conditions, pay all TOL (Temporary Occupation Licence) fees, bear all costs and expenses
for the use and maintenance of and access to the said land imposed by the relevant Authority or
HDB's Lands Management Section.
Such land allocated shall solely be used for the purpose of executing Works under the Contract only.
Any payment for unused materials or goods stored at such land shall be subject to the provisions in
Option Module B "Unused Materials or Goods not Delivered to Site" of the Conditions.

1.1.8

Liquidated Damages For Delay In Completion

In the event of re-arrangement of the completion of the Works into separate phases or sub-phases,
the rate of liquidated damages in respect of each phase or sub-phase of the Works shall be recomputed according to the following rates and pro-rated against the original amount specified in the
Appendix To Public Sector Standard Conditions Of Contract For Construction Works.
SA (35 m)
SA (45 m)
1-Room Flat
2-Room Flat
3-Room Flat
4-Room Flat
5-Room Flat
Executive Flat
Electrical Substation
Link Building/Linkway
Carpark Lot
Motorcycle Lot
Siteworks

20.00
25.00
20.00
25.00
30.00
40.00
45.00
50.00
4,500.00
200.00
5.00
1.50
40.00

Shop
Market
Food Court/Fast Food/
Coffee House/Restaurant/
Eating House
Kiosk
Office
Child Care Centre

)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

Civil Engineering Works

)
)
)
)

BLDG04/S1.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

$
per unit per day
per unit per day
per unit per day
per unit per day
per unit per day
per unit per day
per unit per day
per unit per day
per no. per day
per contract per day
per lot per day
per lot per day
per 1,000 m of total area within the
contract boundary per day

2.00 per m of internal floor area per day

500.00 per phase per day for Contract

Sum less than or equal to $2
million.
1,000.00 per phase per day for Contract Sum more
than $2 million.

Bldg Spec
Page 1-5
1.1.8

Liquidated Damages For Delay In Completion (Cont'd)

For the purpose of this subclause, the internal floor area shall be defined as the total floor area in the
commercial unit/child care centre including the floor area occupied by toilet, store, kitchen, staircase,
etc within the unit/centre. The internal floor area shall be measured as follows :
(a)

Partition Wall/Column
For partition wall/column, to measure up to the centre line of partition wall (party wall) which
separates 2 adjoining units.

(b)

External Wall And Party Wall Along Corridor

For external wall and party wall along the corridor, to measure up to the external face of the
wall surrounding the floor slab.

1.1.9

Provisional Sum Items

Where Provisional Sum Items are included in the Contract, they shall be inclusive of all costs
necessary in carrying out or supplying the work, materials or goods. These Provisional Sum Items
shall be inclusive of the Contractor's profit and overheads but shall be net of trade and cash
discounts.

1.1.10

Prime Cost Sums

Where Prime Cost Sums (hereinafter referred to as P.C. Sum for the purposes of this subclause) are
provided for any work, materials or goods, these sums shall be inclusive of carriage but exclusive of
Contractor's profit and attendance. These P.C. Sum shall also be net of trade and cash discounts.
The Contractor shall allow and separately price for profit and attendance in respect of such P.C. Sum
in the Form of Tender.
P.C. Sum shall be deducted from the Contract Sum and in lieu thereof shall be added the sums due to
the Contractor for the said work, materials or goods. The sum allowed by the Contractor in the
Contract for attendance in respect of any P.C. Sum shall be fixed regardless of whether the actual
sum expended is greater or lesser than the P.C. Sum. In respect of profit, the amount to be paid shall
be the percentage quoted by the Contractor against the actual sum expended in relation to the P.C.
Sum.
Should the work, materials or goods for which a P.C. Sum is provided in the Contract be not required,
or if the Employer chooses to carry out or supply the aforesaid work, materials or goods by his own
workmen or by other contractors, which the Employer is contractually entitled so to choose, then such
P.C. Sum together with the profit and attendance allowed by the Contractor in the Contract shall be
deducted in full from the Contract Sum.
Should the Contractor himself be engaged or instructed to carry out or supply any work, materials or
goods under a P.C. Sum, the profit and attendance allowed by the Contractor in the Contract in
respect of the P.C. Sum shall be deducted in full from the Contract Sum. In such event, the amount to
be paid to the Contractor for the work, materials or goods shall be inclusive of the Contractor's
overheads and profit for the work, materials and goods.

1.1.11

Overclaim Leading To Overpayment

If at any time during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are
imposed under the Contract, the Contractor is found to have over-claimed and was paid for more than
the value of the Permanent Works carried out and/or approved unfixed materials at the Site, the SO
Rep shall be empowered to deduct from the Contractor's subsequent payments the sum overpaid
together with the Employer's charge, and interest calculated at six point five percent per annum.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-6
1.1.12

Carriage By Sea
The Contractor shall ensure that the carriage by sea of all goods, materials, Plant and equipment
imported for the purposes of this Contract shall be on vessels owned and operated by shipping lines
which are approved lines at the time the contract of carriage is entered into. Other ships may be used
only if no approved line :
(a)

can deliver the goods, materials, Plant and equipment in time to meet the delivery dates
specified in the Contract; or

(b)

can provide the same measure of service at the same cost.

The Bills of Lading for the goods, materials or Plant and equipment used by an approved line(s) shall
be sufficient evidence of their carriage by an approved line(s) in compliance with this subclause.
Where the carrier is not an approved line, the Contractor shall satisfy the SO Rep that the conditions
herein stated have been satisfied. The SO Rep may require and the Contractor shall forthwith furnish
to the SO Rep a letter from at least one approved line at the time the contract of carriage with the
carrier is entered into stating that in respect of the shipment in issue they are either unable to quote or
to provide the service required.
Notwithstanding anything contained in this subclause, the Employer shall not be responsible for any
act or default of the carrier or for any loss or damage sustained by the Contractor on account of him
having to comply with this subclause.
The list of current approved lines can be obtained from the Procurement Office, Development And
Procurement Department, HDB, Basement 1, HDB Hub, 480 Lorong 6 Toa Payoh, Singapore 310480.
1.1.13

Setting Out Of Building Reference Gridlines

In the setting out of building reference gridlines for the purposes of erecting column and wall
formworks and for erecting masonry Works such as partition walls, the Contractor shall be required to
use a precision multi-directional laser marker. The laser marker shall be capable of beaming right
angle lines for up to 30m in range and has an accuracy of at least 3mm at 10m horizontal and
vertical distances. The laser marker should also be capable of performing such functions in both
indoor and outdoor usage.

1.1.14

Reserved

1.1.15

Work Method And Trade Demonstration

The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for his approval the work methods of various trades as
required by the SO Rep to ensure good in-process quality control and reasonably acceptable final
workmanship. A marking system, where applicable, showing inter alia, the control, grid and level
reference lines shall be included in the work methods.
The Contractor shall also ensure that sub-contractors engaged for each trade shall also comply with
the work methods approved by the SO Rep. As instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall
conduct trade demonstration for all critical work methods as approved prior to full scale production in
the contract.
Should it appear to the SO Rep at any time that the work methods proposed by the Contractor will not
ensure good workmanship in the Works, the SO Rep may require the Contractor to make at his own
cost and expense such modifications to the original work methods as the SO Rep may consider
necessary or appropriate.
The Contractor shall employ only skilled workers who are capable of executing the Works in
accordance with the work methods approved by the SO Rep. When there is a change in
subcontractors, the SO Rep may instruct the Contractor to re-conduct the relevant trade
demonstration if deem necessary.
Approval by the SO Rep of the Contractors work methods, revised work methods or any details and
information provided under this subclause shall not in any way relieve the Contractors liabilities or
obligations under the Contract.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-7
1.1.16

Reserved

1.1.17

Site Layout Plan

After the Contract is awarded, submit a site layout plan to the SO Rep indicating proposed locations of
all temporary structures (for example site offices, workers' quarters, canteens, stores, hoistways,
Construction Equipment and labour lines) for approval before their erection. Notwithstanding such
approval, the Contractor shall relocate any such structures at his own cost and expense when
required to do so by the SO Rep.
All such materials and structures shall be kept away from proposed roads, driveways, car parks and
services lines.
Should any hoistway or structure be erected without the approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall
pull down and re-erect the hoistway or structure in an approved position within seven days from the
date of instruction by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall provide for the maintenance of all such structures in a clean, hygienic and safe
condition for the duration of the Works.
All such structures and hoistways shall be removed on Substantial Completion of the Works.

1.1.18

Site Offices And Canteens

Within 21 days from the date of taking possession of the Site, the Contractor shall erect site offices
and canteens complying with the requirements of the ENV and shall remove them on Substantial
Completion of the Works. The Employer's Standard Drawings may be used as a guide in designing
the site offices and canteens. Submit proposals for the design, configuration and layout for the
approval of the SO Rep taking full consideration the site constraints and conditions. Locating the site
offices and canteens in the first storey void areas shall only be considered under special
circumstances and subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Should approval be given to set up the site
offices and canteens at the first storey void areas, ensure and make all provisions necessary to
protect the structures and finishes. When such void areas are required by the Employer for other
purposes, remove and re-erect the site offices and canteens at alternative locations all at the
Contractor's own cost and expense. No claim whatsoever shall be entertained in such event.
The following rooms shall have at least the minimum stipulated areas and complete with basic
facilities, fittings and furniture and made available at all times for use by the SO Rep and the
Employer's officers :

S/N

BLDG04/S1.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Facilities, Furnitures and

Fittings

No. of Items
SO Rep
Room
2

Clerk-of-Works
Room
2

Meeting
Room
2

Computer
Room
2

17 m

24 m

34 m

a) 1.5m x 0.8m office

table complete with at
least 3 drawers

b) 1.5m x 0.8m working

table complete with
storage space for
drawings

Maximum 2

1.

Room (Minimum size & able to

accommodate all facilities specified)

2.

Tables and Chairs :

8m

Bldg Spec
Page 1-8
1.1.18

Site Offices And Canteens (Contd)

Facilities, Furnitures and
Fittings

S/N
2.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

No. of Items
SO Rep
Room

Clerk-of-Works
Room

Meeting
Room

Computer
Room

Tables and Chairs

(Cont'd):
c)

0.8m wide side tables for

computer and its peripherals

d)

1.2m x 0.8m table

e)

Chairs with hand rests

f)

Chairs without hand

rests

15

g)

High Chairs without hand

rests (for working table)

Maximum 2

1.7m x 0.8m x 0.4m Steel Cabinet

complete with Shelves and
Double-Leaf Doors with lock

Maximum 3

2.4m x 1.2m Soft Board complete

with Accessories

2.4m x 1.2m White Board

complete with Accessories

0.5m x 0.5m x 0.15m key cabinet

New Air-Conditioner of Minimum

10,000 BTU Output

Telephone Installation
a) Separate telephone line

b) Telephone set equipped with

message recording function
or equivalent as approved by
IDA

c) Radio Display Pager

(Alpha-Numeric type)

Drawing Rack complete with

Drawing Holders

Maximum 2

10

Electrical Installation,
Connections and Accessories
(The illumination level in the
meeting room and the SO Rep
room shall be set at 300 to 400
lux)
a) 40W Fluorescent lighting

b) 13 Ampere socket outlet

c) 15 Ampere socket outlet

Bldg Spec
Page 1-9
1.1.18

Site Offices And Canteens (Contd)

The doors leading to the SO Rep room, the Clerk-of-Works room and the meeting room shall be
provided with locksets and all the keys to the locksets shall be given to the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall allow for the maintenance of the site offices and canteens and all the facilities,
furniture and fittings therein in a clean, habitable and good working condition to the satisfaction of the
SO Rep. The Contractor shall pay all charges for the provision and use of the telephone and electricity
at the site offices and canteens.
Should the Contractor fails to provide any of the aforementioned facilities, furniture and fittings after
the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the SO Rep shall forthwith purchase and provide
the same on the Contractor's behalf and all costs and expenses for such purchase and provision plus
charges shall be recovered by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor
or be recovered as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.

1.1.19

Provision Of Equipment, Apparatus, Devices, Etc

(A)

Facsimile Machine
The Contractor shall provide 1 number of plain paper (A4 size) facsimile machine at the site
office. Facsimile machine of the thermal paper type shall not be acceptable. Such machine
shall be kept in the Clerk-of-Works room throughout the Time for Completion and any time
period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The facsimile machine shall
be for the exclusive use by the SO Rep and/or Employer's officers only. The Contractor should
provide another facsimile machine for their own use.
The Contractor shall pay all charges, bear all costs and expenses and be responsible for the
continuous proper, good and efficient working conditions and maintenance of such facsimile
machine. Produce the maintenance agreement with the vendor to the SO Rep for checking
when requested. The maintenance agreement shall cover the whole duration of the Time for
Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.

(B)

Binoculars On Site
The Contractor shall provide a pair of binoculars on the Site at all times for the purpose of
checking external works by the SO Rep and/or Clerk-of-Works. The binoculars shall have a
minimum of 7 times magnification.

(C)

Digital Camera On Site

The Contractor shall provide a digital still camera on the Site throughout the Time for
Completion and any time periods where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract,
for the purpose of photographing site occurrences (within the Site) by the SO Rep. The digital
still camera shall have zooming functions and be capable of taking pictures at a digitized
resolution of at least 2.1 million pixels. The digital still camera shall have an expandable and
removable memory storage media with a minimum capacity of 8 Mbytes, and be provided with
all the necessary softwares and accessories for editing and transferred digital images from the
camera to the computer hardware. The Contractor shall bear all the costs and expenses
incurred arising from usage of the digital camera and shall be responsible for its continuous
and proper functioning.

(D)

Torch Lights
The Contractor shall provide sufficient number of torch lights on the Site at all times for use by
the SO Rep, Clerks-of-Works and/or representatives from other Authorities. These torch lights
shall be in good working condition and sufficiently bright enough for use.

(E)

Metal Detector
The Contractor shall provide a battery-operated portable metal detector for the purpose of
detecting metal reinforcement embedded in cement mortar joints of brickwalls. The detector
must have either a light or buzzer indicator to indicate the presence of metal.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-10
1.1.19

Provision Of Equipment, Apparatus, Devices, Etc (Cont'd)

(F)

Moisture Meter
The Contractor shall provide a portable, battery operated, digital LCD display moisture meter
with integral electrode pins for measuring moisture content of timber doors and frames
delivered to the Site. The moisture meter shall be capable of measuring actual moisture
content of wood in the range from 8% to 44% (minimum) with a 1% indicating tolerance at 0 to
40 degrees Celsius ambient temperature. The meter shall also possess a built-in device for
performing simple calibration checks.

(G)

Safety Helmets And Safety Boots

The Contractor shall provide safety helmets and safety boots for use by the SO Rep and
Clerks-of-Works at the Site as well as the Employer's officers visiting the Site throughout the
Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the
Contract. The ownership of the safety helmets and safety boots shall be reverted back to the
Contractor upon the satisfactory Substantial Completion of the Works.
The requirements are as follows :
(a)

Safety Helmets
(i)
(ii)
(iii)

(b)

white colour with HDB logo in front of helmet.

(Colour code for HDB logo : Pantone 485)
complete with canvas chin straps and sweat resisting lining.
comply with SS98:1987.

Safety Boots
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)

at least 24 cm in height
black/brown colour with steel toe cap
long-wearing
of great flexibility and resilience
slip proof, resistant to oil, acid and heat
nail proof
of excellent insulation
comfortable and light
comply with SS105:1987

The Contractor shall immediately replace those safety helmets and safety boots which the
SO Rep considers to be not in good working condition.
(H)

Stationery For Clerks-Of-Works

The Contractor shall provide stationery and other devices for site use by the Employer's
officers upon commencement of the Works. The list of stationery to be provided is as follows :
Item
No.
1.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Description

Quantity (Maximum)

Ball Point Pen (Black/Blue/Red)

2 no. each per Clerk of Works.

2.

Correction Fluid

1 no. per Clerk of Works

3.

Eraser (Pencil)

1 no. per Clerk of Works

4.

Exercise Book :
a) 60 pages
b) 120 pages

a)
b)

5.

Glue Tube

1 no. per Clerk of Works

6.

Hard Cover Book :

a) A4 size
b) A5 size

a)
b)

7.

Manila File

25 no.

5 each
5 each.

5 each.
5 each.

Bldg Spec
Page 1-11
1.1.19

Provision Of Equipment, Apparatus, Devices, Etc (Cont'd)

(H)

Stationery For Clerks-Of-Works (Contd)

Item
No.
8.

Description
Paper Clip :
a) Medium Size
b) Large Size

Quantity (Maximum)
a)
b)

2 boxes.
2 boxes.

9.

Pen Knife

2 no.

10.

Pencil (2B)

2 no. per Clerk of Works.

11.

Perforator

2 no.

12.

Pocket Notebook

1 no. per Clerk of Works.

13.

Ruler (300 mm)

1 no. per Clerk of Works

14.

Scissor

2 no.

15.

Stamp Pad (Violet)

1 no. per Clerk of Works.

16.

Staple Machine (B3)

1 no. per Clerk of Works.

17.

Staples (B3)

1 no. per Clerk of Works.

18.

Calculator (without scientific functions)

1 no.

19.

Colour Pencils

1 set

20.

Highlighter of Assorted Colours

1 set

21.

Scale Ruler

1 no.

22.

Writing Pad (A4)

1 no. per Clerk of Works.

23.

Hard Cover Ring File

40 no. plus 3 no. per building block

24.

Ear Plugs

1 no. per Clerk of Works

25.

Measuring Tape

1 no. per Clerk of Works

26

Rubber Stamp

Max. 5 nos per contract

27.

Retractable tapping rod

1 no. per Clerk of Works

28.

3.5 inch diskettes (1.44MB)

2 boxes of 10 formatted diskettes

per contract

29.

Measuring Tape of minimum 5 metre

Length

1 no. per Clerk of Works

30.

Laser Pointer

1 no. per Clerk of Works

31

CD Re-write able discs

1 box of 10 CDRW discs

Should the Contractor fails to provide any of the aforementioned stationery after the
commencement date of the Time for Completion, the SO Rep shall forthwith purchase and
provide the same on the Contractor's behalf and all costs and expenses for such purchase and
provision plus charges shall be recovered by the Employer from any monies due or becoming
due to the Contractor or be recovered as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.
(I)

Photo Copying Machine

Provide 1 number of plain paper photocopying machine at the site office with the following
specifications :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

BLDG04/S1.DOC(11)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

minimum 50 ppm in black and white;

+
Support paper up to 160gsm and A3 ;
Auto paper selections;
Auto response sensor

Bldg Spec
Page 1-12
1.1.19

Provision Of Equipment, Apparatus, Devices, Etc (Cont'd)

(I)

Photo Copying Machine (Contd)

The photocopying machine shall be kept in the Clerk-of-Works room throughout the Time for
Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.
The photo copying machine shall be for the exclusive use by the SO Rep and/or Employers
officers only. The Contractor should provide another photo copying machine for their own use.
The Contractor shall pay all charges, bear all costs and expenses and be responsible for the
maintenance of such photocopying machine. Produce the maintenance agreement with the
vendor to the SO Rep for checking when requested. The maintenance agreement shall cover
the whole duration of the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages
are imposed under the Contract.

1.1.20

Provision Of Lunch
The Contractor shall provide lunch costing not more than $4.50 per meal per person for all the
Employer's Clerk-of-Works to be taken at the site canteen/office.
Should any Clerk-of Works forego lunch at the Contractor's site canteen/office on his own accord, the
Contractor shall not pay the equivalent in cash to the Clerk-of Works.
The Contractor shall not provide lunch to the Clerk-of-Works in any other eating places such as
restaurants, coffee shops, hawkers centres, etc, other than at the site canteen/office.

1.1.21

Provision Of Transport
The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense provide suitable transport throughout the Time for
Completion and any time periods where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, for the
SO Rep and other Employer's officers, from the nearest bus stop or MRT station or site or public
carpark near to the Site, to the Site, including the return journey, for the discharge of their official
duties. Such pick up point shall be decided by the SO Rep. The vehicle shall be driven by the
Contractor's own personnel.

1.1.22

Provision Of Temporary Site Facilities/Utilities

1.1.22.1

Access Roads And Protective Crossings

The Contractor shall repair and maintain all access roads serving the Site and provide temporary
protective crossings over existing drains, channels, footways, etc throughout the Time for Completion
and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The Contractor shall
be responsible for making good all damage and/or clearing away on Substantial Completion to the
requirements of the relevant Authorities and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

1.1.22.2

Reserved

1.1.22.3

Temporary Electricity Supply And Installation

The Contractor shall engage a Licensed Electrical Worker (LEW) of at least an Electrical Technician
Grade to design all temporary electrical installations necessary for building operations and works of
engineering construction. The installations shall comply fully to the requirements as stated in the latest
edition of Singapore Standard CP 88:2001 applicable at the date of closing of the Tender. Throughout
the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the
Contract, the Contractors LEW shall ensure good safety standards and practices and including the
following :
(a)

BLDG04/S1.DOC(12)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

For re-development sites, the Contractor is strongly encouraged to use M/s PowerGrid Ltds
power supply to provide temporary electricity supply during the construction stage. For new
town development sites, all electrical generator sets shall be licensed with valid PUB licence. A
minimum capacity of 75kVA generator shall be used at each block. However when the
generator is used for the passenger cum material hoist and other general purposes, the
minimum capacity of the generator for each block shall be upgraded to 100 kVA.

Bldg Spec
Page 1-13
1.1.22

Provision Of Temporary Site Facilities/Utilities (Contd)

1.1.22.3

Temporary Electricity Supply And Installation (Contd)

(b)

The electrical switch board which holds the ELCB shall be housed in a switch box located at
least 1.5 m from the floor level.

(c)

Socket-outlet assembly complete with miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) and residual current
operated circuit breakers (RCCBs) is to be provided at each storey of the building block. The
precast refuse chute shall serve as a temporary service riser. The installation shall last the
entire Time for Completion unless authorized to be removed earlier by the SO Rep or when
permanent electricity supply is secured (whichever is earlier). The temporary incoming supply
cable located within the precast refuse chute shall be supported with insulated lock bands.
Upon termination of the temporary electricity supply, all cables and lock bands installed in the
precast refuse chute shall be removed and the surface of the precast refuse chute shall be
made good to a smooth finish.

(d)

All sheaths of cables, sockets outlets and plugs are in good working condition.

(e)

All cables are properly bound and do not cause obstruction to passageways, walkways and
stairs.

(f)

All cables are properly supported with L-shaped galvanised steel brackets or insulated lock
bands and placed at a suitable height, away from any source which cause mechanical
damage.

(g)

All plugs, socket-outlets, socket-outlet assembly (SOA), cable couplers and plug adaptors are
to be of the standard industrial type and of minimum classification of CP 88:2001.

(h)

The supply to provide artificial lighting shall be taken from the socket-outlet assembly located at
each storey. 4 feet fluorescent lighting enclosed in suitable mechanical enclosure to a minimum
classification of IP 44 shall be used to provide lighting or to achieve a minimum lighting level of
400 lux.

(i)

The Contractor shall provide sufficient temporary lighting, according to the instruction of the SO
Rep, for their workers/sub-contractors to carry out in-process construction works such as
internal plastering/skimming, wall and floor tiling, application of water-proofing membrane etc.,
within the units or common areas of the building under construction.

1.1.22.4

Reserved

1.1.22.5

Temporary Store Room For Lift Parts

The Contractor shall provide a temporary storage space with a floor area of at least 50 m2 and
another temporary store room properly secured and complete with door and latch and with a floor
2
area of at least 15 m at the ground floor of each building block where lifts are to be installed. The
temporary storage space/temporary store room shall be used solely by the lift contractor for keeping
lift parts during the lift installation period which shall commence from the date of handing over of the
lift hoistway and lift motor room to the lift contractor.
If the abovementioned temporary storage space/temporary store room need to be removed to allow
the Contractor and/or other contractors to proceed with their work, the Contractor shall at its own cost
and expense first provide an alternative storage space/store room and arrange with the lift contractor
to vacate the original temporary storage space/temporary store room and transfer such lift parts to the
alternative storage space/store room. The location and type of temporary storage space/temporary
store room shall be approved by the SO Rep.

1.1.22.6

Temporary Use Of Lift

For each building block in the Works designed with lift facilities, the Contractor shall secure for the
temporary use of one lift upon completion of lift testing and commissioning by the lift contractor
engaged by the Employer. The Contractor shall execute an agreement with the lift contractor for the
temporary usage of the lift for a period of 1 month or longer prior to the Substantial Completion of
each respective building block. The SO Rep shall facilitate and witness the signing of the agreement.
All costs and expenses incurred in complying with the provisions of this clause shall be deemed to be
included in the Contract Sum.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(13)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-14
1.1.22

Provision Of Temporary Site Facilities/Utilities (Cont'd)

1.1.22.6

Temporary Use Of Lift (Cont'd)

The temporary use of the lift shall be subjected to the terms and conditions stipulated hereunder.
Such terms and conditions shall be incorporated into the agreement to be executed between the
Contractor and the lift contractor. The terms and conditions shall be as follows :

1.1.23

(a)

The Contractor shall seek the approval of the SO Rep for the use of the lifts.

(b)

The Contractor shall arrange for a designated person to certify that the lifts are for temporary
use and seek approval from MOM before it can be used. Alternatively the lift contractor can
arrange for the inspection on behalf of the Contractor at a cost of $680.00 per lift.

(c)

The Contractor shall provide proper protection such as plywood, adhesive tapes, etc. to the lift
cages, floors, car doors, architraves, transoms and landing doors, etc. The Contractor shall
ensure that the protection for the lifts is always in a proper condition. Any physical damage to
the lifts shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

(d)

The Contractor shall engage a full-time lift attendant to operate each lift. Under no
circumstance shall a lift be left unattended when it is in operation.

(e)

The Contractor shall ensure that the lifts are not over loaded.

(f)

The Contractor shall take up additional insurance for the use of the lifts as temporary use lifts
and Public Liability coverage, naming the Employer and the lift contractor as the co-insured, for
the period of usage. Copies of the insurance policies shall be given to both the SO Rep and the
lift contractor before the lifts are allowed to be used. Alternately, the Contractor may pay the lift
contractor for taking up the insurance and public liability coverage on its behalf.

(g)

The Contractor shall be responsible for the daily maintenance of the lifts, such as cleaning up
the cages and sills in order to prevent unnecessary breakdown and damage to the lifts.

(h)

The lift contractor shall service the lifts once a month during normal working hours. In case of a
need for emergency service, the Contractor shall contact the lift contractor direct. The
Contractor shall pay the lift contractor a monthly maintenance fee of $630.00 per lift or prorated accordingly. The lift contractor may stop the use of the lifts if the maintenance fee is not
paid up.

(i)

Smoking is strictly prohibited in the lifts.

(j)

At least three days prior to handing over each building block to the Employer, a joint inspection
shall be conducted between the Contractor and the lift contractor for the purpose of handing
the lift back to the lift contractor. Any damage that occur during or as a result of or arising from
the temporary usage of the lift which affect the handing over of the lift to the Employer shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor. All costs and expense for rectification and repair shall be
borne by the Contractor, subject to verification by the SO Rep.

Protective Roof For Temporary Site Structures

In addition to the requirements specified in subclause 1.1.18 (or as amended) "Site Offices and
Canteens", subclause 1.1.52.3 (or as amended) "Prefabricated Workers' Quarters", and other clauses
and subclauses on temporary structures as specified, additional protective materials for the roof shall
be incorporated into the roof design of these temporary structures. The protective material shall be
made of 18mm thick timber ply. For site office and workers' quarters, the timber ply shall be laid in
dual double layers; with one double layer laid just beneath the metal roofing sheet and another double
layer at the bottom of the steel truss system supporting the metal roofing sheet. For all other
temporary structures, such as canteens, toilets, carpenter yards, etc, the protective timber roof shall
be laid in single double layer beneath the roofing sheet. However, at the sole discretion of the SO
Rep, such protective materials may not be necessary if the temporary structures are deemed far
beyond the nearest building block under construction. Under such cases, there shall be no adjustment
to the Contract Sum. The Contractor's PE shall consult with the SO Rep on these protective roofs
before proceeding with the design of the temporary structures.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(14)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-15
1.1.24

Signboards
Where erection of signboards with more than one language is required, all translations shall be
carried out by competent translators approved by the SO Rep. All completed signboards shall be
approved by the SO Rep before they are erected. The Contractor shall bear all cost and expense
arising.

1.1.25

Site Management
Within 14 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep
for his approval the following details on site planning :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)

Site organizational structure;

Names, roles and responsibilities of Contractor's site management, technical and
supervisory staff;
Names, roles and responsibilities of trade sub-contractors;
Manpower schedule for each trade;
Names of manufacturers and suppliers;
Schedule of heavy equipment and machineries;
Master Construction Programme for each building blocks and entire project;
Measurement Plan and Survey method;
Safety Management system;

Furnish the SO Rep with such further details and information as the SO Rep may require in regard to
the above items.
Should it appear to the SO Rep at any time that the site planning proposed by the Contractor is not
able to ensure a smooth progress and of good workmanship in the Works, the SO Rep is empowered
to require the Contractor to make, at the Contractors own cost and expense, all necessary
modifications to the plans.
Approval by the SO Rep of the Contractor's site planning details, revised site planning details and
further information provided under this subclause shall not in anyway affect, vary or relieve the
Contractor's liabilities or obligations under the Contract.
1.1.26

Employment Of Contractors Site Personnel

The Contractor shall employ all the site personnel and station them full-time on the Site throughout the
Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract
all as specified below :
Number of Each Type of Personnel to be Employed
Based On Contract Sum Value

Fully Agreed &

Accepted Rate by
the Contractor & the
Employer For the
Cost & Expense
Deemed to be
Allowed by the
Contractor for the
Employment of Each
Personnel

Not
Exceeding
$10 Million

Exceeding
$10 Million
But Not
Exceeding
$25 Million

Exceeding
$25 Million
But Not
Exceeding
$50 Million

Exceeding
$50 Million
But Not
Exceeding
$75 Million

Exceeding
$75 Million
But Not
Exceeding
$100 Million

Exceeding
$100 Million

Project
Manager

One

One

Nil

One

One

One

$8,600 per
Project Manager
per month

Senior
Project
Manager

Nil

Nil

One

One

One

One

$10,000 per
Senior Project
Manager per month

S/N

Type of
Personnel

1a

1b

BLDG04/S1.DOC(15)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-16
1.1.26

Employment Of Contractors Site Personnel (Cont'd)

Number of Each Type of Personnel to be Employed
Based On Contract Sum Value

Type of
Personnel

S/N

Not
Exceeding
$10 Million

Exceeding
$10 Million
But Not
Exceeding
$25 Million

Exceeding
$25 Million
But Not
Exceeding
$50 Million

Exceeding
$50 Million
But Not
Exceeding
$75 Million

Exceeding
$75 Million
But Not
Exceeding
$100
Million

Exceeding
$100
Million

Fully Agreed &

Accepted Rate by
the Contractor &
the Employer For
the Cost &
Expense Deemed
to be Allowed by
the Contractor for
the Employment of
Each Personnel

Registered
Safety
Officer

Nil

One

One

One

One

One

$4,800 per
Registered Safety
Officer per month

Safety
Supervisor

One

One

Two

Two

Three

Three

$4,000 per
Safety Supervisor
per month

4a

Site
Supervisor
for
Architectural
& Structural
Works

One

Two

Three

Three

Four

Four

$4,000 per
Site Supervisor
per month

4b

Site
Supervisor
for
Mechanical
& Electrical
Works

One

One

One

One

One

One

$4,000 per
Site Supervisor
per month

Horticultural
Supervisor

One

One

One

One

One

One

$2,000 per
Horticultural
Supervisor
per Month

Health
Supervisor

One

One

One

Two

Two

Two

$2,000 per
Health Supervisor
per Month

Security
Guard

One

One

One

One

One

One

$2,000 per
Security Guard
per month

1.1.26.1

Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities Of Site Personnel

(a)

Senior Project Manager/Project Manager

The Contractor's Senior Project Manager/Project Manager shall be qualified, competent and
possess the skill, knowledge and ability to manage and co-ordinate the project effectively. The
Senior Project Manager/Project Manager shall be the Contractor's Representative as required
under the Contract.
The Senior Project Manager/Project Manager shall possess the following minimum academic
qualifications and experiences :

BLDG04/S1.DOC(16)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

(i)

For the appointment of Senior Project Manager, the candidate shall have a recognised
Degree in Architecture, Civil/Structural Engineering, Building Science/Quantity
Surveying and with 10 years of post-graduate working experience of which 5 years is
construction related project management in the building construction industry. A
member of the Society of Project Managers, Singapore is preferred;

(ii)

For the appointment of Project Manager, the candidate shall have a recognised Degree
in Architecture, Civil/Structural Engineering, Building Science/Quantity Surveying with 8
years of relevant post-graduate working experience in the building construction industry.
A member of the Society of Project Managers, Singapore is preferred.

Bldg Spec
Page 1-17
1.1.26

Employment Of Contractors Site Personnel (Cont'd)

1.1.26.1

Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities Of Site Personnel (Contd)

(b)

Safety Supervisor/Registered Safety Officer

The Contractor's Safety Supervisors shall possess recognised and approved certification in
construction safety to take charge of all matters related to safety. The said Safety Supervisors
shall spend their time fully performing the following :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

To supervise safety and promote safety conduct;

To inspect and rectify any unsafe place of work;
To correct any unsafe practice; and
To ensure that the provisions of the Factories Act and its Subsidiary Legislation
made thereunder are complied with.

The Contractor shall employ a full-time registered safety officer to comply with the
requirements under the Factory Act, Factories (Registration and Duties of Safety Officers)
regulations. The registered safety officer shall implement appropriate safety measures and
ensure a safe work environment and safe work procedures in accordance with the Factories
Act and Subsidiary Legislation including the provisions of the Factories (Building Operation
and Works of engineering Construction) Regulations and the requirements specified under the
Contract.
(c)

Site Supervisors
The Contractor's Site Supervisors shall be qualified and competent and possess the relevant
skills, knowledge and the ability to supervise and co-ordinate the Works; and with the following
academic qualifications and experience :
(i)

Possess a National Certificate in Construction Supervision (NCCS) and at least 5 years

of similar capacity relevant working experience in the building construction industry; or

(ii)

Possess a recognised Diploma in Civil/Structural/ Mechanical/Electrical Engineering,

Building Science, Building Management, Building Services Engineering and at least 3
years of relevant working experience in the building construction industry; or

(iii)

Possess a Degree (foreign university) in Civil/Structural/ Mechanical/Electrical

Engineering and at least 2 years of relevant working experience in the local building
construction industry.

Notwithstanding the requirements as specified in (i) to (iii) (inclusive) above, where the
Contractor is required to employ the Site Supervisor for mechanical/electrical Works, the Site
Supervisor must be suitably qualified under the mechanical/electrical engineering academic
qualifications and with the relevant work experiences.
(d)

Horticultural Supervisor
The Horticultural Supervisor shall be competent and possesses the skill, knowledge and ability
to coordinate and supervise all tree planting and landscaping works. The qualified Horticultural
Supervisor shall possess the minimum Certificate of Ornamental Horticulture with a minimum
of 3 years relevant experience. The appointment of Horticultural Supervisor has to be
submitted to SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of any tree planting or
landscaping works. The date of appointment shall take effect from the date of SO Rep
approval and shall be in full-time site-based employment by the building contractor when the
physical trees planting or/and landscaping work is progressing on site till Substantial
Completion of the Works.

(e)

Health Supervisors
(i)

BLDG04/S1.DOC(17)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

The Contractor's Health Supervisor shall have a certificate in "Vector Control Course for
Construction Site Supervisors" issued by ENV or equivalent and competent to take
charge of all matters related to environmental health on the Site. The Health Supervisor
shall have at least one year's previous experience in a similar capacity and be able to
converse in either English or Mandarin.

Bldg Spec
Page 1-18
1.1.26

Employment Of Contractors Site Personnel (Cont'd)

1.1.26.1

Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities Of Site Personnel (Contd)

(e)

(g)

1.1.26.2

Health Supervisors (Cont'd)

(ii)

The Health Supervisor shall conduct regular site checks and take prompt enforcement
or corrective actions to ensure that the workers' quarters, canteens, toilets, site offices
and other facilities and general surroundings of the Site are kept clean, tidy and
hygienic at all times. In addition, the Health Supervisor shall also ensure that the Site is
kept mosquito-free at all times.

(iii)

The Health Supervisor shall put on a suitable uniform issued by the Contractor. The
uniform shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.

Security Guards
(i)

The Contractor shall employ Security Guards from agencies that are certified/accredited
to the Association of Certified Security Agencies (ACSA) or the Security Association
Singapore (SAS). A listing of these certified/accredited security agencies may be
obtained from the Licensing Division of the Singapore Police Force. The Contractor
shall inform the SO Rep in writing on the security agency who supplied the Security
Guards, within two weeks from the commencement date of the Time for Completion.

(ii)

All Security Guards must be above the age of 18 years and below the age of 60 years
old. They shall at all times be in proper uniform of their security agency with their names
and identification tags on. Essential security enforcement equipment such as whistle,
torchlight, walkie talkie etc shall be provided to them. They shall respond within five to
ten minutes whenever they are called either through telephone or walkie talkie. They
shall also have the necessary access to the telephone at the Contractor's site office
during and after normal working hours for emergency reporting purpose. The Security
Guards must not be armed with weapons that are disallowed by the Singapore Police
Force.

(iii)

A proper guard post with adequate security lighting and communication facilities shall
be erected at every major entrance to the Site. All temporary gates/openings along the
fencing/hoarding shall be guarded by a Security Guard during normal working hours
and locked up after normal working hours.

(iv)

The Security Guards shall be responsible for the general security of the Site and shall
ensure that unauthorized personnel and vehicles do not entered the Site. They shall
also responsible for the security of the contractor and HDB's site offices during and after
normal working hours.

(v)

The Security Guards shall be employed to perform site security duties on a 24 hour
basis. A minimum of one (1) Security Guard shall be on duty at any one shift including
Sundays and public holidays throughout the Time for Completion and any time period
where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. No Security Guard shall
leave the Site until he is properly relieved by a replacement, even if his shift has ended.

(vi)

A proper record of the Security Guards' attendance must be kept and made available to
the SO Rep upon request.

Replacement Of Site Personnel

The SO Rep shall be empowered to instruct the Contractor for a replacement at the Contractor's own
costs and expenses if any of the site personnel is found not carrying his duties to the satisfaction of
the SO Rep.

1.1.26.3

Compliance With Requirements And Submission

Of Information Of Site Personnel
(a)

BLDG04/S1.DOC(18)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep within 21 days from the date of the Letter of
Acceptance, the name, identity card numbers and documentary evidence of the educational
qualifications and experience of all the site personnel employed by the Contractor. The
employment of the site personnel shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.

Bldg Spec
Page 1-19
1.1.26

Employment Of Contractors Site Personnel (Cont'd)

1.1.26.3

Compliance With Requirements And Submission

Of Information Of Site Personnel
(b)

1.1.26.4

1.1.26.5

In addition, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements and keep records and submit
these information to the SO Rep where required by him as specified below :
(i)

Except for the security guards and safety supervisors, all the site personnel employed
shall be on the Contractor's monthly payroll. The Contractor shall keep records
indicating the number of days the site personnel are employed for each month and the
monthly contributions to CPF. Such information may be proof of employment of the site
personnel.

(ii)

A letter from every site personnel employed by the Contractor to testify that he is
employed full-time for this Site only;

(iii)

Further to (ii) above, if any site personnel is found to be working in more than one
running site, the particular site personnel will be barred from working in all the
Employer's sites for a period of two years from the date of the breach. It shall be the
Contractor's duty to bring to the attention of the site personnel the contents of this
clause.

Inclusion Of Cost And Failure To Employ The Site Personnel

(a)

The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and
expenses to be incurred by him for compliance with the requirements stipulated in this clause.

(b)

In the event of the Contractor not employing the number of site personnel, required by the
Contract or not employing such site personnel for the period or periods required by the
Contract, without prejudice to the Employer's rights under the Contract, the Contractor shall be
indebted to the Employer at the rate or rates as specified for each of the respective site
personnel per month and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any
monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt due
from the Contractor. These rate or rates shall be deemed to have been fully agreed and
accepted by the Contractor and the Employer as the costs and expenses allowed by the
Contractor for the employment of each of the respective site personnel for each month. For
the purpose of this clause, each of the site personnel shall be employed by the Contractor for
at least 20 days within a calendar month before he can be considered as being employed for
that particular month under the Contract. In the event that the first and/or the last calendar
month of the Time for Completion or any time period where liquidated damages are imposed
under the Contract, have less than 20 days, each of the site personnel shall be employed for
the full number of days in the said first and last calendar month of the Time for Completion or
any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.

(c)

Notwithstanding other provisions in this clause, if the Contractor incurs additional costs and
expenses over and above the agreed rates specified herein in complying with the requirements
stipulated in this clause, the Contractor alone shall bear such additional costs and expenses in
full.

Application For Release Of Site Personnel

The SO Rep may consider a request by the Contractor in writing to release any of his site personnel
from the obligations of this clause if the Works has been certified more than 95% complete. Also if
the Contractor has employed more than one resident engineer in compliance with the requirements
under this clause, the SO Rep may consider the Contractor's request to release the other resident
engineers so that only one resident engineer is stationed at the Site, upon satisfactory completion of
the reinforced concrete work for the water tank and/or lift motor room of the last building block under
the Contract. It shall be up to the absolute discretion of the SO Rep to decide whether the
Contractor's site personnel can be released and the number of site personnel to be released as
provided for under this clause. A written approval from the SO Rep shall be obtained in this respect.

1.1.26.6

Superintending Officer's Decision

All differences and/or disputes arising under this clause including all subclauses under it (including
questions relating to interpretation) shall be determined by the Superintending Officer whose decision
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor

BLDG04/S1.DOC(19)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-20
1.1.27

Contractor's Work in Connection with Subsidiary Contracts

For completed service roads, driveways and drains within the Site contract boundary, the Contractor
is obliged to maintain washing and cleaning; and making good any damage arising from their own
actions to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense. If the Contractor
fails to carry out his obligations as aforesaid, the SO Rep may exercise his right under Clause 1.6
"Nuisance and Irregularities' to impose a charge against the Contractor. Alternatively, the SO Rep
may engage other parties to execute the outstanding works and all costs and expenses incurred shall
be borne by the Contractor.
For lift installation works, after taking over of the lift door jambs from the lift contractor, the Contractor
has to schedule and complete all the brickworks (beside the lift door jambs) at all lift walls in a building
block within the stipulated time period as specified below :
Number of storeys

Maximum Period for Building Works

(ie. Brickwork) per building block

Less than or equal to 30 storeys

2.0 weeks

Equal to or higher than 31 storeys

2.6 weeks

The Contractor may use the lifts temporarily for their material hoisting and other works associated with
the preparation for handing over subject to the terms and conditions in his agreement with the
relevant lift contractor.
The Contractor shall be liable for any delay of the building completion arising from the late completion
of the brickwall at the lift lobbies to enable the lift contractor in carrying out the lift assembly works
within the lift shaft at each building block.
1.1.28

Cables/Services Detection
The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited and examined the Site carefully and have ascertained
its nature and made provision in the Contract Sum or prices for the type of ground conditions,
constraints and underground services.
The Contractor shall provide cables/services detecting devices to locate all existing cables/services
prior to the commencement of excavation or any other work such as driving of piles, piling of earth
electrode and lightning conductors or poles and columns which are liable to damage existing buried
services. The Contractor shall engage PUB licensed cables/services detection workers to carry out
all cables/services detection work. The proposed line of excavation or area of other work shall be
checked for existing services in a systematic manner by making sufficient passes in a grid formation
to cover the entire area of work.
The extent of checking carried out shall be properly documented and countersigned by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall be liable for all costs and charges incurred if he damages any services.
The Contractor shall seek assistance from the relevant Government Department or Statutory Board if
he has any query on the location of existing cables/services belonging to the Government Department
or Statutory Board. In the case of PowerGrid or SPSL cables/services, the Contractor may seek
assistance from the Cable Damage Prevention Unit, PowerGrid or SPSL.
In addition, the Contractor shall engage the services of PUB Registered Excavator Operator only for
all excavation Works. In the event the Contractor fails to employ PUB Registered Excavator
Operator, no excavation Works shall be allowed.

1.1.29

Reserved

1.1.30

Damage To Public/Private Property

In the event damage is caused to public/private services or property such as cables, pipes, fittings
and fixtures etc. by the Contractor whether by accident or otherwise leading to black-outs or other
nuisance or inconvenience to the public or is likely to bring the Employer into disrepute, all costs and
expenses incurred for necessary reinstatement or repairs including charges shall be recoverable by
the Employer from the Contractor by deduction from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or
as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(20)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-21
1.1.31

General Housekeeping
(a)

Periodic Cleaning Up
All rubbish and debris shall be cleared from the Site and buildings under construction at least
weekly or from time to time as they accumulate or when so directed by the SO Rep. Particular
attention shall be directed to those areas where other tradesmen or contractors will be working
in.
Housekeeping shall be carried out in such manner and at such times so as not to cause any
inconvenience to either the adjoining owners, occupiers and the public. Debris shall be wet to
minimize the risk of dust pollution

(b)

Provision Of Bins & Skip Containers For Waste And Debris

During the course of construction, the Contractor shall provide proper bulk bins of adequate
size for the proper storage of construction wastes, chemical wastes and debris in compliance
with the relevant legislative requirements or regulations imposed by ENV.
Upon handing over of 1st building block, the Contractor shall provide one no. of skip container
per building block for disposal of construction wastes and debris. This skip container shall be
placed at the temporary lorry lot as provided for in the Contract. All skip containers shall be
removed at the completion of the site works or upon the instruction of the SO Rep.

(c)

Dumping Of Debris And Rubbish

The Contractor shall dispose of all unwanted debris, rubble or excess earth at ENV approved
dumping grounds/sites. All charges levied for the use of the dumping grounds/sites shall be
borne by the Contractor.
If the Contractor indiscriminately dumps construction debris, rubble or excess earth on land
owned by the Employer or the Government without written permission, he shall remove all such
debris, rubble, or excess earth from such land at his own cost and expense. Further to this, SO
Rep may exercise his contractual right and impose an administrative charge for the
irregularities committed in accordance with Clause 1.6 Nuisance And Irregularities.

1.1.32

Reserved

1.1.33

Time Required For Contractor For Preparation Of Handing Over Inspection

The Contractor shall complete the Works or any phase or sub-phase thereof as set out in the Letter of
Acceptance in accordance to the Time for Completion or any subsequent extensions of time approved
by the Superintending Officer.
All completed Works or any phase or sub-phase thereof shall be handed over to the Employer within
or by the Time for Completion or any subsequent extensions of time approved by the Superintending
Officer, prior to the issue of any Certificate of Substantial Completion.
The Contractor shall note that the Time for Completion has been computed to include the time
allowed for preparation of handing over inspections. Therefore, the duration required for the
preparation of and the handing over inspections shall be incorporated into the Programme for the
Works or revised Programme, if any, to be submitted to the SO Rep for approval, as required under
the Contract.

1.1.34

Restriction On Use Of Project Information For Publicity, Etc

The Contractor shall ensure that he or his subcontractors/suppliers do not quote or make reference to
the project design, products, technologies or methods of construction used in the Works for trade
promotion, advertisement, publicity, etc or for any other purposes without the written approval of the
SO Rep. This requirement shall not be applicable to proprietory products, technologies or methods of
construction introduced by the Contractor or his subcontractors/suppliers.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(21)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-22
1.1.35

Reserved

1.1.36

Reserved

1.1.37

Reserved

1.1.38

Research Work
The Contractor shall provide and render all necessary assistance to the SO Rep or other authorised
persons conducting research work or procuring publicity materials on any aspects of the construction
Works in progress. When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall also provide all brochures,
quotations, sub-contract agreements, invoices, etc from his subcontractors, suppliers and specialists
for goods and services provided for the Works, all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

1.1.39

Earlier Completion Of MDF Rooms, Consumer Switch Rooms,

Pump Rooms And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms
(A)

Programme Requirement For Completion Of MDF Rooms, Consumer

Switch Rooms, Pump Rooms And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms
The Contractor is required in the programme for the Works to be submitted under the Contract
and any revised programme to show completion of the following items of works to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep within the time periods specified below :
Item of Works
a)

Pump Rooms

Specified Time Period

a)

3 calendar
months

b)

Consumer Switch
Rooms and MDF
Rooms

b)

5 calendar
months

c)

Lift Wells
including
Machine Rooms

c)

As specified
in the table
marked ##
hereunder

##
Storey Height
of Building
Block

)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

In each case prior to the expiry of the Time for

Completion, or where there are sections, phases
or sub-phases, prior to the expiry of the Time
for Completion as specified in the Letter of
Acceptance for the respective sections, phases
or sub-phases containing the item(s) of works;
or by any subsequent extension of time certified
by the Superintending Officer for the completion
of the Works or such sections, phases or sub-phases.

Specified Time Period for Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms

(In each case prior to the expiry of the Time for Completion, or where there
are sections, phases or sub-phases, prior to the expiry of the Time for
Completion as specified in the Letter of Acceptance for the respective
sections, phases or sub-phases containing the item(s) of works; or by any
subsequent extension of time certified by the Superintending Officer for the
completion of the Works or such sections, phases or sub-phases)
For Lift stopping at every storey

7 and below

4.50 months (i.e. 3.50 months + 1 month*)

8 to 12

4.75 months (i.e. 3.75 months + 1 month*)

13 to 16

5.00 months (i.e. 4.00 months + 1 month*)

17 to 20

5.25 months (i.e. 4.25 months + 1 month*)

21 to 25

5.50 months (i.e. 4.50 months + 1 month*)

26 to 30

6.00 months (i.e. 5.00 months + 1 month*)

31 to 40

6.65 months (i.e. 5.65 months + 1 month*)

* where the Contractor is required to undertake the temporary usage of tested and commissioned
lifts (installed by others engaged by the Employer) for testing, commissioning of the Works and
other building related Works prior to the certification of Substantial Completion.

This arrangement shall not be construed as giving rise to separate sections, phases or subphases of the Works. If the Contractor fails to complete any of such items of works within the
respective specified time period or if the Superintending Officer shall certify in writing that in his
opinion the Contractor despite previous warning by the SO Rep in writing fails to proceed with
any of such items of works with due expedition and without delay, the Employer may himself
complete such item or items of works or may employ any other contractors to complete such
item(s) of works.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(22)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-23
1.1.39

Earlier Completion Of MDF Rooms, Consumer Switch Rooms,

Pump Rooms And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms (Cont'd)
(A)

Programme Requirement For Completion Of MDF Rooms, Consumer

Switch Rooms, Pump Rooms And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms (Cont'd)
All costs and expenses for such completion including the Employer's charges shall be
recovered by the Employer from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor under the
Contract or any other contracts or may be recovered by the Employer as a debt due from the
Contractor without prejudice to any other remedies available to the Employer. In the event of
the Employer completing any such item(s) of works, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any
extension of the Time for Completion or to any loss or expense in connection with or in
consequence of the Employer carrying out such item(s) of works.
The Defects Liability Period in respect of any such item(s) of works (whether completed by the
Contractor or the Employer) shall not commence until the Substantial Completion of the
respective sections, phases, or sub-phases in which such item(s) of works is (are) included.

(B)

Payment In Connection With Work On MDF Rooms, Consumer Switch

Rooms, Pump Rooms And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms
The Employer and Contractor agree that five per cent of the value of the building part of the
Works as indicated by the Contractor in the Form of Tender or as amended by the Employer
(if applicable) is deemed to be the value of the items of works representing the MDF Rooms,
Consumer/Switch Rooms, Pump Rooms and Lift Wells including Machine Rooms irrespective
of whether the Works include all or only one or more of such items of works. At any time during
the carrying out of the Works, if in the opinion of the Superintending Officer, the progress of the
Works is such that the Contractor is unable or unlikely to complete such Rooms and Lift Wells
within the Specified Time Period for any of such Rooms and Lift Wells, the Superintending
Officer shall be empowered to exclude from any certificate issued under Clause 32.2 of the
Conditions up to five per cent of the said value of the building part of the Works. The Contractor
shall be deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses to comply with
the requirements of this subclause. For the avoidance of doubt no such sum shall be excluded
from the Final Account Certificate.

1.1.40

Handing Over Of Completed Works And

Certification Of Substantial Completion
(a)

The Works can be considered as substantially completed only upon:

(i)

Obtaining a Temporary Occupation Permit and a Temporary Fire Permit; and

(ii)

Successful hand over of the Works to the Employer after inspection by the SO Rep and
the Employers Inspection Team.

(b)

The Contractor shall conduct thorough inspections of the Works to ensure that all Defects are
rectified and the Works have been completed to fully meet the requirements of the Contract
and the workmanship standards as displayed in the approved Sample Units or Sample Panels
before the handing over inspection by the SO Rep and the Employers Inspection Team.

(c)

The Contractor shall notify the SO Rep in advance to request for a handing over inspection and
the following functional tests:
S/N
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Type Of Test
Chokage Test For Main And Secondary Stack Pipe
Leakage Test For Refuse Chute Flushing System
Water Pipe Pressure For Concealed Pipes
Gradient Test For house Drains
Gradient Test For House Sewer Lines
Water Test For Main Roof
Water Test For Scupper Drains
Watertightness Test For Window/Wall Joints
Water Test For Toilet And Kitchen

% of Units To Be
Tested Per Block
100 %
100%
10% of Total DU
100%
100%
100%
100%
5 Windows
25% of Total DU

Upon receipt of the Contractors request, the SO Rep shall arrange for a joint inspection date
with the Employers Inspection Team. The Employers Inspection Team shall be present to
witness the functional tests. In the event the tests fail to meet the requirements of the Contract,
the Contractor shall proceed to rectify the Defect with due diligence and expedition and without
delay and arrange for re-tests in accordance with the requirements under the Contract.
BLDG04/S1.DOC(23)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-24
1.1.40

Handing Over Of Completed Works And

Certification Of Substantial Completion
(d)

If the Works are considered to have met the requirements of the Contract including the
approved workmanship standards and there is no major Defect detected during the handing
over inspection, the Works shall then be taken over by the Employers Inspection Team.
Otherwise, the SO Rep shall give the Contractor a list of outstanding Defect for rectification.
The Contractor shall proceed to rectify the Defect with due diligence and expedition and
without delay. The Contractors liability to rectify the Defect under this subclause shall not be
limited to the list of Defect given by the SO Rep, but shall include all other Defect surfaced in
between the handing over inspections. Upon completion of the Defect rectification, the
Contractor shall notify the SO Rep in writing that all outstanding Defect found in the inspection,
as well as all apparent Defect surfaced in between the handing over inspections have been
rectified and to request for another handing over inspection. The provision of the preceding sub
clause (c) above shall apply, mutatis mutandis.

(e)

If the Contractor is unable to hand over the Works to the Employer after two handing over
inspections, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 Nuisance and Irregularities.

(f)

The Contractor shall on Substantial Completion of the Works, remove all rubbish, Construction
Equipment and surplus materials, wash and scrub clean all floors, staircases, pavings, drains
and all parts of the buildings and leave the Works in a clean and hygienic condition fit
for habitation. The Site and periphery shall be cleared of all rubbish left from the Contractor's
work.

1.1.41

Reserved

1.1.42

Management Of Defects Rectification

1.1.42.1

Employment And Deployment of Site Supervisor

The Contractor shall employ and deploy the number of site supervisors full time on the Site for every
day where Defect rectification Works is carried out during the Defects Liability Period (DLP) as
specified hereunder :
Total No of Dwelling Units

No. Of Site Supervisors For Architectural And

Structural Defect Rectification Works

Less than 800

One

Equal or more than 800

Two

The Contractor's site supervisor shall be qualified and competent and possess the relevant skills,
knowledge and the ability to co-ordinate and supervise the Defect investigation and rectification
Works; and possess either one of the following academic qualifications and experience:
(a)

National Certificate in Construction Supervision (NCCS) and at least 5 years of similar capacity
relevant working experience in the building construction industry;

(b)

Recognized Diploma in Civil/Structural/Mechanical/Electrical Engineering, Building Science,

Building Management, Building Services Engineering and at least 3 years of relevant working
experience in the building construction industry;

The SO Rep shall be empowered to instruct the Contractor for a replacement at the Contractor's own
cost and expense if any of the site supervisor is found not carrying out their duties to the satisfaction
of the SO Rep.
In the event of the Contractor not employing the number of site supervisors required by the Contract
or not employing such site supervisors for the period or periods required by the Contract, without
prejudice to the Employer's rights under the Contract, the Contractor shall be indebted to the
Employer at the rate of $133/- per day per site supervisor not employed and such indebtedness shall
be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be
recovered by the Employer as a debt from the Contractor. This rate shall be deemed to have been
fully agreed and accepted by the Contractor and the Employer as the cost and expense allowed by
the Contractor for the employment of a site supervisor for each day.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(24)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-25
1.1.42

Management Of Defects Rectification (Cont'd)

1.1.42.1

Employment And Deployment of Site Supervisor (Cont'd)

Notwithstanding other provisions in this subclause, if the Contractor incurs additional cost and
expense over and above the agreed rate specified herein in complying with the requirements
stipulated in this subclause, the Contractor alone shall bear such additional cost and expense in full.
On expiry of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor may put forth a written request to the SO Rep
for the release of the site supervisor. A written approval from the SO Rep shall be obtained with this
request.

1.1.42.2

Information of Key Personnel

Within fourteen days from the Date of Substantial Completion of the 1st building block, the Contractor
shall submit to the SO Rep for his approval the following:

1.1.42.3

(a)

Name and contact numbers of the Contractor's key management staff and the appointed site
supervisors for Defect investigation and rectification Works within the Defects Liability Period;

(b)

Name and contact numbers of the relevant manufacturers, suppliers and specialist contractors
etc.,

Defects Investigation And Rectification During Defects Liability Period

The Contractor shall within fourteen working days from the date of written notification by the SO Rep,
at the Contractor's own cost and expense, investigate, repair, rectify and make good to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep all Defect, imperfections, shrinkages and other faults arising from or out of
the use of materials or workmanship not in accordance with the Contract or from neglect or failure of
the Contractor to comply with any obligation on his part under the Contract which may become
manifest.
Prior to the commencement of any Defect rectification Works, the Contractor shall submit the
schedule of repair and method statement for the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
mobilise only skilled and certified workers who are capable of executing the Works in accordance with
the method statement as approved by the SO Rep. All Works must be attended to and supervised in
person by the appointed site supervisor.
Dust and noise must be minimised, whenever possible and cleaning up must be carried out daily if the
unit is occupied and/or after the repairs. Inconvenience caused to others should be minimised by
completing the Defect rectification Works in the shortest possible time.
If the Contractor fails to carry out his obligations as aforesaid, the SO Rep may exercise his rights
under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor.
Without prejudice to the foregoing provisions, the SO Rep shall have the right to engage other
persons or contractors to repair, rectify and make good all such Defect, imperfections, shrinkages and
other faults if the same are not repaired, rectified and made good after fourteen working days from the
date of written notification by the SO Rep, and the cost and expense incurred shall be recovered from
the Contractor. In addition, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under clause 1.6 "Nuisance And
Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor.

1.1.42.4

Rectification of Defects Prior To Issuance Of Final Completion Certificate

For the purpose of certifying completion of Defect rectification prior to the issuance of the Final
Completion Certificate, one month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the
Contractor shall arrange with the HDB Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All
Defect listed after this joint inspection shall be rectified by the end of the succeeding one month
commencing from the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period. A second final joint inspection shall
be arranged to verify the completion of Defect rectification.
If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defect on the second final joint inspection, the SO
Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges
against the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep shall in addition have the right to
engage his own workmen or other contractors to rectify and make good all Defect and the cost of
rectification and charges imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(25)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-26
1.1.43

Reserved

1.1.44

Works Within Railway Protection Zone And Railway Safety Zone

The Contractor shall comply with the Land Transport Authority (LTA) Code of Practice for Railway
Protection and the Mass Rapid Transit (Rail Protection, Restricted Activities) Regulations for
construction of the Works and other activities within the railway protection zone and railway safety
zone. The Contractor shall submit proposals on the effective measures for the protection of MRT
above ground structure together with the detail of activities of mobile cranes, tower cranes and other
mechanical equipment adjacent to the MRT line structures to the SO Rep for approval at least one
month prior to the use of such Construction Equipment. No jib or lifting appliance or any other moving
or stationary part of the mechanical Construction Equipment shall encroach within 6.0 m on plan from
the edge of the nearest MRT above-ground or at-grade structure unless the Construction Equipment
is restricted to work beneath the structure. The foundation of the mechanical Construction Equipment
shall be certified structurally sound and adequate by the Contractor's PE prior to its installation.
Auto cut-off system shall be installed for tower cranes to prevent the top of the boom to swing closer
than 6.0 m from edge of the viaduct structure. The jibs of the cranes must always be pointed away
from the MRT line structure. The temporary access shall be stable and level for the Construction
Equipment to move on. Regular checks shall be carried out to ensure that all mechanised
Construction Equipment are in good working condition at all times. Only experienced, trained and
competent operators shall be employed for mobile cranes, tower cranes and other mechanical
equipment. Temporary height restriction gantry with signboard shall be installed 6.0 m away from the
edge of both sides of the viaduct structure for any access passing underneath the MRT line
structures.

1.1.45

Recovery Of Legal Costs For Court Proceedings

All legal costs, charges and expenses (including but not limited to solicitors' fees as between solicitor
and client) incurred by the Employer for the purpose of or incidental to the enforcement by the
Employer of any rights and remedies under the Contract or any other contracts between the Employer
and the Contractor or in respect of any garnishee proceedings which may be brought or commenced
against the Employer by the Contractor's creditors may be deducted by the Employer from monies
due or becoming due to the Contractor under the Contract or under any other contract between the
Employer and the Contractor including any retention monies, financial bonds or security deposits or
other bonds.

1.1.46

Novation, Assignment And Direct Submission Of Warranties And Agreements

In the event the management and maintenance of the Employer's properties or the Works or any part
thereof shall be taken over by a duly constituted Town Council, the Employer shall have the right to
arrange for and the Contractor and his Specialist (if applicable) shall agree and accept to the whole or
part of the Contract to be novated and/or assigned to the aforesaid Town Council upon the same
terms and conditions.
The Employer shall also have the right to require and the Contractor and his Specialist (if applicable)
shall agree and accept that any Deeds of Warranty and/or Maintenance Agreements and/or Bonds
and/or Deposits required under the Contract shall be executed and submitted direct to and for the
benefit of the aforesaid Town Council.
The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all costs, expenses, stamp duties
and losses arising from compliance with these provisions.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(26)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-27
1.1.47

Completion Of Site Works

The Contractor shall take note that Site Works are phased together with one of the building blocks as
one phase of the Works. Site Works refer to all site structures/facilities, such as, but not limited to,
children play ground/hard courts/footpaths etc., and landscaping works, such as earth mound
formation, turfing, trees and shrubs planting etc., where included in the Works
It is essential to the Employer for the Site Works and the building block which are phased together as
one phase of the Works to be completed and handed over to the Employer as one phase. In the
event the Contractor fails to substantially complete the Site Works and the building block as one
phase within or by the Time for Completion or any subsequent extension of time approved by the
Superintending Officer, the rate of liquidated damages for the whole phase as stipulated in the
Appendix shall be imposed for every day the Works for the phase so remains incomplete.

1.1.48

Erection Of Temporary Buildings

In addition to the submission of the site layout plan, the Contractor shall further submit detailed
structural plans and design calculations, certified by his PE, for temporary buildings of two storeys or
higher, to the SO Rep not later than three months from the commencement date of the Time for
Completion or 2 weeks before the actual commencement of the Works for such proposals whichever
is earlier. The Contractor shall bear all consequences for late submission.
His PE may make use of the Drawings in the Standard Construction Detail Manual as a guide to the
design and submission of the temporary buildings in compliance with the Technical Guidelines for the
Fire Safety in Temporary Buildings in Construction Sites, including any amendment thereto, issued by
FSSD; and the Building Control (Temporary Buildings) Regulations (2000 edition) including any latest
requirements by BCD, BCA.
The Contractor shall erect all such temporary buildings in strict compliance with his Professional
Engineer's plans and calculations. The Works shall be supervised by the Contractor's PE.
Not later than two weeks after the completion of the Works, the Contractor's PE shall submit a
Certificate of Supervision, stating that he has carried out such supervision work and is fully satisfied
that the Works have been constructed in accordance with his structural plans and design calculations
as approved by the SO Rep.

1.1.49

Goods and Services Tax

The Contractor shall not include in the rates and prices quoted in the Contract Sum, the GST
chargeable for the supply of goods, services or Works required in the Contract. All rates and prices
quoted shall be exclusive of the GST.
The Employer shall reimburse the Contractor any GST charged on the goods, services or Works
supplied.
The Contractor shall declare his GST status in his Tender. The Contractor shall clearly indicate
whether he is, or whether he will be a taxable person under the GST Act. The Contractor shall, if
available, furnish the GST registration number to the Employer.
The Contractor will be deemed to be a taxable person if no declaration to the contrary is made in the
Form of Tender. The Contractor who declares himself to be a non-taxable person under the GST Act
but who becomes a taxable person after he has been awarded the contract shall forthwith inform the
Employer of his change in GST status. The Contractor shall be entitled to reimbursement by the
Employer of any GST charged on the goods, services or Works he supplies after his change in GST
status.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(27)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-28
1.1.50

1.1.51

Works And Materials Warranty

(a)

In every case where the Specifications require the Contractor's Specialist to co-warrant the
Works and/or materials to be executed or supplied under the Contract, such Specialist, subject
to such other requirements as may be prescribed in the Specifications, may only be employed
by the Contractor with the Employer's prior written approval, and the Employer will approve
such employment if the Specialist gives his written undertaking to execute the Deed of
Warranty prescribed in the Specifications. If such written undertaking is not given, then the
Contractor shall appoint an alternative Specialist willing to give the written undertaking. The
employment of any Specialist who refuses to give his written undertaking will not be recognised
by the Employer, and no Specialist may commence any work or supply any materials before
his written undertaking is given.

(b)

The Employer's prior written approval of such Specialist's employment shall not in any way
affect or diminish the Contractor's contractual obligations to the Employer in respect of any
Works or materials executed or supplied by such Specialist on behalf of the Contractor, and the
provisions of this subclause shall not in any way affect or diminish the Employer's entitlement
to withhold the payment of any sums due to the Contractor by reason of the Contractor's and/or
Specialist's failure to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified.

Cost Of Water And Electricity

The Contractor shall provide suitable and adequate supply of water and electricity for the Site
including for the purposes of conducting tests on the Works. Where directed by the SO Rep, the
Contractor shall provide and allow other contractors on the Site employed by the Employer, free and
unrestricted use of the water and electricity for carrying out testing and commissioning of such other
contractors' works. The Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses for the water and electricity
consumed at the Site including the cost of water and electricity consumed for carrying out testing and
commissioning by such other contractors employed by the Employer on the Site. Where applicable,
the SO Rep may at his sole discretion, direct the Contractor to transfer the account for the water and
electricity supply to the Employer or such Town Council(s) or such other party. The Contractor shall
be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses to be incurred by him for
compliance with the requirements stipulated in this subclause.

1.1.52

Site Control And Security

1.1.52.1

Working Uniform And Identification Pass

The Contractor and his subcontractors shall provide their workers with working uniforms bearing the
Contractor's name. The Contractor and his subcontractors shall ensure that their workers put on the
uniforms while working on the Site during the Time for Completion and any time period where
liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.
The Contractor shall provide serially-numbered security identification pass to each of his workers and
subcontractors' workers. The identification pass shall consist of the worker's photograph, name,
identification card number or passport number and name of the Contractor. The Contractor shall
issue temporary entry pass, on a day to day basis, to workers from other contractors employed by the
Employer or other Government/Statutory Board authorities or other companies carrying out works on
the Site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling and issuing these security identification passes and
temporary entry passes. The Contractor shall maintain an updated list of the passes issued for
accountability and to facilitate enforcement checks. The Contractor shall ensure that all workers on
the Site wear and display their passes prominently and securely at all times while working on the Site.
The design of the uniform and the format of the identification pass shall be approved by the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(28)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-29
1.1.52

Site Control And Security (Cont'd)

1.1.52.2

Erection And Removal Of Temporary Metal Hoarding

Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain a continuous metal
hoarding around the entire contract boundary before the commencement of the Works. The hoarding
shall be erected at not less than 300mm away from any permanent structure such as footway, drain,
pipeline etc.
The Contractor shall provide metal gates/doors for the main and side entrances. Location of these
entrances shall be approved by the SO Rep. There shall be a maximum of two entry points for the
entire Site, unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep. The metal gate at the main entrance (for
vehicular traffic) shall be closed and locked up after working hours when construction activities have
stopped. A side entrance beside the main gate shall be provided for passage of workers and visitors
that can be monitored by the Security Officers. These entrances/gates and the perimeter shall be well
lit during the hours of darkness (7.00 pm to 7.00 am).
The hoarding shall be constructed in accordance with the standard Drawings and detailing. Should
the Contractor fail to comply with this requirement, the SO Rep reserves the right to impose any
action deemed necessary and any cost and expense incurred thereof including charges shall be
recoverable from the Contractor.
The materials used for the metal hoarding shall comply with the following minimum requirements :
(a)

0.42mm thick zincalume steel or galvanised steel for the metal hoarding laid horizontally.

(b)

Timber posts and horizontal bracings of common grade timber under strength Group A of
Singapore Standard CP 7. If steel members are used instead of timber, the steel members
shall be of Grade 43 of BS 4360.

(c)

Grade 20 concrete foundation.

(d)

All exposed metal sheet surfaces of the new hoarding shall be finished with 25 microns
colourhood silicone modified polyester coating. The finishing coat, graphic pattern and safety
slogan shall be in accordance to the theme and colour of each estate. The Contractor shall
obtain the theme and colour of each estate from the SO Rep.

The hoarding and gates shall be maintained at all times to ensure no deterioration of the structures
and fading of the paint works throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where
liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.
'DANGER - KEEP OUT' and 'NO TRESPASSING' signs in the four official languages are to be
displayed on the exterior side of the hoarding. Such signs shall be painted in red on white
background with reflective material and approved by the SO Rep.
As and when instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remove all or part of the hoarding or
relocate and reconstruct all or part of the hoarding and reinstate all the affected grounds to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the cost and expense of the Contractor. On satisfactory Substantial
Completion of the Works, the hoarding shall be cleared away upon the approval of the SO Rep.
1.1.52.3

Prefabricated Workers' Quarters

The Contractor shall erect prefabricated workers quarters at the Site. These workers quarters shall
comply with all the latest requirements of Building Control (Temporary Buildings) Regulations and the
Technical Guidelines for Fire Safety in Temporary Buildings in Construction Work site issued by
FSSD.
The Contractor may use the Employer's standard drawings as a guide in designing the Prefabricated
Workers' Quarters.
The Contractor shall submit PE certified structural plans, design calculations and electrical wiring
plans to the SO Rep before the construction can begin. The erection of the workers quarters shall be
supervised by a PE and certified by him before it can be occupied. A copy of all the plans, design
calculations and Certificate of Inspection must be made available for checking at the Site.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(29)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-30
1.1.52

Site Control And Security (Cont'd)

1.1.52.3

Prefabricated Workers' Quarters (Cont'd)

The workers quarters shall comprise of prefabricated steel-framed structure with internal columns
spaced generally at 1.8 m apart at the first storey. Concrete floor slab shall form the ground floor of
the pre-fabricated workers quarters. The upper storey shall be of prefabricated floor boards/steel
decking on steel joists. External walls and internal partition walls shall be of modular steel panels with
insulation. The roof shall be of corrugated steel deck roof with insulation. Proper apron and apron
drain shall be constructed for the proper discharge of rain water to drain outlets.
In addition, the Contractor shall comply with the following general requirements :
1.

Centralized cooking area shall be provided and shall be compartmentalized if there are more
than one religious group staying in the workers quarters.

2.

Each room shall be of minimum size 3.6 m x 5.0 m with a ceiling height of 2.8 m with sufficient
windows for proper ventilation. Not more than 4 persons shall be allowed to stay in a room. A
cloth cabinet shall be provided for each worker. Single/double deck beds shall be provided.
Lights and electric fans shall be installed in each room and provide lights along the corridor at 6
m interval.

3.

The occupants shall maintain their own rooms and corridors of the workers quarters clean at
all times. The names and particulars of occupants shall be clearly displayed outside their
rooms. Workers shall not be allowed to exchange rooms without prior approval from the
Contractor.

4.

Electrical installations/wirings shall comply to the latest edition of CP44 Temporary Electrical
Installations and the installation shall be checked by a qualified electrician monthly and records
of such inspections shall be properly documented on the Site. No additional wiring shall be
allowed without prior approval by a qualified electrician. Proper lightning conductors in
accordance to CP33:1996 Lightning Protection shall be provided at the workers' quarters

5.

No Smoking/No Littering signboards shall be displayed at conspicuous locations. House rules

in appropriate languages shall be displayed in the workers quarters.

6.

Suitable provisions shall be provided for the washing of clothes and a separate area shall be
provided for hanging wet clothing.

7.

Suitable first aid materials shall be provided.

8.

The workers quarters shall not be used for storage or handling of toxic and other harmful and
flammable substances. Any storage of such materials shall be located at least 5m away from
the workers quarters.

9.

The workers quarters shall be inspected daily by the Contractors supervisor.

10.

Exposed bare surfaces on the internal and external areas of the workers quarters shall be
painted.

11.

Organise training and awareness programmes for the occupants in first aid, health and safety,
fire fighting technique and evacuation procedures.

Not withstanding the above-mentioned requirements, the Contractor shall maintain the workers
quarters in a clean, tidy and hygienic condition and ensure that fire safety requirements and provisions
shall be observed at all times. The Contractor shall also be responsible for all damages and shall
indemnify the Employer against all liabilities in respect of the workers quarters provision on the Site.
As and when instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remove all or part of the workers'
quarters.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(30)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-31
1.1.53

Assessment Of Extension Of Time Due To

Exceptionally Inclement Weather
The assessment of exceptionally inclement weather shall not take place until the expiry of the Time
for Completion or previously extended Time for Completion. Such assessment shall be made on the
following basis :
(a)

There shall first be assessed the number of wet days and equivalent wet days (as specified in
paragraph (f) below on which the Contractor has been substantially delayed in the carrying
out of the Works by rain (hereinafter called "delay days").

(b)

A wet day shall be one where the rainfall figure as calculated as described in this paragraph
exceeds 10.2 mm during the 24 hour period used by the Meteorological Service. The rainfall
figure shall be the average island-wide rainfall calculated by the Employer using rainfall
records received by the Employer monthly from the 5 Standard Stations of the Meteorological
Service.

(c)

The expected number of wet days during the Time for Completion or extended Time for
Completion as the case may be shall be derived from the following table which is deemed to
record the average number of wet days for the respective months based on the Meteorological
Service's records between 1993 and 2002 (hereinafter referred to as "expected wet days") :
Jan

Feb

Mar

Apr

May

Jun

Jul

Aug

Sep

Oct

Nov

Dec

(d)

For each month of the Time for Completion or extended Time for Completion as the case may
be there shall be assessed whether the number of delay days in that month is more than
(positive) or equal to (zero) or less than (negative) the expected wet days in that month.

(e)

The positive, zero and negative monthly assessments made in accordance with paragraph (d)
above shall then be added together and a net total reached. If such total is a positive number
then such total shall constitute the extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather.

(f)

The period commencing from excavation works to the completion of ground beams where the
ground floor slab is not a critical activity or the completion of ground floor slab where the
ground floor slab is a critical activity is hereinafter called "sub-structure construction period"
and the works carried out during such period is hereinafter called "sub-structure works".
For the assessment of extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather during the
sub-structure construction period, the respective monthly average number of wet days as
specified in paragraph (b) above shall be multiplied by a factor of 2.0 if the wet days are less
than or equal to 5 or by a factor of 1.6 if the wet days exceed 5. The product so derived shall
be referred to as "equivalent wet days" and are subject to a maximum of 30 days per month.

(g)

BLDG04/S1.DOC(31)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

If the sub-structure works do not commence on the first day of the month, then the number of
equivalent wet days for that month in which the sub-structure works commence shall be prorated in accordance with the proportion of the number of calendar days for the construction of
sub-structure works in that month to the total number of calendar days in the said month.
Similarly, if the sub-structure works are not completed on the last calendar day of the month,
then the number of equivalent wet days for that month in which the sub-structure works are
completed shall be pro-rated in accordance with the proportion of the number of calendar days
for the construction of sub-structure works in that month to the total number of calendar days in
the said month. The assessment of extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather
during the sub-structure construction period shall be based on the actual sub-structure
construction period of each building block, including multi-storey carpark/garage.

Bldg Spec
Page 1-32
1.1.54

Shortfall In Floor Area

The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense ensure that the flats constructed comply in all
respects with all Drawings and Specifications. In the event of any departure from such Drawings and
Specifications resulting in a shortfall in the floor area of any of the flats constructed as compared to
the same floor area as measured in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, the Contractor
shall indemnify, reimburse and hold the Employer harmless in respect of any demands, claims,
damages, loss and/or expense (including any legal fees and expense that the Employer may incur)
arising therefrom. The Contractor shall remain so liable notwithstanding the issuance by the
Superintending Officer of any Certificate of Substantial Completion, Final Completion Certificate
and/or any Final Account Certificate under the Contract.

1.1.55

Trade Subcontractors
This clause supersedes subclause 1.1.55 "Trade Subcontractors" of the Standard Specifications For
Building Works And Other Installations.
The Contractor, with the exception of his own direct employed workers, shall engage only BCA
registered contractors or SLOTS (Singapore List of Trade Subcontractors) registered trade
subcontractors or corporations/firms listed in the HDB List Of Approved Materials and Suppliers for
executing the Works for the following trades :
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)

Timber formwork;
Metal formwork;
Steel reinforcement work;
Structural steel fitting;
Concreting;
Bricklaying;
Joinery;
Painting;
Plastering;
Roofing;
Tiling;
Electrical engineering;
Air-conditioning, refrigeration & ventilation works;
Plumbing & sanitary and gas piping;
Fire protection;
Waterproofing;
Piling;
Concrete repairs;
Metal work;
Cable installation & road reinstatement;
Drain laying/Pavement & kerb construction;
Curtain Wall/Cladding;
Metal scaffolding (Erectors);

within 14 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit a list of his
subcontractors for the Works to the SO Rep. Where the Contractor changes his subcontractor, he
shall also submit such information to the SO Rep.
For the purposes of this clause, the relevant BCA register, SLOTS register and HDB List of Approved
Materials and Suppliers shall be those applicable at the commencement of work for the respective
trades.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any eventual delay in the progress of the Works owing to his
failure to ensure the required on-time registration of his subcontractors and no extension to the Time
for Completion shall be granted on account of such delays.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(32)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-33
1.1.56

Insurance Policies
The Contractor shall warrant that the insurance policies issued in accordance with Clauses 27 and 28
of the Conditions shall include the following requirements :
(A)

(B)

Insurance For Workmen's Compensation

(i)

The Policy shall be issued in the prescribed form as produced in Appendix A11.

(ii)

The Insured shall be "(Name of Contractor to insert) as Contractor and all his subcontractors, and the Housing & Development Board as Principal FTRR & I".

(iii)

The period of insurance shall commence from the date the Site is handed over to the
Contractor and shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract.
The Policy shall firstly cover the whole of the original Time for Completion plus 6 months
and plus a further 12 months for Defects Liability Period.

Insurance For Personal Injury And Property Damage

(i)

The Policy shall be issued in the joint names of the Employer, the Contractor and all his
sub-contractors.

(ii)

The limits of liability shall be read as follows :

(a)
(b)

(iii)

The period of insurance shall commence from the date the Site is handed over to the
Contractor and shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract.
The Policy shall firstly cover the whole of the original Time for Completion plus 6 months
and plus a further 12 months for Defects Liability Period.

(iv)

The period of notice for cancellation of the Policy, if such period is stipulated, shall read
30 days.

(v)

The Policy shall expressly include coverage of the following risks :

(vi)

(a)

Death, bodily injury or damage to property caused or occasioned by the Insured's

sub-contractors or by such sub-contractors' employees.

(b)

Death, bodily injury or damage to property caused or occasioned by or connected

with or arising from the ownership, possession or use by or on behalf of the
Insured of any equipment or machinery not expressly specified in the Schedule of
such equipment or machinery.

(c)

Liability assumed by the Insured by agreement, unless such liability would have
attached to the Insured notwithstanding such agreement.

(d)

Liability in respect of loss or damage to property belonging to or in the charge or

control of the Insured or of any servant or agent of the Insured.

(e)

Liability in respect of injury to or illness of any person or loss or damage to any

property or land or building caused by vibration or removal or weakening of
support.

(f)

Liability in respect of injury, illness, loss or damage caused by or connected with

or arising from any commodity, article or thing supplied, repaired, altered or
treated by or to the order of the Insured, happening at any of the Insured's
premises.

The Policy shall expressly contain the following endorsements :

(a)

BLDG04/S1.DOC(33)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

In respect of any one accident : $2,000,000.00

Unlimited for the period of insurance

"This Policy shall cover all the Contractor's insurance obligations with regard to
personal injuries or death and injury or damage to property real or personal
(including property of the Housing & Development Board but not the Works
themselves) arising out of or in the course of or by reasons of the carrying out of
the Works stated in the Contract between the Housing & Development Board and
the Contractor (name of Contractor to insert)"

Bldg Spec
Page 1-34
1.1.56

Insurance Policies (Cont'd)

(B)

Insurance For Personal Injury And Property Damage

(vi)

(C)

1.1.57

(b)

"Each of the parties comprising the Insured shall for the purpose of this Policy be
considered as a separate and distinct unit and the words "the Insured" shall be
considered as applying to such party in the same manner as if a separate policy
had been issued to each of the parties and the insurers hereby agree to waive all
rights of subrogation action which they may have or acquire against any of the
aforesaid parties arising out of any accident in respect of which any claim is made
hereunder provided nevertheless that nothing in this clause shall be deemed to
increase the limitation on extent of Insurer's liability in respect of any one accident
or series of accidents as stated in the Schedule".

(c)

"This Policy is extended to cover the employees and/or representatives of the

Housing & Development Board, consultants, other professional parties and clerkof-works whilst on the contract site as third parties".

(d)

"Notwithstanding anything stated in the Policy to the contrary, cover under the
Policy shall not be suspended in the event of stoppage of work by the Contractor
on the contract site from any cause for a period not exceeding 90 days. In the
event of partial or total cessation of work, the Insured shall use diligence and do
all things reasonably practicable to protect the insured property. Subject
otherwise to the Terms Exceptions and Conditions of this Policy".

(e)

"All deductibles shall be borne by the Contractor".

Insurance For Works

(i)

The Policy shall be issued in the joint names of the Employer and the Contractor.

(ii)

The Works insured shall read the project title given in the Employer's Letter of
Acceptance.

(iii)

The sum insured shall be the same as the Contract Sum.

(iv)

The period of insurance shall commence from the date the Site is handed over to the
Contractor and shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract.
The Policy shall firstly cover the whole of the original Time for Completion plus 6 months
and plus a further 12 months for Defects Liability Period.

(v)

The period of notice for cancellation of the Policy, if such period is stipulated, shall read
30 days.

(vi)

The policy shall expressly contain the following endorsements :

(a)

"This Policy shall cover all the Contractor's Works insurance obligations stated in
the Contract between the Housing & Development Board and the Contractor
(name of Contractor to insert)".

(b)

"Notwithstanding anything stated in the Policy to the contrary, cover under the
Policy shall not be suspended in the event of stoppage of work by the Contractor
on the contract site from any cause for a period not exceeding 90 days. In the
event of partial or total cessation of work, the Insured shall use diligence and do
all things reasonably practicable to protect the insured property. Subject
otherwise to the Terms Exceptions and Conditions of this Policy".

(c)

"All deductibles shall be borne by the Contractor".

Contract Documents And Reference Material On Site

The Contractor shall keep at the Site a complete set of the signed contract documents described in
the Agreement, a complete set of the further or revised Drawings and instructions referred to in the
Conditions, and the relevant Codes Of Practice or Standards referred to in the Specifications. These
documents shall be made available for inspection and use by the Superintending Officer, SO Rep and
any other person authorised by the Superintending Officer in writing.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(34)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-35
1.1.58

Reserved

1.1.59

Reserved

1.1.60

Lightning Protection To Temporary Structures And Metal Structures

The Contractor shall ensure that all temporary buildings such as site office, workers' quarters, site
canteen, carpenter and bar bending sheds and temporary structures with continuous metal such as
steel framework, scaffolding, tower cranes, batching plants and mobile machinery such as crawler
cranes and concrete pumps are adequately and effectively protected from lightning strike at all times.
The lightning protection system shall be in accordance with and complying with SS CP33:1996 and/or
any latest requirements by the BCD, BCA.
Notwithstanding the provisions of CP33, reinforced concrete structure and foundation shall not be
used as lightning conductors or earth electrodes. Lightning conductors shall not be embedded in any
structural component and steel reinforcement shall not be used as part of the protection system.
The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings showing the design of the lightning protection system
duly signed by the Contractor's professional electrical engineer (PE) stating that the design complies
with SS CP33:1996. The Contractor's professional electrical engineer shall provide a Certificate of
Supervision together with the earthing reports after the lightning protection installation is completed.
The Contractor's PE shall also conduct routine inspections once every 6 months to ensure that the
Contractor has provided adequate and effective lightning protection system for the Site.

1.1.61

Computer Hardware And Software

1.1.61.1

Computerised Project Management Software

Within one month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall
provide and implement a Computerised Project Management Software (hereinafter called the "CPMS"
for the purpose of this clause including all subclauses under it) during the Time for Completion and
any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The SO Rep and the
Employer's officers shall be allowed to have full and free access and usage of the CPMS at all times.
The Contractor shall use the CPMS which shall be installed on the Site to prepare the programme for
the Works based on the Critical Path Method. The programme for the Works shall include the
duration, early start/finish dates, late start/finish dates and floats for all activities involved in the Works.
It shall also include constraints and parameters such as fixed start/finish and target start/finish dates
for the activities and milestones for the different phases or stages of the Works.
The programme for the Works shall comprise of summary and detailed reports in textual and graphical
forms. It shall be updated monthly or as and when required by the SO Rep to indicate, inter-alia, the
critical path, actual start and finish dates of completed activities, actual start dates and percentage
completion of the activities in progress and target start and finish dates of the delayed activities, their
slippages and floats.
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep the actual programme for the Works within three weeks
after the Date of Substantial Completion.

1.1.61.2

Computer Hardware
Within one month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall
provide the Computer Hardware during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated
damages are imposed under the Contract.
Personal Computer
The Contractor shall provide ONE Personal Computer (hereinafter referred to as "PC") for the
exclusive use of the SO Rep. The PC shall comply with the following minimum specifications :
(i)

BLDG04/S1.DOC(35)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

An Intel Pentium 4 processor running at a speed of 2.0 GHz or more;

Bldg Spec
Page 1-36
1.1.61

Computer Hardware And Software (Contd)

1.1.61.2

Computer Hardware (Contd)

Personal Computer (Contd)
(ii)

512 MB of Memory RAM, expandable to 2 GB or more;

(iii)

One 3-inch form factor enhanced or fast Ultra ATA100 hard disk of total capacity of 20 GB or
more with average spin time of 5400 rpm or faster; [The hard disk must has 2 partitions eg. C
and D drive];

(iv)

One AGP 2X high-speed Super VGA video adapter with at least 32 MB RAM, and able to
display at least 32-bit true colour at Super VGA resolution of 1024x768 pixels;

(v)

One 17-inch or more Super VGA non-interlaced, low radiation colour monitor able to display at
least 32-bit true colour at a resolution of 1024x768 pixels and at a refresh rate of 75 Hz;

(vi)

One 17-inch anti-glare glass screen filter;

(vii)

One 1.44 MB 3-inch floppy drive;

(viii)

Integrated sound card audio feature with integrated/external speakers and Sound Blaster Pro
compatibility or equivalent;

(ix)

System BIOS updateable via software should be licensed flash BIOS of the latest version;

(x)

One bi-directional 25-pin parallel port, two 16550 UART compatible asynchronous serial ports,
one mouse port, one keyboard port and at least two universal serial bus(USB) port;

(xi)

Bus architecture should consist of 64-bit process-cache memory data bus and at least three
32-bit PCI expansion slots;

(xii)

One power supply of at least 200 Watts at 220/230 Volts 50Hz;

(xiii)

One enhanced AT type keyboard with 104 typematic repeating keys including 12
programmable function keys and 3 Windows function keys;

(xiv)

One Microsoft mouse or compatible;

(xv)

One internal IDE CD-RW drive; (24X Write / 10X Rewrite / 40X Max Read) or higher. Must be
able to read CD-ROM, Multi Read, CD Text, Audio CD, CD-I, CD-RW, CD-R, CD-DA, Video
CD, CD EXTRA, CD-ROM XA and Photo CD/Multi-session and also able to write CD-R and
CD-RW, Track at once, Disc at once, Fixed Packet, Variable Packet and Multi-session.

(xvi)

Casing must be secure and comes with one good quality chassis lock of unique combination.
All keys to the lock shall be given to the SO Rep.

(xvii) ONE Netrust-Ready serial Smart Card Reader (ADC serial or equivalent).
(xviii) Must include all the necessary features and accessories required to support the type of
broadband connection services specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
(xix)

Loaded with the software as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it.

The PC must be fully compatible with Windows 98 Second Edition or later, and shall be Microsoft
certified. The PC shall also be certified by Novell Testing Laboratory as a LAN workstation for Novell
NetWare Version 5.0 or later.
The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense provide and maintain Broadband Connection
Services (with minimum connection speed of 512 kbps) via a Broadband Service Provider (such as
StarHub MaxOnline, Pacific Internet Ltd, Reach Internet Services Pte Ltd, SingNet, Little Green
Apples Pte Ltd or equivalent to be approved by the SO Rep) for the PC during the Time for
Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The
broadband cable or telephone line shall be used solely for the PC

BLDG04/S1.DOC(36)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-37
1.1.61

Computer Hardware And Software (Contd)

1.1.61.2

Computer Hardware (Contd)

Laser Printer
The Contractor shall provide ONE LaserJet printer complying with the following specifications :
(i)

At least 16 MB of RAM and upgradeable to at least 160 MB;

(ii)

Able to print at least 20 pages of A4 per minute and 11 pages of A3 per minute;

(iii)

Automatic Duplex Printing Unit

(iv)

Print at 600 x 600 dpi resolution or more;

(v)

Support high speed bi-directional IEEE 1284-compliant parallel port (C-type connector);

(vi)

Support PCL 5e, PCL 6 and Postscript Level 3 emulation

(vii)

Must be able to support printing in the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses
under it as well as Lotus Notes Release 5.04 or later.

(viii)

Bundled with drivers for the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

The Contractor shall provide ONE Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) complying with the following
specifications :
(i)

Conform to industry standards as follows :

IEEE 446, NEMA PE1, ANSI C62.41, IEEE587B, IEC 801-146;

(ii)

Conform to the safety standards as follows :

UL 1778, CSA C22.2 and VDE;

(iii)

10 minutes or more runtime at full load;

(iv)

Shall provide alert on AC power failure, power restore and diagnostic tests through
management software;

(v)

Shall provide at least 3 output ports;

(vi)

Must include all connecting cables joining the UPS output ports and equipment.

Colour Scanner
The Contractor shall provide ONE colour scanner complying with the following specifications :
(i)

Flatbed, one-pass colour and monochrome

(ii)

At least 600dpi x 600dpi resolution

(iii)

Able to scan A4 size documents

(iv)

Support Universal Serial Bus(USB) port

(v)

Shall include scanning software that can display the image file size to users at the
preview screen

(vi)

Able to support all image formats including but not limited to,
y TIFF
y BMP
y JPEG
y FPX
y GIF
y WMF

(vii)

Bundled with drivers for the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(37)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-38
1.1.61

Computer Hardware And Software (Contd)

1.1.61.3

Computer Software
Within one month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall
provide the Computer Software during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated
damages are imposed under the Contract. The Contractor shall provide the following licensed
software packages (full packs with original licences, documentation and media provided) for each PC
provided under this clause including all subclauses under it :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)

Microsoft Windows 98 (Second Edition);or later

Microsoft Project 2002 Standard Edition or later;
Microsoft Office 2000 Professional Edition;or later
Norton Internet Security Software Version 3.0 or later;
F-Secure Anti-Virus version 5.40 or later.

The Contractor shall purchase maintenance license for the VirusScan softwares to cover the Time for
Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The PC
must be set to automatically scan for virus at least once a day when the PC is switched on. The latest
F-Secure(DOS Version) BootDisk must be given to the SO Rep whenever there is any update.
1.1.61.4

Computer Software Licensing

All the Computer Software as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it shall be
licensed copies obtained from Authorised distributors or dealers. The Contractor shall at his own cost
and expense provide any software upgrade, to the latest version or release upon request by SO Rep
during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the
Contract. The Contractor shall ensure that only authorised software are used with the Hardware and
obtain written approval from the SO Rep before installing any software other than the ones specified
in this clause including all subclauses under it, into the Computer Hardware System.

1.1.61.5

Approval and Testing of Computer Hardware and Software

The Contractor shall submit specifications and details of the Computer Hardware and Software as
specified in this clause including all subclauses under it to the SO Rep for approval BEFORE the
purchase of the Hardware and Software. The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense make
such necessary arrangement for the hardware and software to be tested at HDBCorp's office and the
subsequent delivery to the work site upon request by the SO Rep.

1.1.61.6

Installation/Upgrade/Removal of HDB Applications

The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense make such necessary arrangement for the
installation/upgrade/removal of HDB software at HDB Corp's office and the subsequent delivery to the
work site upon request by the SO Rep.

1.1.61.7

Computer Furniture and Accessories

The Contractor shall provide the necessary furniture and accessories at the site office to
accommodate and facilitate the usage of the Computer Hardware and Software. The PC designated
for the exclusive use of the SO Rep shall be located in a fully enclosed room within the site office. The
room shall be of minimum size 5 m as specified. The room shall be provided with a lock and be
partitioned in half-height glass panels.

1.1.61.8

Computer System Maintenance

The Contractor shall ensure that the Computer Hardware and Software are in good working condition
and pay for all maintenance, license fees, subscription fees and etc for the Hardware and Software
during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the
Contract.
If the Contractor fails to make available the Hardware and Software within one calendar month from
the commencement date of the Time for Completion or fails to rectify any Hardware or Software faults,
within one day, the SO Rep will make the necessary arrangement to acquire or to rectify the faults and
all costs and expenses thus incurred shall be deducted from payments due to or becoming due to the
Contractor or recovered as a debt due from the Contractor.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(38)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-39
1.1.61

Computer Hardware And Software (Contd)

1.1.61.9

Security
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangement and provision to prevent theft/burglary of the
Computer Hardware and Software. The Contractor shall replace any stolen or missing Hardware and
Software within 3 days of such occurrence, failing which the SO Rep will make the necessary
arrangement to acquire the systems and all costs and expenses thus incurred shall be deducted from
payment due to or becoming due to the Contractor or recovered as a debt due from the Contractor.

1.1.61.10 Unauthorised Usage

The Contractor shall ensure that the Hardware and Software are not used for any other purpose
except for those approved by the SO Rep.
1.1.61.11 E-mail Account
The Contractor shall apply for and maintain an E-mail account to facilitate transmission of information
and correspondence. Provide the E-mail address to the SO Rep within one month from the date of the
Letter of Acceptance.
1.1.62

ELECTRONIC SUBMISSION TO SUPERINTENDING OFFICER

The Contractor shall be required to and shall at his own expenses use an online web-based electronic
submission system for the submission of the Monthly Claims For Progress Payment; Claim For
Extension of Time and Authorisation/Variation Order (collectively and hereinafter known as esubmission system). The Contractor may use either his own e-submission system complying with the
requirement hereinafter mentioned or that provided by an approved service provider.
The modules in the e-submission system shall be approved for implementation by the SO Rep. The esubmission system shall be Secured Socket Layer encrypted, password-protected with role-based
workflow security features at the document/form level and have an audit trail. The e-submission
system shall be accessible by all relevant users from the Employer, Superintending Officer, SO Rep
and Contractor concurrently and all data accessed shall be confined to the Project and the
relevant role and scope of works. The e-submission system shall be deployed on the Emloyer's
prevailing backend system.
Where required, the e-submission system shall have a standalone or integrated Project Team
Directory module that contains the details of the project and the respective team members, which can
be used by the assigned administrator from the SO Rep to control the level of access granted to each
team member for each form/document and also a standalone or integrated administrative module to
guide the routing of the documents.
All relevant parties in the workflow shall be timely notified by email to complete their respective area of
work.
The e-submission system shall comprise the following modules :
(A)I. Monthly Claims For Progress Payment
This module shall be a form-based, role-based workflow system, which allows the Contractor to
submit online, the values of the monthly progressive valuation of work completed for the
assessment and certification of the SO Rep as hereinafter described but not limited to the
following:
a.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(39)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

This module shall capture the monthly detailed breakdown of the scope of works and cost
information as specified in the Contract showing both the Contractors claims and the SO
Reps corresponding assessment in terms of individual percentage of work done for each
work item.

Bldg Spec
Page 1-40
Page 2
1.1.62

ELECTRONIC SUBMISSION TO
SUPERINTENDING OFFICER (SO) (CONTD)
(A).

Monthly Claims For Progress Payment (Contd)

b.

The validation rules shall apply to each item of claim and shall be based on the following
rules or such rules to be given by the SO Rep :
i.

The SO Rep's certification should not be more than Contractors claim.

ii. The values submitted/certified for current month should not be less than previous the
months submission.
c.

The Contractor shall not be allowed to amend the SO Reps valuation and vice-versa.

d.

The following data shall be automatically uploaded and populated each month into the
prevailing SO Reps backend system and shall include but not limited to the following :
i.

Nett Contract Sum (Less Provisional Quantities / Sums)

ii.

Probable Actual Contract Value

(Adjusted For Variation Orders)

iii. Contractor's Cumulative Total Claim

(excludes Loss & Expense)
iv. Contractor's Nett Claim For Month
(excludes Loss & Expense)
v. Total SO Rep's Estimated Value Computed
(excludes Loss & Expense)
vi. Cumulative Certified Value Of Work
vii. Value for each work category for apportionment under
respective activity account codes.
(B)

Claim For Extension Of Time

The Claim For Extension of Time module shall be form-based for the Contractor to submit a
monthly summary of intended claims for extension of time (Nil Returns) and also the details of
each claim. The basic requirements shall include but not limited to the following:
a.

The Extension Of Time form to be used by the Contractor for detailing the information and
justification for each delay-causing event affecting the progress of work that will be routed
to the relevant parties involved.

b.

The Monthly Nil Returns form to be used as a summary for claims to be submitted by the
Contractor for each month.

c.

A view/form showing but not limited to the following information for each project phase :
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(40)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Probable Actual Completion Date

Original Completion Date
No of Days of Extension Recommended
Estimated No of Days Due To Inclement Weather
Extended Original Completion Date
Estimated Liquidated Damages Period and Amount

d.

All relevant dates shall be automatically computed based on the number of days of
extension to be recommended. The number of days of extension recommended does not
include Sundays and Public Holidays.

e.

The module shall screen-off or prompt claims that are time-barred as stipulated under the
Contract.

Bldg Spec
Page 1-41
1.1.62

ELECTRONIC SUBMISSION TO
SUPERINTENDING OFFICER (SO) (CONTD)
(C).

Authorisation / Variation Order

This form-based and role-based workflow module shall include but not limited to the following:
a.

Allow the SO Rep to submit an Authorisation / Variation Order with justification and
supporting documentation for the approval of the SO for subsequent issue to the
Contractor.

b.

Allow the SO Rep to issue to the Contractor an Authorisation Order.

c.

Allow the Contractor to confirm the completion of work as detailed in the Authorisation
Order.

d.

Allow the SO Rep to issue a Variation Order after the Authorisation Order has been
confirmed completed.

Only the data created, keyed-in, stored or derived from any computation in the modules shall
be construed as intellectual property belonging to the Superintending Officer. The
Superintending Officer shall have no rights of ownership to the e-submission modules, which
shall remain the intellectual property of the Contractor or the service provider as the case may
be.
The Contractor shall be required to demonstrate a complete working model of the e-submission
system for the approval of the SO Rep not later than two (2) weeks after the date of the Letter
of Acceptance of the Contract.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in his Contract Sum a monthly fee of $500
for the cost of using his own e-submission system or that of a service provider for the entire
duration of the Time for Completion including any time periods where liquidated damages are
imposed under the Contract. This rate shall be deemed to have been fully agreed and
accepted by the Contractor and the SO as the cost and expense allowed by the Contractor for
using the e-submission system for each month.
In the event of the Contractor not using such an e-submission system as specified, for the
period or periods required by the Contract, without prejudice to the Employers rights under the
Contract, the Contractor shall be indebted to the Employer at the rate of $500 per month and
for such periods of default and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any
monies due or becoming due to the Contractor, or be recovered by the Employer as a debt due
from the Contractor.
All the differences and/or disputes arising under this Clause (including questions relating to
interpretation) shall be determined by the Superintending Officer whose decision shall be final
and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.

1.1.63

Assignment Of Copyright Of Photographs, Etc

The Contractor shall assign the
copyright of the photographs (including
the
prints/slides/transparencies/negative) taken and all documents prepared under this Contract to the
Employer.
The Employer shall have unfettered rights to use or reproduce all the photographs (including the
prints/slides/transparencies/negatives) taken and all documents prepared by the Contractor under this
Contract for any purpose other than for the purpose for which the Contract was entered into.
In the event that the Contractor engages third parties to take the photographs (including the
prints/slides/transparencies/negatives) or prepare the documents, the Contractor shall procure the
assignment of the copyright from such third parties to himself and thereafter, assign the copyright to
the Employer.
The Contractor and/or any third parties are strictly prohibited from using or reproducing any of the
photographs (including the prints/slides/transparencies/negatives) taken and all documents prepared
under this Contract in any other publication or for any other purpose whatsoever.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(41)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-42
1.1.64

PROVISION OF KEYS ENVELOPES DURING HAND OVER

Upon successful hand over of the Works to the Employer after inspection by the SO Rep and the
Employer's Inspection Team, the Contractor shall provide the necessary number of envelopes to
contain the household keys of each dwelling unit in the Contract. The envelope to be provided shall
fulfil the following requirements :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

C6 size (114mm by 162mm)

Key envelope with string and white eyelet
120 gsm paper
Colour - white

The Contractor shall propose the type of envelope to the SO Rep for approval.
The 2 external sides of the envelope may either be printed or stamped with the following
information :
On the Front of the envelope To print/stamp in Arial Black Font Type of Font Size 18, the following
statement:

KEY TO PREMISES NO. ___________

and;
On the Back of the envelope:To print/stamp in Arial Black Font Type of Font Size 12, the following
statements:

S/N
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1.1.65

Location
Main Gate
Main Door
Master Bedroom
Bedroom 1
Bedroom 2
Balcony
Service Duct
Letter Box
Others
Total

No. of keys

Schedule Of PE Submission
The Contractor shall provide the required PE submission as specified for the Works as shown in the
table below :
Category

General

Maintenance

BLDG04/S1.DOC(42)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Clause No.

Description Of Works

Date Of Submission

1.1.18 or as amended

Site offices & canteens

At least 2 weeks prior to erection

1.1.52.3 or as amended

Workers quarters

At least 2 weeks prior to erection

1.1.48 or as amended

Temporary buildings

At least 2 weeks prior to erection

1.1.67.8 or as amended

Temporary chute

At least 1 week prior to installation

1.4.2(c) or as amended

Passenger cum material hoist

foundation, masts & tie-back

At least 2 weeks prior to

construction

Bldg Spec
Page 1-43
1.1.65

Schedule Of PE Submission (Contd)

The Contractor shall provide the required PE submission as specified for the Works as shown in the
table below :
Category

Clause No.

Description Of Works

Date Of Submission

1.5.1(b) or as amended

Access scaffold and working

platforms.
Temporary structures.

At least 2 weeks prior to erection

1.5.1(d) or as amended

Alternative system to safety

net system

At least 1 week prior to installation

1.5.1(e) or as amended

Working platforms for lift

shafts, central refuse chute
and voids

At least 2 weeks prior to

construction

1.5.1(f) or as amended

Overhead shelters

At least 1 week prior to construction

1.5.1(m) or as amended

Tower cranes & other tall

construction equipment
foundation & tie-back

At least 1 month prior to

construction

1.5.1(n) or as amended

Mobile crane & piling

machine access

At least 2 weeks prior to

construction

1.5.1(t) or as amended

Temporary staircases

At least 2 weeks prior to erection

1.5.1(u) or as amended

Safety information signboard

& assembly stage

Within 1 week from date of

commencement of the work

3.15 or as amended

Planking & strutting

At least 2 weeks prior to the

excavation work

4.18 or as amended

Rectification of defective work

At least 1 week prior to the

rectification work

4.19.2 or as amended

Design of formwork

At least 2 weeks prior to erection

Formwork

9.5 or as amended

Formwork system for

reinforced concrete water
tank

At least 2 weeks prior to erection

Metal Roofing
and Insulation
Sheet

13.3.1 or as amended

Metal roof structural plans &

fastening details

At least 2 weeks prior to installation

Site Safety
Measures

Excavation
Structural
Concrete

For the avoidance of doubts, requirements for PE submission for other Works which are not shown in
the table above shall be as specified in the respective clauses and/or subclauses in the
Specifications.
1.1.66

Reserved

BLDG04/S1.DOC(43)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-44
1.1.67

Environmental Public Health Measures At Construction Sites

1.1.67.1

General Requirements
The Contractor shall comply with the Environmental Public Health Act (hereafter referred to as "the
Act" for the purposes of this subclause) and its Subsidiary Legislations including the Environmental
Public Health (Employment of Environmental Control Officers) Order 1999, (hereafter referred to as
"the Order" for the purposes of this subclause) and any amendment or re-enactment thereto
throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed
under the Contract.

1.1.67.2

Environmental Control Officer (ECO)

The Contractor shall employ Environmental Control Officer (hereinafter referred to as "ECO" for the
purposes of this subclause) to comply with the Environmental Public Health Act Environmental
Public Health (Employment of Environmental Control Officers) Order 1999. The ECO shall be
employed on a full-time basis where the Contract Sum is above $50 million or on a part-time basis
where the Contract Sum is between $10 million and $50 million. The ECO shall be responsible for
monitoring and advising the Contractor on the following main areas :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)

Control of disease-bearing vectors and rodents.

Proper management and disposal of solid waste.
Control of noise and dust pollution.
Drainage and silt control.
Air and water pollution control.
General housekeeping management of the project/Site.

Any Safety Officer who is registered with the MOM under the Safety Officer Scheme and who is also
registered as an ECO with the Commissioner of Public Health, ENV, can be allowed to hold both the
appointment of Safety Officer and ECO concurrently for the Works at the Site, provided that both
duties are performed with the same standard of supervision as compared with those performed by
different officers holding such appointment separately.
If the Works have been certified more than 95% completed, the SO Rep may consider the
Contractors request in writing to allow the ECO to perform on a part-time basis.
1.1.67.3

Noise Nuisance
Judicious management and control over the activities within the Site shall be exercised by the
Contractor for the abatement of noise nuisance. All necessary actions must be taken to ensure
compliance to the latest noise control regulations imposed by the ENV or any relevant authorities.

1.1.67.4

Noise Control At Construction Site

(i)

Permissible Noise Level

Judicious management and control over the activities within the Site shall be exercised by the
Contractor for the abatement of noise nuisance. The noise level reading at the nearest
occupied building outside the Site shall not exceed the following maximum permissible noise
level and shall comply with the Environmental Pollution Control (Control of Noise at
Construction Sites) (Amendment) Regulations 2001 enforced by the Ministry of the
Environment (ENV) :

Type of affected buildings

BLDG04/S1.DOC(44)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Applicable Period

Maximum Allowable
Equivalent Continuous Noise
Level Measured Over a
Period of 5 Minutes in dB(A)

(a)

Hospitals, schools, institutions of higher

learning, homes for the aged, sick, etc

7 am to 7 pm
7 pm to 10 pm
10 pm to 7 am

75
55
55

(b)

Residential buildings located less than 150m

from the construction site where the noise is
being emitted

7 am to 7 pm
7 pm to 10 pm
10 pm to 7 am

90
70
60

(c)

Buildings (other than those in

paragraphs (a) and (b) above

7 am to 7 pm
7 pm to 10 pm
10 pm to 7 am

90
70
70

Bldg Spec
Page 1-45
1.1.67

Environmental Public Health Measures At Construction Sites (Contd)

1.1.67.4

Noise Control At Construction Site (Contd)

(ii)

Specifications of Sound Monitoring System

The Contractor shall submit his proposal for the sound monitoring system, with details of the
sound meter model and location of installation etc, to the SO Rep for approval within 14 days
from the date of the Letter of Acceptance.
The sound level meter shall comply with BS 6698 (1986) or IEC 804 : 1985 and the following
requirements and shall meet all requirements imposed by the relevant Authority :

(iii)

(a)

The integrating sound level meter shall be capable of producing equivalent continuous
A-weighted sound pressure level for various time duration required by the SO Rep.

(b)

The sound level meter shall have a laboratory calibration certificate dated not more than
three (3) months before the commencement date of the contract. The integrating sound
level meter shall be sent to an approved accredited laboratory for calibration at every six
(6) months interval or as and when required as decided by the SO Rep.

(c)

A portable calibrator shall be provided to carry out weekly calibration.

(d)

The sound level meter shall have adequate memory to store 5-minute equivalent
continuous readings on a 24-hour basis for up to 7 days.

(e)

Dynamic range shall be of at least 40 dB.

Record of Noise Level Measurement

The continuous 24-hour noise level readings shall be printed with the date and time of
recording indicated. The printout shall be submitted to the SO Rep on a weekly basis or at such
interval as specified by the SO Rep. The noise level record shall be filed and kept on the Site
for inspection as and when required by the SO Rep or ENV.

(iv)

Location of Sound Level Meter

The Contractor shall install the Type I integrating sound level at the nearest occupied building
less than 50 metres from the site boundary. The sound level meter shall be installed at a
location where obstruction and other external noise interference are minimal. Where there is no
suitable location outside the Site, the Contractor may place the sound level meter within the
Site. The location shall be approved by the SO Rep.

(v)

Noise Level of Construction Equipment and Activities

Noisy Construction Equipment (eg. Compressors) and installation (eg. temporary refuse chute)
shall be sited away from occupied residential blocks. All Construction Equipment shall be
properly insulated and maintained to minimize its operating noise level.

1.1.67.5

Preservation Of Trees
Where any existing tree(s) on the Site is stipulated to be preserved (hereinafter referred to as
"Preserved Trees" for the purpose of this subclause), the Contractor shall take all necessary
precaution to avoid damage or injury to such trees and its roots and comply with the following
requirements :
(A)

Treatment of Preserved Trees In Area Of Fill

(a)

Tolerable Depth of Fill

The area around Preserved Trees shall not be filled more than 300mm in depth.

(b)

Construction of Well Around Trees

Well not exceeding 1 m in depth shall be constructed around Preserved Trees. The
minimum diameter of the well shall be 6 times the diameter of Preserved Trees
measured at the trunk 0.5 m above ground level. Details of the well shall be as shown
in the Drawings.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(45)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-46
1.1.67

Environmental Public Health Measures At Construction Sites (Contd)

1.1.67.5

Preservation Of Trees (Contd)

(B)

Treatment Of Preserved Trees in Area of Cut

(a)

Tolerable Depth of Cut

The area around Preserved Trees shall not be cut to a depth exceeding 300 mm.

(b)

Retention of Raised Planter Around Tree

An area around Preserved Trees shall be retained as raised planter to conserve the root
system. The minimum diameter of raised planter shall be 6 times the diameter of
Preserved Trees measured at the trunk 0.5 m above ground level. Details of retention
of raised planter are as shown in the Drawings.

(C)

Protection Of Existing Trees From Physical Damage

By Equipment Etc During Construction
(a)

All Preserved Trees shall be protected against damage during construction operation by
suitable fencing or armouring. The protection of Preserved Trees shall be placed before
commencing any excavation or grading operation/work and shall be maintained in repair
for the duration of the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated
damages are imposed under the Contract unless otherwise directed. The extent of
fencing shall be determined by the SO Rep. Fencing shall be erected all round not less
than 1.2 m from the trunk of Preserved Trees.
Individual Preserved Trees near heavy construction traffic shall be wrapped with gunny
sacks and 50 mm x 100 mm planks worn vertically as armour around the trunk and
spaced at no more than 50 mm apart to a height of 1.5 m above ground.

(b)

Any damage to Preserved Trees root system shall be repaired immediately by the
Contractor under the supervision of a qualified horticulturist. Roots that are exposed
and/or damaged during grading operations shall be cut off immediately and the inside of
the exposed and/or damaged area cleaned; cut surfaces shall be treated with approved
sealing compound and topsoil spread over the exposed root area.

(c)

Any damage to Preserved Trees branches shall be treated in accordance with the
Drawings.
(i)

(d)

BLDG04/S1.DOC(46)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Branch Trimming Of Damaged Branches

(1)

A first cutting is to be made at point A, 300 mm from the main trunk of

Preserved Trees; depending on the diameter of the branch being cut. The
depth of the cut shall not be more than of the diameter of the branch.

(2)

A second cutting is to be made at point B, parallel to cutting at point A. The

distance between these two cuttings shall be 75 mm to 150 mm.

(3)

Make a shallow cut at C.

(4)

Final cut is to be sharp and clear.

(5)

2 coats of anti-fungus wound sealant are to be applied on cut area.

(ii)

Wound Treatment

(1)
(2)
(3)

Clean away ragged or loose edges of bark with a sharp pruning knife.
Shape the wound into an oval, pointed at both ends.
Coat the entire exposed surface with tree-wound paint.

If any Preserved Trees are severely injured by mechanical equipment, etc., the SO Rep
shall impose charges against the Contractor in accordance with Clause 1.6 "Nuisance
And Irregularities".

Bldg Spec
Page 1-47
1.1.67

Environmental Public Health Measures At Construction Sites (Contd)

1.1.67.5

Preservation Of Trees (Contd)

(D)

Health & Condition Of Preserved Trees

(a)

The Contractor shall ensure that :

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

1.1.67.6

Compaction of soil around Preserved Trees shall be avoided.

No materials shall be stored within the root system.
There shall be no spillage of any nature within the spread of the Preserved Trees.
There shall be no parking of vehicles underneath the Preserved Trees.
There shall be no dumping of excavated materials, concrete, equipment etc.
within the spread of the Preserved Trees crown.
Soil around Preserved Trees is properly cultivated to ensure that adequate supply
of air and water get to the roots.
The site is drained in periods of heavy rainfall and irrigated during periods of
drought.

(b)

The Contractor shall also carry out any other routine maintenance of the Preserved
Trees eg. branch trimming, pesticide spraying etc. as instructed by the SO Rep.

(c)

If the growth of the Preserved Trees is stifled, the Contractor shall inter-alia bear the
cost of making good and charges in accordance with Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and
Irregularities" shall be imposed against the Contractor.

Temporary Site Access Within Site Boundary

The Contractor shall propose and construct a temporary site access within the Site boundary linking
the main entrance/exit to all building blocks, inclusive of multi-storey carpark/garage building. The
Contractor shall engage a PE to design the access. The drawings and calculations endorsed by the
PE shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before the construction of the access.
The design of the access shall consist of 400mm thick consolidated road bottoming laid over well
compacted and rolled subgrade which is then topped up with 100mm thick milled premix waste. The
400mm thick consolidated road bottoming shall consist of two layers of crusher run, watered, well
rolled and compacted and then blinded with granite dust and rolled again. The minimum clear width of
the access shall be 4 m. The minimum area of the access to be provided shall be as follows :
Number of Residential
Blocks in the Works

Minimum area (m) of Site

Access to be provided

up to 3

2,000

4 to 6

3,000

7 and above

4,000

The minimum area is measured in terms of the premixed area of the access only. At both sides of the
temporary access, Type C7 composite channel drains shall be laid along the entire length of the site
access to ensure proper site drainage. Should there be a shortfall in the area of the access, materials
or work provided, the SO Rep reserves the right to recover the cost from the Contractor.
The access shall be provided immediately after the completion of the pile-caps/footings/ground beams
and back filling. They shall be maintained in good working condition at all times throughout the Time
for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, or
unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
As part of the housekeeping effort, the Contractor shall deploy workers to clear the mud
deposits/droppings regularly and maintain the access as clean and dry as practically possible. A
heavy duty vehicular washing bay shall also be provided at the main entrance/exit point abutting
completed public road. All tyres of vehicles shall be thoroughly clean if necessary before leaving the
Site.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(47)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-48
1.1.67

Environmental Public Health Measures At Construction Sites

(Cont'd)

1.1.67.7

Temporary Sanitary Facilities

Within 21 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall provide temporary
sanitary facilities in suitable structures with adequate lighting, on the Site. Such temporary sanitary
facilities shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep. The Contractor may use the Employer's
Standard Drawings as a guide in designing the temporary sanitary facilities. The temporary sanitary
facilities shall comprise water closets and shower compartments in the proportion of 1 closet and 1
shower to every 25 workmen, throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where
liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. In addition, the Contractor shall provide
separate sanitary facilities with water closet and shower compartment for the exclusive use of the
Employer's officers. Prior written approval by the SO Rep shall be obtained before commencing the
erection of these facilities.
The water closets shall be of the type, make and pattern approved by the ENV and PUB (Water).
Provide and lay glazed wall tiles or other approved material to the internal walls of the temporary
sanitary facilities up to a height of 1.8 m from the floor. The doors to the cubicles of the temporary
sanitary facilities shall be of approved material.
All waste discharge from the water closets and all waste water from the temporary sanitary facilities
and from the Site shall be discharged into a public sewer. Arrange with the ENV to carry out
connection work from the temporary sanitary facilities to the public sewer and pay all charges and
maintenance in connection therewith. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to and
shall indemnify the Employer against all liabilities in respect of such sewer connections.
Where a public sewer is not available or where it is not possible to connect to a public sewer, the
Contractor shall provide and install temporary septic tanks of the type, pattern and capacity approved
by the ENV, to serve the water closets, showers and baths.
Prior to commencing the installation of the temporary septic tanks on the Site, the Contractor shall
engage a Licensed Plumber who shall submit his proposal to the ENV and SO Rep for approval. The
proposal shall include the manner and frequency of post installation management and maintenance of
the septic tanks on the Site. The Contractor and his Licensed Plumber shall be fully responsible for
any mis-management or mis-use of the temporary sanitary facilities, which may result in the pollution
of the controlled water course.

1.1.67.8

Temporary Chute For The Removal Of Construction Debris

The Contractor shall provide adequate number of temporary chute to dispose construction debris from
the upper storeys for all building blocks (including multi-storey carpark/garage) of 4 storeys and
above. It shall be erected to follow the structural work. A large bin at the lower end of each of the
chute shall be provided and emptied regularly. The chute can be a proprietary system or fabricated
on Site. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and calculations duly endorsed by his PE to
the SO Rep for approval. The temporary chute shall be removed only with the permission of the SO
Rep.

1.1.67.9

Pest Control And Surveillance

The Contractor shall engage an approved Pest Control Operator who is registered with the BCA
under the Work Head for Pest Control to provide comprehensive pest control and surveillance work
on the Site. In this respect, the Contractor shall submit the name of the Pest Control Operator and
proof of BCA registration to the SO Rep for approval prior to carrying out the Works. The SO Rep
may disapprove the Pest Control Operator selected by the Contractor and the Contractor shall not be
entitled to any claims for compensation and extension of time arising from such decisions.
Pest Control measures and surveillance programmes shall fully comply with the requirements of ENV
as well as the following :
(a)

BLDG04/S1.DOC(48)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

The Contractor is required to submit a detailed pest control and surveillance programme
inclusive of fogging at the Site to the Environmental Health Office, ENV and the SO Rep prior
to commencement of the Works. The frequency of fogging shall be at least once per week and
the chemical used for fogging shall be approved by ENV.

Bldg Spec
Page 1-49
1.1.67

Environmental Public Health Measures At Construction Sites

(Cont'd)

1.1.67.9

Pest Control And Surveillance (Cont'd)

(b)

The Contractor shall maintain a site register containing an up-to-date record of the pest control
and surveillance work that has been carried out. The site register shall be made available and
ready for inspection by the SO Rep when required.

(c)

The Contractor shall submit monthly summarised returns of the site records required by ENV to
the Environmental Health Office, ENV.

(d)

On the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall seal up all sanitary openings in the
dwelling units prior to the handing over of the completed Works all at the Contractor's cost and
expense.

The Works required under this subclause shall include all necessary measures to prevent the Site
from becoming conducive to the breeding or harbouring of vectors. The Contractor shall carry out site
checks at least once a week to detect and remove all breeding and harbouring grounds. If breeding or
harbouring of vectors is found at the Site, enforcement action may be taken against the Contractor by
ENV. The SO Rep may also exercise his right under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance & Irregularities" by
imposing charges on the Contractor.
1.1.67.10 Air Pollution By Construction Equipment
The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to abate the discharge of smoke, fumes or
obnoxious gases from Construction Equipment and other equipment on the Site. When notified by
the SO Rep that a particular Construction Equipment or equipment is discharging excessive smoke,
fumes or obnoxious gases, the Contractor shall stop the use of that Construction Equipment or
equipment, and replace the same with acceptable Construction Equipment or equipment. No claims
from the Contractor for extension of Time for Completion or costs and expenses shall be allowed.
1.1.67.11 Reserved
1.1.67.12 Cleaning Of Public And HDB Maintained Roads And Drains
The Contractor shall ensure that all vehicles used by him, his servants or agents, or by his subcontractors or suppliers, their servants or agents (hereinafter referred to as the "Contractor's Vehicles"
for the purposes of this subclause) shall not dirty any public or HDB maintained roads and drains. In
this respect, it is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all such Contractor's Vehicles are
properly cleaned before they move onto these roads.
The Contractor shall check with the SO Rep if he is in doubt whether any road is a public or HDB
maintained road and the decision of the Superintending Officer in this respect shall be final and
binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
In the event the Site abuts a public or HDB maintained road and the Contractor's Vehicles use the
road for site access, the Contractor shall provide a washing bay to wash and clean the Contractor's
Vehicles before they move onto the public or HDB maintained road. If vehicles of other contractors
also use such public or HDB maintained road for site access, the Contractor shall provide at his own
cost and expense, similar washing, cleaning facilities and services for these other contractors'
vehicles before they move onto the public or HDB maintained road. The Contractor shall also provide
at his own cost and expense, the same facilities and services for similar purposes in the event a road
abutting the Site becomes a public or HDB maintained road and is used for site access by the
Contractor's Vehicles or other contractors' vehicles.
1.1.67.13 Restriction On The Use of Styrofoam in Construction processes
Where specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete", the use of styrofoam in the course of formwork
erection or concreting Works shall be disallowed.
The Contractor shall ensure that he or his sub-contractors do not use styrofoam in openings and
recesses.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(49)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-50
1.1.68

Material Samples Display Room

Within 21 days from taking possession of the site, a Material Samples Display Room of 3m X 5 m
(ie.15 m2) shall be provided at the Site office and situated beside the meeting room. A new airconditioner set and adequate lightings shall be provided to the Material Samples Display Room.
Appropriate and proper display racks/shelves shall be provided. The display room shall be maintained
neat and tidy at all times.
The following material samples, among others, shall be displayed upon HDBs Technical
Professional/SO Reps approval if they are to be provided under the contract :
(1)

Architectural materials:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)

sanitary wares, pipes and fittings, solvent cement;

integral cultured basins and vanity tops;
water taps, pipes, valves and fittings;
shower sets and accessories;
gratings;
rainwater downpipe system;
clothes drying racks;
doors, door holders, viewers and hinges, door locks, ironmongery;
windows, stainless steel screws, friction stays, window stoppers, gaskets;
paint and primer;
foot-operated steel hoppers;
tiles, tile grout;
parquet flooring and related products etc.

(2)

Structural materials : Splice sleeves, sealants for precast joints, form ties etc.

(3)

Civil Engineering Materials : Road marking paint, interlocking concrete blocks etc.

(4)

Rendering/screeding/waterproofing/repair materials : Waterproofing membranes, prepacked

waterproof screed and prepacked skim-coat, polymer modified cement mortar etc.

(5)

Electrical materials : Electrical conduits and fittings/CATV materials eg. sockets, switches,
door bells, splash proof guards, light fittings etc.

The SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to provide and display the sample for other
building materials and components, especially newly introduced items, big ticket items and special
items, under the Contract where deemed necessary and fit all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
The approved material samples shall be provided and displayed before construction, erection or
installation. All approved materials shall be labelled with the Supplier's name and materials'
type/grade/model.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(50)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-51
1.2

MATERIALS

1.2.1

Metric Components
All components for incorporation into the Works shall be in metric units. However, when metric
components are not available, their equivalent in imperial units may, subject to the approval of the SO
Rep, be used and such a substitution shall not constitute a variation to the Contract.

1.2.2

Materials And Workmanship

As directed, furnish the SO Rep with approved documents to prove that materials are as specified.
The documents shall include but not be limited to any or all of the following, such that the authenticity
of the materials can be easily ascertained :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)

shipping documents
serial numbers
warranty certificates

In the event that any documents submitted are not original copies, they shall be duly certified by the
originating parties. No information within the documents shall be tampered with, unless it is clearly
discernible that the items are not related to the materials specified in the Contract.
Where specific brand and model number are specified, or where alternative brands and model
numbers are offered by the Contractor and accepted by the SO Rep, it shall be deemed that the
finished products are entirely of original make by the registered manufacturer and fully supported by
the Manufacturer's warranty. In the event that any alteration is made to the goods by a local agent or
any other intermediary, the approval of the SO Rep shall be sought and the result of the alteration
shall be fully supported by the Manufacturer such that the Manufacturer's warranty is maintained.
All references to local or foreign standards and/or Codes of Practice shall be deemed to be inclusive
of the latest amendments to these standards and/or Codes of Practice.
Samples of materials shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before order is placed with the
supplier.
1.2.3

Credit Terms And Conditions For Employer's Materials

For materials directly supplied by the Employer, a 2-month credit facility from the date of delivery may
be allowed. The Employer reserves the right to deliver the materials to the Contractor's site or other
designated locations even if he fails to re-confirm his earlier purchase order to the Employer. The cost
of the materials so delivered shall be deducted by the Employer from the Contractor by deduction
from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or as a debt due by the Contractor to the
Employer.
The Employer reserves its sole and unfettered discretion to withdraw such credit facilities without any
prior notice to the Contractor under any circumstance as it deems fit, including but not limited to where
a garnishee order is served on the Employer in respect of any contracts the Contractor has with the
Employer or where a petition in bankruptcy or winding up order is presented by or made against the
Contractor. Under no circumstances shall the Employer be liable to the Contractor's claim for any
cost, expense, profit and loss arising out of or in consequence of the withdrawal of such credit facility.
Where such credit facility is withdrawn, the Contractor has to pay the Employer in cash for all
materials he has ordered for the Works before the Employer will deliver the materials to the Site or
allow the Contractor to collect the materials.
Where the garnishee order is discharged or withdrawn or made absolute or where the petition in
bankruptcy or winding up order is withdrawn, the Contractor may apply to the Employer in writing, with
documentary proof, to have the credit facility reinstated. The Employer shall have the absolute right
to decide whether or not to reinstate credit facility to the Contractor and the Employer is under no
obligation to provide any explanation if it decides not to reinstate the credit facility.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(51)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-52
1.2.4

Reserved

1.2.5

Approval Of Samples And Trade Names

Where trade names or catalogue numbers are specified in the Specifications and/or shown in the
Drawings, they are intended only to serve as a guide to the respective type and quality of material
required. Other material proposed by the Contractor may be used subject to the prior approval of the
SO Rep. In this respect, the Contractor shall submit samples of the proposed material to the SO Rep
for approval.
When a sample is approved by the SO Rep and subsequently work is carried out in accordance with
this approved sample, any cost difference resulting from the higher price of the approved sample as
compared with the price of the material as required and/or as shown shall not be payable to the
Contractor, unless the change of material is ordered by the SO Rep.
In the event that the price of the approved sample is lower than that of the material as required and/or
as shown, the cost difference shall be recovered by the Employer by way of contract variation in
accordance with the following table :
Recovery (or Non-Recovery) by the Employer from the Contractor in the event that the price of the
approved material is lower than that of the material as required and/or as shown
S/N

Material as required
and/or as shown

Alternative material proposed

by Contractor and approved by
the SO Rep

Cost Adjustment

1.

On the HDB List Of Approved

Materials And Suppliers

On the HDB List Of Approved

Materials And Suppliers

No cost recovery

2.

On the HDB List Of Approved

Materials And Suppliers

Not On the HDB List Of

Approved Materials And
Suppliers

3.

Not On the HDB List Of

Approved Materials And
Suppliers

On the HDB List Of Approved

Materials And Suppliers

4.

Not On the HDB List Of

Approved Materials And
Suppliers

Not On the HDB List Of

Approved Materials And
Suppliers

)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

Cost Recovery
by the
Employer from
the Contractor

For the purposes of this subclause only, the applicable HDB List Of Approved Materials And Suppliers
shall be the HDB List Of Approved Materials And Suppliers applicable at the time the Contractor
submit the material for approval by the SO Rep.
Where cost recovery is required, the basis of such adjustment shall be the difference between the
price of the proposed material and that of the material as required and/or as shown (where one type
of material is specified) or that of the cheapest of the materials as required and/or as shown (where
more than one type of material is specified).
The Contractor shall point out to the SO Rep all items in the approved sample which do not comply
with the Specifications and/or Drawings.
Notwithstanding approval of the sample by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall be liable for any items in
the sample which do not comply with the Specifications and/or Drawings and which the Contractor
has failed to point out to the SO Rep.
Where the Contract requires the Contractor to obtain materials from the HDB List Of Approved
Materials And Suppliers or where it is specified that materials provided are subject to the approval of
the SO Rep, such requirements shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations
under the Contract.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(52)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-53
1.2.6

Sample Unit
The Contractor shall provide for the inspection, testing and approval of sample units for each of the
different dwelling unit types as instructed by the SO Rep. These sample units shall be truly
representative of the actual units to be constructed in every respect inclusive of all architectural
details, architectural and structural features, finishes, services, fittings, etc.
The Contractor shall maintain the sample units to a clean, neat and tidy condition at all times.
Adequate artificial lightings shall be provided where possible and as directed by SO Rep all at the
Contractor's cost and expense.
Notwithstanding the approval of the SO Rep in respect of these sample units, the Contractor shall not
be released from his duties and obligations under the Contract.

1.2.7

PSB Quality Certificate

Where two or more alternative materials are proposed by the Contractor under subclause 1.2.5
"Approval Of Samples And Trade Names", the SO Rep may at his sole discretion give preference to
the use of a material that is approved under any of the PSB quality certification schemes.

1.2.8

Storage Facility For Cement

Where storage of cement is required, the Contractor shall provide adequate storage facilities at the
Site to accommodate cement up to two weeks' requirements for the Works.
The store to accommodate the cement shall be constructed so that each consignment of cement can
be separately stacked. Each consignment of cement shall also be used in the same sequence as
they are delivered, that is, on a "first-in first-out" basis.
The Contractor shall ensure that the cement stored at the Site is kept dry and properly protected
against loss or damage at all times.

1.2.9

Precautions Against Materials Being Taken Out Of Site

The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe custody of cement and all other materials delivered to
the Site and shall therefore ensure adequate protection and prevention of such materials from being
taken out of the Site. The SO Rep will not accept any excuse for materials taken out of the Site by the
Contractor, his foreman or other individual even without the knowledge of the Contractor who is
deemed to have provided for proper control against such malpractice. If it is established that cement
or any other material is taken out of the construction Site without specific written approval from the SO
Rep, this shall be deemed to be an irregularity and inter-alia, the right of the Contractor to
compensation for price fluctuations for all materials shall lapse.

1.2.10

Ready-Mixed Concrete from Approved Suppliers

The Contractor shall obtain ready-mixed concrete from any of the pre-approved suppliers. Provide the
name and address of the ready-mixed concrete suppliers to the SO Rep. The use of ready-mixed
concrete shall be subject to the terms and conditions set by the SO Rep. All Delivery Orders for
ready-mixed concrete delivered to the Site shall be endorsed by the Employer's Clerk-of-Works and
submitted to the SO Rep.
Failure to inform the SO Rep or non-compliance with the terms and conditions set by the SO Rep for
the use of ready-mixed concrete shall, inter-alia, result in the Contractor forfeiting his right under the
Contract to claim compensation for price fluctuations for all materials.

1.2.11

Water
Water approved by the SO Rep shall be used for building purposes except where specified in
Clause 4.3 "Water". The Contractor shall pay for all charges and temporary plumbing required.

BLDG04/S1.DOC(53)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-54
1.2.12

SUPPLY OF CONCRETING MATERIALS FROM THE EMPLOYER

Notwithstanding other provisions in the Specifications, the Contractor shall purchase the following
materials from the Employer:
(a)
(b)
(c)

Ordinary Portland Cement

20mm Granite Aggregate
Concreting Sand

The Contractor shall be required to purchase the respective quantities of the above materials
stipulated in the Schedule of Protected Quantity ("hereinafter known as "Protected Quantity" for the
purpose of this Clause only). If the Contractor wishes to purchase more than the Protected
Quantity, he shall within one (1) month from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, request in writing
to the SO Rep in the format as shown in Appendix A12 "Request For Revision Of Protected
Quantity Of Concreting Materials". The proposed Protected Quantity shall be subject to the SO
Rep's approval and the SO Rep reserves the right to approve a lower quantity than proposed
(hereinafter known as "Approved Protected Quantity" upon the approval of the SO Rep, for the
purpose of this Clause only). The Contractor shall be invoiced for the Protected Quantity or
Approved Protected Quantity, whichever is applicable, at the Basic Price as defined in the
subclause 1.2.13 "Material Price Protection".
The Contractor shall be required to arrange for his own supply for any requirement in excess of the
Protected Quantity or Approved Protected Quantity, whichever is applicable. The Contractor can
however choose to purchase the excess requirement from the Employer subject to availability of
supply. The Contractor shall be invoiced for the excess requirement at the prevailing posted price,
as defined in the subclause 1.2.13 "Material Price Protection".
The Contractor shall place his orders directly with the Employer and comply strictly with the
"Conditions For The Supply Of Materials From The Employer" as stipulated in Appendix A13a. The
Contractor shall be deemed to have included all costs and expenses to be incurred by him in
compliance with the requirements stipulated in this clause in the Contract Sum.
The SO Rep reserves the right to allocate the monthly quantity to the Contractor as well as to
nominate the supplier. The Contractor shall absorb the total quantity allocated to him. If the
Contractor's requirement is more than the Employer's capacity to supply, the SO Rep may direct
the Contractor to supplement his requirement from other sources. In this event, the Contractor shall
bear any additional cost and expense so incurred.
The Contractor shall also ensure that the quality of the materials obtained from other sources
comply fully with the Specifications.
1.2.13

MATERIAL PRICE PROTECTION

1.

The Contractor shall purchase the following materials from the Employer and shall be
covered for price protection as provided under this clause :
(a)

Ordinary Portland Cement

(b)

20mm Granite Aggregate

(c)

Concreting Sand

The materials covered for price protection specified above shall hereinafter be referred to as
the "Protected Materials" for the purposes of this clause.
2.

The HDB posted prices of the Protected Materials at any time shall be deemed to be those
in the HDB's Monthly Price Lists which are posted on the HDB Infoweb/HDBuilders.com
website. Alternatively, the posted prices are also available for viewing at the Procurement
Office, Basement 1 HDB Hub.

3.

The Contractor is deemed to have based his Tender on the posted price, at the date
Fourteen (14) days before the closing date of the Tender (hereinafter referred to as the
"Basic Price"), for the Protected Materials. To illustrate: if a Tender closes on the 14th day
of a particular month, the Contractor is deemed to have based his Tender on the posted
price prevailing on the last day of the preceding month.

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(54)
DPD (18092003)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-55
1.2.13

MATERIAL PRICE PROTECTION (CONT'D)

4.

The total quantity to be covered under the provision of this clause shall be as stipulated in
the Schedule of Protected Quantity (SPQ) or Approved Protected Quantity (APQ) as
provided in the clause "Supply of Concreting Materials from the Employer", whichever
applicable (hereinafter referred to as the "Protected Quantity" for the purposes of this
Clause only). The Contractor shall be invoiced for the Protected Quantity at the Basic Price.

5.

In a situation where the Contractor is required to obtain the supply of precast concrete
components from the Employer, the quantity of concreting materials required for these
precast concrete components is not included in the Protected Quantity.

6.

In the event of the Contractor failing to obtain the Protected Quantity in full throughout the
Time for Completion and any time during which liquidated damages are imposed under the
Contract, a shortfall recovery shall be effected using the following formula :
Amount of Shortfall Recovery = PB x (QP - QA)
where:

PB

Basic Price;

QP

Protected Quantity
(SPQ or APQ where applicable);

QA

Actual quantity purchased under this clause;

In the event of QA falling below SPQ, an additional amount of recovery shall be made, which
is computed based on 10% of the portion PB x (SPQ - QA) of the amount of recovery
specified in the formula above. However, where the QA falls below APQ but exceeds SPQ,
this additional amount of recovery shall not be made.
7.

In a situation where the Employer is not able to supply in full the Protected Quantity and the
SO Rep has directed the Contractor to supplement his requirement from other sources,
such purchases shall not be covered by the provisions under this clause. However, for the
purpose of ascertaining for shortfall quantity, the quantity purchased from the Contractor's
own source shall be included in QA when determining whether the Contractor has obtained
in full the Protected Quantity.

8.

For this purpose, the Contractor shall be required to maintain proper documentary evidence
of the delivery of each of the materials and such evidence shall be duly endorsed by the SO
Rep.

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(55)
DPD (18092003)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-56
1.3

LABOUR

1.3.1

Labour Laws
The Contractor shall pay his workmen promptly, and observe workmen's working hours and holidays
in accordance with current laws and regulations. He shall keep records and produce them for
inspection by the SO Rep.

1.3.2

Keeping Records Of Workmen

The Contractor shall comply with all labour laws regarding the engagement of non-citizen workmen.
Work Permits from MOM shall be obtained for these workmen. The Contractor shall be held solely
liable for and shall indemnify the Employer in respect of all actions against the Employer for
employing foreign workmen without permits.
The Contractor shall keep proper records of all workmen engaged on Site. These records shall
include the following information :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

Name of Workmen (and alias if any)

Identity Card No./Passport No.
Address
Work Permit No., if any
Expiry date of work permit

This information shall be recorded before any workman is allowed to commence duty. Appropriate
action will be taken by the SO Rep if the Contractor fails to record any of the abovementioned
information of any worker found at the Site.
1.3.3

Employment Of Illegal Immigrants

For the purpose of this subclause "Illegal Immigrants" shall refer to any person who enters the
Republic of Singapore in contravention of the provisions of the Immigration Act or any statutory
modification or re-enactment thereof.
The Contractor shall ascertain the legitimacy of all Foreign Workers employed by him and/or any subcontractor prior to employment and throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where
liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. Clarification as to the legitimacy of Foreign
Workers may be made with the Immigration Authority, the Ministry of Manpower and/or the Police.
The Contractor shall ensure that no illegal immigrants are employed by him and/or any sub-contractor
in the execution of the Works. The Employer shall not be responsible for any such act or acts by the
Contractor and/or any of his sub-contractors and the Contractor shall indemnify the Employer for all
consequences arising thereof.

1.3.4

Employment/Training Of Construction Brigade (CB) Men/Trainees

The Contractor shall employ/train up to 60 Construction Brigade (CB) Men/Trainees allocated at any
one time to him by the Employer. If the number of Construction Brigade (CB) Men/Trainees allocated
is less than 60, there shall be no recovery from the Contractor. Further, the Contractor shall not have
any claims against the Employer for extra payment or loss or damage or costs, arising from or out of
events whereby the number of Construction Brigade (CB) Men/Trainees allocated is less than 60.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses
arising from his compliance with the requirements stipulated in this subclause.

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(56)
DPD (18092003)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-57
1.3.4

Employment/Training Of Construction Brigade (CB) Men/Trainees (Cont'd)

The Contractor shall comply fully with all the requirements stipulated in the "Rules and Regulations on
the Employment/Training of Construction Brigade (CB) Men/Trainees" which may be inspected and
are available at the Employer's Development And Procurement Department. HDB Hub, 480 Lorong 6
Toa Payoh, Singapore 310480 In this respect, it shall be deemed that the Contractor is aware of all
the details in the "Rules and Regulations on the Employment/Training of Construction Brigade (CB)
Men/Trainees". In the event of non-compliance with any one of these rules and regulations, the SO
Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges
against the Contractor.
In particular, the wages and allowances of the Construction Brigade (CB) Men/Trainees shall be paid
by the Contractor in accordance with the Construction Brigade Scheme. If such wages and
allowances change during the currency of the Contract, there shall be no recovery from nor
compensation to the Contractor, as the case may be. In the event that the Contractor fails to pay
such wages or allowance to the Construction Brigade (CB) Men/Trainees, the Employer shall be
entitled to pay such amount or amounts to such Construction Brigade (CB) Men/Trainees and deduct
the same from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered from the
Contractor as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer. In the event of the Contractor failing to
employ the Construction Brigade (CB) Men/ Trainees allocated to him in accordance with this
subclause or failing to train up such Construction Brigade (CB) Men/Trainees, then, without prejudice
to the Employer's rights under the Contract, the Contractor shall be indebted to the Employer for the
wages and allowances which would have been or are due to such non-employed or non-trained
Construction Brigade (CB) Men/Trainees during the period of non-employment or non-training as the
case may be and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt due from the Contractor.
All differences and/or disputes arising under this subclause (including questions relating to
interpretation) shall be determined by the Superintending Officer whose decision shall be final and
binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.

1.3.5

Allocation Of Man-Year Entitlements

Where materials, goods or products for the Works are to be purchased and/or obtained by the
Contractor from HDB and/or the Employer, the Contractor shall allocate Man-Year Entitlements to
such suppliers and/or contractors engaged by HDB and/or the Employer for the supply of such
materials, goods or products. This requirement shall be applicable for, but not limited to, the supply of
precast components and cut and bend steel reinforcement bars which are supplied by HDB and/or the
Employer.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses
arising from his compliance with the requirements stipulated in this subclause.

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(57)
DPD (18092003)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-58
1.4

CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT

1.4.1

Provision Of Construction Equipment

Where the Contract comprises 200 or more dwelling and/or commercial units, the Contractor shall
provide for a minimum of one number concrete pump, one number crane and one number rough
terrain forklift to the Site.
Notwithstanding the foregoing requirements, the Contractor shall provide one tower or luffing crane
and one passenger cum material hoist per building block of six storeys and above regardless of the
number of units in the Contract.
The Contractor shall provide formwork system in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications for
the construction of all building blocks.

1.4.2

Technical Specification
(a)

Concrete Pump
The concrete pump shall be either trailer mounted or truck mounted type. The pump shall have
an output of at least 40 m per hour of compacted concrete.
The pump shall be used for casting of slabs from the second storey to the roof of all building
blocks.
The requirement for provision of concrete pump may be waived at the discretion of the SO Rep
if an extra crane over and above the specified requirements is used to transport fresh concrete.

(b)

Crane
The crane shall be either crawler truck mounted, rough terrain or tower crane. The age of the
crane used on the Site shall not exceed 15 years.
The lifting capacity of the crawler truck mounted or rough terrain crane shall be at least
20 metric tonnes.
The moment capacity of the tower crane shall be at least 50 metre-tonnes.
The crane shall be based on the Site during the concreting stage. The concreting stage shall
be defined as the duration of concreting work from the second storey slab to the roof of all
building blocks.

(c)

Passenger Cum Material Hoist

The design of the passenger cum material hoist shall be in accordance with BS 4465 or other
approved equivalent standards. The payload shall be at least one tonne and the travel speed
of the cage shall be at least 25.0 m per minute. For passenger cum material hoist serving
buildings of more than 16 storeys, each hoist shall have a minimum of 2 winches. The
Contractor shall ensure that the foundations, the masts and tie-backs for the passenger cum
material hoist be designed by a PE. The design calculations and detailings shall be certified by
the PE. The Contractor shall also ensure that his PE submit a Certificate of Supervision to the
SO Rep not later than two weeks after the completion of installation of each hoist.
The age of the hoist used on the Site shall not exceed 10 years.
The hoist shall be provided and commissioned for use before concreting the sixth storey of
each building block of six storeys and above.

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(58)
DPD (18092003)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-59
1.4.2

Technical Specification (Cont'd)

(c)

Passenger Cum Material Hoist (Cont'd)

Provide an overloading device to detect and stop the current if the hoist is overloaded.
Provide a siren warning device to warn users that the hoist is ascending or descending.
Provide a "one-way" locking device to the swing gate at every landing of the hoist in
accordance with the details shown in the Drawings or sketch attached.
Provide a bell system for all hoists. The bell shall be loud enough for the hoist operator to hear
whenever the hoist is required at a different level. There shall be a bell activation button at
every storey level for the purpose of calling the hoist operator to bring the hoist to that level.

(d)

Rough Terrain Forklift

The rough terrain forklift shall have a lifting capacity of at least 2 tonnes and a lifting height of at
least 3.6 m.
The rough terrain forklift shall be provided on the Site not later than the completion of
concreting work for the sixth storey slab of the first building block or any other time as
instructed by the SO Rep and shall not be removed without his prior approval.

(e)

Formwork System
Generally, the Contractor shall provide formwork system in accordance with the Drawings and
Specifications. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and design calculations of all
formwork system to the SO Rep for approval within six weeks from the Letter of Acceptance.
Trial setting out of the formwork system shall be carried out on the Site two weeks after
approval of the submission. Formwork support system of beams and slabs shall consist of
rigid steel props or steel frames of adequate strength.

1.4.3

Recovery For Non-Provision

The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses
incurred by him for compliance with the requirements stipulated in this Clause including all
subclauses under it.
In the event of the Contractor not providing all or any of the specified Construction Equipment to the
Site as required under this Clause, including all subclauses under it, without prejudice to the
Employer's rights under the Contract, the Contractor shall be indebted to the Employer at the rate or
rates specified hereunder and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any monies
due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt from the
Contractor :
Type
Concrete Pump
Crane
Passenger cum Material Hoist
Rough Terrain Forklift
Formwork System

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(59)
DPD (18092003)

Rate Recoverable
$100,000 per number
$200,000 per number
$40,000 per number
$60,000 per number
$150,000 per set per building block

Bldg Spec
Page 1-60
1.4.3

Recovery For Non-Provision (Cont'd)

The above rates shall be deemed to have been fully agreed and accepted by the Contractor and
Employer as the costs and expenses allowed by the Contractor for the provision of the specified
Construction Equipment. In addition to the abovementioned recovery, the SO Rep may also exercise
his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor.
In the event the SO Rep approves in writing that all or any of the specified Construction Equipment
need not be provided by the Contractor, the Contractor shall be indebted to the Employer at the rate
or rates specified above in this subclause and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer
from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt
from the Contractor. In such event, the SO Rep may not impose any charge under Clause 1.6
"Nuisance and Irregularities" against the Contractor.
In the event approval in writing is given by the SO Rep for the replacement of a concrete pump with
an extra crane over and above the specified requirement for provision of cranes, there shall be no
recovery by the Employer from the Contractor. In such event, the additional costs arising out of the
replacement shall not be reimbursed by the Employer to the Contractor.
Notwithstanding other provisions in this Clause including all subclauses under it, if the Contractor
incurs additional costs and expenses over and above the agreed rate or rates specified above in
complying with the requirements stipulated in this Clause, the Contractor alone shall bear such
additional costs and expenses in full.
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Clause including all subclauses under it, (including
questions relating to interpretation) shall be determined by the Superintending Officer whose decision
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.

1.4.4

Maintenance
All Construction Equipment provided to the Site shall be kept in good working order at all times and
the Contractor shall comply with all statutory regulations vis-a-vis the said Construction Equipment.
(a)

Mobile Crane
Before operating a mobile crane on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the following :
(i)

Record of latest overhaul servicing of the crane. The latest overhaul servicing of the
crane shall be conducted within one year before transferring it to the Site;

(ii)

Record of checking the connecting devices between parts/components and the

condition of parts/components by an Approved Person. Any Defect found in the
checking shall be rectified immediately; and

(iii)

Certificate of test/thorough visual examination of lifting equipment by the Approved

Person.

The Contractor shall maintain the crane in good working order at all times on the Site.
Document and keep all records and certificates of checking and testing in the site office for
inspection by the SO Rep upon request. The Contractor shall :
(i)

Require a licensed crane operator to check the crane daily before operation.
licensed crane operator shall have a Certificate of Competence;

(ii)

Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the crane once in every three
months; and

(iii)

Engage the Approved Person to carry out test and visual examination on the crane once
in every six months.

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(60)
DPD (18092003)

The

Bldg Spec
Page 1-61
1.4.4

Maintenance (Cont'd)
(b)

Tower Crane
Before operating a tower crane on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the following :
(i)

Record of latest overhaul servicing of the crane. The latest overhaul servicing of the
crane shall be conducted within one year before transferring it to the Site;

(ii)

Record of checking the connecting devices between parts/components and the

condition of parts/components by an Approved Person. Any Defect found in the
checking shall be rectified immediately;

(iii)

Record of checking the installation and functioning of safety devices by the Approved
Person; and

(iv)

Certificate of test/thorough visual examination of lifting equipment by the Approved

Person.

The Contractor shall maintain the crane in good working order at all times on the Site.
Document and keep all records and certificates of checking and testing in the site office for
inspection by the SO Rep upon request. The Contractor shall :
(i)

Require a licensed crane operator to check the crane daily before operation.
licensed crane operator shall have a Certificate of Competence;

The

(ii)

Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the crane once in every three
months;

(iii)

Engage the Approved Person to check the installation and functioning of the safety
devices once in every six months; and

(iv)

Engage the Approved Person to carry out test and visual examination on the crane once
in every six months.

For every extension of height made on the tower mast and before operating the crane with the
new height, the Contractor shall engage the Approved Person to conduct test and thorough
visual examination on the crane.
(c)

Passenger Cum Material Hoist

Before operating a passenger cum material hoist on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the
following :
(i)

Record of latest overhaul servicing of the hoist. The latest overhaul servicing of the
hoist shall be conducted within six months before transferring it to the Site;

(ii)

Record of checking the connecting devices between parts/components and the

conditions of parts/components by an Approved Person. Any Defect found in the
checking shall be rectified immediately; and

(iii)

Certificate of test/thorough visual examination of lifting equipment by the Approved

Person.

The Contractor shall maintain the hoist in good working order at all times on the Site.
Document and keep all records and certificates of checking and testing in the site office for
inspection by the SO Rep upon request. The Contractor shall:
(i)

Require an authorised hoist operator to check and operate the hoist daily before
operation;

(ii)

Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the hoist once in every three
months;

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(61)
DPD (18092003)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-62
1.4.4

Maintenance (Cont'd)
(c)

(d)

Passenger Cum Material Hoist (Cont'd)

(iii)

Engage the Approved Person to check the connecting devices between

parts/components and condition of parts/components once in every three months. Any
Defect found in the checkings shall be rectified immediately; and

(iv)

Engage the Approved Person to carry out test and visual examination on the hoist once
in every three months.

(v)

The swing gates are to be maintained, checked and certified to be in good working
condition by the Approved Person every month.

(vi)

Interlocking gates shall be provided at every lift landing level and they shall comply with
Section 29(3) and 29(4) of the Factories Act.

Approved Person
For the purposes of this Clause including all subclause under it, the Approved Person is any
person who is approved by the Chief Inspector of the Ministry of Manpower by a Certificate in
writing for the purpose of carrying out examinations and tests on lifting equipment in
accordance with Section 29 to 31 of the Factories Act.

1.4.5

Approved Construction Equipment

All Construction Equipment used at the Site as specified hereunder shall be obtained from Approved
Suppliers registered with the Safety Unit, HDB. Such Construction Equipment are :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

mobile crane;
tower crane;
gondola;
mast climbing platform; and
metal scaffold.

The list of Approved Suppliers can be inspected during office hours at the Procurement Office,
Basement 1, HDB Hub, 480 Lorong 6 Toa Payoh, Singapore 310480
For Construction Equipment obtained from other sources, such Construction Equipment shall firstly be
registered with the Safety Unit, HDB before the Contractor can use such Construction Equipment at
the Site.
Where, such Construction Equipment is used at the Site for a duration of less than a week, the
SO Rep may at his sole discretion, waive the aforementioned requirement. Under such a case, there
shall be no adjustment to the Contract Sum.

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(62)
DPD (18092003)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-63
1.5

SAFETY

1.5.1

Site Safety Measures

(a)

General Requirement
The Contractor shall allow for the compliance with the Factories Act (hereafter referred to as
"the Act" for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) and its Subsidiary
Legislation including the provisions of the Factories (Building Operations and Works of
Engineering Construction - BOWEC) Regulations (hereafter referred to as "the Regulations" for
the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) and any amendment or reenactment thereto. Precedent to the commencement of the Works, the Contractor shall first
obtain a Certificate of Registration, under Part III of the Act.
It shall be the duty of the Contractor to comply with all such requirements of the Act and its
Subsidiary Legislation, as affect him or any person or persons employed by him, and as related
to any work, act or operation performed or about to be performed by him. The Contractor shall
not permit any person to do anything not in accordance with the generally accepted principles
of safe and sound practice.
The Contractor shall ensure a safe environment on the Site at all times. All safety provisions
shall be properly maintained and shall not be removed without the written approval of the
SO Rep. The Contractor shall ensure that necessary and sufficient precautions are taken by
his workmen when safety provisions are used. The Contractor shall not allow any of the safety
provisions, to be used unless he has satisfied himself that the provisions are safe. The
Contractor shall submit a safety programme to the SO Rep within 14 days from the date of the
Letter of Acceptance for approval prior to the commencement of the Works.
The submission of the safety programme shall comply with and be submitted on the prescribed
forms obtainable from the Safety Unit, HDB. The safety programme shall be kept in the site
office and made available for reference at all times.
The Contractor shall display safety posters at the site office, site canteen, exit/entry points of
buildings and passenger cum material hoist area.
The Contractor shall submit drawings, detailings and calculation for all temporary structures as
required, certified by his Professional Engineer, for approval at least one week before the
commencement of the Works unless otherwise specified. The approval of the SO Rep shall not
relieve the Contractor and his Professional Engineer of the need to ensure the adequacy and
sufficiency of the safety provisions.
The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all cost and expense for the
safety provisions and for all additional costs that may arise from amendments to the Act and its
Subsidiary Legislation or changes in the requirements of MOM and the Safety Unit, HDB.
The Contractor shall ensure that the requirements of the Regulations and the requirements
specified hereunder are strictly complied with at all times.

(b)

Metal Access Scaffold And Working Platforms

The Contractor shall provide and maintain all metal access scaffold for multi-storey carpark
/garage 4 storeys and above or 12.0m in height and above. This requirement may be waived ,
subject to the approval of the SO Rep, where industrialised or semi-industrialised method of
construction together with peripheral safety nets are employed Under such cases, there shall
be no adjustment to the Contract Sum. The Contractor shall allow free use of the scaffold by all
contractors, sub-contractors, specialists, artisans and other tradesmen employed by the
Emoloyer or the Contractor.
The metal access scaffold shall be of the type approved by the MOM. It shall comply with the
requirements of the Singapore Standard Code of Practice for Scaffolding, CP 14 and any
amendment or re-enactment thereto. The metal access scaffold shall be prezinc galvanised or
other approved by the SO Rep.
The metal access scaffold and any components therein shall be designed according to CP 14
and the Factories (BOWEC) Regulations by a PE employed the Contractor. The Professional
Engineers drawings and calculation shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the
erection and dismantling.

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(63)
DPD (18092003)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-64
1.5.1

(b)

Metal Access Scaffold And Working Platforms (Cont'd)

The scaffolding shall be erected ahead of the structural work (including the construction of
water tank rooms), from the second storey and shall be supported by cantilevered platforms
erected in accordance to the drawings of the Professional Engineer. The cantilevered platforms
shall project about 1.1m from the edge of the building or any other distance approved by the SO
Rep. The scaffold shall be erected to within 300mm of the building edge. Where the structure
does not allow the scaffold to be erected from the second storey or where the building is less
than 12m in height, the Contractor may erect the scaffold from the first storey subject to the
approval of the SO Rep.
The material used for the metal working platform shall be pre zinc galvanised steel and comply
with SS 280. The working platform shall be adequately secured to the scaffolding frame at the
required levels. The connections between working platform and scaffolding frame, and between
the working platforms shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. For any portion of the
working platform where the use of metal is not suitable, the Contractor may use timber platform
subject to the approval of the SO Rep The working platform shall be complete with 200mm high
coloured teoboards and metal guardrails at 1.1m above the platform.
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain an overlying screening net to cover the entire
external face of the scaffold. The installation of the net shall follow the erection of the fence
closely. A 200mm high toeboard shall be provided at the base of the net. After installation,
there shall be no opening between separate sets of the net and any torn net shall be replaced
or repaired immediately. The net shall comply with the following requirements:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

Maximum mesh size (square) : 15mm square

Twine No.
: Minimum 350D
Knot Type
: Single or English knot
Minimum 12 ply

The scaffold shall be effectively tied to the building structure by means of tie-backs. All tie-backs
shall be painted with a bright colour for easy identification.
The scaffold and any components therein shall be erected, or substantially extended to or
dismantled, by qualified erectors, under the immediate supervision of a competent scaffold
supervisor, according to the regulations. The scaffold and its components shall only be
dismantled and removed after the SO Rep has given his permission.
The PE shall satisfy himself that his proposal shall not duly overload the RC structure.
(c)

Prefabricated Mesh Barricade

The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain a vertical prefabricated mesh barricade
(hereafter referred to as mesh barricade for the purpose of this clause including all subclauses
under it) for all peripheral open sides of construction level of building (excluding multi-storey
carpark/garage) where a person is liable to fall from height. Metal access scaffold and working
platforms shall be maintained for multi-storey carpark/garage where a person is liable to fall
from height. Mesh barricade shall be of sound construction and produced in the factory and
installed at the construction level from the inside of the building. Mesh barricade and its support
shall be prezinc galvanised or other approved equivalent by the SO Rep, easily installed and
dismantled, and reusable throughout the construction (super-structure) stage. All external
works of the building (including painting, touching up works, repair and redecoration, and other
minor works) shall be carried out using mechanical suspended scaffold or other vertical access
equipment. As such, workers will not be required to work on the outside of building during the
construction (super-structure) stage.
Mesh barricade, its vertical support and any components therein shall be in modular sizes and
designed according to the Factories (BOWEC) Regulations by a PE employed by the
Contractor. The PEs drawings and calculation shall then be submitted to the SO Rep for
approval within six weeks from the Letter of Acceptance, before installation and use. Trial
setting out of mesh barricade shall be carried out on Site two weeks after approval of
submission.

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(64)
DPD (18092003)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-65
1.5.1

(c)

Prefabricated Mesh Barricade

The mesh barricade shall be erected ahead of the structural work (including the construction of
water tank rooms) from the second storey and held by a supporting system designed by the
said PE. The height of the mesh barricade shall be at least 1.1m above the construction level.
The Contractor and his PE shall ensure that the substrate at which the mesh barricade is
affixed to, can resist the designed imposed loads. The PE shall satisfy himself that his proposal
shall not duly overload the RC structure.
Where necessary, the Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain an overlying screening net
to cover the entire internal face of the mesh barricade. The installation of the net shall follow
the erection of the fence closely. Where necessary, a 200mm high toeboard shall be provided
at the base of the net from the inside of mesh barricade. After installation, there shall be no
opening between separate sets of the net and any torn net shall be replaced or repaired
immediately. The net shall comply with the following requirements:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

Maximum mesh size (square) : 15mm square

Twine No.
: Minimum 350D
Knot Type
: Single or English knot
Minimum 12 ply

The vertical supports of mesh barricade shall be effectively anchored to the building structure.
All vertical supports shall be painted with a bright colour for easy identification.
The mesh barricade shall be erected according to a pre-determined safe work procedure
established by the Contractor, or substantially dismantled, by trained erectors, under the
immediate supervision of a competent supervisor. The mesh barricade and its components
shall only be erected and dismantled by workers using life-line and safety belts or other
equivalent, if not better, means of preventing a fall.
The Contractor shall under no circumstance, use the prefabricated mesh barricade and vertical
supports for other purposes.
(d)

Personal Protective Equipment

The Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable personal protective equipment to all
workmen employed on the Site. The Contractor shall ensure that such personal protective
equipment comply with the requirements of the Regulations. The Contractor shall also ensure
that all equipment are properly used by his workmen during the course of their work. The
Contractor shall record the issuance of all equipment to his workmen.
The forms shall be kept in the site office and made available for inspection at all times. The
colour code of safety helmets provided by the Contractor shall comply with the Factories
(Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction) Regulations. Three mirrors of
sizes 600 mm x 1500 mm are to be installed for the workers to check their personal protective
equipment during Tool Box Meeting. The location of these mirrors are to be approved by the
SO Rep.
The Contractor shall provide life-lines and safety harness for workers who are required to carry
out work within 2m from any open sides; at or near the external of the building blocks, any floor
or top most construction level, lift shafts and void areas or any other locations as directed by
the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
Approved Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) station shall be set up near the site entrance
where the PPE are issued/stored.

(e)

Safety (Anti-Fall) Net

The Contractor shall provide and maintain a safety net system to catch person(s) falling whilst
working in any location from where he would be liable to fall.
The safety net system shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The
Contractor may propose an alternative system, to be certified by his PE, to the SO Rep for
approval.
The safety net shall comply with SS 292 or other approved standards. The net shall be of
sufficient size and strength to catch any person for whose protection it is to be used and the net
shall be so located to cover the area of the possible fall.

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(65)
DPD (18092003)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-66
1.5.1

Site Safety Measures (Cont'd)

(e)

Safety (Anti-Fall) Net (Cont'd)

The Contractor shall conduct a sample test on the safety net system, comprising the net and its
supporting structures, before it is installed. Subsequent tests shall be carried out when
directed by the SO Rep.
For all building blocks of four storeys and above, a peripheral safety net system shall be
provided. Initially the net shall be installed at the second storey. As construction progresses, it
shall be repositioned to follow the topmost working level but shall be kept at not more than
6.0m below it. It shall be removed only with the approval of the SO Rep.
Where access scaffolding is used, or any alternative safety measure approved by the SO Rep
is used, a peripheral safety net system is not required.
The colour of the safety netting shall be approved by the SO Rep. Safety netting of orange
colour shall not be used unless such colour is specifically decided by the SO Rep all at the
Contractor's cost and expense.

(f)

Working Platforms For Lift Shafts, Central Refuse Chute And Voids
The Contractor shall provide working platforms, according to the design of his Professional
Engineer, for the erection of lift shafts and void walls except for central refuse chute. The lift
shaft and central refuse chute platforms shall effectively cover the voids at alternate storeys.
The lift shaft, central refuse chute and void wall platforms shall be left in place until approval is
given by the SO Rep to remove them.

(g)

Overhead Shelters
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain overhead shelters at every point of entry/exit
to buildings of two or more storeys in height. The overhead shelters shall be constructed
immediately below the second storey. The overhead shelters shall project at least 3.0m from
the building edge and shall be at least 1.5m wide. The overhead shelters shall be made of
curved metal roofing with a diameter of at least 1.5m or pitched metal roofing with a slope
greater than one in two, with timber boarding below supported by steel pipes resting on rigid
bases.
The overhead shelter shall be designed in accordance with the relevant statutory requirements
by a PE. The Professional Engineer's drawings, detailings and calculation shall be submitted
for the approval of the SO Rep.
The access to, along and egress from the entry/exit points shall be kept free from obstructions
and accumulation of oil, grease, water and other substances that may cause slipping and
tripping.
Overhead shelters shall also be provided for person(s) exposed to falling objects.

(h)

Peripheral Overhead Shelters

The Contractor shall provide peripheral overhead shelters for buildings of 15.0m or more in
height. It shall be erected in place when the construction reaches the fourth storey slab. The
overhead shelter shall be at least 2.0m wide, and inclined so that the outer edge is at least
150mm higher than the inner edge. The overhead shelter shall be sufficiently strong to support
a weight of at least 75 kg point load.

(i)

Barricades To Lift Openings, Voids, The Open Sides Of Buildings And Excavations
The Contractor shall barricade all lift openings, internal voids, the open sides of buildings and
excavations where a person is liable to fall. The barricade shall be at least 1.1m high with
200mm high toeboard and shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to withstand a lateral point
load of 50 kg. All services opening shall be fully covered and secured to prevent unauthorised
removal.

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(66)
DPD (18092003)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-67
1.5.1

Site Safety Measures (Cont'd)

(j)

Mechanical Suspended Scaffold

Mechanical suspended scaffold system shall only be used for touching up, repair and
redecoration and minor work. Where mechanical suspended scaffold system is to be used, the
Contractor shall first obtain a Certificate of Registration under the Factories Act from MOM and
a written approval from the SO Rep prior to its installation and usage. The mechanical
suspended scaffold system shall comply with the requirements of the Singapore Standard
Code Of Practice For Suspended Scaffold CP20 and any amendment or re-enactment
thereto. Where the use of access scaffolding is not stipulated, suspended scaffold may be
used for finishing Works. Life-lines shall be provided for the mechanical suspended scaffold
users to anchor their safety belts.

(k)

Authorised Operators For Machinery And Vehicles

The Contractor shall employ only qualified operators for his site machinery. The operator for
the machinery shall possess a Skill Evaluation Certificate (SEC) from the Construction Industry
Training Institute (hereinafter referred to as "CITI" for the purposes of this subclause) or other
approved training centre. For those machinery whereby CITI or other approved training centre
does not conduct courses or practical tests for machinery operator, the Contractor shall only
authorise an experienced and trained operator who has at least a minimum of 2 years
experience in operating the machinery.
In the case of vehicles, which are operated within the contract boundary, the authorised
operator shall possess a minimum valid Class 3 driving licence from the Registrar of Vehicles
(Singapore) or its equivalent from their originating countries. The equivalent of a minimum
Class 3 driving licence shall first be verified by the respective embassy in Singapore and
thereafter submitted to the SO Rep for approval.
The Contractor shall record the particulars of the operators for the machinery and vehicles in
the prescribed form and submit to the SO Rep for approval one week before the
commencement of the Works. The prescribed form shall be updated and kept on the Site and
made available for inspection at all times.

(l)

Enhanced Hoarding
Where the buildings under construction are more than 6 stories and less than 30m away from
the Site contract boundary within or next to build-up areas, the Contractor shall provide a 6m
hoarding with an overhead shelter. The design and position of the enhanced hoarding shall be
submitted to the SO Rep for approval. The design and material requirements shall be in
accordance with subclause 1.1.52.2 (or as amended) Erection And Removal Of Temporary
Metal Hoarding. The hoarding shall be cleared away upon the instruction of the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall also barricade all unauthorized entries/exits at first storey open sides by
using at least 1m high orange PVC netting with steel cables going through the top and midheight of the netting. The steel cables shall act as supports for the barricade.

(m)

Safety Training
(i)

Safety Orientation Course

The Contractor shall employ workmen who possess valid Safety Orientation Course
Certificates. The Contractor shall be required to ensure that his workmen attend a
prescribed safety refresher course at an interval of time to be decided by the SO Rep.

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(67)
DPD (18092003)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-68
1.5.1

Site Safety Measures (Cont'd)

(m)

Safety Training (Cont'd)

(ii)

Safety Training Course

When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send his employees/staff as
stipulated hereunder to MOM, CITI or other approved training centre for appropriate
safety training as shown hereunder :
Safety Training Courses Conducted by MOM
Courses

Applicable To

Safety Officers Training Course

Safety Personnel for registration as Safety Officer

Construction Safety Course for

Project Managers

Chairmen of Safety Committees, Project Managers

and Engineers

Safety Management Course

Chairmen of Safety Committees, Managers,

Engineers and Supervisory Staff

Training Course for Safety

Committee Members

Safety Committee Members

Building Construction Safety

Supervisor Course

Building Construction Foremen and Supervisors

SIC (Manhole) for Supervisors

Supervisors

Lifting Supervisors Safety Course

Supervisors and Foremen

Industrial First Aid Course

Workers, Safety Personnel and Supervisors

Industrial First Aid Refresher Course

Trained First Aiders

Safety Training Courses Conducted by

CITI (Construction Industry Training Institute)
Courses
Crawler Crane Operator Course:

New entrant programme

Refresher programme

Familiarisation programme

Applicable To

Crane Operators

Erection of Metal Scaffold

Erectors

Slingers/Riggers Course

Workers, Foremen and Supervisors

Tower Crane Operator Course:

New Entrant Programme

Familiarisation Programme

Crane Operators

Supervision of Metal Scaffold Erection

Supervisors

Climbing Work Platform Operation

Supervisors, workers and operators

Explosive Powered Tools Operation

Workers and Operators

The safety training shall be applicable to all levels of employees/staff stipulated in this
subclause including top management at the work Site.
Particular attention shall be given to the needs of young employees/staff.
training shall be required where :
(1)

Employees/staff are transferred or where employees/staff take on new

responsibilities or where a change in the work activity or work environment could
arise; and

(2)

There is a change in the work equipment or systems of work in use.

Training shall be repeated periodically to ensure continued competence.

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(68)
DPD (18092003)

Further

Bldg Spec
Page 1-69
1.5.1

Site Safety Measures (Cont'd)

(n)

Tower Cranes And Other Tall Construction Equipment

The Contractor shall comply with all height restrictions on the use of tower crane or other tall
Construction Equipment, imposed by the Civil Aviation Authority of Singapore and Ministry of
Defence. In addition, the height clearance of tower crane or other tall Construction Equipment
shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before they are brought to the Site. Force
limiting device, speed limiters and moment limit switches shall be installed for all cranes.
The Contractor shall submit detailed layout drawings and safety requirement of the tower
cranes to MOM and the SO Rep for approval at least one month prior to their installation. The
Safety Factor for tower crane shall have a minimum of 1.3, which includes the built-in factor of
safety for the tower crane. The Lifting load shall include the weight of the component, the
spreader beam and the lifting device. The tip-load shall have the capacity to hoist the heaviest
component including the necessary lifting appliances. The slewing radii of the tower cranes
shall not overlap, unless the tower cranes are equipped with an anti-collision system. It is not
permitted to be hoisted over temporary building structures, outside the contract boundary and
other sensitive areas. The slewing limit switch shall be activated to stop the slewing action
before the jib slews into the overlap zone.
The jib of a tower crane shall not be allowed to slew outside the contract boundary lines without
the written approval of the SO Rep. The free standing mast of the tower crane must be
certified by the Contractor's PE prior to its use on the Site.
The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and calculations of the type of foundation
support and the tie-back for the tower crane, duly endorsed by his PE, together with technical
information to the SO Rep for approval. The Contractor's PE shall certify that the free standing
height of the mast is structurally adequate and sound before the tie-back is installed. No tower
crane shall be installed and supported on the constructed RC structure of a building.

(o)

Access For The Use Of Mobile Crane And Piling Machines Next To Built-Up Area
Where the Contractor uses mobile cranes and piling machines on the Site which is next to
existing buildings or public roads or MRT lines, the access for the mobile cranes and piling
machines shall be of steel plates or reinforced concrete or bituminous pavement as approved
by the SO Rep. All such access shall be provided over adequate compacted hardcore base.
The Contractor shall provide full access for the movement of the cranes and piling machines
and for their lifting or pile driving operations. The access shall be able to distribute the load so
as not to exceed the bearing capacity of the underlying materials.
The Contractor shall engage a PE to design the access. The drawings and calculations
endorsed by the PE shall be submitted for approval by the SO Rep before the construction of
the access. The access shall be constructed according to the approved Drawings and
maintained in a good condition at all times throughout the Time for Completion and any time
period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The access shall be
inspected by the Contractor's PE prior to its use.

(p)

Warning Signs And Lights

The Contractor shall display warning signs of sizes 900 mm x 600 mm at strategic points
around the periphery of the Site where trespassing is likely to occur. Such signs shall have the
words "DANGER - KEEP OUT" in the four official languages in red on white background with
reflective material and approved by the SO Rep. Warning lights shall be placed at similar
positions at night to serve as a warning.
If work is carried out near public roads, all signage shall comply with the recommendations of
the Temporary Road Signage Manual issued by the Land Transport Authority.

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(69)
DPD (18092003)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-70
1.5.1

Site Safety Measures (Cont'd)

(q)

Mobile Crane
The Contractor shall submit layout and details of the crane access to the SO Rep for approval
prior to the use of the crane on the access. The Contractor shall ensure and check that the
crane access is properly constructed. The Contractor shall keep all records of inspections of
the crane access at the Site and produce them for examination when requested by the
SO Rep. The boom of the mobile crane with hoisted load shall not be allowed to swing outside
the contract boundary without the written approval of the SO Rep. All the hoisting area must
be effectively barricaded.
The Contractor shall ensure the installation of barriers to warn the crane operator of
depressions, excavated areas and other obstructions.
Moment limiters shall be installed for all cranes. The Safety Factor for mobile crane shall have
a minimum of 1.3, which includes the built-in factor of safety for the mobile crane. The lifting
load shall include the weight of the component, the spreader beam and the lifting device. The
tip-load shall have the capacity to hoist the heaviest component including all necessary lifting
appliances. A Permit-To-Hoist must be obtained before any hoisting operation is carried out.
The Contractor shall station a lifting supervisor on the Site to oversee and guide the crane
operator during positioning, hoisting and slewing. The cranes shall be tested by an "Approved
Person" before its use on the Site irrespective of any valid test certificate. The Contractor shall
ensure daily checks are carried out by the crane operator and maintenance checks conducted
once every three months. The crane must have overhaul checks before it is used on the Site.
Test certificate, overhaul certificates, maintenance certificates, inspection records by the crane
operator, data on the Approved Persons and the Contractor's site engineer shall be properly
documented, kept on the Site and produced for inspection by the SO Rep.

(r)

Crane Operator, Lifting Supervisor, Rigger And Signalman

The Contractor shall comply with the Factories (Operation of Cranes) Regulations 1998. He
shall appoint at least one full time lifting supervisor to supervise all lifting operations of any
crane for the Site. However, where more than one crane is used on the Site, the number of
lifting supervisor employed by the Contractor shall be increased as required by the SO Rep. No
lifting activity shall be allowed without the supervision of the lifting supervisor.
The lifting supervisor shall have a minimum of 3 years of experience in construction work and
lifting operations. He must be a site foreman or site engineer and possesses a certificate on
Safety Instruction Course for Lifting Supervisor. He shall spend his time fully on all lifting
activities and ensure that unsafe conditions are rectified.
For lifting operation within the Site which is next to existing buildings, public roads or MRT
lines, the crane operator shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the operation of
cranes. For lifting operation within the site not next to existing buildings, public roads or MRT
lines, the crane operator shall have a minimum of 2 years experience in the operation of
cranes.
Riggers and signalmen shall also be appointed for all lifting operations and they must have
completed an approved training course.
The crane operator, lifting supervisor, rigger and signalman shall carry out their duties strictly
according to the abovementioned Regulations and other duties as the SO Rep deems
necessary from time to time.
The Contractor shall submit a list of crane operators, lifting supervisors, riggers and signalmen
with their names, identification card or passport numbers, qualifications and years of
experience to the SO Rep for approval one week before the use of the crane. The list shall be
updated and kept on the Site at all times. The SO Rep reserves the right to examine the list as
and when required.

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(70)
DPD (18092003)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-71
1.5.1

Site Safety Measures (Cont'd)

(s)

Temporary Staircases
The Contractor shall provide and maintain 0.8m minimum wide temporary metal staircases
from one working floor to another. The staircases shall be placed against the adjacent
staircase walls or formwork of the staircase walls that are under construction. The outer sides
of the staircases shall be provided with metal handrails 1.1m above the outer staircase strings.
The bottom of the staircases shall be covered fully with metal plate.
The Contractor shall engage a PE to design the staircases. The Professional Engineer's
drawings, detailings and calculation shall be submitted for approval by the SO Rep before the
construction of the staircases.

(t)

Safety Information Signboard And Assembly Stage

The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain a Safety Information Signboard and Assembly
Stage. The signboard shall be of 6.0m x 3.0m steel frame and a flat roof of 1m shall be
provided to cover the entire length. The signboard shall consist of safety posters, safety theme
and pictures, safety news, photos of good safety measures, names of site safety equipment
and machinery suppliers. The safety posters, news and photos shall be protected from
weathering. The arrangement and size of display of all items referred herein shall be approved
by the SO Rep.
The stage shall be constructed in front of the signboard and made of concrete. The stage shall
consist of a raised platform of 4.5m x 1.0m with at least one step.
The signboard and stage shall be designed in accordance with the relevant statutory
requirements by a PE. The Professional Engineer's drawings, detailings and calculation shall
be submitted for the approval of the SO Rep.
The location of the signboard and stage shall be approved by the SO Rep. As and when
instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remove or relocate and reconstruct the
signboard and stage, and reinstate all the affected ground to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all
at the cost and expense of the Contractor. On Substantial Completion of the Works, the
signboard and stage shall be cleared away upon the approval of the SO Rep.

(u)

Gas Cylinders and Related Equipment

The Contractor shall use gas cylinders fitted with a low pressure gauge and a high pressure
gauge, a reducing valve with pressure regulator, and safety relief device. The gas cylinders
shall not be kept in the same room where welding, cutting or heating is being carried out or
placed within five metres of any source of heat. The gas cylinders must always be kept upright
in a wheeled-trolley.
The hose connecting a gas cylinder to an apparatus for cutting, welding, heating or other
related works shall be of good construction and sound material, free from Defect, properly
maintained, and not entangled or kinked.
A flashback arrester or any other similar device which stops flashback that is acceptable to the
Chief Inspector must be fitted at every outlet of a gas cylinder and every inlet of an apparatus.
The gas cylinders and hoses shall be colour-coded to conform to SS 152 : Indentification of
Contents of Industrial Gas Containers or any amendments thereof.
The Contractor shall engage a competent person to check the safety devices referred herein
once in every 6 months. The competent person is any person who is competent by education,
training and experience on the safety and operational aspects of the use of gas cylinders and
related equipment.

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(71)
DPD (18092003)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-72
1.5.1

Site Safety Measures (Cont'd)

(v)

Socket Outlet Assembly

The Contractor shall provide, install and maintain the socket-outlet assembly (hereinafter
referred to as "SOA" for the purpose of this subclause) for all temporary electrical installations.
The SOA shall be manufactured in accordance with CP 88:2001:Part 1 (Code of Practice For
Temporary Electrical Installations in Construction & Building Sites). It shall be designed for
wall mounting or fitted with castors so that it can be moved around on the Site. Every electrical
equipment used shall be plugged directly into the industrial SOA.

(w)

Others
The Contractor shall provide and maintain guards or fences or barriers around excavations, lift
pits or other similar potential places of danger to prevent accidents. The guards, fences and
barriers shall be of sound material, good construction and possess adequate strength.
At the site entrance gate, the Contractor shall provide a gantry fitted with a height control
device and a siren to control the height limit of construction vehicle/machinery when they leave
the Site. This limit shall comply with the requirements of LTA.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain storey number indicators of size 400mm x 400mm at
every staircase area and 900mm x 900mm at the metal scaffold enclosing passenger cum
material hoist. The indicators shall be displayed at alternate storeys starting from the second
storey.

1.5.2

Safety Infringement
The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for complying with the
safety requirements.
The SO Rep will conduct periodic inspections on the provision of safety measures with the
Contractor's site safety supervisor or the Contractor's Representative. The Contractor shall rectify
immediately any contravention of or non-compliance with the Factories Act and its Subsidiary
Legislation or safety measures specified. All Works or part of the Works may be stopped when the
SO Rep considers the working environment or procedure is unsafe for Works to continue. In such
event, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose
charges against the Contractor and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for
compensation or extension of Time for Completion.
If the contravention is not rectified by the subsequent inspection, the SO Rep may exercise his right
under clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a further charge against the Contractor.
Upon any accident or dangerous occurrence, occurring on the Site, the SO Rep or any Competent
Authority may order a total or partial stoppage of the Works, depending on the nature and extent of
the accident/dangerous occurrence, to allow for investigations and/or to carry out remedial measures.
Under such cases, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for compensation or extension of
Time for Completion.
The SO Rep shall, at its absolute discretion, also exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and
Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for the following type of incidents occurring in
the course of or arising out of or in consequence of the Works :
(i)

Fatal accident, if the SO Rep or Competent Authority is of the opinion that the accident is the
result of the defaults, acts, omissions or negligence, in part or in whole, of the Contractor;

(ii)

Accident injuring a person or persons, if the SO Rep or Competent Authority is of the opinion
that the accident is the result of objects falling from height; and

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(72)
DPD (18092003)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-73
1.5.2

1.5.3

Safety Infringement (Cont'd)

(iii)

Other accident which the SO Rep or Competent Authority is of the opinion that the accident is
the result of failure of the Contractor to provide necessary and sufficient safety measures
stipulated in the Contract or the Factories Act and its Subsidiary Legislation.

(iv)

Dangerous occurrence as classified in the Fourth Schedule of the Factories Act, if the SO Rep
or the Competent Authority is of the opinion that the dangerous occurrence is the result of
failure of the Contractor to provide necessary and sufficient safety measures stipulated in the
Contract or the Factories Act and its Subsidiary Legislation.

Reporting Of Accidents and Dangerous Occurrence

In the case of an accident or a dangerous occurrence, as classified under Section 51 and in the
Fourth Schedule respectively of the Factories Act including any amendment or re-enactment thereto,
the Contractor shall notify the Safety Unit, HDB by telephone at 8497203/4 or by facsimile
transmission at 7598790 within one hour of such accident or dangerous occurrence.
Upon receipt of information of an accident or dangerous occurrence, the Safety Unit, HDB shall at its
discretion make a preliminary investigation of the circumstances and record its finding upon such
investigation.
Notwithstanding the aforementioned requirements, the Contractor shall in addition, make a written
notice in the form set out in the INCIDENT NOTICE - HDB and submit it to the Safety Unit, HDB within
10 working days of the accident or dangerous occurrence. The form is obtainable at the Safety Unit,
HDB.
Upon submitting the INCIDENT NOTICE to the Safety Unit, HDB, the Contractor shall arrange for the
injured workman, witnesses and an interpreter, if necessary, to report to the Safety Unit, HDB to
furnish evidence relating to the accident or dangerous occurrence.
If the Contractor fails to give any required notice or fails to furnish evidence of the accident or
dangerous occurrence as required under this subclause, the SO Rep may at his absolute discretion
exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Contractor.

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(73)
DPD (18092003)

Bldg Spec
Page 1-74
1.6

NUISANCE AND IRREGULARITIES

If the Contractor is found to have committed any of the following irregularities :
(i)

Omitting building materials or labour, reducing the sizes of the materials, using inferior
materials; or materials constructed not according to the Specifications or Drawings;

(ii)

Creating nuisance at the Site thereby causing inconvenience to the SO Rep or the public or
committing similar acts (such as not complying with site safety requirements, etc.) which are
likely to bring the Employer into disrepute;

(iii)

Non-compliance with any part of the Specifications or Drawings, or non-fulfilment of any

contractual obligation.

the SO Rep reserves the right to impose on the Contractor, and the Contractor hereby fully accepts
and agrees to pay without dispute or question, a charge based on prevailing guidelines set by the
Employer but not exceeding $100,000/-, and for contract with a Contract Sum of less than $300,000/-,
a charge not exceeding 30% of the Contract Sum per occasion as agreed compensation to the
Employer for the inconvenience caused, investigation and administrative expenses incurred by the
Employer and for damage to the Employer's reputation and standing generally. Furthermore, the
Contractor may be barred from tendering for a specified period.
In addition to the above charges, the SO Rep is empowered either :
(a)

to order any irregular work to be removed and made good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at
the Contractor's own costs and expenses;
or

(b)

in lieu of correcting work not done in accordance with the Contract, the SO Rep may allow such
work to remain and shall recover any cost differences between the specified requirements and
the non-compliance.

For nuisance committed on the Site, the Contractor shall take immediate action to cease the nuisance
committed upon instruction given by the SO Rep.

Total pages for this Section :

72

Section 2/.....

ID: SS/BLDG03/S72.DOC(74)
DPD (18092003)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Bldg Spec
Page 2-1
SECTION 2
PILING

2.1

GENERAL
Where reinforced concrete piling are to be provided as required under the Contract, the Contractor shall
provide all materials, labour, Construction Equipment, tools and everything necessary for the proper
execution of piling Works under the supervision of the SO Rep.

2.2

PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE PILING WORK

2.2.1

Piling System And Layouts

Where precast reinforced concrete piles are included in the Works, submit the system of piling and furnish
the following drawings and information :
(a)

Pile layout plans.

(b)

System and type of piling offered, with detailed drawings, design calculation and complete
description. The proposed system shall comply with BS 8004, "Code of Practice for Foundations".

(c)

Cross-section dimensions of piles.

(d)

Maximum length to which piles can be driven below ground level.

(e)

Nominal working load which can be carried by the pile assuming complete resistance to further
penetration has been obtained.

(f)

Detail of steel reinforcement of piles.

(g)

28-day strength of concrete in piles which shall be guaranteed by the Contractor.

(h)

Detail of pile shoe and joint splicing.

Pile layout drawings proposed shall ensure complete safety and stability of structures. Column loading
plans which show all the sizes and loadings on each column, issued by the Employer shall be used in
preparing pile layouts. (This requirement is not applicable to piles for Inspection Chambers and Drainlines)
Each pile layout drawing shall contain the cut-off level of every pile.
Failure to comply with the above may render the tender to be rejected.
The pile shall be designed to a working stress of 7.5 N per mm2 in axial compression.
Minimum 28-day strength of concrete in the piles which shall be guaranteed by the Contractor shall be
fixed at 40 N per mm2.
2.2.2

Penetration Of Driven Piles

Where precast reinforced concrete piles are included in the Works, the penetration of driven piles shall be
the actual length measured from the bottom tip to the cut-off level of the driven piles. The penetration of
every pile shall be recorded by the Employer's representatives and the Contractor and endorsed by the
SO Rep. The concrete pile shall be marked with red paint at every 1m interval to enable easy
determination of pile penetration.

BLDG04/S2.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 2-2
2.2.3

Precast Concrete Piles

Precast concrete piles can be non-prestressed or prestressed. The design, manufacturing, handling,
transportation, lifting and driving shall be in accordance with BS 8004, 'Code of Practice for Foundations'.
The position of lifting points shall be clearly specified. The piling system proposed shall be verified by
design calculation that the pile section and area of steel required shall be sufficient to safely resist all
stresses arising from handling, transportation, driving and lifting, and in no case shall the percentage
of area of steel to pile cross-section be less than 1% for non-prestressed concrete pile, and 0.3% for
prestressed concrete pile using high tensile strength tendons.
The details for splicing of pile sections and method of splicing shall be submitted and for the approval of
the SO Rep. Joints shall be designed to resist possible uplift due to nominal eccentric moment of column.

2.2.4

Materials For Precast RC Piles

All materials used for precast RC piles shall where appropriate, comply with Section 4 "Structural
Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

2.2.5

Pile Hammer And Set

Where piles are included in the Works, impact hammer, either single-acting or double-acting, or hydraulic
hammer shall be used in driving piles. However, diesel drop hammers shall not be used. The hammer
shall be capable of producing sufficient kinetic energy to drive the piles to the required set without causing
damage. The type of hammer and the height of drop of the hammer shall be first approved by the SO
Rep. If hydraulic hammer is used, ensure that the hydraulic hammer provided is suitable for the piling of
all sizes of reinforced concrete piles without causing damage.
The allowable set for the final 10 blows of piles, which is dependent on factors such as pile size, pile
penetration, hammer size and subsoil condition, etc. shall be proposed by the Contractor based on
"Hiley's Formula" and shall be approved by the SO Rep before being adopted as a criterion on the Site.
The ultimate resistance of all piles shall be a minimum of 3 times the given nominal working load of the
pile section. The onus for obtaining the required resistance shall rest with the Contractor.

2.2.6

Construction Equipment And Experience For Driving Piles

Submit together with the Tender, a progress schedule and full details of the Construction Equipment to be
committed on the Site. A resume showing the experience of the Contractor and operators in piling work
may also be submitted.

2.2.7

Casting Yard
At least one month before the commencement of piling Works, submit to the SO Rep for approval of the
following :

2.2.8

(a)

location and contact number of casting yard;

(b)

date of casting;

(c)

type, length and number of piles to be cast;

(d)

pile design drawing(s) (if alternative systems of piling are used).

Warranty
Where precast reinforced concrete piles are included in the Works, the Contractor shall be responsible
for the proper execution of the piling Works in accordance with the Specifications and the pile layout
Drawings. Any damage or Defect to the super-structure, inspection chambers and drain-lines resulting
from defective execution of the piling Works shall be made good by the Contractor at his own costs and
expenses to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The warranty period shall be one year after the completion
of the super-structure.

BLDG04/S2.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 2-3
2.2.9

Driving Of Piles
No pile shall be driven before concrete reaches its 28-day working cube strength. Notwithstanding the
earlier achievement of the specified 28-day strength, no pile shall be driven until a period of at least 14
days has elapsed after casting of the pile. Approved piles shall be driven accurately in the correct
locations true to line both laterally and longitudinally as indicated in the Drawings.
Piles shall be guided at the top and bottom during driving and shall be suitably constrained to maintain
their correct position by means of guides. No pile which has been deflected from its course, or has been
wrongly aligned may be forcibly brought back to correct alignment except with the written approval of the
SO Rep.
A dolly shall not be used as an aid to driving a pile to its final penetration unless approval has been
obtained from the SO Rep. Where a dolly is used, the allowable set for the final blows of a pile shall be
reduced to account for higher energy loss in the dolly-pile head system. The magnitude of the reduction
shall be determined by site observation and shall not be less than 25 percent.
The centre of each pile shall not deviate from its true position as shown in the Drawings by more than
75mm. The Contractor shall execute and bear the cost of amendment of pile caps, ground beams and
other structural work designed to counter pile eccentricities exceeding the permissible tolerance, as
directed. Alternately the SO Rep may direct compensating piles to be driven at the Contractor's own costs
and expenses.

2.2.10

Raking Pile
For raking piles, the piling rig shall be set and maintained to attain the specified inclination. The maximum
permissible deviation of the installed pile from the specified inclination shall be 1 in 40.

2.2.11

Piling Record
Piles shall only be driven in the presence of the SO Rep. The penetration and set of every pile shall be
subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. Record of driving for every pile shall be submitted to the SO
Rep on site and a copy to be kept by the Contractor. The record shall include the following items :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)

Set
temporary compression
penetration from ground level
length of pile and size of section
ground level
cut-off level to the top of pile
time of starting and time of completion

The method of measuring set and temporary compression shall be approved by the SO Rep. The above
record shall show a series of sets and temporary compression measured during the whole process of
driving. Once the driving of a pile commences, it shall continue until the final penetration or set is
reached.
2.2.12

Damaged Or Rejected Piles

All piles which are cracked, broken, or damaged in any manner during transportation, handling or driving
shall be rejected. All piles driven unduly out of position, or driven out of plumb in excess of 1 in 75, or if no
set can be obtained after driving for a considerable length well in excess of estimated penetration based
on soil data and site condition, shall be rejected.
In situation where a dolly is used, the pile shall be rejected if it does not achieve the allowable set and the
full length of the dolly has been utilised to drive the pile.

BLDG04/S2.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 2-4
2.2.13

Compensating Piles
All piles driven into ground and rejected shall be replaced with compensating pile or piles at the
Contractor's own costs and expenses. The position and number of compensating pile(s) as decided by
the SO Rep shall be such that the concentricity of the pile group is not altered. The Employer will only pay
the cost for the original number and size of pile(s) in the pile group as shown in the Drawings. In the
computation for payment, the size of the original pile as shown in the Drawings and the paylength of the
compensating pile shall be taken. If two or more compensating piles are used to replace the rejected pile,
the computation shall be based on the size of the original pile as shown in the Drawings and the shortest
paylength of the compensating pile (which compensate the particular rejected pile, as decided by the SO
Rep). If there are two or more rejected piles in the same pile group and there is no indication which
compensating piles are for which rejected piles (as decided by the SO Rep), the computation for payment
shall be based on the sizes of the original piles as shown in the Drawings and the two or more shortest
paylength of the compensating piles.

2.2.14

Removal Of Obstructions Of Piling

In the course of piling, only the removal of natural obstruction beyond 2.0m below the ground surface shall
be paid for by the Employer based on the Rates and only if the SO Rep is satisfied that the Contractor has
made every effort to proceed with piling by avoiding the obstruction. Any excavation for obstruction not
exceeding 2.0m, including restoring of ground surrounding the piles, and any other works necessary to
complete the operation to the satisfaction of the SO Rep shall be at the Contractor's own cost and
expense. The foregoing provisions shall be applicable to piling Works only. For all other Works, other
provisions specified in the Contract shall prevail.

2.2.15

Cutting Of Piles
Excavate and cut off the pile to the required level shown on the pile layout Drawings or otherwise directed
by the SO Rep. Checking and recording of cut-off level shall be followed up immediately. Precast
concrete pile shall be stripped to the cut-off level to expose the longitudinal reinforcement bars leaving the
dressed head of the pile projecting 75mm into the pilecap. The longitudinal steel shall be left projecting
600mm above the dressed head level and cast into the pilecap.
In the cutting of piles, the Contractor shall employ a Registered Surveyor to be responsible for the
measurement of pile eccentricities and cut-off levels, including those for compensating piles, and to check
and endorse the pile eccentricity drawings for submission to the SO Rep. The Contractor shall make
available all facilities and equipment for the SO Rep to confirm the measurement.

2.2.16

Completion Of Piling Work

Where precast reinforced concrete piles are included in the Works, piling Works to a building block,
inspection chambers and drain-lines shall only be considered complete if the piles are piled, excavated,
cut-off, checked and recorded in the pile layout drawings for eccentricities and levels and compensated for
rejected piles.

2.2.17

Pile Load Test

As and when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall conduct pile load tests for the precast concrete
piling Works. The Contractor shall be paid for the test valued at the Rates unless the cost of such tests
have been included in other Rates in the Valuation of Piling Works.
The frequency of ultimate load test and working load test shall be decided by the SO Rep. The Contractor
shall provide adequate facilities, equipment and labour for the tests.
For ultimate load test, a pile of selected size installed separately from the working piles and in a position
selected by the SO Rep, shall be loaded as specified by the SO Rep until it reaches 3 times the nominal
working load or to failure. When required by the SO Rep, ultimate load test pile shall be driven and tested
completely before the driving of any working pile.

BLDG04/S2.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 2-5
2.2.17

Pile Load Test (Cont'd)

Working load test shall be conducted on working piles by loading the piles to twice their nominal working
loads.
As and when required, the Contractor shall be directed to conduct dynamic pile test. The Contractor shall
be paid for the test including all necessary analysis according to the Rates or other rates.

2.2.18

Loading Of Test Pile

The test load may be applied to the pile either by direct load placed on a platform bearing on the pile, or
by Kentledge heavier than the required test load on a platform supported clear of the pile under test and
brought to bear on the pile by the reaction of a jack. Sufficient Kentledge heavier than the anticipated
loading and platform for the Kentledge shall be provided by the Contractor.
All testing equipment such as level, dial gauge, hydraulic jack, shall be in accurate and sound condition.
The rigidity of the supports at all corners of the supporting platform shall be ensured.
The levels of the selected test piles shall be recorded immediately before the erection of the Kentledge
platform. This shall be done by reading levels on 2 diagonally opposite corners of the prepared firm and
level datum.
The test load shall be imposed by equal increment of 5 tonnes at approved time intervals until the full test
load is reached.
The settlement for each load increment shall be measured and recorded to an accuracy of not more than
0.5mm from an immovable datum not affected by any movement of the ground due to the test loading,
driving of piles or any other causes.

2.2.19

Ultimate Load Test Piles

An Ultimate Load Test Pile shall be defined as a pile of selected size installed separately from the working
piles and in a position directed by the SO Rep and it shall be loaded as specified until it reaches 3 times
nominal working load or fails before it reaches this load.
The Ultimate Load Test Pile when required by the SO Rep shall be driven and tested as early as possible
before the driving of working piles.
The cap shall be prepared for ultimate load test and kentledge erected or at hand ready for loading the
pile not later than one week after the driving of the pile.
The total settlement of the ultimate load test shall not exceed :
(i)

25mm at 2 times nominal working load, and

(ii)

40mm at 3 times nominal working load

If the total settlement exceed the foregoing requirements, the test shall be deemed to have failed. A
further test shall then be carried out at the Contractor's own cost and expense including any consequent
standing time until an Ultimate Load Test has passed the foregoing requirements.
2.2.20

Working Load Test

Working Load Test shall be conducted on working piles by loading the piles to twice their nominal working
loads. The Contractor shall commence testing only upon the instruction of the SO Rep. Upon the
selection of a test pile, prepare for the test without any delay. All selected test piles shall be tested within
two weeks from the date of selection.

BLDG04/S2.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 2-6
2.2.21

Pile Load Test Report

The Contractor shall submit two sets of test report at the end of the load test. The format of the report
shall be approved by the SO Rep.

2.2.22

Failure Of Working Load Test

A working load test shall be deemed to have failed if the settlement exceed 25mm at 2 times the nominal
working load.
If a working test pile fails to sustain the full working test load over a period of not less than 3 days as
decided by the SO Rep, then 2 further tests on other piles at the same site selected by the SO Rep shall
be carried out. Where a pile fails under test, additional adjacent piles, as directed by the SO Rep, shall be
driven and the group re-tested if deemed necessary by the SO Rep, and the whole of the work shall be
carried out at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. That part of the Works shall be deemed to have
failed if 2 or more piles fail out of a piling area containing up to 150 piles, or 3 or more piles fail out of a
piling area containing 151 to 750 piles.
In the event of such failure, the Contractor shall, at his own cost and expense, carry out sufficient further
piling to the satisfaction of the SO Rep to ensure the safety of the structures carried by the rejected piles.

2.2.23

As-Built Drawings
After the completion of the piling work, provide three copies of 'as-built' (eccentricity) drawings to the SO
Rep. The 'as-built' (eccentricity) drawings shall be prepared and signed by a licensed surveyor.

2.2.24

Noise Limit At Piling Site

The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Environment Public Health (Control of Noise
from Construction Sites) Regulation 1990, in respect of work that affects the public.
Set up equipment to measure and record the noise level generated from the piling site as and when
required. The duration and other details of such monitoring shall be specified by the ENV or the relevant
Authorities and noise reading records may be required to be submitted to the ENV or the relevant
Authorities.
In the event of any partial or total stoppage of work as ordered by the ENV or the relevant Authorities due
to noise nuisance, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for compensation; loss; expenses or
profits; or extension of Time for Completion.

2.2.25

Vibration And Crack Monitoring

The Contractor shall be required to carry out vibration and crack monitoring at his own cost and expense
when piling works are to be carried out close to existing buildings or when public complaints have been
received.
The number and location as well as the duration of the vibration and crack monitoring shall be decided by
the SO Rep.
The vibration monitoring shall measure the peak particle velocity (mm per second) and frequency of the
vibration. Acceleration and displacement values shall also be derived from the transducer operating range
chart if requested by the SO Rep.
Tell-tale crack meters shall be installed as and when necessary, to monitor movement across cracks in
vertical and horizontal directions.
Four sets of the comprehensive reports shall be submitted within 2 weeks after the completion of the
monitoring Works.

BLDG04/S2.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 2-7
2.3

Timber Piling For Inspection Chambers And Drain Lines

2.3.1

Piling System And Layouts

Submit system of piling and furnish the following drawings and information :
(a)

Submit pile layout plans.

(b)

System and type of piling offered, with detailed drawings, design calculation and complete
description. The proposed system should comply with BS 8004, "Code of Practice for
Foundations".

(c)

Maximum length to which piles can be driven below ground level.

(d)

Nominal working load which can be carried by the pile assuming complete resistance to further
penetration has been obtained.

Each pile layout drawing shall contain cut-off level of every pile.
Failure to comply with the above may render the tender to be rejected.
2.3.2

Construction Equipment And Experience For Driving Piles

Submit together with the Tender, a progress schedule and full details of the Construction Equipment to be
committed on the Site. A resume showing the experience of the Contractor and operators in piling work
may also be submitted.

2.3.3

Penetration Of Driven Piles

The penetration of driven piles shall be the actual length measured from the bottom tip to the cut-off level
of the driven piles. The penetration of every pile shall be recorded by the Contractor in the presence of
the SO Rep. The timber piles shall be marked with red paint at every 300mm or other suitable interval to
enable easy determination of pile penetration.

2.3.4

Timber Piles
Timber piles specified shall be from the HDB List of Approved Materials And Suppliers and of approved
brands/trademarks.
Timber piles shall be 125mm x 125mm square sawn timber foundation piles with an allowable tolerance of
2
5mm, produced from the species Kempas or Keruing. The safe working load shall be 8.5 N per mm in
direct compressive stress and with an ultimate resistance of all piles of not less than 3 times the nominal
working load.
The centre line of pile shall not deviate from the straight line joining the mid points of the butt and toe by
more than 25mm for any pile up to 6m in length, or 38mm for pile over 6m in length.
Use only timber piles produced under the ISO 9000 or PSB (Singapore Quality Mark/Product Listing
Scheme) Certification Scheme Suppliers.
Each batch of piles delivered to the Site shall be subjected to random sampling, for testing by an SAC
accredited laboratory, in accordance with the following frequency :
(i)

For every contract supply, a minimum of two tests;

(ii)

For supply up to 1,000 metre run, the first test will be carried out from any batch of piles,
subsequent test will be made at each interval of 1,000 metre run, the number of test will depend on
the quantity of supply but subject to a minimum of two tests for each contract as stated in (i) above.

BLDG04/S2.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 2-8
2.3.4

Timber Piles (Contd)

All piles shall be pressure-treated with copper-chrome-arsenic wood preservative under a pressure of not
less than 12.5 kg per cm2, with minimum depth of penetration of preservative of 25mm and with a net dry
salt retention in the outermost 25mm of pile of not less than 16kg per m3. All methods of chemical
treatment and testing shall be in accordance with SS 72 : 1988 or BS 4072. The SO Rep shall exercise
his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for
each test that fails to comply with the above requirement.
In the event that any test by SAC accredited laboratory resulted in failure, remove the batch of piles from
which the random sampling is obtained completely from the Site. Should the Contractor negligently or
wilfully transport the same batch that had failed previously to the Site again, this act shall be deemed to be
an infringement and Clause 1.6 "Nuisance & Irregularities" shall apply.

2.3.5

Steel Box Joint

Join two piles by using a mild steel welded box joint 450mm long made from 4.5mm thick plate and coat
with bituminous paint and approved by the SO Rep before use.

2.3.6

Pile Hammer And Set for Pile Driving

Use free drop hammer to drive the timber pile. The hammer weight for driving 125mm x 125mm pile shall
be 1 tonne.
The hammer shall drop a minimum of 1300mm. The acceptable set for the last 10 blows for 125mm x
125mm pile shall be not more than 20mm.
The ultimate resistance of all piles shall be a minimum of 3 times the given nominal working load of the
pile section. The onus for obtaining the required resistance shall rest with the Contractor.

2.3.7

Warranty
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper execution of the piling Works in accordance with the
Specifications and the pile layout Drawings. Any damage or Defect to the inspection chambers and main
drain lines resulting from defective execution of the piling Works shall be made good by the Contractor at
his own costs and expenses to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

2.3.8

Driving Of Piles
Approved piles shall be driven accurately in the correct locations true to line both laterally and
longitudinally as indicated in the Drawings.
Piles shall be guided at the top and bottom during driving and shall be suitably constrained to maintain
their correct position by means of guides. No pile which has been deflected from its course, or has been
wrongly aligned may be forcibly brought back to correct alignment except with the written approval of the
SO Rep.
The centre of each pile shall not deviate from its true position as shown in the Drawings by more than
25mm. The Contractor shall execute and bear all additional costs of the amendment in pile caps, ground
beams, etc designed as a countermeasure to the pile eccentricities exceeding the permissible tolerance,
as directed. Alternately the SO Rep may direct compensating piles to be driven at the Contractor's own
costs and expenses.
During driving, protect the heads of all piles with the helmet of mild steel fitting closely around the pile. A
25mm thick plywood covering the head of the pile shall be contained within the helmet to separate the
helmet from the head of the pile.
Rigidly & securely join all piles with metal box joints. The joints shall be driven to a tight fit with the pile
hammer and spiked to the section of both piles.

BLDG04/S2.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 2-9
2.3.9

Piling Record
Piles shall only be driven in the presence of the SO Rep. The penetration and set of every pile shall be
subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. Record of driving for every pile shall be submitted to the SO
Rep and a copy shall be kept by the Contractor on the site. The record shall include the following items:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)

Set
Temporary compression
Penetration from ground level
Length of pile and size of section
Ground level
Cut-off level to the top of pile
No. of joints used
Time of starting and time of completion

The method of measuring set and temporary compression shall be approved by the SO Rep. The above
record shall show a series of sets and temporary compression measured during the whole process of
driving. Once the driving of a pile is commenced, it shall continue until the final penetration or set is
reached.
2.3.10

Damaged Or Rejected Piles

All piles which are cracked, broken, broomed, split or damaged in any manner during transportation,
handling or driving shall be rejected. All piles damaged during driving, or driven unduly out of position, or
driven out of plumb in excess of 1 in 25, or if no set can be obtained after driving for a considerable length
well in excess of estimated penetration, where it should set based on soil data and site condition, shall
also be rejected.

2.3.11

Compensating Piles
All piles driven into ground and rejected shall be replaced with compensating pile or piles at the
Contractor's own costs and expenses. The position and number of compensating pile(s) as decided by
the SO Rep shall be such that the concentricity of the pile group is not altered. All costs incurred on
providing compensating piles shall be borne by the contractor. . The Employer will only pay the cost for
the original number and size of pile(s) in the pile group as shown in the Drawings. In the computation for
payment, the size of the original pile as shown in the Drawings and the paylength of the compensating pile
shall be taken. If two or more compensating piles are used to replace the rejected pile, the computation
shall be based on the size of the original pile as shown in the Drawings and the shortest paylength of the
compensating pile (which compensate the particular rejected pile, as decided by the SO Rep). If there are
two or more rejected piles in the same pile group and there is no indication which compensating piles are
for which rejected piles (as decided by the SO Rep), the computation for payment shall be based on the
sizes of the original piles as shown in the Drawings and the two or more shortest paylength of the
compensating piles.

2.3.12

Removal Of Obstructions Of Piling

In the course of piling, only the removal of natural obstruction beyond 2.5m below the base of excavation
shall be paid for by the Employer as an extra item based on the Contract Rates and only if the SO Rep is
satisfied that the Contractor has made every effort to proceed with piling by avoiding the obstruction. Any
excavation for obstruction not exceeding 2.5m, including restoring of ground surrounding the piles, and
any other works necessary to complete the operation to the satisfaction of the SO Rep shall be at the
Contractor's own costs and expenses. The foregoing provisions shall be applicable to piling Works only.
For all other Works, other provisions specified in the Contract shall prevail.

BLDG04/S2.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 2-10
2.3.13

Cutting Of Piles
Excavate and cut off the pile to the required level shown on the pile layout Drawings or otherwise directed
by the SO Rep. Checking and recording of cut-off level shall be followed up immediately.
In the cutting of piles, the Contractor shall employ a licensed surveyor to be responsible for the
measurement of pile eccentricities and cut-off levels, including those for compensating piles, and to check
and endorse the pile eccentricity drawings for submission to the SO Rep. The Contractor shall make
available all facilities and equipment for the SO Rep to confirm the measurement.
Do not reuse any pile which has been cut off as wastage unless the waste pile length exceeds 2.5m and
the cut-off head has been treated.

2.3.14

Completion Of Piling Work

Piling Works to inspection chambers and main drain lines shall only be considered complete if the piles
are piled, excavated, cut-off, checked and recorded in the pile layout drawings for eccentricities and levels
and compensated for rejected piles.

2.3.15

As-Built Drawings
After the completion of the piling work, provide three copies of 'as-built' (eccentricity) drawings to the SO
Rep. The 'as-built' (eccentricity) drawings shall be prepared and signed by a licensed surveyor.

2.3.16

Noise Limit At Piling Site

The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Environment Public Health (Control of Noise
from Construction Sites) Regulation 1990, in respect of work that affects the public.
Set up equipment to measure and record the noise level generated from the piling site as and when
required. The duration and other details of such monitoring shall be specified by the ENV or the relevant
Authorities and noise reading records may be required to be submitted to the ENV or the relevant
Authorities.
In the event of any partial or total stoppage of work as ordered by the ENV or the relevant Authorities due
to noise nuisance, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for compensation; loss; expenses or
profits; or extension of Time for Completion.

2.3.17

Vibration And Crack Monitoring

The Contractor shall be required to carry out vibration and crack monitoring at his own cost and expense
when piling works are to be carried out close to existing buildings or when public complaints have been
received.
The number and location as well as the duration of the vibration and crack monitoring shall be decided by
the SO Rep.
The vibration monitoring shall measure the peak particle velocity (mm per second) and frequency of the
vibration. Acceleration and displacement values shall also be derived from the transducer operating range
chart if requested by the SO Rep.
Tell-tale crack meters shall be installed as and when necessary, to monitor movement across cracks in
vertical and horizontal directions.
Four sets of the comprehensive reports shall be submitted within 2 weeks after the completion of the
monitoring Works.

Total pages for this Section :

10
Section 3/.....

BLDG04/S2.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 3-1
SECTION 3
EXCAVATION

3.1

USE OF SOIL INVESTIGATION REPORT FOR EXCAVATION WORKS

The Contractor shall provide all necessary measures, including but not limited to temporary structures,
shoring and/or sheet piling, to facilitate the carrying out of excavation Works and/or for heavy vehicular
movement within the Site. The cost of such temporary structures, shoring and/or sheet piling, etc shall be
deemed to be included in the Contract Sum. Notwithstanding such provisions, the Contractor shall, in the
course of excavation Works, take great care to prevent earth movements and/or upheavals in the
excavation. The Contractor shall also take precaution to prevent displacement and/or damage to the piles
due to any traffic movement from heavy machinery employed on the Site. If any pile in the excavated pit
is displaced or if the pile is damaged by earth movement and/or upheavals, the Contractor shall be held
accountable for the displacement and/or damage to the piles and shall bear all cost and expenses
incurred in remedial Works.
The Contractor may, if he wishes to, make reference to the Soil Investigation Report available from the
Employer to facilitate the Contractor in ascertaining the temporary structures, shoring and/or sheet piling
required. However, the Soil Investigation Report shall not form part of the Contract or to be taken into
consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract. The Contractor shall take
note that all the information in the Soil Investigation Report are only indicative of the likely soil conditions
to be encountered at the Site. The Employer shall not be accountable to the Contractor for the accuracy,
adequacy or completeness of the information in the Soil Investigation Report. The Contractor shall
ascertain the actual soil conditions and shall conduct his own site investigations and allow in the Contract
Sum for all costs and expenses whatsoever arising from and/or out of any inaccuracy, inadequacy or
incompleteness of the information in the Soil Investigation Report.

3.2

SETTING OUT
The Employer's Surveyor shall set out the main outlines of the building blocks and if necessary and upon
the request of the Contractor, the setting out of bench mark/s. Immediately after the setting out, the
Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the correctness of the same and shall be responsible for protecting
and preserving all pegs and bench marks.
If any such pegs have been displaced by the Contractor, he may request for a re-survey by the Employer's
Surveyor. In this respect, the Contractor shall be charged a minimum fee of $1,300.00 per day for the resurvey.
Notwithstanding the above, any errors in the Works arising from inaccurate setting out shall either be
amended at the Contractor's own cost and expense or, at the discretion of the SO Rep, may be accepted
without amendment, but subject to such reduction in the Contract Sum as may be reasonable having
regard to any loss of value suffered by the Employer or any reduced cost to the Contractor resulting from
the error, whichever shall be the greater.

3.3

DRAINAGE DEPARTMENT'S REQUIREMENTS ON SITE CONTROL

The Contractor shall comply with the following site control requirements in addition to those required by
the Drainage Department, Ministry of the Environment :
(a)

Submitting all proposals for temporary drains and silt control measures to the Head, Drainage
Department for approval before commencement of the Works;

(b)

Providing adequate silt-control facilities including lined temporary drains at the Site boundary
surrounding the Site comprising of composite channel drains of adequate capacity (minimum Type
C7) to capture the surface run off with proper sump outlets subjected to the prior approval of ENV
and the SO Rep, close turfing on both sides of the perimeter drains, silt-trapping devices, turfing,
wash-bays incorporating proper discharge outlets, etc. to control silt and mud from the Site to enter
the drains;

BLDG04/S3.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 3-2
3.3

DRAINAGE DEPARTMENT'S REQUIREMENTS ON SITE CONTROL

(CONT'D)
(c)

Maintaining regularly all such silt-control facilities to ensure their effectiveness and in a clean,
hygienic, pest free and good working condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep, and desilting all
affected drains until Substantial Completion of the Works;

(d)

Ensuring that the execution of the Works shall not disrupt, fill, block or disturb the existing overland
flow, existing drains, temporary diversion drains or perimeter cut-off drains;

(e)

Ensuring that runoff within, upstream of and adjacent to the Site can be effectively drained away
without causing flooding within the Site or in areas outside the Site;

(f)

Ensuring that discharge consequent to de-watering from basement or trench excavation is

channelled into silt trapping devices before reaching existing drains;

(g)

Implementing adequate measures, including the provision of proper barricades between the work
areas and existing drains, to ensure that construction materials are not discharged or washed into
the drains.

The Contractor shall be responsible for designing and implementing at his own cost and expense, any
additional or more stringent measures as may be necessary to achieve satisfactory site control standards
as required by the Drainage Department, Ministry of the Environment on surface water drainage.
3.4

EROSION AND SILT CONTROL MEASURES

The Contractor shall not allow and be responsible for preventing silt from being washed into drains and
canals. The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements strictly :
(a)

Treatment Of Silt-Laden Water

Ensure that silt-laden water is not discharged directly or by pumping into drains or canals. The siltladen water shall be channelled to silt traps, sedimentation tanks or other measures for removal of
silt before discharging into drains or canals.

(b)

(c)

Provision Of Silt Traps And Perimeter Cut-Off Drains

(i)

Silt traps, perimeter cut-off drains and other facilities shall be provided to ensure that earth,
silt, mud, etc are not discharged into drains or canals. Details of these facilities shall be
duly designed and endorsed by a PE engaged by the Contractor. These facilities shall be
constructed before the commencement of the Works.

(ii)

Silt traps, perimeter cut-off drains and other facilities shall be desilted and maintained at
least once a week or more often if necessary to effectively prevent the discharge of silt from
the Site.

Protection Of Exposed Earth Surfaces

Provide and carry out close turfing promptly to prevent soil erosion at the Site. All exposed earth
surfaces not affected by construction activities shall be planted with turfing on an immediate basis.
Where necessary to prevent soil erosion, the Contractor shall also carry out progressive turfing on
Site. In cases where turfing is not practical or not effective in protecting exposed earth surfaces
which are left bare and undisturbed for more than one month, such surfaces shall be protected
from soil erosion by spraying with bitumen based emulsion or other effective methods to be
approved by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall
ensure that the methods are effective in the prevention of soil erosion.

BLDG04/S3.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 3-3
3.4

EROSION AND SILT CONTROL MEASURES (CONT'D)

(d)

(e)

Excavated Material
(i)

All surplus excavated materials shall be carted away to the disposal ground immediately.
The surplus excavated material shall not be stockpiled on the Site.

(ii)

Earth materials stockpiled on the Site for construction work shall be within properly
contained areas and covered to prevent the earth from being washed into drains or canals.
The locations for stockpiling the earth shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep.
Notwithstanding the approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that earth is not
washed into drains or canals.

(iii)

The Contractor shall only carry out trench excavation work provided the rate of construction
keeps pace with the rate of excavation.

Treatment Of Mud Slurry

Check and ensure that mud slurry from drilling, tunnelling, diaphragm wall construction and jet
grouting, etc, are not discharged into drains or canals.

3.5

SURFACE EXCAVATION
The Contractor shall grub up and clear all shrubs, vegetable matter, bushes, roots and other obstructions
encountered on the Site. No tree shall be removed without written permission from the SO Rep.
Any top soil which covers the Site shall be carefully scraped and piled up at a suitable location, with the
use of mechanical or manual labour, for subsequent use in turfing or tree planting. The Contractor shall
salvage whatever existing top soil there is on the Site, failing which he shall be liable to reimburse the
Employer for the loss. No top soil shall be removed from the Site without the permission of the SO Rep.

3.6

SITE FORMATION LEVEL

The proposed platform levels for the building platforms and open areas for the Works are as indicated in
the Drawings. The existing earth ground levels shall be prepared by the Employer at 300mm below the
proposed platform levels, subject to an average tolerance of 150mm, before the Site is handed over to
the Contractor.
The Contractor shall top up, fill, consolidate and level up to the proposed platform level as indicated in the
Drawings all in accordance with the requirements specified in clause 3.13 "Backfilling". The Contractor
shall be deemed to include in the Contract Sum for the cost of all additional works arising from or out of
such 150mm average tolerance as specified.
Where excavated earth is not suitable for filling up to the proposed platform levels as indicated in the
Drawings, the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense fill up with suitable imported earth approved
by the SO Rep.

3.7

EXCAVATION GENERALLY
The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited and examined the Site carefully and to have ascertained
the nature thereof and the kinds of materials to be excavated, and to have made provision in the Contract
Sum to cover for the type of materials to be excavated.
Prior to the commencement of excavation, the Contractor shall carry out a pre-construction survey of the
neighbouring properties and comply with the requirements of BCA and any other requirements as required
by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense. The Contractor shall set out the lines and
structures for the inspection and approval of the SO Rep. Original ground levels shall also be taken and
submitted to the SO Rep for record.

BLDG04/S3.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 3-4
3.7

EXCAVATION GENERALLY (CONT'D)

Excavation shall be carried out neatly in accordance with the Drawings, in whatsoever material may be
found, including hard rock or other hard material which requires breaking up by pneumatic drills and the
excavated materials shall be used as filling if required.
The Contractor may be allowed to carry out the excavation by his own methods subject to the approval of
the SO Rep.
The excavated materials may be temporarily stockpiled on the Site during the course of the Works
provided there is sufficient space available and such stockpiling shall not cause obstruction at the work
Site and such stockpiling shall be covered to prevent the excavated materials from being washed into the
drains and canals. In areas of poor soil, all excavated materials shall be completely removed from the
Site. The Contractor shall be held fully responsible for all damages caused by the non-removal or
improper stockpiling of excavated materials on the Site.
The SO Rep may prescribe and limit the lengths and/or widths and/or depths of excavation to be
proceeded with at any one time.
Excavation shall not be carried down in the first instance to a depth nearer than 150mm to formation level.
The bottoming-up to formation shall be done by hand immediately in advance of placing hardcore,
concrete or other Permanent Works unless directed otherwise by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall also
take such steps as are necessary, in the opinion of the SO Rep, to prevent damage to the formation owing
to exposure to the atmosphere and the trampling of the formation by workmen. Where, in the opinion of
the SO Rep, the formation is softened or spoilt by the Contractor, the soft or spoilt areas shall be
excavated and filled with Grade 15 concrete at the Contractor's own costs and expenses.
No Permanent Works shall be constructed in any excavated area or position until the SO Rep has
inspected and approval given to commence further work.
The entire excavation Works shall be formed and left complete and as accurate to the widths, levels,
contours and slopes or as otherwise directed by the SO Rep.
The Contractor may be provided with a site to dump and spread the surplus excavated materials as
directed by the SO Rep. Alternatively, the Contractor may be required to dispose of any surplus materials
and shall if so required provide lorries for transport and shall make all necessary arrangements for the use
of an approved dumping ground and bear all costs and expenses thereof. The Contractor shall not deposit
surface excavated materials on private land unless he can produce the written permission of the owner of
the land.

3.8

EXCAVATION IN ROCK
Any rock or boulders encountered in excavation to the required depths shall be removed by wedging,
blasting or other means as the SO Rep may direct, all at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
When blasting is required, the Contractor shall obtain prior written permission from the SO Rep. The
Contractor shall comply with the Local Laws and Regulations and any requirements imposed by the
relevant Authorities with regard to blasting operations.
The SO Rep shall be fully informed by the Contractor as to the steps and precautionary measures taken to
safeguard the surrounding properties. The Contractor shall be liable for any accident, damage or injury to
any person, property or thing, resulting from the use of explosives. Prior to the start of blasting
operations, the Contractor, in the presence of the SO Rep, shall conduct a survey of all structures within
120m of the site where blasting is proposed, and any other structures which the SO Rep considers may
be affected, in order to determine the existing or pre-blast condition of these structures. Prior to
commencing blasting operations, a written report, supported by photographs where necessary, listing any
existing defects in the structures, shall be submitted to the SO Rep.
When blasting operations are being carried out, any road affected shall be closed to traffic and the
appropriate signs erected.

BLDG04/S3.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 3-5
3.9

ERRORS IN EXCAVATION
The Contractor shall excavate to such depths only as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the SO
Rep. Any excavation done to a greater depth than is necessary shall be filled with concrete of such
proportions or with such compacted material to the required formation levels as directed by the SO Rep.
The cost of such filling shall be borne by the Contractor.

3.10

EXCAVATION FOR PILE CAPS

The Contractor shall excavate for pile caps and complete excavation expeditiously after the piling
contractor has cut off excess length of piles.
The Contractor shall take care and precaution to avoid damaging or displacing the piles and the
Contractor shall be held fully responsible for any damage or displacement to piles in the excavation pits.
Any water accumulating in excavated pits shall be pumped dry to facilitate construction of pile caps.

3.11

TEMPORARY COVERS
Prior to excavation for footing foundations, the Contractor may erect temporary covers over the area to be
excavated to prevent rainwater from getting into the excavations. However, when such temporary covers
are instructed to be erected by the SO Rep specifically, they will be paid for as a variation.

3.12

KEEPING EXCAVATIONS DRY

The whole of the excavations shall be kept free from water arising from rain, drains, floods or other causes
by pumping, bailing, drainage or other means. Should any water get into the excavations, the Contractor
shall remove such water, excavate the affected wet soil and fill up the excess excavation with Grade 15
concrete, all at his own cost and expense and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

3.13

BACKFILLING
The Contractor shall backfill with selected excavated material around foundation excavations, etc up to the
required level in layers not exceeding 300mm thick or in such layers as directed and carefully ram and
consolidate. Upon approval by the SO Rep, backfilling shall commence as soon as practical and
completed expeditiously and without delay.

3.14

DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIAL

The Contractor shall allow for spreading and levelling on Site or transporting off the Site, all surplus
excavated material which remains after completion of backfilling and compaction of excavations, including
the surplus excavated material left by the services departments of the relevant local authorities.

3.15

PLANKING AND STRUTTING

The term "planking and strutting" shall be deemed to cover whatever method the Contractor adopts to
uphold the sides of excavations to prevent damage to adjoining properties, earth movement and injury to
workmen. The Contractor shall be held responsible for upholding the sides of all excavations and shall
provide all planking and strutting to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Such planking and strutting shall be
designed and supervised by the Contractor's PE

BLDG04/S3.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 3-6
3.16

PRE-TREATMENT OF SOIL FOR PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS

AGAINST SUBTERRANEAN TERMITES

3.16.1

Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor and his Pest Control Operator (hereinafter referred to as the Specialist), executing the
Works as required in this Clause including sub-clause have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials
used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred
to as the Performance Requirement). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified
in this Clause including sub-clauses are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the
Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject
always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractors and
his Specialists duties and obligations arising under the Contract.

3.16.2

Scope Of Work
Chemically pre-treat the soil for the protection of buildings against subterranean termites. The areas to be
chemically treated shall include :
(a)

The entire ground floor slab area prior to the laying of the concrete floor slab. The ground floor slab
area shall be deemed to include the area below the basement carpark decks, RC pavement at
linkway, carpark porch and link building/precinct pavilion but shall exclude the lift pit.

(b)

The areas surrounding all sides of column stumps inclusive of column stumps within the driveway.
The width of the treatment for column stumps within the driveway shall follow the perimeter defined
by the driveway kerb but shall not exceed 2.0 metre in width.

(c)

All round the building perimeter prior to concreting the apron area, if applicable. The width of the
treatment shall follow the perimeter defined by the apron slab but shall not exceed 2.0 metre in
width.

The Contractor shall comply with all the requirements of the ENV pertaining to such soil treatment work
and such compliance shall form part of the Scope of Work.
In addition, the Contractor shall submit a detailed Work Method statement, stipulating the strategic work
processes control and personnel responsible etc., to the SO Rep for approval prior to commencement of
such Works.
3.16.3

Chemical To Be Used And Rate Of Application

The chemical to be used for the pre-treatment of the soil shall be those approved by the Ministry of the
Environment (ENV). The Contractor may propose either one of the following chemicals to the SO Rep for
approval prior to the commencement of the treatment works :Chemical

Dilution

For Works Which Are

Chlorpyrifos

An aqueous emulsion at a concentration of one (1)

percent by volume

Within or outside water

catchment areas

Imidacloprid

An aqueous solution having an active ingredient (a.i.)

concentration not exceeding 0.05% (ie 25 ml of
Premise 200SC or equivalent per 10 litres of water)

Within or outside water

catchment areas

The chemical shall be applied uniformly over the area to be treated at a rate of not less than five (5) litres
per square metre of soil surface.
The total volume of flow in litres shall be measured by a meter.
3.16.4

Chemical Preparation
Preparation of the chemical shall be carried out within a kerbed area under a roof with no outlet to the
open drains or public sewers. Washing of hands, chemical containers, spraying equipment etc., shall be
carried out in a wash area connected to a public sewer. At sites where the wash areas are not connected
to a sewer, the washing waste-water shall be collected in containers for re-use or transported to a premise
for discharge into the sewer. The waste-water containing the chemical shall not be discharged into a
septic tank or open drain.

BLDG04/S3.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 3-7
3.16.5

Time of Application
Treatment shall be carried out immediately before the lean concreting of the floor slabs and apron areas.
Soil treatment shall not be carried out when the soil is saturated, eg. during or immediately after rainfall.
Verify the ground water table before soil treatment. For this purpose, the Contractor shall at his own cost
and expense excavate trial holes of more than 0.5m deep measured from the level of the soil to be
treated. As required by ENV, soil treatment shall not be carried out if the ground water table is 0.5m or
less below the level of the soil to be treated, and in such event the Employer is entitled to recover from the
Contractor the value of work so omitted by way of variation order. The variation order shall be priced
based on the applicable or analogous or pro-rated rates in the Rates times the untreated area measured
flat on plan.
Notwithstanding such cost recovery, the Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for the
provision of warranty for the work and the cost recovery shall not absolve the Contractor from his
responsibilities to rectify future occurrence of Defect in respect of the work under the warranty. The
restriction to soil treatment by virtue of compliance with ENVs requirements shall not in any way affect or
diminish the Contractors responsibilities under the warranty. Provided always that in the event chemical
pre-treatment of the soil for the protection of buildings against subterranean termites is omitted altogether
from the Scope of Work for a building block either on account of ENVs requirements or by reason of an
Authorisation Order, then the provision of a warranty for the chemical pre-treatment of the soil for that
building block shall be deemed to be waived by the Employer.

3.16.6

Application Procedure
When it rains during the course of soil treatment, all treated soil shall be covered immediately with black
polythene sheet. The coverage shall extend one (1) metre into the untreated areas. The polythene sheet,
especially their overlapping parts, shall be properly secured by heavy objects to ensure that all rain water
runs into the surrounding temporary drains.
Immediately after the soil treatment is completed, the treated soil shall be securely covered with black
polythene sheet. A layer of lean concreting shall be cast on top of the polythene sheet.

3.16.7

Application Equipment
All equipment used in soil treatment shall be in good order and in serviceable condition.

3.16.8

Provision Of Temporary Drainage

Temporary drainage of adequate capacity shall be provided around the whole area to be treated with an
outlet connected to a sump.

3.16.9

Quality Control Sampling

To verify the concentration of the chemical used, one (1) sample of the chemical shall be taken randomly
on each day of application as directed by the SO Rep and stored in a one (1) litre container, properly
marked with the date and location of the sample taken. The samples taken shall be kept under lock and at
a cool and dry location in the SO Rep room, for a period of not more than seven (7) calender days. The
keys shall be kept by the SO Rep. For every 3 samples taken on a per building block basis, the SO Rep
shall randomly select one of the samples for concentration test at an accredited/approved laboratory.
The Contractor shall provide at his own cost and expense containers of one litre capacity for the collection
of the samples. The sample container must be able to protect contents against Ultra Violet Light

BLDG04/S3.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 3-8
3.16.10

Administrative Charge For Failure Of Test On Chemical

Concentration/Excessively High In Chemical Concentration
The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 Nuisance and Irregularities to impose charges
against the Contractor for each sample that fails to attain the required minimum/maximum concentration
as specified in the foregoing requirement in the subclause Chemical To Be Used And Rate Of
Application. In addition to the charges, the Contractor shall re-treat the part of the work represented by
the failed sample.
For Chlorpyrifos, Chemical concentration falls between 1 to 2 % by volume is deemed to be acceptable to
the SO Rep. However, if each and every sample concentration equal or exceeds 2.1%, the SO Rep shall
also impose charges against the Contractor under Clause 1.6 Nuisance and Irregularities. Due care shall
be exercised by the Contractor when mixing and preparing the chemical on site

3.16.11

Approved Pest Control Operators

Only Pest Control Operator who is registered with the BCA under the work head for Pest Control shall be
engaged to execute the pre-treatment of soil. The Pest Control Operator shall hold a valid Poisons Permit
issued by ENV. In this respect, the Contractor shall submit the name of the Pest Control Operator, proof of
BCA registration, proof of Poisons Permit issued by ENV and the type and details of chemicals to be used
(including the rate of application) to the SO Rep for approval prior to commencement of the treatment. The
SO Rep reserves the right to disapprove the use of the type of chemical and/or the Pest Control Operator
so selected by the Contractor. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim and there shall be no
adjustment to the Contract Sum nor extension of Time for Completion arising from or out of such decision
by the SO Rep.

3.16.12

Warranty
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in the
Deed of Warranty for Pre-Treatment of Soil for Protection of Buildings Against Sub-terranean Termites as
produced in Appendix A1. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of
Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at its sole
discretion decide. In the event the Deed of Warranty for part of the Works or for the whole Works is to be
submitted to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty
as produced in Appendix A1(TC) to such Town Councils. The duly executed Warranty shall be submitted
immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO
Rep considers the Works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the
event the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the
time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the
Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per Deed
of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of
the duly executed Deed of Warranty

3.16.13

Re-treatment During Warranty Period

If subterranean termite infestation should occur in the treated buildings within the warranty period, the
Contractor shall provide Powder or Dust Treatment to exterminate the infestation at his own costs and
expenses.
Should the Powder or Dust Treatment fail to exterminate the infestation, the Contractor shall re-treat the
soil using the Post-Construction Soil Treatment method at his own costs and expenses. Drilled holes shall
be patched and walls and/or floors refinished.
In addition, in the event of additions or extensions to the buildings during the warranty period, the Pest
Control Operator and the Contractor shall be informed and shall also execute soil treatment to extend the
chemical barrier to cover such additions or extensions. The costs of such extensions of soil treatment
shall, however, be borne by the Employer.

3.16.14

Safety Precaution
Provide and exercise safety precautions during all treatment processes.
Personal engaged in the soil treatment shall wear protective clothing eg. goggles, long sleeved shirt and
long legged trousers or an overall type garment, impervious footwear and gloves.

BLDG04/S3.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 3-9
3.16.14

Safety Precaution (Contd)

Spray drifts beyond the area to be treated shall be avoided. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent
accidental spillage of the chemical. Spillage shall be mopped up with soil or other absorbent materials.
The affected soil shall be added to the treated area or kept in plastic bags for disposal at the ENVs
dumping grounds.
Signs in the areas of application shall be posted to warn workers and the public that the area has been
treated with poisonous chemicals.
Unwanted chemicals and containers shall be disposed off safely at the ENVs dumping grounds.

3.17

FINISHED PLATFORMS, SLOPES AND EMBANKMENTS

Platform levels shall be the level at the top of surface drains around the building. The Contractor shall
finish the open spaces between buildings with a fall of not less than 1 in 80 towards surface drains.
The Contractor shall cut, trim and adjust all slopes and banks to give gradual and regular slopes with no
abrupt change of direction, or as directed by the SO Rep.

3.18

SERVICES ROUTES
The Contractor shall clear all obstructions from proposed sewer, electrical, water, gas, telephone and
Rediffusion services routes and either fill or excavate ground to within 70mm of proposed final platform
level as directed by the SO Rep at any time during the Time for Completion and any time period where
liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.
Such instructions may be given separately for each of the services at different times and each instruction
shall be carried out within seven days.

3.19

ELECTRICAL CABLE PIPES AND TRENCH

The Contractor shall excavate and lay 4 no. of 150mm diameter UPVC pipe at a depth of 750mm from the
trench in the PowerGrid/SPSL switch room to the position as shown in the Drawings. The pipes shall be
laid on 100mm thick mass concrete bed of 600mm width. One end of the pipe shall project 600mm
beyond the surface drain or as shown and the other end shall be flushed with the trench. The trench shall
be covered with removable RC slabs of 300mm width, capable of supporting a minimum load of 100 kg.
Sand shall be provided to fill the trench after installation of the cables into the trench.
Excavate and lay 2 no. of 100mm diameter UPVC pipe and 1 no. of 50mm diameter UPVC pipe at a depth
of 300mm from the floor of the HDB switchroom to the positions as shown in the Drawings.
Pipes used shall be free from leakage, distortion and cracks. Gaps between pipes and trench wall shall
be patched up with cement mortar and made watertight. A length of drawn wire strong enough to pull in
the cable, shall be provided in each pipe. The drawn wire shall project 600mm at both ends of pipe.
All UPVC pipes shall be of at least Class C (wall thickness 6.6mm) type, complying with the requirements
of SS 141:1976.

3.20

TELEPHONE CABLE DUCTS

The Contractor shall provide and lay where shown 100mm diameter underground UPVC pipes to serve as
ducts for telephone cables. Ducts shall turn with gradual bend and continue to extend 600mm beyond
aprons, drains and paths outside the building. Provide threading wires for electrical cable ducts. The
number of pipes required are as shown in the Drawings.

BLDG04/S3.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 3-10
3.21

DRAIN CASCADES
The Contractor shall excavate and lay cascade drains where surface drains flow down steep slopes or
banks.
Cascades shall not exceed 600mm in length and 300mm in each drop with top of sides finished straight
and parallel to slope of ground.

3.22

PUB REGISTERED EXCAVATORS

The Contractor shall in addition, engage the services of PUB Registered Excavator Operator only for all
excavation Works. In the event the Contractor fails to employ PUB Registered Excavator Operator, no
excavation Works shall be allowed.

Total pages for this Section :

10

Section 4/.....

BLDG04/S3.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-1
SECTION 4
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

4.1

CEMENT
Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep, cement shall be of an approved brand and
manufacture and comply with the following standards :
Type
Ordinary Portland Cement
Rapid Hardening Portland Cement

Relevant Standard
SS 26
SS 26

High alumina cement shall not be used for any concrete work.
When requested by the SO Rep, produce a certificate showing the date and place of manufacture of the
cement. As and when directed by the SO Rep, samples of cement shall be provided for testing. The
samples shall be sent for testing at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre. Any cement failing to
comply with the requirements of the relevant standard shall be rejected.
The cement shall be fresh and delivered in unbroken bags of the manufacturer or in properly designed
bulk containers. All cement delivered in bags shall be stored in a weatherproof dry shed with raised
boarded floor of at least 300mm above natural ground level. Cement delivered in bulk tankers shall be
stored in properly designed bulk storage tanks.
Cement of different manufacture and types shall be kept separate at all times and shall not be used in the
same mix.
Concrete of different brand of cement shall not be mixed during casting. The SO Rep shall be informed in
writing of any change in the source of supply.
Consignments of cement shall be used in the order of delivery and any caked or lumpy cement shall not
be used. All cement unfit for use shall be removed from site immediately.
4.2

AGGREGATES
Fine aggregates shall be uncrushed sand or crushed granite fines complying with SS 31. Where crushed
granite fines are used, its percentage of the total amount of fine aggregates shall not exceed 20%.
Coarse aggregates shall be crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed or uncrushed stone complying with SS
31.
Coarse aggregates shall not exceed 40mm in size for lean and mass concrete and 20mm for reinforced
concrete, unless otherwise specified.
All-in aggregates as specified in SS31 and aggregates derived from limestone or other materials inferior to
granite shall not be used.
Aggregates shall be stored on clean surfaces in separate stockpiles or bunkers to prevent intermingling of
different materials and contamination and shall be covered with a light roof cover. The light roof structure
shall be in good condition and requires minimum maintenance. The material for the cover can be either
canvas or other light roofing sheets, as long as it serves to cover/protect the aggregates from the weather,
especially sunshine. Fine aggregates shall be tested for moisture content constantly to facilitate moisture
compensation during concrete production. The testing shall be carried out based on the Speedy method
or other approved equivalent method approved by the SO Rep.
The SO Rep reserves the right to draw samples of aggregates from any stockpile at any time and have
them tested for compliance with SS 31. The samples shall be sent for testing at the HDB Prefabrication
Technology Centre. Aggregates failing to comply with SS 31 shall be rejected.
The SO Rep shall be informed in writing of any change in the source of supply of these aggregates.

BLDG04/S4.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-2
4.3

WATER
Potable water supplied by the Public Utilities Board shall be used for mixing concrete, mortar and grout.
For cleaning of formwork, reinforcement and curing of concrete, water other than potable water may be
used if approved by the SO Rep. The use of seawater shall be prohibited.

4.4

ADMIXTURES
When admixture is proposed to be used in concrete mix, furnish information concerning the admixture,
admixture acceptance tests and additional information as stipulated in SS320 for approval by the SO Rep
prior to the use of the admixture.
Admixture used shall comply with SS 320 or the relevant British Standards. Requests for permission to
use other types of admixtures not covered by these standards may only be considered when
accompanied by full supporting information. Admixture to be used shall be approved by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall provide the SO Rep every facility for inspection and sampling of the admixture(s).
The sample(s) shall be kept for reference and shall be sent, if requested by the SO Rep, for admixture
uniformity tests in accordance with SS 320 or the relevant British Standards.

4.5

STEEL REINFORCEMENT

4.5.1

Description
Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, reinforcement for concrete shall consist of plain mild steel and
high yield reinforcement bars complying with SS 2 and welded steel fabric complying with SS 32.
Reinforcement shall be free from pitting, loose rust, mill scale, paint, oil, grease, adhering earth or any
other material that may impair the bond between the concrete and the reinforcement or that may cause
corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete.
Where reinforcement is to be welded, it shall comply with CP 65. The Contractor shall obtain the approval
of the SO Rep in writing prior to any welding of reinforcement.

4.5.2

Testing
The Contractor shall provide the SO Rep every facility for inspection and sampling before any cutting,
bending or other fabrication is undertaken. If deemed necessary, the SO Rep may cause samples to be
taken from reinforcement already fixed in position.
Samples for the tests shall be sent for testing at the the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre or other
accredited laboratory as directed by the SO Rep. For each sample, 3 bars shall be taken for testing.
Reinforcement not complying with the appropriate Specifications shall be removed and replaced.

4.5.3

Galvanised Steel
Galvanized steel reinforcement as shown in the Drawings shall be hot-dip galvanized to SS 117. The
Contractor shall obtain galvanizing service or galvanized steel reinforcement only from those in the
Approved List.
The coating weight of zinc shall conform with Table 1 of SS 117. For steel over 5mm in diameter, the
minimum average coating mass shall be 500g per m2 and the minimum coating mass on any individual
sample shall be 450g per m2. The coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If the
coating appearance of any galvanized reinforcement be found otherwise, such reinforcement shall not be
used as a galvanized reinforcement. Galvanizing shall be followed by chromating as a post treatment.
Store all galvanized reinforcement in a dry and well ventilated place to prevent the formation of white rust
on them. Small areas of galvanized coating damaged by welding, cutting or by excessively rough
treatment shall be made good by the application of at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with
minimum 85% zinc dust, expressed as a percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint.
Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least two samples of the galvanized
reinforcement to be tested by a competent authority to determine the coating weight. The coating weight
shall be determined by stripping tests in accordance with SS 117. Certificates of such tests shall be
submitted to the SO Rep for verification.

BLDG04/S4.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-3

BLDG04/S4.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-4
4.6

FABRICATION OF REINFORCEMENT

4.6.1

On Site Fabrication
All reinforcement shall be accurately cut and bent to the dimensions and shapes shown in the Drawings.
Bends shall be cold-formed by machine or by other approved means which produce a gradual and even
bending action. Reinforcement incorrectly bent shall not be used unless the method for straightening and
rebending will not cause any cracking, and approval for rebending is given by the SO Rep.
Reinforcement shall be securely tied with steel wires. The projecting ends of the steel wires shall be
directed away from the formwork so as not to encroach into the concrete cover.
Reinforcement shall be adequately supported by approved spacers and chairs to maintain the specified
concrete cover. Plastic spacers shall be used for all bottom slab reinforcement. Steel bar chairs bent
according to the Drawings or proprietary-type chairs shall be used for top slab reinforcement. The part of
the chair that need to rest on formwork shall be coated with plastic for isolation and protection.
Other than for slabs, both plastic and concrete or mortar spacer blocks may be used. Concrete or mortar
spacer blocks shall be provided with tying wire, and shall not be lower in compressive strength and
durability characteristics than the surrounding concrete. All spacers shall be obtained from sources
approved by the SO Rep.
Sleeve jointing for reinforcement may be used provided that the strength and deformation characteristics
have been determined by tests carried out by a competent testing authority and approved by the SO Rep.
Fabrication and placing of reinforcement in each part of the Works shall be approved by the SO Rep
before any concrete can be placed thereon.
Reinforcement shall not be displaced during concreting. Reinforcement projecting from Works being
concreted or already concreted shall not be bent without approval by the SO Rep and shall be protected
from accidental deformation and damage.

4.6.2

Prefabrication At Factory
All column link cages and rectangular column cage reinforcement with T16 main reinforcement bars
(except for open links) and all beam cages with beam cage code prefixed with "J" provided to apartment
blocks shall be prefabricated in a factory approved by the SO Rep.
The rectangular column cage reinforcement shall be prefabricated as welded mesh with the T16 main
reinforcement bars welded to and holding in place the column links and bent into column cage
reinforcement. The "J" series beam cage shall be prefabricated as welded mesh with the T13 or T16 main
reinforcement bars welded to and holding in place the stirrup links and bent into beam cage reinforcement.

4.7

CONCRETE MIXES

4.7.1

Designed Mix
For designed mixes, the Contractor shall submit a mix design report covering all concrete mixes to the SO
Rep for approval. The designed mix shall comply with the following requirements :
Concrete Grade

30

35

40

45

50

Minimum Cement Content (kg per m )

275

300

325

350

400

550

550

550

550

550

50

50

50

50

50

0.55

0.50

0.45

0.40

0.40

Maximum Cement Content (kg per m )

Maximum % of Fine Aggregate to Total Aggregate
Maximum Water to Cement Ratio

For concrete with maximum aggregate size of 14mm and 10mm, the minimum cement content shall be
increased by 20 kg per m3 and 40 kg per m3 respectively.

BLDG04/S4.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-5
4.7.1

Designed Mix (Contd)

In the designing of mixes, a current margin shall be 15 N per mm2. If a current margin other than that
recommended is to be used, sufficient valid data shall be made available to the SO Rep for his
consideration and approval. Mix adjustment shall be allowed only when sufficient results are available;
however, such mix shall comply with the Specifications.
In all cases, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the designed mix shall be durable,
workable and comply with the strength grade requirement as specified or as shown.

4.7.2

Trial Mixes
The designed mix with a designed maximum consistency as measured by slump or flow shall be verified
by preparation of trial mixes witnessed by the SO Rep. The mix shall be judged for suitable workability as
well as strength. A minimum of 18 cubes from three batches shall be taken. The mix may be considered
suitable if :
(a)

the designed maximum consistency is achieved in accordance with SS 78 or BS 1881 : Part 105 if
a flow test is specified; and

(b)

the average strength of the nine cubes tested at 28 days exceeds the specified characteristic
strength by the current margin minus 3.5 N per mm2 as tabulated below :
Concrete Grade
Minimum average
strength (N per mm2)

30

35

40

45

50

41.5

46.5

51.5

56.5

61.5

or if the nine cubes at an earlier age indicate that it is likely to be exceeded by this amount.
Trial mixes may not be required if concrete is supplied by prequalified ready-mix concrete suppliers
approved by the SO Rep.
4.7.3

Mix Adjustment
Once the designed mix is approved by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall not be allowed to change the mix
without prior approval of the SO Rep.
An increase or reduction of cement content by 20 kg per m3 and above, or the percentage of fine
aggregate by 5% and above, or any change in the type or dosage of admixture or consistency is
considered a change in mix design. This does not constitute a tolerance allowance on the mix design
used in relation to the specified requirements.
If the Contractor is found to be using a mix design inferior to the approved mix, the SO Rep shall exercise
his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.

4.8

BATCHING
Cement shall be measured by weight or batched in whole bags if so packed and delivered. Fine and
coarse aggregates shall be measured by weight separately. Water shall be measured by volume and due
allowance shall be made for the amount of water present in the mass of fine aggregate by deducting this
amount from the volume of water to be added during the mixing of concrete. Solid admixtures shall be
measured by weight, while liquid or paste admixtures may be measured by weight or volume.
The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within 3% of the quantity of cement, water or total
aggregate being measured, and with 5% of the quantity of admixture added before commencement of
work and subsequently whenever so directed by the SO Rep, the measuring equipment shall be calibrated
with known weights and volume measures.

BLDG04/S4.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-6
4.9

MIXING CONCRETE
Concrete shall be mixed in a batch type mechanical mixer. The quantity of constituent material in each
batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The constituent material shall be thoroughly and
continually mixed at the mixing speed specified by the mixer manufacturer until the resulting concrete is
uniform in colour and consistency.
The mixing time shall be as follows :
(i)

Pan mixer

minimum 30 seconds

(ii)

Truck mixer or drum mixer

minimum 1.5 minutes for 1 m3 of concrete

3
plus 0.25 minute for each additional 1 m .

The mixing time shall be reckoned from the time when all the solid materials are in the mixer. No portion
of the time required for discharging shall be considered as part of the mixing time.
The first batch of concrete fed into the mixer shall have an increase of an appropriate amount of dry
mortar similar in proportion to that of the concrete to be mixed and of mixing water for coating the mixer.
The mixer shall be emptied completely before being refilled. Mixers which have been out of use for more
than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed. The mixer shall be free
from hardened concrete. Worn-off blades or paddles shall be replaced.
4.10

READY-MIX CONCRETE
All concrete used in site casting for the Works shall be obtained from pre-approved Ready-Mixed
Concrete suppliers.
Ready-mix concrete shall comply with SS 289. The cement content shall comply with Clause 4.7
"Concrete Mixes" including all subclauses under it.
No water in excess of the quantity required in the approved mix shall be allowed to be added to the
concrete to increase its workability affected by elapsed time and/or temperature. While it is not being
discharged, the concrete shall be kept continuously agitated. The concrete shall be placed in its final
position and left undisturbed within two hours from the time when the cement is added to the mix.

4.11

WORKABILITY AND CONSISTENCY

The workability shall be such that the concrete can be well compacted, worked into the corners of the
shuttering and around the reinforcements, gives the specified surface finish and attain the specified
strength. The mix design shall ensure that this workability is obtainable.
On each concreting day, workability shall be assessed on the Site at the discharge point of the mixer by
means of the slump test in accordance with SS 78. If the measured slump deviates from the agreed value
by more than 25 mm or one third of the required value whichever is greater, the concrete shall be
rejected.
As an alternative, flow test to BS 1881 : Part 105 or other means of assessing workability may be
considered subject to approval by the SO Rep.
No water shall be added to the concrete subsequent to the completion of the mixing.

4.12

PLACING OF CONCRETE
All concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the place of final deposit as speedily as possible before
it has commenced to set, and in no case shall this exceed 20 minutes after mixing. Where retarders are
used such interval may be extended subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The method of transit shall be
such that it will prevent the segregation, loss or contamination of the ingredients.

BLDG04/S4.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-7
4.12

PLACING OF CONCRETE (CONTD)

In the use of concrete pumps, the Contractor shall ensure that the following is complied with :
(a)

Pipes shall not be secured to formwork or reinforcement which may be displaced by the pulsating
movement of the pipe.

(b)

Pumping shall commence first with blowing of water through the pipeline, followed by cement
mortar, both of sufficient quantities and all these shall be discharged away from the area to be
concreted.

(c)

When extra sections of pipe are to be added, each length of pipe shall be thoroughly wetted inside
but no free water shall remain in the pipe.

(d)

Where the pipeline is exposed to the sun, the line shall be protected against absorption of heat by
covering with damp sacking or other approved material during pumping.

Before proceeding to place the concrete, the formwork shall be re-aligned if necessary and water and
rubbish therein shall be removed. Immediately prior to placing the concrete, the formwork shall be well
wetted and inspection openings shall be closed.
Raised gangways for workmen placing and vibrating concrete shall be provided wherever possible and
shall be so constructed as to avoid damaging and displacing the reinforcement.
Concrete shall be placed in the formwork by shovels or other approved equipment and shall not be
dropped from a height nor handled in a manner which will cause segregation. Accumulations of set
concrete on the reinforcement shall be avoided. Concrete shall be placed directly in the permanent
position and shall not be worked along the formwork to that position.
For beams and similar members, concrete shall be placed in a single operation to the full depth. In walls,
columns and similar members, the concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers each not exceeding 1m
deep. Placing of concrete shall be continuous and temporary interruption shall not normally exceed 30
minutes. At the completion of a specified part, a construction joint shall be made subject to the approval
of the SO Rep.
No concrete shall be placed during wet weather, unless the entire area of pour is covered, or other
measures are taken to protect the wet concrete, to the satisfaction and subject to the approval of the
SO Rep.
All concrete shall be placed in daylight, unless an adequate system of lighting is provided and approval for
night work is given by the SO Rep and all relevant authorities prior to commencement of the concreting.
4.13

COMPACTION OF CONCRETE
All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass. It shall be compacted using
approved immersion type mechanical vibrators. Sufficient numbers of vibrators in serviceable condition
shall be used on the Site to compact the concrete at the rate at which it is placed, and a minimum of two
standby vibrators shall be readily available for emergency use in case of breakdowns.
The concrete shall be thoroughly worked into all parts of the formwork and between and around the steel
reinforcement. It shall be compacted to give a dense and compact concrete, free from voids of any kind.
Steel reinforcement shall be prevented from being displaced or deformed during concreting.

BLDG04/S4.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-8
4.14

CURING AND PROTECTION OF CONCRETE

After being placed in position, all fresh concrete shall be protected from rain, sun and drying wind, and
shall not be subjected to any vibrational disturbance other than that arising from compacting. The exposed
surfaces of concrete shall be cured with an appropriate curing compound as approved by the SO Rep.
The curing compound shall be applied by mechanical sprayer and comply strictly with the manufacturer's
instruction. If the curing compound is exposed to rain or water within 4 hours from the time the application
is completed, the Contractor shall re-apply the area affected with appropriate curing compound again.
However, the application of the curing compound may be exempted subject to the approval of the SO
Rep, if continuous wetting for at least 72 hours by rain on the concrete surface occurs immediately after
the concrete sets. This waiver shall not constitute a variation to the Contract.
Concrete placed below ground level shall be protected from falling earth and vegetation, and the
excavated ground shall be kept free of any water by pumping or other means of drainage. Approved
means shall also be taken to protect immature concrete from damage by debris, excessive loading,
moving vehicles, mixing with earth or other materials, flotation and other influences that would impair the
strength and durability of the concrete. Concrete placed in ground containing deleterious substances shall
be free from contact with such ground and with water draining therefrom, during placing and for a further
period of 3 days from the time of concrete placing or as otherwise instructed thereafter.
Concrete damaged through improper or insufficient curing and protection shall be made good by the
Contractor.

4.15

CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Where joints are necessary during concreting, their positions shall be approved by the SO Rep and shall
be constructed using expanded mesh as indicated in the Drawings. Before concreting resumes, such
joints shall be properly chipped, cleaned and scum and loose aggregates removed therefrom. Immediately
before placing new concrete, the joints shall be thoroughly wetted and coated with rich cement grout.

4.16

QUALITY OF CONCRETE WORKS

4.16.1

General Requirements
(a)

Testing of Structural Concrete

Concrete shall be tested for compliance in strength and durability requirements, except for the
following non-structural Works :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

Foot paths and paved areas;

Ramps and steps;
Hardcourts;
Inspection chambers and drain lines;and
Floor screed

The compressive strength of concrete shall be determined by crushing tests on 150mm cubes. The
quality and consistency of the concrete shall be tested as directed by the SO Rep in accordance
with SS 78. The Contractor shall provide for slump test or flow test, compressive strength test, core
test and any other concrete test as and when required by the SO Rep.
(b)

Sampling
On each concreting day and for each grade of concrete per concrete mixer, samples shall be taken
according to the following rates :
(i)

Samples Taken At Sites

Where samples are taken at sites, samples shall be taken for every 40 m of concrete or
part thereof, of each grade of concrete. At least 1 sample shall be taken from each batch
chosen by the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S4.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-9
4.16

QUALITY OF CONCRETE WORKS (CONT'D)

4.16.1

General Requirements (Cont'd)

(b)

Sampling (Cont'd)
(ii)

Samples Taken At Precast Plants And Ready-Mixed Concrete Plant

Where samples are taken at precast plants, and ready-mixed concrete plants, for every 40
m3 of concrete or part thereof, at least 1 sample shall be taken from a batch. Each sample
cannot be used to represent the Works for more than one Contract or project.

A sample shall be a quantity of concrete, consisting of standard scoopfuls, taken from a batch of
concrete whose properties are to be determined. The sample shall be taken at the point of
discharge from the mixer, agitating truck or mixer truck. These concrete cubes shall be cast to
achieve full compaction by using an approved vibrating table. The minimum period required before
demoulding these concrete cubes shall be 16 hours.
At least 4 cubes shall be cast from each sample. 2 cubes shall be tested at an early age. The
remaining 2 cubes shall be tested at 28 days for compliance purpose. All concrete cubes shall be
tested at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre. The Employer shall recover all testing fees
charged by the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre for testing of cubes including those sampled
from ready-mixed concrete plants and precast plant from the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide lockable humid boxes of adequate sizes to store all test cubes for the
specified period. The humid boxes shall be placed in a covered area and maintained at a relative
humidity of above 95%. The keys to such curing facility shall be exclusively held in custody by a
person designated by the SO Rep. The test cubes shall be collected by the SO Rep for testing at
the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre at a regular interval.
(c)

Cube Identification
The Contractor shall provide facilities to enable the identification of test cubes by radio frequency or
similar means. The Contractor shall provide at least one web-based radio frequency identification
(RFID) reader capable of reading the RFID tags on the concrete cubes from a minimum distance of
at least 40 mm. The Contractor shall include the appropriate interfacing software to a web-based
controller.
The Contractor shall logon to a website of the Employer to register the concrete cube data and tag
IDs using the RFID reader. The registration of the cube data and tag IDs shall be done within the
same casting day. The appropriate RFID tags shall be placed at the corner of the cubes while the
cubes are still fresh. The top surface of the RFID tag shall be level with the concrete cube surface.
The Contractor shall protect the RFID tags on the concrete cube while demoulding. For damage or
loss of RFID tag, the Contractor shall be charged the replacement cost based on the Employer's
purchase price
The Employer shall deduct the charges payable by the Contractor from any monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor or recover the same from the Contractor as a debt due by the
Contractor to the Employer.

(d)

Cover Measurement
The Contractor shall provide suitable equipment for the measurement of concrete cover to
reinforcement and the in-situ strength of concrete. The Contractor shall carry out measurements for
all major structural elements as determined by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall analyse
statistically all measurements for each of the major type of structural element. The concrete cover
shall comply with the requirements of CP 65. The in-situ strength of the concrete shall be assessed
in accordance with BS 6089 where applicable. The strength shall comply with the specified grade,
taking into account the variability with in-situ strength.

BLDG04/S4.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-10
4.16

QUALITY OF CONCRETE WORKS (CONT'D)

4.16.2

Compliance Of Strength Requirement

The 28 day strength shall be required for compliance with the strength specified hereunder. The early
strength tests shall be required for quality control purposes.
For precast concrete, the 3 day strength shall be obtained solely for quality control purpose. Early
strength requirements to meet design strength for demoulding, handling and delivery shall be specified by
the approved manufacturer of the precast components and approved by the SO Rep. Such strength shall
be determined from the additional cubes. The SO Rep shall have the absolute right to reject any precast
component should its early strength fails to meet the design strength requirements.
Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be judged by tests made on cubes at the age of
28 days. Compliance may be assumed if the following conditions are satisfied:
(a)

The average strength of the sample and the preceding three samples or the average of the first
four samples of the production is greater than or equal to the specified characteristic strength plus

half a fixed current margin of 6 N per mm . Thus, the minimum average strength shall be :
Grade
Minimum Average
Strength at 28 days (N
per mm)

(b)

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

23.0

28.0

33.0

38.0

43.0

48.0

53.0

The sample strength is at least the level specified below :

Grade
Minimum Individual
Sample
Strength at 28 days (N
per mm)

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

17.0

22.0

27.0

32.0

37.0

42.0

47.0

If a current margin lower than the fixed current margin can be consistently achieved, approval may be
sought to lower the strength level as specified in subclause (a) above.
The strength requirements as specified in subclause (a) above will not be applicable to concrete from
approved precast plant. However, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under clause 1.6 "Nuisance And
Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor if the sample strength result does not comply with
the strength requirements as specified in subclause (b) above.
For samples taken on the Site, if the sample strength results do not comply with either or both of the
requirements specified above, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and
Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
All test cubes taken shall be properly stored and the Contractor shall ensure that all test cubes are tested
at their respective age. Test cube that are lost shall be deemed to have failed and the SO Rep shall
exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Contractor.
Payment of charges to the Employer shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's
obligations under the Contract.
In addition to the payment of charges, the affected concrete Works may be stopped and not be continued
until so directed by the SO Rep. No extension to the Time for Completion shall be allowed for such
stoppage of the concrete Works.

BLDG04/S4.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-11
4.17

TESTING OF HARDENED CONCRETE

In the event of non-compliance, the quality of concrete in question shall be interpreted in accordance with
BS 5328.
For the 28 day strength non-compliance, the quality of the sub-standard concrete shall be estimated by
carrying out tests on hardened concrete in the structure. In the event that such tests are not practical, the
SO Rep may decide not to carry out any test.
The tests may include non-destructive methods, the taking of core samples, load tests or a combination of
several methods as follows :
Grade

Compressive Strength of Individual Sample

(N per mm2)

20
25
30
35
40
45
50

14.5 to below 17.0

18.5 to below 22.0
23.0 to below 27.0
27.0 to below 32.0
31.5 to below 37.0
35.5 to below 42.0
40.0 to below 47.0

20
25
30
35
40
45
50

below 14.5
below 18.5
below 23.0
below 27.0
below 31.5
below 35.5
below 40.0

Test on Structure
after 28 days
)
)
)
) Non-destructive method and/or core test
)
)
)
)
)
)
) Non-destructive method and core test
) and/or load test
)
)

The tests shall be carried out by an accredited laboratory in accordance with CP 65 and assessed in
accordance with BS 6089. The results of any such tests shall not nullify the establishment of noncompliance provided that the latter are based on valid cube test results.

BLDG04/S4.DOC(11)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-12
4.18

RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTIVE WORK

The action to be taken in respect of the concrete which fails to meet either of the requirements in
Clause 4.16 "Quality Of Concrete Works" including all subclauses under it and the assessment specified
in Clause 4.17 "Testing Of Hardened Concrete" shall be determined by the SO Rep. They may range
from :
(a)

qualified acceptance in less severe cases with action taken against the Contractor under Clause
1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities". The Contractor shall provide protective coating against
carbonation and other aggressive environment if the affected concrete can be certified to be
structurally sound by a PE engaged by the Contractor; or
If the average of three core tests falls below the strength level specified in sub-clause 4.16.2(b), or
in the event of failure of a load test.

(b)

the Contractor shall carry out at his own costs and expenses any necessary approved remedial
measures to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Remedial measures shall be designed, supervised
and certified by a PE engaged by the Contractor at his own costs and expenses; or

(c)

the Contractor shall remove the affected concrete, and the costs and expenses in removing all
poor quality concrete shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

All defective concrete Works such as badly constructed concrete members with poor alignment and
plumb, honeycombed and badly formed surfaces shall be removed or otherwise rectified according to the
instructions of the SO Rep at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
4.19

FORMWORK

4.19.1

General Requirements
(a)

Material
The Contractor shall solely use metalforms for the construction of cast-in-situ reinforced concrete
buildings. Notwithstanding Singapore Standards CP23, other type of formwork material shall not
be used, unless expressly specified otherwise or as approved by the SO Rep. In the case where
metalforms are not suitable for any part of a structure, the Contractor may propose to use other
formwork material which shall provide similar high quality off-form finish as compared with
metalforms, all at the Contractor's own cost and expense. The use of such alternative material
shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be
effected under such case.
Unless specified otherwise, all formwork shall comply with Singapore Standard CP 23. It shall be
true to the shape and dimensions as shown in the Drawings.
The Contractor shall provide appropriate metal formwork system that produces concrete lines and
surfaces complying with Grade II requirements of SS CP23. For cases of non-compliance with the
foregoing requirements, the SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to carry out
rectification Works. The form face in contact with concrete shall be free from dirt, adhering grout,
projecting nails, splits and other Defect.
Formwork shall be coated with an approved form oil which is compatible with the required finish.
Such oil shall be insoluble in water, non-staining, not injurious to concrete and shall not become
flaky or be removed by rain or wash water. Diesel oil and liquids which retard the setting of
concrete shall not be used. The same type of approved form oil shall be used for all Works. The
application of the form oil shall be such that no reinforcement is coated by the oil and there shall be
no accumulation of the oil on the formwork.
Where the use of plywood is approved by the SO Rep, it shall be Phenolic film faced plywood,
complying with SS 1 and cut to size from sheets at least 12 mm thick.
Formwork to curved surfaces shall be of steel or other material approved by the SO Rep to give a
good surface finish.

BLDG04/S4.DOC(12)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-13
4.19.1

General Requirements (Contd)

(b)

Use Of Employer's Metalforms

Where the use of the Employer's metalforms is stipulated in the structural Drawings, Section 5
"Metal Formwork" including all clauses and subclauses under it shall be applicable and the
Contractor shall comply with all provisions specified therein. In addition, the Contractor shall also
be required to comply with all relevant provisions specified in this clause including all sub-clauses
under it.

(c)

Use Of Contractor's Metalforms

Where the use of the Employer's metalforms is not stipulated, the Contractor shall use his own
metalforms or metalforms from suppliers that have been approved by the SO Rep. The age of the
metalforms used on the Site shall not exceed six years from the date of their manufacture. The
Contractor shall furnish to the SO Rep with documents to prove that the metalforms provided are
as specified, before the construction of the ground floor slab. Where any documents submitted are
not the originals, they shall be duly certified by the originating parties.
The Contractor shall submit details of his proposed metal formwork system for the approval of the
SO Rep and comply with the following requirements :
(i)

Technical Requirements
The proposed metal formwork system shall comply with Singapore Standard CP23 and shall
be in every respect rigidly constructed to the shapes and dimensions as shown in the
Drawings.

(ii)

Technical Information
The Contractor shall submit, within two weeks from the commencement Date of the Time for
Completion, the following technical information of his proposed metalforms namely; the
grade of steel, steel strength such as tensile strength, yield stress and elongation (including
a recent reduced section tensile test certificate), the steel plate thickness, the manufacturing
process (including a recent photo of the manufacturing machine) and the name and address
of the metalform manufacturer and/or supplier, for the approval of the SO Rep.

(iii)

Testing Of Metalforms

Reduced Section Tensile Test

For Contractor self-owned metalforms, the Contractor shall submit within two weeks
from the commencement Date of the Time for Completion, samples of basic types of the
metalforms for the reduced section tensile test to the SO Rep for approval. Five
samples shall be selected by the SO Rep for testing. Reduced section tensile test shall
be carried out in accordance with JIS Z2241. The samples shall comply with the
minimum tensile strength of 400 N per mm2, minimum yield stress of 245 N per mm2 and
minimum elongation of 30%. The minimum steel thickness shall be 2.65 mm. As and
when required, the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense, provide a thickness
gauge for verification of the steel plate thickness by the SO Rep.

Dimension Test
For Contractor's own metalforms or metalforms from suppliers approved by the SO Rep,
the SO Rep shall sample metalforms for dimension test. The samples shall be delivered
to the HDB Metalform Warehouse/Prefabrication Technology Centre as directed by the
SO Rep. The frequency of the dimension test is as follows :
Storey Height Of Building Blocks

BLDG04/S4.DOC(13)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

No. of Dimension Tests Per Building Block

Building blocks up to 20 storeys

2 tests per building block

Building blocks up to 30 storeys

3 tests per building block

Building blocks up to 40 storeys

4 tests per building block

Bldg Spec
Page 4-14
4.19.1

General Requirements (Cont'd)

(c)

Use Of Contractor's Metalforms (Cont'd)

(iii)

Testing Of Metalforms (Contd)

Dimension Test (Contd)

The metalforms shall be subjected to one re-test. If the result of the re-test does not
comply with the requirements, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6
"Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
In addition to the payment of charges, the affected set of metalform shall be restricted
from use at all HDB worksites and the Contractor shall use another set of metalform for
the next cycle of form work erection. No extension of the Time for Completion shall be
allowed for such replacement of metalforms.

(iv)

Method Of Manufacture
All metalforms shall be manufactured so that the surface plate and side ribs are formed from
the same sheet of metal to a 90 degree bend without any cutting and/or welding. The
folding of the 90 degree cold-formed bend shall be completed in one single continuous
operation using a continuous series of steel rollers of a roll-forming machine. Only the two
end ribs and all the internal ribs shall be welded.

(v)

Maintenance Of Old Metalforms

All old metalforms shall be cleaned free of rust, grit, grout stains etc. The method of
cleaning shall be by SHOT BLAST only. Such old metalforms shall be repaired to their
original shape and condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep prior to its use. The
Contractor shall engage the service of the Cleaning and Repair (C&R) contractor approved
by the SO Rep. In addition, the Contractor shall provide documentary proof in the form of a
C&R Certificate indicating the C&R contractor and the quantities of cleaned and repaired
metalforms to show that such cleaning and repair Works have been carried out.

(vi)

Marking And Identification

The Contractor shall seek the approval of the SO Rep on the type of identification mark for
their metalforms. In addition, the metalforms shall be engraved with the manufacturer's logo
and the date of manufacture, and the identification mark shall be different from those of the
Employer's metalforms.

(vii)

Irregularities Committed
If the Contractor uses sub-standard metalforms which do not comply fully with those
reference samples approved by the SO Rep as specified in subclause 4.19.1(c)(iii) "Testing
Of Metalforms", the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And
Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.

(viii)

Metalforms Usage
The Contractor shall use form releasing agent approved by the SO Rep for each casting of
concrete.
The Contractor shall be fully liable and responsible for any consequential loss or damage
due to or arising from the usage of his metalforms.

4.19.2

Design
Formwork shall be designed to Singapore Standard CP 23 and shall cater for the appropriate method of
placing and compacting the concrete. Adequate number of braces, ties and struts shall be provided so
that the formwork shall be able to withstand the pressures resulting from whatever method of placing and
compacting concrete adopted, and maintain the required position, slope and profile.
Metal props shall be used to support formwork, except at irregular places where timber props may be
more suitable or practical. Use of timber props shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S4.DOC(14)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-15
4.19.2

Design (Contd)
Where the floor to ceiling height exceeds 9.14 m, or where the formwork deck is supported by shores
constructed in two or more tiers, or where the dead, live and impact loads on the formwork exceed 732.3
kg per m, the Contractor shall engage a PE to design the formwork structure. The Contractor shall
submit the details of the design of the formwork and the supports for approval by the SO Rep.
Notwithstanding the approval by the SO Rep, the strength and adequacy of the formwork and supports
shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor and his PE.

4.19.3

Construction
Formwork shall be constructed sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent loss of grout from the concrete at all
stages of placing and compacting.
The arrangement of the formwork shall be such that it can be dismantled and removed readily from the
cast concrete without causing shock, disturbance or damage. For beams and slabs, the arrangement
shall be such that the formwork and supports for the slab soffits and beam sides can be removed without
disturbing the formwork and supports of the beam soffits.
Where steel props are used, such steel props shall be prezinc galvanised or galvanised by other methods.
Obtain approval from the SO Rep before using such galvanised steel props.
Supports to an upper floor shall rest on the lower floor only if the lower floor has developed adequate
strength to bear the load. If in the opinion of the SO Rep, the lower floor does not have the required
strength to carry the supports to the upper floors, then the method adopted to support the formwork of the
upper floor shall have to be approved by the SO Rep. All props to a floor which itself supports the
formwork of an upper floor shall only be removed 3 days (minimum) after such upper floor is cast.
Connections in formwork shall be either nailed, screwed, bolted, clamped or otherwise secured. Ties that
are anchored against the timber shall pass through a plate washer of at least 50 mm in size and of
sufficient thickness so that the load is transferred to the timber without any visible deflection or penetration
into the timber. Only cast-in steel spreader ties shall be used to separate and restrain the formwork faces.
The voids formed by the removal of the plastic cones after the dismantling of formwork shall be patched
up using non-shrink grout. Concrete separators shall not be permitted.
The Contractor shall be required to make allowances for any settlement or deflection of formwork which is
likely to arise during construction. The soffits of beams and slabs shall be given a camber to allow for
deflection after striking of formwork. The magnitude of the camber shall be approved by the SO Rep.
Formwork across structure joints shall be erected such that it overlaps adjoining finished concrete by at
least 200mm and holds tightly against it. Formwork shall be provided and run continuously at construction
joints.
Bolts to be permanently installed in concrete, fixing, boxouts, cores and other devices used for forming
openings, holes, pockets, recesses and other cavities shall be as rigid as the formwork itself to prevent
the leakage of any grout. No holes shall be cut in cast concrete except with the approval of the SO Rep.

4.20

STRIKING OF FORMWORK
The minimum period before striking of the formwork for ordinary Portland Cement concrete shall be in
accordance with the following table :
Type of Formwork

Minimum Period
Before Striking

All vertical or side formwork

12 hours

Soffit formwork to slabs and

beams

3 days

Props to slabs and beams

14 days

Props to cantilever slabs and

cantilever beams

21 days

BLDG04/S4.DOC(15)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Remarks
)
) The period shall commence from
) the time of last pour of concrete
)
) After striking of formwork, props
) shall be immediately put up to
) support the structure
)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-16
4.20

STRIKING OF FORMWORK (CONTD)

For residential building blocks where metal formwork (HDB Modular Formwork Design System or similar)
and Grade 40 concrete and above are specified, the provision of props and re-props shall be as stipulated
in the Drawings.
Formwork shall be removed gradually without shock or vibration and in the manner and order approved by
the SO Rep.
After striking of formwork, any honeycombed surface and defective or damaged concrete work arising
from improper work procedures shall be immediately made good as directed by the SO Rep and at the
Contractor's own costs and expenses. Any remedial measures carried out without the knowledge and
approval of the SO Rep shall be liable for rejection and re-execution.
All holes formed by tie bolts shall be filled with non-shrink cementitious mortar or grout of a similar or
higher grade than the surrounding concrete as specified in Clause 4.26 "Cement Mortar And Grout"
including all subclauses under it.

4.21

OPENINGS AND RECESSES

Provide openings and recesses in the reinforced concrete structure, including PVC sleeves where
required, for the installation of sanitary pipes and fittings, service ducts or pipes, CATV,
telecommunication and electrical cables and trunking, as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall
leave openings in the lift motor room floor to the requirement of the lift contractor or as instructed by the
SO Rep. No opening or opening greater than the sizes shown in the Drawings shall be formed without the
prior approval of the SO Rep.
No coring or hacking of holes through existing structural elements shall be permitted. However, holes not
exceeding 20 mm in diameter may be drilled through these elements. If any steel bar obstructs the drilling
through of a hole, a new position shall be selected slightly offset to avoid the obstructing bar. Under no
circumstances shall any steel bar be cut or removed without the written consent of the SO Rep. For holes
with diameter greater than 20 mm, submit drilling proposals to the SO Rep for approval.
All openings in slabs shall be formed with sides tapering slightly downwards and trimmed on all sides with
mild steel bars as shown in the Drawings. Check and ensure accuracy in the position, alignment, size and
shape of all openings and recesses. Otherwise, the Contractor shall make the necessary rectification.
Remove all formwork other than PVC sleeves required from openings and recesses after the concrete has
set and ensure that the openings are not blocked up. Recesses for vertical electrical trunking shall be
finished smooth.
Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall seal openings in structural elements such
as floor slabs, walls, columns and beams with non-shrink cementitious mortar or grout of a similar or
higher grade than the surrounding concrete, after installation of the services by the Contractor or other
contractors.

4.22

BUILDING ACCURACY
After removal of formwork, the Contractor shall take measurements as directed by the SO Rep to check
the deviation of the reinforced concrete Works from specified dimensions shown in the Drawings. All
measurements shall be recorded and submitted to the SO Rep. Works complying with Singapore
Standard CP 23 Grade II shall be deemed acceptable.

4.23

PERMANENT STRUCTURE JOINTS

4.23.1

General
Expansion joints, contraction joints or other permanent structure joints shall be provided in the positions
and constructed and sealed with waterproofing materials as detailed in the Drawings.
All exposed vertical sides of columns and walls and undersides of beams at expansion joints shall be
covered with 0.7mm thick aluminium cover strips fixed with masonry nails at 300mm centres or otherwise
as shown in the Drawings.

BLDG04/S4.DOC(16)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-17
4.23.1

General (Contd)
The installation method and the selection, mixing, application and curing of all joint waterproofing
materials shall comply with the Drawings and the manufacturers' recommendation. Alternative joint
waterproofing materials may be used subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Submit supporting technical
information, test reports and samples of the proposed waterproofing materials.
All waterproofing materials provided at public access areas shall be protected with non-shrink grout.

4.23.2

Waterstops
Waterstops shall be as specified in the Drawings and shall be installed and butt jointed according to
BS 8007 and the Manufacturer's recommendations. Waterstops shall be securely positioned in the
formwork to prevent displacement during concreting.

4.23.3

Sealing Compound (Permanent Structure Joint)

For permanent structure joints, sealing compound for external use shall be one of the three generic types
namely polyurethane, polysulphide and silicone. They shall comply with ASTM C920 or other approved.

4.23.4

Preformed Flexible Strip Sealant

Preformed flexible strip sealant shall comply with the following requirements :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

4.23.5

it shall only be used in horizontal joint and be subject to compression throughout its length;
Good adhesion;
Water resistant;
Non-staining

Bitumen/Rubber Cold Applied Membrane

Bitumen/rubber cold applied membrane shall comply with the following requirements :
(a)
(b)

4.23.6

Minimum joint movement capacity of 10% of joint width at 25C;

Resistant to dilute acids and alkali.

Bituminous Sheeting
Bituminous sheeting with fibre shall comply with the following requirements :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

Resistant to lime water (no visual effect after two weeks immersion);
Maximum water absorption of 10% of dry weight;
Minimum tensile strength of 50 kg per cm;
Ozone and ultra-violet resistance.

The strip shall be applied to the joints by burning and affixing on each side of joint to a width not less than
70mm leaving the middle part free to take any movement at the joint without damage.
4.23.7

Polyethylene Foam Backing Rods

Polyethylene foam backing rods used as mortar stops in panel joints shall have the following properties :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)

BLDG04/S4.DOC(17)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Minimum compressibility of 75% of original volume at 25C:

Excellent resilient properties;
Density between 35 kg per m and 45 kg per m;
Totally resistant to common acids, lubricants and detergents;
Totally resistant to water infiltration by capillary action;
Suitable for up to 70C.

Bldg Spec
Page 4-18
4.24

APPARATUS
The Contractor shall provide the following apparatus for use for all Works on the Site :

4.25

(a)

Concrete slump test apparatus complying with SS 78 or flow test apparatus complying with
BS 1881 : Part 105. One set of the apparatus shall be provided for each concreting location;

(b)

Steel or cast iron moulds complete with rod in accordance with SS 78 for casting 150mm concrete
test cubes and 100mm mortar or grout test cubes. A minimum number shall be provided such that
no stripping of the cube is required prior to the 24 hours setting and hardening period;

(c)

Three measuring cylinders of 250ml capacity, graduated to measure to the nearest 2.0 ml, for
determination of silt content (field settling method);

(d)

An approved apparatus for measuring moisture content in fine aggregate;

(e)

One digital concrete rebound hammer equipped with an electronic transducer which converts the
rebound of the hammer into an electric signal and displays it in the selected stress units;

(f)

One surveying level or theodolite complete with the necessary accessories;

(g)

One electronic calculator with statistical functions;

(h)

One 5.5m measuring tape; and

(i)

One spirit level.

MASS AND LEAN CONCRETE

Mass and lean concrete shall compose of cement, fine aggregates and coarse aggregates in the nominal
ratio by weight of 1:2:4. Where, however, a denser and more workable concrete can be produced by a
variation in the ratio of fine aggregate to that of coarse aggregates, this ratio may be varied within the
limits 1 to 1.5 and 1 to 3, provided that the weights of fine and coarse aggregates, each measured
separately, shall nevertheless be equal to the sum of the weights of fine and coarse aggregates
appropriate to the nominal mix. The concrete shall be mixed as specified in the foregoing requirements in
this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it. Reinforced concrete shall not be laid directly
onto earth surfaces. A blinding coat of 40mm minimum thickness of lean concrete shall be laid on well
prepared firm ground before any reinforcement is placed in position.

4.26

CEMENT MORTAR AND GROUT

4.26.1

General
For structural purposes, cement mortar shall compose of one part cement to one part sand, mixed with
water so that water-cement ratio does not exceed 0.4 by weight and cement grout shall compose of
cement and water-cement ratio between 0.4 and 0.6, or such other proportions as shall be directed by the
SO Rep.

4.26.2

Grouting For Prestressed Concrete Ducts

Grouting for prestressed concrete ducts shall be as specified in Clause 7.15 "Grouting".

4.26.3

Precast Concrete Joints

Non-load bearing joints between precast concrete components and adjoining structures shall be filled with
appropriate grout and/or mortar protected by proprietary sealants and backing rod. They shall be
waterproof.
Load bearing joints and connection shall be grouted, mortar packed or concreted and these shall be
carried out by trained workers. In the case where a joint need not be grouted, mortar packed or concreted
immediately, such work shall be completed not later than 28 days after erection. The respective mix
design shall be free of lime and chloride. They shall be durable, waterproof, non-shrink and possess
strength equal or higher than that of precast concrete. Curing for at least 3 days shall be provided.
Designed mixes shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval.

BLDG04/S4.DOC(18)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-19
4.26.4

Testing Method And Compliance For Load Bearing Grout And Mortar
The method of sampling and testing prescribed in BS 4551 shall be adopted. The compressive strength
shall be determined by crushing test on 50mm cubes. For each casting day and for each grade of grout or
mortar, three samples shall be taken from three separate batches. One cube shall be cast from each
sample for testing at 28 days.
The compliance of the 28 day strength shall be judged, based on the average compressive strength of 3
cubes from 3 samples taken on the same day, in accordance with the strength requirement specified in
the Drawings. In the event of non-compliance, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6
"Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.

4.27

FOUNDATIONS
All reinforced concrete footings and pile caps shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings and to
the exact depths required. Provide, maintain and remove any necessary planking and strutting, sheetpiling or cofferdams, and by pumping or other approved means keep the excavations free from water.
In the case of loose or disturbed ground, the bottom of excavation for pile caps shall be well rammed and
those for footings shall be excavated further to a sound layer. The whole work shall be approved by the
SO Rep before it is covered with a blinding layer not less than 40mm thick. The required cover of
concrete under the reinforcement shall be entirely above the blinding layer.
Excavation for all foundation work shall be carried out in accordance with Section 3 - "Excavation"
including all clauses and subclauses under it.

4.28

PILE CAPS
Before commencing to construct pile caps, the Contractor shall employ a Registered Surveyor to check
and verify the eccentricities and the cut-off levels of all piling work in the ground against pile eccentricity
Drawings provided and pile cap details in the Drawings, and shall notify the SO Rep in the event of any
discrepancy.
Straighten the steel reinforcement projecting above the piles for anchoring pile caps, carry out
excavations, erect formwork and temporary timbering for the construction of pile caps.

4.29

LIFT PITS
For lift pits below ground level, the concreting to the bottom and walls shall be carried out in one operation
without construction joints and bolt holes up to the underside of ground beams and slabs. Forms ties used
to connect opposite faces of formwork shall be cast-in steel spreader ties. Concrete separators shall not
be permitted. Where in the case water reducing admixture is used in the concrete mix, furnish information
concerning the water reducing admixture for approval by the SO Rep prior to its use. Water reducing
admixture shall be mixed with the concrete in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep.
All external wall surfaces of lift pits shall be waterproof by coating with three coats of bitumen solution
complying with BS 3416 or other cold applied bituminous coating as approved by the SO Rep. The
concrete surface shall be clean and dry before application of the first coat, and ample time for each coat to
dry shall be allowed. The total dry thickness of the coating shall be 0.6mm minimum.

4.30

FIRST STOREY SLAB

After backfilling and lean concrete to the first storey of residential building block are completed, the
Contractor shall engage a licensed registered surveyor to verify the position of all column/wall grid lines
and submit such report to the SO Rep. The SO Rep shall be informed of any deviations from the
Drawings.

BLDG04/S4.DOC(19)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-20
4.31

FLOORS
After initial set, the upper surface of cast-in-situ reinforce concrete floors shall be trowelled smooth with a
steel float to true level and even surface. No screeding of any kind shall be applied to the floor slabs
except where specified otherwise. Care shall be taken to ensure that the steel reinforcement is not
displaced or lowered during trowelling.
For areas which are to receive rendering or other finishes, the fresh concrete shall be struck off to a level
or fall as required using a long timber trowel. The surface shall be densified by a jitterbug tamper or
trowelling after the bleeding has stopped in order to eliminate settlement and plastic shrinkage cracks.
Before it hardens, it shall be brushed with a stiff broom in one direction to give a rough and tidy surface.

4.32

ROOFS

4.32.1

General
Reinforced concrete roofs shall be constructed to fall as shown in the Drawings and finished with power
trowelling, leaving the surface smooth and free from mortar droppings. The finished roof slab shall be
cured immediately with an approved curing compound.
Roof access openings, 900mm x 900mm clear with 200mm upstanding kerbs, shall be constructed at the
positions as shown in the Drawings.
100mm x 100mm mortar angle fillet shall be neatly provided around all upstands, pipe supports,
RC stumps, walls and ventilating stacks.
The finished concrete roof shall be protected against mortar droppings and damages by heavy objects
during subsequent work on the roof.

4.32.2

Watertightness And Water Stagnation Test

After the completion of all structural work on the roof, the roof slab shall be tested for watertightness and
to ensure no water stagnation. Where the reinforced concrete roof is to be protected by a watertight
secondary roof, no water test or ponding test will be conducted.
The watertightness test shall be carried out by ponding with water to a minimum depth of 25mm for 24
hours. The water used for the test shall be that used for the watertightness test of the RC water tanks. At
the end of the watertightness test, the soffit of the slab especially the area around the pipes shall be
examined for any dampness or leakage.
Immediately after discharging the water off the roof, the top surface shall be examined for any water
stagnation. Water collected beyond a layer of 5mm measured from the top surface of the roof in any area
is considered a stagnation.
After any rectification, hacking and refilling around pipes installed after the first test, the localised area
shall be retested at the Contractor's own cost and expense for watertightness, water stagnation or both as
deemed necessary by the SO Rep.

4.33

DRIPS
Drips shall be formed along edges of soffit to concrete roof slabs, hoods, underside of balconies,
cantilevered beams and slabs and other parts of the building where rainwater is likely to adhere in drops.

4.34

RC STRUCTURE CANNOT BE USED AS LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

Reinforced concrete structure and foundation shall not be used as lightning conductors or earth
electrodes. Lightning conductors shall not be embedded in any structural components and steel
reinforcement
shall
not
be
used
as
part
of
the
protection
system.

BLDG04/S4.DOC(20)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 4-21
4.35

INSTALLATION OF FIBRE OPTIC SENSOR FOR COLUMNS

The Contractor shall provide and install encased fibre optic sensors at 10 different 1st storey columns of
each building above 10 storeys. Where the columns are precast, the Contractor shall provide such
sensors for the precaster to install in the precast columns. The locations of the sensors shall be approved
by the SO Rep and as-built drawings indicating actual position of sensors must be submitted upon
successful installation. The sensors shall have connecting cables terminating with a socket at the column
face to enable the SO Rep to take readings. The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of readings per block to
HDB during the construction stage to verify that the sensors are in working condition.

Total pages for this Section :

20
Section 5/......

BLDG04/S4.DOC(21)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 5-1
SECTION 5
METAL FORMWORK

5.1

5.2

DEFINITIONS
"Metalforms" -

shall mean the set of metalforms rented from the Employer including U-clips and L-pins
but excluding the supporting system.

"Workshops" -

shall mean the Employer's maintenance workshop or warehouse or its licensed

workshop(s).

BUILDING BLOCKS USING METALFORM

The Contractor shall use the Employer's metalforms only for the construction of building blocks as
specified in the Structural Drawings. The metalforms shall be hired to the Contractor by the Employer and
it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to use and maintain them strictly in accordance with the
instructions issued by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall make provisions for his own formwork and
accessories for any portion of the building blocks where in the opinion of the SO Rep the use of
metalforms is unsuitable. Such situations may occur at curved or bent (other than 90 degrees) members,
corners and other parts of the structure. The formwork for such portions shall be made of materials which
will result in high quality off-form concrete finish.
If, in the opinion of the SO Rep, the concrete surface finish is poor, the Contractor shall carry out
rectification Works all at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
The charges, terms of hiring and other requirements are specified in Clauses 5.3 to 5.10 (inclusive).

5.3

HIRE RATES, CHARGES & PAYMENT

Metalforms shall be hired out at a fixed rate of $1.70 per square metre per month based on the ACTUAL
DAILY AREA OF METALFORMS TAKEN BY THE CONTRACTOR.
For damage or loss of metalforms, U-clips and L-pins, the Contractor shall be charged the replacement
cost based on the Employer's latest purchase price and the SO Rep reserves the right to destroy the
damaged metalforms at no compensation to the Contractor. The decision of the Superintending Officer in
this respect shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
The Employer shall deduct the amount of hiring costs and other charges payable by the Contractor from
any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or recover the same from the Contractor as a debt due
by the Contractor to the Employer.

5.4

HIRING PERIOD
The hiring period shall commence on the date of the drawing of Metalforms from the Employer's
Metalform Warehouses. The hiring period shall end when the Metalforms are returned to the Employer's
Metalform Warehouses.
Where during the hiring period, there is delay in the Contractor's construction activities due to the supply
of Metalforms which in the opinion of the SO Rep, are deemed to be unavoidable, the hiring charges may
be adjusted accordingly and at the sole discretion of the SO Rep.
The Contractor must inform the Employer's Metalform Unit of any delay within 2 weeks from the first day
of such delay. The details of notice including the number of days delayed and area of metalform affected
shall be submitted to the Metalform Unit within 2 weeks from the date of resumption of work. The SO Rep
shall endorse on this notice before submitting to the Metalform Unit.
If the Contractor does not submit the notice within the above deadline, the SO Rep reserves the right not
to consider the Contractor's request for adjustment of the hiring charges.

BLDG04/S5.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 5-2
5.5

IRREGULARITIES COMMITTED
Should the Contractor be found to have committed any of the following irregularities :
(a)

Subletting or lending the Metalforms or any part thereof to any third party or removing the
Metalforms from the site to which it is delivered or consigned, without first receiving written
permission from the SO Rep regardless of whether the Contractor has any knowledge of it; or
abuse in Metalforms usage or storage, regardless of whether the Contractor has any knowledge of
it;

(b)

Using sub-standard metalforms or accessories purchased elsewhere other than from the Employer
to replace lost and damaged ones upon returning;

(c)

Using sub-standard metalforms or accessories purchased elsewhere other than from the Employer
for use in the Site;

the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges
against the Contractor. In addition, the Contractor shall be liable to pay the Employer charges equal to the
replacement cost of Metalforms based on the latest Employer's purchase prices. The SO Rep also
reserves the right to destroy these sub-standard metalforms found on the Site at no compensation
whatsoever to the Contractor if the Contractor does not immediately remove such sub-standard
metalforms from the Site.
5.6

PROCEDURE FOR DRAWING OF METALFORMS

The Contractor is required to submit to the Employer's Metalform Unit the request for metalform schedule
not later than 2 weeks before the delivery date of the Metalforms from the Employer's warehouses.
However, the Contractor may request for metalforms with shorter lead time provided the type and quantity
requested is available in the warehouse. Based on the request, the Metalform Unit reserves the right to
vary the type and quantity based on its availability in the warehouses. The supply of Metalforms will be
based on the approved schedule.
The Contractor is not allowed to revise the approved metalform schedule in terms of type, quantity and
timing. Revision may be granted by the SO Rep in cases where the revision by the Contractor is due to
causes beyond his control.

5.7

DELIVERY OF FORMWORK
The Contractor shall bear all the cost of transportation of the Metalforms from the Metalform Unit's
Warehouse or the Workshops to the Site and return the Metalforms to the Metalform Unit's Warehouse or
the Workshops at the end of the hiring period, together with a list of the Metalform items hired. Any
missing items shall be listed separately.
During the delivery of the Metalforms to the Site, the Contractor shall be responsible for and bear the cost
of loading, unloading, on-site handling and transportation, arranging, stacking and storing of the
Metalforms.
Unless notification in writing to the contrary is received by the SO Rep from the Contractor within one
week of the Metalforms being delivered to the Site, the Metalforms shall be deemed to be in good order in
accordance with the Terms of Contract and to the Contractor's satisfaction.

5.8

USE OF METALFORMS
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe-keeping of the Metalforms and use in a workmanlike
manner and return on completion of the hiring period according to the returning schedule. The Metalforms
shall not be abused ie. not used in its intended manner, for eg. as bracing or propping of formwork, as
walking or working platform. The decision of the SO Rep in this respect shall be final and binding on and
conclusive against the Contractor. The Contractor shall be charged for the damage of the Metalforms
arising from such abuse, based on the latest Employer's purchase prices.
The Metalforms shall be used only at the site as stated in the Delivery Orders. No Metalform shall be
allowed to be transferred to another worksite unless prior written approval is obtained from the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S5.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 5-3
5.8

USE OF METALFORMS (CONTD)

The Contractor shall remove damaged metalforms and substitute with good ones from the Metalform Unit
as and when directed by the SO Rep during construction.
The Contractor shall use, for each casting of concrete, form releasing agent approved by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall bear the cost of timber, form ties, form tie holders, plastic cones, hooks, bolts, nuts,
washers, anchor bolts & form bracing and propping or any other tools and accessories he may use in
conjunction with the use of the Metalforms. The use of such accessories shall be approved by the SO
Rep.
The Employer accepts no liability or responsibility for any consequential loss or damage due to or arising
from the usage of the Metalforms or through non-arrival arising from accident during loading and
unloading or transporting of the Metalforms.
The Contractor shall fully and completely indemnify the Employer in respect of all claims by any person
whatsoever from injury to person or property caused by or in connection with or arising out of the use of
Metalforms and in respect of all costs and charges in connection therewith.
The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear the cost of building a raised timber platform and tarpaulin
covers or equivalent for the safe-keeping and storage of the Metalforms at the Site.

5.9

PROCEDURE FOR THE RETURN OF METALFORMS

The Contractor shall comply strictly with the procedures for the return of Metalforms specified hereunder :
(a)

Submit returning schedule and quantities to the Employer's Metalform Unit on a per building block
basis within 3 weeks from the last date of casting of main roof.

(b)

The Metalforms and accessories for the block (excluding the formwork for water-tank, roof-fascia,
pitched roof etc. which are to be cast after the main roof) shall be fully returned within 1.5 months
from the last date of casting of main roof; failing which, the SO Rep may treat part or whole of the
relevant unreturned metalforms as lost. The decision of the Superintending Officer in this respect
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.

(c)

The remaining Metalforms and accessories for the block shall then be returned within 1 month from
the last date of casting for the building block; failing which the SO Rep may take the action as
specified in (b) above.

(d)

All Metalforms shall be lowered down carefully by mechanical means and no dumping or rough
handling is allowed.

(e)

Metalforms returned to the Employer's Workshops shall be packed and strapped in neat bundles of
similar sizes and placed on pallets at the Contractor's own expense for easy unloading using
forklift. The Contractor shall mark the Metalform with a strip of paint of 100mm width. The colour
code to be used can be obtained from the Metalform Unit. Sizes of the pallets shall be in
accordance with the instructions of the SO Rep.

(f)

At the receiving Workshops, the Employer's representative shall fill up the metalforms delivery form
in triplicate.

(g)

Any amendment or alteration on the delivery form shall be countersigned by the Contractor and the
Employer's representative at the receiving ends.

(h)

Metalforms returned to the Workshops which are found to be irreparable will be considered as
damaged. An actual counting of such metalforms at the Workshops shall be witnessed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall ensure that he or his representative is present at the time and
place so directed by the SO Rep, otherwise, the SO Rep reserves the right to destroy or write-off
these damaged Metalforms at no compensation whatsoever to the Contractor.

BLDG04/S5.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 5-4
5.10

CLEANING, SERVICING & REPAIR OF FORMWORK

The Contractor shall return all the metalforms and the related accessories, as directed by the SO Rep to
the Workshops for cleaning, servicing and repair after the completion of the use of the metalforms.
The Contractor shall be charged according to the following rates for cleaning, servicing and repair :
Items

Rate

(1)

Flat Forms

$ 7.90 per m

(2)

Inner Corner Forms

$ 6.60 per m

(3)

L, S-shaped Forms

$17.70 per m

}
} Based on surface area in contact
} with concrete
}
}

(4)

Corner Angles

$11.00 per m

Based on gross area

The Contractor shall not pay any monies directly to any of the Workshops. The costs for cleaning,
servicing and repair shall be deducted from monies due or to become due to the Contractor.
Metalforms shall be considered as damaged beyond repair, for example; if they are twisted, severely bent
or crushed. The decision of the Superintending Officer in this respect shall be final and binding on and
conclusive against the Contractor.
The Contractor shall also be charged according to the provisions as specified under Clause 5.3 "Hire
Rates, Charges & Payment" for such Metalforms. The SO Rep reserves the right to destroy or write-off
these damaged Metalforms at no compensation to the Contractor.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 6/.....

BLDG04/S5.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 6-1
SECTION 6
SEMI-PRECAST CONSTRUCTION

6.1

PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS

6.1.1

Area Of Usage
Precast concrete components shall be used in areas as shown in the Drawings.

6.1.2

Surface Finishes
External surface treatments or finishes of the precast concrete components shall be approved by the SO
Rep.

6.1.3

Suppliers
The precast concrete components shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The list of
approved suppliers is posted at the following websites: kmo.eptc.com.sg or hdbuilders.com.
The Contractor shall submit the names of his suppliers, the written contractual agreements between
themselves and the suppliers and the quantities to be supplied by each supplier for the precast concrete
components within four weeks from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. The written contractual
agreement submitted shall include the detailed breakdown of precast component prices. The Contractor
shall not be permitted to change his suppliers without the written consent of the SO Rep.

6.2

STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE

6.2.1

Design
Structural precast concrete components shall be designed in accordance with CP 65. The Contractor may
propose alternative design subject to the written approval of the SO Rep.
Joints, connections and sealants shall be designed for protection against water, weather, corrosion and
fire so as to provide continued water and weather tightness and structural integrity of the buildings.
The positions and capacities of all lifting and erection inserts of precast concrete components shall be
carefully considered for all loads induced by manufacturing, lifting, handling, storage, transportation and
erection. A minimum safety factor of 3 shall be used to design the lifting and erection inserts, lifting hooks
and erection devices. Submit precasting and erection techniques for precast concrete components
including structural calculations and details for the lifting and erection devices.
Should the load bearing joints and connections be grouted, mortar-packed or concreted, submit respective
mix design for approval by the SO Rep and carry out tests in the mix design in accordance with
appropriate code or proprietary requirements. Method of installations adopted shall ensure that the joints
and connections can be fully grouted, mortar-packed or concreted.
Non-load bearing joints between precast concrete components and adjoining structures shall be filled with
appropriate grout and/or mortar protected by proprietary sealants and backing rod.
The SO Rep may, at his absolute discretion, instruct the Contractor to apply special coatings or epoxy
bonding compounds to connections and joints of precast concrete components, be it welded, bolted,
dowelled, grouted, mortar-packed or concreted.

BLDG04/S6.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 6-2
6.2.2

Drawings
Submit the following drawings for the approval of the SO Rep within one month from the date of the Letter
of Acceptance, unless otherwise instructed by the SO Rep :
(A)

Shop Drawings
(a)

Precast Concrete Components With Shop Drawings

Where in the case shop Drawings (denoted by the words "shop drawings" in the drawing
title) for precast concrete components are incorporated in the Drawings, the Contractor
need not submit shop drawings for approval. Notwithstanding the incorporation of such shop
Drawings in the Drawings, the Contractor shall be required to check and/or ensure the
following :

(b)

(i)

That the details for such precast concrete components are adequate and suitable for
the Works and that there is no discrepancy. The Contractor shall be responsible and
bear all costs and expenses for all rejections, reinstatements and reproductions of
such precast concrete components directly and/or indirectly resulting from and/or out
of any inadequacy, unsuitability and discrepancy in the Drawings;

(ii)

That the handling techniques for precasting, demoulding, storage and transportation
adopted shall not over-stress such precast concrete components. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor to provide at his own cost and expense, any
additional steel reinforcement bars required for his handling techniques to ensure
that such precast concrete components are not damaged or over-stressed during
handling;

(iii)

Ensure the adequacy and suitability of the size, position and details of lifting and
erection inserts and any additional reinforcement bars required for handling and
erection purposes shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to
commencement of the production work;

(iv)

That the minimum concrete strength of precast concrete components required for
handling, demoulding, storage, transportation and erection are checked and
submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the production
work.

Precast Concrete Components Without Shop Drawings

Where in the case shop drawings for precast concrete components are not incorporated in
the Drawings, the Contractor shall submit shop drawings for such precast concrete
components for approval by the SO Rep. The shop drawings shall include the following
details :

(B)

(i)

The size, position and details of lifting and erection inserts and
reinforcement details;

(ii)

The handling techniques for precasting, storage and transportation;

(iii)

The minimum concrete strength for precast concrete components required

for handling, demoulding, storage, transportation and erection.

Mould Drawings
Mould drawings showing :

BLDG04/S6.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

(i)

Surface treatment of moulds for casting and lifting operation.

(ii)

Method of concrete consolidation and compaction such as external vibration,

internal vibration, table vibration, adjusted slump and mix method.

(iii)

Method of curing, demoulding and storage of precast concrete components.

Bldg Spec
Page 6-3
6.2.2

Drawings (Cont'd)
(C)

Erection Drawings
Erection drawings showing :

(D)

(i)

Erection sequences and handling requirements.

(ii)

Calculation and position and sizes of backers/shims, temporary props, bracings and their
installation method clearly shown.

(iii)

Calculation and details of method of positioning and supporting unconnected precast

concrete components including temporary bracings, struts and props.

Waterproofing Joint Drawings

Waterproofing joint drawings showing procedure and sequence of installation of sealants on the
Site in their relation to erection sequence and handling requirements.

6.3

MANUFACTURING

6.3.1

Concrete Batching Plant

Before operating a concrete batching plant, the Contractor shall engage a PE to check the connecting
devices between parts/components and the condition of parts/components of the concrete batching plant.
Any Defect found in the checking on the concrete batching plant shall be rectified immediately.
The Contractor shall maintain the concrete batching plant in good working order at all times on the Site.
Document and keep all records of the checking in the site office for inspection by the SO Rep upon
request. The concrete batching plant shall be checked once in every six months by the Contractor's PE.
Any Defect found in the checking shall be rectified immediately.

6.3.2

Shop Drawings
Precast concrete components shall be produced in accordance with approved structural Drawings. Shop
drawings shall be based upon the structural Drawings and shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval
as per sub-clause 6.2.2 "Drawings".

6.3.3

Moulds
Check and ensure that all moulds, regardless of materials, conform to the shape, lines and dimensions of
the precast concrete components to be produced. The moulds shall be sufficiently rigid to produce the
casting tolerances and finishes specified.
Rubber seal or equivalent shall be used in all horizontal and vertical mould joints to prevent leakage of
mortar or cement paste. Moulds shall be designed to prevent damage to concrete from :
(a)

restraint as the concrete shrinks;

(b)

the stripping operation when the precast components are lifted from the mould; or

(c)

dimensional changes due to demoulding of prestressed components.

High quality rubber mat shall be used for carrying the tiles of precast components with tile finish.

BLDG04/S6.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 6-4
6.3.4

Manufacturing Requirements
Submit proposals for marking identification and date of casting of each precast concrete component for
the approval of the SO Rep prior to the commencement of manufacturing.
Surface finish requirements shall be consistent with the standard achieved by the use of high quality
concrete and properly designed forms or moulds having rigid and smooth surfaces. Such surface finishes
including surface airholes shall be to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Completed concrete finishes shall be
such that painting can be applied directly. Where tile finish is specified, check and ensure uniform width
and depth of the groove between the tiles which shall be on the same plane.
Prior to mass production of precast concrete components, produce at least one sample of each type of
precast concrete component for approval by the SO Rep. The approved sample panel shall be displayed
at the precasting yard. The approved sample panel shall be used as the yardstick for the minimum
standard and quality to be achieved for all precast panels. The SO Rep may at his absolute discretion
require more sample panels to be produced for his approval. Check and ensure that the approved sample
panels are not damaged on display.
The Contractor shall provide remedial work at his own costs and expenses to precast concrete
components that are not satisfactorily finished as decided by the SO Rep. Gross variation from the
specified finish may cause rejection of the precast concrete components and the Contractor shall replace
the precast concrete components.
Allow for the incorporation of all requirements of all trades whose work requires blockouts, recesses,
notches, embedded metal work or any other items affecting the precast concrete components involved. All
reinforcements shall be positioned in the moulds with the prescribed concrete covers as shown on the
Structural Drawings. Approval shall be sought from the SO Rep if such work cannot be incorporated into
the precast concrete components.
Aluminium window frames, may either be installed on site or cast-in together with the precast concrete
components.
In all cases the aluminium window frames shall be protected from dirt, grout and other deleterious material
by wrapping with self adhesive protective tape. There shall be adequate lapping over the joints of two
protective tapes. The protective tapes shall completely adhere to the frame and provide protection to it.
In the case of aluminium window frame being installed on site, check and ensure:

6.3.5

(i)

the safety and integrity of the aluminium window frame and that no part of the precast concrete is
hacked;

(ii)

the watertightness between the aluminium window frame and precast concrete component.

Manufacturing Tolerances
Tolerances for manufacturing and casting of precast components shall be as follows unless otherwise
instructed by the SO Rep :
(a)

Position tolerances for cast-in items measured from datum line locations as shown on approved
Drawings:
Inserts, bolts, pipe sleeves etc
Flashing relets, at edge of panel
Reglets for glazing gaskets
Groove width for glazing gaskets
Electrical outlets

(b)

:
:
:
:
:

10mm
6mm
3mm
2mm
13mm

Position tolerances for placement of reinforcement :

Reinforcing bars and meshes shall be located within 12mm of the position as shown on the
approved shop Drawings, but in casting, no reinforcement shall encroach on the specified minimum
cover.

BLDG04/S6.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 6-5
6.3.5

Manufacturing Tolerances (Cont'd)

(c)

For casting tolerances, the overall height and width measured at the face adjacent to the mould
when cast shall be as follows :
3m or under

3mm

> 3m to 6m

:
:

+3mm
-5mm

> 6m to 9m

:
:

+3mm
-6mm

Each additional 3m

Angular deviation of plane

+2mm per 150mm depth of side mould

Thickness

:
:

+6mm
-3mm

Openings (cast within one member)

+6mm

Out of square (difference in length

of two diagonal measurements)

3mm per 3m or 6mm total whichever is greater

2mm per 3m

The casting tolerances specified above shall be compatible with the installation requirements of
precast concrete components, which may have attachment of sash, door frames, window frames,
louvres sunshades and other materials.
(d)

6.3.6

For after casting tolerances, the bowing and warpage shall be as follows:
Without intermediate support dimension

1 panel
240

With intermediate support dimension

1 panel
360

Inspection Of Manufacturing
The SO Rep shall have the discretion to inspect the manufacturing plant and the precast concrete
components at all times. If the inspection is not conducted at the plant, this shall not relieve the
Contractor from his responsibility in manufacturing an acceptable product, and the SO Rep shall at his
liberty reject any precast concrete components on the Site not complying with the design requirements
even though no plant inspection has been conducted.

6.4

HANDLING
The precast concrete components shall be handled and transported in a way consistent with their shapes
and design in order to avoid excessive stresses or damages. Precast concrete components shall be lifted
only at appropriate points shown on the production and erection Drawings.
Check and allow for :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

adequacy of design reinforcement to resist handling stresses;

provision of additional reinforcement if required;
exact number, size and location of lifting inserts or other devices; and
Proper supports and support locations for storage and transportation.

Allow for developing handling techniques to ensure that all precast concrete components are successfully
fabricated, delivered and installed without causing structural damage, detrimental cracking, architectural
impairment, or permanent distortion.

BLDG04/S6.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 6-6
6.5

STORAGE
As and when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall store all precast components at the area to be
occupied by the multi-storey carpark/garage. After the construction of the foundations and ground beams
of the multi-storey carpark/garage, the area shall be backfilled for the temporary storage of precast
components. However, construction for Works to the electrical substation (if applicable) can proceed.
The Contractor shall ensure that the storage of the precast components shall not cause any damage to
the constructed pile caps, column stumps and ground beams. Before recommencing construction Works
to the multi-storey carpark/garage, the Contractor shall verify the position and alignment of the column
stumps. Any rectification work shall be done to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at the Contractor's cost and
expense.
Notwithstanding the preceding requirements, the multi-storey carpark/garage and electrical substation (if
applicable) shall be Substantially Completed within the Time for Completion. The Contractor shall be
deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses to be incurred by him in
compliance with the requirements specified in this clause.
The storage area shall be adequate to permit easy access and ready for handling of the stored precast
components. It shall have a clean, hard, level and well-drained surface to permit well-organised storage,
and to prevent warpage, bowing, chipping, cracking, discolouration, staining or soiling of the precast
components. No precast component shall be placed on the ground. They shall be stored with due
protection from staining or physical damage.

6.6

ERECTION

6.6.1

Inspection Of Precast Concrete Components

All precast concrete components shall be inspected and approved by the SO Rep before erection and
after installation. Any unauthorised erection or installation work may be rejected and necessary action
taken against the Contractor.
Prepare, install and check that the precast components are within the specified erection tolerances prior to
calling for inspection and approval by the SO Rep.
After the inspection of erected precast components, the SO Rep shall be at liberty to reject any precast
components on the Site not complying with the design or specification requirements.
No permanent jointing or connection between a precast concrete component and other precast concrete
components or in-situ structures shall be carried out without the prior approval of the SO Rep.

6.6.2

Quality Control
Only competent workers who are properly trained to handle and erect precast concrete components
should be employed.
Methods of erection shall be such as to avoid soiling, cracking, chipping and damage to built-in items.
Only minor chipping and spalling may be repaired by patching up at the Site after installation, provided this
is done to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Check and ensure the accuracy of location of all bearing surfaces and all anchorages for precast concrete
components. Any deviations from the Structural Drawings noted shall be corrected prior to the start of
erection. Bearing surfaces, notches, bolts, connection angles or plates shall be checked as to level, line
and grade.
Whenever inserts or lifting hooks are used for erection purposes, their location shall be checked for
compliances with the location as specified in the Structural Drawings. If slings are used, the precast
concrete components shall be marked so that the slings are placed at the proper locations.
Field conditions shall be determined by actual measurement so that precast concrete components and
joint sealants installed satisfy design or specification requirements and are within the specified erection
tolerances. As and when instructed by the SO Rep, the precast concrete components shall be cleaned
and repaired after installation.

BLDG04/S6.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 6-7
6.6.2

Quality Control (Cont'd)

Ensure that good construction practice is adhered to while the precast concrete components are on the
Site and bracing or props shall be provided to maintain the required position, stability and alignment of
precast concrete components prior to permanent jointing or connection.
Each precast concrete component shall be individually adjusted and accurately positioned within the
erection tolerances. Horizontal and vertical joints shall be kept correctly aligned and positioned, and
uniform joint width shall be maintained as erection progresses. Adjustments or changes in connections,
which could induce additional stresses shall be reviewed and approved by the SO Rep.
Only qualified welders shall be employed for welded connections.

6.6.3

Defect And Repair

Ensure that no defective precast concrete component shall be delivered. The decision by the SO Rep to
reject defective precast concrete components shall be final. The Contractor shall replace the rejected
precast concrete components at his own costs and expenses. The rejection criteria shall be made on
engineering basis as well as visual appearances.
Damaged precast components shall be either patched up or otherwise corrected to the satisfaction of the
SO Rep.
Method of repairs shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before the commencement of repairing
work. Major repairs should not be attempted until an engineering evaluation is made to determine whether
the precast component will be structurally sound.
In the case where localised defective tiles are detected, such defective tiles shall be replaced in
accordance with the following suggested method: Two 1mm diameter copper wires shall be glued to the
reverse side of each tile with epoxy resin and left to set. Similarly, copper wires shall be fixed 25mm into
the concrete surface with epoxy resin. Mortar or cement paste shall then be applied. The tiles shall be tied
to the concrete and set in place. In-situ pull out test shall be conducted as and when directed by the SO
Rep.
All repaired precast concrete component shall be architecturally and structurally acceptable to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep.

6.6.4

Erection Tolerance
For correct performance and appearance of the structures, check and ensure that the precast
components are located in the centre of their theoretical location on the building and adjusted to
accommodate adjacent components, proper joint width, and alignment with adjacent precast or in-situ
members. Unless otherwise instructed by the SO Rep, the permissible erection tolerances shall be as
follows :
(a)

(b)

Distance Between Edge Of Panels At Joint

For panels with dimensions
(normal to the joint) up to 6m

5mm

For each 3m increment in excess of 6m

2mm

:
:

3mm
3mm

Joint Taper (Panel Edges Not Parallel)

Per linear 300mm of joint
Minimum allowable
Maximum for entire length

(c)

:
:
:

mm
2mm
9mm

Panel Alignment
Alignment of horizontal and vertical joints
Jog in alignment of matching edges

BLDG04/S6.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 6-8
6.6.4

Erection Tolerance (Cont'd)

(d)

Location Of Openings
In precast concrete components

(e)

6mm

Verticality Of Wall
Entire height of building
1st to 4th floor
Each storey height

(f)

:
:
:

35mm
25mm
10mm

Parapet Alignment At Access Balcony

Deviation in plan from straight line parallel to specified linear building line :
Any interval less than 6m
Any 50m length

: 1mm per metre

: 25mm

Coping level :
Any interval less than 6m
Any 50m length
(g)

: 5mm
: 25mm

Verticality Of Column
Verticality tolerance for columns shall be similar to that for walls.

(h)

Column Alignment At 1st Storey

In between columns up to 6m apart
Entire length of building

6.7

: 12mm
: 30mm

PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PLANK SPECIFICATIONS

Provide and install precast prestressed concrete planks as shown :
(a)

Design Criteria And Materials For Precast

Prestressed Concrete Plank Specifications
The design criteria and materials for precast prestressed concrete planks shall be :
Low slump concrete shall be used for the production of precast prestressed concrete plank. The
strength of concrete at 28 days shall be 40 N per mm, and at transfer shall not be less than
25 N per mm. The use of calcium chloride, ions or other salts is strictly prohibited. The minimum
grade of concrete for the cast-in-situ structural topping shall be 40 N per mm.
Submit for approval of the SO Rep, the joint details as well as the allowable strands slippage.

(b)

Manufacturing Tolerances For Precast

Prestressed Concrete Plank Specifications
The manufacturing tolerances shall be as follows :

BLDG04/S6.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

(i)

Length

: +3mm

(ii)

Cross-sectional dimensions
(width or depth)

: 1mm

(iii)

Flange thickness

: 1mm

(iv)

Horizontal alignment (sweep)

: 1.25mm or 1/1,000th of overall length,

whichever is greater

Bldg Spec
Page 6-9
6.7

PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PLANK SPECIFICATIONS (CONT'D)

(b)

(c)

(d)

Manufacturing Tolerances For Precast

Prestressed Concrete Plank Specifications (Contd)
(v)

Position of anchors and inserts

: +2.5mm of centre line location shown on

the Drawings

(vi)

Position of strands

: 2mm

(vii)

End squareness

: 3mm

(viii)

Blockouts

: 10mm of centre-line location as shown

in the Drawings.

(ix)

Maximum camber deviation allowed

: 5mm from designed camber

(x)

Difference in soffit level at mid-span between adjacent members or between a precast

prestressed concrete plank and an adjacent reinforced concrete slab after installation shall
not be more than 3mm.

(xi)

Position of reinforcement designed

: 10mm primarily for connections

(xii)

Position of handling device

: 20mm

The following requirements shall be complied with :

(i)

Standard underside shall be smooth, dense with no surface holes.

(ii)

Standard top side can have minor chips and spalls but no major imperfections, honeycomb
or Defect shall be allowed. The top surface shall be such that it is suitable for composite
action with cast-in-situ structural topping.

(iii)

Exposed vertical ends shall be sawn or formed with smooth finish.

(iv)

Major openings or holes shall be provided in accordance with the Drawings. These and any
other smaller openings made in the field shall be to the approval of the SO Rep.

(v)

Patching-up will be acceptable provided the structural adequacy of the product and the final
appearance are not impaired. Prior to any patching-up work, submit proposal for the
execution of such work for approval by the SO Rep. In any event, all patching up work shall
be carried out to the approval of the SO Rep.

(vi)

Cast-in structural inserts, bolts and plates as detailed in the Drawings.

Product Delivery, Storage And Handling (Factory)

Where precast prestressed concrete planks are included in the Works, the Contractor shall comply
with the following:

BLDG04/S6.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

(i)

Precast prestressed concrete plank shall be lifted and supported during manufacturing,
stockpiling, transporting and erection operation only at the lifting or supporting points, or
both, as shown in the Drawings or shop Drawings and with approved lifting devices which
shall have a minimum safety factor of 3.

(ii)

All transportation, site handling and erection shall be performed with acceptable equipment
and methods and by experienced personnel.

(iii)

All precast prestressed units shall be stored off ground.

(iv)

All precast prestressed units shall be so placed that identification marks can be read.

(v)

Precast prestressed members shall be so stacked that lifting devices are accessible and
undamaged.

(vi)

The use of upper member of a stacked tier as storage area for shorter length of precast
members or heavy equipment is strictly prohibited.

Bldg Spec
Page 6-10
6.7

PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PLANK SPECIFICATIONS (CONT'D)

(e)

Erection
Where precast prestressed concrete planks are included in the Works, their erection shall comply
with the following :

6.8

(i)

Precast members shall be lifted by means of suitable lifting devices at points provided for
such purposes. Temporary shoring or bracing shall be provided and they shall have a
minimum load factor of 2.0 times the dead load plus construction loads.

(ii)

Members shall be properly aligned and levelled as required by the approved shop drawings.
Variations between adjacent members shall be reasonably levelled out by jacking, loading
or any other feasible methods acceptable to the SO Rep.

(iii)

Field welding shall be carried out by qualified welders using equipment and materials
compatible to the base materials.

(iv)

Precast prestressed concrete members may be drilled or 'shot', provided no contact is made
with the prestressing strands. Any spalling resulting therefrom shall be repaired to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep.

(v)

Final inspection and acceptance of erected precast prestressed concrete members shall be
made by the SO Rep to verify conformity with plans and the Specifications.

PRECAST PRESTRESSED HOLLOW CORE SLAB SPECIFICATIONS

Provide and install precast prestressed hollow core slab as shown in the Drawings.
The requirements for precast prestressed hollow core slab shall be the same as those specified for the
precast prestressed concrete plank except for the following :
(a)

Manufacturing Tolerance
Position of void - Vertical
Horizontal

(b)

6.9

:
:

3mm
3mm

Erection
(i)

Core plugs shall be inserted before erection.

(ii)

All ends of hollow core slabs shall be seated with approved concreting materials to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep.

SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL OF SUPPLY AND ERECTION SCHEDULES

Submit respective supply and erection schedules detailing the type and quantity of the precast concrete
components to the SO Rep for approval as soon as the Site is handed over to the Contractor. Adhere
strictly to the approved respective delivery and erection schedules.

6.10

MATERIALS FOR PRECAST CONCRETE WORKS

All materials used in the precast concrete works shall be in accordance with Section 4 "Structural
Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

6.11

STRUCTURAL PRECAST AND CAST IN-SITU CONCRETE WORKS

Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it shall apply for all structural
precast and cast-in-situ Works.

BLDG04/S6.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 6-11
6.12

WATER AND WEATHER TIGHTNESS

6.12.1

Waterproofing And Sealant Materials For Joints

(i)

General Requirements
Batch testing of sealant compounds delivered to the Site shall be carried out as directed by the SO
Rep at the Contractor's own costs and expenses.
The SO Rep reserves the right to reject the use of any type of sealants if their performance is
deemed to be unsatisfactory.
The use of membranes and admixtures for grout, mortar or concrete for improving water and
weather tightness may be approved by the SO Rep. All sealant materials used at public accessible
areas such as access balcony, stair-cases, stair-landings etc shall be protected with non-shrink
mortar or grout.
Liquid membranes, if used, shall have specified minimum thickness and width for water and
weather tightness.

(ii)

Performance Of Waterproofing Materials

Waterproofing materials for joints shall be as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including
all clauses and subclauses under it.

(iii)

Application Of Sealant Materials

Ensure that joints and joint sealants of precast concrete structures are correctly installed, so as to
provide continued water and weather tightness of buildings with minimum maintenance.
Joints surface preparation, primers, sealant compounds and backup materials shall be installed to
give the highest standard of materials and workmanship; these shall conform to all applicable
requirements as specified in the Specifications.
Whenever possible, sealants shall be applied with a power-actuated gun. The gun shall have a
nozzle of proper size and provide sufficient pressure to completely fill the joints.
All compound smears, primers, solvents etc used in caulking and sealing work, shall be
immediately and entirely removed from adjacent materials as the work progresses.

(iv)

Joint Width And Sealant Depth After Installation

The joint width shall depend on the dimension of the panels and its coefficient of expansion.
The maximum joint widths and maximum expansions for the common sealants shall be :
Type of Sealant

Maximum
Joint Width
(mm)

Maximum Movement in
Tension or Compression
(%)

Butyl;
Acrylic;
One Part Polyurethane;
Two Parts Polyurethane;
One Part Polysulphide;
Two Parts Polysulphide;

20
20
20
20
20
20

10
15 to 25
20
25
25
25

The normal design joint widths shall be 10, 14 or 15 as shown in the Structural Drawings.
For joints up to 13mm wide, the depth of the sealant shall be equal to the width. For joints over
13mm wide, the depth shall be equal to one-half the width, but not less than 13mm. Sealants
installed shall not be less than 6mm wide or 6mm deep.

BLDG04/S6.DOC(11)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 6-12
6.12.1

Waterproofing And Sealant Materials For Joints (Contd)

(v)

Sealant Backup Fillers

Backup fillers shall be used in joints to control the depth of the sealant, to facilitate tooling of the
sealant, and to serve as a bond breaker which prevents the bonding to the back of the joint.
Acceptable backup materials shall be those which compress and respond to movements. These
include the rod type of sponge materials such as foamed polyethylene, polystyrene, polyurethane,
polyvinyl chloride or synthetic rubber. The backup materials shall also be compatible and nonstaining to the selected sealants.

(vi)

Joint Preparation
Before sealing the joints, concrete surfaces shall be smooth, clean and free of all mortar dust or
other contaminants that may affect adhesion. Sealant and primer shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer, and the primer shall be as recommended for the particular sealant used.

6.12.2

Water And Weather Tightness Test

The joints in the superstructure shall be subjected to tests for water and weather-tightness. Internal floors
shall be tested prior to any tiling work. Testing shall be conducted only when all pipes, trunking, etc have
been installed and the penetrations sealed, unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep.
(i)

Method and Frequency of Testing

Joints shall be tested with the method and frequency as described below:
(a)

Structural Roof, Access Balcony

Roof And Lift Motor Room Roof
Water tightness test shall be carried out on all roofs with precast joints in accordance with
Clause 4.32.2 "Watertightness And Water Stagnation Test".

(b)

External Walls
For external walls, a continuous jet of water shall be sprayed on the joint corresponding to
600 litres per hour from a water hose having a nozzle velocity of 2m per second and a cone
scatter of approximately 60 degrees held at a distance of 1.2m from the wall surface under
test. The duration of the test shall not be less than 2 hours. The hose shall be placed with
the nozzle in line with the vertical joint and at a level of horizontal joints so that the jet cone
will cover a vertical and two horizontal joints as shown in the Drawings.
For external walls, 5 tests for vertical joints and 5 tests for horizontal joints shall be
conducted for each building block. These tests shall be carried out at any location as
instructed by the SO Rep.
Water shall not seep into any part of the building during the test.
For each test which fails, two additional tests shall be carried out at joint locations as
instructed by the SO Rep at the Contractor's own cost and expense.

(c)

Gable End Walls

All gable end walls shall be tested by spraying water from the top of the walls at the topmost floor level for a duration of 2 hours. The hose shall be placed with the nozzle in line
with the vertical joint at the top of the walls. Water shall not seep into any part of the
building during the test.

(d)

Refuse Chute
All refuse chutes shall be tested by spraying water from the top of refuse chutes. The water
shall spray vertically downwards on all internal walls for a duration of 1 hour. No seepage of
water from the joints shall be permitted during the test.

BLDG04/S6.DOC(12)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 6-13
6.12.2

Water And Weather Tightness Test (Contd)

(i)

Method and Frequency of Testing (Contd)

(e)

Floor Joints Of Precast Slabs

Floor joints of concrete slabs using precast prestressed concrete plank and precast
prestressed concrete hollow core slab with minimum 50mm in-situ concrete topping need
not be tested.
Floor joints of precast slabs using either precast prestressed (or non-prestressed) concrete
plank or precast prestressed concrete hollow core slab without in-situ concrete topping or
with concrete topping thickness less than 50mm shall be tested.
The floors of those areas (or dwelling units) to be tested shall be flooded with water to a
depth of 25mm for a period of one hour replenishing when necessary. The areas (or
dwelling units) shall pass the test if no dampness or seepage from the dwelling units under
test occurs in any adjoining areas (of dwelling units ) or common area during the test.
Two units (or dwelling units) per floor shall be tested. The locations of these units (or
dwelling units) to be tested shall be decided by the SO Rep.
For each unit (or dwelling unit) that fails the water test, two additional units (or dwelling
units) shall be selected by the SO Rep for testing.

(f)

Kitchen/Bathroom/Toilet Areas
(1)

Carry out water test to the following items prior to any tiling work in accordance with
the procedure described below :
(i) All joints between the floor slab and floor traps in the bathroom and kitchen;
(ii) All joints between the branching off for water closet and floor slab;
(iii) All floor joints between the precast slabs and walls in bathroom and kitchen;
and
(iv) All floor joints between the precast slabs in bathroom and kitchen.

(2)

The gratings to floor traps in the bathrooms and kitchens shall be blocked
temporarily with polythene sheets or by other suitable means and the floor flooded
with about 25mm depth of water at the highest level of the slab. The amount of
water shall be maintained for four hours, replenishing when necessary during which
the underside of the floor slab shall be checked for signs of leaks.
Towards the end of this test, the water will be allowed to drain off. During this
process there shall be no sign of chokage in the system.

(ii)

Water Test Failure

In the event of failure of a test on any joint, the Contractor shall rectify the joint and repeat the test.
This procedure shall be repeated until the tests on the joints comply fully with the passing criteria.
Furthermore, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject the use of any waterproofing materials or joint
details that perform unsatisfactorily during water tests at no cost to the Employer.
Under no circumstances shall the Contractor be allowed to carry out his own water test without the
presence of the SO Rep. All water test (specified or not specified) shall be witnessed and certified
by the SO Rep as well as the Contractor's Representative.

6.13

HOMOGENEOUS MODULAR CLINKER TILES

Homogeneous modular clinker tiles as external wall/slope finishes shall be cast together with precast
concrete components as shown in the Drawings.

BLDG04/S6.DOC(13)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 6-14
6.13.1

Submission And Approval Of Samples

Provide samples and patterns of clinker tiles to the SO Rep for approval prior to bulk ordering. Failure to
provide the samples and/or patterns may render consignments of clinker tiles already received by the
Contractor liable to rejection.
Check and ensure that the samples and/or patterns submitted are representative of the clinker tiles to be
provided.

6.13.2

Inspection And Rejection

The SO Rep shall have the power to inspect, examine, check and test the clinker tiles either on the Site or
at any factory, workshop or other place where the clinker tiles are being installed, or stored. The
Contractor shall arrange to provide all such facilities and cooperation at his own cost and expense as the
SO Rep may require in these respects.
All consignments of clinker tiles supplied shall be subject to inspection by the SO Rep. Any clinker tiles
which do not comply with the requirements of the Specification and the samples and/or patterns submitted
by the Contractor shall be rejected. Under such case, the Contractor shall within a reasonable time to be
decided by the SO Rep, replace such rejected clinker tiles with clinker tiles that comply fully with the
Specifications. The decision of the Superintending Officer shall be final and binding on and conclusive
against the Contractor.
Prior to the certification of Substantial Completion of the Works, the Contractor shall replace all damaged
clinker tiles.

6.13.3

Quality Assurance
Check and ensure that the quality of clinker tiles shall comply with SS 301. Provide all means to protect
the clinker tile materials before, during and after installation :
(a)

Application Of Cement/Sand Mortar & Clinker Tiles

The tiles shall be laid on to the prepared rubber mould with the back pattern of the tile facing up in
accordance with the tile pattern layout indicated in the architectural Drawings. The quality of the
rubber mould shall be such that it can secure the tiles firmly in place and prevent displacement of
the tiles during concreting.
Prior to pouring the concrete over the entire arrangement of the tiles, the tiles shall be cleaned of
deleterious materials that will affect adversely the bonding strength between the tile and the
hardened concrete.
The wet concrete to be used shall be mixed with water reducing agent strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions. The water reducing agent shall be submitted to the SO Rep for
approval prior to its use. Any concreting work carried out prior to approval by the SO Rep shall be
rejected.

(b)

Workmanship And Surface Finish

Clinker tiles to be used on the external wall faces of the precast concrete components shall be as
shown in the Drawings. The colour of the clinker tiles shall be as specified in the Drawings.
The clinker tiles shall be free from cracks, crazing, voids, warpage, stones or particles of lime as
would affect its safe use and its general appearance. The acceptable texture and uniformity of
colour of clinker tiles shall be decided by the SO Rep.
When directed by the SO Rep, submit the technical information or reports of clinker tiles to be
used.

BLDG04/S6.DOC(14)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 6-15
6.13.3

Quality Assurance (Cont'd)

(c)

Technical Specification
Unless otherwise specified, all tests shall be conducted by PSB, SAC-SINGLAS or other approved
laboratory in accordance with SS 301.
The total number of test specimens required for testing items (i) to (iv) specified below shall be 10.
(i)

Dimensional Tolerances
Dimensions and their tolerances shall be as follows :

(ii)

Length

190mm nominal 1% tolerance

Width

90mm nominal 1% tolerance

Thickness

12mm minimum, the average thickness of each specimen shall not

deviate more than 10% from the average thickness of 10 test
specimens.

Straightness Of Sides
The maximum deviation from straightness, referred to the length of the side, shall not
exceed 0.5%.

(iii)

Rectangularity
The maximum deviation from rectangularity of each specimen shall not exceed 1.8% of the
nominal dimension.

(iv)

Flatness Of Surface
Centre curvature and warpage of the surface shall not exceed 0.5% of the length of the
corresponding diagonal. The maximum edge curvature of each specimen shall not exceed
0.5% of the nominal dimension.

(v)

Surface Condition Of Clinker Tiles

The products when supplied shall be free from objectional surface blemishes such as
projections, depressions, flakes and crazes.
The test specimens shall form an area of at least 1 m with a minimum of 30 tiles.

(vi)

Water Absorption
The water absorption capacity on average shall not exceed 3% by weight.
Number of test specimens shall be 10.

(vii)

Modulus Of Rupture
The average value for modulus of rupture shall be at least 20 N per mm and minimum
single value shall be 17 N per mm.
Number of test specimens shall be 7.

(viii)

Colourfastness And Lightfastness

The colour of the clinker tiles shall be light-fast. No colour change shall be detectable after
exposure to ultra violet radiation for 28 days.
Number of test specimens shall be 5.

BLDG04/S6.DOC(15)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 6-16
6.13.3

Quality Assurance (Cont'd)

(c)

Technical Specification (Cont'd)

(ix)

Acid Resistance And Alkali Resistance

Macroscopic surface examination shall not reveal any visible change for acid resistance and
alkali resistance tests.
Number of test specimens shall be 5 for each solution.

(x)

Test For Adhesion Bond Strength Between

Clinker Tiles And Concrete
The test shall include both shear adhesion strength and tensile adhesion strength. 5 test
specimens shall be sampled for each test.
Test methods and procedures of shear adhesion strength shall comply with ASTM C482-78
except for preparation of test samples. For preparation of test samples, clinker tiles shall be
cut to 100mm x 90mm and placed in the base of the moulds with the back pattern of the
tiles facing upwards followed by the pouring of wet concrete of similar concrete mix and
water reducing agent to be used for the production of the precast concrete components.
The load shall be applied perpendicular to the groove line. The characteristic shear
adhesion strength at 7 days shall not be less than 2 N per mm.
Tensile adhesive strength shall be conducted by PSB, SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory
or other approved laboratory. The mean tensile adhesion strength at 7 days of each
specimen shall not be less than 0.4 N per mm.

6.13.4

Submission Of Test Certificates For Approval

Submit test certificates by SAC - SINGLAS accredited laboratory to cover the following items :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)

Dimensional Tolerances
Straightness of Sides
Rectangularity
Flatness of Surface
Surface Condition of Clinker Tiles
Water Absorption
Modulus of Rupture
Colourfastness and Lightfastness
Acid Resistance and Alkali Resistance
Test for Adhesion Bond Strength Between Clinker Tiles and Concrete.

The test certificates shall be submitted to the SO Rep prior to bulk ordering. In addition, the Contractor
shall send the clinker tiles for testing as and when required by the SO Rep.
At the time of receiving clinker tiles from the supplier, the Contractor shall check and satisfy himself that
the clinker tiles comply with this Specifications, and, if so requested by the SO Rep, shall submit a
certificate issued by the manufacturer that the clinker tiles as supplied in the shipment are of the best
quality of its kind.
6.14

PRECAST FERROCEMENT SUNBREAKERS

6.14.1

General
Unless otherwise specified, the requirements specified in Clauses 6.1 to 6.6 (inclusive), 6.9 to 6.11
(inclusive) and 6.13 including all sub-clauses under them shall be applicable to this Clause including all
sub-clauses under it.

6.14.2

Scope
Provide and install precast ferrocement sunbreakers complete with fixing accessories to the locations as
shown in the Drawings.

BLDG04/S6.DOC(16)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 6-17
6.14.3

Shop Drawings
All structural and architectural drawings on this provision shall only serve as a guide. Prepare and submit
workshop drawings on all relevant details including :

6.14.4

(a)

Reinforcement detail of sunbreaker panels in elevations and sections.

(b)

Fixing and connection details.

(c)

Necessary steel bolts, hooks or other approved materials required for handling and erection
purposes. The size and location of these materials shall be clearly indicated in the details.

Materials (Precast Ferrocement Sunbreakers)

(a)

Cement
Cement shall be as specified in Clause 4.1 "Cement"

(b)

Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates shall be as specified in Clause 4.2 "Aggregates".

(c)

Water
Water shall be as specified in Clause 4.3 "Water".

(d)

Steel Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement shall be as specified in Clause 4.5 "Steel Reinforcement" including all
subclauses under it. In addition, all welded mesh and steel bar used shall be galvanised in
accordance with SS 117 or other relevant approved standards. 1.5mm diameter at 25mm spacing
wire mesh shall be galvanised with zinc coating of 65 g per m minimum and shall have minimum
proof stress of 300 N per mm.

(e)

Admixtures
Admixtures shall be as specified in Clause 4.4 "Admixtures".

6.14.5

Source Of Material
The Welded Mesh Fabric and Fine Mesh Fabric shall be obtained from sources approved by the SO Rep.

6.14.6

Technical Specifications
(a)

Mix Design
The ferrocement sunbreaker panels shall be cast from a mix design which satisfy the following
requirements :
(i)

minimum cement to sand ratio by weight of 1:2.

(ii)

maximum water to cement ratio by weight of 0.45.

(iii)

air dry density of hardened concrete (including steel) not less than 2,200 kg per m.

(iv)

28 days average cube strength from three test cubes shall be not less than
40 N per mm.

The amount of admixture in the mix design shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's
instruction.
Before commencing the manufacture of precast ferrocement sunbreaker, submit a proposed mix
design to the SO Rep for approval.

BLDG04/S6.DOC(17)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 6-18
6.14.6

Technical Specifications (Contd)

(b)

Other Properties
(i)

Initial Surface Absorption Test (ISAT) shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1881. The
hardened panel shall have ISAT value less than that stipulated below :
Time (min)
ISAT Value (ml/m/s)

(c)

10

30

60

0.100

0.055

0.035

(ii)

Carbonation depth of hardened panel at installation shall be less than 3mm.

(iii)

Cover tolerance shall be such that no more than 3 points per section shall have a cover
measurement of less than 5mm, but not less than 3mm.

Finishes
The panel shall be cast on a steel base mould with the finish surface cast-face down. The finish
surface is the external surface of the sunbreaker elevation where the tile and motifs are located.

(d)

Dimensional Tolerances
All tolerances shall be as specified in sub-clauses 6.3.5 "Manufacturing Tolerances" and 6.6.4
"Erection Tolerance".

6.14.7

Manufacturing Process
The panel shall be cast flat on a steel base mould. The mortar shall be compacted by vibrators and the
top surface shall be steel trowelled smooth. All reinforcement shall be galvanised and adequately
supported with approved spacers.
After setting and demoulding, the panels shall be marked and neatly stored with easy access and visibility
to every piece.
All panels must be properly cured. Seek the approval of the SO Rep with respect to the curing method,
duration and facilities prior to actual production. The curing method shall be equivalent to 3 days of moist
curing.
Prior to commencement of the production, at least one sample of the panels shall be produced, erected
and installed at site for the approval of the SO Rep. Make adjustments to the manufacturing process or
equipment if so directed by the SO Rep.
Maintain a record of daily work progress on a proper drawing showing where panels of a particular date of
manufacture have been installed.

6.14.8

Quality Assurance Works For Precast Ferrocement Sunbreakers

For precast ferrocement sunbreakers, the requirements for inspection and testing, sampling rate and
passing criteria shall comply with those requirements for Ferrocement Roof Slabs as specified in Section
14 "Concrete Flat Roof" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

Total pages for this Section :

18

Section 7/.....
BLDG04/S6.DOC(18)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 7-1
SECTION 7
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

7.1

GENERAL
The following specifications on Prestressed Concrete shall be treated as additional clauses to those
required under Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

7.2

CONCRETE MIX
Only specially designed concrete mixes complying with the requirements specified in the Drawings shall
be used for prestressed concrete work. Submit, for the approval of the SO Rep, details of the concrete
mix proposals at least 6 weeks in advance of concreting work so as to allow strength tests from trial mixes
to be made. Trial mixes shall be repeated until a satisfactory mix as regard to the cube strength and
workability has been achieved. Once the SO Rep has approved the mix, it shall be used for that work and
no departure shall be made from it either in properties of materials or in their relative proportions unless
authorised by the SO Rep who may require further trial mixes to be made.
All sampling and testing of constituent materials, fresh and hardened concrete, shall be carried out in
accordance with the provisions of the appropriate Singapore or British Standard. If the strength of cube
test results representing the prestressed concrete work fails to achieve the required strength, the
Contractor shall be subject to charges and shall carry out further tests and/or rectifications to ascertain the
in-situ strength of concrete as specified under Clause 4.16, 4.17 and 4.18 including all subclauses under
them.
Notwithstanding that all tests have been complied with, member which cracks during or after prestressing
operations to an extent which in the opinion of the SO Rep renders it unfit for its purpose in the work shall
be removed from the work and replaced.

7.3

PRESTRESSING STEEL
The prestressing steel, wire or strand used in prestressing tendons shall comply with the requirements of
BS 2691, BS 3617, BS 4486, BS 4757 and BS 5896. High tensile steel wires or high tensile steel strands
shall be supplied in coils of a sufficiently large diameter so that it shall retain its physical properties and
shall be reasonably straight when unwound from the coils.
A copy of the Manufacturer's test certificates covering each coil of prestressing steels to be used shall be
provided to the SO Rep. If test certificates relating to the material is not available, the Contractor shall
arrange for testing of samples. The SO Rep may require the Contractor to carry out further test on the
steel of each batch. All such testings shall be carried out by an approved testing authority.
All wires or strands shall be cut from certified coils. Keep proper records so as to enable identification of
the wires with the coil from which they are cut. The manufacture and assembly of tendons shall be done
in accordance with the best quality of workmanship appropriate to the prestressing system being used.
Tendons shall be made to the required length plus an allowance, where applicable, at each end for
stressing operation. Splicing of strands or wires forming a tendon shall not be permitted. Flame cutting of
wire or strand within 80mm of where tendon will be gripped by the anchorage or jacks shall not be
permitted. Care shall be taken to ensure that the flame does not apply on the anchorage or on the
tendon, within 25mm of the anchorage.
A durable metal label on which shall be stamped the length of the tendon and the coil number of the wire
or strand used, shall be tied to each tendon. Care shall be taken that tendons of any type are not
damaged, kinked or bent. Tendons shall be kept free from loose or thick rust, oil, grease, tar, paint, mud,
or any other deleterious substances but a thin film of rust will be permitted.

BLDG04/S7.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 7-2
7.4

ANCHORAGE DEVICES
Anchorage devices shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. Each anchorage device shall be
capable of transmitting a force not less than the ultimate tensile strength of the tendon without
overstressing the concrete. Spiral or other reinforcement specified by the manufacturer as being required
for this purpose shall be considered part of the anchorage devices and shall be of the size and dimensions
recommended by the Manufacturer for the prestressing system being used. Certificates of origin shall be
provided for all anchorage devices.
No damaged or defective anchorage devices shall be used. All steel parts shall be protected from
corrosion and all threaded parts and fittings shall be protected by wrappings or plugs until used. The
anchorage devices shall be kept free from mortar, loose rust, grease, tar, paint, oil, mud or any other
coatings.

7.5

SHEATHING
All Sheathing shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Sheathing shall be of the type suitable for
the prestressing system to be used and shall be strong enough for withstanding the placing and
compaction of the concrete without suffering damages or deformation. Internal and external diameters of
sheathing shall be within the limits specified in the design or approved by the SO Rep. The sheathing and
all splices shall be mortar tight. Steel sheathing shall be galvanised or lead coated. The Manufacturer's
value for the friction coefficients of the proposed sheathing shall be stated by the Contractor. Enlarged
portions of the sheathing at couplings or anchorages shall be of sufficient length to provide for the
extension of tendons.
Grout holes shall be provided at both ends of the sheathing and shall be at least 10mm diameter. Each of
the grouting holes shall be equipped with a plug valve or similar device capable of withstanding a pressure
of 1 N per mm without loss of water, grout or air. Additional vents, with plug valves, shall be provided at
suitable points in the sheathing, including high and low points, for the purpose of bleeding air and water to
ensure the complete filling of the duct with grout. The number and location of these additional vents shall
be as specified in the design.
Sheathing for prevention tendons shall consist of plastic tubing or other approved material of a quality,
diameter and thickness approved by the SO Rep. Sheathing shall continue through end forms for at least
25mm.

7.6

PLACEMENT OF TENDONS
(a)

Post-tensioned Tendons
Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings or approved by the SO Rep, tendons shall be sheathed
and placed in position prior to concreting. Where permanent tendons cannot be placed, temporary
tendons or other methods approved by the SO Rep shall be used to stiffen the sheathing.
Tendons shall be handled with care and shall be pulled through the sheathing in such a manner as
to avoid damage or contamination to either the tendon or the sheathing.
Sheathing shall be securely fixed at points sufficiently close together to maintain a smooth tendon
profile throughout the length of the tendon within a tolerance of 3mm of the position shown. If in
the opinion of the SO Rep, the sheathing is liable to be damaged or deformed during concreting
work, the Contractor shall take additional precautions to maintain the position and shape of the
sheathing.
Any temporary opening in the sheathing shall be plugged and all joints between sheathing and any
other part of the prestressing system shall be effectively sealed to prevent the entry of mortar, dust,
water or other deleterious matter. Sheathing shall be neatly fitted at joints without projection or
reduction of diameter, and the joints shall be mortar tight.
Immediately after the whole of the concrete has been placed, all tendons therein shall be pulled
back and forth for about 300mm to ensure that they are perfectly free inside the sheaths. Ducts
stiffened by temporary tendons shall be checked by passing through a tendon identical with the
permanent tendon.

BLDG04/S7.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 7-3
7.6

PLACEMENT OF TENDONS (CONT'D)

(a)

Post-tensioned Tendons (Cont'd)

Unless otherwise specified, the minimum concrete cover to the outside surface of any sheathing
shall be 50mm for beam soffits and 40mm elsewhere. This minimum cover shall be increased by
15mm for members in contact with earth or water or over salt water and by 25mm for members in
contact with salt water.
Each anchorage device shall be set square to the line of the corresponding prestressing tendon
and shall be positioned securely to prevent movement during concreting. The anchorage devices
shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Any mortar or concrete which adheres to the
bearing or wedging surfaces shall be removed immediately. Provision shall be made for covering
anchorages with reinforced concrete after completion of stressing. The minimum cover shall be
50mm over the anchorages and 40mm over the reinforcement.

(b)

Pretensioned Tendons
Tendons shall be located as shown on the Drawings and suitable devices shall be provided to
ensure that the correct positioning of the tendons is maintained during casting.
When tendons are being placed, particular care shall be taken so that the tendons shall not come
into contact with the oiled surface of the forms or be otherwise soiled. Any oil, etc which might
collect on the tendons shall be removed by cleaning the affected tendons with a petrol-soaked rag
or by other approved methods.
The anchorages shall be such as to prevent any slip during the casting or curing operations.
Unless as shown otherwise in the Drawings, the concrete cover to the surface of any tendon shall
not be less than twice the tendon diameter or 25mm whichever is the greater. Such minimum
cover shall be increased by 15mm for members situated in earth or water or over salt water.

7.7

CONCRETING
Concrete in one precast unit shall be placed in one operation continuously without interruption. The
Contractor shall provide such protective cover as and when required to avoid stoppage due to sudden
rain. No unit shall be removed from the mould or erected until sufficiently matured to ensure that no
damage shall be done to the unit. For post-tensioned construction, where necessary, temporary openings
shall be provided in the formwork to enable placing and adequate compaction of concrete, especially
around and underneath sheathing and anchorages.
Care shall be taken to avoid damaging the sheathing. Vibrators shall not come into contact with the
sheathing and if the sheathing is damaged during concreting, the whole or a portion of the concrete cast
may be rejected by the SO Rep. Sheathing shall be cleaned out within half an hour of completion of each
concreting operation by blowing oil-free compressed air through the length of the sheathing. The concrete
shall be moist cured until the prestress is applied.

7.8

CONCRETE STRENGTH AT TRANSFER

No post-tensioning of tendons or the release of pretensioned tendons shall take place until the concrete
has attained the minimum strength required as stated in the Drawings or as specified. These requirements
shall be ascertained from tests on concrete cubes made and cured under the same conditions as the
concrete member. Sufficient cubes shall be made so that if the stipulated strength is not achieved, further
cubes will be available for such additional testing as may be required.

BLDG04/S7.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 7-4
7.9

TENSIONING EQUIPMENT
All tensioning equipment shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to use. Hydraulic pumps shall be power
driven and the power unit shall be so adjusted that the rate of extension of the tendon is within the limits
recommended or as directed by the SO Rep. Dynamometers, and each set of equipment comprising
pump, jack and pressure gauge shall be calibrated as directed by the SO Rep and the true force
determined from the calibration. Dynamometers, pressure gauges and scales shall permit force and
elongation to be determined within an accuracy of 2%.
Pressure gauges shall only be used as a substitute for dynamometers and shall be concentric scale
gauges complying with the requirements of BS 1780 which requires gauges to be accurate to within 1% of
their full capacity. They shall be selected so as to be used between the 50% and 90% of their full capacity
and shall not be less than 200mm in diameter. Where pressure gauges are used, a suitable device shall
be fitted so as to protect the gauge against sudden release of pressure. Provision shall also be made by
such means as a "tee" connection, for the attachment of a second gauge which shall be attached and
used as a check whenever so requested by the SO Rep.

7.10

TENSIONING PRECAUTIONS
All tensioning operations shall be carried out in the presence of the SO Rep in accordance with the best
practice applicable to the particular prestressed method proposed. The tensioning operation shall be
performed only by personnel trained and experienced in this type of work.
Care shall be taken during tensioning to ensure the safety of all personnel engaged on the work and of
other persons in the vicinity. Jacks shall be secured in such a manner that they will be restrained should
they loose their grip on the tendons. No person shall be permitted to stand behind the jacks or close to
the line of the tendons while tensioning is in progress. The operation of jacks, the measurements of
elongation and associated operations shall be carried out in such a manner and from such positions that
the safety of all concerned is ensured. During actual stressing operations warning signs shall be
prominently displayed. Where, in the opinion of the SO Rep, there is danger to the general public or to
property, special precautions in the form of substantial barrier shall be required.

7.11

TENSIONING FORCE
Unless otherwise specified, the tensioning forces required shall be that shown in the Drawings. The
tensioning force applied to any tendon shall be determined by direct measurement of the force and
checked by measurement of the elongation of the tendon. The secant modulus determined from test
samples or shown on test certificates shall be used when interpreting the measurement of elongation.
Allowance shall be made for any anticipated draw-in at the anchorage devices on release of the jack, for
elastic shortening of the member and for anticipated losses due to stressing of subsequent tendons. The
final forces in each tendon, as measured by the dynamometer, shall be within an accuracy of plus or
minus 3% of the values stipulated.
If, on completion of tensioning each tendon to the required force, the check measurement of elongation
differs from its required value by more than 5%, the SO Rep may direct that some or all of the following
steps be taken :
(a)

Recalibration of equipment;

(b)

Testing of tendon material to check secant modulus;

(c)

Tendons released and restressed (secant modulus applicable to second stressing

to be adopted);

(d)

Lubrication of tendons to reduce friction losses. Only water soluble oils shall be used
in ducted systems and these shall be washed out before grouting;

(e)

Where only 1 jack is used previously, the tendon shall be tensioned from both ends
using 2 jacks;

(f)

Other methods as directed by the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S7.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 7-5
7.12

PRETENSIONING
The abutments and casting beds for pretensioning of tendons shall be strong enough to withstand the
required total prestressing force with adequate safety. The abutments shall be so constructed as to
provide protection at all times against injury or damage caused by slipping occurring in anchorages during
or after tensioning. Provisions shall be made for free and adequate movement of the member at points of
support in the direction of the expected shortening due to prestress without impairing the rigidity of the
forms during casting operations. Where necessary, provision shall be made in the design of the casting
bed for the use of external vibrators.
In the case where tendons are to be deflected, submit details of the proposed layout for each line of
tendons together with values for the portion of the force to be provided by the initial tensioning and for the
portion which will be provided by the elongation resulting from subsequent deflection of the tendons.
Tensioning shall not commence until the SO Rep has approved the values submitted.
Special care shall be taken to apply tensioning force smoothly at an even rate and to determine its value
with considerable accuracy. Tendons shall be marked for measurement of elongation and shall also be
marked at both the jacking and dead ends of the stressing bed so that any slip may be observed. Should
a slip of any of the tendons in a group of tendons tensioned together occur, the tensioning of the whole
group shall be released, tendons reset, and the whole group tensioned again. Alternatively, the tensioning
of the group of tendons can be completed without the slipped tendon(s) which can be subsequently
tensioned.
The prestressing force shall be transferred from the jack to the abutment of the stressing bed immediately
the required force (or elongation) has been reached and the pressure in the jack shall be relaxed before
any other operation commences. Tendons shall be deflected, where shown in the Drawings and the
required force maintained, by use of approved fixing devices strong enough to hold the tendons firmly in
their proper positions especially during concreting and curing, until the concrete has attained the required
strength.
In order that the required force is maintained after the tensioned steel has been anchored, an allowance
shall be made in assessing the value of the applied force for loss of stress due to yield in the anchorages
and for slip when the steel is wedged after tensioning. In long line beds, due consideration shall be given
to the friction caused by the varying shape and number of diaphgrams.
Prior to concreting, a check shall be made of the accuracy of alignment of forms and of the distance
centre to centre bearings, overall length, width, positioning of end blocks, tendons, sheathing and
anchorages and their connections, reinforcement, bearings, dowels and any other fittings shown in the
Drawings. Concreting of a member shall not commence until the approval of the SO Rep has been
obtained.
Prior to transfer of the prestressing force from the abutments of the casting bed to the members, all
tendons shall be tested for tightness and any loose tendon found shall be reported to the SO Rep who will
decide whether the members are acceptable. All tendons shall be marked at each end of every member
so as to check the draw-in and any slip of the tendons. The procedure of release shall be continuous and
shall be performed in the shortest possible time without interruption. The prestress shall be transferred to
the members in such a manner that the tendons are released gradually and, preferably, simultaneously.
The method of transferring the prestress and the equipment proposed shall be approved by the SO Rep
prior to use. The SO Rep shall be present at every occasion of releasing tendons. After prestress has
been transferred to the members, the tendons between the members shall be severed working along the
line from the point or points of release. Every effort shall be made to avoid injury to the concrete.

BLDG04/S7.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 7-6
7.13

POST-TENSIONING
The process of prestressing each member shall be continuous, the tendons being stressed in the order
indicated in the Drawings, and the operation completed without interruption in as short a time as possible.
No member shall be left partially prestressed without the permission of the SO Rep unless the Drawings
require the member to be prestressed in stages. In general, tensioning shall proceed symmetrically to
avoid lateral distortion and development of tension on one side. At no time shall the permissible stresses
in concrete and steel be exceeded.
Tendon ducts shall be cleaned out by blowing compressed air through them and anchorages shall be
thoroughly cleaned prior to commencement of tensioning. The protruding ends of tendons shall be
cleaned of any coating, such as rust, mortar, oil or mud which would lessen the grip of wedges of
anchorage devices. Tendons shall be checked before tensioning to see that they are free to move inside
the duct.
Special care shall be taken to set the jacks accurately in the line of the tendon. The force which is applied
initially to take up the slack of the tendon shall be sufficient to seat the jack firmly but shall not exceed the
amount normally associated with the particular method of post-tensioning. After taking up the slack, the
tendon shall, where possible, be accurately marked at both ends and elongations or draw-in measured
from these markings. When requested by the SO Rep readings of force and elongation shall be taken at
stages during the tensioning of a tendon and plotted to determine the zero error in measuring elongation.
Where tendons consist of a number of individual components, each component shall be marked so that
any slip may be observed.
In the case of slipping of one or more components or tendons of a group tensioned together, the SO Rep
may permit a compensating increase in the elongation of the remaining tendons of the group provided that
the jacking force does not exceed 80% of the minimum ultimate tensile strength of the remaining tendons.
In the case of a tendon breaking or slipping after tensioning, the tendon shall be released, replaced if
necessary, and restressed. Under no circumstances shall the maximum jacking force exceeds the rated
capacity of the jacking equipment used, or 80% of the specified minimum ultimate strength of the tendon
whichever is less.

7.14

TENSIONING RECORDS
All tensioning data shall be recorded and submitted to the SO Rep for checking and retention :
(a)

Pretensioned Tendons
The following data relating to the prestressing operation shall be recorded :

(b)

(i)

Identification numbers of dynamometers, gauges, pumps and jacks;

(ii)

Force applied if dynamometer is used; alternatively, pump or jack pressure and area
of piston;

(iii)

Elongation remaining after anchoring.

Post-Tensioned Tendons
The following data, where applicable, shall be recorded :

BLDG04/S7.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

(i)

Identification number of each dynamometer, gauge, pump and jack;

(ii)

Identification particulars of tendons;

(iii)

Initial forces (or pressures) when tendons are marked for measurement of elongation;

(iv)

Final forces (or pressure) and elongations obtained on completion of tensioning;

(v)

Elongation remaining after release of jacks;

(vi)

Elongations obtained at intervals during tensioning, together with corresponding forces

(or pressures), if and when required by the SO Rep.

Bldg Spec
Page 7-7
7.15

GROUTING
After post-tensioned tendons have been tensioned and anchored they shall be pressure-grouted as soon
as practicable. The grout mix and the method of mixing and injecting the grout shall be approved by the
SO Rep before grouting is commenced. The pressure at which the grout is to be pumped into the duct
shall be approved by the SO Rep and shall not normally exceed 0.7 N per mm.
The grout shall preferably be either a neat cement grout with a water to cement ratio not exceeding 0.4 or
cement mortar (1:1 3/4 by weight). An approved expanding plasticising admixture shall be used. Grout
shall be mixed in a high speed mechanical mixer, for at least 2 minutes, until a uniform colloidal
consistency is produced. Mixing by hand shall not be permitted. Pumps shall be capable of continuous
operation with little pressure variation and shall have a system for recirculating the grout whilst actual
grouting is not in progress. Pumps shall be fitted with a pressure gauge and shall be capable of delivery
at pressures up to 1.0 N per mm. All equipment, especially piping, shall be thoroughly washed with clean
water after each series of operations and more frequently if necessary.
Grouting shall not be carried out while the shade temperature exceeds 38C. All ducts and holes shall be
thoroughly flushed out with clean water followed by compressed air. Grout shall be injected into each duct
at a speed between 300mm and 600mm per second. A continuously steady flow of grout shall be
maintained until the duct is completely filled and pure grout issues from all vents and from the far end and
until all entrapped air has been expelled. The vents shall be progressively closed as required to ensure
the complete filling of the duct. The grout pressure shall then be held at the required value for at least 1
minute after which the grouting end shall be plugged. All vents and ends shall be kept closed until final
setting of the grout has taken place. When directed by the SO Rep, duct openings shall be inspected 2 or
3 days after grouting and topped up if necessary.
If serious leaks occur, the grouting shall be stopped, the duct flushed clean with water and the leakage
plugged before continuing with grouting. If a blockage occurs, pumping may be quickly transferred to the
far end of the duct if there are sufficient vents to ensure that the duct will be filled with grout. Alternatively,
ducts may be flushed with clean water to clear the blockage. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
complete filling of the ducts with grout. If several blockages occur the grout mix may be rejected and a
new mix designed.
On completion of grouting and after the grout has hardened sufficiently, any vents or grouting tubes which
extend to the surfaces of the concrete shall be cut off 25mm below the concrete surface and the recess
plugged with concrete. Tendons shall be cut back to give, when recesses are concreted, a minimum of
25mm cover. Wire stubs (if any) may be bent into the recesses. Recesses shall be concreted, or, when
shown in the Drawings, shall be filled monolithically when other cast-in-place concrete is placed.
Complete records shall be kept on all grouting of ducts and a copy of the records submitted to the SO
Rep.

7.16

PRESTRESSED MEMBERS
Workmanship displayed in the construction of prestressed members shall be of the highest order and
every endeavour shall be made to obtain accuracy of dimensions. The dimensions and shape stated in
the Drawings shall be taken to apply to the structure at the time of its completion when under self weight
alone. Except where stated otherwise in the Drawings or approved by the SO Rep, the dimensions and
profile of the formwork shall compensate for deformations due to prestress, etc so that the dimensions
and profile of the completed structure will conform to the Drawings. Submit details of the magnitude of
these deformations and the proposed method to allow for them. Construction of formwork shall not
commence until the approval of the SO Rep has been obtained.

BLDG04/S7.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 7-8
7.16

PRESTRESSED MEMBERS (CONT'D)

For precast members, the date of casting, length of member and the identification number required by the
SO Rep shall be marked on every member. When requested by the SO Rep, the word 'TOP' and/or lifting
positions shall also be marked on the member. All accepted members shall be clearly identified by
marking in the presence of the SO Rep. Members shall not be lifted or handled until fully stressed. At all
times, and especially during transportation, members shall be secured in proper positions by means of
suitable packing pieces and braces. Members shall not be braced against one another but shall be
provided with independent bracing. Members shall be handled, lifted and supported carefully at the
positions and in the manner required by the Drawings. Where no method of lifting is shown in the
Drawings, submit for the approval of the SO Rep, details of proposals for lifting the members and once
approved no other method shall be used during the whole period of construction except with the
permission of the SO Rep.
Precast members shall be supported on timber bearers or other approved means, over their full width.
The ground or space between the bearers supporting the members shall be carefully cleared and levelled
so as to prevent the member from being accidentally supported other than on the approved bearers. The
bearers themselves shall be supported on firm foundation and, every precaution shall be made to prevent
subsidence from occurring. Members shall not be stacked on top of one another except when approved
by the SO Rep who shall determine the manner of stacking and the maximum number of layers or height
of the stacking. Each layer shall be separated from the next layer by bearers.
No precast member which is manufactured outside the Site shall be delivered to the Site without the
permission of the SO Rep. The granting of permission shall be dependent on each individual member
exhibiting satisfactory workmanship and finish and complying with the tolerance on dimensions and
prestressing force. In addition, test loading, if specified, and concrete strength tests of representative
members shall satisfy the requirements specified.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 8/.....

BLDG04/S7.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 8-1
SECTION 8
HOUSEHOLD SHELTER

8.1

SEMI-PRECAST HOUSEHOLD SHELTER

The Contract primarily requires the Contractor to construct semi-precast household shelters. The
Contractor shall comply with all requirements specified herein in this Section including all clauses and
subclauses under it.
(a)

Approved Supplier
The precast panels of household shelters hall be obtained from a supplier approved by the
SO Rep. The list of approved suppliers is posted at the following websites: kmo.eptc.com.sg or
hdbuilders.com.
The Contractor shall submit the written contractual agreement between himself and his supplier
within two weeks from the date of the Letter of Acceptance.

(b)

Precast Concrete Works

The requirements specified in the clauses and subclauses under Section 6 "Semi-Precast
Construction" shall apply for all structural precast Works.

(c)

Manufacturing Of Precast Components

The precast component of the household shelters shall be fabricated with proper quality control
and shall be fabricated in accordance with the approved Drawings. The door frame for the blast
door shall be cast in together with the precast panel. A removable steel bracing frame (Dummy
Door) to prevent the door frame from warping shall be used during concreting. The door leaf shall
be installed on the Site at a later stage as decided by the SO Rep.
In all cases, the blast door frames shall be protected from dirt, grout and other deleterious
materials by wrapping with plastic sheets or other means to provide protection to the door frames.
The Contractor shall ensure the correct alignment and positioning of the door frame, ventilation
sleeve and plate units and openings for electrical services.
Where honeycombs or segregation occur in the concrete, these shall be made good only by
pressure grouting with the approval of the SO Rep.
No plastering shall be allowed on the internal surfaces of the household shelter.
Prior to mass production of the precast panels for the household shelters, the Contractor shall
produce at least one sample of each type of precast panel together with the blast door installed for
approval by the SO Rep. The approved samples shall be displayed at the factory or on the Site if
precast on Site. These approved samples shall be used as references for the minimum standard
and quality to be achieved for all the precast panels of the household shelters.
The Contractor shall provide remedial work to any precast panel of the household shelters that are
not satisfactorily finished as decided by the SO Rep. Gross deviation from the specified finish may
result in the rejection of the precast panel.
The SO Rep shall reject any precast panel of the household shelter including those already
delivered to the Site, if it is found that such precast panel does not comply with the Drawings and/or
Specifications.

BLDG04/S8.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 8-2
8.1

SEMI-PRECAST HOUSEHOLD SHELTER (CONT'D)

(d)

Transportation And Site Storage

The precast panels of the household shelters shall be delivered to the Site in a proper manner.
The Contractor shall ensure that the precast panels are able to withstand any distortion in the
shape during lifting, transportation and installation. They shall be handled in such a manner so as
to avoid excessive stress or damage.
The Contractor shall ensure proper site access and shall supply all necessary tools and equipment
for the efficient transportation of the precast panels to the designated location at the Site.
The storage area shall be adequate to permit easy access and ready for the handling of the stored
precast panels. It shall have a clean, hard, level and well-drained surface to permit well-organised
storage, and to prevent warpage, bowing, chipping, cracking, discolouration, staining or soiling of
the precast panels. No precast panel shall be placed directly on the ground without proper support.
They shall be stored with due protection from staining or physical damage.

(e)

Installation
The Contractor shall provide all necessary tools and equipment such as cranes, temporary staging,
etc for the efficient installation of the precast panels. The installation procedure shall be submitted
to the SO Rep for approval and shall be strictly adhered to thereafter.
The Contractor shall exercise good construction practice and stringent control to ensure that the
household shelter is constructed properly according to the Drawings and/or Specifications.
No hacking of the concrete of precast panels shall be allowed.

8.2

CAST-IN-SITU CONCRETE WORKS

(a)

The requirements specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses
under it shall apply for all cast-in-situ Works.

(b)

The Contractor shall ensure the correct alignment and positioning of the ventilation sleeve and
plate units and openings for electrical services where required.

(c)

The Contractor shall exercise good construction practice and stringent control to ensure that the
household shelter is constructed properly in accordance with the Drawings and/or Specifications.
No hacking of the concrete of household shelters shall be allowed. Concrete unevenness, if
required to be made good, shall be ground smooth by using grinders only.
Where honeycombs or segregation occur in the concrete, these shall be made good only by
pressure grouting with the approval of the SO Rep.
No plastering shall be allowed on the internal surfaces of the household shelter.

8.3

BLAST DOOR
(a)

Approved Supplier
The household shelter blast doors shall be obtained from a supplier approved by the SO Rep. The
list of approved suppliers is posted at the following websites: kmo.eptc.com.sg or hdbuilders.com.
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep, the approved blast door shop drawings and the written
contractual agreement between himself and his supplier within two weeks from the date of the
Letter of Acceptance.

BLDG04/S8.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 8-3
8.3

BLAST DOOR (CONT'D)

(b)

Fabrication Of Blast Door

The blast doors shall be fabricated according to the details as shown in the approved shop
Drawings with good quality and workmanship acceptable to the SO Rep.

(c)

Inspection/Testing Of Blast Doors

The Contractor shall allow for the inspection and testing of the blast doors by the SO Rep during
the course of fabrication.
One blast door shall be selected on the Site by the SO Rep for inspection/testing. The Contractor
shall cut them open to check for compliance with the approved shop Drawings and/or
Specifications.
Water-tightness tests shall be carried out on the door (closed and fully locked with the door frame)
to a minimum depth of 25 mm water for a period of 2 hours. Any seepage of water through the
door or gasket after the 2 hour period shall be considered a failure.

(d)

Steel Sections
For components such as blast door frame, blast door leaf cladding panels and internal frame of the
door leaf, uncoated mild steel sheets to ASTM A366 or BS 1449 or other approved standards
subject to the approval of the SO Rep shall be used. Such components shall be treated with
approved Cathodic Electro-Deposition (CED) primer and tested to the requirements stipulated in
subclause 18.29.1.
For other mild steel sections (such as for small movable parts in the locking mechanism, if any),
grade 43A to BS 4360 or other approved standards subject to the approval of the SO Rep shall be
used. Such other mild steel sections shall be protected from corrosion by a method approved by
the SO Rep.
Small areas of corrosion protection coating damaged by welding, cutting or bending shall be made
good by the application of at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with a minimum of 85%
zinc dust, expressed as a percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint, or other method
approved by the SO Rep.

(e)

Locking Bolts and Shear Pins

Locking bolts and shear pins shall be of stainless steel to AISI Type 316.

(f)

Gasket
The material for the gasket shall meet the requirements of Type 2 closed cell expanded rubber,
grade 2B3 or higher as specified in Table 2 of ASTM D1056; or other approved.

(g)

Spray Painting To Blast Door Leaf

The blast door leaf which is Cathodic Electro-Deposition (CED) primed shall be spray finished with
2 coats of approved enamel paint. Prior to the application of the enamel paint, the surfaces shall be
clean, dry and free from grease, oil or other foreign matter.
A full colour range of the enamel paint shall be submitted for selection and approval by the
SO Rep.

(h)

Painting To Blast Door Frame

The blast door frame which is Cathodic Electro-Deposition (CED) primed shall be painted on the
Site with 2 coats of approved enamel paint. Prior to the application of the enamel paint, the
surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from grease, oil or other foreign matter.
A full colour range of the enamel paint shall be submitted for selection and approval by the
SO Rep.

BLDG04/S8.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 8-4
8.4

VENTILATION SLEEVE & PLATE UNIT

(a)

Fabrication Of The Ventilation Sleeve & Plate Unit

The ventilation sleeve and plate units shall be obtained from a supplier approved by the SO Rep.
The list of approved suppliers is posted at the following websites: kmo.eptc.com.sg or
hdbuilders.com.
The ventilation sleeve & plate units shall be fabricated according to the details as shown in the
approved shop Drawings with good quality and workmanship acceptable to the SO Rep.
In all cases, the plates shall be protected from dirt, grout and other deleterious materials by
wrapping with plastic sheets or by other means.

(b)

Testing Of Ventilation Sleeve & Plate Unit

One ventilation sleeve and plate unit shall be selected by the SO Rep for water-tightness test. It
shall be carried out by subjecting the inside of the closed sleeve to a minimum depth of 25mm of
water for a period of 2 hours. Any seepage of water through the gasket after the 2 hour period
shall be considered a failure.

(c)

Gasket
The material for the gasket shall meet the requirements of Type 2 closed cell expanded rubber,
grade 2B3 or higher as specified in Table 2 of ASTM D1056; or other approved.

8.5

SEALING OF ELECTRICAL OPENINGS

After the installation of electrical wiring, the Contractor shall provide sealing to the concealed wiring
conduits in the household shelter wall to ensure that these are sealed air-tight. The method and type of
sealing shall be approved by the SO Rep.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 9/.....

BLDG04/S8.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 9-1
SECTION 9
REINFORCED CONCRETE WATER TANK

9.1

SCOPE OF WORK
The concrete water tank Works shall include all structural, architectural and other work above reinforced
concrete main roof slab level and lift motor room floor slab level and low level concrete suction tanks as
shown in the Drawings. These include the following works :
(a)

concrete water tanks and the supporting stumps;

(b)

roof top pump room adjacent to concrete water tanks;

(c)

lift motor room irrespective of whether it is connected to or far away from the concrete
water tanks;

(d)

fascia walls fencing around the concrete water tanks;

(e)

all roofs for the concrete water tanks, lift motor room, roof top pump room and other
roof structures including roof over void decks; and

(f)

low level concrete suction tanks including supporting stumps.

The concrete water tank Works shall include the construction, completion and maintenance of the Works
and the provision of labour, materials, Construction Equipment and other items, whether of a temporary or
permanent nature, required in and for such construction, completion and maintenance in so far as these
are specified in or can be reasonably inferred from the Works.
Where in the case precast watertanks are shown in the Drawings, or proposed by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall also comply with all other relevant clauses, subclause and sections of the Specifications.
9.2

WATER-PROOFING MEASURES
The construction of the concrete water tanks shall be in accordance with the latest BS 8007. Provide and
construct the concrete water tanks adopting closely the following waterproofing measures to ensure the
water-tightness of concrete water tanks :
(a)

Grade 40 concrete with low water/cement ratio and high workability shall be used. The concrete
shall be designed with chloride-free retarding superplasticiser. The finished concrete shall be
dense, impermeable and durable.

(b)

No construction joint below the specified highest water level shall be allowed. The water tanks
shall be cast in one operation to above the specified highest water level as shown in the Drawings.
The rest of the water tanks including the roof shall be cast in a second operation.

(c)

The concrete tanks shall be tested in accordance with BS 8007 for water tightness 28 days after
casting.

(d)

After passing the water test, the internal surface of the concrete tanks shall be coated with
approved type cementitious waterproofing membrane in accordance with the instructions of the SO
Rep.

BLDG04/S9.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 9-2
9.3

PUB APPROVAL
All materials used in the construction and repair of concrete water tanks shall be approved by PUB.
Provide samples of the materials and their technical specifications to the PUB for approval well in advance
of construction work. Certified copy of the PUB approval letter of the particular type of materials together
with other relevant documents, such as PSB test reports, etc shall be submitted to the SO Rep for
approval prior to its incorporation in the work.

9.4

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
The concrete used for the reinforced concrete water tanks shall be all as shown in the Drawings. The
Contractor shall comply with all relevant clauses and subclauses of Section 4 "Structural Concrete".

9.5

FORMWORK SYSTEM (REINFORCED CONCRETE WATER TANK)

Unless otherwise specified, formwork shall be designed and constructed in accordance with clause 4.19
"Formwork" and clause 4.22 "Building Accuracy" including all subclauses under them, where appropriate.
Formwork can only be removed at least 7 days after concreting the concrete water tanks and the soffit of
the tanks be re-propped immediately until 28 days after casting.
Formwork shall be removed gradually without shock, disturbance and vibration, without damaging or
overloading the finished concrete work or structures, and in a manner approved by the SO Rep.

9.6

CONCRETING
All construction joints and concreting procedures for the Reinforced Concrete Water Tank Works shall be
approved by the SO Rep.
Inform the SO Rep the area of concreting and the location of construction joints and obtain his approval
prior to the concreting of concrete tanks.
No construction joint below the specified highest water level shall be allowed. The entire concrete tanks
up to the soffit of the tank roof slab shall be cast in one operation. The tank roof shall be cast in the
second operation. All pipes shall be cast in-situ with the concrete tank in the positions as shown in the
Drawings.
The following sequence of concreting the concrete water tank within the same day may be accepted by
the SO Rep if the Contractor could demonstrate that these will result in a monolithic and watertight
structure :
(a)

Cast the lowest 500mm of the tank walls with concrete flowing into the tank floor slab;

(b)

Level the tank floor slab to the thickness required; and

(c)

Immediately after initial setting, the rest of the tank walls shall be cast and topped up to the soffit of
the tank roof slab.

The initial setting time varies with the workability of the concrete mix and shall be approved by the SO
Rep. As soon as the concrete starts to set, the walls shall be immediately topped up to the level required.
Any delay in the topping up operation may result in rejection of the concreting Works by the SO Rep.
No concreting Works shall be allowed without the presence of the Clerk-of-Works.
The concrete shall be highly workable and shall be compacted sufficiently to produce a dense
homogeneous mass and filling all voids. The concrete shall not be subjected to any disturbance after
being placed in position and shall be continuously cured for a minimum of 7 days after casting.

BLDG04/S9.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 9-3
9.7

WATERTIGHTNESS TEST
The Contractor shall test the concrete water tanks for watertightness in accordance with BS 8007. Cast insitu water tanks shall be tested 28 days after casting and precast water tanks shall be tested 7 days after
casting, or on attaining the 28 day concrete strength, whichever is earlier. The tank shall be filled
gradually with PUB water up to the overflow level. Starting from full tank, the period of test shall be at least
24 hours, during which the exposed surfaces shall show no sign of leakage and no damp patch.
If the tank leaks or shows any sign of dampness, it shall be repaired with approved type of epoxy resin
grout or other methods and the tank retested. If the tank fails the second test, the SO Rep reserves the
right to instruct the Contractor to remove and recast the tank.

9.8

MORTAR BED FOR TILING

After passing the watertightness test, the internal surface of the concrete tank shall be coated with an
approved cementitious waterproofing membrane in accordance with the instruction of the SO Rep. On the
fully cured cementitious waterproof membrane, a mortar bed of about 10mm thickness shall be applied
with an approved prepacked mortar mix to receive the tiling. The prepacked mortar shall be mixed
mechanically according to the manufacturer's recommendation. Tiles shall be laid on this mortar bedding
within a week.

9.9

TILING
The concrete water tanks shall be tiled internally with approved types of heavy duty ceramic tiles.
All ceramic tiles shall be provided and laid to all the requirements as specified in Clause 19.4 "Ceramic
Floor Tiles For Non-Residential Units And Common Areas Outside Dwelling Units" including all
subclauses under it. Notwithstanding other provisions in the Specifications, the maximum water absorption
of the ceramic tiles for concrete water tanks shall not exceed 1% and the scratch hardness of such tiles
shall not be less than 5 on the Moh scale.
The surface and texture of all the ceramic tiles shall be glazed. The surface appearance shall be free
from crack, crazing, hairline cracks and bubbles. Tile used shall be 100mm x 200mm x 8mm for
rectangular reinforced concrete water tanks; and 50mm x 100mm x 8mm for circular reinforced concrete
water tanks; level and regular in size with perfect corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any
manner.
The Contractor shall submit an approval letter from PUB and a certified true copy of the test report from
PSB or accredited laboratory under SINGLAS for the approval of the SO Rep.

9.10

CONNECTING PIPES WITH FLANGES FOR INLET,

OVERFLOW, INTERCONNECTING AND WASHOUT PIPES
Provide and install high level concrete water tanks and low level concrete water tanks as shown in the
Drawings.
Provide and fix 100mm diameter stainless steel connecting pipe of minimum 450mm in length and
complete with flange. A 200mm diameter stainless steel collar with 9mm thickness shall be welded to the
middle section of the connecting pipe. The connecting pipe shall be positioned and cast in-situ in the
concrete wall so that the welded collar is embedded in the middle of the concrete wall. The pipe surface
for the portion embedded in the concrete wall shall be properly and suitably treated to ensure proper and
perfect bonding between the pipe and concrete. The connecting pipe shall be positioned to give a
minimum clearance of 150mm from the external wall surface to the flange and 100mm from the internal
wall finished surface to the pipe end. For washout connecting pipe, it shall flush with the internal finished
surface.

BLDG04/S9.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 9-4
9.10

CONNECTING PIPES WITH FLANGES FOR INLET,

OVERFLOW, INTERCONNECTING AND WASHOUT PIPES (CONT'D)
Provide and fix for each roof water tank one inlet, one overflow, two interconnecting and one washout
connecting pipes as specified in the foregoing requirements. The interconnecting pipes for the tanks shall
be accordingly and correspondingly aligned. Roof water tanks with inlet pipes direct from the PUB shall
have two overflow pipes per tank.
Provide and fix for each suction tank one inlet, two overflow and one washout connecting pipes as shown.
Where connecting pipes to the concrete water tanks are to be provided for distribution mains, rising main
inlets, overflow pipes, washout pipes and others as shown in the Drawings, they shall be cast in the water
tank floor or wall.
All inlet connecting pipes receiving water directly from the PUB shall have flanges at both ends. The pipe
shall be positioned such that there is a minimum clearance of 100mm from the flanges to the internal wall
finished surface and 150mm to the external wall surfaces.
Suction tank inlet and roof tank inlet connecting pipes receiving water directing from PUB shall be
provided with stainless steel screwed boss flange conforming to BS 4504 table 16/4 for the installation of
equilibrium ball float valves.
All stainless steel material used shall conform to AISI Grade 316 and flanges shall be in accordance with
BS 4504. All Grade 316 stainless steel connecting pipe (except overflow, warning and bypass pipes)
thickness shall be based on Japanese Industrial Standard G3459 1984 Stainless Steel Pipes Schedule
No. 20S.
Carry out cleaning and commissioning of the water tanks, including the use of chemicals for sterilisation of
the water tank and bear all costs and expenses for the commissioning of the water tanks.

9.11

OUTLET CONNECTING PIPES WITH FLANGES

AT TANK FLOOR SLAB
Provide and fix three outlet connecting pipes with flanges at tank floor slab to roof distribution mains for
each roof water tank. The connecting pipe shall be stainless steel, 100mm diameter, minimum 500mm in
length and complete with flange. A 200mm diameter stainless steel collar with 9mm thickness shall be
welded to the middle section of the connecting pipe and cast-in-situ in the water tank floor slab so that the
collar is embedded in the middle of the tank floor slab. The pipe surface for the portion embedded in the
concrete slab shall be properly and suitably treated to ensure proper and perfect bonding between the
pipe and concrete. The clearance between the soffit of the roof tank floor slab and the flange shall be
150mm and the connecting pipe shall protrude 100mm above the finished level of the suction tank floor
slab.
There are a minimum of two water pumps to be installed for each suction tank. Provide and fix one outlet
connecting pipe for each water pump. The connecting pipe shall be stainless steel, 80mm in diameter,
minimum 400mm in length complete with flange. A 200mm diameter stainless steel collar with 9mm
thickness shall be welded to the middle section of the connecting pipes and cast-in-situ in the water tank
floor slab so that the collar is embedded in the middle of the tank floor slab. The pipe surface for the
portion embedded in the concrete slab shall be properly and suitably treated to ensure proper and perfect
bonding between the pipe and concrete. The clearance between the soffit of the suction tank floor slab
and the flange shall be 150mm and the connecting pipe shall protrude 100mm above the finished level of
the suction tank floor slab.
All stainless steel materials shall conform to AISI Grade 316 and flanges shall conform to BS 4504.

BLDG04/S9.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 9-5
9.12

CONNECTING PIPES FOR OVERFLOW WARNING PIPES AND BYPASS PIPE

Provide and fix two 28mm diameter, minimum of 500mm long stainless steel pipes, complete with
connecting adaptor or flange of 80mm diameter on one end. A collar of 80mm diameter and 9mm
thickness shall be welded to the middle section of the pipe. The connecting pipe shall be positioned and
cast-in-situ in the concrete tank wall. The connecting pipe shall be protruded to give a minimum clearance
of 150mm from the external wall finished surface and 100mm from the internal wall finished surface.
All stainless steel materials used shall conform to AISI Grade 316.
Check and ensure that all the above are provided in accordance with the Drawings.

9.13

STAINLESS STEEL CONNECTING PIPES

Check and take necessary precautions to ensure that the stainless steel connecting pipes are not in
contact with the concrete tank reinforced steel bars during concreting.
Pipe wall thickness used for Grade 316 stainless steel connecting pipes shall conform to JIS G3459-1984
Stainless Steel Pipe Schedule No. 20S. Minimum grade for filler or electrode shall be AISI Type 316L. All
welds for stainless steel shall be argon shielded and by TIG or MIG welding. Ensure that all oxides or
scales formed on welded surfaces are removed.

9.14

MANHOLE AND MANHOLE COVER

Provide two access manholes to every roof level tank and every pump room suction tank in accordance
with the Drawings.
The manhole cover shall be complete with locking device and approved lock and master key. The
manhole cover shall be capable of being opened fully in accordance with the Drawings.

9.15

ELECTRODE ACCESS
Provide access opening to every roof water tank for the mounting of three sets of electrodes as shown in
the Drawings. One access opening shall also be provided for one set of electrode to every pump room
suction tank.
Access openings for electrodes shall have 3mm thick stainless steel Grade 316 plate for mounting
electrodes. Electrodes for the roof water tank shall be protected from weather by an aluminium box.
Check and ensure that all the above are provided in accordance with the Drawings.

9.16

AIR VENT
Air vents shall be provided near the top of the wall adjacent to the water tank room where booster pumps
are installed. Provide at least two 100mm diameter UPVC air vents to every tank. All air vents shall be
fitted with elbow end and suitably covered by mosquito netting. The mesh size of the netting shall not
exceed 1mm. All the air vents shall be provided in accordance with the Drawings.

9.17

CAT LADDER
Provide and fix external aluminium cat ladder in accordance with the Drawings.
One UPVC internal cat ladder shall be provided for each tank at the designated manhole and effectively
hooked to the stainless steel (AISI Grade 316) hook cast-in-situ to the tank, in accordance with the
Drawings.

BLDG04/S9.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 9-6
9.18

EXTERNAL FINISHES
Provide external finishes to the external face of the concrete water tank.
The finishing materials, their colour, texture, quality and methods of application shall be in accordance
with the Drawings and shall be approved by the SO Rep.
Any Defect to the external finishes shall be rectified immediately by the Contractor within the Defects
Liability Period.

9.19

STERILISATION OF WATER TANK

When all work pertaining to the concrete water tank is completed, the tank shall be filled with water for at
least 14 days to get rid of all odour, taste, chemicals, cement and other objectional particles.
The tank shall then be thoroughly cleaned, flushed and sterilised by the Contractor.
The sterilisation of the water tank shall be carried out in accordance with the Code of Practice on Water
Service issued by Public Utilities Board (Water Department) (Singapore Standard CP 48:1989 and its
latest amendments).
The water samples shall be taken for bacteriological examination and chemical analysis by the Public
Utilities Board (PUB), PSB or SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory.
Provide the water examination and analysis report (issued by the Water Department, Public Utilities
Board), to the SO Rep and the result of the water analysis shall be within the acceptance limits for human
consumption, failing which the Contractor shall sterilise the water again until such requirement is met.
After satisfactory sterilisation, the manholes to the water tank shall be locked and no other work on the
water tank shall be allowed without a written permission from the SO Rep.

Total pages for this Section

Section 10/.....

BLDG04/S9.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 10-1
SECTION 10
PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE PARTITION

10.1

GENERAL
Precast lightweight concrete partitions shall be used on all typical storeys at locations as shown in the
Architectural Drawings.
The precast lightweight concrete partitions shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The
list of approved suppliers is posted at the following websites: kmo.eptc.com.sg or hdbuilders.com.
Details of the precast lightweight concrete partition shall comply with the Drawings. Standard fixing and
connection details (including those for frames) and guidelines on panelling and layout of partitions as
shown in the Standard Structural and Architectural Drawings shall be used.
The precast lightweight partition shall be manufactured using lightweight foam concrete.

10.2

MANUFACTURING REQUIREMENTS
The precast lightweight concrete partitions shall be manufactured to satisfy the requirements as specified
hereunder.

10.2.1

Technical Specifications
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

10.2.2

Characteristic compressive strength of 4.5 N per mm at 28 days.

Air dry density of between 1400 kg per m and 1800 kg per m.
Dry shrinkage not exceeding 0.09% when tested to SS271.
Total water absorption not exceeding 23.5% when tested to SS271.

Materials
Materials used in the manufacturing of precast lightweight partition shall comply with Section 4 "Structural
Concrete".
The foaming agent used for lightweight foam concrete partitions shall comply with the performance
requirement of SS 320. No foaming agent shall be used unless prior approval has been given by the SO
Rep. The test report shall be submitted to the SO Rep as and when requested.

10.2.3

Manufacturing
Precast lightweight partition shall be cast using steel moulds in horizontal position, or using steel battery
mould in vertical position to conform to the shapes, lines and dimensions of the partitions to be produced.
The mould shall be sufficiently rigid to achieve the casting tolerances, shapes and surface finishes as
specified:
(a)

Casting Tolerance :
Height
Width
Thickness
Bowing/Warpage

(b)

:
:
:
:

5mm;
3mm;
3mm;
3mm in 2m along the height;
1mm in 600mm along the width.

Shape
The shape and location of the tongues and grooves of the partitions after casting shall be correct
and accurate such that the offset between two adjacent panels after installation is within 2mm on
both faces of the partitions.

BLDG04/S10.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 10-2
10.2.3

Manufacturing (Cont'd)
(c)

Surface Finishes
The geometry and arrangement of the steel moulds shall be such that the off-form surfaces of two
adjacent panels after installation are in the same plane with compatible interlocking tongues and
grooves.
The precast lightweight partitions shall be provided with openings for services where required.

10.3

REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO DELIVERY

Prior to the delivery of precast lightweight partitions to the Site, ensure that the partitions are
manufactured to satisfy the following requirements :
(a)

Casting tolerance as specified in subclause 10.2.3 "Manufacturing".

(b)

The surface finish of lightweight partition shall be smooth, free from Defect, excessive voids, visible
cracks, chipping-off and unevenness.
A smooth surface shall be defined as one with no voids or bug holes greater than 7mm in diameter
within a 50mm border around the edges of the panels. For the remaining centre portion, the
number of air voids greater than 1.5mm and smaller than 3mm in diameter shall not exceed 20 in
any 100mm x100mm square. No void greater than 3mm in diameter shall be allowed.
Where the surface finish of the partitions do not comply with the foregoing requirements, the
Contractor shall provide touching up or other remedial work to smoothen the surface to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep. Unless otherwise instructed by the SO Rep, lightweight partition need
not be skim-coated in the factory before delivery.

10.4

(c)

The accuracy of the shapes and locations of tongues and grooves of the partitions after casting are
verified by two special steel templates. This is to ensure that the offset between any two panels
after installation is within 2mm on both faces of partitions.

(d)

No partition is delivered prematurely to the Site before sufficient strength has been gained to
withstand stresses due to transportation, handling or erection.

(e)

Provision of adequate supports for partitions to prevent chipping off of panel edges during
transportation and handling.

QUALITY OF PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE PARTITIONS

The identification and date of casting shall be neatly and suitably marked on all partitions, as soon as is
practicable after casting.
The compressive strength of the lightweight concrete shall be measured by crushing tests on 150mm
cubes. The quality and consistency of the concrete shall be tested by the SO Rep in accordance with SS
78.
For every 50 m or part thereof of concrete used for production, at least 1 sample of 3 cubes shall be
made from each batch chosen by the SO Rep, subject to a minimum of 1 sample of 3 cubes for each day
of production. The cubes shall be taken at the point of discharge from the mixer. In addition to the
minimum numbers specified above, the SO Rep may, at his absolute discretion, instruct the Contractor to
make additional test cubes from whichever batch he may choose. All cubes shall be tested at the HDB
Prefabrication Technology Centre.
The Contractor shall provide lockable humid boxes of adequate size to store all test cubes for the
specified period. The humid boxes shall be placed in a covered area and maintained at a relative humidity
of above 95%. The keys to such curing facility shall be exclusively held in custody by a person designated
by the SO Rep. The test cubes shall be collected by the SO Rep for testing at the HDB Prefabrication
Technology Centre at a regular interval.
The appropriate strength requirement shall be considered to be satisfied if, for each sample of the 3 cubes
tested at 28 days, none of the strength of the 3 cubes is below the specified characteristic strength of 4.5
N per mm at 28 days.

BLDG04/S10.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 10-3
10.4

QUALITY OF PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE PARTITIONS (CONT'D)

If the cube test results do not comply with any of the above conditions, the Contractor shall be subjected
to charges imposed based on Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities".
If the average compressive strength of 3 cubes falls below 3.5 N per mm at 28 days, the entire affected
lightweight concrete partitions shall be rejected. If the partitions are already installed, the Contractor shall
remove them and install new partitions of adequate specified compressive strength at no extra cost to the
Employer.
The Contractor shall provide facilities to enable the identification of test cubes by radio frequency or
similar means. The Contractor shall provide at least one web-based radio frequency identification (RFID)
reader capable of reading the RFID tags on the concrete cubes from a minimum distance of at least 40
mm. The Contractor shall include the appropriate interfacing software to a web-based controller.
The Contractor shall logon to a website of the Employer to register the concrete cube data and tag IDs
using the RFID reader. The registration of cube data and tag IDs shall be done within the same casting
day. The appropriate RFID tags shall be placed at the corner of the cubes while the cubes are still fresh.
The top surface of the RFID tag shall be level with the concrete cube surface. The Contractor shall
protect the RFID tags on the concrete cubes while demoulding. For damage or loss of RFID tag, the
Contractor shall be charged the replacement cost based on the Employer's purchase price
The Employer shall deduct the charges payable by the Contractor from any monies due or becoming due
to the Contractor or recover the same from the Contractor as a debt due by the Contractor to the
Employer.

10.5

PRICING AND CONTRACTUAL ASPECTS

Submit the names of the Suppliers and quantities to be supplied by each Supplier, the written contractual
agreements with his suppliers and other information as required within four weeks from the date of the
Letter of Acceptance. The Contractor shall not change the Suppliers without the written consent of the SO
Rep.

10.6

SUBMISSION OF INFORMATION AND TEST REPORTS

(PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT FOAM CONCRETE PARTITIONS)
Submit the following details to the SO Rep for approval before the manufacturing of precast lightweight
concrete partition :
(a)

Names of Suppliers.

(b)

Details of factories including addresses, size of workshops, equipment used and number of trained
personnel.

(c)

Production process, curing and storage.

(d)

Mix design including foaming agent and dosage used.

(e)

Test report by PSB or SAC accredited laboratories, on compliance with the technical property
requirements specified in subclause 10.2.1 "Technical Specifications" (a) to (d) (inclusive).

(f)

Test reports on compliance with the drying shrinkage and total water absorption requirements in
accordance with SS 271. The test reports shall be dated within the validity period of six months
prior to the date of submission of such reports to the SO Rep.

(g)

Mix proportions of cement mortar used. Admixture used to prevent shrinkage, efflorescence and
cracking of cement mortar.

(h)

Quantity of lightweight partitions for each thickness in square metre.

(i)

Delivery and erection schedules.

BLDG04/S10.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 10-4
10.7

DELIVERY AND INSTALLATION

10.7.1

Provision Of Access
Provide and maintain reasonable access into and within the Site to allow the transportation and delivery of
partitions by the Contractor's suppliers. The suitability of such access shall be decided by the SO Rep.

10.7.2

10.7.3

Erection
(a)

Ensure that the workers have been properly trained in the handling and erection of the lightweight
partition. Only qualified welders shall be employed for all welding required.

(b)

Before starting erection, check with the SO Rep whether skimming or plastering to the adjourning
RC structures is required. If so, erection and alignment of the panels shall allow for this, so that in
general, unless otherwise shown or noted in the architectural Drawings, the finished surfaces of the
panels shall flush with that of reinforced concrete structures.

(c)

The accurate location of the tongue and groove of each panel shall be such that the offset between
adjacent panel is within 2mm on both faces and the width of the resultant joint between any two
adjoining panels is 10mm 2mm.

(d)

In general, the permanent connections shall be made as soon as the partitions are erected and
aligned. Ensure that the panels are securely braced during erection.

(e)

All vertical joints of the lightweight partition wall shall be sealed with one layer of approved types of
Polymer Modified Flexible Cementitious (PMFC) membrane or equivalent approved type of
self-adhesive Fibre Mesh Fabric (FMF). The sealing of the vertical joints shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer's procedures and instructions. The method of application shall be approved
by the SO Rep. The PMFC/FMF membrane shall be applied to the vertical joints prior to skim
coating of the lightweight partition wall. The sealed joint shall be skimmed over with the skim
coating material.

(f)

Where in the case, the partition wall layout does not permit the use of 300mm wide precast
lightweight concrete partitions and the SO Rep approves the Contractor's proposal to replace them
with solid blocks, notwithstanding the details or notes as shown in the Drawings, there shall be no
cost adjustment to the Contract Sum.

Acceptable Final Surface Finish

Check and ensure that visible air voids, bug holes and uneven or rough surfaces of the partitions and
joints are properly skimmed at the Contractor's cost and expense to achieve an even smooth surface such
that painting can be applied directly. All such finishing work at the Site shall be to the satisfaction of the
SO Rep.

10.8

STORAGE AND PROTECTION

At all times the precast lightweight concrete partitions shall be properly stored and protected to prevent
warping, bowing, cracking, chipping, staining and other Defect.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 11/.....
BLDG04/S10.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 11-1
SECTION 11
NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

11.1

CEMENT
Cement shall be as specified in Clause 4.1 "Cement".

11.2

AGGREGATES
Fine and coarse aggregates shall be as specified in Clause 4.2 "Aggregates".

11.3

WATER
Water shall be as specified in Clause 4.3 "Water".

11.4

STEEL REINFORCEMENT
Steel reinforcement shall be as specified in Clause 4.5 "Steel Reinforcement" including all subclauses
under it.

11.5

CONCRETE MIX
Unless otherwise specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it or in the Drawings,
the grade of concrete in accordance with Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and
subclauses under it, shall be used for casting all non-structural concrete items in this Section including all
clauses and subclauses under it. It shall be mixed, placed into position, compacted, cured and protected
as specified for structural concrete.
Precast concrete item shall be finished smooth and even, and shall not be installed into position in the
Works until 14 days have elapsed from the date of casting.

11.6

HARDCORE
Hardcore shall be hard, clean and dry stones, bricks, concrete or other approved material broken to
pieces varying from 50mm to 75mm in size. It shall be laid to the required thickness, blinded with sand or
quarry waste, well watered and consolidated with a power rammer or roller to an even surface, to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep.

11.7

APRONS, PATHS AND PAVED AREAS

Unless otherwise specified, all fillings under unsuspended ground floor slabs, aprons, paths, paved areas
and other areas as indicated shall be 100mm thick hardcore in accordance with Clause 11.6 "Hardcore"
laid over well consolidated ground.
Unless otherwise specified, paths and paved areas shall be cast with Grade 25 concrete as specified in
Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it and reinforced with one layer
of No. A6 welded steel fabric. The reinforcement shall be fixed at 25mm from the top of the surface.
Aprons shall be fitted with expansion joints at 3m to 4.5m maximum centres as indicated. Joints along
paths and aprons shall be saw-cut when the concrete has an age of at least one day. The depth of the
saw-cut shall be at least 20mm.
Paths and paved areas shall be finished with a minimum of two passes of power trowel without sprinkling
with cement dust, cement grout or water. Ensure a sufficient team of workmen to complete the work
before final set. The paths and paved areas shall be immediately cured for seven days with approved
curing compound or other approved methods.

BLDG04/S11.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 11-2
11.8

PAVING SLABS FOR PATHS AND PAVED AREAS

When paving slabs are specified, they shall be 600mm x 600mm x 50mm thick concrete slabs of Grade 25
concrete with 10mm maximum aggregate obtained from approved manufacturer. Slabs shall be laid on a
bed of 75mm consolidated quarry waste and layer of sand at least 25mm thick and all joints shall be
grouted and pointed in 1:3 cement mortar.
Inform the SO Rep of the proposed suppliers. Samples shall be submitted for approval before bulk
ordering. Slabs shall be finished rough or patterned to give non-slip surface.

11.9

CONCRETE SURROUND TO INSPECTION CHAMBERS

Leave openings as shown in the structural Drawings in the aprons where manholes are located to ensure
a regular pattern and complete the rendering after manhole frames are placed in position. All covers shall
be aligned with reference to the building line.

11.10

REINFORCED SURFACE DRAINS

Reinforced concrete surface drains shall be constructed, as indicated in the Drawings.

11.11

RAMPS AND STEPS

Unless otherwise specified, reinforced concrete ramps and steps shall be Grade 25 concrete as specified
in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it, reinforced with one layer
of No. A6 welded steel fabric placed at 25mm from the top.
The concrete shall be finished with a minimum of 2 passes power trowel to ramps or 2 passes of hard
steel trowel to the treads without sprinkling with cement dust, cement grout or water. Ensure a sufficient
team of workmen to finish the works before final set. The concrete shall be immediately cured for seven
days with approved curing compound or other approved methods.

11.12

PEDESTRIAN DRAIN CROSSINGS AND CONCRETE BOLLARDS

Drain crossings and reinforced concrete barrier posts shall be constructed to positions, dimensions and
details as shown.

11.13

PRECAST CONCRETE JAMB LINING TO WINDOWS

Precast concrete jambs and sills of windows where shown shall be 50mm thick, 370mm wide
reinforced with No. 10 welded steel fabric cast in 3 separate pieces, each having 2 No. mild steel holdfasts
40mm x 3mm x 305mm girth, one end cast into section, the other end built into bed joints of walls.

11.14

HEELSTONES
All door frames shall be fixed in accordance with the Drawings.
Heelstones shall be built up with 1:2 cement mortar mix in two or more operations to a height of
100/150mm as shown. It shall be carried out to the same section as the door frames and bonded into
walls and bedded in strong cement mortar on floor with surface hacked rough.

11.15

CONCRETE COPING
Cast-in-situ concrete coping shall be to the details as shown in the Drawings and shall be finished in
plastering as specified in Section 20 "Wall Finishes" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
Precast concrete coping shall be to the details as shown in the Drawings and shall be finished smooth and
even.

BLDG04/S11.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 11-3
11.16

CONCRETE LINTELS
Concrete lintels shall be of the sizes and with the reinforcement as shown in the Drawings. Lintels shall
have exposed surfaces finished smooth and in line with the surfaces of adjacent walls.

11.17

SCUPPER CHANNELS TO ACCESS BALCONIES AND STAIRCASE LANDINGS

Scupper channels shall be formed on the floors of access balconies and staircase landings, and shall be
screeded to fall towards waste discharge stacks.

11.18

SLABS OVER CHANNELS

50mm thick precast cover slabs reinforced with No. B5 welded steel fabric shall be provided over channels
and cast at random lengths with 100mm x 25mm hand grips at both ends and housed onto rebate sides of
channels where shown.

11.19

COOKING SLABS AND PREPARATION TABLES

Cooking slabs and preparation tables shall be as specified in Section 29 "Eating House" including all
clauses and subclauses under it.

11.20

CONCRETE INFILL AROUND W.C. STOOLING

The Contractor shall attend to and backfill with 1:3:6 concrete mix around water closets after installation or
form concrete stooling where these are shown and finished as specified in Section 19 "Floor Finishes"
including all clause and subclauses under it.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 12/.....

BLDG04/S11.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 12-1
SECTION 12
BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK

12.1

MORTAR MIX FOR BLOCK AND BRICKWORKS

All solid concrete block and clay brickwork shall be laid and compacted with approved prepacked mortar
mix. The prepacked mortar mix shall be mixed mechanically according to the manufacturer's
recommendation. Potable water supplied by the PUB shall be used for mixing the mortar.

12.2

SOLID CONCRETE BRICKS OR BLOCKS

All solid concrete blocks shall be machine-pressed and pressure vibrated cement sand blocks complying
with SS 271:1983.
No blocks shall be laid in position until 2 weeks after delivery to the Site.

12.2.1

Laying Of Solid Concrete Blocks

The solid concrete blocks shall be bedded with mortar as specified in Clause 12.1 "Mortar Mix For Block
And Brickworks". The work shall be carried up in a uniform manner with no portion raised more than
300mm above the adjacent portions. The corner shall be well bonded, plumbed and all perpends and
quoins kept true and square. Joints shall be of even thickness and shall not exceed 10mm thick. They
shall be raked to a depth of 5mm to 10mm while the mortar is green to form adequate key for plastering.
The bonding bar system shall be as specified in Clause 12.4 "Cavity Walls And Brick Cladding" including
all subclauses under it and shall be embedded into the horizontal joints.
90mm thick solid concrete blockwall shall be constructed with 290mm/190mm x 90mm x 90mm blocks
and laid in stretcher bond, reinforced with minimum 64mm x 0.5mm thick expanded metal reinforcement at
every third course. The bottom-most expanded metal reinforcement shall not be more than 200mm above
the floor level. Laps of expanded metal reinforcement shall not be less than 100mm.
190mm thick solid concrete blockwall shall be laid in English bond and constructed with 190mm x 90mm x
90mm blocks.

12.2.2

Plastering
The solid concrete blocks shall be plastered as specified in Section 20 "Wall Finishes" including all
clauses and subclauses under it.

12.3

CLAY BRICKS
All the clay bricks shall be of modular sizes. They shall be 200mm x 100mm x 100mm and/or 300mm x
100mm x 100mm.

Designation
200mm x 100mm x 100mm
300mm x 100mm x 100mm

BLDG04/S12.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Average Work Size

Length

Width

Depth

187.5mm
287.5mm

88.5mm
88.5mm

88.5mm
88.5mm

Bldg Spec
Page 12-2
12.3

CLAY BRICKS (CONT'D)

12.3.1

Laying Of Clay Bricks

All bricks shall be well wetted before use and the top of brickwalls where left off shall be well wetted before
commencement of laying.
Except for facing bricks, all faces of brickwork shall be left rough and the joints raked out to a depth of 5 to
10mm while the mortar is green to form adequate key for plaster.
No four (4) courses of brickwork shall exceed 400mm in height.

12.3.2

Modular Common Clay Bricks

Brickwork as shown to be plastered shall be of modular common bricks. Plastering shall be as specified
in Section 20 "Wall Finishes" including all clauses and subclauses under it. All common bricks shall
comply with the following requirements :
Requirement

Standard

(a) Width of Brick

88.5mm 3.5mm

(b) Compressive Strength

Minimum 25 N per mm

(c) Water Absorption Ratio

Not more than 15% by weight

(d) Soluble Salt Content

Not more than 1% by weight

(e) Efflorescence

Slight (Not more than 10% of the brick surface area shall have
salt deposit)

The method of testing shall be in accordance with SS 103:1974. Test reports showing compliance with
the requirements stipulated in the above table shall be submitted to the SO Rep before the common bricks
are delivered to the Site. Tests shall be carried out on common bricks delivered to the Site to ensure
compliance.
12.3.3

Facing Clay Bricks

Unless otherwise specified, all facing clay brick shall be red facing clay bricks. All internal faces of clay
brick walls shall have joints raked off 5 to 10mm to take plastering. External faces shall be raked off,
consolidated and pointed with cement mortar mix of 1 part masonry cement to 3 parts of fine sand by
volume.
Protect the facing brickwall against dust, contaminated moisture, cement mortar droppings during
construction. The completed facing brickwall surfaces shall be free of stain, dust and cement mortar
droppings.

12.4

CAVITY WALLS AND BRICK CLADDING

(a)

Wall Tie/Bonding Bar System

All brick walls and block walls shall be tied to the surface of reinforced concrete walls or columns
by a wall tie system. The brick walls and block walls shall also be laterally restrained at both ends
by fastening it to reinforced concrete columns with bonding bar system.
The wall tie system shall consist of 2 no. of wall ties held in place by lipped frame. The frame shall
have a pair of stoppers to allow each wall tie a vertical flexibility of 100mm for brick coursing. The
frame and wall tie shall be 2mm and 3mm thick respectively. The fabrication details of the wall tie
system shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Where the fabrication details are different from
those as shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall first obtain approval from the SO Rep before
proceeding any further.

BLDG04/S12.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 12-3
12.4

CAVITY WALLS AND BRICK CLADDING (CONT'D)

(a)

Wall Tie/Bonding Bar System (Cont'd)

The fabrication details of the bonding bar system shall be similar to that of the wall tie system
except that the length of the bonding bar shall be 300mm and whereas that for the wall tie shall be
70mm for brick cladding construction and 100mm long for cavity wall construction.
All wall tie and bonding bar systems shall be fastened with masonry drive pin to the reinforced
concrete column or wall. The masonry drive pin shall be made of stainless steel and shall have a
minimum pull-out strength of 1 kN from the concrete. The wall tie system shall be spaced
horizontally at 600mm centres to centres and so arranged such that individual wall ties at each
horizontally-spaced system are in a staggered manner. The detailed arrangement of the wall tie
system for a typical wall panel is shown in the Drawings.
Individual wall tie shall be embedded 50 mm into the mortar joints and at every fourth course of the
bricks.
The wall tie and bonding bar systems shall be hot-dipped galvanised. The coating mass to at least
3 randomly selected points for individual wall tie/bonding bar and at least 3 randomly selected
points for lipped frame shall comply with the following:
(i)

Wall ties/bonding bars

)
)
)

Minimum average coating mass shall be 460g

per m or 64 microns in accordance with BS 729;
and

(ii)

Lipped frame

(iii)

Minimum coating mass on individual point shall be 410g per m or the equivalent thickness
of 57 microns in accordance with BS 729.

The hot-dipped galvanised coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If the
coating appearance of any galvanised wall tie system is found otherwise, such wall tie system shall
not be used. All galvanised wall tie system shall be stored in a dry and well ventilated place to
prevent the formation of white deposit on them. Small areas of galvanised coating damaged by
cutting or by excessively rough treatment shall be made good by the application of at least two
coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with minimum 94% of zinc dust, expressed as a percentage by
weight of the solid content of the paint.
Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least 2 samples of the galvanised
wall tie or bonding bar system to be tested by an accredited laboratory to determine the coating
weight. The coating weight shall be determined by a stripping test or ISO 2808 Method in
accordance with SS 117. Original certificate of such tests shall be submitted to the SO Rep for
verification.
As and when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall within 24 hours make available one
elcometer on the Site for measuring the thickness of zinc coating.
(b)

Cavity Wall Construction

The damp proof membrane (hereinafter referred to as "DPM" for the purposes of this clause) shall
be extended to 200mm above the floor level as shown in the Drawings. The DPM shall be the type
as specified in Clause 12.8 "Damp-Proof Membrane/Course" and shall be laid in continuous stretch
to the whole width of the wall.
The joints in the facing brickwall shall be completely bedded with mortar (except weep holes).
Polyurethane sealant with backer rod to the manufacturer's instructions shall be applied at joints
where the brickworks abuts reinforced concrete columns and beams as shown in the Drawings.
The erection of the facing brickwall shall be carried out first followed by the external plastering to
beams and columns. Rake off excess mortar from the inner face as the work proceeds to prevent
accumulation of mortar dropping at the base of the cavity.
Provide vertical joints without cement mortar as weep holes at 1st and 2nd course of the facing
brickwall and spaced at 900mm centres to centres in staggered arrangement.
Protect the facing brickwall against dust, contaminated moisture, cement mortar droppings during
construction. The completed facing brickwall surfaces shall be free of stains, dust and cement
mortar droppings.

BLDG04/S12.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 12-4
12.5

REINFORCEMENT TO SOLID CONCRETE BLOCK AND

CLAY BRICKWORK WALLS AND PARTITIONS
(a)

Expanded Galvanised Steel Reinforcement

90mm clay brick walls and solid block walls shall be reinforced with minimum 64 x 0.5mm thick
expanded galvanised steel reinforcement at every 3rd course. The bottom-most expanded metal
reinforcement shall be 200mm above floor level.
Provide a minimum lap of 100mm at reinforcement joints. Embed reinforcement into bed joints of
wall and bonding bars. Blocks shall be built with the coursing and bonding as shown in the
Drawings and blocks correctly bedded.

(b)

Bonding Bars System

The bonding bar system shall be as specified in Clause 12.4 "Cavity Walls And Brick Cladding"
including all subclauses under it.

12.6

POLYURETHANE SEALANT
Where external solid concrete block walls or brickwalls flush with reinforced concrete columns and beams,
polyurethane sealant with backer rod to the Manufacturer's recommendations shall be applied at the joints
between the walls and the columns and beams as shown in the Drawings. The depth of sealant shall be
13mm minimum.

12.7

FOAM RUBBER STRIP INFILL

Provide and lay close-cell foam rubber strip infill to the top most joints between the internal walls (clay
brick, or solid concrete block) and the reinforced concrete beam or roof slab of top-most end corner
dwelling units as shown in the Drawings.
When the wall panel exceeds 5m in length, the foam rubber strip infill shall be interrupted by a cement
mortar of 1 in 3 mix by volume infill for a length of 900mm.

12.8

DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE/COURSE
Provide and lay damp-proof course (hereinafter known as "dpc" for the purposes of this clause) to all walls
complying with BS 6398 Type B (felt fibre base) weighing 3.3 kg per m laid to break joint on a layer of
cement and sand mortar laid immediately under the lowest course of blocks at ground floor level or at a
level 150mm to 220mm above ground level in brickwalls.
Except for bath/wc and kitchen, all other areas including living rooms, bedrooms and household shelters
of the first storey residential units shall be provided with damp-proof membrane. The damp-proof
membrane shall be laid to the underside of RC ground floor slab. The damp-proof membrane shall
comply with BS 6398 Type B (felt fibre base) weighing 3.3 kg per m. The substrate shall be float finished
to receive the damp proof membrane. The damp-proof membrane shall be strip bonded onto the
substrate with rubberised bitumen adhesive to the Manufacturer's recommendations. All laps shall be
100mm wide and sealed with bitumen adhesive to the Manufacturer's instructions. Such damp-proof
membrane shall be applied also to the base of shoplets' counter at the first storey as shown in the
Drawings.
The damp-proof course and damp-proof membrane shall conform to the following :
(a)

BLDG04/S12.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Base Material
(i)

The minimum mass per unit area of the base material shall not be less than 0.34 kg per m.

(ii)

The fibre base shall consist of one or more absorbent sheet of felt made from a mixture of
animal and vegetable fibres.

Bldg Spec
Page 12-5
12.8

DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE/COURSE (CONT'D)

(b)

12.9

Bituminous Materials And Fillers

(i)

The minimum mass per unit area of bitumen shall not be less than (1.6 + excess mass of
dpc material) in kg per m.

(ii)

The saturating material shall consist of bitumen having penetration within the range of 60 to
230 (inclusive) at 25C when tested as described in BS 4691.

(iii)

The coating material shall be oxidised bitumen stabilised by mineral filler and finished with a
surfacing material. The mass per unit area of mineral filler and surfacing shall be within (0.9
+ a excess mass of dpc material) in kg per m to (1.5 + of the excess mass of dpc
material) in kg per m.

(iv)

When measured as described in BS 4692, the softening point of the finished coating
material shall not exceed the softening point of the oxidised bitumen by more than 20C.

(v)

The mineral filler shall consist of mineral granules or other materials. Not less than 90% by
mass of the filler shall pass a 425 micro metre mesh sieve complying with BS 410 and not
less than 50% of the mass shall pass a 212 micro metre mesh sieve complying with BS
410.

(vi)

The surfacing material shall consist of natural sand, mineral granules or other material
which will prevent adhesion between layers of the finished damp-proof materials in the roll.

OPENINGS FOR LIFT DOORS

Leave openings for door to lift well where shown. Build up masonry Works after lift door frames are fixed
by the lift contractor and make good the walls. Floor screed at door shall have fall away from lift well as
shown in the Drawings.

12.10

MORTICES, HOLES, CHASES, ETC

Cut or leave mortices, recesses, holes, chases, grooves, etc. as and when required for bolts, pipes,
bearers, outlets, skirtings, etc.
Generally make good when necessary in cement mortar to match surrounding surfaces to the satisfaction
of the SO Rep.

12.11

SCAFFOLDING
Provide adequate scaffolding as specified in Section 1 "General Specifications" including all clauses and
subclauses under it to enable masons to work from the external side of external walls to achieve a high
standard of walling and pointing.

12.12

GROOVE LINES TO MASONRY WALLS

Form a grove in the mortar between the masonry walls and the reinforced concrete structures where the
two surfaces are flush.

12.13

70mm THICK SOLID BLOCK INFILL IN BEDROOMS,

LIVING/DINING AND KITCHEN
Where shown, 70mm thick solid block infill shall be constructed with 190mm x 90mm x 70mm thick solid
concrete blocks approved by the SO Rep. Connection of solid block infill to lightweight concrete panel
and to RC column or wall shall be as shown in the Drawings. The solid concrete panel infill shall be
finished with two coats of polymer modified mortar to match with the finished surface of lightweight
concrete panels.

BLDG04/S12.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 12-6
12.14

WATER TIGHTNESS TEST TO EXTERNAL FULL HEIGHT

FACING BRICK WALLS
(a)

General
The Contractor shall carry out water test to the external full height facing brick walls to test the
water tightness of external wall construction. The external full height facing brick walls shall include
full height facing brick walls directly facing the exterior but exclude walls along access balcony and
balcony parapet walls.

(b)

Source of Water
The water used for filling up of reinforced concrete water tank before the sterilisation shall be used
for the water tightness test to the external full height facing brick walls. The Contractor shall only
be allowed to sterilise the water tank after completion of the water tightness test to the external full
height facing brick walls. PUB potable water shall not be used for the water tightness test except
for re-test cases.

(c)

Method of Testing
10% of the units per building block with external full height facing brick walls sampled by the
SO Rep shall be tested for water tightness.
Provide the following information to the SO Rep for approval at least 2 months before carrying out
the water test :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

The entire equipment set up to conduct the water test

Procedure of the water test
Pump capacity to deliver the required flow rate
The method to suspend the nozzle

The nozzle of the water jet shall be fixed at a distance of 1800mm to 2000mm away from the
surface of the external wall and incline at 30 degrees to the external wall as shown in the Drawings.
The capacity of water delivered shall be 300 litres per hour and the duration of testing shall be 2
hours as shown in the Drawings.
The nozzle shall be placed in such a way that it covers the entire wall panel. Ensure that the
drawing of water from the water tank for testing shall not contaminate the water tank.
The wall panel shall be considered to have passed the test if no dampness or seepage appears at
the internal surface of the wall panels or the adjacent areas during the spraying and within half an
hour after the completion of the spraying.
(d)

Failure Of The Testing

In the event the water tightness test fails, the Contractor shall rectify the dampness and/or leakage
and carry out a second water tightness test. A further 10% of the units per building block with
external full height facing brick walls shall be sampled by the SO Rep for the second water
tightness test.
In the event the second water tightness test fails, the Contractor shall carry out water tightness test
to all external full height facing brick wall panels for the whole building block. The Contractor shall
rectify all leakages and repeat the test until all the external full height facing brick walls have
passed the test. In addition, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject any external facing brick wall
that perform unsatisfactorily during the water tightness tests.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 13/.....
BLDG04/S12.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 13-1
SECTION 13
ROOFING

13.1

OVER-RIDING CLAUSE
The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this Section including all clauses and
subclauses under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and
reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred as "Performance
Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this Section
including all clauses and subclauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance
Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the
Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the
Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.

13.2

CONCRETE ROOF FINISH

The finished concrete roof shall be kept free from mortar droppings and damages by heavy objects during
subsequent work to the roof. The roof shall be inspected by the SO Rep prior to the application of
waterproofing system. Should any area of the roof be found unsatisfactory, render it with 1:3 non-shrink
cement sand screed and approved bonding agent or other approved method at no extra costs to the
Employer.

13.3

METAL ROOFING AND INSULATION SHEET

13.3.1

Profiled Steel Roofing Sheets

Where shown in the Drawings, all profiled metal roofing and fascia sheets shall be 0.53mm "Zincalume
colourbond Kliplok Hi-ten" or 0.53mm coloured "Speed Deck Hi-ten" or other approved in single lengths
for each span. The colour shall be for one side and shall be selected by the SO Rep. Where shown,
provide 300mm upturn to roofing at jack roof. The Contractor shall check whether the design for the roof
can comply with the Manufacturer's specification before the actual laying of the structure.
The metal roof structural plans and fastening details, supported by design calculations, shall be provided
by the Contractor's PE. The design shall satisfy the Performance Requirements for its intended use and
that include withstanding wind load in accordance with CP3 Chapter V. The Contractor's PE shall submit
a Certificate of Supervision not later than two weeks after completion of the Works, stating that he has
carried out such supervision works and is fully satisfied that the Works have been constructed with such
structural plans and fastening details.
The accessories such as ridge capping, fascia capping, valley gutter, longitudinal and transverse parapet
flashings, cap flashing and corner moulds and others shall be of 0.6mm (24 SWG) "Colourbond" or "Met
Roof" or other approved to the shape and profile as shown in the Drawings. Provide and fix also the gutter
to the shape, material and profile as shown in the Drawings.
The metal roofing, fascia sheets, flashings, copings, openings, pipe flashings, gutters and others shall be
provided and installed by an approved Specialist who can be an approved manufacturer or the
Manufacturer's duly authorised representative. If installed by the latter, the approved manufacturer shall
provide instruction as to the manner of assembly or installation of the roofing and shall further be
responsible for the work.
For the purpose of the Warranty specified in sub-clause 13.3.3, Works shall mean all works specified or
reasonably to be inferred under this clause including all subclauses under it.

BLDG04/S13.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 13-2
13.3.2

Reflective Roof Heat Insulation Sheet

Provide and lay vertically to fall one layer approved double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet over
steel purlins. Allow vertical lapping of 50mm minimum. The double sided reflective roof heat insulation
sheet shall be secured to ridge and eave purlins by self-drilling fasteners complete with 38mm square
metal washers.
Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, reflective roof heat insulation sheet need not be provided for the
metal roof to linkway.
The double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet shall be "Parsec Thermo-Brite II"; or "Super
Sisalation"; or "Super Brite"; or other approved double sided roof heat insulation sheet complying with the
following requirements :
(a)

PSB Product Listing

The insulation sheet shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme.

(b)

Reflectivity
The reflectivity shall be :
Side 1 (average)
:
Side 2 (average)
:

(c)

90% minimum
90% minimum

Fire Tests
The fire tests shall be :

(d)

BS 476 Part 7

Class 1

BS 476 Part 6
- Index of Performance
- Sub-index

:
:

12 maximum
6 maximum

Tear Resistance
The tear resistance shall be :
Machine Direction
: 4000g minimum
Transverse Direction
: 4000g minimum

The entire surface of the insulation sheets shall be evenly laid to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The insulation sheet shall be indelibly marked and imprinted at intervals of not more than one metre. The
markings shall show the Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark.
13.3.3

Warranty
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in the
Deed Of Warranty For Metal Roofing as produced in Appendix A2. In this respect, the Contractor and his
Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town
Council(s) as the SO Rep may at its sole discretion decide. In the event the Deed of Warranty for part of
the Works or for the whole Works is to be submitted to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his
Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A2(TC) to such Town Council(s).
The duly executed Warranty shall be submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such
request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers the Works have been substantially
completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to
execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to
withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works,
subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be
released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty.

BLDG04/S13.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 13-3
13.4

CLAY ROOF TILES AND HEAT INSULATION

13.4.1

Clay Roof Tiles

The clay roof tiles shall be the type as shown in the Drawings or as specified in the Supplementary
Specification. The colour of the roof tile shall be approved by the SO Rep.
(A)

Performance Tests
The roofing tiles shall be tested for permeability in accordance with SS 70:1990. The tiles shall be
considered as satisfying the test if no water has dripped from the underside of the tile after the 6hour test.
The transverse breaking strength determined in the manner described in SS 70:1990 shall not be
less than the following :
Average
Individual

- 900 Newtons
- 675 Newtons

The test method for average water absorption percentage of tiles shall be in the manner as
described in SS 70:1990. The average and individual water absorption percentage of tiles shall not
be more than 8.0 percent and 10.0 percent respectively.
(B)

Laying And Fixing Of Tiles

The roofing tiles and tile accessories shall be provided and laid by the Manufacturer or by his duly
authorised representative in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
Submit drawings to the SO Rep to show the details of fixing and fastening tiles to roof. Nails and
clips shall be of hot-dip galvanised or of non-ferrous metals. Nails shall be of sufficient length to
penetrate into the battens by a minimum of 20mm, but shall not protrude beyond the depth of
battens.
All tiles shall range straight in courses and vertical edges in line from eave to ridge. Upon
completion of all necessary trades, clean down the roof.

(C)

Sealing Of Gaps
Gaps which occur through cutting of tiles at valleys shall be filled with bedding mortar. Any other
gaps shall be sealed by approved means to effectively seal off the gaps.

(D)

Tile Accessories
Provide and lay ridge connecting tiles, lip tiles, ridge tiles, verge tiles, socket tiles, eave tiles,
flashing, eave comb, rafter grating, complete set of tile accessories for vent pipes (socket tiles, pipe
and cap/lantern) and other tile accessories to roof to form a complete roof system. Lead flashing
shall be 14.9 kg per m2 minimum and shall form a watertight joint to the profile of the roofing tile.

13.4.2

Reflective Roof Heat Insulation Sheet

Provide and lay horizontally to fall, one layer approved double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet
over rafters. Allow minimum 75mm for lappings. The insulation sheet shall be nailed or stapled to
wooden rafters.
The double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet shall be "Parsec Thermo-Brite II"; or "Super
Sisalation"; or "Super Brite"; or other approved double sided roof heat insulation sheet complying with the
following requirements.

BLDG04/S13.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 13-4
13.4.2

Reflective Roof Heat Insulation Sheet (Cont'd)

Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, reflective roof heat insulation sheet need not be provided for the
clay roof tiles to linkways.
(a)

PSB Product Listing

The insulation sheet shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme.

(b)

Reflectivity
The reflectivity shall be :
Side 1 (average) - 90% minimum
Side 2 (average) - 90% minimum

(c)

Fire Tests
The fire tests shall be :
BS 476 Part 7 - Class 1
BS 476 Part 6
Index of Performance
Sub-index

(d)

- 12 maximum
- 6 maximum

Tear Resistance
The tear resistance shall be :
Machine Direction
- 4000g minimum
Transverse Direction - 4000g minimum

The entire surface of the insulation sheets shall be evenly laid to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The insulation sheet shall be indelibly marked and imprinted at interval at not more than one metre. The
markings shall show the Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark.
13.4.3

Warranty
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in the
Deed Of Warranty For Clay Roof Tiles as produced in Appendix A3. In this respect, the Contractor and
his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town
Council(s) as the SO Rep may at its sole discretion decide. In the event that the Deed of Warranty for
part of the Works or for the whole Works is to be submitted to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and
his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A3(TC) to such Town
Council(s). The duly executed Warranty shall be submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and
if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers the Works have been
substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event the Contractor and his Specialist
shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be
allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of
such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per Deed of Warranty. However, such sums
withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed Deed of
Warranty.

13.5

SOUND INSULATION MATERIAL

Where sound insulation material is shown in the Drawings, the insulation material shall be one layer of
50mm thick, 60 to 80 kg per m3 density rockwool or other approved.

Total pages for this Section :

4
Section 14/.....

BLDG04/S13.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 14-1
SECTION 14
CONCRETE FLAT ROOF

14.1

GENERAL
The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum for all roofing Works required under the Contract
comprising either one or both of the following systems :
(a)

Ferrocement Secondary Roof Slabs;

(b)

Complete System of Waterproofing Treatment and Panel Roofing.

These roofing Works shall be carried out by an approved roofing specialist.

Submit the name of the roofing specialist whom the Contractor intends to engage, to the SO Rep for
approval not earlier than five months and not later than two months prior to the commencement of the
roofing Works.
14.2

FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOFING WORKS

(A)

Ferrocement Roof Slabs

(a)

Materials - General Standards

(i)

Cement
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement of an approved brand and manufacturer
and shall comply with SS26.

(ii)

Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates shall be natural sand or crushed stone sand complying with SS31.

(iii)

Water
Water used for mixing concrete, washing formwork and curing of concrete shall be
potable water supplied by the PUB.

(iv)

Steel Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement shall be welded steel fabric complying with SS32.

(v)

Admixtures
Admixtures shall comply with SS320 or BS5075.

(vi)

Solid Block Supporting Stool

Concrete block shall comply with SS271.

(b)

Source Of Material
The Welded Mesh Fabric and Fine Mesh Fabric shall be obtained from sources approved
by the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S14.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 14-2
14.2

FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOFING WORKS (CONT'D)

(A)

Ferrocement Roof Slabs (Cont'd)

(c)

Design Specifications
(i)

Slab Dimension
Details of the precast ferrocement slab shall comply with the Drawings. The precast
ferrocement slab shall be 900mm 3mm long x 600mm 3mm wide x 20mm 2mm
thick. The difference in diagonal lengths of each panel shall not be more than 3mm.

(ii)

Mix Design
The precast concrete slab shall be cast from a mix design which complies with the
following requirements :
(1) minimum cement to sand ratio by weight of 1:2
(2) maximum water to cement ratio by weight of 0.45
(3) air dry density of hardened concrete (including steel) not less than 2200 kg
per m
(4) 28 days average cube strength of three cubes not less than 35 N per mm
The amount of admixture in the mix design shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instruction.
Before commencing the manufacture of precast slabs, submit a proposed mix design
to the SO Rep for approval.

(iii)

Reinforcement
The reinforcement shall consist of a layer of square wire mesh 3.25mm (minimum) at
75mm spacing and a layer of square wire mesh 1.5mm (minimum) at 25mm spacing.
The wires shall be galvanized with a zinc coating weight of 65 g per m minimum.
The wires shall have a minimum proof stress of 300 N per mm.

(iv)

Finishes
The slab shall be cast on a steel base plate and the top surface shall be trowelled
finish.

(v)

Other Properties
(1)

(vi)

For the initial Surface Absorption Test Value (BS1881), the hardened panel
shall have ISAT values less than that stipulated below:
Time (min)

10

30

60

ISAT Value (ml/m/s)

0.20

0.15

0.1

(2)

Carbonation depth of hardened panel before installation shall be less than

3mm.

(3)

Cover tolerance shall be such that no more than 3 points per section shall
have a cover measurement of less than 3mm.

Solid Block Supporting Stool

The shape and size of the solid block for supporting the slabs shall be in accordance
with the Drawings.

BLDG04/S14.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 14-3
14.2

FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOFING WORKS (CONT'D)

(A)

Ferrocement Roof Slabs (Cont'd)

(d)

Manufacturing Process
The slab shall be cast using steel base mould. The mortar shall be compacted by vibrators
and the top surface shall be trowelled smooth. All reinforcement shall be adequately
supported with approved spacers.
After setting and demoulding, the slabs shall be neatly stored with easy access and visibility
to every piece. During the first 7 days after casting, the slabs shall be placed on their edge
during transportation.
All panels shall be properly cured. Seek the approval of the SO Rep with respect to the
curing method, duration and facilities prior to the commencement of actual production. The
curing method shall be equivalent to 3 days of moist curing.
Samples of the panels shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the
commencement of full production, and the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense,
make adjustment to the manufacturing process or equipment if so directed by the SO Rep.

(e)

Installation Of Secondary Roofing System

On areas indicated for secondary roofing, the ferrocement panels shall be laid on top of
solid blocks supporting stool in accordance with the Drawings. The ferrocement panels shall
be placed with the off-form surface facing up.
All gaps at the edges of the secondary roof shall be sealed with 13mm x 13mm x 18 BWG
square shape galvanised wire mesh bent to shape. The bent-end (100mm) shall be
sandwiched between the slab and support leaving a gap of 10mm above the roof surface.
Where vent pipes protrude through the ferrocement slabs, openings shall be provided by
carefully sawing the slabs so as not to cause any cracking.
Ensure that the ferrocement slabs are not indiscriminately stack on the main reinforced
concrete roof slab prior to the commencement of installation of ferrocement slabs. The
position for the stacking of the secondary roofing slab shall be approved by the SO Rep.
Stacking shall be allowed only at column positions and shall be limited to one pallet per
column. The number of pieces per pallet shall not be more than the number of pieces
supported by the column as shown in the Drawings. Any Defect in the main roof structure
shall be made good as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense. All
slabs shall be indelibly marked and imprinted with the manufacturer's name before delivery
to the Site.

(f)

CATV/Lightning Conductor Crossing

Provide 150mm x 150mm (minimum) concrete curb crossing between water tank or lift
motor room and reinforced concrete fascia for cable routing as shown in the Drawings.

(g)

Quality Of Concrete Work

(i)

Inspection And Testing

Provide facilities for the SO Rep to inspect the preparation and concreting Works.
On each concreting day, at least one sample shall be taken for the casting of 3
cubes for compressive strength test (size 100 mm cube).

BLDG04/S14.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 14-4
14.2

FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOFING WORKS (CONT'D)

(A)

Ferrocement Roof Slabs (Cont'd)

(g)

Quality Of Concrete Work (Cont'd)

(i)

Inspection And Testing (Cont'd)

Samples of welded steel fabric shall be taken at the factory for the following tests :
(1)

strength testing and bar size measurement (SS32);

(2)

galvanized coating weight (The method of testing shall be in accordance

with BS443).

Samples of ferrocement roof slab panels shall be taken at the factory and subject to
batch testing at a testing authority approved by the SO Rep, covering the following
aspects:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(ii)

Dimension measurement of panel;

Cover measurement after cutting the panel;
Density of the panel;
Initial surface absorption test (BS1881);
Carbonation test after cutting the panel.

Sampling Rate
Reinforcement shall be sampled once per contract, 3 bars of each size shall be
taken per sampling as one sample. Ferrocement roof slab panels shall be sampled
at least once per contract, 3 pieces shall be taken per sampling as one sample.

(iii)

Passing Criteria
Tests shall be conducted on one specimen out of the three sampled. If the
specimen satisfies all requirements, the batch shall be deemed to satisfy the quality
requirements.
If the specimen fails any of the quality requirements, tests shall be conducted on the
remaining two specimens.
If two or more specimens within a sample fail to meet a specific requirement, the
material/product shall be deemed to have failed that specific requirement.
If the average result of the three specimens deviates from the required level by 15%
or more, the batch of materials/products is deemed to have failed the specified
requirements.

(B)

Waterproofing Treatment To Pipe Penetration Area

Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall seal openings in the roof slabs
with non-shrink cementitious mortar or grout of a similar or higher grade to match with those of the
surrounding concrete, after the installation of services by the Contractor and/or other contractors.
The Contractor shall also provide polyurethane base liquid applied waterproofing membrane
around the service pipes at a radius of 300mm from the centre of the outlet. The application of the
waterproofing membrane shall be carried up the pipes at a minimum height of 100mm from the
floor surface.

BLDG04/S14.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 14-5
14.2

FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOFING WORKS (CONT'D)

(B)

Waterproofing Treatment To Pipe Penetration Area (Cont'd)

The surface to receive the membrane shall be free from dust, laitance and ground smooth if
necessary. The application of the membrane shall comply strictly to the recommendations and
instructions of the manufacturer and/or SO Rep.
After allowing for adequate curing, lay cement mortar to form a haunch around the pipes sufficiently
to cover the waterproofing membrane. Adequate measures shall be provided to protect the
membrane from being damaged during the screeding operation.
The mortar mix shall be of 1 part cement to 3 parts sand by volume.
The waterproofing membrane shall comply with the technical performance requirements as
specified in subclause 19.3.2 "Specification Of The Waterproofing Membrane".

14.3

COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT

AND PANEL ROOFING
(A)

Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this clause including all
subclauses under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and
reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred as "Performance
Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause
including all subclauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the
Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer,
subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the
Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.

(B)

The panel roofing shall be executed in the following sequence :

(C)

Waterproofing Screed, followed by;

Waterproofing Membrane, followed by;
Insulation Materials, followed by;
In-situ Waterproof Cement Panels.

Waterproofing Cement/Sand Screed

All roof surfaces to be rendered with the cement/sand screeds shall be brushed clean and well wet
before a screed is applied. All screed shall be kept damp and adequately cured to prevent
shrinkage and cracking. The screed shall be of one part cement to three parts sand (1:3) by
volume, waterproofed with "Sika No. 1"; or "Fextile 1"; or "Smartguard"; or other approved
waterproofing compound and laid to a fall of 25mm to every 3000mm towards the rainwater outlets,
scupper drains or other outlets. Where in the case reinforced concrete roof slab is laid to fall, the
screeding shall be in even thickness. Mixing of waterproofing compound shall be done strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations or instructions. Screeding thickness
shall be a minimum of 20mm thick at the lowest point and laid in a workmanlike manner with even
fall and finished smooth with wood trowelling. The cement shall be of a brand currently approved
by the SO Rep, be fresh when delivered and used in the order of delivery. Any bag of cement
containing partly set cement shall be removed from the Site. Cement of different brands shall not
be mixed in use. Sand used shall be clean, evenly graded from fine to coarse pit sand, free from
loams, silt and other organic matter. Clay sediment shall not exceed 10% by volume.

BLDG04/S14.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 14-6
14.3

COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT

AND PANEL ROOFING (CONT'D)
(D)

Waterproofing Membrane
(a)

Preparation Of Surface
Before applying the waterproofing membrane system, the entire screeded surfaces shall be
thoroughly clean, free from dust, etc and in visibly dry condition.

(b)

Waterproofing Membrane System

The waterproofing membrane shall consist of six coats of "Shellkote" or "BP Aquaseal" and
one layer of fibre glass membrane; or other approved waterproofing membrane complying
with SS 133:1987. Submit relevant technical information, test reports from PSB or SAC
accredited testing laboratories and other additional information as required by the SO Rep.

(c)

Application Of Waterproofing Membrane

(i)

The "Shellkote" waterproofing system shall be applied in the sequence as follows :

(1)

Apply by brush or spray, priming coat of "Shell Super Penetration Primer" at a

rate of 0.10 litre per square metre. Allow to dry for at least two hours.

(2)

Apply a thick brush coat of "Shellkote Bitumen Emulsion Type 3" at a rate of
0.5 litre per square metre, laid in one direction. Allow to dry for at least 12
hours.

(3)

Apply a thick brush coat of "Shellkote Bitumen Emulsion Type 3" at a rate of
0.5 litre per square metre, laid in a direction at right angles to the previous
coat. Whilst this is wet, embed a layer of Open Woven Glass Membrane
("Shell FG4"; or other approved). Ensure that the membrane is free of
wrinkles and all edges overlapped by 50mm.
The Open Woven Glass Membrane shall stop short 50mm from the edge of
the Bitumen Emulsion.
Whilst this is in progress, apply a thick coat of "Shellkote Bitumen Emulsion
Type 3" at a rate of 0.5 litre per square metre laid in a direction at right angles
to the previous coat and smooth out. Allow to dry for at least 24 hours.

OR

BLDG04/S14.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

(4)

All woven glassfibre membrane for reinforcement of liquid bitumen roof

coatings shall comply with the requirement of PS 127 of the Bitumen Roof
Coatings Manufacturer's Association.

(5)

Apply a thick brush coat of "Shellkote Bitumen Emulsion Type 5" at a rate of
0.5 litre per square metre laid in a direction at right angles to the previous
coat. Allow to dry for at least 24 hours.

(6)

Apply a thick brush coat of "Shellkote Bitumen Emulsion Type 5" at a rate of
0.5 litre per square metre laid in a direction at right angles to the previous
coat. Allow to dry for at least 48 hours.

Bldg Spec
Page 14-7
14.3

COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT

AND PANEL ROOFING (CONT'D)
(D)

Waterproofing Membrane (Cont'd)

(c)

Application Of Waterproofing Membrane (Cont'd)

(ii)

The "Aquaseal" Waterproofing System shall be applied in the sequence as follows :

(1)

Apply by brush or spray, priming coat of "BP Aquaseal Primer" at a rate of

0.10 litre per square metre. Allow to dry for at least two hours.

(2)

Apply a thick brush coat of "BP Aquaseal 5S" at a rate of 0.5 litre per square
metre, laid in one direction. Allow to dry for at least 12 hours.

(3)

Apply a thick brush coat of "BP Aquaseal 5S" at a rate of 0.5 litre per square
metre, laid in a direction at right angles to the previous coat. Whilst this is wet,
embed a layer of Open Woven Glass Membrane ("Marglass 250 ALK"; or
other approved). Ensure that the membrane is free of wrinkles and all edges
overlapped by 50mm.
The Open Woven Glass Membrane shall stop short 50mm from the edge of
the Bitumen Emulsion.
Whilst this is in progress, apply a thick coat of "BP Aquaseal 5S" at a rate of
0.5 litre per square metre laid in a direction at right angles to the previous coat
and smooth out. Allow to dry for at least 24 hours.

(d)

(4)

All woven glassfibre membrane for reinforcement of liquid bitumen roof

coatings shall comply with the requirement of PS 127 of the Bitumen Roof
Coatings Manufacturer's Association.

(5)

Apply a thick brush coat of "BP Aquaseal 40S" at a rate of 0.5 litre per square
metre laid in a direction at right angles to the previous coat. Allow to dry for at
least 24 hours.

(6)

Apply a thick brush coat of "BP Aquaseal 40S" at a rate of 0.5 litre per square
metre laid in a direction at right angles to the previous coat. Allow to dry for at
least 48 hours.

Other Waterproofing System

The application of other approved waterproofing system shall fully comply with the
Manufacturer's instructions.
The Contractor shall submit details of the proposed waterproofing system together with the
Tender.

(e)

Roof Details
Detailing at eaves shall be as indicated in the Drawings. The waterproofing treatment shall
be carried up at abutments to walls, pipes, parapets, skirtings, concrete curbs, etc as shown
in the Drawings.

(f)

Bituminous Stains
In the event the external painted walls of the building blocks are affected by bituminous
stains, the Contractor shall remove such stains, make good and re-paint the affected
surfaces to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

BLDG04/S14.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 14-8
14.3

COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT

AND PANEL ROOFING (CONT'D)
(E)

Insulation Materials
The insulation materials shall be 50mm thick insulation boards. The board shall be multicellular
board of extruded expanded polystyrene containing a flame retardant additive. It shall have natural
skins on both surfaces and shall have the following properties :
Density
Thermal conductivity
Compressive Strength at 10% deflection
Water absorption:
Capillarity
Maximum operating temperature

:
:
:
:
:
:

35 kg per m3;
0.029 - 0.032 W/mk;
300 kPa;
less than 1% by volume;
none;
74C;

The board dimensions shall be 50mm thick 2.0mm, 600mm wide 3.0mm and 1250mm long
6.0mm. The boards shall be laid loose on top of the waterproofing membrane in a staggered
pattern. All joints between the boards shall be tightly fitted. Boards that are less than half () the
width of the length shall not be placed at the edge but to be placed at least one row away from the
edge.
The whole Works shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's/supplier's
instructions.
(F)

In-Situ Waterproof Cement/Sand Panels

The Works shall be executed in the following sequence :

BLDG04/S14.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

(a)

Lay an overall 38mm thick in-situ waterproof cement and sand (1:3) panel over final layer of
waterproofing membrane in alternate bay size 900mm x 900mm each. The cement and
sand screed shall be mixed with "Sika No. 1"; or "Fextile 1"; or "Smartguard"; or other
approved waterproofing compound. Waterproofing compound shall be mixed in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed instructions and subject to approval
by the SO Rep. Cement and sand panels shall be laid in parallel strips of 900mm x 900mm.
Panel surfaces shall be smoothened with steel trowel without adding dry cement and truly
levelled to falls indicated as a finished floor surface. Joints between panels shall be "V"
shaped 10 mm wide at the top and tapering to 6mm at the bottom. Wood strips shall be
used and the completed depth of the joints shall be 16mm leaving the panel 22mm thick
below the joint.

(b)

Immediately after setting, the panels shall be covered with hessian bags which shall be kept
wet for not less than 3 days to cure thoroughly. Any defective panels shall be replaced by
the Contractor.

(c)

After the removal of hessian bags and when the cement panels are cured, the joints shall be
filled and grouted with bitumen compound. The bitumen applied shall be a hot-poured
rubber-bitumen sealant to BS 2499 Type A1 or Type A2. The finished level shall be clean
and the top-most joint shall be levelled with the panel surface to prevent water stagnation.

(d)

Extreme care shall be taken at the building expansion joint and to construct roofing strictly
to the details shown in the Drawings or as instructed by the SO Rep.

Bldg Spec
Page 14-9
14.3

COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT

AND PANEL ROOFING (CONT'D)
(G)

Warranty
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as
stipulated in the Deed Of Warranty For Complete System Of Waterproofing Treatment And Panel
Roofing as produced in Appendix A4. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit
such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO
Rep may at its sole discretion decide. In the event the Deed of Warranty for part of the Works or
for the whole Works is to be submitted to such Town Councils, the Contractor and his Specialist
shall submit such Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A4(TC) to such Town Council(s). The
duly executed Warranty shall be submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no
such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers the Works have been
substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event the Contractor and his
Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO
Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation
to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per Deed of Warranty.
However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the
duly executed Deed of Warranty.

Total pages for this Section :

9
Section 15/.....

BLDG04/S14.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 15-1
SECTION 15
CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

15.1

TIMBER
Unless otherwise specified, all timber delivered to site shall be properly seasoned to moisture content not
exceeding 20%. Timber shall be sawn straight, square, free from sap, shakes, waney edges, large loose
or dead knots, large bores or termite holes and other objectionable Defect.
Timber delivered to site shall be properly stacked under cover to ensure free air circulation round all faces
and minimum warping.
Any timber member or component which the SO Rep does not approve to be used shall be removed from
the site immediately and replaced with new members/components.
Any portion of the timber work that warps, develops shakes or other Defect within the Defects Liability
Period shall be removed. The defective work shall be replaced and rectified.

15.1.1

Structural Use Of Timber

The use of timber for structural purposes shall comply with SS CP7. Timber used shall be Kempas or
Keruing or Chengal or Balau, or other approved species of similar strength grade. Timber shall be treated
with copper/chrome/arsenic preservatives according to SS 72. As far as possible, holes in timber shall be
formed before preservative treatment. Holes and sawn surfaces of treated timber shall be brushed with
two coats of creosote or other approved preservatives. Bolts, nuts, screws, nails, plates and steel section
used for connecting timber shall be galvanised. Steel sections and plates shall be Grade 43A steel to BS
4360. Bolts and nuts used shall be black bolts to BS 4190.
As soon as is practicable, and prior to the commencement of assembly, all structural timber delivered to
the Site shall be subject to random sampling for testing by PSB testing laboratory accredited under
SINGLAS in accordance with SS CP7. One test shall be done per contract. In the event that the test
fails, the Contractor shall remove the batch of timber from the Site. Another test shall be done on another
batch. If the second test fails, all timber shall be removed. A fresh batch shall then be obtained from
another supplier and tested accordingly.
The sample shall be tested for moisture content and checked for dimensional requirements. The bending,
compression and shear stresses shall also be determined. Preservative penetration and salt content shall
be determined in accordance with SS 72.
All carpentry work shall be sawn unless otherwise specified. All exposed timber shall be sanded to a
smooth finish. Painting where specified shall be in accordance with the instructions of the paint
manufacturer.

15.1.2

Joinery
Unless otherwise specified, all timber for joinery work shall be Kapur or Chengal or Balau.
Timber frames to flush doors, built-in or free standing furniture, walls, partitions, ceilings and others shall
be medium hardwood Kapur.
All exposed surfaces of joinery work shall be wrot by planning and sand-papering to an approved finish.
Wrot timber shall be worked to the correct sizes and shapes shown in the Drawings. Sizes of timber
members indicated in the Drawings are nominal and a maximum allowance of 1.5mm shall be permitted
for each wrot face.
Take all measurements for joinery work at the building and verify it with the dimensions shown in the
Drawings. Where discrepancy occurs between the measurement shown in the Drawings and that taken
on the Site, the Contractor shall obtain the confirmation of the SO Rep before proceeding with the Works.

BLDG04/S15.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 15-2
15.2

PREPARATION OF JOINERY WORK

Place order for all joinery and carpentry items required for the work within one month from the date of the
Letter of Acceptance. The Contractor shall be responsible for any delay owing to his failure to place order
in good time. Preparation of joinery work shall commence at the beginning of the contract and shall
proceed until all joinery is ready. These shall then be stacked on the Site and protected from weather.

15.3

FRAMING TOGETHER
All frames shall be put together with well proportioned and tight fitting mortice and tenon joints, wedged up
tight and fixed with 10mm diameter hardwood pins. Leave pins projecting until immediately before fixing in
position.
Any member that warp, twist, split or develop any other Defect shall be replaced with new ones before
wedging up.

15.4

JOINERY WORK
All joinery work shall be made in strict accordance with detailed Drawings. Joints shall be formed in a
proper workmanlike manner, well proportioned and tight fitting. Dress all exposed surfaces of joinery
work. No nailing shall be permitted in joints for joinery.
Where glue joinery work is likely to come into contact with moisture, the glue shall be waterproof.

15.5

PRIME FRAMES
All joinery requiring painting shall be knotted, stopped and primed before fixing. The backs of all door and
window frames, and other frames in contact with masonry work shall be coated with two coats of
"Solignum", "Presotim" or other approved wood preservative. The preservative shall be allowed to be
thoroughly dried before fixing the frames. All sawcuts shall be similarly treated.

15.6

FIXING OF TIMBER DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES INTO CONCRETE STRUCTURES

Door and window frames shall fit neatly into the masonry openings. All crevices between frames and
walls, beams or other masonry shall be filled up with 1:3 cement sand mortar. Heads of window and door
frames which abut concrete structure shall be fixed with minimum 2 No. 75mm masonry drive pin "Ramset
Nails No. 2330" or other approved to the numbers as shown in the Drawings. The feet of the door frames
shall be fixed according to the details.
All nails shall be completely embedded in the frames and stopped with an approved sealer.

15.7

FIXING OF DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES TO MASONRY

Timber door and window frames shall be secured to masonry walls with 6 No. and 4 No. fishtailed
holdfasts as shown in the Drawings.
The ms holdfasts shall be 25mm x 3mm thick x 230mm girth, one end turned up and drilled and screwed
to frame and the other end tailed and built into the joints of walling.

15.8

FIXING OF TIMBER CILL TO WALL/CONCRETE CILL

Where shown, provide and fix minimum 2 No. of 10mm diameter x 75mm long mild steel dowel bar to
each timber cill. One end of the bar shall project 25mm into the groove of timber cill and the other end
shall be embedded 50mm into the groove of the wall or concrete cills. The grooves shall then be grouted
with cement mortar 1:3 mix. For timber cill longer than 600mm in length, the dowel bar shall be fixed at
maximum 600mm centres.

BLDG04/S15.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 15-3
15.9

TIMBER DOORS
Unless otherwise specified, all doors shall be constructed in accordance with the details as shown in the
Drawings. Size are nominal. The types of timber veneer and decorative inlays for main entrance door,
bedroom door and bathroom door shall be approved by the SO Rep. Unless otherwise specified, plywood
panels shall be Grade 2 and of moisture resistant quality. The framing for flush door core shall be
connected with corrugated metal fasteners or other approved joints for connections.
(a)

Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be free from stains, adhesive marks, manufacturing faults and other
blemishes liable to impair the finish of the door.

(b)

Moisture Content
At the time of delivery, the moisture content of timber for all timber components shall not be less
than 10 percent and not more than 15 percent. However, any difference in the moisture content of
timber shall not exceed 3 percentage units.

15.10

HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED SOLID TIMBER VENEERED

ENTRANCE DOORS WITH DECORATIVE INLAY TO FLATS

15.10.1

Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it shall
ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of
complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event
the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are
upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading
at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not
in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.

15.10.2

General
Where in the case of half-hour solid timber veneered doors with decorative inlay to entrances of flats are
shown in the Drawings, provide and install such half-hour fire-rated solid timber veneered doors, mild steel
door frames and ironmongery as a complete system. The complete system shall have PSB test
certificates, PSB labels, FSSD approval and certified under PSB product Listing Scheme Class 1A or PSB
Product Listing Scheme Class 1B.
The dimensions and profiles of the mild steel door frames and door frame fixing shall be as shown in the
Drawings. The thickness of the door panels shall be approximately 45mm to fit into the rebate of the door
frame profile. The type and colour of timber veneers and decorative inlays shall to the design pattern and
shall be approved by the SO Rep.

15.10.3

Shop Drawings And Sample

Before commencement of the work, provide workshop drawings, PSB Product Listing Scheme certificates,
PSB test certificates and FSSD approval for the approval of the SO Rep. Further, a complete sample shall
be installed on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.

BLDG04/S15.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 15-4
15.10.4

Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance with the following
schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The
brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of
ironmongery required.
(A)

Schedule
The ironmongery items shall be :
(i)

4 nos.

102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and
ball bearing complete with matching finish screws per door leaf.

(ii)

1 no.

"YTL" N28FIR-AT-US5; or "Accord" M4L10AB or "Posse" M4L10AB; or other

approved mortice lever on backplate lockset with 5-pin single cylinder and
thumb turn (key on the outside and thumb turn on the inside) and solid brass
lever handles on plates on both sides. The finish shall be antique brass. The
lever handle lockset shall be installed in a manner to clear the metal gate
lockset.

(iii)

1 no.

Brass rebated parts.

(iv)

1 no.

200mm x 20mm wide brass lever action flush bolt in satin finish.

(v)

1 no.

300mm x 20mm wide brass lever action flush bolt in satin finish.

(vi)

1 no.

Antique brass finish door viewer :

(a)
"YTL" 200; or
(b)
"Union" 5610-180AB/BB; or
(c)
"Accord" 2170 AB-A;
(d)
or other approved
The position shall be as shown in the Drawings but ensure that the door viewer
shall not be obstructed by the entrance grille gate.

(vii)

(B)

1 no.

"Dorma" TS 73 or "Tiki" 90 Series or "NHN" model 1082 or "New Star" 5002 or

"Accord" 93; or "YTL" 800 or "Union"; or other approved slim line door closer
with cushioned back checking action. The finish of the door closer shall be of
bronze colour

Keys For Locksets

The lockset shall be provided with 3 sets of keys. These keys shall be handed over to the
Employer upon Substantial Completion of the Works.

(C)

Grade Of Stainless Steel

Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be Grade 304 and the chemical
composition shall comply with SS 40:1988.

15.10.5

Certificates
The Contractor shall submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire-rated
solid timber veneered door including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour firerated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.

15.10.6

Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".

15.10.7

Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber
Doors".

BLDG04/S15.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 15-5

15.11

HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS

TO SWITCH ROOM, PUB SWITCH ROOM, STORE ROOM, PUMP ROOM,
REFUSE ROOM, BULKY REFUSE AREA AND STAIRCASE ACCESS TO MAIN ROOF

15.11.1

Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it shall
ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of
complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event
the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are
upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading
at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not
in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.

15.11.2

General
Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to switch rooms, PUB switch rooms, store rooms, pump rooms,
refuse rooms, bulky refuse areas and staircase accesses to main roof are shown in the Drawings, provide
and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with timber door frames
and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors, timber door frames
and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system and shall have PSB test certificates and PSB
labels and approved by the FSSD.

15.11.3

Shop Drawings
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Provide shop drawings, PSB test certificates
and approval letter from the FSSD for the approval of the SO Rep prior to the installation.

15.11.4

Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the following
schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as
a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. All ironmongery shall be at least
half-hour fire-rated and approved by the FSSD.
(A)

Double Leaf
For double leaf doors :

BLDG04/S15.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.

(ii)

2 no.

Stainless steel locking eyes (4mm thick minimum) with hairline finish.

(iii)

1 no.

"Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless steel
cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved. Fixing
screws shall not be exposed on the external.

(iv)

1 no.

"Abloy" PL 230 padlock under master key; or "Union" 3122/2 PL padlock under
master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master key; or other approved.

(v)

1 no.

"Nikon" 150mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other approved.

(vi)

1 no.

"Nikon" 225mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other approved.

(vii)

2 no.

Approved door closer with cushioned back-checking action.

(viii)

1 no.

Approved stainless steel door selector.

Bldg Spec
Page 15-6
15.11.4

Ironmongery (Cont'd)
(B)

Single Leaf
For single leaf doors :

(C)

(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges.

(ii)

2 no.

Stainless steel locking eyes (4 mm thick minimum) with hairline finish.

(iii)

1 no.

"Abloy" PL 230 padlock under master key; or "Union" 3122/2 PL padlock

under master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master key; or
other approved.

(iv)

1 no.

"Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless

steel cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved.
Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external.

(v)

1 no.

Approved door closer with cushioned back-checking action.

Doors To Staircase Accesses To Main Roofs

For each door to staircase accesses to main roofs, in addition to the above-mentioned
ironmongery requirements specified, provide and fix one additional no. of 240mm x 27mm
stainless steel barrel shoot bolt fixed on the door leaf surface facing the roof .

(D)

Grade Of Stainless Steel

Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be Grade 304 and the chemical
composition shall be in accordance with SS 40:1988.

15.11.5

Certificates
The Contractor shall submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the timber
surface finished composite doors, including timber door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least
half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.

15.11.6

Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".

15.11.7

Adhesives
Adhesives used shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".

15.11.8

Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber
Doors".

BLDG04/S15.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 15-7
15.12

HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED

COMPOSITE DOORS TO SERVICE DUCTS FOR FLATS

15.12.1

Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it shall
ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of
complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event
the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are
upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading
at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not
in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.

15.12.2

General
Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to service ducts are shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall
provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors to the service ducts
complete with timber door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished
composite doors, timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system. The
complete system shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels, FSSD approval and certified under PSB
Product Listing Scheme Class 1A or PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1B.

15.12.3

Shop Drawings And Sample

The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Prior to the installation, provide shop drawings,
PSB Product Listing Scheme certificates, PSB test reports, PSB and FSSD approval for the approval of
the SO Rep. Further, a complete sample shall be installed on Site for the approval of the SO Rep before
full implementation.

15.12.4

Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the following
schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall be at least half-hour fire-rated and
approved by FSSD. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective
quality and profile of ironmongery required.
(A)

Single Leaf
For single leaf doors :
(i)

4 no.

102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel butt hinges.

(ii)

1 no.

Cylinder mortice night latch "Union" 2332 CH/300/2x13 under G1HBG-PH and
master key series G1HBG; or "Abloy" 2295 MS/CR under HDB MK and master
key series MK 911047; or "Yale" 3203/214.62 under MKAA and master key series
MK 48; or "Accord" 2332/1405 under HDB MK and master key series MK48; or
other approved.
The mortice night latch shall be with key cylinder on the outside and thumb turn on
the inside. The cylinder and thumb turn shall be in chrome plated finish.

(iii)

BLDG04/S15.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

1 no.

"Nikon" C1 76 mm x 76 mm or "Goal" GC or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle;

or other approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external.

Bldg Spec
Page 15-8
15.12.4

Ironmongery (Cont'd)
(B)

Double Leaf
For double leaf doors :
(i)

4 no.

102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.

(ii)

1 no.

Cylinder mortice night latch "Union" 2332 CH/300/2x13 under G1HBG-PH and
master key series G1HBG; or "Abloy" 2295 MS/CR under HDB MK and master
key series MK 911047; or "Yale" 3203/214.62 under MKAA and master key series
MK 48; or "Accord" 2332/1405 under HDB MK and master key series MK48; or
other approved.
The mortice night latch shall be with key cylinder on the outside and thumb turn on
the inside. The cylinder and thumb turn shall be in chrome plated finish.

(C)

(iii)

1 no.

"Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm; or "Goal" GC; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle;
or other approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external.

(iv)

1 no.

Brass rebated parts.

(v)

1 no.

200mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish
(box type).

(vi)

1 no.

300mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish
(box type).

Grade Of Stainless Steel

Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be Grade 304 and the chemical
composition shall be in accordance with SS 40:1988.

(D)

Keys For Mortice Night Latch

A set of three keys shall be provided for each residential unit served by the service duct and shall
be handed over to the Employer upon Substantial Completion of the Works.

15.12.5

Certificates
Submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire-rated timber surface
finished composite doors including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour firerated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.

15.12.6

Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".

15.12.7

Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber
Doors".

BLDG04/S15.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 15-9
15.13

HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE

DOORS TO MDF ROOM AND TELECOMS EQUIPMENT ROOM

15.13.1

Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all subclauses under it shall
ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of
complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred to as "Performance Requirement"). In the
event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under
it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary
upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such
approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.

15.13.2

General
Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to MDF Rooms and Telecoms Equipment Rooms are shown in the
Drawings, provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with
timber door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors,
timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system and shall have PSB test
certificates and PSB labels and approved by the FSSD.

15.13.3

Shop Drawings
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Provide shop drawings, PSB test certificates
and approval letter from the FSSD for the approval of the SO Rep prior to the installation.

15.13.4

Ironmongery For Half Hour Fire Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors
To MDF Room And Telecoms Equipment Room
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the following
schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a
guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. All ironmongery shall be at least halfhour fire rated and approved by FSSD.
(a)

Double Leaf
For double leaf doors :

BLDG04/S15.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.

(ii)

1 no.

"Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781k single cylinder and
thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt with
construction keys; or "Falcon" D441-US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn
deadbolt with construction keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable
of being operated by PBTS master key.

(iii)

2 no.

"Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless steel
cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved. Fixing
screws shall not be exposed on the external.

(iv)

1 no.

"Nikon" 150mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt or other approved.

(v)

1no.

"Nikon" 225mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt or other approved.

(vi)

1 no.

Approved door closer with cushioned back-checking action.

(vii)

1 no.

Approved stainless steel selector.

Bldg Spec
Page 15-10
15.13.4

Ironmongery For Half Hour Fire Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors
To MDF Room And Telecoms Equipment Room (Cont'd)
(b)

Single Leaf
For single leaf doors :

(c)

(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges.

(ii)

1 no.

"Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781k single cylinder and
thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt with
construction keys; or "Falcon" D441-US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn
deadbolt with construction keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable
of being operated by PBTS master key.

(iii)

2 no.

"Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless steel
cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved. Fixing
screws shall not be exposed on the external.

(iii)

1 no.

Approved door closer with cushioned back-checking action.

Grade Of Stainless Steel

Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be Grade 304 and the chemical
composition shall be in accordance with SS 40 : 1988.

15.13.5

Certificates
The Contractor shall submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the timber
surface finished composite doors, including timber door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least
half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.

15.13.6

Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".

15.13.7

Adhesives
Adhesives used shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".

15.13.8

Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber
Doors".

15.13.9

Handover Of MDF Room And Telecoms Equipment Room

The Contractor shall attend the handover of the MDF Room and Telecoms Equipment Room for the
changing of lockset from construction keys to master keys.

BLDG04/S15.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 15-11
15.14

HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED

COMPOSITE DOORS TO PROTECTED STAIRCASE
(A)

Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it
has to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the
purpose of complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance
Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause
including all sub-clauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the
Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the
approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or
obligations arising under the Contract.

(B)

General
Provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with door
frames and ironmongery to protected staircase. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished
composite doors, door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system and shall
have PSB test certificates, PSB labels and approved by the FSSD.
Details of the half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors shown in the Drawings
shall serve as a guide.

(C)

Shop Drawings And Sample

Prior to the installation, submit workshop drawings and PSB test certificates for the approval of the
SO Rep. Further, install a complete sample on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full
implementation.

(D)

Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance with the
following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall be at least half-hour
fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective
quality and profile of ironmongery required.
Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be Grade 304 and the chemical
composition shall comply with SS40.
Schedule Of Ironmongery

(E)

(a)

4 no. Stainless steel door hinges for each door leaf.

(b)

1 no. "Dorma" TS73V or "Tiki" 90 Series or "Hafele-Geze" Series 2190; or other approved
door closer with cushioned back checking action.

(c)

1 no. "Tiki" PH-20/BB/225 SS; or other approved stainless steel pull handles. The
diameter shall be 18mm minimum and the length shall be approximately 225mm.

(d)

1 no. Stainless steel push plate of size 300mm x 150mm. The thickness shall be 1.2mm
minimum. The word "PUSH" shall be engraved and painted on the push plate.

Certificates
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep, certificates as documentary proof that the complete
system of the fire-rated timber finish composite door including door frames and ironmongery
installed are of at least half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.

BLDG04/S15.DOC(11)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 15-12
15.15

FULL PANEL EXTRUDED PVC SWING DOORS

Provide and install extruded PVC swing doors to toilet of kiosks, lock-up shops, shops, eating houses and
other locations as shown in the Drawings. The extruded PVC doors shall be obtained from approved
manufacturers and shall be made of high impact rigid PVC and shall comply with UL94 (Tests for
flammability of plastic materials) Class 94 V-O. The colour of the PVC doors shall be selected from the
following colour range :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

BS 18C31
BS 10B15
BS 00A01
BS 08C33
BS 06D45

(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)

BS 24C33
BS 00A05
BS 04B17
BS 08C31
BS 14C31

Provide the above colour samples to the SO Rep for selection of colour of PVC doors.
Ironmongery to all PVC swing doors shall be as specified in subclause 16.4(F) "PVC Swing Doors".
15.16

CELLULAR PVC FOLDING DOOR

Provide and install cellular PVC folding doors as shown in the Drawings. The door shall be complete with
PVC door frame, integrated concealed central folding mechanism, hinges, door handles, door catch; and
recessed lockset. The door shall be able to be folded to one side. No gap shall be visible between the
joint of the panels in the close operation.
The cellular PVC door with PVC frame shall be obtained from approved suppliers listed in the Approved
List and shall be of high impact rigid PVC and shall comply with the technical requirements as shown in
the table below :
Test

No. of Specimens
Door Leaf

Door Frame

Requirement
(Average Value)

1.

Durometer Hardness
ASTM D2240-91 (Shore D)

70 Minimum

2.

Vicat Softening Temperature

ASTM D1525-87

75 Degrees Minimum

3.

Density/Specific Gravity
ASTM D792-91 Method A

0.65g per cm3 Minimum

4.

Flammability UL 94

Class 94V-O

5.

Chemical Resistance
- Detergent
- Household Bleach
- Urea 6%

3 Drops
Each

No stain after 1 week

2
2

1.8% Maximum
2.8% Maximum

100N Minimum

6.

7.

BLDG04/S15.DOC(12)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Water Absorption
ASTM D1037-93
- After 2 hours
- After 24 hours
Nail Pull-off Test
ASTM D1037-93
1.5mm/min crosshead speed
Nail-1.7mm diameter/29.3mm
Av length

Bldg Spec
Page 15-13
15.16

CELLULAR PVC FOLDING DOOR (CONT'D)

The colour of the doors shall be of approved timber grain finish or be selected from the following colour
range :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

BS 18C31
BS 10B15
BS 00A01
BS 08C33
BS 06D45

(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)

BS 24C33
BS 00A05
BS 04B17
BS 08C31
BS 14C31

Provide samples of the specified colour range to the SO Rep for selection of colour for the PVC door, door
frame, handles and all ironmongery.
15.17

NON FIRE-RATED SOLID TIMBER VENEERED ENTRANCE DOORS WITH DECORATIVE INLAYS
TO FLATS, SOLID TIMBER VENEERED WITH DECORATIVE INLAYS BEDROOM DOORS,
TIMBER FLUSH DOORS TO SERVICE DUCTS, TIMBER FLUSH DOORS WITH FIXED TIMBER
LOUVRES TO SERVICE DUCTS
The non fire-rated solid timber veneered entrance doors with decorative inlays to flats, solid timber
veneered with decorative inlays bedroom doors, timber flush doors to service ducts and timber flush
doors with fixed timber louvres to service ducts shall be certified under the PSB Product Listing Scheme
Class 1A or PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1B.

15.18

SOLID TIMBER VENEERED DOORS WITH

DECORATIVE INLAY TO BEDROOM

15.18.1

General Requirements
All bedroom doors to be provided to residential units shall be solid timber veneered doors with decorative
inlays. Such doors shall be installed complete with mild steel door frames, door frame fixing and
ironmongery.
The thickness of the door panels shall be approximately 38mm to fit into the rebate of the door frame
profile. The Contractor shall make provision for at least three design patterns for approval and selection by
the SO Rep. The type and colour of the timber veneers and decorative inlays shall be approved by the SO
Rep. The Contractor shall check with the SO Rep on the actual quantity of each design to be installed.

15.18.2

Shop Drawings And Samples

Before commencement of the work, provide workshop drawings for approval by the SO Rep. A complete
sample shall be installed on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.

15.18.3

Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".

15.18.4

Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 Timber
Doors.

BLDG04/S15.DOC(13)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 15-14
15.19

SOLID TIMBER VENEERED DOORS WITH

DECORATIVE INLAY TO BATH/WC

15.19.1

General Requirements
All doors to bath/wc of residential units shall be shall be solid timber veneered doors with decorative
inlays. Such doors shall be installed complete with mild steel door frames, door frame fixing and
ironmongery.
The thickness of the door panels shall be approximately 38mm to fit into the rebate of the door frame
profile. The Contractor shall make provision for at least three design patterns for approval and selection by
the SO Rep. The type and colour of the timber veneers and decorative inlays shall be approved by the SO
Rep. The Contractor shall check with the SO Rep on the actual quantity of each design to be installed.

15.19.2

Shop Drawings and Samples

Before commencement of the work, provide workshop drawings for approval by the SO Rep. A complete
sample shall be installed on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.

15.19.3

Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 Timber Doors.

15.19.4

Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 Timber
Doors.

15.19.5

Ironmongery For Solid Timber Veneered Doors

With Decorative Inlays
The ironmongery items for each door leaf of shall be solid timber veneered doors with decorative inlays :

15.19.6

3 nos.

102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball bearing
complete with matching finish screws;

1 no.

Posse J4LA630-AB or YTL LH630AB or Accord J4LA630-AB or other approved antique

brass finish lever handle lockset with emergency release on the outside and thumb turn on
the inside and solid brass lever handles on both sides.

Rubber Stopper
Provide and fix 25mm diameter by 30 mm thick rubber stopper to the glazed wall tile surface of every
bath/wc against which the door opens in a position effective in stopping the door from damaging the wall
tiles. Fix the rubber stopper with stainless steel screw and raw plug.

15.20

TIMBER LOUVRED DOOR AND TIMBER DOOR FRAME

FOR SERVICE CLOSET
Provide and fix timber louvred doors and door frames to service closets as shown in the Drawings. The
timber species used in the construction of the louvred doors and door frames shall be Nyatoh or other
approved. For each door leaf, provide and fix approved nickel plated cabinet spring hinges and approved
timber cabinet door knobs. The number of hinges and door knobs shall be as shown in the Drawings.
Unless otherwise specified, the louvred doors and door frames shall be finished with a minimum of two
coats of wood stain and three coats of clear varnish as specified.

BLDG04/S15.DOC(14)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 15-15
15.20.1

Surface Preparation
All pin holes and recesses on the main entrance door, bedroom door and bath/wc door surfaces shall be
filled and stopped with putty. The door surfaces shall be properly sanded smooth by mechanical means
and cleaned prior to the application of wood varnish.

15.20.2

Wood Varnish
The door surfaces shall be finished off-site under a factory environment with a minimum of two coats of
wood stain and three coats of clear varnish, in semi-gloss finish or other approved finish. The colour of the
wood stain/dye shall be approved by the SO Rep. The wood varnish shall comply with the requirements as
specified hereunder :

Test

Test Method

Substrate

Application
Method/Film
Thickness

Requirements

Varnish Only
a)

Condition in
container

SS 5 Part B4:1987

NA

NA

No coagulation,
precipitation, or
separation of
components, free
from foreign
particles;

b)

Keeping
qualities

SS 5 Part B6:1987

NA

NA

No coagulation,
precipitation, or
separation of
components, free
from foreign
particles;

c)

Fineness of
grind

SS 5 Part B13:1987

NA

NA

Maximum 30
microns;

d)

Dry film
thickness

SS 5 Part B1:1985
(Method 5)

Burnished
tinplate

3 coats by brush

Minimum 50
microns;

e)

Surface
drying time

SS 5 Part D2:1985

Burnished
tinplate

Metered bar/
wft 50 microns

2 hrs maximum;

f)

Through dry
time

ISO 9117:1990

Burnished
tinplate

Metered bar/
wft 50 microns

6 hrs maximum;

g)

Gloss at
60 deg.

SS 5 Part E1:1985

Glass plate

Metered bar/
wft 50 microns

25 - 50 gloss units;

h)

Flash point

SS Part B15: 1987

i)

Washability

SS 5 Part F5: 1992

Burnished
Glass

Metered bar/
wft 80 microns

3000 cycles with no

wear-off;

j)

Scratch
resistance

SS 5 Part F2: 1988

Burnished
tinplate

Metered bar/
dft 25 microns

Minimum 1000 g;

k)

Accelerated
weathering
(500 h dry
cycle)

SS 5 Part G4: 1992

Burnished
tinplate

Metered bar/dft
25 microns

Maximum gloss
loss 30%;

l)

Mildew
resistance

SS 150 Appendix C

BLDG04/S15.DOC(15)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

NA

NA

NA

NA

23C minimum

No growth;

Bldg Spec
Page 15-16
15.20.2

Wood Varnish (Contd)

Test

Test Method

Substrate

Application
Method/Film
Thickness

Requirements

Stain Only
m) Condition in
container

SS 5 Part B4: 1987

NA

NA

No coagulation,
precipitation, or
separation of
components, free
from foreign
particles;

n)

Fineness of
grind

SS 5 Part B13: 1987

NA

NA

Maximum 30
microns;

o)

Flash point

SS Part B15: 1987

NA

NA

23C minimum

Varnish Over
Stain
p)

Application
properties
(brushing)

SS 5 Part B9: 1987

Kapur wood

2 coats stain,
1 coat varnish by
brush

Easy application,
good levelling.
Dried film to show
no excessive brush
mars, sagging,
running, streaking
or cracking;

q)

Cross-cut
adhesion

ASTM D3359 95a

Kapur wood

2 coats stain,
3 coats varnish
by brush

< 5% tape-off

r)

MEK
double rubs

ASTM D5402 - 93

Kapur wood

2 coats stain,
3 coats varnish
by brush

75 double rubs
minimum;

s)

Humid-dry
cycle

ASTM 3459 - 87

Kapur wood

2 coats stain,
3 coats varnish
by brush

< 25% gloss loss

after 5 cycles;

t)

Chemical
resistance*

ASTM D1308 - 87

Kapur wood

2 coats stain,
3 coats varnish
by brush

No changes for any

of the chemicals
tested

* Chemicals used in the Chemical resistance test :

Shoe polish (Kiwi brand black solid wax polish) for 15 mins;
Bleach (5.5% sodium hypochlorite) for 15 mins;
Vinegar (5% acidity) for 30 mins;
Ethanol (95% solution) for 30 mins;
Detergent solution (3% based on AAMA 2604-98 Clause 7.7.4 preparation) for 30 mins.

BLDG04/S15.DOC(16)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 15-17
15.20.3

Protection Of The Timber Doors

The factory varnished doors shall be covered by protection materials at the factory before delivered to the
Site. The protection materials shall be adequate to cushion the door surface against impact or knocking
during transportation and installation and to prevent staining. It shall not be removed, unless instructed by
the SO Rep, till the flats are fully completed.
The protection details shall be subjected to approval by the SO Rep. The cushioning material for the door
surface could be cardboard, bubblefoam or other suitable materials of adequate thickness. The materials
used, including the adhesion tape, shall not cause staining to the doors in wet and dry conditions. The
design of the protection shall allow the protection material to remain intact during and after the installation
of the lock set and hinges at Site.

15.20.4

Storage Of Doors
The Contractor shall also be required to provide one storage area per floor for the proper storage of the
main entrance doors, bedroom doors and bath/wc doors. The storage areas shall be kept in a dry
condition. The doors shall not be installed earlier than one month before the handing over inspection,
unless instructed otherwise by the SO Rep. They shall be brought to the various units just prior to their
installations.

15.21

TREATMENT OF ROOF TIMBER

All roof timber shall be treated with "Solignum", "Creosote" or other approved wood preservative applied
with brush in two coats. Timber may also be treated with approved pressurised process.

15.22

FIXING OF TIMBER WALL PLATE

Wall plates shall be fixed with 13mm diameter bolts cast 100mm into RC beams spaced at maximum 1.5m
centres.

15.23

CEILING
Where shown ceiling material to dwelling units shall be of approved 1200mm x 2400mm x 12mm thick
non-combustible gypsum board. Boards shall be fixed to ceiling joists and noggings with 38mm
galvanised steel clout nails at maximum 150mm centre at all edges and intermediate fixing (along the
centre of the board) of galvanised steel clout nails shall be of maximum 300mm centres. Joints between
boards shall be covered with 38mm x 15mm nominal, moulded wood fillets at edge of wall and open joint
at intermediate joint.

15.24

INTERNAL STAIRCASE TO MAISONETTES

Provide 100mm x 50mm thick timber handrail of first quality Chengal. It shall be supported as shown in
the Drawings. The handrail shall be fixed with countersunk bolts or screw.
The Chengal treads and handrails where shown in the Drawings shall be sanded to a smooth finish before
applying sealant (to match the colour of Chengal timber) and 2 coats of semi-gloss polyurethane varnish
at minimum 24 hours interval between the two coats.

Total pages for this Section :

17

Section 16/.....
BLDG04/S15.DOC(17)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 16-1
SECTION 16
IRONMONGERY

16.1

GENERAL
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the
requirements specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it, subject to the
approval of the SO Rep. The brand names specified in the Schedule shall serve as a guide to the
respective quality and profile of ironmongery required.

16.2

FIXING
All ironmongery shall be fixed with stainless steel screws, screw driven and countersunked to form a
sound connection. Screws shall not be hammered into position. If screws are found to be hammered in,
the whole fixture shall be taken down, and refixed in accordance with the Specifications.

16.3

GRADE OF STAINLESS STEEL

Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be Grade 304 and the chemical composition
shall comply with SS 40:1988.

16.4

IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC

Unless specified otherwise the following is the Schedule of Ironmongery for flats, shops, eating houses,
kiosks and services rooms :
(A)

Half-Hour Fire-Rated Decorative Solid Timber

Entrance Doors To Flats
Refer to Clause 15.10 "Half-Hour Fire-Rated Decorative Solid Timber Entrance Doors To Flats"
including all subclauses under it.

(B)

Solid Timber Veneered Entrance Doors With Decorative Inlays To Flats

(For Non Fire-Rated Doors)
Unless specified otherwise, the ironmongery items for non fire-rated entrance door shall be :
(i)

4 no.

102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball
bearing complete with matching finish screws per door leaf.

(ii)

1 no.

"YTL" N28FIR-AT-US5; or "Accord" M4L10AB or "Posse" M4L10AB; or other

approved mortice lever on backplate lockset with 5-pin single cylinder and thumb
turn (key on the outside and thumb turn on the inside) and solid brass lever
handles on plates on both sides. The finish shall be antique brass. The lever
handle lockset shall be installed in a manner to clear the metal gate lockset.

(iii)

1 no.

Brass rebated parts.

(iv)

1 no.

200mm x 20mm wide brass lever action flush bolt in satin finish.

(v)

1 no.

300mm x 20mm wide brass lever action flush bolt in satin finish.

(vi)

1 no.

Antique brass finish door viewer :

(a) "YTL" 200; or
(b) "Union" 5610-180AB/BB; or
(c) "Accord" 2170 AB-A; or
(d) other approved.

The position shall be as shown in the Drawings but ensure that the door viewer shall not be
obstructed by the entrance grille gate.

BLDG04/S16.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 16-2
16.4

IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D)

(B)

Solid Timber Veneered Entrance Doors With Decorative

Inlays To Flats (For Non Fire-Rated Doors) (Cont'd)
(vii)

1 no.

Solid brass magnetic door holder :

(a) "YTL" DH-027; or
(b) "Accord" DH-027AB; or
(c) "Nikon" DH-027AB; or
(d) EFCO; or
(e) other approved.

The door holder shall be placed at the centre of bottom rail and its position shall preferably
be closer to the edge of the door subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The door holder
shall be in antique brass finish.
(C)

Solid Timber Veneered Bedroom Doors With Decorative Inlays

Unless specified otherwise, the ironmongery items for each door leaf of solid timber veneered
doors with decorative inlays shall be :
3 no. 102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball bearing
complete with matching finish screws;
1 no. Posse J4LA600-AB or YTL LH600AB or Accord J4LA600-AB or other approved antique
brass finish lever handle lockset with 5-pin single cylinder and thumb turn (key on the
outside and thumb turn on the inside) and solid brass lever handles on both sides. The
finish shall be in antique brass.
1 no. Solid brass magnetic door holder
(a)
"YTL" DH-027; or
(b)
"Accord" DH-027AB; or
(c)
"Nikon" DH-027AB; or
(d)
EFCO; or
(e)
other approved
The door holder shall be placed at the centre of bottom rail and its position shall preferably be
closer to the edge of the door subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The door holder shall be in
antique brass finish.

(D)

Store Room Doors In Flat

For each door leaf of store room doors in flats :

BLDG04/S16.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

(i)

3 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel (Grade 304) butt hinges,

thickness 1.7mm 0.2mm

(ii)

1 no.

Stainless steel cup handle passage latch :

(a) "Accord" CH-382; or
(b) "Trident" CH-2300; or
(c) "Miwa" CMC; or
(d) "YTL" 85;
(e) or other approved.

Bldg Spec
Page 16-3
16.4

IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D)

(E)

Store Room Doors (Under Staircase) In Executive Maisonette

For each door leaf of store room doors (under staircase) in executive maisonettes) :

(F)

(i)

1 no.

Stainless steel cup handle passage latch :

(a) "Accord" CH-382; or
(b) "Trident" CH-2300; or
(c) "Miwa" CMC; or
(d) "YTL" 85;
(e) or other approved.

(ii)

Number of 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel (Grade 304) butt hinges shall be as
shown in the Drawings. The thickness of butt hinges shall be 1.7mm 0.2mm.

PVC Swing Doors

For each door leaf of PVC swing doors shown with mild steel door frame :
(i)

3 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.5mm 0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges

(ii)

1 no.

Privacy knobset with emergency release :

(a) "Union" 9301-SS; or
(b) "Goal" US 4E; or
(c) "Accord" C 130SS; or
(d) "Tesa" 2503 CM; or
(e) "Lucky" Model 1030; or
(f) "Posse" 130-SS; or other approved

For each door leaf of PVC swing doors to toilet of kiosks, lock-up shops, shops and eating houses
shown without door frame :

(G)

(i)

2 no.

2.64mm thick (0.14mm) 5052 aluminium alloy hinge and cotter pin 0.8mm thick x
25mm long nylon bush.

(ii)

1 no.

80mm brass cabin hook and eye.

Swing Door To Service Balcony And Courtyard

Provide and fix to each door leaf of swing door to service balcony and courtyard, the following
ironmongery :

(H)

(i)

2 no.

122mm x 96mm x 3mm thick or 3 no. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm thick stainless steel
butt hinges in black or bronze colour finish. Tolerance for thickness of stainless
steel hinges shall be 0.2mm.

(ii)

1 no.

"Faultless" C8903 or "Lucky" Model 1711 or "Posse" C111AZ or other approved

double cylinder cylindrical lockset with key both sides. The lockset shall be in
bronze colour finish.

Door Stopper To Bath/W.C., Service Balcony And Courtyard

Provide and fix a 25mm diameter by 20mm thick rubber stopper to the glazed wall tile surface of
every bath/w.c. against which the door opens in a position effective in stopping the door from
damaging the wall tile. Fixing shall be with 25mm stainless steel or non corrosive screw and rawl
plug. Provide and fix similar 25mm diameter by 20mm thick rubber stopper for swing door to
service balcony and to the wall surface of courtyard.

(I)

Metal Grille Gates To Flat Entrances

Refer to Clause 18.24 "Metal Grille Gates To Flat Entrances".

BLDG04/S16.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 16-4
16.4

IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D)

(J)

Rear Door Of Shops/Eating Houses

For each door leaf of rear doors of shops/eating houses :
(i)

3 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.8mm 0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges

(ii)

1 no.

Rebated 5 pin double cylinder mortice lockset :

(a) "Tesa" R300 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever handles;
or
(b) "Abloy" 2390 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever handles;
or
(c) "Union" 675-41-278SS with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever
handles; or
(d) "Yale" 138L/520.50/210.62 with brass chrome plated lever handles;
or other approved.

(K)

(iii)

1 no.

90mm x 27mm stainless steel square shoot bolt.

(iv)

1 no.

240mm x 27mm stainless steel square shoot bolt.

(v)

1 no.

100mm stainless steel hook and eye.

Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surfaced Finished Composite Doors To Switch Room,

PUB Switch Room, Store Room, Pump Room, Refuse Room, Bulky Refuse Area,
And Staircase Access To Main Roof
Refer to Clause 15.11 "Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors To Switch
Room, PUB Switch Room, Store Room, Pump Room, Refuse Room, Bulky Refuse Area And
Staircase Access To Main Roof" including all subclauses under it.

(L)

Ironmongery For Doors (Non Fire-Rated) To PUB Switch Room,

Switch Room, Pump Room, Store Room And Bulky Refuse Area
For doors (non-fire rated) to PUB switch rooms, switch rooms, pump rooms, store rooms and bulky
refuse areas, provide and fix ironmongery in accordance with the following schedule :
(a)

Double Leaf
For double leaf :

BLDG04/S16.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm

0.2mm for each door leaf.

(ii)

2 no.

Stainless steel locking eyes (4mm thick minimum) with hairline finish.

(iii)

1 no.

"Abloy" PL 230 padlock under master key; or "Union" 3122/2 PL padlock

under master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master key; or other
approved.

(iv)

1 no.

"Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless

steel cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved.
Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external.

(v)

1 no.

"Nikon" 225mm x 25mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other
approved.

(vi)

1 no.

"Nikon 150mm x 25mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other
approved.

Bldg Spec
Page 16-5
16.4

IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D)

(L)

Ironmongery For Doors (Non Fire-Rated) To PUB Switch Room,

Switch Room, Pump Room, Store Room And Bulky Refuse Area (Cont'd)
(b)

Single Leaf
For single leaf :

(M)

(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm

0.2mm.

(ii)

2 no.

Stainless steel locking eyes (4mm thick minimum) with hairline finish.

(iii)

1 no.

"Abloy" PL 230 padlock under master key; or "Union" 3122/2 PL padlock

under master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master key; or other
approved.

(iv)

1 no.

"Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC

stainless steel cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other
approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external.

Doors To MDF Room And Telecoms Equipment Room (Non-Fire Rated)

For doors (non-fire rated) to MDF rooms and Telecoms Equipment rooms, provide and fix :
(a)

Double Leaf
For double leaf doors :

(b)

(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8 mm

0.2mm for each door leaf.

(ii)

2 no.

240mm x 27mm width grade 304 stainless steel high barrel shoot bolt.

(iii)

1 no.

"Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781k single

cylinder and thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale"
523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt with construction keys; or "Falcon" D441US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn deadbolt with construction
keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable of being operated by
PBTS master key.

(iv)

2 no.

"Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC

stainless steel cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other
approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external.

Single Leaf
For single leaf doors :
(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8 mm

0.2mm for each door leaf.

(ii)

1 no.

"Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781k single

cylinder and thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale"
523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt with construction keys; or "Falcon" D441US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn deadbolt with construction
keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable of being operated by
PBTS master key.

(iii)

2 no.

"Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC

stainless steel cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other
approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external.

The Contractor shall attend the handover of the MDF Room and Telecoms Equipment Room for
the changing of lockset from construction keys to master keys.

BLDG04/S16.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 16-6
16.4

IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D)

(N)

Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors

To Service Ducts For Flats
Refer to Clause 15.12 "Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors To
Service Ducts For Flats" including all subclauses under it.

(O)

Ironmongery For Non-Fire Rated Doors To Service Ducts For Flats

For non-fire rated doors to service ducts for flats, provide and fix all ironmongery in accordance
with the following :
(a)

Single Leaf
For single leaf doors :

(b)

(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm

0.2mm.

(ii)

1 no.

"Accord" CH-382; or "Trident" CH-2300; or "Miwa" CMC; or "YTL" 85; or

"Union" RP003SS/2677SC/4.00; or other approved stainless steel cup
handles passage latch with cup handle on both sides.

Double Leaf
For double leaf doors :

(P)

(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm

0.2mm for each door leaf.

(ii)

1 no.

"Accord" CH-382; or "Trident" CH-2300; or "Miwa" CMC; or "YTL" 85; or

"Union" RP003SS/2677SC/4.00; or other approved stainless steel cup
handles passage latch with cup handle on both sides.

(iii)

1 no.

Brass rebated parts.

(iv)

1 no.

200 mm x 20 mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish
(box type).

(v)

1 no.

300 mm x 20 mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish
(box type).

Refuse Chute Aluminium Inspection Cover

For each door leaf of refuse chute aluminium inspection covers :

(Q)

(i)

3 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.5mm 0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges.

(ii)

1 no.

Stout hasp and staple of approved design.

(iii)

1 no.

Padlock "Union" 3104-50mm brass or "Yale" 110-30 or "Abloy" PL 220 shackle

or other approved; with master key.

Access Trap Door To Roof

For each door leaf of access trap doors to roofs :

BLDG04/S16.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

(i)

1 no.

Stout hasp and staple.

(ii)

1 no.

Padlock "Union" 3142 or "Yale" 110.60 or "Abloy" PL 3030; or other approved.

Bldg Spec
Page 16-7
16.4

IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D)

(R)

Doors To Electrical Substation

For doors to electrical substations, refer to the Drawings.

(S)

Doors To Toilet Of Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound

For each door leaf of toilet doors of utilities centres/dustbin compounds :

(T)

(i)

3 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.5mm 0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges.

(ii)

1 no.

Private knobset with emergency release :

(a) "Union" 9301-SS; or
(b) "Goal" US 4E; or
(c) "Ashin" Locks ref. 612/SST; or
(d) "Tesa" 2503cm; or
(e) "Unimaster" Model No. 7001B; or
(f) "Lucky" Model No. 1030; or
(g) "Posse" 130; or other approved

(iii)

1 no.

25mm diameter by 20mm thick rubber stopper to the wall surface against which
the door opens in a position effective in stopping the door from damaging the
wall tile.

Doors To Store Of Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound

For each door leaf of doors of stores to utilities centres/dustbin compounds :
(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.8mm 0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges.

(ii)

1 no.

5 pin double cylinder mortice lockset :

(a) "Tesa" R300 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever handles;
or
(b) "Abloy" 2390 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel handle; or
(c) "Yale" 138L/520.50/210.62 with brass chrome plated lever handles;
or
(d) "Union" 675-41-278SS with stainless steel or brass chrome plated
handles; or other approved.

(U)

Doors To Fuel Store of Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound

For doors to fuel stores to utilities centres/dustbin compounds :
(a)

Single Leaf Door

Ironmongery shall be similar to sub-clause 16.4(T) "Doors To Store Of Utilities
Centre/Dustbin Compound".

(b)

Double Leaf Door

(i)

BLDG04/S16.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.8mm 0.2mm thick stainless steel butt

hinges for each door.

Bldg Spec
Page 16-8
16.4

IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D)

(U)

Doors To Fuel Store of Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound (Cont'd)

(b)

Double Leaf Door

(ii)

1 no.

Rebated 5 pin double cylinder mortice lockset :

(a) "Tesa" R300 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever
handles; or
(b) "Abloy" 2390 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel handle;
or
(c) "Yale" 138L/520.50/210.62 with brass chrome plated lever
handles;
(d) "Union" 675-41-278SS with stainless steel or brass chrome plated
handles; or other approved.

(iii)
(V)

2 no.

240mm x 27mm wide stainless steel barrel shoot bolt.

Trap Door To Roof Of Booster Pump Room

For each door leaf of trap doors to roofs of booster pump rooms :

(W)

(i)

1 no.

Stout hasp and staple.

(ii)

1 no.

Padlock "Union" 3142 or "Yale" 110.60 or "Abloy" PL 3030; or

other approved.

Louvred Door To Staircase Access To Main Roof

For each door leaf of louvred doors to staircase accesses to main roofs :

(X)

(i)

3 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel (Grade 304) butt hinges, thickness
1.7mm 0.2mm

(ii)

1 no.

Passage Knob Latchset :

(a) "Union" 9302-SS; or
(b) "Goal" US 1E; or
(c) "Ashin" Locks ref. 613/P/SST; or
(d) "Lucky" Model 1082; or
(e) "Tesa" 2505CM; or
(f) "Unimaster" Model No. 7001P; or
(g) "Posse" 182-SS; or other approved.

Escape Door At Consumer Switch Room

(Where The Length Of Switchroom Exceeds 6.5m)
Where escape door at the consumer switchroom is shown in the Drawings, provide and fix the
ironmongery as follows :
For each door leaf :

BLDG04/S16.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

(i)

4 no.

102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel grade 304 butt hinges.

(ii)

1 no.

"Accord 376"; or other approved single panic bolt. The panic bolt shall be of
aluminium die cast body with extruded aluminium guides, steel tube shoots and
cross bars and shall be in silver colour finish.

Bldg Spec
Page 16-9
16.4

IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D)

(Y)

Ironmongery For Doors To Lift Machine Rooms

For doors to lift machine rooms, provide and fix ironmongery in accordance with the followlng
schedule :

16.5

(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm

0.2mm

(ii)

1no.

"Accord" 0706C/1404/1591B or other approved half cylinder mortice lockset with

staniless steel lever handles on rose on both sides. It shall comply with
CP2:2000. The door shall be openable from the outside only by the use of a key
and shall not require a key to open it from within the machine room.

(iii)

1no.

"Dorma" TS 73 or "Tiki" 90 series or "NHN" model 1082 or "New Star" 5002 or

"Accord" 93 or "YTL" 800 or "Union" or other approved slim line door closer with
cushioned back checking action.

KEYS FOR LOCKSETS

Unless otherwise specified, 3 sets of keys shall be provided for each lockset provided and installed. These
keys shall be handed over to the Employer upon Substantial Completion of the Works.

16.6

LOCKSETS TO PUMP ROOM, STORE ROOM (FIRST STOREY),

BULKY REFUSE AREA, REFUSE ROOM, SWITCH ROOM,
LIFT MOTOR ROOM, STAIRCASE ACCESS TO MAIN ROOF
The locksets to pump rooms, store rooms (first storey), bulky refuse areas, refuse rooms, switch rooms,
lift motor rooms and staircase accesses to main roofs shall be provided under the master key and keyaliked system.

16.7

MASTER KEY FOR PUB

Padlocks and locks provided to the doors of all rooms which the PUB and/or PowerGrid and/or SPSL
need access into shall be under one of the following master key series :
(a)

"Abloy"

MK911047; or

(b)

"Union"

G1HBG; or

(c)

"Yale"

MK48; or other approved

Total pages for this Section :

Section 17/.....

BLDG04/S16.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 17-1
SECTION 17
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
17.1

STRUCTURAL STEEL
Grade 43A Steel (Mild Steel) to BS 4360 shall be used for all structural members unless otherwise stated.
The dimensions, form, thickness, weight and tolerance of all rolled shape, the quality and strength of all
members, joint connections, bolts, nuts, washers, studs, welds and electrodes used and their design,
installation and applications shall conform to the requirements of the latest BS 5950 or other relevant
British and/or Singapore Standards. Unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings, hot finished structural
steel sections shall be used.
All materials used shall be new, of the best quality available and shall be approved by the SO Rep.
Defective, substandard or undersized members shall be rejected.

17.2

QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS
Only qualified welders shall be allowed to perform welding work for structural steelworks. Provide the SO
Rep with the names of the welders to be employed on the steelwork, together with certification that each
of these welders has passed qualification tests conducted by competent authorities using Welder
Procedures covered in BS 4871 or their equivalent. Welders shall have passed the qualification test
within the preceding 12-month period.
If required by the SO Rep, submit test samples made by the welders to be employed. Arrange for
any welder to re-take the test at the Contractor's own costs and expenses when, in the opinion
of the SO Rep, the work of the welder creates a reasonable doubt as to the proficiency of the welder. Recertification of the welder shall be made to the SO Rep only after the welder has taken and passed the
required test.
The SO Rep may require welded joints to be tested with radiographic or other suitable methods at the
Contractor's costs and expenses. Joints with defective welds shall be rejected.
Should any two weld positions from the work of any welder show defective welds, such welder shall be
permanently removed from the work.

17.3

FABRICATION
Check all dimensions in the Drawings before fabrication and any discrepancy shall be reported to the SO
Rep. Steelwork shall be fabricated to the required details as shown in the Drawings with sound
workmanship acceptable by the SO Rep. All steel members shall be cut to exact lengths and with ends
finished true and square so as to provide a good bed or joint.
Structural steelwork shall be fabricated and assembled in the shop to the greatest extent possible and
shall be performed by qualified mechanics or welders skilled in the type of work required.
Shearing, chipping, punching and welding of members shall be done carefully and accurately in
accordance with the Drawings. All burrs and shavings produced by the drilling or reaming operation shall
be removed.
Stiffeners shall be fitted neatly and tightly against flanges with ends milled or ground to secure an even
and full bearing against the flange angles. Sole plates of beams and girders shall have full contact with
the flanges.
Bearing surface shall be planed to true bed and abutting surfaces be closely fitted to ensure full bearing
and close contact between assembled members.
Unless otherwise indicated, all exposed finished surfaces shall be straight and smooth. Exposed welds
shall be ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
All holes shall be accurately marked off from templates, precisely cut, drilled or punched at right angles to
the surface of the metal and shall not be made or enlarged by burning. Holes shall be cleaned of burrs or
rough edges. Holes for bolts shall not exceed the external diameter of bolts by more than 1.5mm and
shall be well aligned to permit bolts to be freely placed in position. Oversized or misaligned bolt holes
shall be rejected.

BLDG04/S17.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 17-2
17.4

STEELWORK DELIVERED TO SITE

Members delivered to site shall be straight, free from warping, twisting, distortion and accidental damages.
Defective and substandard members shall be rejected and removed from the Site.
All parts of steelwork shall be distinctly marked according to the marking as shown in the Drawings.
Care shall be taken at all times in unloading, handling, stacking and storing of steelwork to avoid bending,
twisting or otherwise distorting the steel members.

17.5

ERECTION PROCEDURE
The method and sequence of erection of structural steelwork shall be duly approved by the SO Rep.
The presence of any temporary materials, falsework, braces, etc, required to ensure stability and safety of
structures shall be included in the proposed erection and shall be subsequently provided during erection.

17.6

FIELD INSTALLATION
Field installation shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Shop fabricated members subjected to
possible damage shall be braced and carefully handled to prevent distortions or other damages. After
assembly, the various members forming part of a complete frame or structure shall be aligned and
adjusted accurately before being fastened.
Splicing of members shall be permitted only where indicated in the Drawings. Fastening of splices of
compression members shall be done after the abutting surfaces have been brought completely into close
contact.
Bearing surfaces and surfaces that will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members are
assembled and re-primed where exposed.
Drift pins may be used only to bring together the structural parts and shall not be used in such a manner
as to distort or damage the metal.
Member installed before concrete is placed shall be properly braced to prevent distortion by pressure of
concrete. Bracing shall be checked and maintained during concreting operation.
The use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors shall be strictly prohibited under
any circumstance.

17.7

ERECTION
Provide for all tools, machinery, cranage, equipment, falsework, temporary braces and everything
necessary for the proper erection of the steelwork. Erection equipment shall be suitable and safe for the
work and the workers.
Assembled frames or structures shall be neatly and carefully hoisted into position, securely and sufficiently
bolted or tack-welded and temporarily braced as required so as to make adequate provision for all
erection stresses and conditions including those due to erection equipment and its operation.
Bracing members, either temporary or permanent, shall be provided as required as soon as practicable
and left in place as long as they are required for safety and stability.
No member of the structure shall be finally bolted, welded or permanently connected until the whole or a
major section of the steelwork is erected, checked for alignment, level, plumb and correctness and
approved by the SO Rep.
Permanent connection shall be carried out and completed strictly in accordance with the Drawings as
soon as practicable after the approval of the SO Rep, with due care being taken not to interfere with the
existing steelwork in any way.

BLDG04/S17.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 17-3
17.7

ERECTION (CONTD)
Safe working platform and accesses shall be provided for erection, welding, bolting and inspection
purposes. The HDB's Safety Unit shall be consulted on the safety features of the platform.
Care shall be taken to remove any temporary braces, erection clips, etc to avoid any unsightliness upon
removal. All tack welds shall be ground smooth and holes shall be filled with weld metal and smoothened
by grinding. All tubular members shall be sealed with cover plate to prevent access of moisture to the
inside of the members.
Immediately upon erection, all abraded surfaces previously shop-primed shall be touched up with
approved priming paint.
Erection of roofing materials, if any, can only be proceeded when all steelwork for a block is completed
and sag rod, if any, is effectively installed in purlins and rigidly tied back to the apex of the roof.

17.8

STANCHION BASES
Stanchion bases and bearing plates as provided under columns, beams and girders or resting walls or
footing shall be fabricated, installed and set accurately to the required level alignment with full bearing
contact on support in accordance with the Drawings.
Hold down bolts shall be cast together with reinforced concrete support. They shall be correctly placed
and firmly held in position by template and accurately checked for level, alignment and centering before
concreting. The bolts shall be protected to ensure that they are not subsequently bent, distorted or
tampered with.
Base plates and bearing plates shall be supported and aligned on levelling screws, steel wedges or shims
to correct elevations. After the supporting members have been plumbed and properly positioned and the
anchor nuts tightened, the entire bearing area under the plates shall be set accurately using approved
type of high-strength non-shrink grout in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions.
Surface to receive grout shall be cleaned and moistened thoroughly immediately before grout is placed.
Exposed surfaces of grout shall be moist cured for 7 days. Wedges and shims shall be cut-off, flush with
edge of column base and bearing plates and shall be left in place.

17.9

BOLTING
All structural bolts as shown in the Drawings prefixed with the letter 'M' for metric series shall conform with
the following British Standards :
Type of Bolt
Black Bolt
High Strength Bolt
High Strength Friction Grip Bolt

Abbreviation
Black
HS
HSFG

Standards
BS 4190
BS 3692
BS 4604

Nuts and washers of the quality and strength compatible to the type of bolts specified shall be used.
All joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the bolt heads, nuts or washers, shall be free of scale, dust,
grease, paint and other foreign material that would prevent solid seating of the members.
All HSFG Bolts shall be installed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions.
All bolts shall be well screwed tight with at least one clear thread projecting beyond the nut when tightened
up. Care shall be taken in getting the nut as tight as possible without stripping the thread. If after
tightening, a nut or bolt is slackened off for any reason, the bolt, nut and washer shall be discarded.
Where another face of the bolted parts has a slope, a smooth bevelled washer shall be used to
compensate for lack of parallelism.
Bolts and nuts in a group of bolts shall be tightened in a staggered sequence from center outwards.
Bolted parts shall fit solidly together when assembled and shall not be separated by gaskets or any
interposed compressible material.

BLDG04/S17.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 17-4
17.10

WELDING
Welding shall be done by an electric arc process complying with BS 5135 and by qualified welders to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep. Welding shall be done in the shop unless otherwise shown or specified.
Electrodes shall be of approved type complying with BS 639 and shall be kept in a dry store in unbroken
packets.
Surface and edge of metal to be welded shall be accurately prepared in accordance with BS 5135 and
shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint and any other foreign material that would prevent
proper welding or produce objectional fumes while welding is being done.
All welding shall be carried out in accordance with the welding term and symbols shown in the Drawings
and conform with BS 499. For unspecified welding, butt weld shall be full penetration weld with size equal
to the thickness of the members to be butt joined and fillet weld shall be 6mm fillet weld all around the
member.
Parts to be fillet welded shall be brought in as close contact as practicable. The effective throat thickness
of fillet weld shall not be less than those specified in the Drawings and all weld terminating at the ends or
sides of members shall be returned continuously around the corners for a distance of not less than twice
the size of the weld.
Butt weld shall have correct weld preparation for the particular type of weld. The finished butt weld shall
be proud of the surface of the parent material by an amount not exceeding 10% of the throat thickness of
the weld and subsequently dressed off by grinding.
Fillet and butt welds shall be made with such a number of passes as may be necessary to ensure sound
thoroughly fused joints and with each deposit not exceeding 3mm of weld for each pass. Preceding layers
shall be thoroughly cleaned, wire-brushed to remove scale, slag before succeeding layers are placed.
Welds exposed in finished work shall be ground, dressed smooth and flush with adjacent surface.
Welding work shall be carried out on a flat position whenever practicable. In assembling and jointing parts
of a structure, the procedure and sequence of welding shall be such as to minimize shrinkage stresses
and needless distortion.

17.11

PAINTING (STRUCTURAL STEELWORK)

All steel area to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned, scraped, wire-brushed, free from dust, rust and
scale and shall be primed with a coat of lead and chromate free primer before erection, except for
galvanised steel area.
All galvanised steel area to be painted shall first be given one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer, then
primed with one coat of lead and chromate free primer of approved quality before erection.
Where surface treatment is specified in the Drawings, blast clean the surface to BS4232, application of
one coat of zinc-rich epoxy primer to the Manufacturer's specification within 4 hours of blast cleaning and
two coats of Zinc Phosphate Priming Paint, one coat in the Workshop and one coat on the Site, to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep. Submit details of surface treatment to the SO Rep at least two weeks before
blast cleaning.
Steel members to be encased in concrete, connecting surfaces using HSFG Bolts and areas to be welded
shall be free from scale, dust, grease and shall not be painted.
After completion of erection, the steelwork shall be painted with at least one undercoat and one finishing
coat of the types and colours approved by the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S17.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 17-5
17.12

PROTECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS

Galvanised structural steel members and components as shown in the Drawings shall be hot-dip
galvanised to SS 117. The Contractor shall obtain galvanising treatment service for structural steel
members and components only from those Approved Galvanisers Listed in HDB List Of Approved
Materials And Suppliers.
The coating weight of zinc shall conform with Table 1 of SS 117. For steel over 5mm thick, the minimum
average coating mass shall be 500g per m2 and the minimum coating mass shall be 450g per m2. For
steel between 1mm and 5mm thick, the coating mass shall be prorated from Table 1.
The coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If the coating on the galvanised steel
member does not comply with the requirements as specified, the galvanised steel member shall be
rejected.
Galvanising shall be followed by chromating as a post treatment. Store all galvanised members and
components in a dry and well ventilated place to prevent the formation of white rust on them. Small areas
of galvanised coating damaged by welding, cutting or by excessively rough treatment shall be made good
by the application of at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with a minimum of 85% zinc dust,
expressed as a percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint.
Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least two samples of the galvanised steel
member or component to be tested by a competent authority to determine the coating weight. The coating
weight shall be determined by the stripping test in accordance with SS 117. Certificates of such tests shall
be submitted to the SO Rep.
All structural steelworks and materials are subjected to inspection and testing by the SO Rep in shop and
field. The number and frequency of tests shall be determined by the SO Rep and at least 10% of the
welded joints shall be tested. However, such test and inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for furnishing satisfactory materials and work. The SO Rep reserves the right to reject steel
materials and/or workmanship which do not conform with the Specifications. The acceptance of the
SO Rep of any materials and work shall not prevent their rejection later if Defect are discovered.
The Contractor shall provide adequate facilities and bear all costs and expenses of everything necessary
for the SO Rep to inspect and test any part of the steelwork and measurement of stresses and deflection,
if required.
Any work shown to be defective shall be removed or rectified to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at the
Contractor's own costs and expenses. Notwithstanding the acceptance by the SO Rep of the rectified
work, the Contractor shall be held responsible for the soundness of the structure arising out of poor
workmanship and defective work.
The testing and inspection of welding shall conform to the following British Standards :
Type of Test
Magnetic particle flaw detection test
Penetrant flaw detection test
Ultrasonic examinations
Radiographic examinations

Standard
BS 6072
BS 6443
BS 3923
BS 2600, BS2910

Total pages for this Section :

Section 18/.....

BLDG04/S17.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-1
SECTION 18
METALWORK

18.1

GRADE OF STAINLESS STEEL

Unless as specified otherwise, the grade of stainless steel shall be Grade 304 and the chemical
composition shall comply with SS 40 : 1988.

18.2

NATURAL ANODISED ALUMINIUM

Unless specified otherwise all aluminium shall be natural anodised and the anodic coating shall be
minimum 15 microns.

18.3

BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAMED WINDOWS AND GLAZING

18.3.1

General
Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium framed windows and glazing complete with all the
relevant components to the locations as shown in the Drawings.
Such extruded aluminium frame windows shall include sliding, casement, top hung, aluminium cills and
others as shown in the Drawings.
Unless otherwise specified, all aluminium sliding and casement windows provided shall comply in all
aspects with SS 212:2000 (but excluding the modularly co-ordinating sizes).
The manufacturer/supplier of the aluminium sliding windows and casement windows shall be under PSB
Singapore Quality Mark Scheme or PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A.

18.3.2

Performance
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide only. The Contractor shall submit shop
drawings to ensure compliance with SS212:2000.

18.3.3

Material
(a)

Aluminium Alloy
All extruded aluminium members shall be fabricated from designated treated aluminium alloy
6063T4, 6063T5 or 6063T6 complying with BS 1474.

(b)

Accessories
All screws, nuts, bolts, washers, fasteners and all other accessories to be used in the fabrication of
the windows shall be stainless steel type 304 or 316 complying with BS 1449: Part 2. All screws
(except screws used to fix stainless steel hinges), bolts and other accessories which are exposed
shall be in approved matching colour. All screws used to fix stainless steel friction hinges shall be
approved stainless steel screws precoated with expoxy coating as shown in the Drawings.

(c)

Rollers, Guides And Stoppers

Rollers used shall be made of hardened synthetic resin with ball bearing at their cores. Guides
and stoppers shall also be of synthetic resin material and the colour of exposed parts shall be
black or bronze or other approved matching colour.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-2
18.3.3

Material (Cont'd)
(d)

Joints & Gaskets

All joints shall be sealed with synthetic butyl rubber and all inner frames shall have insertion of
gaskets or other air gaskets or other air-tightening materials complying with SS 212:2000. Gaskets
shall be neoprene or ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM).

(e)

Safety Device
Safety device shall be incorporated into all the glazed sliding window panels to prevent them from
jumping track and shall be in black or bronze colour or other approved matching colour.

(f)

Weather Strip
All weather strip shall be of approved neoprene or polypropylene pile or ethylene propylene diene
monomer (EPDM).

(g)

Hardware
For sliding windows, crescent lock shall be provided and shall be of stainless steel type 304 or
316, aluminium die cast or zinc die cast with double locking device. For casement and top hung
windows, the cam handles shall be of aluminium or zinc die cast. Friction hinges shall be of Grade
304 stainless steel. All crescent locks and handles shall be finished in black or other approved
matching colour.
(i)

Torque Testing Requirement For Crescent Lock

The crescent locks shall comply with the following torque requirements:

(ii)

(a)

Average torque shall achieve a minimum value of 7 Nm;

(b)

Individual torque shall not fall below 6.5 Nm.

Resistance To Wear Test Requirements For Casement Handles

The casement handles when tested in accordance with BS 6462 clause 5.2.3 shall comply
with the following requirements:

(iii)

(a)

Cam handle in fully engaged position after 35 N was removed. Requirement: pull-in
shall not be reduced to less than 0.2 mm.

(b)

Torque to turn the Fastener Handle to the fully engaged position. Requirement: The
operating torque when measured shall not exceed 5 Nm.

Requirements of improved stainless steel friction stays (with four screws)

The stainless steel friction stays shall comply with the following requirements :

Resistant to
obstructed stay
track
Strength of
maximum
opening stop
Resistance to
accidental
loading
Endurance of
Fastener

BLDG04/S18.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Test
300N for 5 second

Requirements
Passed

Destruction Test

Arm beng at 40 kg (392N) minimum

200N for 5 second

Passed

Destruction Test

Stay track permanent deformed at 65 kg

(638N) minimum

1000N for 1 min

Passed

Destruction Test

Stay track bent at 130 kg (1275N) minimum

Sash remains intact 150 kg (1472N)
minimum

50,000 cycles

Passed (no adjustment throughout the test)

100,000 cycles

Passed (no adjustment throughout the test)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-3
18.3.4

Finishes
The aluminium shall be finished by one of the following :
(a)

Anodic coating to 25 microns minimum complying with BS 3987.

(b)

Combined coating to comply with JIS H8602, except that the minimum thickness of the coating
shall be 9 microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.

The actual appearance of the finish shall be assessed by reference to samples to be agreed upon
between the Contractor and the SO Rep and thereafter maintained within agreed limits.
18.3.5

Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage

All bronze anodised extruded aluminium windows shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other
and significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout
papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The complete
window installation shall be protected against damage by contaminated moisture, cement and plaster
splashes or droppings. The materials to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

18.3.6

Storage And Protection

Ensure and provide proper and safe storage for all materials delivered to the Site and the continued
proper condition of installed windows at the Site until such time the building is handed over to the
Employer.

18.3.7

Installation
(a)

Design and Profile of Aluminium Sections

The design and profile of all the anodised aluminium sliding windows, casement windows and top
hung shall be as shown in the Drawings.
Complete samples of windows shall be installed at the Site for approval by the SO Rep.

(b)

Detailing
All windows and other aluminium items shall be fixed strictly to the manufacturers instructions.
Any clearance spaces between the window work size and the work surrounding the window shall
be sealed with an approved sealant when fixing is completed.
Safety devices shall be provided to prevent window sashes from being inadvertently forced out
from the frame during and after installation. Allow for the provision of a safety lock device or
stopper, made of 6-nylon or high density polyethylene or other approved material, to be securely
housed into the top rail of head section to perform this function.

(c)

Cement Mortar Infill

The size of the openings surrounding the window shall be checked prior to installation of window
frame. Any deviation exceeding the allowable tolerances shall be corrected before installation of
window frame.
Gap between the window and the adjacent structural member or in-fill non-structural wall shall be
filled with pre-packed cement mortar. The mortar shall be of the right consistency. Approved
backing piece formwork and tool shall be used to ensure that the mortar infill is properly
compacted and grooves are provided for application of approved sealant

(d)

Application of Sealant
Provide and apply approved sealant to the external periphery of the aluminium framed windows as
shown in the Drawings and ensure that all joints are sealed water tight and finished to a neat flush
joint with the window frame. The application of sealant shall comply with the manufacturer's guides
and instructions. All sealant applicators shall be pre-screened and approved by the SO Rep before
they are allowed to work. They are also required to wear identity pass to prove that they are
trained sealant applicators.
Before sealing the joints, the surfaces shall be clean and free of all mortar dust or other
contaminants that may affect adhesion

BLDG04/S18.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-4
18.3.8

Glazing
(a)

Glass
All glazing panel of aluminium sliding window shall be fixed to the inner aluminium frames in the
factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site. All glazing of casement and top hung can
be fixed to the aluminium frames at the Site. All glass shall be relatively distortion-free.
Where shown in the Drawings, all tinted glass shall be 5mm 0.3mm green gray/gray tinted float
glass with a shading coefficient of 0.75.
Glazing to adjustable louvre window between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall be 6 mm
0.3 mm clear float glass.
Glazing panel to vent of bath/w.c. shall be obscured wired glass of thickness 6mm 0.3mm.

(b)

Glazing Accessories
All glazing accessories shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds and subject to the
approval of the SO Rep.

(c)

Protection
Use all means necessary to protect glass and glazing materials before, during and after
installation.

(d)

Replacements
In the event of damage, immediately carry out all repairs and replacements necessary to the
approval of the SO Rep.

(e)

Fixing
Set all glass in a true plane, tight and straight, with proper and adequate clearance, firmly
anchored to prevent rattling and looseness, with all edges cleanly cut; do not nip or seam the
edges.

(f)

Cleaning Up
Upon completion of glazing, thoroughly clean all glass surfaces, correct all imperfections and
replace all damaged glass.

18.4

BRONZE ANODISED ALUMINIUM FRAMED ADJUSTABLE LOUVRE

WINDOWS WITH POLYPROPYLENE GLASS HOLDERS/BLADE CLIPS

18.4.1

General
Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium framed adjustable louvre window and glazing
complete with polypropylene glass holders/blade clips and all the relevant components to the locations as
shown in the Drawings.

18.4.2

Performance
Adjustable louvre window shall meet the following performance requirements :
(A)

Unlocking Test (SS 215:1979)

(i)

Before Accelerated Wear Test

The unlocking force on the hand lever of the adjustable louvre window shall not be less than
30 N and not more than 70 N.

(ii)

After Accelerated Wear Test

The unlocking force on the hand lever of the adjustable louvre window shall not be less than
5 N.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-5
18.4.2

Performance (Cont'd)
(B)

Accelerated Wear Test (SS 215:1979)

After the testing, the window mechanism shall show no sign of buckling, warping, jamming, wear
and crack which could impair the effective operation of the window and the mechanism can still be
operated and locked in the closed position.

(C)

Weathering In Laboratory Apparatus (DIN 53387 - 1982)

The polypropylene clips shall show no visual change after 750 hours.

(D)

Salt Spray Test (ASTM B117 - 90)

Moderate amount of black patches and white deposits on the control mechanism after 750 hours.

18.4.3

Material
(a)

Aluminium Alloy
All aluminium structural members shall be made of aluminium alloy 6063TF, 6063TE or 6063T5
complying with BS 1474.

(b)

Accessories
All screws, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers, fasteners and all other accessories to be used in the
fabrication of the windows shall be made from aluminium, non-magnetic stainless steel, mild steel
treated to give corrosion resistant properties complying with SS212:1988. All screws, bolts and
other accessories which are exposed shall be of approved matching colour.

(c)

Glass Holders/Blade Clips

Glass holders/blade clips shall be injection moulded from ultra-violet radiation stabilised
polypropylene of Shell HMA 6100 + Pentax uVS LDR 3%; or other approved. The colour of the
holders/clips shall be black and shall be matt finish. The glass holders/blade clips shall be
designed such as to readily accept 152mm wide and 6mm thick blades. The holders shall be
designed to hold the glass firmly without the use of putty and in such a manner as to prevent the
removal of the glass from the outside of the closed window. The glass holders/blade clips and
drive mechanism shall be of a one piece moulding.

(d)

Mullion
The mullion shall contain an enclosed slot to accept the control handle.

(e)

Control Mechanism
Control mechanism shall be produced from stainless steel grade 304 or aluminium.
The control mechanism shall be designed such as to provide a positive snap lock and that all
components shall be easily replaced in case of failure.

(f)

Control Handle And Cap

The control handle shall be produced from 6063 T5 grade aluminium of a minimum thickness of
2.5mm.
The control handle shall be encapsulated by an injection moulded protective cap complete with an
easy to operate tab.
The control handle and cap when in the closed position shall be flushed with the outer frame.
The control handle shall be powder-coated finished and in approved matching colour.

(g)

Fixing
Fixing screws shall be concealed when the louvre blade clips are in the fully closed position.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-6
18.4.3

Material (Cont'd)
(h)

Joints And Gaskets

All joints shall be sealed with synthetic butyl rubber.

(i)

Weather Strip
All weather strip shall be of approved neoprene, polypropylene pile or plasticized PVC.

18.4.4

Finishes
The aluminium shall be finished by one of the following :
(a)

Anodic coating to 25 microns minimum complying with BS 3987.

(b)

Combined coating to comply with BS 4842, except the minimum thickness of coating shall be 9
microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.

The actual appearance of the finish shall be assessed by reference to samples to be agreed upon
between the Contractor and the SO Rep and thereafter maintained within agreed limits.
18.4.5

Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage

All bronze anodised aluminium adjustable louvre windows shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each
other and significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with
stout papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The complete
window installation shall be protected against damage by contaminated moisture, cement and plaster
splashes or droppings. The materials to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

18.4.6

Storage & Protection

Ensure and provide proper and safe storage for all materials delivered to the Site and the continued
proper condition of installed windows at the Site until such time the building is handed over to the
Employer.

18.4.7

Installation
(a)

Design and Profile of Aluminium Sections

The design and profile of the bronze anodised aluminium framed adjustable louvre windows shall
be similar to those as shown in the Drawings.
Complete samples of windows shall be installed at the Site for approval by the SO Rep.

(b)

Detailing
All windows and other aluminium items shall be fixed strictly to the manufacturers instructions.
Any clearance spaces between the window work size and the work surrounding the window shall
be sealed with an approved sealant when fixing is completed.

(c)

Cement Mortar Infill

The size of the openings surrounding the window shall be checked prior to the installation of
window frames. Any deviation exceeding the allowable tolerances shall be corrected before
installation of window frame.
Any gap between the window and the adjacent structural member or in-fill non-structural wall shall
be filled with pre-packed cement mortar. The mortar shall be of the right consistency. Approved
backing piece formwork and tool shall be used to ensure that the mortar infill is properly
compacted and grooves are provided for application of approved sealant

BLDG04/S18.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-7

18.4.7

(d)

Application of Sealant
Provide and apply approved sealant to the external periphery of the aluminium framed windows as
shown in the Drawings and ensure that all joints are sealed water tight and finished to a neat flush
joint with the window frame. The application of approved sealant shall comply with the
manufacturer's guides and instructions.
All sealant applicators shall be pre-screened and approved by the SO Rep before they are allowed
to work. They are also required to wear identity pass to prove that they are trained sealant
applicators.
Before sealing the joints, the surfaces shall be clean and free of all mortar dust or other
contaminants that may affect adhesion.

18.4.8

Glazing
(a)

Glass
Unless otherwise specified, glazing panel of adjustable louvre windows shall be 6mm 0.3mm
green gray/gray tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of 0.75.
Glazing panel to adjustable louvre windows between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall
be 6mm 0.3mm clear float glass.

(b)

Glazing Accessories
All glazing accessories shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds and subject to the
approval of the SO Rep.

(c)

Protection
Use all means necessary to protect glass and glazing materials before, during and after
installation.

(d)

Replacements
In the event of damage, immediately carry out all repairs and replacements necessary to the
approval of the SO Rep.

(e)

Fixing
Set all glass in a true plane, tight and straight, with proper and adequate clearance, firmly
anchored to prevent rattling and looseness, with all edges cleanly cut; do not nip or seam the
edges.

(f)

Cleaning Up
Upon completion of glazing, thoroughly clean all glass surfaces, correct all imperfections and
replace all damaged glass.

18.5

BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SLIDING DOORS

Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium sliding doors complete with all the relevant
components to the locations as shown in the Drawings.
Unless otherwise specified, bronze anodised extruded aluminium sliding doors shall be in accordance
with SS 268:1983 and its latest amendments.

18.5.1

Main Material
All aluminium alloy doors shall be made to BS 1474 or ASTM B221.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-8
18.5.2

Surface Finish
The exposed surface of aluminium doors shall be treated to comply with BS 3987 to provide an anodic
coating of 25 microns.

18.5.3

Fastenings And Fixings

All screws, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers and other fastenings shall be of stainless steel or aluminium or mild
steel which has been treated to give corrosion resistant properties in accordance with SS 268-1983. All
screws, rivets and other accessories which are exposed shall be in approved matching colour.

18.5.4

Hardware
Hardware such as locksets, guide, roller etc including its fixing shall be in accordance with SS 268:1983.
The hardware and fixing shall be of suitable materials resistant to and suitably protected against
atmospheric corrosion. If materials or finishes which react adversely with aluminium are used, they shall
be separated from the aluminium by materials that do not do so. Hardware shall be replaceable without
removing the outer frame from the structure. Locksets and guide shall be in black colour or bronze colour
or other approved matching colour.
Safety devices shall be provided to prevent the door panels from jumping track and the colour shall be
black or bronze or other approved matching colour.
Unless specified otherwise, the lockset shall be openable by key from the outside and lockable by an
open and shut control from the inside. The lockset shall be incorporated into the thickness of the door
jamb of the slider and secured by means of stainless steel screws.
For sliding door to private balcony not link to the main entrance door, the lockset shall be lockable by an
open and shut control from the inside.
Lockset shall be finished in black or bronze in colour or other approved matching colour.

18.5.5

Joint Sealing Materials

Joint sealing materials shall be of synthetic butyl rubber or other approved water tightness materials that
will not harm adjacent materials or finishes.

18.5.6

Weather Stripping
Weather stripping shall be made from materials known not to react with aluminium and such that any
shrinkage, warping or adherence to sliding or closing surfaces shall not impair the performance of the
door. The strips shall be of approved neoprene or polypropylene pile.

18.5.7

Glazing
All glazing panels shall be fixed to the aluminium frames in the factory as a complete system before
delivery to the Site. The glazing panel to the door conforming to BS 952 shall be 6mm 0.3mm thick
green grey/grey tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of not more than 0.75.
Glazing beads, gaskets glass adapters and glazing compounds shall be of plastics or synthetic rubber
member or material that do not react with aluminium, aluminium finishes, glass or other glazing materials.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-9
18.5.8

Performance Tests
When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall arrange for performance tests as required in
SS 268:1983 and the following tests shall be carried out by PSB testing laboratory accredited under
SINGLAS :
(a)

Roller (bearing device) - accelerated test of minimum 50,000 operations.

(b)

Anodic coating (25 microns)

or
Composite coating (aluminium 9 microns
anodic coating and 7 microns for the
liquid organic coating)

18.5.9

)
)
) under copper accelerated acetic acid salt
) spray (CASS) test for 8 hours to achieve
) a rating of 8.
)
)

Workshop Drawings
Provide two complete sets of workshop drawings showing all the detailing sections, plans and relevant
details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to the installation.
When required, complete samples of doors shall be installed for approval by the SO Rep.

18.5.10

Construction And Installation

The aluminium doors shall be installed to the manufacturer's instructions. The manufacturer shall provide
instructions as to the manner of assembly of the aluminium doors.

18.5.11

Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage

All bronze anodised extruded aluminium doors shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other and
significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout
papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The installed door
shall be protected against damaged by agents such as contaminated moisture, cement and plaster
splashes or droppings. The material to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

18.5.12

Cement Mortar Infill

Cement mortar infill shall be provided as shown in the Drawings.

18.6

BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SWING DOORS

Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium swing doors complete with all the relevant
components to the locations as shown in the Drawings.

18.6.1

Main Material
All aluminium alloy doors shall be made to BS 1474 or ASTM B221.

18.6.2

Surface Finish
The exposed surface of aluminium doors shall be treated and finished by one of the following :
(a)

Anodic coating to 25 microns minimum complying with BS 3987

(b)

Combined coating to comply with JIS H8602, except the minimum thickness of coatings shall be 9
microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-10
18.6.3

Fastenings And Fixings

All screws, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers and other fastenings shall be of stainless steel or aluminium or mild
steel which has been treated to give corrosion resistant properties in accordance with SS268-1983. All
screws, rivets and other accessories which are exposed shall be in approved matching colour.

18.6.4

Hardware
The hardware and fixing shall be of suitable materials resistant to and suitably protected against
atmospheric corrosion. If materials or finishes which react adversely with aluminium are used, they shall
be separated from the aluminium by materials that do not do so. Hardware shall be replaceable without
removing the outer frame from the structure.

18.6.5

Joint Sealing Materials

Joint sealing materials shall be of synthetic butyl rubber or other approved water tightness materials that
will not harm adjacent materials or finishes.

18.6.6

Weather Stripping
Weather stripping shall be made from materials known not to react with aluminium and such that any
shrinkage, warping or adherence to sliding or closing surfaces shall not impair the performance of the
door. The strips shall be of approved neoprene or polypropylene pile.

18.6.7

Glazing
All glazing panels shall be fixed to the aluminium frames in the factory as a complete system before
delivery to the Site. Unless otherwise specified, the glazing panel to the door conforming to BS 952 shall
be 6mm 0.3mm thick green grey/grey tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of not more than 0.75.
The glazing panel to swing door between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall be 6mm 0.3mm
thick clear float glass.
Glazing beads, gaskets glass adapters and glazing compounds shall be of plastics or synthetic rubber
member or material that do not react with aluminium, aluminium finishes, glass or other glazing materials.

18.6.8

Workshop Drawings
Provide two complete sets of workshop drawings showing all the detailing sections, plans and relevant
details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to the installation.
When required, complete samples of doors shall be installed for approval by the SO Rep.

18.6.9

Construction And Installation

The aluminium doors shall be installed to the manufacturer's instructions. The manufacturer shall provide
instructions as to the manner of assembly of the aluminium doors.

18.6.10

Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage

All bronze anodised extruded aluminium doors shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other and
significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout
papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The installed door
shall be protected against damaged by agents such as contaminated moisture, cement and plaster
splashes or droppings. The material to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-11
18.6.11

Cement Mortar Infill

Cement mortar infill shall be provided as shown in the Drawings.

18.7

RESERVED

18.8

ALUMINIUM ROLLER SHUTTER

Provide and install aluminium roller shutters to shop fronts, eating houses and other premises as shown in
the Drawings.
Aluminium roller shutter shall be of pole operated aluminium slates complete with channel guide, angle
bolts, lock, removable mullion roller casing and all other necessary components. For individual shop unit
or eating house, same lockset (with master key) shall be provided to all aluminium roller shutters.
Slates shall be made from aluminium alloy extruded sections. Thickness of aluminium slates shall be
1.6mm thick (S.W.G. 16) and anodic coating shall be 15 microns minimum.
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. The Contractor shall submit workshop
drawings showing all the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for
approval prior to the installation.
When required, a complete sample shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO Rep.

18.9

SAFETY FEATURE TO PREVENT FALLING WINDOW LEAF

FOR ALUMINIUM CASEMENT AND TOP HUNG WINDOW
The Contractor shall incorporate the safety features (patent application no. 9905170-8) to all the new
aluminium casement and top hung windows to be installed in the Works. The safety features shall ensure
that the window leaf will not be detached from the outer frame or friction stay accidentally even if all the
fasteners at the friction stay fail. The safety feature shall include:
(a)

Incorporation of aluminium rails to the outer frame of the window to allow the friction stay to clip
onto the rails in the event of failure of the fasteners. The friction stays shall have features that
allowed them to be detach from the outer frame to facilitate the replacement of window leaves.

(b)

Incorporation of aluminium rails to the inner frame of the window (window leaf) for the arm of the
friction stay to slot in between. The friction stay shall hold onto the rails in the event of failure of the
fasteners.

The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for the aluminium casement and top hung windows
incorporating details of the safety features for the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall fabricate
samples of the casement and top hung windows and demonstrate the function of the safety features to
the satisfaction of the SO Rep prior to the installation of the windows.
The Contractor shall also ensure that their window manufacturer is licensed to use the patented design. A
copy of the licensing agreement between the window manufacturer and the patent owner shall be
submitted to the SO Rep together with the shop drawings.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(11)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-12
18.10

BRONZE ANODISED ALUMINIUM FRAME/ACRYLIC PANEL

SLIDING/FOLDING DOOR
Provide and install bronze anodised aluminium frame/acrylic panel sliding/folding door as shown in the
Drawings. The door shall be complete with integral concealed sliding/folding mechanism and integral
locking device. The door shall be able to be slided and folded to one side. No gaps shall be visible
between the joint of the panels in the close operation. It shall also be complete with a towel bar/handle
and a stopper on the bottom track as shown in the Drawings.
Aluminium frame shall be of bronze anodised extruded aluminium finish and the anodic coating shall be
15 microns minimum. Acrylic panel shall be of 3mm thick acrylic with opaque texture and firmly secured
with gasket. All screws, nuts, bolts, washers, fasteners and all accessories used shall be aluminium or
stainless steel. All screws and accessories which are exposed shall be finished in approved matching
colour.
The complete frame, door and ironmongery shall be obtained from approved manufacturers.

18.11

NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAME AND

ALUMINIUM INSPECTION COVER
Where shown in the Drawings, provide and install natural anodised extruded aluminium frame and
aluminium inspection cover to the refuse chute on the roof top in accordance with the details inclusive with
the relevant components.
The aluminium cover shall be complete with 1.2mm thick galvanised steel "C" channels frame and infill
with rockwool insulation as indicated in the Drawings. The 5mm thick extruded aluminium section and
1.2mm thick aluminium alloy lining shall be of natural anodised to at least 25 microns.
The rockwool insulation material shall be of density 150 kg per m (10% tolerance) and thickness of
38mm rigid enough to be able to withstand a working load of 500 kg per m. The noise reduction
coefficient shall be NRC 0.95 within the sound range of 125 Hz to 5000 Hz. Moisture resistance shall not
be more than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire hazard indices at Class
O.
When required, complete sample of inspection cover shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO
Rep. All inspection cover and items shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer/Supplier's
instructions and recommendations.

18.12

BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM LOUVRED VENTS

Provide and install bronze anodised extruded aluminium louvred vents together with all necessary
components to pump room and other locations as shown in the Drawings. The aluminium louvred blades
shall be of 2.3mm thick minimum and shall be of aluminium alloys to BS 1470 or ASTM B209. The
aluminium vent including the aluminium louvred blades shall be anodised to a bronze finish and the
anodic coating shall be 25 microns.

18.13

THREE-WAY POWDER COATED ALUMINIUM LETTER BOXES

WITH MASTER DOORS

18.13.1

General
Supply and fix three-way powder coated aluminium letter boxes to locations as shown in the Drawings.
These letter boxes shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The list of approved
suppliers is is posted at the following websites: kmo.eptc.com.sg or hdbuilders.com.
The thickness of the aluminium sheet shall be as shown in the Drawings and the thickness tolerance shall
be 10%.
Letter boxes shall be provided for each residential unit. A minimum of two additional letter boxes shall be
provided for ground floor facilities to each building block as shown in the Drawings. In addition to the two
letter boxes, one additional letter box shall be provided for For Returned Mail Only. The location of the
For Returned Mail Only letter box shall be as shown in the Drawings.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(12)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-13
18.13.1

General (Contd)
The building block number, road name and postal code shall be engraved on the top frame and at the
location as shown in the Drawings. The unit number of the residential unit shall be engraved and painted
on the individual letter box aluminium door and on the upturn as shown in the Drawings. The actual block
number, unit number, road name and postal code shall be decided by the SO Rep. The phrase "For
Returned Mail Only" shall be engraved and painted on the returned mail letter box aluminium door and on
the upturn as shown in the Drawings.
The keys for the letter boxes shall be kept in separate envelopes and numbered to correspond with the
numbers on the boxes and handed over to the Employer on Substantial Completion of the Works. The
envelopes for the keys shall be obtained from the Employer. Three keys shall be provided for each
individual letter box.
The two master doors shall be provided with different key aliked locksets approved by the SO Rep. Three
master door keys for the Town Council shall be provided for each building block and shall be handed over
to the Employer on Substantial Completion of the Works. Three master door keys for Singapore Post shall
be provided for each building block and shall be handed over to Singapore Post on Substantial
Completion of the Works.

18.13.2

Workshop Drawings
Submit complete set of workshop drawings and colour range for the approval of the SO Rep.

18.13.3

Polyester Powder Coating

The aluminium shall be finished with polyester powder coating. The polyester powder coating shall be
super-durable architectural powder coating "Oxyplast APR" or "Tiger Drylac U Series 58" or other
approved. The powder coating shall comply with all the requirements as specified in these clause and
subclauses. Unless otherwise specified, all test procedures shall be in accordance with AAMA 2604-98
"Voluntary Specifications, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance
Organic Coatings on Aluminium Extrusions And Panels". The powder coating shall be applied by
approved applicator. The powder and powder coating applicator shall be certified under PSB Product
Listing Scheme Class 1A.
(A)

General Requirements
(i)

Surfaces
Coatings shall be visibly free from flow lines, streaks, blisters or other surface imperfections
in the dry film state on the exposed surfaces when observed at a distance of ten (10) feet
(120 inches) from the metal surface and inspected at an angle of 90 degrees to the surface.

(ii)

Thickness
The total dry film thickness on each significant surface of the coating on each piece shall be
60m - 100m.

(iii)

Minor Scratches And Blemishes

Minor scratches and blemishes shall be repairable with the coating manufacturer's
recommended product or system. Such repair shall match the original finish when tested as
outlined in the subclause "Dry Adhesion" specified hereunder. After application, allow the
repair coating to dry for at least 72 hours at 65-80 degrees F before conducting the film
adhesion test. The size and number of touch-up repairs shall be kept to a minimum.

(B)

Test Specimens
Test specimens shall consist of finished panels or extrusions representative of the production
coated aluminium. A sufficient number of specimens on which to conduct instrument
measurements with flat coated surfaces of at least 6" long and 3" wide, shall be submitted to the
test laboratory.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(13)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-14
18.13.3

Polyester Powder Coating (Contd)

(C)

Metal Preparation And Pre-Treatment

A multi-stage cleaning and pre-treatment system shall be required to remove organic and inorganic
surface soils, remove residual oxides, and to apply a chemical conversion coating to which organic
coatings will firmly adhere.
The products used to form the chemical conversion coating on aluminium extrusions and panelling
shall conform with ASTM D 1730, Type B, Method 5 or Method 7.
The coating weight of the chemical conversion coating shall be a minimum of 30 mg. per sq. ft. on
the exposed surfaces as specified in ASTM B 449, Section 6, Class 1. Processing shall conform
with that specified in ASTM B 449, Section 5.

(D)

Colour Uniformity
Colour uniformity shall be consistent with the colour range as established between the approved
source and the applicator.

(E)

Specular Gloss
Gloss values shall be within 5 units of the manufacturer's specification.
The Standard gloss range reference values are :
Gloss Colours
High
Medium
Low

(F)

Specular Gloss Value

80 - Over
20 - 79
19 or less

Dry Film Hardness

No rupture of film per ASTM D 3363.

(G)

Film Adhesion
(i)

Dry Adhesion
No removal of film under the tape within or outside of the cross hatched area or blistering
anywhere on the test specimen

(ii)

Wet Adhesion
No removal of film under the tape within or outside of the cross hatched area or blistering
anywhere on the wet test specimen.

(iii)

Boiling Water Adhesion

No removal of film under the tape within or outside of the cross hatched area or blistering
anywhere on the wet test specimen.

(H)

Impact Resistance
No removal of film to substrate.

(I)

Abrasion Resistance
Using the failing sand test method ASTM D 968, the Abrasion Coefficient Value of the coating shall
be 40 minimum.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(14)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-15
18.13.3

Polyester Powder Coating (Contd)

(J)

Chemical Resistance
(i)

Muriatic Acid Resistance (15 Minute Spot Test)

No blistering and no visual change in appearance when examined by the unaided eye.

(ii)

Mortar Resistance (24 Hour Pat Test)

Mortar shall dislodge easily from the painted surface, and any residue shall be removable
with a damp cloth. Any lime residue should be easily removed with the 10% muriatic acid
solution described in the Clause "Muriatic Acid Resistance" of AAMA 2604-98. There shall
be no loss of film adhesion or visual change in appearance when examined by the unaided
eye.

(iii)

Nitric Acid Resistance

Not more than 5 Delta E Units(Hunter) of colour change, calculated in accordance with
ASTM D 2244, when comparing measurements on the acid-exposed painted surface and
the unexposed surface.

(iv)

Detergent Resistance
No loss of adhesion of the film to the metal. No blistering and no significant visual change in
appearance when examined by the unaided eye.

(K)

Corrosion Resistance
(i)

Humidity Resistance (For 3,000 Hours At 100 Degrees F And

100% RH With Cabinet Operated In Accordance With
ASTM D 2247 or ASTM D 4585)
Formation of blisters not to exceed "Few" blisters Size No. 8, as shown in Figure 4,
ASTM D 714.

(ii)

Salt Spray Resistance(3,000 Hours According To ASTM B 117

Using 5% Salt Solution)
Minimum rating of 7 on scribe or cut edges, and a minimum blister rating of 8 within the test
specimen field.

(L)

Weathering
The coating shall maintain its film integrity and as a minimum meet the colour retention, chalk
resistance, gloss retention and erosion resistance properties specified hereunder. The SO Rep
shall request data relative to the long term durability of the colour/colours selected.
(i)

Test Site And Duration

Test sites for on-fence testing are acceptable as follows : Florida exposure South of latitude
27 degrees North at a 45 degree angle facing South for five years.

(ii)

Colour Retention
Maximum of 5 Delta E units (Hunter) Colour change as calculated in accordance with
ASTM D 2244-85, Section 6.3 after the exposure test as per foregoing subclause "Test Site
and Duration".

(iii)

Chalk Resistance
Chalking shall be no more than that represented by a No. 8 rating based on ASTM D 659
after test site exposure.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(15)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-16
18.13.3

Polyester Powder Coating (Contd)

(L)

Weathering (Contd)
(iv)

Gloss Retention
Gloss retention shall be a minimum of 50% after the exposure test.

(v)

Resistance To Erosion
Less than 10 percent film loss after the exposure test expressed as a percent loss of total
film.

(M)

QUV A340 (ASTM G53, 3000 Hours - 8 Hours UV, 4 Hours Condensation)
(i)

Gloss Retention
70 - 100%

(ii)

Colour Retention
Shall be not more than 5 Delta E units of colour change.

(N)

QUV B313 (336 Hours - 8 Hours UV At 60 Degrees C,

4 Hours Condensation At 50 Degrees C)
(i)

Gloss Retention
80 - 100 %

(ii)

Colour Retention
Shall be not more than 5 Delta E units of colour change.

18.13.4

Appearance
The powder coating on the significant surface shall not have any scratches through to the base metal. It
shall be of even colour and gloss with good coverage. It shall not have Defect such as excessive
roughness, flow lines, bubbles, inclusions, craters, blisters, dull spots, pin holes, scratches or any other
unacceptable flaws.
The actual appearance of the finish shall be assessed by reference to samples to be agreed upon
between the Contractor and the SO Rep and thereafter maintained within agreed limits.

18.13.5

Colour
The finishing colour of the powder coating shall be selected by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall seek
approval from the SO Rep on the colour selection prior to the application of the powder coating.

18.13.6

Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage

All powder coated aluminium letter boxes shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other and
significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout papers,
cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The complete letter boxes
installation shall be protected against damage by contaminated moisture, cement and plaster splashes or
droppings. The materials to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(16)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-17
18.13.7

Storage And Protection

Ensure and provide proper and safe storage for all materials delivered to the Site and the continued
proper condition of letterboxes at the Site until such time the building is handed over to the Employer.

18.14

NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAME AND

ALUMINIUM TRAP DOOR TO MAIN ROOF
Where shown, provide and install natural anodised extruded aluminium frame and aluminium trap door to
main roof in accordance with the details as shown in the Drawings. The aluminium trap door shall
complete with 1.2mm thick galvanised steel "C" channels frame and infill with rockwool insulation as
indicated in the Drawings. The 5mm thick extruded aluminium section and 1.2mm thick aluminium alloy
lining shall be of natural anodised to at least 25 microns.
The density of rockwool insulation material shall be 150 kg per m (10% tolerance) and its thickness shall
be 38mm. It shall be rigid enough to be able to withstand a working load of 500 kg per m. The noise
reduction coefficient shall be NRC 0.95 within the sound range of 125 Hz to 5000 Hz. Moisture resistance
shall not be more than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire hazard indices
at Class O.
Trap door shall be provided with smooth running sliding roller, ms guides and approved padlock, hasps
and staples secured to the concrete and doors by masonry drive pins or other approved means of fixing
all as shown in the Drawings.
When required, complete sample of trap door shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO Rep. All
trap door and items shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer/Supplier's instructions and
recommendations.

18.15

NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAME

AND ALUMINIUM TRAP DOOR TO ROOF OF BOOSTER PUMP ROOM
The aluminium trap door shall be complete with 1.2mm thick galvanised steel "C" channel frame and infill
with rockwool insulation as indicated in the Drawings. The 5mm thick extruded aluminium section and
1.2mm thick aluminium alloy lining shall be of natural anodised to at least 25 microns.
The density of rockwool insulation material shall be 150 kg per m (10% tolerance) and its thickness shall
be 38mm. It shall be rigid enough to be able to withstand a working load of 500 kg per m. The noise
reduction coefficient shall be NRC 0.95 within the sound range of 125 Hz to 5000 Hz. Moisture resistance
shall not be more than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire hazard indices
at Class O.
Trap door shall be provided with smooth running sliding roller, ms guides and approved padlock, hasps
and staples secured to the concrete and doors by masonry drive pins or other approved means of fixing
all as shown in the Drawings.
When required, complete sample of trap door shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO Rep. All
trap door and items shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer/Supplier's instructions and
recommendations.

18.16

WATER TIGHTNESS TEST TO THE JOINT/INTERFACE BETWEEN

EXTERNAL ALUMINIUM WINDOW AND THE ADJACENT STRUCTURAL
COMPONENT OR IN-FILL WALL
a)

General
Where the external windows are installed on Site and not cast with the recast facades at the
factory, the Contractor shall carry out water test to the external joint/interface between the external
aluminium window and the adjacent structural member or in-full non-structural wall. The external
joints/interfaces shall refer to those directly facing the exterior. However, those along the access
balcony shall be excluded.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(17)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-18
18.16

WATER TIGHTNESS TEST TO THE JOINT/INTERFACE BETWEEN

EXTERNAL ALUMINIUM WINDOW AND THE ADJACENT STRUCTURAL
COMPONENT OR IN-FILL WALL (CONT'D)
b)

Sample size and Method of Testing

SO Rep shall sample half height windows in 10% of the units per building block for testing. One
half-height window shall be tested in each selected unit. For building block with three-quarter
height or full-height windows, the SO Rep shall sample 25% of the total number of the windows for
testing. Watertightness shall be conducted at the following stages of work:
Stage of work
Within 3 months before the handing over
inspection
Within 1 month before the handing over
inspection

Percentage of watertightness test

Three-quarter height or
Full height windows

Half height windows

5%

15%

5%

10%

The watertightness test shall be carried out using a continuous jet of water sprayed on the
joint/interface with a nozzle and water hose. For each window, four points shall be selected for
testing and each point shall be sprayed for 20 minutes. The velocity of the water at the nozzle shall
be 2m per second. The capacity of the water delivered shall be 600 litres per hour. The duration of
the testing for each window shall be 80 minutes.
The nozzle shall be held at a distance of 1m away from the joint/interface and pointed towards the
joint/interface horizontally.
Provide the following information to the SO Rep for approval at least 2 months before carrying out
the watertightness test:
(i) The entire equipment set up to conduct the water test
(ii) Procedure of the water test;
(iii) Pump capacity to deliver the required flow rate and velocity at the nozzle;
(iv) The method to suspend the nozzle
In the case where sunbreakers come into the way, the nozzle outlet shall be brought in between
the sunbreakers and the external window and pointed towards the joint/interface.
The joint/interface shall be considered to have passed the test if no dampness or seepage appears
at the internal side of the joint/interface or internal side of any part of the building, during spraying
and within half an hour after the completion of the spraying.
c)

Failure of the Testing

In the event that any joint/interface fails the watertightness test, the Contractor shall investigate the
causes of failure and seek the approval of the SO Rep on the rectification method.
For each window watertightness test failure, the Contractor shall carry out re-test at the failed
location and the SO Rep shall sample another window from the same building block for testing.
In addition, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject any aluminium window installation that perform
unsatisfactorily during the water-tightness tests

18.17

AIR-CONDITIONER FRAME AND GLASS-FIBRE REINFORCED CEMENT PANEL

Provide and fix air-conditioner frame, glass fibre reinforced cement panel and plywood panel all as shown
in the Drawings.
The profile and sizes of the air-conditioner (A/C) frame shall be as shown in the Drawings. The frame
shall be extruded aluminium and shall be bronze anodised to 25 microns minimum. The glass-fibre
reinforced cement (G.R.C.) panel shall be to the sizes as shown in the Drawings and the thickness shall
be minimum 7mm. The glass fibre shall consist of 5% of the weight of the G.R.C. panel and shall be
alkaline resistant.
The density shall be 2,000kg per m and the exposed surfaces of the G.R.C. panel shall be finished
smooth to receive 2 coats of acrylic emulsion paint. The plywood panels shall be 9mm thick and shall be
to the sizes as shown in the Drawings. The exposed surfaces of the plywood panel shall be painted with
one priming coat, one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(18)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-19
18.18

CLOTHES DRYING RACK

18.18.1

External Clothes Drying Rack

Provide and fix stainless steel clothes drying racks extrusion together with 3 nos. of fixed stainless steel
poles, stainless steel bended sections and other necessary components as shown in the Drawings. The
whole rack shall be securely fixed into the structure.
All stainless steel poles, stainless steel racks extrusion, stainless steel plates and stainless bended
sections shall be Grade 316 stainless steel with polished finish as shown in the Drawings. The outer
diameter of the poles shall be 25mm and the thickness shall be 2mm. All joints shall be fully welded to a
neat and smooth finish under factory quality control condition. The weld and adjoining area affected by
heat shall be chemically treated with approved acid and polished to prevent rusting.
Details of material are as follow :
(a) Stainless steel frame/support : 50mm x 50mm x 3mm thick (horizontal stainless steel rectangular
hollow section) and 40mm x 40mm x 3mm thick (vertical stainless steel rectangular bended section),
3mm thick stainless steel clothes rack extrusion, 6 mm thick stainless steel base plate and stainless
steel reinforcement plate.
(b) Stainless steel poles : Approximate 2150mm length stainless steel pipe.
(c) End cap to pole : 1.5mm thick stainless steel sheet with 5 mm diameter stainless steel pin.
(d) Expansion stainless steel anchor bolts : Hilti or Ramset or other approved M10 x 90 with setting
indicator.
All design of stainless steel structures shall comply with BS 1449. The stainless steel welding connection
shall be designed to BS EN 1011-3:2000.
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. The Contractor shall submit workshop drawings
showing the method of fixing, the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories, complete
with PE endorsement and design calculations to the SO Rep for approval prior to the installation.
The rack shall be well protected against moisture, cement and plaster splashes during construction. The
completed work shall be clean and free from dust and stain.

18.18.2

Internal Retractable Clothes Drying Rack

Provide and fix stainless steel retractable clothes drying rack together with the necessary components as
shown in the Drawings. The rack shall be securely fixed at a height of 1600mm above the floor level to the
wall of the kitchen or service yard to every flat or as directed by the SO Rep.
All stainless steel pipes shall be Grade 304 stainless steel with polished finish and of length and number
of pipes as shown in the Drawings. The outer diameter of the poles shall be 19mm and the thickness shall
be 1.5mm.
Details of material are as follow :
(a) Retractable stainless steel clothes rack assembly.
(b) Expansion stainless steel anchor bolts : Hilti or Ramset or other approved M8 x 75.
All design of stainless steel structures shall comply with BS 1449. The stainless steel welding connection
shall be designed to BS EN 1011-3:2000.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(19)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-20
18.18.2

Internal Retractable Clothes Drying Rack (Cont'd)

The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. The Contractor shall submit workshop drawings
showing the method of fixing, the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories, complete
with PE endorsement and design calculations to the SO Rep for approval prior to the installation.
The rack shall be well protected against moisture, cement and plaster splashes and other materials during
construction. The completed work shall be clean and free from dust and stain.

18.19

STAINLESS STEEL RAILING TO PARAPETS

All stainless steel railing to parapets of access balconies shall be constructed as shown in the Drawings.
Stainless steel railing shall be square hollow section of dimensions and thickness as shown in the
Drawings. The tolerance for the dimensions and thickness shall be 0.5% and 10% respectively. All
stainless steel railing shall be fully welded to stainless steel flat support fixed securely into the structure as
detailed in the Drawings. The dimensions and thickness of flat support shall be as shown in the
Drawings.
All joints shall be fully welded to a neat and smooth finish. The railing shall be well protected against
contaminated moisture, cement and plaster splashes and other undesirable materials during construction.
The completed railing shall be clean and free from rust and stain.

18.20

RESERVED

18.21

FOOT-OPERATED STAINLESS STEEL REFUSE HOPPERS FOR

CENTRALISED REFUSE CHUTE
Provide and fix approved foot-operated stainless steel refuse chute hoppers to openings of centralised
refuse chute walls as shown in the Drawings. The refuse chute hopper shall be constructed of stainless
steel. The surface shall be of hairline finish. All joints shall be welded in full and no spot welding shall be
used for the Works. All welds shall be smoothly and securely finished. The thickness of stainless steel
shall be as shown in the Drawings. Details of the foot-operating mechanism and foot pedal shall serve as
a guide only. Before installing, provide shop drawings for the approval of the SO Rep.

18.22

STAINLESS STEEL EYES WITH NYLON ANCHORS FOR NATIONAL FLAG

18.22.1

General
Provide and install stainless steel eyes with nylon anchors to parapets of access balconies, private
balconies and living rooms of residential building blocks as shown below or to any other locations as
directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's costs and expenses. Stainless steel eyes shall be of
grade 304 stainless steel.
Description

Eye-Anchors

Location To Be Installed

(1) Flats along access balcony.

1 pair per unit

Access balcony parapet/coping

(2)

Flats with private balcony

1 pair per unit

Private balcony parapet/coping

(3)

Flats not along access balcony

and without private balcony
(eg. corridor end, stairs, etc)

1 pair per unit

Living room window wall

1 pair per unit

Private balcony parapet/coping

(4) Executive Maisonette/Apartment

BLDG04/S18.DOC(20)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-21
18.22.2

Quality Of Materials
The nylon anchors shall be "Fisher S6-8", "Hilti HUD6-8", "Ramset DNP6-8", "Rawlplug M6-8"; or other
approved.

18.22.3

Dimensional Requirements
Eye-anchors shall conform with the following requirements :
Thickness of stainless steel
Internal diameter of eye
Length of screw
Length of screw shank

=
=
=
=

5mm diameter 0.5mm

15mm 1mm
30mm 2mm
32mm 2mm

Size of drill bead and depth of drilling for the anchors shall comply strictly with the
Manufacturer's/Suppliers written recommendations.
18.22.4

Samples And Verification Of Positions For Fixing

Samples of eyes and anchors shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the carrying out of
the work. Before drilling is carried out, verify with the SO Rep and obtain his approval on the locations
and positions for the installation of eye-anchors.

18.22.5

Installation
Extreme care shall be exercised during installation to ensure that the parapets, copings, cills, etc. are not
damaged or cracked which may cause water seepage or other Defect. The Contractor shall make good,
repair or replace the damaged items at his own cost and expense to the full satisfaction of the SO Rep.
All over-drillings, wrong drillings and defective work shall be rectified by an approved method.
Notwithstanding the approval granted for the method of rectification, the Contractor shall be liable for
making good the defective Works.
After drilling, all cleaning of holes and preparation of surfaces for the insertion of nylon anchors shall
strictly comply with the Manufacturers'/Suppliers' written recommendations.
All fixing shall be accurately plumbed and aligned vertically and horizontally. The eye-screws together
with the nylon anchors shall be applied with approved epoxy resin before screwing into positions. Ensure
that all eye-anchors are fixed securely into the substrate to ensure a strong and firm grip. The completed
fixture shall be clean and free of stains and rusts or other undesirable materials.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(21)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-22
18.22.5

Installation (Contd)
The approved epoxy resin shall be one of the following :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)

18.23

Araldite Injection System IS 650 or CI xh 160AB;

SBD EPIK;
Concretin IHL;
Conbextra EPLV;
Chemi-EPIS;
Sho-bond BICS;
Febset Grout No. 6 or Non-Flow;
or other approved.

STAINLESS STEEL DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGE FOR CENTRALISED REFUSE CHUTE

Provide and fix 2mm thick (minimum) stainless steel directional signage for centralised refuse chute to
each storey of residential building block. The size of the signage shall be as shown in the Drawings. The
exact positions shall be decided and approved on the Site by the SO Rep. The stainless steel shall be of
Grade 304 and shall be in hair-line finish. Fixing of signage shall be by heavy duty high bond double
sided adhesive tapes.
All graphics and letterings shall be engraved and painted with the colour as indicated in the Drawings.

18.24

WROUGHT IRON STEEL GATES TO FLAT ENTRANCES

Provide and fix wrought iron steel gates to all entrance doors of flats.
The gates shall be constructed in accordance with the pattern and types as shown in the Drawings. The
gates shall be of the correct sizes to fit entrance door frames and be obtained from approved
manufacturers. All welding and joints shall be neat and finished smooth. The gates shall have leaf
opening first on the same side as the lock on the flat entrance door. The particular type of wrought iron
steel gates shall be to the particular pattern to each apartment block as shown in the Drawings. All rivets
shall be finished with matching colour to the gate.
Provide workshop drawings for approval by the SO Rep. A complete sample shall be installed on the Site
for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.
PREPARATION
All welded joints shall be made smooth. Remove rust mechanically from the surface of wrought iron.
Clean the surface to remove oil, grease and dirt.
PAINTING
The Contractor shall seek SO Rep approval on the painting system for the wrought iron steel gate. The
Contractor shall submit a range of colours for SO Rep approval. The colour and finishing of gate shall be
approved by the SO Rep. The painting system shall be one of the following :
(a)

On galvanised wrought iron surfaces :

(i)
One coat of polyvinyl butyral etch primer;
(ii)
One coat of acrylic based etch primer;
(iii)
One coat of acrylic based or PU based finishing paint with special
effects and antique appearance;
(iv)
One final coat of clear acrylic based or PU based lacquer.
or

(b)

BLDG04/S18.DOC(22)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

On wrought iron surfaces :

(i)
One coat of CED primer;
(ii)
One coat of acrylic based or PU based finishing paint with
special effects and antique appearance;
(iii)
One final coat of clear acrylic based or PU based lacquer.

Bldg Spec
Page 18-23
18.25

FAN HOOKS
Cast fan hooks into positions as shown; bent out of 13mm diameter mild steel rod to ceilings of shops,
eating houses or other premises as shown in the Drawings.

18.26

NUMERAL ESTATE BLOCK NUMBER SIGNAGE

For each building block, including multi-storey carpark/garage block and precinct pavilion, provide and fix
two numbers of numeral estate block number signages. The locations of the signage shall be decided by
the SO Rep. The actual block number shall be made known later. The signage shall be made of
aluminium and shall be finished with bronze anodic coating to a minimum of 15 microns. Submit a sample
of the signage to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations.

18.27

CAT LADDER TO MAIN ROOF

Provide and fix to every access door to roof, aluminium retractable cat ladders and aluminium handrails,
aluminium cage enclosures and the hand holds above roof slabs as detailed in the Drawings. Hollow
blocks to which aluminium rungs are anchored shall be filled solid with cement mortar.
Where shown in the Drawings, provide and fix barricade to the front of lift motor room entrance which is
close to the roof edge.

18.28

PROFILED STEEL ROOFING SHEETS

Where shown, the profiled steel roofing sheets shall be as specified in Section 13 "Roofing" including all
clause and subclauses under it.

18.29

MILD STEEL DOOR FRAME

18.29.1

Material Requirements
Where shown, the mild steel door frame shall be 1.6mm thick and the overall dimension shall have a
tolerance of 1.0mm to the profile as shown in the Drawings. Fixing to brick/block walls shall be secured
by mild steel fishtailed holdfast with CED primer or galvanised steel fishtailed holdfast to the number and
dimension as shown in the Drawings to each side of the frame. Fixing frame to RC shall be by mild steel
bracket with CED primer or galvanised steel bracket with masonry drive pin on both sides all as shown in
the Drawings. Fixing to lightweight concrete partition shall be secured by 3 no. of mild steel holdfast with
CED primer or galvanised steel holdfast to each side of the frame. The holdfast shall be welded to the
partition reinforcement bar.
Approved Cathodic Electrodeposition Primer to mild steel door frames shall be applied in the mill/
plant/factory and shall comply with the requirements shown below :
Test

Results

Adhesion Test
ASTM D 3359-95a

5B

Scratch Resistance Test

SS5:Part F2:88

The coating shall withstand a scratch test load of 2000g

Pencil Hardness Test

ASTM 3363-92a

2H shall be the hardest pencil that do not scratch the film

Dry Film Thickness (measured by Elcometer 300

Coating Thickness Gauge)
SS5:Part B1:85 Method No. 5

20 microns 5 microns

Resistance to Continuous Salt Spray

SS5:Part G1:89
Resistance to Humidity under
Condition (Cyclic condensation)
SS5:Part G6:92

BLDG04/S18.DOC(23)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Tested for a period of 1000 hours:

- less than 0.1% rusting
- blister size no. 6, few to no. 10 on surface
Condensation

Tested for a period of 1000 hours:

- less than 0.03% rusting
- blister size no. 8, few to no. 10 on surface

Bldg Spec
Page 18-24
18.29.2

Installation Requirements
The Contractor shall install the metal door frames to good verticality within a tolerance of 3mm.
Measurement of the verticality for all the metal door frames shall be submitted to the SO Rep before the
installation of door leaf. Door frames installed without good alignment and verticality shall be rejected.
The grouting of the joints between the door frame and the adjacent structure shall be carried out under
one separate operation. Before grouting, the door frame shall be checked for its verticality and proper
bracing. It is preferred that the door frame be installed after the block work.

18.30

HOT DIPPED GALVANISED RAILINGS TO STAIRCASE

Provide and install galvanised steel railings to staircase as shown in the Drawings. The galvanised steel
hollow section handrails, balusters, hollow section supports and flat bottom rails shall be to the
dimensions and sizes as shown. The galvanised steel hollow section supports shall be securely fixed into
the structure as detailed. All welded joints shall be fully welded and shall be properly sanded down to a
smooth finish. Galvanised steel surfaces shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching
primer and one coat of lead and chromate-free primer and then painted with one undercoat and one
finishing coat of enamel paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.

18.31

HOT DIPPED GALVANISED GRATINGS

All galvanised gratings shall be zinc coated by the hot-dipped galvanising process in accordance with SS
117 or BS 729 Part 1. Every batches of galvanised gratings delivered to the Site shall be accompanied
by a certification letter or copy of invoice from the firm/company at which they are galvanised. For the
purposes of this clause only the term "gratings" shall be deemed to include the frames and their
miscellaneous components. Submit details of the galvanising treatment to the SO Rep for approval.
Thoroughly remove all welding slags from the gratings prior to galvanising them. Any welding slags found
remaining on galvanised gratings shall be rejected. Such rejected galvanised gratings shall be removed
from the Site immediately.
The galvanised gratings shall be tested for the zinc mass coating. The testing shall be performed at a
PSB accredited laboratory using magnetic or electronic thickness measuring devices.
Send all selected gratings for testing within one week of their delivery to the Site before their installation.
2% of the total number of gratings delivered to the Site subject to a minimum of three number of gratings
shall be selected for testing. The zinc mass coating to be tested shall be carried out at regular points on
the surfaces of the steel angles and flats. The total no. of points tested for each grating shall be not less
than 32. The results of the test at every point for one grating shall be averaged to determine the average
zinc coating weight of that grating.
The mass of zinc coating on each grating shall comply with the following average coating mass:
Average Coating Mass
(g per m2)

Minimum Permissible Value

(g per m2)

5mm thick and over

610

580

Under 5mm, but not less than 2mm

410

390

Under 2mm

350

330

Thickness Of Steel

Gratings which fail to achieve the requirements specified above shall be dealt with as follows:
(a)

The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a
charge against the Contractor for any grating where the zinc coating mass is less than the average
coating mass but greater than the minimum permissible value as specified.

(b)

The batch of galvanised gratings from which any one of the representative samples fails to achieve
the minimum permissible value as specified shall be rejected. In addition, the SO Rep shall
exercise his right under clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge against the
Contractor for each such failure. The rejected gratings may be sent for re-galvanising and may be
accepted if tests show that they comply with the requirements of the zinc mass coating.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(24)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-25
18.32

METAL GRILLE TO COURTYARD, STAIRCASE AND END ACCESS BALCONY

Provide and fix metal grille to courtyard (1st storey dwelling unit), to match with the front metal grille gate
and for staircase and end access balcony to the size and profile all as shown in the Drawings.

18.33

TEMPORARY BARRICADE MILD STEEL GATE

Where shown, provide and fix temporary barricade ms gate at first storey level to each and every
staircase. The profile, sizes, pattern etc shall be as shown in the Drawings. Fix temporary barricade as
and when required and instructed by the SO Rep. Remove such temporary barricades when required by
the SO Rep and to make good all Defect arising thereof.
Paint gate as specified in Section 23 - "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and subclauses
under it.

18.34

MILD STEEL RAILINGS TO STAIRCASES

Provide and install mild steel railings to staircases as shown in the Drawings. The mild steel hollow
section handrail, balusters, hollow section support and flat bottom rail shall be to the dimensions and sizes
as shown. The mild steel hollow section supports shall be securely fixed into the structure as detailed. All
welded joints shall be fully welded and all welding shall be properly sanded down to a smooth finish.

18.35

DIRECTIONAL SIGNBOARDS AND STOREY INDICATOR PLATES

Provide and fix directional signboards and storey indicator plates to sizes and at locations as shown in the
Drawings. The directional signboards and storey indicator plates shall be made of 2mm thick aluminium
alloy sheets or plates conforming to BS 1470 or ASTM B209 and finished with 15 microns thick anodic
coating. The fixing of these items shall be carried out with stainless steel screws with nylon plugs. Unless
otherwise specified, the letterings and numberings shall be engraved and painted in black.

18.36

MOTORISED ROLLER SHUTTER TO CENTRALISED REFUSE CHAMBER

18.36.1

Scope
Provide and install motorised roller shutter complete with channel guide, shutter motor, angle bolts,
bottom rail and other necessary components in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to
centralised refuse chamber.

18.36.2

Material
The motorised roller shutter shall be of 0.5mm thick (minimum) zincalume steel curtain permanently lockseamed to form a continuous curtain or 0.8mm thick (minimum) galvanised steel or 1.6mm thick natural
anodised aluminium curtain interlocking slats with end clips to secure laterally. The guide rails of the roller
shutter shall be made of aluminium.
Provide a seamless PVC weatherseal at the base of the rail. Secure the curtain top and wrap it around
the drum assembly. Provide box housing of similar material as the curtain to house the entire drum
assembly and integral chainwheel complete with chain for manual operation.
Provide perforation slots of 100mm x 25mm spaced at 400mm apart to approximately the top one-third of
the curtain height to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide edge-treatment to prevent metal to metal
contact between the curtain and the guides during operation.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(25)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-26
18.36.3

Coating
Aluminium shutter shall be natural anodised to 25 microns (minimum). Galvanised steel and zincalume
steel shutter shall be finished with 25 microns (minimum) colourbond silicone modified polyester coating.
The finishing colour of the coating shall be selected by the SO Rep.

18.36.4

Power Supply And Operating System

Tap power supply for the motor and all control devices of the motorised roller shutter from a 10 Ampere
TPN isolator in the centralised refuse chamber. Connect with electrical wiring from the isolator to the
motor. Provide a built-in-auto-stop safety device to the system so that the roller shutter shall automatically
stop and reverse when it is obstructed during the closing operation. Either limit switch or motor overload
device shall be used for the activation of the stop and reverse action.
Provide push-button switches enclosed in a weatherproof plastic control box and mount it inside a recess
opening (325mm height x 225mm width x 160mm depth) located outside and on the right hand side of the
centralised refuse chute chamber viewing from the front. Provide the control box with "Camlock" model "L
& F" A/CR 11 or 16 with key No. 01/3S/N65; or other approved. The control box shall contain "Up",
"Down" and "Stop" buttons and one lever override control to switch from electrical to manual operation.
Indicating arrows pointing upwards and downwards shall be marked on the "Up" and "Down" buttons.
The motorised roller shutter shall stop automatically after the end of the opening or closing operation. The
"Down" button shall be incorporated with a delay timer to enable the motorised roller shutter to commence
closing after a preset time upon activation of the "Down" button. The setting range of the timer shall be
from 0 to 3 minutes. Set the timer at the 1 minute value.
A second lever override control shall be provided within the centralised refuse chamber. When activated,
all lever override controls shall enable the roller shutter to be lifted up (minimum 1.5m height) manually
from the outside as well as from the inside. The outside control shall enable entry to the refuse chamber
in case of electrical breakdown or other emergency. The operator shall then be able to roll up the shutter
using the chain provided within the chamber.

18.36.5

Workshop Drawings
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide.
Submit workshop drawings showing all the detailed sections, plans, relevant details and accessories to
the SO Rep for approval prior to ordering the system.

18.37

CONTRACT SIGNBOARD
Provide, erect and maintain a contract signboard. The size of the contract signboard shall not be smaller
than the dimensions shown in the Drawings. However, the other details shown in the Drawings shall
serve as a guide. Before erecting the contract signboard, submit details and drawings of the proposed
contract signboard for the approval of the SO Rep. The position and location of the contract signboard at
the Site shall be approved by the SO Rep. The contract signboard shall be erected within one month from
the commencement of the Works and shall not be taken down without prior approval of the SO Rep.

18.38

STAINLESS STEEL PLAQUE AT FIRST STOREY LIFT LOBBY

Provide and fix one number 2mm thick (minimum) stainless steel plaque to first storey lift lobby of size as
shown in the Drawings. The exact position shall be decided and approved on the Site by the SO Rep.
The stainless steel shall be of Grade 304 and shall be in hair-line finish. Fixing of the plaque shall be by
heavy duty high bond double sided adhesive tapes. All letterings and numberings shall be engraved and
painted in black. HDB symbol (logo) shall be engraved and painted in red.
Regardless of the number of building block in the Contract, only one number stainless steel plaque shall
be provided.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(26)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-27
18.39

HOUSE NUMBER
(a)

For Flat
Provide and fix wrought iron house number to each and every unit of flats. The house number
shall be fixed on to wrought iron steel plate by heavy duty high bond double sided adhesive tapes
or other concealed method. The wrought iron steel plate shall be painted in a colour matching the
wrought iron steel gate. The painting of wrought iron house number shall similar to the wrought
iron steel gates. The colour of the house number shall be approved by the SO Rep and the house
number shall be clearly visible. All numberings shall be as shown in the Drawings.

(b)

For Shops And Other Premises

Unless otherwise specified, provide and fix bronze anodised aluminium or powder coated
aluminium house number to each and every unit of shops and other premises. The house number
shall be fixed by heavy duty high bond double sided adhesive tapes or other concealed method.
The anodic coating to aluminium shall be 15 microns minimum. All numberings shall be as shown
in the Drawings.

18.40

SIGN PLATES FOR SERVICE ROOMS

Provide and fix sign plates to all services rooms as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified,
the sign plates shall be fixed on the doors. The thickness of sign plates shall be as shown in the
Drawings. The "Danger" sign plates shall be fixed onto door leaf and shall not block the ventilation
louvres. The letterings shall be engraved in red.
The "No Smoking" sign plates shall be provided for all switchrooms, PUB switchrooms and lift machine
rooms.

18.41

SIGN PLATES FOR SERVICE DUCTS

Provide and fix sign plates to service ducts as shown in the Drawings. The sign plates shall be fixed at
position as shown in the Drawings.

18.42

LIFT NOTICE SIGNAGE FOR TYPICAL UPPER STOREY

Provide and fix lift notice signages to the walls of every lift landing from the second storey to the top most
storey. The position of the signages shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signages shall be made from
powder coated extruded aluminium frame with sign face using powder coated aluminium sheet cut outs
with sign face of acrylic sheet as shown. The acrylic sheet shall be reverse silkscreen graphics. The floor
number indication shall be 3-dimensional injection moulded letterings. The wordings on the aluminium
sheet shall be silkscreen printed and the colour shall be approved by the SO Rep. Seek and obtain
approval from the SO Rep on the actual block number, block layout plan, the design for the logo and
telephone number before providing the lift notice signages. The logo and telephone number of essential
maintenance services shall be provided in reverse self-adhesive sticker. The signages shall have an
additional housing using extruded polycarbonate frame and acrylic panels as shown in the Drawings.
The entire sign hall be mounted onto the wall as shown in the Drawings. Provide shop drawings and a
sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations.
The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with subclause
18.13.3. "Polyester Powder Coating". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.

18.43

LIFT NOTICE SIGNAGE AND NOTICE BOARD AT FIRST STOREY LIFT LOBBY
Provide and fix lift notice signage and notice board to the wall at the first storey lift lobby. The position
shall be as shown in the Drawings.
The signages shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with sign face using powder
coated aluminium sheet. The thickness of the aluminium frame and aluminium sheet shall be as shown in
the Drawings. The block number indication shall be of 3-dimensional injection moulded letterings. It shall
be attached with a notice board with an openable door panel. The hinges for the doors shall be
concealed. The sign face of the notice board shall be polycarbonate panel with reverse silkscreen
graphics and letterings.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(27)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-28
18.43

LIFT NOTICE SIGNAGE AND NOTICE BOARD AT

FIRST STOREY LIFT LOBBY (CONTD)
Seek and obtain approval from the SO Rep on the actual block number, block layout plan, the design for
the logo and telephone number before providing the lift notice signages. The logo and telephone number
of essential maintenance services shall be provided in reverse self-adhesive sticker. Hardwood frame with
softboard covered with fine felt of approved colour shall be fitted in the notice board. The notice board
shall be provided with light tube for illumination. The signages shall have additional housing using
extruded polycarbonate frame and acrylic panels as shown in the Drawings. The entire sign shall be
mounted onto the walls as shown in the Drawings.
The details shown shall serve as a guide. Site measurements shall be taken prior to the fabrication of the
lift notice plate, notice board and casing. Provide shop drawings to the SO Rep for approval prior to the
installation of the plate.
Provide and fix all electrical cables, ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting
accessories including connection with wiring from the nearest connection box.
Site measurements shall be taken prior to the fabrication of the lift notice signages and notice boards.
Provide shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations.
The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with subclause
18.13.3. "Polyester Powder Coating". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.

18.44

PRECINCT DIRECTIONAL SIGNBOARD

The Contractor shall provide and fix precinct directional signboard to the details as shown in the
Drawings. The locations and number of precinct directional signboards shall be as shown in the Drawings.
The signboard shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with an openable door
panel. The hinges for the door panel shall be concealed. The thickness of the extruded aluminium frame
shall be as shown in the Drawings. Approved gasket shall be used along the main frame to ensure the
signboard is watertight. The frame shall be reinforced with zinc plated mild steel brackets as shown in the
Drawings. The signboard shall have powder coated aluminium sign face cut out compartment with A2 size
panel map sign face using acrylic sheet with reverse silkscreen graphics. The bottom of the signage shall
be perforated with holes as shown. The thickness of the aluminium sheet and acrylic sheet shall be as
shown in the Drawings. The signboard shall be fitted with luminaries for illumination. The whole signboard
shall be mounted to a concrete slab as shown in the Drawings. The precinct layout shall be made known
later in the course of the Works.
Submit shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations.
Provide and fix all electrical cables, ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting
accessories including connection with wiring from the nearest connection box.
The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with
subclause18.13.3 "Polyester Powder Coating". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the
SO Rep.

18.45

SIGNBOARD FOR BLOCK ENTRANCE

Provide and fix one number of signboard for the block entrance to the details as shown in the Drawings
for each building block. The signboard shall be located at the position as decided by the SO Rep. The
signboard shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with an openable door panel.
The hinges for the door panel shall be concealed. The thickness of the aluminium frame shall be as
shown in the Drawings. Approved gasket shall be used along the main frame to ensure the signboard is
watertight. The frame shall be reinforced with zinc plated mild steel brackets with washers and screws as
shown in the Drawings. The signboard shall have powder coated aluminium sign face cut out text
mounted with 3-dimensionmal injection moulded lettering/number. The signboard shall be perforated with
holes as shown. The thickness of the aluminium sheet and acrylic sheet shall be as shown in the
Drawings. The signboard shall be fitted with luminaries for illumination. The whole signboard shall be
mounted to a concrete slab as shown in the Drawings.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(28)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-29
18.45

SIGNBOARD FOR BLOCK ENTRANCE (CONTD)

Submit shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations.
Provide and fix all electrical cables. ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting
accessories including connection with wiring from the nearest connection box.
The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with subclause
18.13.3. "Polyester Powder Coating". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.

18.46

ILLUMINATED DIRECTIONAL SIGNANGES FOR ESTATE BLOCK

Provide and fix one number of illuminated directional signage for estate block per ingress as shown in the
Drawings. The signage shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with an openable
door panel. The hinges for the door panel shall be concealed. The sign face shall be polycarbonate with
text using transparent vinyl sticker reverse paste. The thickness of the aluminium frame and
polycarbonate shall be as shown in the Drawings. Powder coated aluminium sheet shall be attached to
the signages as shown in the Drawings. The directional signages shall be mounted to a 100mm diameter
powder coated aluminium support in ribbed detail and interlock with powder coated multi slot ring. The
entire sign shall be mounted to the floor embedded down to the ground as shown in the Drawings. The
actual block numbers shall be made known later in the course of the Works.
Submit shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations.
Provide and fix all electrical cables, ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting
accessories including connection with wiring from the nearest connection box.
The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with subclause
18.13.3. "Polyester Powder Coating". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.

18.47

DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGES FOR ESTATE BLOCK

Provide and fix directional signages for estate blocks as shown in the Drawings. The locations and the
number of directional signages for estate blocks shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signages shall be
made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with sign face using polycarbonate with text front
sticker paste using reflective stickers. The thickness of the aluminium sheet and polycarbonate shall be as
shown in the Drawings. Powder coated aluminium sheet shall be attached to the signages as shown in
the Drawings. The directional signages shall be mounted to a 100mm diameter powder coated aluminium
pole interlock with powder coated multi slot ring. A panel to house the layout map shall be provided as
shown. The panel shall be powder coated aluminium sheet of the thickness as shown with sign face of
acrylic sheet with reverse silkscreen graphics. It shall be mounted to the powder coated aluminium
support interlock with powder coated multi slot ring. The entire sign shall be mounted to the floor
embedded down to the ground as shown in the Drawings. The actual block numbers shall be made known
later in the course of the Works.
Submit shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations.
The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with subclause
18.13.3. "Polyester Powder Coating". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.

18.48

FASTENING DEVICES FOR ALL EXTERNAL BUILDING FEATURES AND ATTACHMENTS

SUCH AS FLUOROCARBON COATED ALUMINIUM SUNBREAKERS, LOUVRES & PANEL
For all external building features and attachments like aluminium sunbreakers, cladding , clothes drying
racks, roof features; and metal railings/parapets exposed to the weather like those along common access
and private balconies .
The screws, bolts and nuts, rivets, brackets and other fastening devices shall be of stainless steel. The
finished stainless steel rivets shall have a combined large circular flat disc and dome-shaped head after
formation. The design and use of the stainless steel rivets shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.

BLDG04/S18.DOC(29)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 18-30
18.48

FASTENING DEVICES FOR ALL EXTERNAL BUILDING FEATURES AND ATTACHMENTS

SUCH AS FLUOROCARBON COATED ALUMINIUM SUNBREAKERS, LOUVRES & PANEL
(CONT'D)
In the situation where the fastening devices like bolts and nuts are to be embedded in concrete or
approved structural grout, approved galvanised bolts and nuts and other approved galvanised fastening
devices can be used. The requirements in this clause shall take precedence over those specified in other
clauses on external building features and attachments and roof features, on the use of screws, bolts and
nuts, rivets and brackets and other fastening devices

Total pages for this Section :

30
Section 19/.....

BLDG04/S18.DOC(30)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 19-1
SECTION 19
FLOOR FINISHES

19.1

NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SCREED

19.1.1

Cement
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement as specified in Clause 4.1 "Cement".

19.1.2

Aggregate
Aggregate shall comply with SS 31:1984. The maximum size of the aggregate shall be 10mm.

19.1.3

Preparation Of Surfaces
All surfaces to be screeded shall be clean and damp but not wet before commencement of screeding
work.

19.1.4

Locations
Non-structural concrete screed shall be of Grade 25 concrete with 10mm maximum size aggregate. It
shall be laid to floor surfaces in locations specified in Clause 19.2.6 "Schedule of Screed/Rendering" and
also to other locations as shown in the Drawings.
The screed shall be laid to fall towards water outlets or scupper drains and to finish to a surface directed
by the SO Rep.

19.1.5

Thickness
The minimum thickness of screed shall be 15mm for staircase half-landings and 25mm elsewhere or as
shown in the Drawings.

19.1.6

Finishing And Curing

All concrete screeds shall be finished with a minimum of two passes power trowel. The finishing shall be
done without any sprinkling of cement dust, cement grout or water to the surface of the screed. Ensure
that the crew of the finishing team is sufficient to complete the job before final set of the concrete screed.
The concrete screed shall be moist cured immediately for seven days or with approved curing compound
or other approved methods.
For areas that are not accessible for power trowelling, the screed shall be finished with hand steel
trowelling.

19.1.7

Reference Panel And Sample Panel

A "Reference Panel" shall be designated by the SO Rep reflecting the current standard of the industry
which is expected of the Contractor. The Contractor shall make himself available to view the designated
reference sample and establish a common understanding of the required standard.
At the commencement of screeding work, at least one "Sample Panel" shall be laid to the standard of the
Reference Panel. The Sample Panel shall be approved by the SO Rep and all remaining screeding shall
be carried out to the minimum standard of the approved Sample Panel. Sub-standard Works shall be
rejected and replaced to the established standard.

BLDG04/S19.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 19-2
19.2

CEMENT AND SAND SCREED/RENDERING

19.2.1

Pre-Packed Mortar Screed

Factory pre-packed dry-mixed screed shall be used for all floor screeding or floor tiling with cement and
sand mortar. Approved pre-packed waterproof screed (dry mix of cement and sand with powder
waterproofing additive) shall be used for areas where waterproof screed is specified. For mortar
screeding to other floor areas, which do not require waterproofing, approved pre-packed floor screed shall
be used.
The pre-packed floor screed and waterproof screed shall be mechanically mixed with the right amount of
water as specified by the manufacturer.
The pre-packed screed and pre-packed waterproofing screed shall comply with the following performance
requirements when subjected to the specified laboratory testing :

Prepacked Waterproofing Screed

S/No
1

Type of Evaluation

Testing Method

Average compressive strength

Water penetration under 0.2/kgf/cm

Shrinkage

Requirement

STM C107:92

2
25 N per mm

HDB Method (DIN 1084:Pt 5)

5mm at 28 days

Coutinho Ring

No crack

Prepacked Floor Screed

S/No

19.2.2

Type of Evaluation

Testing Method

Requirement

Average compressive strength

STM C107:92

2
25 N per mm

Shrinkage

Coutinho Ring

No crack

Preparation Of Surfaces
Before screeding, prepare the concrete surfaces by cleaning and damping slightly. Freshly laid screed,
where exposed to direct sunlight shall be kept damp and adequately cured to prevent shrinkage and
cracking.

19.2.3

Locations (Prepacked Screed/Rendering)

Unless otherwise specified, screed/rendering shall be laid to all floor surfaces as specified in
Clause 19.2.6 "Schedule Of Screed/Rendering" and also to other locations as shown in the Drawings.
Except for rendering to treads and risers of stairs, the rendering shall be laid to fall towards water outlets
or scupper drains, and finished to a level directed by the SO Rep. Pre-packed screed to treads of stairs
shall be laid level and finished to a consistent fine rough texture to give a non-skid surface. The minimum
thickness of the screed shall be 15mm or as shown in the Drawings.
Where waterproof membrane is applied around the pipes and water outlets, pre-packed waterproof screed
shall be laid to cover the waterproof membrane, as shown in the Drawings.

BLDG04/S19.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 19-3
19.2.4

Water Test To Internal Floor Slab

Water test shall be conducted to check the watertightness of the Bath/WC floor and the floor area
surrounding the pipes and water outlet in the kitchen and balcony.
In conducting the water test, the floor water outlet shall be blocked off temporarily with a polythene sheet
or by other suitable means and the floor shall be flooded with water to a minimum depth of 10mm for 24
hours. For water testing the area surrounding the pipes or water outlets in the kitchen and balcony where
floor tile is not provided, temporary blocking shall be provided to confine water around the pipes or water
outlets. The water blocking detail shall be effective to maintain the water for the entire period of testing,
for the test result to be accepted.
The underside of the floor slab and the base of the adjacent walls shall be checked for signs of leakage,
within half an hour after the test period.
Water test shall be conducted at the Bath/WC floor and the pipe surround and water outlet in the kitchen
and balcony at the following stages of work :

Stage Of Work

Frequency Of Water Test

Within one month after the application of the

waterproof membrane and the protective screed

All units

Within one month before handing over inspection

All units

In the event that any leakage occurs, the Contractor shall be required to rectify the defective Works as
directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense. After the rectification, the same water
test procedure shall be repeated.
19.2.5

Rendering To Lift Pit

Approved pre-packed mortar shall be used to render the lift pit. Unless otherwise shown, the rendering
shall be of an average thickness of 18mm.

19.2.6

Schedule Of Screed/Rendering
Unless otherwise specified, screed/rendering shall be laid to all floor surfaces as specified in the Schedule
below and also to other locations as shown in the Drawings :

Accommodation

3-Room and/or
4-Room and/or
5-Room

Location

Prepacked
Waterproof
Screed

Kitchen

Kitchen/Dining

Bath/WC
Service Balcony

*
*

Bedroom &
Living Room

Prepacked
Screed

*Denotes the specified screed/rendering.

BLDG04/S19.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Grade 25
Concrete
Screed

Remarks

Required only where

floor tiling is
specified for these
locations.

Bldg Spec
Page 19-4
19.2.6

Schedule Of Screed/Rendering (Cont'd)

Accommodation

Location
Wash Area Next
To Refuse Chute
Chamber
Wash Area

All Residential
Block Common
Areas

Prepacked
Waterproof
Screed

Prepacked
Screed

Grade 25
Concrete
Screed

*
Concrete screed
shall be used where
no floor tiling is
specified

Lift Lobby

Utility

Pump Room,
Switch Room &
MDF Room

Public Staircase
Landing

Access Corridor
& Void Deck

Risers & Treads

Of Public
Staircase

Room & Display

Area
Kitchen

Concrete screed
shall be used where
no floor tiling is
specified
No rendering is
required for precast
staircase

*
Waterproof screed
shall be used where
the shop is at the
2nd storey & above

Shop
Bath/WC

Service Yard
Market produce
Lock-Up Shop

Wet Market

Eating House

Restaurant

Display Area

Preparation Area

Toilet

Toilet

Bin Area

Switch Room
Refreshment
Area
Stall
(Preparation &
Serving Area)
Toilet/Bath/WC

Waterproof screed
shall be used where
the shop is at the
2nd storey & above
Waterproof screed
shall be used where
the wet market is at
the 2nd storey &
above
*

*
*
*

Wash Area

Bin Area

Room & Store

Kitchen & Toilet

Service Area

*Denotes the specified screed/rendering.

BLDG04/S19.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Remarks

Waterproof screed
shall be used where
the eating house is
at the 2nd storey &
above

Waterproof screed
shall be used where
the restaurant is at
the 2nd storey &
above

Bldg Spec
Page 19-5
19.3

WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE AT BATHROOM/TOILET,

KITCHEN AND BALCONY

19.3.1

Scope Of Work
The Contractor shall provide and lay a liquid-applied flexible cementitious waterproof membrane or other
approved flexible water-based waterproofing membrane to bathroom/toilet, kitchen and balcony. The
waterproof membrane shall be applied over the entire floor of the bathroom/toilet with an upturn onto the
pipes, door kerb and walls. The upturn shall be of min 50mm onto the pipes and 100mm onto the kerb
and walls.
In the kitchen and balcony, the waterproofing membrane shall be applied around the floor water outlets.
Application shall be limited to a radius of 400mm from the centre of the outlet unless otherwise specified.

19.3.2

Specification Of The Waterproofing Membrane

The flexible cementitious waterproof membrane or other approved water-based waterproofing membrane
shall comply with the following performance/product specifications when subjected to the specified
laboratory testing:
Characteristics/Properties

Testing Method

Specifications

- Fourier Transform Infrared

spectroscopic technique
(FTIR),
- Differential Thermal
Analysis (DTA), and
- Thermogravimetric Analysis
(TGA)

FTIR, DTA and TGA graphs of the

sample are to tally with the
approved product in polymer
characteristics and polymer
content.

Initial Hardness (Shore A)

* 7 days curing

ASTM D2240:95

> 40

Adhesion to substrate
* Condition as cast

ASTM D4541:93

0.3 N per mm2

ASTM C836:95

- No cracking at 2mm width.

- No crack after 10 cycles of
stretching and closing to a
width of 1mm.

Characterisation of Polymer

Crack bridging
* Condition as cast

Tensile strength
(N per mm2)
a)

Condition as cast

a)

> 1.5 N per mm

b)

}
}
} > 1.2 N per mm2
} and -ve change < 40%.
} No limit for +ve change
}
}
}
}

Change in strength (%):

b)

After ageing at 50C

for 14 days

c)

After 72 hrs chemical

immersion at room
temperature:
i) 0.5% (v/v) NaOCl
ii) 1.25% (v/v) NH4OH
iii) 3.7% (v/v) HCl

BLDG04/S19.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

ASTM D412:98a

c)

Bldg Spec
Page 19-6
19.3.2

Specification Of The Waterproofing Membrane (Cont'd)

Characteristics/Properties

Testing Method

Specifications

Elongation at break (%)

a) Condition as cast

a)

150%

b)

}
}
} > 120% and -ve change
} < 40%. No limit for +ve
} change
}
}
}
}

Change in elongation at
break (%):
b) After ageing at 50C for
14 days

ASTM D412:98a

c) After 72 hrs chemical

immersion at room
temperature:
i) 0.5% (v/v) NaOCl
ii) 1.25% (v/v) NH4OH
iii) 3.7% (v/v) HCl

c)

Chloride content

ISEA Method

< 0.1%

Resistance to Water
Penetration

Adopted DIN 1048:Pt 5:1991

No water penetration allowed at

0.2 kgf per cm2 for 6 hrs

Set-to-touch time
ie. RH 65 5 and 32 2C

ASTM D1640:1983 (1989)

Touch dry within 2 hours

Notes:

1.

The concrete test block for the application of membrane under ASTM 412 (98a) and
ASTM C836 (95) shall have a compressive strength of 40 5N per mm2.

2.

The thickness of the membrane applied for the testing shall be equal to or less than the
recommended thickness. It shall not deviate more than 0.2mm from the recommended
thickness.

Where the waterproofing membrane span across any joint which is likely to crack, the waterproofing
membrane shall be reinforced. To ensure compatibility with the waterproofing membrane, the
reinforcement shall form an integral part of the proprietary system for the flexible water-based
waterproofing membrane.
19.3.3

Application And Preparation Of Surface

The surface receiving the membrane shall be flat and even. For the surface of floor slab to be applied
with the membrane, the Contractor shall trowel the concrete to a level and smooth surface during casting.
Where concrete or brickwall surface receiving the membrane is rough and uneven, the Contractor shall be
required to level the surface with rendering.
45 degree mortar fillet with about 10mm leg length shall be formed to the edge between the floor and wall
or pipe. Prior to the application of the waterproofing membrane, the surface shall be prepared to be free
of dust and laitance, and wetted to damp without any surface water.
The Contractor shall apply the waterproofing membrane in two coats. The waterproof membrane if
packed in a two-part system shall be mechanically mixed with a proper mixer. The method of application
and the curing time between the two coats shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction
and/or recommendations. The Contractor shall provide measuring gauges for site checking of the wet film
thickness of the membrane at the time of application.

BLDG04/S19.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 19-7
19.4

CERAMIC FLOOR TILES (COMMON AREAS AND NON-RESIDENTIAL UNITS)

19.4.1

General
(a)

Location and Extent

Provide and lay structure/texture, glazed and unglazed ceramic floor tiles to common areas, nonresidential units and to any locations specified in the subclause Schedule of Ceramic Floor Tiles
hereunder and at other locations as shown in the Drawings.
Provide and fix 400mm x 80mm x 8mm thick or other approved matching glazed skirting tiles to
access balcony, columns and walls at the void deck. The skirting tile shall be round-edged at one
of the length. The Contractor shall submit a full range of colour glazed skirting tiles for the approval
of the SO Rep.

(b)

Inconsistent Sizes
In the event that the ceramic floor tiles delivered to the Site are inconsistent in sizes but fall within
the allowable tolerances as specified in this Clause including all subclauses under it, the tiles shall
be sorted out into separate groups of compatible sizes to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Tiles of
one size group shall be laid in one area separate from tiles belonging to other size groups.

19.4.2

Approved Ceramic Floor Tiles

The type of ceramic floor tiles provided by the Contractor as specified in this clause including all
subclauses under it shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The list of approved ceramic floor tiles
is posted at the following websites: kmo.eptc.com.sg or hdbuilders.com.
The SO Rep shall have the absolute prerogative to select the type of tiles from the list of approved
ceramic floor tiles for such locations as specified and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be made.
Notwithstanding any approval by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that all such ceramic floor tiles
for such locations as specified comply with the requirements as specified in this clause including all
subclauses under it.

19.4.3

Testing Requirements
(a)

Test Samples And Methods

All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The test
methods shall be in accordance with SS 483 unless otherwise stated.

(b)

Test Certificate And Compliance Requirement

Provide test certificates by a testing laboratory accredited under SINGLAS to cover the tests
mentioned in this clause and all other tests mentioned in the testing schedule.

19.4.4

Technical Specifications
Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance
with Table A unless otherwise stated :
Table A : Requirements Compliance

BLDG04/S19.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Type of tile

SS 483 : 2000

(a)

Structure/Texture Tile

Annex H

(b)

Glazed Tile

Annex J

(c)

Unglazed Tile

Annex H

Bldg Spec
Page 19-8
19.4.4

Technical Specifications (Contd)

(a)

Dimensions
The dimensions shall be as follows :
Nominal Length

Nominal Width

Nominal Thickness

Structure/Texture Tile

300mm

300mm

9mm

Glazed Tile

200mm

200mm

8mm

Unglazed Tile

200mm

200mm

8mm

The dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance to the following :

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

(b)

Structure/
Texture Tile

Glazed Tile

Length
The deviation, in %, of the
average length of each tile from
the average length of 10 test
specimens.

Not more than

0.6%

Not more than

0.75%

Not more
than 0.75%

Width
The deviation, in %, of the
average width of each tile from
the average width of 10 test
specimens.

Not more than

0.6%

Not more than

0.75%

Not more
than 0.75%

Thickness
The deviation, in %, of the
average thickness of each tile
from the average thickness of
10 test specimens.

Not more than

5%

Not more than

5%

Not more
than 5%

Unglazed Tile

Surface Quality
The tiles shall be free from objectionable surface blemishes such as projections, depressions,
flakes, hairline cracks and bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly
formed corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner.

(c)

Physical Properties

Water Absorption
Percent by mass

BLDG04/S19.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Structure/Texture Tile

Glazed Tile

Unglazed Tile

Max of 1%

Max of 6 %

Max of 1%

Bldg Spec
Page 19-9
19.4.4

Technical Specifications (Contd)

(d)

Chemical Properties
(i)

Staining Test

The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows :

Allow 3 or 4 drops of each of the test solutions (Methylene blue
solution, 10g/L and Potassium permanganate solution, 10g/L),
to fall on a fresh part of the test specimen. Place an
approximately 30mm diameter convex watch glass on the
applied drop in order to spread it to an approximately circular
area. Allow to remain for 24 hours and then rinse the surface
with running water and wipe with a damp cloth. If a stain
remains, thoroughly clean with a solution of the standard
cleaning agent.
Performance Criteria
The stain on the test specimen shall be able to be cleaned by
cleaning solution.

(ii)

Slip Resistance

The Slip resistance test method shall be in accordance with

SS 485:2001.
Performance Criteria
The test shall be conducted under wet conditions using a
pendulum friction test method with a classification of Y. The test
shall also be conducted under dry condition using dry floor
friction test method with a coefficient of friction of minimum 0.4.

(iii)

Colour Fastness And

Light-Fastness

The tiles shall be light-fast and no colour change shall be

detectable after exposure to ultra-violet radiation for 28 days.

(iv)

Reverse Staining
Test (for Glazed Tile
only)

The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows :

(a)

Five full pieces of tiles shall be selected and checked to

ensure that there are no Defect or damages. The tiles
shall also be checked for signs of tonality difference.

(b)

Dry the tiles in a ventilating oven at 105oC for 48 hours.

(c)

With the top or glazed surface facing downwards, pond

the biscuit (ie. back of the tile) with potable water over a
circular area of 50mm diameter and with a water height of
25mm. At interval of every 5 minutes, inspect with the
naked eye or prescription glasses if usually worn and
under sufficient light intensity (> 300 lux), the top or glazed
surface for signs of dark patches up to a total ponding
duration of 30 minutes.

(d)

Repeat the aforementioned test on another five pieces of

tiles but using methylene blue solution diluted at 2g of
methylene blue per litre.

(e)

Performance Criteria
The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on the
top or glazed surfaces.

BLDG04/S19.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 19-10
19.4.5

Schedule Of Ceramic Floor Tiles

Provide and lay ceramic floor tiles to locations as tabulated in the Schedule below including any other
areas not listed in this Schedule but as shown in the Drawings.
Accommodation

Location

Structured /
Textured tiles

Wash Area

Upper Floor Lift Lobby

Ground Floor Lift Lobby

Access Balcony

Void Deck

Utility Room At Ground Floor

Lift Lobby

Toilet Adjoining Utility Room

Eating House

Shoplet,
Lock-Up Shop
Market Produce
Shop,
Market Produce,
Lock-Up Shop

Mini-Market
Restaurant

Glazed
tiles

Refuse Chute Chamber

Common
Areas

Unglazed
tiles

Stall
(Preparation And Serving Area)

Refreshment Area

Toilet/Bath/W.C

Bin Area

Preparation Slab

Wash Area

Toilet/Bath/W.C

Display Area

Bin Area

Preparation Area

Toilet

Toilet

Bin Area

Floor

Toilet

*
*Denotes the specified tile

19.4.6

Laying of Floor Tiles

The lift lobby, wash area, void deck and access balcony including the scupper drains shall be tiled. The
structured/textured ceramic floor tiles shall be laid to fall evenly towards water outlets. Movement joints
shall be provided at appropriate locations and approved by the SO Rep. Movement joints shall be
provided at not more than 6m centres. UPVC expansion/movement joints shall be used and its colour
shall match the floor tiles and approved by the SO Rep.
Provide complete set of workshop drawings showing the laying pattern of floor tiles and/or wall tiles of void
deck, lift lobbies and access balconies, wash areas and other locations where tiling work is indicated. The
workshop drawings shall include plans, elevations, detailed section and other relevant details required by
the SO Rep. These drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the laying of floor tiles
and/or wall tiles.

BLDG04/S19.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 19-11
19.5

CERAMIC FLOOR TILES (KITCHEN, KITCHEN/DINING, BATH/WC AND WC)

19.5.1

General
(a)

Location and Extent

Provide and lay ceramic floor tiles to kitchen, kitchen/dining, bath/wc, wc and to any locations
specified in the subclause Schedule Of Ceramic Floor Tiles To Kitchen, Kitchen/Dining, Bath/WC
And WC hereunder and at other locations as shown in the Drawings.

(b)

Inconsistent Sizes
The tiles shall be sorted out at the factory into two size groups with each size group having the size
range of 1 mm. Tiles of one size group shall be laid in one area separate from tiles belonging to
other size group. There shall be clear indication of the size group in the tile boxes. This is required
even if the sizes are within the dimensional tolerance allowed for the production variations spelt out
in the subclause Technical Specifications specified hereunder.

19.5.2

Approved Ceramic Floor Tiles

The type of ceramic floor tiles provided by the Contractor as specified in this clause including all
subclauses under it shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The list of approved ceramic flooe tiles
is posted at the following websites: kmo.eptc.com.sg or hdbuilders.com.
The SO Rep shall have the absolute prerogative to select the type of tiles from the list of approved
ceramic floor tiles for such locations as specified and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be made.
Notwithstanding any approval by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that all such ceramic floor tiles
for such locations as specified comply with the requirements as specified in this clause including all
subclauses under it.
The colour of ceramic floor tiles for such locations as specified in the schedule of the said subclause shall
be BLUE and/or PINK and/or BEIGE and/or GREY. Provide samples of ceramic floor tiles with the colour
range as specified for selection and approval by the SO Rep.

19.5.3

Testing Requirements
(a)

Test Samples And Methods

All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The test
methods shall be in accordance with SS 483 : 2000 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated.

(b)

Test Certificate And Compliance Requirement

Provide test certificates by a testing laboratory accredited under SINGLAS to cover the tests
mentioned in this clause and all other tests mentioned in the testing schedule.

19.5.4

Technical Specifications
Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance
with SS 483 : 2000 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated :
(a)

Dimensions
The dimensions shall be as follows :
Nominal Length
Nominal Width
Thickness

:
:
:

300mm
300mm
9mm

and/or
Nominal Length
Nominal Width
Thickness

: 200mm
: 200mm
:
8mm

and/or as directed by the SO Rep

BLDG04/S19.DOC(11)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 19-12
19.5.4

Technical Specifications (Contd)

(a)

Dimensions (Contd)
The dimensional tolerances shall be as follows :
:

Average length of each tile shall not deviate by more than 1mm from
the average length of 10 test specimens.

(ii) Width

Average width of each tile shall not deviate by more than 1mm from
the average width of 10 test specimens.

(iii) Thickness

Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than 5%

from the average thickness of 10 test specimens.

(i)

(b)

Length

Surface Quality
The tiles shall be free from objectionable surface blemishes such as projections, depressions,
flakes, hairline cracks and bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly
formed corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner.

(c)

Physical Properties
The water absorption shall be a maximum of 6%.

(d)

Chemical Properties
(i)

Staining Test

The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows :

Allow 3 or 4 drops of each of the test solutions (Methylene blue
solution, 10g/L and Potassium permanganate solution, 10g/L),
to fall on a fresh part of the test specimen. Place an
approximately 30mm diameter convex watch glass on the
applied drop in order to spread it to an approximately circular
area. Allow to remain for 24 hours and then rinse the surface
with running water and wipe with a damp cloth. If a stain
remains, thoroughly clean with a solution of the standard
cleaning agent.
Performance Criteria
The stain test result shall be as follow :
Location
Kitchen
Bath/WC
Where ;

(ii) Slip Resistance

(for Bath/WC only)

Methylene Blue
Class 1
Class 2

Potassium Permanganate
Class 2
Class 2

Class 1 = Stain removed by water;

Class 2 = Stain removed by cleaning agent.

Slip resistant properties shall be required and test carried out for
ceramic floor tiles to bath/WC.
The slip resistance test method shall be in accordance with SS
485:2001. The test shall be conducted under wet conditions
using a pendulum friction test method with a classification of X.
The test shall also be conducted under dry condition using dry
floor friction test method with a coefficient of friction of minimum
0.4.

(iii) Colour Fastness And

Light-Fastness

BLDG04/S19.DOC(12)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

The tiles shall be light-fast and no colour change shall be

detectable after exposure to ultra-violet radiation for 28 days.

Bldg Spec
Page 19-13
19.5.4

Technical Specifications (Contd)

(d)

Chemical Properties (Contd)

(iv)

Colour Fastness And

Light-Fastness

The tiles shall be light-fast and no colour change shall be

detectable after exposure to ultra-violet radiation for 28 days.

(v)

Reverse Staining
Test

The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows :

(a)

Five full pieces of tiles shall be selected and checked to

ensure that there are no Defect or damages. The tiles
shall also be checked for signs of tonality difference.

(b)

Dry the tiles in a ventilating oven at 105oC for 48 hours.

(c)

With the top or glazed surface facing downwards, pond

the biscuit (ie. back of the tile) with potable water over a
circular area of 50mm diameter and with a water height of
25mm. At interval of every 5 minutes, inspect with the
naked eye or prescription glasses if usually worn and
under sufficient light intensity (> 300 lux), the top or glazed
surface for signs of dark patches up to a total ponding
duration of 30 minutes.

(d)

Repeat the aforementioned test on another five pieces of

tiles but using methylene blue solution diluted at 2g of
methylene blue per litre.

(e)

Performance Criteria
The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on the
top or glazed surfaces.

19.5.5

Schedule Of Ceramic Floor Tiles To Kitchen,

Kitchen/Dining, Bath/WC And WC
Provide and lay ceramic floor tiles to locations as shown in the Schedule below and including any other
locations not listed in this Schedule but as shown in the Drawings. Ceramic floor tiles shall not be
provided to the kitchen floor of 5-Room and Executive flats and the service balcony of Executive flats.

Accommodation

3-Room and/or
4-Room and/or
5-Room

Location

Glazed ceramic tiles

200mm x 200 x 8mm
(Nominal Size)

Kitchen

Kitchen/Dining

Bath/WC

Service Balcony

*Denotes the specified tile

BLDG04/S19.DOC(13)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Glazed ceramic tiles

300mm x 300mm x 9mm
(Nominal Size)

Bldg Spec
Page 19-14
19.6

LAYING OF CERAMIC FLOOR TILES

19.6.1

Workshop Drawings
Provide complete sets of workshop drawings showing the laying patterns of ceramic floor tiles and wall
tiles in kitchen, kitchen/dining, bath/wc, lift lobby, courtyard and other locations where tiling work is
indicated. The workshop drawings shall include plans, elevations, detailed sections and other relevant
details required by the SO Rep. These drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to
the laying of ceramic floor tiles, ceramic wall tiles and white glazed wall tiles. The ceramic floor tiles shall
be laid with its joints to coincide with the joints of wall tiles.

19.6.2

Pre-Packed Mortar Screed

Approved pre-packed screed and waterproof screed shall be used for all floor screeding required or floor
tiling, as shown in the schedule for rendering/screeding in Clause 19.2.6 "Schedule of Screed/Rendering".
The pre-packed screed and pre-packed waterproof screed shall be mechanically mixed with the right
amount of water as specified by the manufacturer.
The pre-packed floor screed and pre-packed waterproof screed shall comply with the following
performance when subjected to the specified laboratory testing :

S/No
1

Prepacked Waterproof Screed

Type of Evaluation
Testing Method
Average compressive strength
STM C107:92
2

2
25 N per mm

Water penetration under 0.2/kgf/cm

HDB Method (DIN 1084:Pt 5)

5mm at 28 days

Shrinkage

Coutinho Ring

No crack

S/No

19.6.3

Requirement

Type of Evaluation

Prepacked Floor Screed

Testing Method

Requirement

Average compressive strength

STM C107:92

25 N per mm

Shrinkage

Coutinho Ring

No crack

Workmanship
Lay ceramic floor tiles with tile joints coinciding with the joints of wall tiles and to the approval of the SO
Rep.
The tiles shall be laid to form an even and flat finished surface, with consistent joint width. Where there is
a water outlet, the floor tiles shall be laid evenly towards the water outlet. Each tile shall be fully bonded to
the floor rendering without hollow sound upon tapping.
The contractor shall use tile spacers for laying of floor tiles to achieve consistent joint width. The tile
spacers to be used shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep before the commencement of the
tiling Works.

19.6.4

Storage and Protection

All tiles shall be handled with care to avoid breakage and chipping. They shall be stored in their original
packaging in a clean, dry area to avoid damage and contamination.
The Contractor shall provide temporary polyethylene sheet or other protective material to cover the whole
finished floor to protect it against damage or staining by cement and plaster splashing or dropping and all
other subsequent trades.
The protective material shall be sufficiently thick, impermeable to water and non-staining in wet and dry
conditions. It shall also be tough so that it cannot be torn or punctured easily at site.

BLDG04/S19.DOC(14)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 19-15
19.6.4

Storage and Protection (Contd)

The protective material shall be provided immediately during and after laying of tiles. Prior to laying of the
protective material, the Contractor shall carefully inspect the finished floor and ensure that the tiling is
completed with the workmanship to the SO Rep satisfaction. All tiled areas shall be thoroughly cleaned
before laying of the protective material.
The Contractor shall be required to carry out regular maintenance to ensure that the protection is firmly in
place and in serviceable condition at all times. The protective material shall not be removed until such
time that all other works have been completed and the building is ready for handover.

19.6.5

Inspection
Prior to the commencement of tiling Works, carefully inspect the installed Works of all other trades and
verify that all such Works are complete up to the point that tiling can properly commence.

19.6.6

Mortar Bed
(i)

Waterproofing System To Bath/WC And Kitchen

After the waterproof membrane is applied to the floor and is cured sufficiently, prepacked
waterproof screed of minimum 10mm shall be laid to the membrane as protection layer against
damage from other trades.
Before floor tiling, the surface shall be swept clean of any sand, loose mortar, grease and dirt. Lay
prepacked waterproof screed to form the mortar bed to the required level with a fall evenly towards
the water outlet as specified in the Drawings. The mortar bed shall be cured for at least 3 days
before laying the tiles.

(ii)

Floor Tiling At Areas Without Waterproofing

Prepare the concrete surface to be clean of any sand, loose mortar, grease and dirt. Lay
prepacked mortar mix to form the mortar bed to the required level with a fall evenly towards the
water outlet where specified in the Drawings. The mortar bed shall be allowed to cure for at least 3
days before laying the tiles.

19.6.7

Bedding Mortar For Fixing the Tiles

The Contractor shall use pre-approved tile adhesive and shall submit the brand and method of application
to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the tiling Works.
The tile adhesive shall be applied onto the surface of floor tile screed then notch-trowelled to a finishes
thickness not exceeding the manufacturers recommendation. The area of application shall not exceed
1m2. in each application. The tile adhesive shall also be spread uniformly over the back of each tile, taking
care to fill deep keys and all remaining depressions. The tile shall then be placed into the position within
the specified open time and be tapped firmly into position to ensure that each tile is made fully contact
over the whole area.
The tile adhesive shall be stored and used in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

BLDG04/S19.DOC(15)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 19-16
19.6.8

Grouting To Tile Joints

Approved tile grouts shall be used to fill the joints between floor tiles. They shall be used in all floor tiling
Works to residential units and common areas except for water tanks.
The grouts shall have good working characteristics, low shrinkage and good adhesion to the sides of the
joints. They shall be suited for the width of the joints and intended use of the tiling application.
The Contractor shall submit the brand and method of application to the SO Rep for approval prior to the
commencement of the tiling Works. The Contractor shall submit samples of the grouts to the SO Rep for
selection of colours to match the tiling Works.

19.6.8.1

Material
The proprietary grouts shall be modified by the inclusion of various polymer additives. They shall be easy
to prepare, apply and clean up at the Site.
The grouts shall comply with ANSI A118.6-1992. A sample for each type of grouts shall be taken at the
Site and tested at an accredited laboratory according to the following requirements :
S/N

Characteristics

Test Method

Performance Criteria

Linear shrinkage

ANSI A118.6-92 H-4.3

0.2% at 7 days

Water absorption

ANSI A118.6-92 H-4.4

10% - Immersion to dry

Compressive strength

ANSI A118.6-92 H-4.5

15N per mm at 28 days

Tensile strength

ANSI A118.6-92 H-4.7

2.4N per mm at 28 days

Flexural strength

ANSI A118.6-92 H-4.8

5N per mm at 7 days

The grouts shall be light-fast and colour-fast. Their colours shall not fade or show inconsistent tones for
the whole tiling Works.
19.6.8.2

Application
The proprietary grouts shall be stored and used in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Where coloured grouts are required, the potential risk of staining shall be verified by applying the grout to
a few tiles in a small trial area. Coloured grouts shall be cleaned off promptly in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions as it may be difficult to remove them from matt glazed tiles, tiles with textured
surfaces and some unglazed tiles.
The grouting shall be provided in accordance with the following :
(i)

The grouting shall commence within 7 days upon completion of tile fixing;

(ii)

Ensure that all building dust and debris are removed from the open joints;

(iii)

Mechanically mix the grout in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions;

(iv)

Spread the grout with a rubber squeegee or grouting trowel, working back and forth over the area
until the joints are completely filled;

(v)

Remove surplus grout from the tiles with the aid of a rubber squeegee or grouting trowel and a
damp, but not wet, cloth;

(vi)

Tool the joints with a piece of wood or other material of suitable size and shape;

(vii)

After the grout has dried, the tile surface shall be cleaned and given a final polish using a clean, dry
cloth.

All grout joints shall be uniformly finished. Cushion edge tiles shall be finished evenly to the depth of the
cushion.

BLDG04/S19.DOC(16)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 19-17
19.6.9

Other Materials
Any other material not specifically described but required for a complete and proper laying of the ceramic
floor tiles shall be provided by the Contractor at its own cost and expense, but subject to the approval of
the SO Rep.

19.6.10

Cleaning Up
Upon completion of grouting, thoroughly clean all the exposed surfaces of the ceramic tiles.
The tiles shall thoroughly be cleaned before the handing over. The Contractor shall use tile-cleaning
agents to clean all finished surfaces. The tile cleaner shall be an effective blend of penetrants which could
instantly penetrate deep into mortar and scale on tiles surface and remove the mortar completely. The tile
cleaner shall be safe to use and does not harm or burn the skin. The tile cleaner shall be prepared and
used according to the manufacturer's instructions.

19.6.11

Damage And Replacement

In the event of any damage to the ceramic tiles and accessories, the Contractor shall immediately make
all repairs and replacements necessary to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and
expense.

Total pages for this Section :

17

Section 20/.....

BLDG04/S19.DOC(17)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 20-1
SECTION 20
WALL FINISHES

20.1

APPROVED MATERIALS FOR PLASTERING AND SKIMMING WORKS

20.1.1

Mortar Mix For Plastering Works

The Contractor shall use approved pre-mixed mortar system or approved pre-packed mortar mix for all
plastering works on brick walls, solid block walls and RC surfaces. Plastering of RC surfaces shall be
restricted to internal surfaces only.
The pre-mixed mortar system shall be a fully automated system that stores, conveys and mixes mortar for
instant application. The pre-packed mortar mix shall be in bag form and shall be mixed mechanically
according to the manufacturer's recommendation. The Contractor shall submit a work method statement
to the SO Rep for approval.
The pre-packed mortar mix shall comply with the following performance requirements and product
specification when subjected to the specified laboratory testing :
Prepacked Mortar Mix
S/No

Type of Evaluation

Testing Method

Tensile Adhesion
Strength

Tensile adhesion strength test according to

HDB method on a sample cured for 14 days
under shaded ambient condition. Twelve
spots on the sample slab shall be tested.

Shear Adhesion
Strength

Shear adhesion test according to HDB method

on a sample cured for 14 days under shaded
ambient condition. Six spots on the sample
slab shall be tested.

Average Shrinkage

ASTM C 531 2000

Compressive Strength
28 days

Consistence
Retentivity

Water Retentivity

Setting
Time

Initial set

Average strength
2
> 0.75 N per mm
Individual strength
2
> 0.60 N per mm
Average strength
2
> 1.00 N/mm
Individual strength
2
> 0.70 N/mm
< 0.10%
2

12 - 20 N/mm
BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998

> 65%
> 95%

BS 4551 : Part 1: 1998

Final set

20.1.2

Requirement

> 240 mins

360 mins
< 500 mins

Polymer Content

Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA

0.8% min. by mass

Product Identification
Analysis

Fourier Transformed Infrared

Spectrophotometric Analysis

The chemical blueprint shall

match the record of the
approved product

Skimming Materials
The Contractor shall use approved prepacked external skimcoat mix for skimming works on external RC
surface. The skimming works on other areas shall use approved internal skimcoat mix. The pre-packed
skimming materials shall be mechanically mixed with the amount of water as specified by the
manufacturer.

BLDG04/S9.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 20-2
20.1.2

Skimming Materials (Contd)

The pre-packed skimmed coat mix shall comply with the following performance requirements and product
specification when subjected to the specified laboratory testing :
Prepacked Internal Skim Coat Mix

S/No

Type of Evaluation

Testing Method

Requirement

Tensile Adhesion Strength Test

Tensile adhesion strength test

according to HDB method on a sample
cured for 14 days under shaded
ambient condition. Twelve spots on the
sample slab shall be tested.

Individual strength
> 0.60 N per mm2

Average strength
> 0.80 N per mm2

Average Shrinkage

ASTM C 531 2000

< 0.10%

Compressive Strength
28 days

BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998

7 - 12 N/mm

Water Retentivity

BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998

> 95%

Setting
Time

BS 4551 : Part 1: 1998

> 240 mins

360 mins

Polymer Content

Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA

1.0% min. by mass

Product Identification Analysis

Fourier Transformed Infrared

Spectrophotometric Analysis

The chemical blueprint

shall match the record of
the approved product

i)

Initial set

ii) Final set

< 500 mins

The tests and requirements for external skim coat mix shall comply with the table below :
Prepacked External Skim Coat Mix
S/No

Testing Method

Tensile Adhesion Strength Test

Tensile adhesion strength test

according to HDB method on a sample
cured for 14 days under shaded
ambient condition. Twelve spots on the
sample slab shall be tested.
Tensile adhesion strength tests after
accelerated weathering for 100 cycles*
of alternate heating and cooling. Twelve
spots on the sample slab shall be
tested.

Tensile adhesion strength tests

after accelerated weathering
for 100 cycles* of alternate
heating and cooling.

Average Shrinkage

ASTM C 531 2000

Compressive Strength
28 days

BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998

Water Retentivity

BLDG04/S9.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Type of Evaluation

Setting
Time

i)

Initial set

* Each cycle consist of 4 hours of

heating by UVA 340 lamps at 60C
and
then 10 minutes of intermittent water
spray to produce a thermal shock.

Requirement
Average strength
2
> 0.80 N per mm
Individual strength
2
> 0.60 N per mm

Loss of strength < 15%

(compared to 14-day
strength under normal
condition)

< 0.10%
2

7 - 12 N/mm
> 95%

BS 4551 : Part 1: 1998

ii) Final set

> 240 mins

360 mins
< 500 mins

Polymer Content

Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA

2.0% min. by mass

Product Identification Analysis

Fourier Transformed Infrared

Spectrophotometric Analysis

The chemical blueprint

shall match the record of
the approved product

Bldg Spec
Page 20-3
20.2

CONTROL OF PLASTER THICKNESS ON RC SURFACE

The overall thickness of plastering on RC surface shall not exceed 18mm. If the structural Works are
constructed with good alignment and surface condition, application of a thinner coat of plaster or skimming
is acceptable. The finished surface shall be smooth and true to plane and shape.

20.3

PLASTERING TO RC SURFACE
The RC surface shall be cleaned, using high-pressure water jet, such that the surface are free of dust,
residue form oil and organic growth prior to the application of the plaster. The Contractor shall allow the
Clerk-of-Works to check the background preparation before plastering. The prepacked mortar mix can be
applied to the RC surface without spatterdash. The first coat of the plaster to the RC surface shall be of a
thickness between 5 to 8mm and shall be pressed hard onto the surface during application. For better
bonding of the second coat, the first coat shall be lightly scratched and allowed to cure for at least 12
hours before the application of the second coat.

20.4

ADHESION STRENGTH OF PLASTER ON RC SURFACE

The Contractor shall conduct site pull-out tests on plasters applied on concrete surface according to
Schedule of Materials Tests. The first test at each building block shall be conducted at the early stage of
plastering Works. The remaining tests shall be spread out and be carried out progressively.
Each test shall cover five randomly selected spots to be conducted within 14 to 28 days after plastering.
The test spots shall be cored to a diameter of 50mm for the pull-out test. The average tensile pull-out
2
strength of the five spots shall achieve a minimum value of 0.50 N per mm . However, no individual
strength shall fall below 0.40 N per mm2.

20.5

SKIMMING TO THE EXTERNAL SURFACE OF REINFORCED CONCRETE MEMBERS

The surface of all reinforced concrete members forming part of the external facade shall be constructed to
good alignment and verticality such that no plastering is required to provide a good aesthetic appearance.
Where there are minor surface unevenness or blemishes, the RC surface shall be skim-coated with
approved external skimming materials. The skimming can be applied in one or two coats up to a total
thickness not exceeding 6mm. This requirement shall be applicable to external RC members of all storeys,
including the ground floor void deck structures.

20.5.1

Workmanship Of RC Works
The verticality of the peripheral RC members shall comply with the following tolerance, in accordance to
Grade II tolerance of SS CP 23.
Allowable Variation From The Plumb
Type Of RC Members/Surfaces

Within Each Floor

For Any Continuous

Height Of 10 Storeys

Exposed continuous column corners or other

conspicuous lines

10 mm

20 mm

Corner or surface of columns and walls etc

with continuity broken by beams or nibs or
other protrusions

10 mm

40 mm

To achieve the required structural workmanship, the Contractor shall be required to :

(a)

regularly check and maintain their formwork to be in a good and acceptable condition;

(b)

ensure proper and adequate bracing and strutting;

(c)

conduct thorough checking of plumb and alignment before casting.

BLDG04/S9.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 20-4
20.5.2

Measurement Of RC Works
At least fourteen(14) days before commencement of Works, the contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for
his approval the measurement plan and survey methods.
The areas of the Works to be measured and incorporated into the measurement plan and survey methods
shall, inter alia, include the following :
(a)

Verticality and alignment of corners of every building block

(b)

Verticality and alignment of columns

(c)

Verticality of walls

(d)

Straightness, horizontality, alignment and evenness of beams and slabs

The Contractor shall engage a competent person to carry out measurements of the plumb and alignment
of all external & internal columns, external and internal walls and external corners of the building blocks.
This measurement shall be carried out for every storey, including the first storey.
The Contractor shall be required to use a precision laser plummet capable of shooting a vertical laser
beam for up to 100mm in range and at an accuracy of at least 5 seconds; and a precision multidirectional laser marker capable of beaming right angle lines for up to 30m in range and has an accuracy
of at least 3mm at 10m horizontal and vertical distances.
Proper records of the RC verticality measurements shall be submitted to the SO Rep within one month
after casting of the RC members or any other period as instructed by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
highlight in their report all deviations that exceed the tolerance. Upon completion of the finishing work, the
Contractor shall carry out another measurement of the building block.
Proper records of all measurements made on the various areas of Works shall be kept by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall when directed by the SO Rep submit the records of measurements made in respect
of every building block before seeking his approval to proceed with the next stage of the Works
20.5.3

Rectification Of Misalignment And Surface Defects

The Contractor shall carry out structural rectification to the external RC members with poor alignment and
plumb, poor construction joint, honeycombed and badly formed surfaces to the satisfaction of the SO Rep
all at the Contractor's cost and expense. The structural rectification of such Defect shall commence not
later than two months after casting.
The Contractor shall rectify minor bulging or depression on the RC surface, which does not affect the
reinforcement cover, with the following method :
(a)

trim and roughen the surface,

(b)

clean the surface with pressure jetting,

(c)

apply approve bonding agent to the surface

(d)

patch the areas with approved polymer modified mortar.

For serious structural Defect or misalignment, the Contractor shall be required to submit a PE proposal for
the rectification work subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
20.5.4

Application Of External Skimming

Skimming shall not commence until the surface has been properly prepared and cleaned with water jet.
The Contractor shall allow for the inspection of the surface preparation prior to the skimming application.
Upon completion of the skimming Works, the Contractor shall carry out another measurement of the
building blocks. All measurement data shall be submitted to the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S9.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 20-5
20.5.5

Testing Of External Skimming

The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on the external skimming at each building block
according to the Schedule Of Material Tests. Each test shall cover five randomly selected spots of
skimming with age between 14 to 28 days. The average tensile pull-out strength of the 5 spots, of 50mm
2
cored diameter each, shall exceed 0.50 N per mm . In addition, the individual tensile pull-out strength of
each spot shall not be less than 0.40 N per mm2.
The first test at each building block shall be conducted in the initial stage of skimming Works. The
remaining tests shall be spread out and be carried out progressively.

20.6

ARRISES AND ANGLES IN PLASTERING

All arrises, internal angles, external angles, etc. shall be straight plumbed and slightly rounded.

20.7

MAKING GOOD
All making good of defective plaster shall be carried out in rectangular areas, the edges undercut to form
dovetailed key and finished flush with face of surrounding plaster. Cut out and make good all cracks,
blisters and other Defect and clean the whole of the work on completion.

20.8

PARTIALLY OR WHOLLY SET PLASTER

No partially or wholly set plaster shall be allowed to be used or remixed.

20.9

DRIPS AND GROOVE

Drips and grooves shall be formed to give a clean clear and straight surface free from loose sandy mortar.

20.10

LAYING OF CERAMIC WALL TILES

20.10.1

Wall Tiling Method

The Contractor shall carry out wall tiling according to the following procedure :
(a)

Clean the background to remove all laitance, dust, oil or other substances that affect the bonding of
rendering. The background shall be washed using water jet.

(b)

Apply rendering to the background to a finished thickness not exceeding 10mm to achieve a flat
and even surface. The background shall be first dampened to prevent excessive absorption of
water from the rendering before its placing. The rendering shall be increased to a finished
thickness not exceeding 18mm to allow for concealment of water piping.

(c)

Allow the rendering to set for at least 12 hours.

(d)

Apply a layer of bedding mortar onto the rendered substrate and spread another layer as thin as
possible on the full back of the tiles before placing tiles in position. The keys, frogs or depressions
at the back of the tile shall be completely filled with mortar before fixing.

(e)

Place each tile and tap it firmly into position to ensure that each tile makes contact over its whole
area. Tile spacers shall be used for laying of wall tiles to achieve consistent joint width. The tile
spacers to be used shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to the commencement of the tiling
works.

(f)

Adjust the position of any tile within 5 minutes of fixing.

The grouting to the tile joints shall commence within 7 days after fixing the wall tiles. Dust or
foreign materials shall be removed from the joints. The grout shall be wet mixed mechanically
before application. It shall be spread with a grout spreader (rubber squeegee or grout trowel),
working back and forth over the area until the joints are completely filled. Excess grout shall be
removed with the aid of a spreader and a damp (not) wet cloth. After the grout has stiffened
slightly, tool the grout with a piece of wood or other suitable tool to a consistent depth and shape.
After the grout has dried, the tile surface shall be cleaned and given a final polish using a clean, dry
cloth.

BLDG04/S9.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 20-6
20.10.2

Prepacked Mortar For Mortar Bed

The Contractor shall use approved pre-packed mortar mix for rendering to concrete surface and block
walls to receive the wall tiles. Potable water supplied by PUB shall be used for mixing the mortar. The
pre-packed mortar mix shall be mixed mechanically according to the manufacturer's recommendation.
The pre-packed mortar mix shall comply with the following performance requirements, as stated in clause
20.1.1 when subjected to the specified laboratory testing.

20.10.3

Bedding Mortar For Fixing The Tiles

The bedding mortar for fixing the tiles shall consist of two parts OPC cement to one part fine sand. Sand
for the bedding mortar shall be clean and free of foreign materials and comply with the following grading
requirements :
BS 410 sieve
mesh size
2.36 mm
1.18 mm
0.60 mm
0.30 mm
0.15 mm
0.075 mm

Percentage by mass passing the BS sieve

% (m/m)
100
95 - 100
80 - 100
30 - 100
0 - 60
Not greater than 5

The Contractor may use proprietary tile adhesive or add polymer additive into the bedding mortar to
improve the adhesion of the wall tiles. The use of tile adhesive or polymer additive shall be subject to the
approval of the SO Rep.
20.10.4

Testing Of Tensile Pull-Out Strength

The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on wall tiles according to the Schedule Of Material
Tests. Each test shall determine the tensile pull-out strengths of five randomly selected pieces of tiles
within a room. The joint around the tile shall be cut to the depth of the joint before the pull-out test. The
test shall be conducted within 21 to 28 days after fixing the tiles.
The average tensile pull-out strength of the 5 tiles tested shall achieve a minimum of 0.18 N per mm. In
addition, the individual tensile pull-out strength of each tile shall not be less than 0.14 N per mm.
The first test for each building block shall be conducted at the early stage of wall tiling Works. The
remaining tests shall be spread out and be carried out progressively.

20.11

PATTERN COLOUR GLAZED WALL TILES INSIDE DWELLING UNITS

20.11.1

General
Provide and lay pattern colour glazed ceramic wall tiles to locations as specified in the subclause
Schedule Of Pattern Colour Glazed Wall Tiles hereunder and at other locations as shown in the
Drawings.

20.11.2

Approved Ceramic Floor Tiles

The type of pattern colour glazed wall tiles provided by the Contractor to locations specified in the subclause "Schedule Of Pattern Colour Glazed Wall Tiles" hereunder shall be subject to the approval of the
SO Rep. The list of approved pattern colour glazed wall tiles is posted at the following websites:
kmo.eptc.com.sg or hdbuilders.com.The SO Rep shall have the absolute prerogative to select the type of
tiles from the list of approved pattern colour glazed wall tiles and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall
be made. Notwithstanding any approval by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that all pattern colour
glazed wall tiles comply with the requirements specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
The colour of pattern colour glazed wall tiles for such locations as specified in the schedule of the said
subclause shall be BLUE and/or PINK and/or BEIGE and/or GREY. Provide samples of pattern colour
glazed wall tiles with the colour range as specified for selection and approval by the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S9.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 20-7
20.11.3

Testing Requirements
(a)

Test Samples And Methods

All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The test
methods shall be in accordance with SS 483 : 2000 (Annex L) unless otherwise stated.

(b)

Test Certificate And Compliance Requirement

Provide test certificates by a testing laboratory accredited under SINGLAS to cover the tests
mentioned in this clause and all other tests mentioned in the testing schedule.

20.11.4

Technical Specifications
Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance
with SS 483 : 2000 (Annex L) unless otherwise stated :
(a)

Dimensions
Nominal Length
Nominal Width
Thickness

:
:
:

200mm
250mm
7mm

The dimensional tolerances shall be as follows :

(b)

(i)

Length

Average length of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more

than 0.3% from the average length of 10 test specimens.

(ii)

Width

Average width of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more

than 0.3% from the average length of 10 test specimens.

(iii)

Thickness

Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than

0.5mm from the average thickness of 10 test specimens.

Surface Quality
The tiles shall be free from objectionable surface blemishes such as projections, depressions,
flakes, hairline cracks and bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly formed
corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner.

(c)

Physical Properties
The water absorption shall be a maximum of 18%.

(d)

Chemical Properties
(i)

Staining Test

: The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows :

Allow 3 or 4 drops of each of the test solutions (Methylene blue
solution, 10g/L and Potassium permanganate solution, 10g/L), to fall
on a fresh part of the test specimen. Place an approximately 30mm
diameter convex watch glass on the applied drop in order to spread
it to an approximately circular area. Allow to remain for 24 hours
and then rinse the surface with running water and wipe with a damp
cloth. If a stain remains, thoroughly clean with a solution of the
standard cleaning agent.
Performance Criteria
The stain on the test specimen shall be able to be cleaned by
cleaning solution.

(ii)

BLDG04/S9.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Colour Fastness
: The tiles shall be light-fast and no colour change shall be
and Light-Fastness
detectable after exposure to ultra-violet radiation for 28 days.

Bldg Spec
Page 20-8
20.11.4

Technical Specifications (Contd)

(d)

Chemical Properties (Contd)

(iii)

20.11.5

Reverse Staining Test

The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows :

(a)

Five full pieces of tiles shall be selected and checked to

ensure that there are no Defect or damages. The tiles
shall also be checked for signs of tonality difference.

(b)

Dry the tiles in a ventilating oven at 105oC for 48 hours.

(c)

With the top or glazed surface facing downwards, pond

the biscuit (ie. back of the tile) with potable water over a
circular area of 50mm diameter and with a water height of
25mm. At interval of every 5 minutes, inspect with the
naked eye or prescription glasses if usually worn and
under sufficient light intensity (> 300 lux), the top or
glazed surface for signs of dark patches up to a total
ponding duration of 30 minutes.

(d)

Repeat the aforementioned test on another five pieces of

tiles but using methylene blue solution diluted at 2g of
methylene blue per litre.

(e)

Performance Criteria
The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on the
top or glazed surfaces.

Schedule Of Pattern Colour Glazed Wall Tiles

Provide and lay pattern colour glazed wall tiles to locations as specified below including any other areas
not specified but as shown in the Drawings.
Accommodation
3-Room,
4-Room,
5-Room

20.11.6

Location
)
)
)
)

Kitchen
Kitchen/Dining
Bath/WC
WC

Laying of Glazed Wall Tiles

(a)

Soaking Of Glazed Wall Tiles

The glazed wall tiles shall be unpacked and soaked thoroughly in portable PUB water for at
least 12 hours. Prior to fixing, the wall tiles shall be removed from the water and stacked tightly
and vertically together on a clean surface to drain off excess water from the surface. At the
time of fixing, the tiles shall be surface dry.

(b)

Surface Preparation for Glazed Wall Tiles

Clean down the surfaces to be tiled and wet it thoroughly prior to commencement of application
of mortar.

20.12

LISTELLO TILE TO BATH/WC OF DWELLING UNITS

Provide and lay one course of matching Listello tiles to all bath/wc of residential units including other areas
as shown in the Drawings. The list of of approved Listello tiles is posted at the following websites:
kmo.eptc.com.sg or hdbuilders.com. The type of Listello tiles provided by the Contractor shall be
subjected to the approval of the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S9.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 20-9
20.13

CERAMIC WALL TILES (NON RESIDENTIAL UNITS AND COMMON AREAS)

20.13.1

General
Provide and lay first quality, first choice wall tiles to locations as specified in the subclause Schedule Of
Ceramic Wall Tiles hereunder and at other locations as shown in the Drawings.

20.13.2

Testing Requirements
(a)

Test Samples And Methods

All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The test
methods shall be in accordance with SS 483 : 2000 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated.

(b)

Test Certificate And Compliance Requirement

Provide test certificates by a testing laboratory accredited under SINGLAS to cover the tests
mentioned in this clause and all other tests mentioned in the testing schedule.

20.13.3

Technical Specifications
Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance
with SS 483 : 2000 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated :(a)

Dimensions
Nominal Length
Nominal Width
Thickness

: 200mm
: 200mm
:
8mm

The dimensional tolerances shall be as follows :

(b)

(i)

Length

Average length of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than
0.75% from the average length of 10 test specimens.

(ii)

Width

Average width of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than
0.75% from the average length of 10 test specimens.

(iii)

Thickness

Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than 5% from
the average thickness of 10 test specimens.

Surface Quality
The tiles shall be free from objectionable surface blemishes such as projections, depressions,
flakes, hairline cracks and bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly formed
corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner.

(c)

Physical Properties
The water absorption shall be a maximum of 6%

BLDG04/S9.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 20-10
20.13.3

Technical Specifications (Contd)

(d)

Chemical Properties
(i)

Colour Fastness And

Light-Fastness

The tiles shall be light-fast and no colour change shall be

detectable after exposure to ultra-violet radiation for 28 days.

(ii)

Reserve Staining
Test

The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows :

(a)

Five full pieces of tiles shall be selected and checked to

ensure that there are no Defect or damages. The tiles
shall also be checked for signs of tonality difference.

(b)

Dry the tiles in a ventilating oven at 105oC for 48 hours.

(c)

With the top or glazed surface facing downwards, pond

the biscuit (ie. back of the tile) with potable water over a
circular area of 50mm diameter and with a water height of
25mm. At interval of every 5 minutes, inspect with the
naked eye or prescription glasses if usually worn and
under sufficient light intensity (> 300 lux), the top or glazed
surface for signs of dark patches up to a total ponding
duration of 30 minutes.

(d)

Repeat the aforementioned test on another five pieces of

tiles but using methylene blue solution diluted at 2g of
methylene blue per litre.

(e)

Performance Criteria
The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on the
top or glazed surfaces.

20.13.4

Colours, Patterns And Textures

Provide a full range of colours, patterns and textures of wall tiles for the SO Rep to select from. The SO
Rep shall have the absolute prerogative in his selection and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be
made for difference in colour pattern and texture within each category of tiles.

20.13.5

Accessories
Provide and lay all accessories in matching size and colour to the approval of the SO Rep.

20.13.6

Schedule Of Ceramic Wall Tiles

Provide and lay glazed ceramic wall tiles to locations as specified below including any other areas not
specified but as shown in the Drawings.
Accommodation

All Housing Blocks

Eating House

BLDG04/S9.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Location
Walls at centralised Refuse chute hopper
Wash areas at void deck
Refuse Chute Chambers
Walls in toilet adjoining Utility Room at ground floor lift lobby
Refreshment Areas
Stalls
Toilets/Bath/WC
Bin Areas
Wash Areas

Bldg Spec
Page 20-11
20.13.6

Schedule Of Ceramic Wall Tiles (Contd)

Provide and lay glazed ceramic wall tiles to locations as specified below including any other areas not
specified but as shown in the Drawings.
Accommodation

Location
Bath/WC
Display Areas
Preparation Areas
Bin Areas
Walls and Columns
Toilets
Bin Areas
Toilets
Display Area
WC

Lock-Up Shop, Shop,

Market Produce
Lock-Up Shop
Mini-Market
Restaurant (Family)
Market Produce Shop

20.13.7

Tile Spacers

Tile spacers shall be used for laying of wall tiles and floor tiles to achieve consistent joint width.
The tile spacers to be used shall be approved by the SO Rep before commencement of the
tiling works.

20.14

POLISHED HOMOGENEOUS WALL TILES

Provide and lay 300mm x 300mm x 9mm (Nominal Size) polished homogeneous wall tiles to locations as
specified below :
Accommodation
All Housing Blocks

Location
Walls of ground floor and upper floor lift lobbies.
Wall enclosures at letter box including low walls
defining the ground floor lift lobby.

Provide full range of colours and texture of polished homogeneous wall tiles for the SO Rep to make a
selection. The SO Rep shall have absolute prerogative in his selection and no adjustment to the Contract
Sum shall be made for differences in colour and texture
20.15

WORKSHOP DRAWINGS
Provide complete sets of workshop drawings showing the laying patterns of ceramic floor tiles and wall
tiles in kitchen, kitchen/dining, bath/wc, lift lobby, courtyard and other locations where tiling work are
indicated. The workshop drawings shall include plans, elevations, detailed sections and other relevant
details required by the SO Rep. These drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the
laying of ceramic floor tiles, ceramic wall tiles and white glazed wall tiles. The ceramic floor tiles shall be
laid with tile joints that coincide with the joints of wall tiles and to the approval of the SO Rep.

Total pages for this Section :

11

Section 21/.....

BLDG04/S9.DOC(11)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 21-1
SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE AND CATV INSTALLATIONS

21.1

WORK BY LICENSED ELECTRICIAN

All electrical installation Works shall be carried out by a Licensed Electrician (LE) respectively and shall
comply with all current Codes-of-Practice, Bye-Laws, Requirements and Regulations of the relevant
Authorities.

21.2

EXTERNAL TRENCHES FOR ELECTRICAL CABLE

Where directed by the SO Rep, excavate trenches for the laying of electrical cables complying with the
requirements of the PowerGrid and/or SPSL. The excavation work where done shall be paid in
accordance with the Contract as a variation to the Contract.

21.3

OPENINGS/RECESSES FOR ELECTRICAL TRUNKINGS

Further to Clause 4.21 "Openings And Recesses" and subclause 1.1.27 "Contractor's Work In Connection
With Subsidiary Contracts", ensure that all these openings are flushed with the ceilings and align with
each other and with the building lines. Ensure that the recesses are continuous and on the same plane
from floor to floor.

21.4

METAL TRUNKING FOR TELEPHONE CABLE

Metal trunking shall be complete with slotted brackets for the fixing of telephone cables inside the trunking.
Slotted brackets shall be welded to the base of the trunking and shall be three numbers per floor or to the
requirements of the Relevant Authorities.
The size of metal trunking to be used shall be 200mm x 100mm (nominal size) for all storeys and
locations.
For horizontal metal trunking, nominal size of 200mm x 50mm metal trunking shall be used. The
horizontal metal trunking shall be complete with slotted brackets for the fixing of telephone cables inside
the trunking. Slotted brackets shall be welded to the base of the horizontal trunking and shall be spaced
not more than 300mm centres. The horizontal metal trunking shall have provisions for cabling from leadin risers to riser ducts with no lead-in pipes and to the requirements of the Relevant Authorities.
The thickness of mild steel sheet used in the fabrication of trunking shall not be less than those specified
hereunder :
Nominal Thickness Of Mild Steel Sheet
Thickness Of Body Material

Thickness Of Cover Material

1.6mm

1.4mm

Construct metal trunking to the details as shown in the Drawings. All metal trunkings shall have
removable covers extending over the entire lengths as shown in the Drawings. The covers shall be fixed
to the trunking by means of brass screws or stainless steel or steel screws protected with a finish of zinc
coating against corrosion. The spacing between each screw shall be as shown in the Drawings. Wire grille
of diameter 3mm (nominal) shall be welded to the base of the trunking so as to fasten cables and joint
boxes to the trunking.
All welded parts shall be smoothened. All surfaces of the metal trunkings shall be painted with two coats
of approved anti-rust undercoat and two finishing coats giving an overall coating thickness of not less than
45 microns. Alternatively, oven-bake powder coating will also be accepted. The colour of the finishing
coats shall be Off White to BS 10B15.

BLDG04/S21.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 21-2
21.4

METAL TRUNKING FOR TELEPHONE CABLE (CONT'D)

Each metal trunking shall be wrapped with layers of paper or packed with paper box to prevent scratches
to the painted surfaces. Submit samples of metal trunkings to the SO Rep for approval before
commencing installation. The samples shall be checked to conform to dimensions, material quality, colour
and finishing requirements. Approved samples shall be retained as basis of delivery and shall be
considered as part of delivery.
Unless specified otherwise, all materials, supports, fixings, attachments and other items associated with
and necessary for the complete installation, together with all the work involved shall be provided.

21.5

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF) ROOM AND EQUIPMENT CLOSET

FOR OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE INSTALLATION
All UPVC (SS 272) lead-in pipes to MDF room and Telecom Equipment Room shall be encased in
concrete as shown in the Drawings. All bent pipes, straight pipes and trunkings shall be purchased from
sources approved by IDA or the respective PTL
All bent pipes, straight pipes and trunkings shall be installed as shown in the Drawings.

21.6

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS TO MDF ROOM, EQUIPMENT

CLOSET AND UTILITIES ROOM
The Contractor shall engage a licensed electrician to carry out electrical installation works to MDF Rooms,
Telecoms Equipment Rooms and Utilities Rooms all as shown in the Drawings.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 22/.....

BLDG04/S21.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 22-1
SECTION 22
GLAZING

22.1

FIXED AND ADJUSTABLE GLASS LOUVRED VENTS

Unless otherwise specified, glass louvre used externally shall be obscured wired rough cast glass of
thickness 6mm 0.3mm and housed at least 10mm at each end. Glass blades shall not have clearance
at each end exceeding 3mm. All exposed edges of the glass louvre shall be ground mechanically to a
consistent smooth finish.

22.2

CLEANING GLASS
On completion, clean all glass inside and outside, replace all cracked, broken or defective glass and leave
the whole Works in good condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 23/.....

BLDG04/S22.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 23-1
SECTION 23
PAINTING AND DECORATING

23.1

GENERAL

23.1.1

Paint
Unless otherwise specified, all paint used shall be manufactured by an approved Specialist and shall be of
those under the PSB Singapore Quality Mark Scheme or PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. All paint
shall be delivered to the Site in their original containers with the PSB Certificate Mark and the containers
shall not have been opened before.
Unless otherwise specified, all paint shall comply with the relevant Singapore Standards shown below and
their latest amendments :
Standard
SS7:1998
SS34:1998
SS37:1998
SS38:1998
SS150:1998
SS345:1990
SS494:2001

Type of Paint
"Gloss Enamel Finishing"
"Undercoat for Gloss Enamel"
"Aluminium Paint"
"Aluminium Wood Primer (Leafing and Non-Leafing)"
"Emulsion Paint"
"Algae Resistant Emulsion Paint for Decorative Purposes"
"Lead and Chromate-free Primer"

Before the commencement of any painting work, provide and submit colour charts of approved paint to the
SO Rep for the selection of colour scheme.
All water based algae resistant emulsion paint shall comply with SS 345:1990 and shall be certified under
the PSB Singapore Quality Mark Scheme or PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. All enamel paint
shall be synthetic enamel paint unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
23.1.2

Mixing Of Paint
During the progress of work, the SO Rep may at his discretion obtain samples of paint being used on site
for testing. Should paint used in this Contract be found to be adulterated or over-diluted, the SO Rep shall
exercise its rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Contractor. In addition, all such paint shall be removed from the Site and replace the same with paints
that meet the prescribed standards. All work executed with paint which fails to meet the prescribed
standards shall be burnt off or otherwise removed and the work shall be re-executed at the Contractor's
own cost and expense to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

23.1.3

Workmanship
Unless otherwise specified, all paints shall be applied in accordance with the Manufacturer's
recommendations and instructions.
All paints for priming coats, undercoats and finishing coats used for the work shall be of the same brand
and from the same manufacturer. Where available, undercoats shall be of different shades to correspond
with the shade of the finishing coat. Provide sample panels of paintwork showing the shade of the
respective coats.
All external paintwork shall be executed under dry condition and the surface to be painted shall be dry
before the paint is applied. The whole of the interior and exterior surfaces of the building including the
ceilings and soffits shall be cleaned down thoroughly and all cracks and blemishes made good prior to the
commencement of the painting work.
After the completion of each coat of painting work, the SO Rep shall be notified before the application of
the next coat.

BLDG04/S23.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 23-2
23.2

EXTERNAL PAINTING

23.2.1

Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses
under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the
purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred to as "Performance Requirement"). In the event
the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are
upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all
necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but
such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising
under the Contract.

23.2.2

Water Based Algae Resistant Emulsion Paint

(a)

Type And Location

The water based algae resistant paint shall comply with SS345:1990 and shall be PSB Marked.
Unless otherwise specified, all colours of paint to be used shall be approved by the PSB under the
Singapore Quality Mark Scheme and to comply with BS 4800:1972 "Paint Colour for Building
Purposes".
Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep, all plastered, skim coated and concrete
surfaces of all exterior surfaces of the external walls which are subject to weathering including
walls, ceilings and other surfaces of the ground floor void decks shall be finished with three coats of
water based algae resistant emulsion paint. The first coat may be with thinning of up to ten percent
by volume with clean water. Subsequent coats shall not be diluted.
Allow for different colour tones for all undercoats to distinguish the different coatings. Should the
finished paintwork be found to be unsatisfactory, ie. brushy work, unevenness in applications,
original stains, etc., repaint the same with additional coat or coats to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
External painting to parapet walls, refuse chutes, columns and beams shall cover up to and
including returned surfaces.
External painting to exterior surfaces of external walls shall cover up to and including returned
surfaces stopping at a convenient point to be directed by the SO Rep.

(b)

External Painting To Electrical Sub-Station/Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound

For electrical sub-station/utilities centre/dustbin compound, the external painting works shall be
executed with three coats of water based algae resistant emulsion paint.

(c)

Touch-Up Coat
Painted surfaces which have to be overcoated by touch-up work should not be confined to the
affected spots only. The whole panel of the wall or area affected by touch-up shall be repainted to
match the colour tone of the finished coat.

(d)

Painting Of Sample Units

At the appropriate time prepare the exterior of one or more typical flat unit for each type of flats to
receive the paint and inform the SO Rep to select his colour scheme. Paint the sample units,
changing colours as directed, until the SO Rep is satisfied with the workmanship and/or colour
scheme.

BLDG04/S23.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 23-3
23.2.2

Water Based Algae Resistant Emulsion Paint (Cont'd)

(e)

Warranty
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as
stipulated in the Deed of Warranty For External Painting as produced in Appendix A5. In this
respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to
such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at its sole discretion decide. In the
event the Deed of Warranty for part of the Works or for the whole Works is to be submitted to such
Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty as
produced in Appendix A5(TC) to such Town Council(s). The duly executed Warranty shall be
submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such
time when the SO Rep considers the Works have been substantially completed in accordance with
the Contract. In the event the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the
Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the
payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to
the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be
released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty.

23.2.3

Acrylic Emulsion Paints

Unless otherwise specified, all external plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces, except those
subjected directly to weathering as mentioned earlier, shall be painted with one priming coat and two
subsequent coats of approved acrylic emulsion paint. The priming coat may be with thinning of up to 20%
of clean water by volume. Subsequent coats shall not be diluted.
External surfaces to be painted with acrylic emulsion paint shall include all surfaces except those within
the enclosing walls of the dwelling units, switch rooms, motor rooms, pump rooms, water tank
compartment and other enclosed spaces. However, walls and ceilings of the private balcony and/or
service balcony of dwelling units and common access corridors shall be considered as external surfaces
to be painted with acrylic emulsion paint.

23.3

PAINTING OF INTERNAL SURFACES

(a)

Internal Surfaces Of Dwelling Units

Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep, all plastered, skim coated and concrete
surfaces of internal walls and ceilings of dwelling units shall be painted with two coats of approved
white emulsion paint. The first coat may be with thinning of up to 20% of clean water by volume.
The second coat shall not be diluted. The method of painting for these two coats, with the
exception of the two coats for the ceilings of the toilets and kitchens, shall be by means of an
appropriate portable airless spraying equipment as approved by the SO Rep. No compressed air
shall be used to assist the spraying. The two coats for the ceilings of the toilets and kitchens may
be painted by using rollers.

(b)

Other Internal Surfaces

Unless otherwise specified, all plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces of internal walls and
ceilings of shops, shoplets, eating houses, living quarters, switch rooms, lift motor rooms, pump
rooms, water tank compartments, stores, MDF rooms, electrical substations and areas other than
dwelling units shall be painted with three coats of approved emulsion paint. The first coat may be
with thinning of up to 20% of clean water by volume. The second and third coats shall not be
diluted.

(c)

BLDG04/S23.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

The emulsion paint shall be of those qualities approved by the PSB and the SO Rep.

Bldg Spec
Page 23-4
23.4

PAINTING OF WOODWORK

23.4.1

Preparation
All joinery and finished woodwork shall be properly cleaned down, knotted, stopped, sand-papered smooth
and primed. Two coats of wood preservative shall be applied to the back of doors frames and window
frames and other woodwork abutting masonry work. The wood preservative shall be "Solignum",
"Creosote" or other approved.

23.4.2

Painting
Unless otherwise specified, surfaces of all woodwork shall be prepared and painted with one priming coat,
one undercoat and one finishing coat of approved enamel paint.

23.4.3

Wood Varnish To Main Entrance Doors,

Bedroom Doors And Bath/WC Doors To Flats
Unless otherwise specified, all main entrance doors, bedroom doors and bath/wc doors to flats shall be
finished with wood varnish all as specified.

23.4.4

Surface Preparation
All pin holes and recesses on the main entrance door, bedroom door and bath/wc door surfaces shall be
filled and stopped with putty. The door surfaces shall be properly sanded smooth by mechanical means
and cleaned prior to the application of wood varnish.

23.4.5

Wood Varnish
The main entrance door, bedroom door and bath/wc door surfaces shall be finished off-site under a
factory environment with a minimum of three coats of clear varnish, in semi-gloss finish or other approved
finish. The varnish shall be approved by the SO Rep. The varnish shall comply with the requirements as
specified hereunder :

Test

Test Method

Substrate

Application
Method/Film
Thickness

Requirements

Varnish Only
a) Condition in
container

SS 5 Part B4:1987

NA

NA

No coagulation,
precipitation, or
separation of
components, free
from foreign
particles;

b) Keeping
qualities

SS 5 Part B6:1987

NA

NA

No coagulation,
precipitation, or
separation of
components, free
from foreign
particles;

c) Fineness of
grind

SS 5 Part B13:1987

NA

NA

Maximum 30
microns;

d) Dry film
thickness

SS 5 Part B1:1985
(Method 5)

BLDG04/S23.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Burnished
tinplate

3 coats by
brush

Minimum 50
microns;

Bldg Spec
Page 23-5
23.4.5

Wood Varnish (Contd)

Test

Test Method

Substrate

Application
Method/Film
Thickness

Requirements

Varnish Only
(Contd)

23.4.6

e) Surface
drying time

SS 5 Part D2:1985

Burnished
tinplate

Metered bar/
wft 50 microns

2 hrs maximum;

f)

ISO 9117:1990

Burnished
tinplate

Metered bar/
wft 50 microns

6 hrs maximum;

g) Gloss at 60
deg.

SS 5 Part E1:1985

Glass plate

Metered bar/
wft 50 microns

25 - 50 gloss
units;

h) Flash point

SS Part B15:1987

i)

Washability

SS 5 Part F5:1992

Burnished
Glass

Metered bar/
wft 80 microns

3000 cycles with

no wear-off

j)

Scratch
Resistance

SS 5 Part F2:1988

Burnished
tinplate

Metered bar/
dft 25 microns

Minimum 1000g

k) Accelerated
weathering
(500 hrs dry
cycle)

SS 5 Part G4:1992

Burnished
tinplate

Metered bar/
dft 25 microns

Maximum gloss
loss 30%

l)

SS 150 Appendix C

NA

NA

No growth

Through dry
time

Mildew
resistance

NA

NA

23C minimum

Protection Of The Timber Doors

The factory varnished doors shall be covered by protection materials at the factory before delivered to the
Site. The protection materials shall be adequate to cushion the door surface against impact or knocking
during transportation and installation and to prevent staining. It shall not be removed, unless instructed by
the SO Rep, till the flats are fully completed.
The protection details shall be subjected to approval by the SO Rep. The cushioning material for the door
surface could be cardboard, bubblefoam or other suitable materials of adequate thickness. The materials
used, including the adhesion tape, shall not cause staining to the doors in wet and dry conditions. The
design of the protection shall allow the protection material to remain intact during and after the installation
of the lock set and hinges at Site.

23.4.7

Storage Of Doors
The Contractor shall also be required to provide one storage area per floor for the proper storage of the
main entrance doors, bedroom doors and bath/wc doors. The storage areas shall be kept in a dry
condition. The doors shall not be installed earlier than one month before the handing over inspection,
unless instructed otherwise by the SO Rep. They shall be brought to the various units just prior to their
installations.

BLDG04/S23.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 23-6
23.5

PAINTING OF FERROUS METAL WORK

23.5.1

Lead And Chromate Free Primer

This clause supersedes subclause 23.5.1 "Lead and Chromate-free Primer" of the Standard Specifications
For Building Works And Other Installations.
Lead and chromate-free primer shall comply with SS 494:2001 and shall be certified under PSB
Singapore Quality Mark Scheme or PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A.

23.5.2

Preparation Of Surface
Remove all dust, rust, scale, grease and oil before painting.

23.5.3

Painting
Unless otherwise specified, paint all exposed metal surfaces with one coat of lead and chromate-free
primer, one undercoat and one finishing coat of approved enamel paint. Primer to mild steel door frame
shall be approved cathodic electrodeposition primer.
Unless otherwise specified, paint all metal surfaces in contact with or embedded in concrete, masonry
work, etc, except for concrete reinforcement, with one coat of lead and chromate-free primer.
Paint stainless steel, brass and aluminium Works only if specified.

23.6

PAINTING OF PIPES
Allow for the painting of all sanitary, water and gas installation pipes, rainwater downpipes, balcony waste
discharge stacks and all services pipes including water supply pipes (except for stainless steel pipes and
pipes in the water tank compartment). Unless specified otherwise, the colour shall match with the general
background colour tone of the building to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Paint pipes and trunking as specified hereunder and including other types of pipes and trunking not so
specified but as shown in the Drawings.
Type Of Pipe/Trunking

Paint Coat Required

UPVC pipes and fittings

Two coats of enamel paint unless specified otherwise.

However, those within trunking, stacks/ceiling and service
ducts need not be painted)

UPVC trunking for electrical wiring,

water and gas pipes outside
residential units

Two coats of acrylic emulsion paint to match the general

background colour tone. However, those within service ducts
need not be painted

Galvanised steel pipes and fittings

First coat
Second coat
Third coat
Fourth coat

Ductile iron pipes and fittings

including supports

Two coats of lead and chromate-free primer followed by two

coats of enamel paint.

Ductile iron pipes and fittings for

water distribution mains including
supports on roof level

Two coats of approved ceramic insulation coating.

Copper gas pipes including fittings

Two coats of white enamel paint or other colour to match the

background as instructed by the SO Rep.

Stainless steel, copper and brass

pipes

No painting required unless specified otherwise.

BLDG04/S23.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer;

one coat of lead and chromate-free primer;
one coat of undercoat for enamel paint;
one finishing coat of enamel paint.

Bldg Spec
Page 23-7
23.7

PAINTING TO EXTERNAL REINFORCED CONCRETE

SLOPING ROOF OF CENTRAL REFUSE CHUTE CHAMBER
The external reinforced concrete sloping roof of the central refuse chute chamber shall be painted with
water based algae resistant emulsion paint in accordance with Clause 23.2 "External Painting" including
all subclauses under it.

23.8

DISPOSAL OF SPENT PAINT

The Contractor shall ensure that all spent paint and waste water from the washing of paint
brushes/instruments are properly disposed off. The disposal of spent paint and waste water/waste solvent
shall be in accordance with ENV guidelines. The Contractor shall provide the necessary 220-litre drums
and engage a licensed industrial toxic waste collector to collect the drums for proper disposal. The
Contractor shall put up a consignment note to the Pollution Control Department.

23.8.1

Solvent Based Enamel Paint

All spent paint and waste solvent (generated from washing) shall be collected in 220-litre drums. There
shall be no discharge of spent paint and/or waste solvent/waste water (generated from washing) into the
sewerage system. The drums shall be in good and sound conditions so that they can be transported
safely for proper disposal by the licensed industrial toxic waste collector. The drums shall be properly
labelled and stored within a curbed area to prevent spillage. The drums shall be covered to prevent fire
hazard and smell nuisance.

23.8.2

Water Based Emulsion Paint

All spent paint and waste water (generated from washing) shall be collected in 220-litre drums. There shall
be no discharge of the spent paint and/or waste water (generated from washing) into the sewerage
system. The drums shall be in good and sound conditions so that they can be transported safely for
proper disposal by the licensed toxic industrial waste collector. The drums shall be properly labelled and
stored within a curbed area to prevent spillage.

23.9

SCAFFOLDING
Provide and erect scaffolding over all faces of the building blocks for the application of paint. Scaffolding
shall not be removed until the painted surfaces are inspected by the SO Rep and until the test results of
the paint samples taken out for testing are known.

23.10

CLEARING UP ON COMPLETION
All areas stained by paint including but not limited to floors, staircases, aprons and public areas and drains
shall be thoroughly washed and removed upon completion of the Works before handing over to the
Employer. All debris and superfluous materials shall be cleared away.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 24/.....

BLDG04/S23.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 24-1
SECTION 24
UNDERGROUND PIPE SYSTEM FOR LOW TENSION RETICULATION CABLE
AND TELECOMMUNICATION CABLE

24.1

LOW TENSION RETICULATION PIPE SYSTEM

The Contractor shall provide and install underground pipe system for Low Tension (LT) reticulation cables
as shown in the Drawings.

24.1.1

Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC) Pipes

24.1.1.1

Materials
All UPVC pipes shall be Class B in accordance with SS 141:1976.
The material from which the pipe is produced shall be unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) to which
shall be added suitable lubricants, pigments, stabilizers and pastes. These additives shall not constitute a
toxic hazard and shall not impair its chemical and physical properties.
The UPVC pipes shall be grey in colour and shall have a socket at one end.
The pipe wall shall be homogenous throughout and the internal and external surfaces shall be clean,
smooth and reasonably free from grooves, blisters, dents and heat marks. The ends shall be clearly cut
and square with the axis of the pipe.

24.1.1.2

Dimensions
The dimensions of the UPVC pipes and plug shall be as shown in the Drawings for underground piping
system.

24.1.2

Pipe Installation
(a)

General
The pipeline shall be straight and level where possible. In case a straight run is not possible the
radius of curvature shall be determined on the Site by the SO Rep.

(b)

Gradient Of UPVC Pipes Under-Crossing Other Services

Unless otherwise specified or shown in the Drawings or directed by the SO Rep on the Site, the
gradient of UPVC pipes under-crossing other services shall be :
Pipe Size
155mm

(c)

Gradient
1:12

Preparation Of Bottom Of Trench

A layer of 150mm thick hardcore bed well blinded with granite dust shall be provided to areas that
have muddy, clay or soft soil. The hardcore shall consist essentially of crusher run/stones blinded
with sufficient blinding material to aid consolidation.

(d)

Flared-Mouth Pipes
Flared-mouth pipes shall be used for entry into draw pit or for pipes which terminate directly in the
ground. All the ends of flared-mouth pipes shall be sealed with end plugs to prevent entry of earth
or cement.

BLDG04/S24.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 24-2
24.1.2

Pipe Installation (Cont'd)

(e)

Construction Method
The first layer of concrete with A6 welded steel mesh shall be placed to the required thickness on
the prepared trench bottom. The bottom layer of pipes shall be laid using spacers at 1.5m intervals
to maintain the spacing between pipes. Ensure that a minimum gap sufficient for the specified
concrete thickness remains between the outside of pipes and the side of trench or trench
shuttering where used.
The next layer of concrete shall then be placed to the prescribed thickness before the second layer
of pipes are laid. The final layer of concrete shall be reinforced with A6 welded steel mesh. The
concrete shall be evenly placed around the duct and each batch, as it is placed, shall be properly
compacted without creating unbalanced side thrust against the pipe.
The final layer of the concrete shall be thoroughly trowelled. PVC cover plates shall be anchored
on the final layer of concrete.
3

Ready mixed concrete shall be used. However, if the concrete required is less than 2 m , hand mix
concrete is allowed.
Mechanical vibrator shall be used to ensure that the gaps between pipes are filled with concrete.
(f)

Rapid Hardening Cement

When pipes are laid in conditions where backfilling is required to be carried out immediately, an
approved type of rapid hardening cement additive compound shall be used with the concrete.

(g)

Nylon Ropes in Pipes

A nylon/polyethylene rope (minimum diameter 7mm) acceptable by the SO Rep shall be provided
in each pipe to facilitate cable pulling after pipe testing.

(h)

Protection of Cables
During the boring of pipe entries into existing structures, or during the demolition and rebuilding of
the joint hole, the Contractor shall take such measures as directed by the SO Rep to protect the
cables. Such measures may include the following :

(i)

(i)

Any movement of existing cable shall be carried out under the direction of the SO Rep.

(ii)

Cables shall be protected against mechanical damage at pipe entries and inside joint hole
by packing them with sandbags to act as a cushion when any movement occurs.

Pipe Testing
On completion of pipe laying (including compaction and backfilling) between any two joint holes or
more, a cylindrical brush and a mandrel as shown in the Drawings shall be passed through each
pipe in both directions to test the pipe and to remove any foreign matter which may have entered.
The cylindrical brush and mandrel shall be supplied by the Contractor. The mandrel shall follow the
brush to minimise possible scouring or breaking of the pipes. The testing shall be carried out
under the direction of the SO Rep before the section of pipes are accepted.

24.1.3

PVC Cover Plates

24.1.3.1

Materials
All cable cover plates shall be of standard lengths of 1.0 m. Each cover plate shall be nominal 172.4mm
in width and 2.0mm in thickness. The length and breadth may have a tolerance of 5 mm.
The cable cover plates shall be made of high impact resistance polyvinyl chloride without plasticizer
(UPVC). Use of regenerated PVC, or Polyethylene or PP is strictly forbidden. Each cable cover plate
shall be linked to the adjacent cover plates at both ends to form a continuous chain.

BLDG04/S24.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 24-3
24.1.3

PVC Cover Plates (Cont'd)

24.1.3.1

Materials (Cont'd)
The colour of the plate shall be black in accordance with BS 381c colour code and shall remain permanent
and non-fading.
The materials and the colour of the cable cover plates shall be resistant to chemical influences likely to be
encountered when buried in the ground.
The cable cover plates shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest revision
of the following standards or their equivalent :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

24.1.3.2

Description
Impact Test
Tensile Strength
Vicat Softening Temperature
Accelerated Ageing

Standard
Clause 7.3 of E6530 (Austrian Standard)
Clause 7.4 of E6530 (Austrian Standard)
ASTM D1525
ASTM D3045

Requirements
The PVC cover plates shall have the following properties :
(a)

Three fully processed specimens tested for their impact strength shall not have more than 3 cracks
respectively (5 drop hammer tests per specimen). The drop hammer shall not penetrate the
specimens more than 100mm for more than 3 times in a series of 15 drop hammer tests. If these
requirements are not met, the same test series are repeated on the specimens from the same lot.
Should the specimens tested in the second series of tests also fail to meet the requirements, the
whole test is deemed to have failed.

(b)

The longitudinal connections (linking mechanism) of the fully processed specimens shall withstand
a tensile strength of minimum 100 newtons.

(c)

The Vicat softening temperature of the fully processed samples shall not be less than 72C (Rate A
at 50C 5C per hour).

(d)

The fully processed specimens shall be aged at 70C for 168 hours. Aged specimens shall also be
tested for their tensile strength in the longitudinal connections. The change in properties shall be
less than 25% of the original value.

The cable cover plates shall be type tested by PSB or an SAC accredited laboratory in accordance with
the above requirements.
24.1.3.3

Installation of UPVC Cable Cover Plates

The cable cover plates shall be laid end to end directly over the pipes as shown in the Drawings. Ensure
that the cable cover plates are properly secured together.

24.1.4

Markers For Draw Pit

On completion (including backfilling, compacting and turfing) of the draw pits which are not located within
the road, approved markers as shown in the Drawings shall be installed to indicate the corners of the draw
pit. For draw pits which are located within the road, such markers need not be provided.

24.1.5

Backfilling For Underground Pipe System

All trenches excavated for the provision of underground pipe system for Low Tension (LT) reticulation
cables shall be backfilled as follows :
(a)

For trenches which are located within the road, backfill from the completed pipe level to the
subgrade of the road with granular materials such as sand/granite fines or quarry dust.

(b)

For trenches which are not located within the road, backfill to the level required under the Contract
with good dry earth approved by the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S24.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 24-4
24.1.6

Energisation Of Electrical Sub-Station By PowerGrid

The Contractor shall expedite and complete all underground pipe system work timely to facilitate the laying
of all necessary reticulation cables by PowerGrid or other utilities Services Provider within the Site
boundary. The electrical sub-station is targeted to be energised by the Services Provider at least 12
weeks before the date of Substantial Completion of the first building block in the Works or otherwise
advised by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall incorporate such work arrangement requirements in the
programme for the Works or revised programme for the Works, submitted under the Contract. All costs
and expenses incurred for complying with the provisions of this subclause shall be deemed to be included
in the Contract Sum.

24.2

TELECOMMUNICATION PIPE SYSTEM

The Contractor shall provide and install underground pipe system for telecommunication cables as shown
in the Drawings.

24.2.1

Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC) Pipes

24.2.1.1

Materials
All UPVC pipes shall be Class C in accordance with SS.272; 1983
The material to produce the pipes shall be unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (UPVC). When joining pipes,
suitable lubricants, pigments, stabilizers and pastes shall be used. These additives shall not constitute a
toxic hazard to the environment and shall not change in its chemical and physical properties.
The UPVC pipes shall be in white and shall have a socket at one end.
The pipe wall shall be homogenous throughout and the internal and external surfaces shall be clean,
smooth and reasonably free from grooves, blisters, dents and heat marks. The ends shall be clearly cut
and square with the axis of the pipe.

24.2.2

110mm Nominal Size UPVC Pipe Installation

24.2.2.1

Dimensions Of 110mm Nominal Size UPVC Pipe

The dimensions of the UPVC pipes and coupling for the underground piping system shall be as shown
hereunder :

Length

Max
Wall
Thickness

Min
Wall
Thickness

Max
External
Diameter

Min
External
Diameter

Internal
Diameter
at the
Edges

Internal
Diameter
at the
Center

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

Pipe

6000+500
-0

3.6

3.2

110.4

110

Coupling

180 2

3.6

3.2

110.5+0.2
-0

110+0
- 0.2

Item

24.2.2.2

General
(a)

All pipelines are to over-cross sewer lines.

(b)

The crowns of all pipelines are to be laid at least 600mm below the invert level of Civil Engineering
drains.

(c)

No pipe is to be cast in the base or wall of the drains.

BLDG04/S24.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 24-5
24.2.2

110mm Nominal Size UPVC Pipe Installation (Cont'd)

24.2.2.2

General (Cont'd)
(d)

The pipeline shall be straight and level where possible. Where a straight run is not possible, the
radius of curvature shall be determined by the SO Rep.

(e)

All rectification Works instructed by the SO Rep to meet all requirements shall be carried out at the
Contractors cost and expense.

(f)

The following items shall be submitted to StarHub for verification of tests conducted on StarHub
Manholes and Pipelines :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)

Completion Certificate
Summary of Manhole and Pipeline Length
Pipe Testing Report/Manhole Survey Record

The Contractor shall assist the SO Rep in all verification work to ensure all tests are properly
conducted. The Contractor shall perform more tests if the SO Rep deemed necessary all at the
Contractor's cost and expense.
(g)
24.2.2.3

Upon completion of all verifications by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall submit As-Built drawings of
the project site to StarHub, in addition to the items listed in subclause 24.2.2.2(f) above.

Gradient Of UPVC Pipes Under-Crossing Other Services

Unless otherwise specified or shown in the Drawings or directed by the SO Rep on the Site, the gradient
of UPVC pipes under-crossing other services shall be :
Pipe Size
110mm

24.2.2.4

Gradient
1: 6

Preparation Of Bottom Trench

The trench shall be excavated to the required width and depth; the bottom of the trench shall be free from
stone, levelled and well punned. The pipe shall be laid at the depth specified to the details shown in the
Drawings unless otherwise specified.
A layer of 150mm thick hardcore bed well blinded with granite dust shall be provided to areas that have
muddy, clay or soft soil. The hardcore shall consist essentially of crusher run/stones blinded with sufficient
blinding material to aid consolidation.

24.2.2.5

Flare-Mouth Pipes And Coupling

Flare-Mouth UPVC pipes shall be used for entry into manhole wall unless otherwise specified. The outer
surface of the pipe shall be roughened with glass paper or sandpaper and a coat of solvent cement
applied for its length in the manhole wall.
All the ends of flared-mouth pipes shall be sealed with end plugs to prevent entry of earth or cement.

24.2.2.6

Construction Method
(a)

Where UPVC of less than 16-Ways are to be laid, they shall be encased in Grade 20 concrete to a
minimum thickness of 50mm as shown to the details in the Drawings.

(b)

Where UPVC are to be laid in multiple formation, polypropylene spacers shall be used at a
maximum spacing of 1.5m apart to allow clearance between adjacent pipes.

(c)

The starting end of the pipe shall be blanked off with a board or boards to prevent foreign objects
from entering the pipes. When joining multiple pipes, all pipe ends and the interior of the collar shall
be thoroughly cleaned with a dry rag followed by a liberal coating of solvent cement. The collar
shall then be pushed into the first pipe by hand. A suitable wooden batten is then placed across the
remote end of the collar and tapped with a hammer until it is engaged midway. The next length of
pipe shall then be engaged to the collar and similarly tapped until fully engaged.

BLDG04/S24.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 24-6
24.2.2

110mm Nominal Size UPVC Pipe Installation (Cont'd)

24.2.2.6

Construction Method (Cont'd)

(d)

The first layer of concrete shall be placed to the required thickness on the prepared trench bottom.
The bottom layer of the pipes shall then be laid (using the spacer to maintain the spacing between
pipes where applicable) such that a minimum gap, sufficient for the specified concrete thickness,
remains between the outside pipes and the side of the trench or trench shuttering where used. The
next layer of concrete shall then be placed to the prescribed thickness before the second layer of
pipes are laid. This process shall be continued until the final layer of concrete is laid to the
specified thickness. The concrete shall be evenly placed around the duct and each batch, as it is
placed, shall be properly compacted without creating unbalanced side thrust against the pipe.
Where ready mix concrete is used, the placing of concrete up to three layers of pipe in a single
batch is allowed, provided 12mm size diameter vibrators are used to consolidate the concrete filling
the spaces between the pipes.
For pipeline encased with 100mm thick concrete, each batch shall be well compacted and worked
around the pipe and vibrated using a vibrator. The space between the pipes shall be properly
tamped with a 12mm diameter rod to ensure that the concrete is properly filled. The final layer of
concrete shall be thoroughly trowelled.

24.2.3

(e)

When pipes are laid under conditions where backfilling is required to be carried out immediately,
approved type of rapid hardening cement additive compound shall be used with the concrete.

(f)

All spaces alongside the pipe shall be filled with stone free earth and hand punned to a compacted
thickness of not less than 100mm above the top of the pipe barrel.

(g)

Where the pipe is recessed into the wall of the manhole, the outside surface of the pipe shall be
roughened with glass paper or sandpaper and a coat of solvent cement applied for its length in the
manhole wall.

(h)

Pipes shall be laid at a minimum depth of 1.2m below the final ground level or as otherwise
directed.

(i)

Pipes shall be in straight run. When bending is unavoidable, the bend shall be gradual and smooth.
No S bend is allowed.

(j)

A 90 degree upturn when changing from a horizontal to a vertical plane shall be done with
approved type factory made bend pipe. The pipe shall be clipped and flushed against the wall and
shall rise to a height of 1.8m above ground level unless otherwise directed.

(k)

A nylon/polyethylene rope shall be provided in each pipe to facilitate cable pulling after pipe testing
and this shall be drawn in together with the proposed cable. The rope shall be of 4-core or multistrand type with overall diameter of 6.0mm in coil of 200m. In all lead-in pipes, the rope shall
extend to the first manhole to allow pulling of cables in the manhole.

Standard Manholes
(a)

The details of the standard manholes are shown in the Drawings. The presence of unforeseen
obstructions in the ground, or adverse ground conditions, may necessitate the construction of a
type other than that specified, or a modification of one or more of the dimensions stipulated in the
Drawings. The SO Rep shall advise the Contractor of any modifications required. The Contractor
shall not carry out any modification without the approval of the SO Rep.

(b)

Before any concrete is placed :

BLDG04/S24.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

(i)

The bottom of the excavation must be properly levelled and consolidated.

(ii)

The bottom shall be kept dry by providing a sump hole as shown in the Drawings to
accommodate a water pump, and a layer of 150mm thick hardcore material shall be
provided where necessary.

Bldg Spec
Page 24-7
24.2.3

Standard Manholes (Cont'd)

(c)

Pipes shall be cast in situ as construction of manhole proceeds. Pipe ends shall be trimmed and
entries made clear of raw edges which may damage cables, if flared mouth pipe is not used.

(d)

Pipes shall enter the manholes in the manner as shown in the Drawings or as directed by the SO
Rep. The pipes shall enter the manholes at such depths as to ensure a minimum clearance of
350mm from the roof and base and 150mm from the walls at the sides unless otherwise specified.

350mm
150mm

150mm
350mm

(e)

Rawl plugs, channel brackets and anchor irons and earth rods shall be fixed in the manhole as
shown in the Drawings or in such other positions as determined by the SO Rep.

(f)

Manholes shall be constructed at a depth to allow a 230mm thick grade 30 concrete shaft wall with
the following height (measured from the roof to the top of the cover) as shown :
Manhole Code
JX 2
MX 1 and MX 2
MX 3 and MX 4

Height (mm)
250 shown in the details in the Drawings
400 shown in the details in the Drawings
1200mm with single layer of steel fabric reinforcement shown
in the details in the Drawings

Where X = C denotes that heavy-duty manhole frame and cover shall be used.
Where X = F denotes that medium duty manhole frame and cover shall be used.
Concrete for filling the recess of the frame and cover shall be of grade 30 concrete and shall be
flushed with the top of the cover. For heavy duty without frame and cover, the concrete shall be
filled up to the ribs without covering the ribs.
(g)

Manhole walls shall be fair faced and not rendered. All projections shall be removed and cavities
filled with cement mortar. The walls shall not be coated with cement or cement sand wash.

(h)

The floor shall be given a 20mm rendering of cement mortar with a fall towards the sumphole from
all directions.

(i)

Only approved formwork shall be used in manhole construction.

(j)

Manholes or other structures shall be located outside the Drainage Reserve and at a minimum
clear distance of 1m from the wall of an existing culvert, or 2.5m from the boundaries of the
Drainage Reserve.

(k)

Manholes should be located within the turfed area where feasible. The top level of the manholes
should match the final road level or the surrounding ground level as decided by the SO Rep.

(l)

The position of the manholes and pipelines should not conflict with the drains, sewer lines, sewer
manholes, electrical pipelines and draw pits.

(m)

Completed manholes shall be pumped clear of water and made ready for the SO Rep to inspect.

BLDG04/S24.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 24-8
24.2.4

Manhole Frame & Cover

(a)

Manhole frame and cover shall be obtained from suppliers approved by StarHub and be classified
as medium duty or heavy duty.

(b)

Medium duty frame and cover shall be fixed onto manhole constructed within turf or footpath areas.

(c)

Heavy-duty frame and cover shall be fixed onto manhole constructed within carriageway or car
park.

(d)

Voids in the frame and cover of heavy-duty type are to be filled with grade 30 concrete, well
tamped, levelled off, and cured before use.

(e)

The manhole frame and cover shall be placed on top of manhole shaft, with a minimum width of
150mm and a minimum depth of 150mm and grade 30 concrete haunching all round the frame.
The frame and cover shall be fixed in such a manner as to be level with the surrounding area.

(f)

Manhole covers near to building edges or road edges shall be aligned with these edges.

24.2.5

Pipe, Manhole And Trench Testing

24.2.5.1

Pipe Testing Of 110mm Nominal Size UPVC Pipe Between Manholes

24.2.5.2

(a)

On completion of the pipe laying (including compaction of the backfill) between any two manholes
or sites thereof, a cylindrical brush and standard Mandrel (see details in the Drawings) or a Quad
No.5 cable of minimum 2m length shall be passed through each bore in both directions to test the
pipe and to remove any foreign matter which may have entered. The Contractor shall provide the
test mandrel and brush. The mandrel shall follow the brush to minimize possible scouring or
breaking of the pipe. The testing shall be carried out under the direction of the SO Rep before the
section of pipes is accepted.

(b)

When the building of manhole(s) is/are deferred until after the completion of a section of pipe
included in the Works, the last 2m of each bore shall be tested. The SO Rep shall first make a
visual check with the aid of a torchlight or similar means of illumination. Any foreign matter shall be
removed from the pipe.

(c)

The Contractor shall test and install draw-wires or nylon ropes in all newly laid pipes including one
way pipe. (nylon/polyethylene rope of 4-core or multi-strand type with overall diameter of 6.0mm in
coil of 200m).

(d)

Testing of encasement of the pipe shall be subjected to approval by the SO Rep.

Manhole Testing
(a)

Cube Test
When instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall furnish the required numbers of 150mm
cubes of concrete for manhole construction to be prepared and tested for its compressive strength
in accordance with SS 78:1972. A minimum of one such test shall be conducted per ten manholes.
The minimum works cube strength of concrete shall be as shown hereunder :

(b)

Grade 20

14N per mm after 7 days

20N per mm2 after 28 days

Grade 30

20N per mm2 after 7 days

2
30N per mm after 28 days

Core Test
After the concrete has hardened, the SO Rep may at his discretion, instruct the Contractor to drill
sample(s) of concrete from manhole walls or floors or roofs and send such sample(s) for core test
in accordance with BS 1881 all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

BLDG04/S24.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 24-9
24.2.5

Pipe, Manhole And Trench Testing (Cont'd)

24.2.5.3

Water Proofing
The Contractor shall take all necessary actions to ensure that after the completion of pipe laying and
manhole construction, there shall be no leakage such as seeping, dripping or flowing of water through
manhole walls, roof, floor and pipe entries.

24.2.5.4

Testing of Trench
The Contractor shall arrange all the necessary equipment and manpower to carry out tests on the
constructed trenches on any of the following :
(a)

the depth of covering;

(b)

the concrete encasement;

(c)

the trench base construction;

(d)

the compaction test of the backfilling material and the subgrade;

(e)

quality test of backfilling and reinstatement materials;

(f)

the fabric reinforcement.

The Contractor shall rectify Works that are not carried out in accordance with the Specifications. All test
results shall be certified by the SO Rep.
24.2.5.6

Backfilling For Underground Pipe System

All trenches excavated for the provision of underground pipe system for telecommunication cables shall
be backfilled as follows :
(a)

For trenches that are located within the road, backfill shall be from the completed pipe level to the
subgrade of the road with granular materials such as sand/granite fines or quarry dust. The
backfilling shall be properly compacted.

(b)

For trenches which are not located within the road, backfill to the level required under the Contract
with good dry earth approved by the SO Rep.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 25/.....

BLDG04/S24.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 25-1
SECTION 25
CHILDRENS' PLAYGROUND,
FITNESS STATION AND HARDCOURT

25.1

GENERAL
Construct badminton court, sepak takraw court, volley ball court, basket ball court, fitness station, and
children's playground, complete with play equipment, play sculpture, sand filling; or concrete base with line
markers, table and concrete benches in numbers and to positions as shown in the Drawings. Details and
finishes shall be as shown and as specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it.

25.2

SETTING OUT
Set out outline of playground, courts, fitness station, or position of play equipment and obtain approval
from the SO Rep before proceeding further. Allow for shifting and making adjustment when directed by
the SO Rep.

25.3

LEVELS
Levels of playground and equipment shall be based on finished ground level adjourning and not
necessarily on finished platform level shown on the Drawings. Check on site in all cases to ensure that
rainwater collected on these playground can be discharged into nearby drains. Adjust levels where
necessary.

25.4

GROUND BASE
After removal of the top layer of the soil, the ground shall be well consolidated mechanically before laying
hardcore. Consolidate again, filling more hardcore to make up to level. Should ground be soft, obtain the
decision of the SO Rep on the necessity for piling work.

25.5

CONCRETE STRUCTURE

25.5.1

Construct concrete structure of Grade 25 concrete as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete"

including all clauses and subclauses under it.

25.5.2

Bases of playgrounds shall be hardcore base of an average net thickness of 100mm, consolidated
hardcore, blended and topped with 50mm thick crusher run (6-40mm) and compacted to a net thickness of
100mm and to a fall 1:50 or as shown in the Drawings.
Provide expansion joints to positions and details as shown.

25.5.3

Hardcourts And Multi-Purpose Courts

Where hardcourts and multi-purpose courts are included in the Works, these shall be constructed strictly
in accordance with the Drawings. The slab shall be a minimum of 150mm thick reinforced with wire mesh
D8 placed 35mm from the top surface. The Grade 30 concrete shall be cast as specified in Section 4
"Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
Contraction joints shall be introduced into the slab at a spacing of 9500mm or as shown in the Drawings. It
shall be formed by a saw-cut after the concrete has aged for at least one day. The depth of the saw-cut
shall be at least 40mm. For multi-purpose courts, a 25mm expansion joint shall be formed strictly in
accordance with the Drawings at the half-court line.

BLDG04/S25.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 25-2
25.5.3

Hardcourts And Multi-Purpose Courts (Cont'd)

The slab shall be finished with 3 passes of power trowel done without sprinkling of cement dust, cement
grout or water onto the surface. The trowelling shall be completed before the concrete set. Ensure a
sufficient team of workmen to complete the job. The concrete shall be immediately cured for seven days
with approved curing compound or other approved methods.
The basketball court stand shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings. Concrete footing shall
be as shown in the Drawings. All joints shall be fully welded to a neat and smooth finish. 50mm thick
nylon cushion padding shall wrap round the standpost to the height as shown in the Drawings. The
backboard shall be 18mm clear acrylic sheet and shall be fixed to the angle support with 6mm diameter
stainless steel counter sunk screws and at intervals as shown in the Drawings.
All galvanised steel pipes, angles and supports shall be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching
primer and one coat of approved zinc chromate primer and then painted with one coat of undercoat and
one finishing coat of approved enamel paint.
All court lines shall be painted with polyurethane paint in bright red, orange, blue or white as indicated.
Samples of polyurethane paint showing the colour range as specified shall be submitted to the SO Rep for
approval.
The Contractor shall ensure that the steel structure are adequately and effectively protected from lightning
strike. The lightning protection system shall be in accordance with the Drawings.

25.6

CONCRETE PIPES
Concrete pipes shall be of the dimensions as shown in the Drawings & conforming to BS 556.

25.8

PRECAST SLABS
Precast slabs around edges of playground shall be 300mm x 300mm x 100mm thick of Grade 30 concrete
as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it and cast in
steel moulds.
Lay slabs on 1:3 cement mortar bed with 25mm gaps between slabs. Fill these gaps with 5 to 10mm
graded granite chippings.

25.10

SUB-SOIL PIPES
All sub-soil pipes shall be installed at areas as indicated in the Drawings.
All sub-soil pipes shall be of perforated UPVC sub-soil pipes conforming to BS 4962 : 1989 or SS 272
UPVC pipes with perforations as shown in the Drawings.
All sub-soil pipes shall be wrapped with approved non-woven geotextile fabric and encased with washed
sand as shown in the Drawings.
All sub-soil pipes shall be laid in 1:100 gradient (minimum) and with uPVC pipe joint fittings. The maximum
length of sub-soil pipe shall be 25m. For perimeter open drains with depth of 400mm and above, the
diameter of the sub-soil pipes shall be 150mm. Where the depth of the perimeter open drain < 400mm,
the diameter of the sub-soil pipes shall be 100mm. Under such case, consult with the SO Rep before
proceeding.
All sub-soil pipes shall be connected to sumps and drains at the outlet.
Upon completion of laying of all subsoil pipes, the Contractor shall prepare and submit 3 copies of as-built
drawings to the SO Rep.
Geotextile fabric shall be non-woven type and approved by SO Rep. The tensile strength of geotextile
shall be minimum 7.0kN/m and flow rate shall be 80 -150 litres/sq.m/sec. Submit test report and sample
for the approval of SO Rep before installation on the Site.

BLDG04/S25.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 25-3
25.11

PLAY EQUIPMENT
Fabricate all playground equipment as shown and complying with SS 457:1999. Install these equipment
in the positions and in accordance with the details as shown or as directed by the SO Rep. Inform the SO
Rep when this work begins.
Upon handing over the playground including play equipment, the Contractor shall submit a Performance
Compliance Certificate in the format as shown in Appendix A46, to the SO Rep.

25.12

CAST-IN-SITU EPDM RUBBER

FLOORING FOR CHILDRENS PLAYGROUND

25.12.1

Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses
under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the
purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred to as "Performance Requirement"). In the event
the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are
upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all
necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but
such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising
under the Contract.

25.12.2

Concrete Base
The concrete base shall be finished in accordance with the manufacturers requirements with the
necessary drainage and falls before laying the cast-in-situ rubber flooring.

25.12.3

Cast-In-Situ Rubber Flooring

The wet-pour rubber flooring for the childrens playground consists of a tw0-layer system, comprising of a
base mat of Styrene Butadiene Rubber (hereinafter referred to as SBR for the purposes of this clause
including all subclauses under it) rubber granular and a top surface of Ethylene Propylene Dienemonomer
(hereinafter referred to as EPDM for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it). The
completed rubber flooring shall be free from Defect, such as blistering, fissure, peeling, delamination,
disintegration, unevenness and discolouration.
The performance of the rubber flooring surfacing shall comply with SS 495:2001.
(a)

Polyurethane Binder
The binding agent shall be a solvent free single component Methylene Diphenyl Isocyanate
(hereinafter referred to as MDI for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it)
based, moisture curing binder. It shall be Toulene Diphenyl Isocyanate (hereinafter referred to as
TDI for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) free. The binder shall be
Flexilon 1102; Stobielast S133/S134; Tennek TPB 4811 (2c); Incorez 902/023; Poly 8112C; or other approved, polyurethane binder.

(b)

EPDM Top Layer

The EPDM shall be peroxide cured only. The typical physical properties of the peroxide cured
EPDM shall be as follows:
Hardness (IRHD) 65 5;
Tensile (Mn/m)
Elongation at break (%)
Specific Gravity

> 4.2
> 650
1.58 0.03

EPDM pigment synthetic rubber granules (size 1 4mm) shall be coloured EPDM and must be UV
stable. Strand, shave, chipped or shredded rubber is not acceptable in the top layer.
A minimum of 10mm thick top layer EPDM rubber surface shall be a seamless surface. The
colours and design shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to its installation. The
EPDM shall be BRG; MRI; or other approved.

BLDG04/S25.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 25-4
25.12.3

Cast-In-Situ Rubber Flooring (Cont'd)

(c)

Base Layer
The base layer shall be a precise combination of black granular rubber SBR (size 4 to 10 mm)
mixed with binder. The thickness of the SBR base rubber shall be minimum 65mm thick.

(d)

Thickness
The total thickness of the cast-in-situ EPDM rubber flooring shall not be less than 75 mm thick.

25.12.4

Method Of Installation
The system shall be laid-in-situ on top of the concrete base and trawled to provide an even, seamless.
porous, slip resistance and resilient rubber flooring.
(a)

Surface Preparation
All surfaces are to be laid to fall and shall be clean and dry before commencement of the Works.
The new concrete base shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of seven days prior to the
commencement of the rubber flooring.

(b)

SBR Base Rubber

SBR base rubber granules shall be thoroughly mixed by mechanical mixer with the polyurethane
binder and laid onto the concrete slab. A minimum ratio of 100:12 by weight, between the rubber
granules and binder shall be mixed on the Site. The SBR rubber layer shall be minimum 65mm
thick . The screed shall be trowelled to form a uniform and seamless layer. A roller is required to
roll the surface to maintain an equal density surface throughout.

(c)

Curing For Base Rubber

The surface shall be cured in ambient temperature for a minimum of 12 hours before proceeding to
the next layer.

(d)

EPDM
A minimum thickness of 10mm EPDM layer is laid on a SBR rubber base. A minimum ratio of
100:18 by weight between the EPDM rubber and binder shall be mixed. The screeding shall be
cast-in-situ screeding and hand trowel to maintain a seamless application.

(e)

Curing For EPDM

The surface can be walked on only after 18 hours. However, the playground shall only be opened
for public usage after 5 days when full curing is achieved. Proper barricade shall be provided
during the process of curing.

(f)

Edges
The surface edges shall be flush with adjacent areas or tapered to provide a safe and barrier-free
transition.

25.12.5

Performance Requirements
Test certificates for the performance requirements specified hereunder shall be submitted to the SO Rep
for approval. The performance requirements and test methods for impact absorbing playground surfacing
shall comply with SS 495:2001.
(a)

Resistance To Abrasive Wear

The cast-in-situ surfaces shall exhibit the performance specified hereunder :
(i)
(iii)

(b)

Wear index shall be less than 1.0;

Wear ratio (p) shall be not less than 1.0 and not more than 3.0

Slip Resistance
The minimum slip resistance measured in any direction of test , under either wet or dry conditions
shall not be less 40.

BLDG04/S25.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 25-5
25.12.5

Performance Requirements (Cont'd)

(c)

Resistance To Indentation
The residual indentation (r), after 24 hour recovery, shall not be more than 5.0mm.
after removal of the load and after allowing for 24 hour recovery, none of the specimens tested
shall exhibit any cracking, splitting or perforation around the point at which the load was applied.

(d)

Ease Of Ignition
The greatest radius of effects of ignition shall not exceed 35mm and shall thereby be classified as
having a LOW radius of effects of ignition.

(e)

Critical Fall Height

Critical fall height of impact absorbing surfacing shall comply with SS 495:2001.

25.12.6

Warranty
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in the
Deed of Warranty For Cast-In-Situ EPDM Rubber Flooring For Childrens Playground as produced in
Appendix A6. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the
Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at its sole discretion decide.
In the event the Deed of Warranty for part of the Works or for the whole Works is to be submitted to such
Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty as produced in
Appendix A6(TC) to such Town Council(s). The duly executed Warranty shall be submitted immediately
upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep
considers the Works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event the
Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time
specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor
in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per Deed of
Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of
the duly executed Deed of Warranty.
Total pages for this Section :

Section 26/.....

BLDG04/S25.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 26-1
SECTION 26
TREE PLANTING AND TURFING
26.1

PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS

26.1.1

General
The work generally includes :

26.1.2

26.1.3

26.1.4

(a)

Preparation of plant bed and tree hole including soil supplements.

(b)

The search, selection, supply, delivery and planting of nursery plants.

(c)

Protection, maintenance, guarantee and replacement of all plant materials and mulched beds.

Quality Of Workmanship And Materials

(a)

All materials shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to use on the Site. Materials shall be
obtained from approved sources/or suppliers.

(b)

All materials and workmanship shall be of the best quality.

(c)

All plant materials supplied shall be free of pest disease, discolouration and damage. Plants
shall be well branched with vigorous shoots. The root system of each plant shall contain a
good proportion of fibrous roots.

Inspection
(a)

All materials shall be subjected to inspection and approval by the SO Rep.

(b)

Inspection and approval of plants on delivery shall be for quality, size and variety only and
shall not in any way impair the right of rejection for failure to meet other requirements during
the planting or at the time of inspection for final acceptance.

Submission
(a)

Samples
Submit samples of each of the following type of materials to be approved except where
specified otherwise :
Topsoil
Materials for planting mixtures
Materials for staking, guying and wrapping
Fertilizers

(b)

Request for Substitution

If substitutions for the plants listed in the plant schedule are required, submit request for
substitution approval in writing within six weeks from the date of the Letter of Acceptance.

(c)

Photographs of Plant Material

Within six (6) calendar months from the commencement date of the Time for Completion,
submit two (2) complete sets of photographs of all plant material subject to inspection. All
photographs shall be labelled and representative of the plant materials specified.

(d)

Maintenance Reports and Schedule

During the Maintenance Period, submit monthly reports describing the work completed for the
previous month and the work to be accomplished in the following month.

BLDG04/S26.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 26-2
26.1.5

Horticultural Supervisor
The Contractor shall employ a competent, experienced (min 2 years) and qualified horticultural
supervisor (minimum Certificate of Ornamental Horticulture or equivalent) to be stationed full time at
the Site and for the full duration of the Works required under this Section including all clauses and
subclauses under it, who shall receive and act upon instructions given by the SO Rep, and such
instructions given to the horticultural supervisor shall be deemed to have been given to the
Contractor.

26.1.6

Notice Of Works
The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep at least 24 hours in advance of his intention to commence
any of the following operations : setting out; excavation; backfilling; plant delivery and planting.

26.1.7

Topsoil
All topsoil shall be of good quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps or other extraneous matter, be
friable and porous in texture. The texture content shall be 40-50% sand, 20-25% clay and 20%
approved organic matter.

26.1.8

Sub-Soil
The clay content of the sub-soil which is the strata found just below the top soil layer shall not be
greater than 45%.

26.1.9

Unwashed Sand
The unwashed sand shall be free of any debris, stones or other foreign material.

26.1.10

Soil Conditioner
Soil conditioner shall be peat, cocopeat, organic compost, or other approved fibrous organic matters
suitable for mixing with soil to make a friable growing medium for plants.

26.1.11

Lightweight Aggregate
Lightweight aggregate shall be clean clinker of low-density inert material of vermiculite or volcanic
scoria, expanded shale/clay or other porous material weighing not more than 500 kg per m3.

26.1.12

Water-Holding Medium
Water-holding medium is an absorbent copolymer water crystal that increase the water-holding
capacity of any soil mixture to at least 15 times its own weight.

26.1.13

Setting Out
(a)

The Contractor shall set out the Works in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the
SO Rep.

(b)

Any discrepancies between the Drawings and actual conditions on the Site shall be notified to
the SO Rep before commencement of the Works. If the Contractor fails to notify the SO Rep
on any such discrepancies, all costs and expenses of any adjustment, amendment, resetting
and realignment of the setting out shall be borne by the Contractor.

(c)

The location of trees, palms and shrubs shall be laid out and pegged by the Contractor on the
Site to be inspected by the SO Rep before further commencement of the Works. The pegs
shall be painted to indicate sizes of holes/pits as follows:
Holes / Pit Sizes
0.5m x 0.5m x 0.5m
1.0m x 1.0m x 1.0m
1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m

BLDG04/S26.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Colour Indication
Yellow
Not Painted
Red

Bldg Spec
Page 26-3
26.1.13

Setting Out (Cont'd)

(d)

26.1.14

The shape, pattern and layout of flower beds shall be demarcated and drawn by the
Contractor on the Site. The Site shall be inspected by the SO Rep before further
commencement of the Works.

Hole For Planting

Holes for planting shall be decided by the SO Rep.
All holes excavated shall be inspected and approved by the SO Rep before backfilling soil mixture.
All excavated and unwanted materials shall be removed from the Site. The Contractor shall allow in
the Contract Sum for excavating clayish subsoil, broken concrete, rubble or other material when
excavating holes for tree planting as no claim for extras shall be entertained for excavation in difficult
or hard ground.
Holes for planting shall be of the following sizes :

26.1.15

(a)

Minimum 1.0m x 1.0m x 1.0m deep for planting of tree saplings

(b)

Minimum 1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m deep for the planting of semi-mature (instant and 30-litre bag
and above) trees and fruit trees

(c)

Minimum 500mm deep for flower beds or trenches to areas as shown in the Drawings

(d)

Minimum 500mm x 500mm x 500mm deep for planting of shrubs and foliage plants

Soil Mixture for Backfilling

(a)

Waterlogged Hole
If there is underground water or the hole is waterlogged, necessary action or measure shall be
taken to rectify the waterlogged condition

(b)

Soil Mixture
All planting holes shall be backfilled with 3:1 topsoil, soil conditioner and 1kg per m3 of
granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6:4) or 4:2:1 subsoil, unwashed sand and soil conditioner with
3
1kg per m of granular fertiliser NPK (15:15:6:4) well mixed to a level 250mm higher than the
adjacent ground level at time of filling.

(c)

Soil Mixture For Roof Garden

All close bottom planter shall be backfilled with 4:2:2:2 topsoil, unwashed sand, soil
conditioner lightweight aggregate and 20g per m3 of water-holding medium and 1 kg per m3 of
granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6:4). They shall be well mixed off-site before backfilling into the
planter. The finished level of the soil mixture to be flushed with the top of the lower planter
wall.

(d)

Soil Mixture Used For Instant Tree

All planting holes for transplanted instant trees/palms/shrubs shall be backfilled with only
topsoil.

(e)

Soil Mixture For Fruit Trees

Similar soil mixture shall be used. The excavated earth shall be used to constructed earth
mound averaging 50 mm high and 1750mm wide along the edge of the holes all round.

26.1.16

Purchase Of Trees
The Contractor shall purchase the trees/palms/shrubs etc. from his own source.

BLDG04/S26.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 26-4
26.1.17

26.1.18

Plant Protection
(a)

All plant materials shall be carefully protected and if necessary wrapped in the nursery during
the lifting, awaiting transportation, unloading and during storage on the Site.

(b)

Any evidence of unsatisfactory protection to roots, stems, branches and leaves will result in
the plants being rejected. Unprotected plants shall not be transported during hot weather and
all plants shall be kept moist during transportation and storage. No plant shall be left on the
Site unplanted for more than two (2) days.

Plant Quality
(a)

All trees, palms, shrubs and other plants delivered to the Site shall be of the specified size,
free of pests and diseases and undamaged. Plants shall be well branched with bushy foliage.

(b)

All the general conditions of plants delivered to the Site shall be to the satisfaction of the SO
Rep and approved by him before planting out onto the Site in accordance with the Drawings or
as directed by the SO Rep.

(c)

The SO Rep shall reserve the right to reject undersized, unhealthy, unspecified, damaged,
injured, diseased, infested or any other plants not in accordance with the Contract and to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep during the entire period including the Maintenance Period and
Defects Liability Period of the Contract.

(d)

The Contractor shall immediately remove and replace all rejected plants at his own cost and
expense.

(e)

The plant size shall be measured on the day of planting at the Site in accordance with the
Drawings or as directed by the SO Rep in writing.

(f)

Plants not complying to the specified sizes shall be rejected and rectified by the Contractor.
All associated costs involved including plant material cost shall be charged and deducted from
any monies due to the Contractor, if he fails to rectify.

(g)

All trees, palms and shrubs shall possess the natural characteristics and growth habit typical
of its variety and species to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

(h)

All trees, palms and shrubs where required under the Contract shall comply with the
descriptions and requirements specified hereunder:
"Instant Trees"
Instant trees are semi-matured trees especially prepared in advance for transplanting. Instant
trees shall have the specified minimum clear and upright straight tree trunk of the specified
height and girth with at least 3 branches and a well developed secondary branch system.
"Big Saplings"
Big saplings are medium-sized nursery grown trees having a single straight stem and
unbroken leader with an overall height as specified. The stem shall be fully furnished with an
evenly spread and balanced lateral branches and shall be of the specified girth measured at
0.5m from the ground
"Saplings"
Saplings are small sized nursery grown trees having single straight stem and unbroken leader
with an overall height as specified. The stem shall be fully furnished with evenly and balanced
lateral.

BLDG04/S26.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 26-5
26.1.18

Plant Quality (Cont'd)

(h) (Cont'd)
"Edible Fruit Trees"
Edible fruit trees shall be of minimum height of 1.2m or as specified. They shall be marcotted
or grafted saplings especially as follows:
Pouteria caimito (Abiu)
- Grafted
Persea americana (Avocado)
- Grafted
Achras zapota (Chiku)
- Marcotted
Durio zibethinus (Durian)
- Grafted
Psidium guajava (Guava)
- Grafted or Marcotted
Artocarpus heterophyllus (Jackfruit)
- Grafted
Eugenia aquea (Jambu Air)
- Marcotted
Citrus microcarpa (Lime)
- Grafted
Mangifera indica (Mango)
- Grafted
Nephelium lappaceum (Rambutan)
- Grafted
Annona muricata (Soursop)
- Grafted
Averrhoa carambola (Starfruit)
- Grafted
Artocarpus incisus (Breadfruit)
- Grafted
"Single-stemmed Palms"
Single stemmed palms shall have a straight trunk of the specified height measured from the
root collar. The heads of the palms shall be balanced with at least five fronds and evidenced of
one new shoot.
"Clustered Palms"
Clustered palms are palms which naturally grow as a multi-stemmed clump by sending out
suckers. Such palms shall have a minimum of three suckers each and have a specified overall
height measured from the root collar. They shall have at least three fronds on each stem and
evidence of one new growing shoot per stem.
"Shrubs"
Shrubs are woody perennials of generally multi-stemmed and bushy habit and shall have a
minimum height measured from the ground level to the top of plants as specified. Such shrubs
shall be well balanced and bushy with strong developed fibrous root systems, and shall be
pruned in advance as required to achieve the specified height tolerances. Branches shall
break from the base of the plant just above the root collar, and shall be well furnished with
leaves right down to the ground level unless otherwise specified by the SO Rep. All plants
shall be grown in containers of suitable dimensions for the species.
"Herbaceous Plants"
Herbaceous plants are non-woody perennials usually of a clump forming habit. Such plants
shall have well-developed main stem or stems with good symmetry, and a healthy root
system. Clump of herbaceous plants shall include rhizomes, corns, tubers or roots with soil
undisturbed by lifting with evidence of growing shoots emerging above the soil level. All
herbaceous plants shall be grown in containers unless specified as being produced by an
alternate method.

BLDG04/S26.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 26-6
26.1.18

Plant Quality (Cont'd)

(h)

Cont'd
"Groundcover"
Groundcover plants are low growing or prostrate shrubs or herbaceous plants whose habit are
to totally cover the soil. All groundcover species shall be evenly balanced to allow equal
growth in all directions. Plants shall have fully developed roots and leaves. All plants shall be
grown in containers.
"Climbers"
Climbers are plants whose growth habit are to climb upwards by means of twining stems,
tendrils or clinging roots. Such plants shall have at least two leader shoots up to the specified
height or length and a vigorous root system. All plants are to be grown in containers.

26.1.19

26.1.20

Planting Techniques
(a)

Where trees/palms are planted in turf or shrub areas, plant trees and palms before the turfing
or shrub planting operations. Where shrubs are planted in turfed areas, plant the shrubs
before the turfing work.

(b)

The Contractor shall handle the plant in such a manner so that the ball of soil surrounding the
roots is not broken. The plant should be firmly held by the pot, plaster bags, containers, etc.

(c)

The Contractor shall ensure that trees, palms and shrubs are properly removed from their
pots, containers, plaster bags, etc and securely planted in the ground. The Contractor shall
straighten the plants whenever directed by the SO Rep.

(d)

All plants shall be planted with their collars levelled with the ground and covered with soil as
directed by the SO Rep.

(e)

All plants shall be planted to accommodate the spreading root system of the plant to the same
soil depth as in the nursery and shall be well watered before removing them from the
containers The plants shall be positioned upright and the soil firmed around the roots.

(f)

For large areas, the outer rows are to be set out first to ensure that the correct shape of the
bed is established. The remaining plants shall then be evenly distributed to cover the planting
area. The SO Rep shall be notified in advance if there are too many or too few plants to fill the
area required, and an assessment of the laying out adjustments will be directed accordingly.

(g)

The laying out of plants shall be completed and approved before planting into the soil bed can
commence.

(h)

Small shrubs, groundcovers and herbaceous plants shall be planted in pockets formed by a
trowel or hand spade. The pocket shall be deep enough and wide enough to accommodate
the root ball of the plant. The plants shall be placed upright in the planting pockets and make
firm into the ground by treading or hand pressure. All plants shall be watered thoroughly
immediately after planting.

Tree Support
(a)

To Tree Sapling
Tree saplings shall be supported immediately as directed after planting. The supporting stakes
shall be in 75mm diameter Bintangore pole or other approved material, minimum 3.0m long
and driven vertically 1.2m deep into the ground without injuring the rootballs and projecting
250mm above the crown of the sapling. Fasten tree saplings to the supporting stakes by
rubber or PVC hose and tie wires. Tying wire shall be No. 20 SWG galvanised wire, threaded
through 10mm diameter rubber or plastic hose and be wound around the tree trunk in a single
loop. The tree trunk shall be secured at a point just above its branch and also at a point just
500mm above ground level.

BLDG04/S26.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 26-7
26.1.20

Tree Support (Cont'd)

(b)

To Semi-Mature/Mature/Instant Tree (Tripod Support)

For semi-mature/mature/instant tree, 3 tree stakes of Bintangore poles shall be evenly spaced
around the tree to form a tripod system to support the transplanted tree at about two thirds of
its height or under the main fork. The tree stakes of Bintangore poles are driven at least 0.5m
into the ground at an angle. 2 layers of gunny sack or similar material shall be wound around
the tree trunk where it meets the supporters. The meeting point of the supporters are
tightened up with galvanised wire to form a sturdy tripod support system. The support system
shall be checked monthly and be removed after 6 months when the tree becomes stable.

26.1.21

Tree Guards
Provide tree guards to trees planted as specified by the SO Rep. The pattern of the tree guard shall
be decided by the SO Rep.

26.1.22

Tree Shade
Provide shading to mangosteen, rambutan or other sensitive fruit trees as directed by the SO Rep.
Nylon netting or other approved with 60% to 70% shading effect shall be used to cover the top of the
tree guard and upper 500mm of its four sides.

26.1.23

Transplanting Existing Trees (Instant Tree)

Where required under the Contract, transplanting of existing trees shall be carried out as follows :
(a)

Branch Pruning
Prune branches or pollard the tree as directed by the SO Rep. Paint all cuts with fungicidal
sealant.

(b)

Rootballs
All trees/palms, shrubs to be transplanted shall have an earth rootball of a minimum diameter
ranging from 3.5 to 7.5 times the diameter of the tree trunk measured at 1.0m above ground
level or to the size to be decided by the SO Rep. This shall be done by excavating a trench
about 0.8m deep around the tree at an appropriate distance. All protruding roots shall be cut
and painted with a fungicidal sealant.
Excavated trees shall be transplanted within the same working day unless otherwise directed
by the SO Rep.

(c)

Tree Pits
To avoid delay, the new pit for the tree transplant shall be ready before the tree is brought to
the new location. The pit shall be at least 0.5m wider and 0.25m deeper than the rootball to
allow for incorporation of topsoil beneath the root. The minimum tree pit dimension shall be
1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m deep.
All planting holes for instant tree shall be backfilled with good quality approved topsoil to a
level 250mm higher than the adjacent ground level at the time of filling.

(d)

Lifting And Transporting

The tree shall be lifted by motor crane or other lifting machinery of appropriate capacity. Every
precaution including rootball securely wrapped by moisten canvass and angle bar frame or
other approved materials shall be taken to prevent damage to the rootball during the loading
and transporting of the tree to the new location.

(e)

BLDG04/S26.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Before unloading a tree into position, the depth and diameter of the rootball shall be measured
and adjustment made to the pit. The tree shall be set in the hole, orientated, depth adjusted
and planted with minimum delay. The tree shall be planted to its former depth. Backfilling shall
then be firmly consolidated to eliminate air pockets under and around the roots. Tripod shall
be provided to keep it firmly in position if required.

Bldg Spec
Page 26-8
26.1.24

Tree Pruning
Trees with dead, rotten or crossed branches shall be pruned to maintain a clear stem up to the
specified height using the methods described below. The pruning operation shall be carried out by an
experienced worker with appropriate tools and equipment under the supervision of the Horticultural
Supervisor :

26.1.25

(a)

Pruning shall be done with a cut just above and sloping away from an outward facing healthy
bud;

(b)

Removal of branches shall be done by cutting flush with the adjoining stem and in such a way
that no part of the stem is damaged or torn;

(c)

Ragged edges of barks shall be trimmed with a sharp knife;

(d)

Any cut or wound over 25mm diameter shall be painted with an approved sealant such as
"Arbrex" or other approved after trimming; and

(e)

All pruning shall be cleared and removed from the Site after pruning.

Maintenance Of Trees, Shrubs And Ground Covers, Etc

Planted trees, shrubs and ground covers, etc. shall be maintained prior to handing over to the
Employer and shall be further maintained for another 6 months from the date the planting is handed
over to the Employer by performing and/or providing the following :

26.1.25.1

Watering
(a)

Trees
20 litres of water per tree shall be watered as and when directed by the SO Rep.

(b)

Landscaped Site
2

10 litre of water per m of the landscaped site shall be watered as and when directed by the
SO Rep.
(c)

Method
Watering shall be carried out by using rubber hose fitted with an adjustable spraying head/gun
to wet the soil thoroughly.

26.1.25.2

Soil-Loosening
(a)

Ornamental Tree Saplings

For ornamental tree saplings, the weeding circle shall be loosened to a depth of 75mm using a
garden fork.

(b)

Shrub/Foliage/Landscaped Site
For shrub/foliage/landscaped site, the weeding area shall be spiked to a depth of 100mm
using a garden fork.

26.1.25.3

Weeding
(a)

Ornamental Trees
For ornamental trees, weed to 1.0m diameter around the sapling tree base using hand trowel
or weeding hoe.
Weed out an annular band of 50mm around mature or semi-mature tree base using hand
trowel or weeding hoe or approved weedicide.

BLDG04/S26.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 26-9
26.1.25

Maintenance Of Trees, Shrubs And Ground Covers, Etc (Cont'd)

26.1.25.3

Weeding (Cont'd)
(b)

Fruit Trees
For fruit tree saplings, spread 100mm of mulch consisting of dry shredded leaves, grass
sword, wood chips, cocopeat or compost over the 1.0m diameter weeding circle. Spray
weedicide on the edge of the mulched area (50mm band) using a knapsack sprayer equipped
with a "drift-shield". The mulched area shall be weeded monthly.
For semi-mature and mature fruit trees, a weeding annular band of 200mm around the tree
base shall be maintained by weeding operation.

(c)

Shrub/Foliage (Individually Planted)

A weeding circle of 0.5m diameter around individually planted shrub/foliage shall be manually
weeded using a hand trowel or weeding hoe.

(d)

Landscaped Site
The Landscaped site shall be weeded using a hand trowel or weeding hoe.

(e)

Hedge
An annular band of 0.5m diameter around the base of the hedge shall be weeded using a
hand trowel or weeding hoe.

26.1.25.4

Fertilising
(a)

Ornamental Trees
Sapling
Fertiliser NPK Mg (15:15:6:4) shall be broadcasted at a rate of 375g per ornamental tree
sapling within the weeding circle 120mm away from the stem.
Semi-Mature/Mature Trees
For semi-mature/mature ornamental trees, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be inserted at a
rate of 0.5kg per 250mm girth into holes 300mm deep and at 500mm apart along the dripline.

(b)

Fruit Tree
Saplings Less Than 1 Year Old
For fruit tree saplings less than 1 year old, fertiliser NPK Mg (15:15:6:4) shall be placed under
the mulch at a rate of 300g per tree, 120mm away from the stem.
Saplings/Semi-Mature Trees
For fruit tree saplings/semi mature fruit trees, fertilizer NPK Mg (15:15:6:4) shall be
broadcasted at a rate of 0.5kg per tree within the drip zone away from the stem.
Matured Trees (Flowering/Fruiting)
For mature (flowering/fruiting) fruit trees, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be broadcasted
(on level ground) or shall be pocketed (on slope) at 1.0 kg per tree as directed by the SO Rep
within the drip zone away from the stem.

(c)

Shrub/Foliage
For shrub/foliage, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be broadcasted at 50g per m2, with the
weeding circle 100mm away from the stem.

BLDG04/S26.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 26-10
26.1.25

Maintenance Of Trees, Shrubs And Ground Covers, Etc (Cont'd)

26.1.25.4

Fertilising (Cont'd)
(d)

Landscaped Site/Hedge
For landscaped site/hedge, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be broadcasted at 50g per m2
as directed by the SO Rep.

(e)

Climber/Creeper
For climber/creeper, approved foliar fertilizer shall be sprayed as directed by the SO Rep.

26.1.25.5

Trimming
Trees shall be trimmed as directed by the SO Rep including performing and/or providing the following
:

26.1.25.6

(a)

Trim and remove all extra leader.

(b)

Trim and remove all side branches from the main trunk measured 3.0m from the ground for
trees along footpaths, carparks and roadside.

(c)

Trim and remove all dead, broken, diseased and unwanted branches/shoots.

(d)

Trim and remove all overlapping branches rubbing each other.

(e)

Remove and clear from the Site all trimmed vegetation.

(f)

Paint all cut surfaces exceeding 25.4mm with 2 coats of anti-fungus wound sealant.

Pest Control
(a)

Vegetative Stage Of Trees

For vegetative stage of trees, the top and bottom of tree leaves shall be thoroughly sprayed.
Respraying shall be done if it rains within 6 hours after spraying. Approved pesticides are :
Pesticides
Dimethoate
Deltamethrin
White Summer Oil
Abate 1% Sand Granules Benomyl
Captan
Thiram
Terrazole
Copper Fungicide (Metalic Copper)
Mancozeb
Captafol
Omite Tenac (sticker)

(b)

40% EC
1.25% EC
80% EC
50% EC
50% UP
80% UP
24% EC
50%
80% WP
39% EC
30% WP

Fruiting Stage Of Fruit Trees

For fruiting stage of fruit trees, brown paper or raffia bags shall be used for the control of fruit
fly 3 to 4 weeks after flowering for Chiku, Chempedak, Guava, Jackfruit, Jambu Ayer, Mango,
Pomelo and Starfruit.
Approved brown paper and raffia bags shall be used to bag the fruits as follows :
Fruit
Chiku; Starfruit
Guava; Mango
Jambu Ayer; Pomelo
Chempedak
Jackfruit

Size of Bag
150 x 150mm
150 x 300mm
400 x 400mm
400 x 500mm
500 x 800mm

Material of Bag
Brown Paper
Brown Paper
Brown Paper
Brown Paper or Raffia
Brown Paper or Raffia

Remove and clear from the Site all rotten fruits on trees or on ground.
BLDG04/S26.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 26-11
26.1.25

Maintenance Of Trees, Shrubs And Ground Covers, Etc (Cont'd)

26.1.25.6

Pest Control (Cont'd)

(c)

Shrubs/Foliage Etc
For shrubs/foliage etc, immediately spray with approved pesticides after the infestation is
spotted. Continue such spraying until the infestation is controlled.

26.1.25.7

Maintenance
Planted trees shrubs and ground covers, etc shall be maintained by adjusting tree tie, making good
damaged tree guards, adjusting tripod support including providing and/or performing other
reasonable work. The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for
maintaining all planted trees, shrubs and ground covers, etc provided under the Contract for a further
period of six months commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or
sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as
"Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this section including all clauses and subclauses under it)
by providing and/or performing the following :
Operation

26.1.25.8

26.1.25.9

Frequency

Soil Loosening

Monthly

Weeding

Monthly

Watering
Pest Control
Fertilising
Pruning
Adjusting tree ties

Daily
Monthly
Monthly
Monthly
Monthly

Damaged/Missing Tree Guards, Supporters,

Trees, Shrubs, Ground covers, etc.

To be replaced/repaired as directed by
the SO Rep.

)
) and/or to be carried
) out as directed by
) the SO Rep.
)

Warning Sign
(a)

The Contractor shall display sufficient warning signboards at strategic locations on the Site
during the progress of tree pruning/spraying of pesticide works, as directed by the SO Rep.

(b)

The Contractor shall also seal off the Site with red and white plastic tapes as an additional
safety precaution during the execution of the Works.

(c)

The signboard shall measure 1000mm long x 600mm wide using aluminium plate with
reflective sheeting and reflective wordings "DANGER - TREE PRUNING IN PROGRESS"
OR "DANGER PESTICIDE SPRAYING IN PROGRESS". A sample of the signboard shall
be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before using them on the Site.

Working Hours Of Tree Pruning

The Contractor shall carry out routine tree pruning/trimming operation within the following hours :
Monday to Friday
Saturday

:
:

7am to 3pm
7am to 12 noon

No routine tree pruning/trimming shall be carried out outside the above hours except otherwise
instructed by the SO Rep.
26.1.25.10

Updating Of Landscape Plan

The Contractor shall update a landscape plan within one month after final planting and to provide 6
sets of updated landscape plans to the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S26.DOC(11)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 26-12
26.2

TURFING

26.2.1

Site Preparation And Turfing

The Contractor shall allow for turfing Works, forming slopes and platforms with even surfaces to the
levels as shown in the Drawings. Clear away loose stones, gravels, tree stumps and building debris.
Seek the approval of the SO Rep before commencing turfing Works.

26.2.1.1

Soil For Site Formation

The soil used for backfilling shall be original clean earth and the topmost 600 mm shall be soil with a
clay content of not more than 45%.

26.2.1.2

Soil Scarification For Compacted Site

The top layer shall be scarified or loosened to 100mm deep for the whole Site and graded to fall
towards drains or as instructed by the SO Rep all at the Contractors cost and expense.

26.2.1.3

Site Gradient
The Site shall be graded to fall towards drains at a minimum ground gradient of 1 in 70 or as
instructed by the SO Rep all at the Contractors cost and expense.

26.2.2

Site Control Tests And Testing Instruments

Provide all necessary labour, plant, Construction Equipment, tools, instruments etc. for carrying out
all checking and testing of Site Works. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs
and expenses to comply with the requirements as specified, in the Contract Sum. No claim for
compensation or extras shall be paid for any work carried out by the Contractor in connection with
such Works.

26.2.2.1

Number Of Soil Test

The number of soil samples shall be 1 per 500 m subject to a minimum of 3 samples.

26.2.2.2

Percolation Test
Procedures for Percolation Test on dry soil sample are as hereunder specified:

26.2.2.3

(a)

Randomly select a spot where the test is to be conducted;

(b)

Dig a hole measuring about 400mm x 400mm x 600mm deep;

(c)

Fill the hole with water up to the top;

(d)

Cover the hole;

(e)

After 24 hours, observe whether or not all the water has drained off. The drainage
performance of the soil is acceptable if no water remain in the hole.

Jar Test
The procedures for Jar Test on dry soil sample are as hereunder specified:

BLDG04/S26.DOC(12)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

(a)

Fill a 250 ml measuring cylinder with water up to its two-third level;

(b)

Pour in a teaspoon of washing detergent;

(c)

Shake the contents well;

(d)

Pour in the soil sample until the water level rises to the 250 ml mark;

(e)

Shake the contents well;

(f)

Place the measuring cylinder on a level bench and gently tap until the surface of the sand is
level;

Bldg Spec
Page 26-13
26.2.2

Site Control Tests And Testing Instruments (Cont'd)

26.2.2.3

Jar Test (Cont'd)

(g)

Take measurement of the sand level;

(h)

After 3 hours of standing, take measurement of the height of the silt visible above the sand-silt
interface;

(i)

After 24 hours of standing, take measurement of the height of the clay visible above the siltclay interface;

(j)

Work out the percentage of clay, silt and sand.

26.2.3

Soil Mixture

26.2.3.1

All topsoil shall be of good quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps or other extraneous matter, be
friable and porous in texture. The texture content shall be 40-50% sand, 20-25% clay and 20%
approved organic matter.

26.2.3.2

The soil mixture shall be three (3) parts of topsoil with one (1) part of soil conditioner and 1kg per m3
of granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6:4) or 4:2:1 subsoil, unwashed sand and soil conditioner with 1kg
per m3 of granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6:4).

26.2.4

Thickness Of Soil Mixture

The minimum thickness of soil mixture shall be 150mm (including 25mm of original soil attached to
the turf) at the time of construction. A 125mm layer of soil mixture shall be spread over the prepared
surface, followed by the planting of fresh turf.

26.2.5

Turfing Materials
Provide turfing materials of size 300mm x 300mm with about 25mm of original soil adhering to the
roots, be of good quality, free from pests or diseases and of vigorous growth. The type of turf shall
be Cow Grass (Axonopus Compressus)
The turf shall be planted promptly to avoid desiccation.

26.2.6

Planting Turf
Sods shall be laid within 24 hours upon delivery, in brick-like patterns. Sods shall be firmly sunken
into the ground with their edges in contact but without stretching or overlapping or gap. Water turf
immediately after planting until the turf is thriving.

26.2.7

Rolling
When the level of the completed turfing Works is undulating or uneven, the turfed areas except those
on steep slopes shall be properly rolled out with a garden roller of weight not more than 150 kg or
with other approved means. The turfing shall give a uniform even surface on completion. Rolling
shall be carried out when the turf is established after the second grass cutting.

26.2.8

Temporary Fencing
Provide and fix temporary barricade to all turfed areas comprising 50mm x 50mm x 1.65m long Balau
timber posts spaced at 2.4m centres with one end driven 450mm into the ground. Corner and end
posts shall be strutted by 2 no. of 50mm x 50mm x 1.65m Balau timber post. Run 10mm diameter
nylon ropes diagonally and horizontally across the top and bottom of the barricade.

BLDG04/S26.DOC(13)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 26-14
26.2.9

Maintenance
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance
services, as specified hereunder, to the turfing Works during the Time for Completion and any time
period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, and for a further period of six
months commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of
the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance
Period" for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) by providing and/or
performing the following :

26.2.10

26.3

(a)

Watering with a volume of 10 litres per m daily for the first two weeks after planting and when
necessary or as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense;

(b)

Weeding where and when necessary or as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost
and expense;

(c)

Replacing dead turf or re-turf bare areas;

(d)

Fertilising before handing over, and on the 3rd and 6th month of the Maintenance Period;

(e)

Cutting grass fortnightly.

Safety Measures For Grass-Cutting Machines

(a)

Provide all safety precaution to eliminate danger to the workmen, the general public and the
property of others.

(b)

All mechanised driven or walk behind grass-cutting machines used shall be installed with
suitable protective guards of steel or other approved materials to eliminate splinters and flungoff objects from causing damage. Under no circumstances shall the protective guards be
removed from machines in operation.

(c)

Hand held open blade rotary machine shall not be allowed to be used without approved
guards.

(d)

The grass-cutter shall wear safety boots, goggles, helmets and safety vest. When these safety
requirements are not complied with, the Contractor's foreman or the SO Rep shall instruct the
grass-cutter to stop work.

(e)

Before grass-cutting commences, the public shall be kept at least 10 metres radically away
from the grass-cutter and a signboard shall be erected on the Site with the wordings
"DANGER KEEP OFF. GRASS CUTTING WORK IS IN PROGRESS".

(f)

The grass-cutting blade shall be securely fixed to the machine. When the machine is in
continuous use, regular checks shall be made. The blade shall be kept in good condition. A
worn-out blade shall be replaced immediately.

(g)

The bolts and nuts which are fastened to the cutter blade shall be checked before the
machines are operated to prevent the blade from flying off.

SUMP
Sump for sub-soil drainage shall be constructed to the size and in the position as shown in the
Drawings.

26.4

USE OF NON-POTABLE WATER

The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses incurred in the collection,
storage, transportation and use of non-potable water, when directed by the SO Rep, for watering turf,
trees and shrubs. Non-potable water can be collected free of charge from the ENV Sewage
Treatment Works. These Sewage Treatment Works are located at :
(a)
(b)
(c)

BLDG04/S26.DOC(14)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Ulu Pandan Sewage Treatment Works

Kim Chuan Sewage Treatment Works
Seletar Sewage Treatment Works

Bldg Spec
Page 26-15
26.4

USE OF NON-POTABLE WATER (CONT'D)

(d)
(e)
(f)

Kranji Sewage Treatment Works

Bedok Sewage Treatment Works
Jurong Sewage Treatment Works

The Contractor shall use water tankers or water-tight tanks mounted on trucks to collect the nonpotable water from any of the above ENV Sewage Treatment Works. The tank is preferred to have a
minimum capacity of 9000 litres. The Contractor must also ensure that unused non-potable water is
returned to the Sewage Treatment Works for proper disposal and not discharged into open drains in
water catchment areas.
The Contractor shall submit detailed particulars of their water tankers or tank mounted trucks to the
SO Rep who will then obtain an authorization letter from ENV for the registered tanker to collect nonpotable water.
The Contractor shall submit detailed justifications to the SO Rep for not using non-potable water for
watering turf, trees and shrubs, after direction has been given by the SO Rep to do so.

Total pages for this Section :

15
Section 27/.....

BLDG04/S26.DOC(15)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 27-1
SECTION 27
MULTI-STOREY CARPARK

27.1

GENERAL
Construct multi-storey carpark to details as shown in the Drawings. In addition to complying with the
requirements in the Specifications, the Contractor shall also be required to comply with the requirement
specified in this section including all clauses and subclauses under it.

27.2

WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB/CONCRETE

TOPPING AT CARPARK ROOF DECK OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARKS
Water reducing admixture shall be used for the reinforced concrete slab/concrete topping at the roof deck
level. The application shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
Check and ensure that the admixture shall not affect the strength or other properties of the reinforced
concrete. The admixture shall comply with SS 320 or relevant British Standards and shall be approved by
the SO Rep.

27.3

HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE

DOORS TO STAIRCASE OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK
(A)

Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it
has to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the
purpose of complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance
Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause
including all sub-clauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the
Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the
approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or
obligations arising under the Contract.

(B)

General
Provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with door
frames and ironmongery to staircase of multi-storey carpark. The half-hour fire-rated timber
surface finished composite doors, door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete
system and shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels and approved by the FSSD.
Details of the half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors shown in the Drawings
shall serve as a guide.

(C)

Shop Drawings And Sample

Prior to the installation, submit workshop drawings and PSB test certificates for the approval of the
SO Rep. Further, install a complete sample on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full
implementation.

(D)

Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the
following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall be at least half-hour
fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective
quality and profile of ironmongery required.

BLDG04/S27.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 27-2
27.3

HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE

DOORS TO STAIRCASE OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK (CONT'D)
(D)

Ironmongery (Cont'd)
Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be Grade 304 and the chemical
composition shall comply with SS40.
Schedule Of Ironmongery

(E)

(a)

4 no.

Stainless steel hinges.

(b)

1 no.

"Dorma" TS73V or "Tiki" 90 Series or "Hafele-Geze" Series 2190; or other

approved slimline door closer with cushioned back checking action.

(c)

1 no.

"Tiki" PH-20/BB/225 SS; or other approved stainless steel pull handles.

The diameter shall be 18mm minimum and the length shall be approximately
225mm.

(d)

1 no.

Stainless steel push plate of size 300mm x 150mm. The thickness shall be
1.2mm minimum. The word "PUSH" shall be engraved and painted on the
push plate

Certificates
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep certificates as documentary proof that the complete
system of the fire-rated timber finish composite door including door frames and ironmongery
installed are of at least half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.

27.4

HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED

COMPOSITE DOORS TO LIFT MACHINE ROOM FOR
MULTI-STOREY CARPARK

27.4.1

Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it shall
ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of
complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event
the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are
upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading
at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not
in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.

27.4.2

General
Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to lift machine room are shown in the Drawings, the Contractor
shall provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors to the lift machine
room complete with timber door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished
composite doors, timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system. The
complete system shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels, FSSD approval and certified under PSB
Product Listing Scheme.

27.4.3

Shop Drawings And Sample

The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Prior to the installation, provide shop drawings,
PSB Product Listing Scheme certificates, PSB test reports, PSB and FSSD approval for the approval of
the SO Rep. Further, a complete sample shall be installed on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep
before full implementation.

BLDG04/S27.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 27-3
27.4

HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED

COMPOSITE DOORS TO LIFT MACHINE ROOM FOR
MULTI-STOREY CARPARK (CONT'D)

27.4.4

Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the following
schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall be at least half-hour fire-rated and
approved by FSSD. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective
quality and profile of ironmongery required.
Provide and fix ironmongery in accordance with the following schedule:

27.4.5

(i)

4 no. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.

(ii)

1 no. "Accord" 0706C/1404/1591B or other approved half cylinder mortice lockset with stainless
steel lever handles on rose on both sides (shall comply with CP 2:2000, the door shall be
opened from the outside only by the use of key and shall not require a key to open it from
within the machine room).

(iii)

1 no. Brass rebated part.

(iv)

1 no. 200mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box type).

(v)

1 no. 300mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box type).

(vi)

1 no. "Dorma" TS 73 or "Tiki" 90 Series or "NHN" model 1082 or "New Star" 5002 or "Accord" 93;
or "YTL" 800 or "Union"; or other approved slim line door closer with cushioned back
checking action.

(vii)

1 no. Approved stainless steel selector.

Grade Of Stainless Steel

Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be Grade 304 and the chemical composition
shall be in accordance with SS40:1988.

27.4.6

Certificates
Submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire-rated timber surface
finished composite doors including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour firerated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.

27.4.7

Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".

27.4.8

Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber
Doors".

27.5

HANDRAILS, PIPE SUPPORTS AND EXPANDED METAL

TO PARAPET OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK
Provide and fix hot dipped galvanized steel handrails and pipe supports as shown in the Drawings. The
hot dipped galvanised steel handrails and pipe supports shall be in accordance with the requirements
specified in section 17 "Structural Steelwork" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
Provide and install "Bestal" BMM 3060 or "Emco" SM 3060; or other approved hot dipped galvanised steel
expanded metal to parapet. The expanded metal shall be of the following nominal size :
SWM
LWM
Thickness
Strand Width

BLDG04/S27.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

=
=
=
=

42 mm
115 mm
3 mm
6 mm

Bldg Spec
Page 27-4
27.5

HANDRAILS, PIPE SUPPORTS AND EXPANDED METAL

TO PARAPET OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK (CONT'D)
All metal strips and screws used for fixing shall be of hot dipped galvanised steel. The details of the
expanded metal shall be as shown in the Drawings. The handrails, pipe supports and expanded metal
shall be fabricated and assembled in the factory unless otherwise specified. All exposed surfaces shall be
straight and smooth. All joints shall be fully welded and no spot welding shall be used in the Works. All
welds shall be finished smooth and secured.
All galvanised steel surfaces shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one
coat of lead and chromate-free primer and then painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of
enamel paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.

27.6

RAILING, PIPE SUPPORTS AND BALUSTERS TO

STAIRCASE OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK
Provide and fix hot dipped galvanised steel railings, pipe supports and balusters as shown in the
Drawings. The hot dipped galvanised steel railings, pipe supports and balusters shall be in accordance
with the requirements specified in section 17 "Structural Steelwork" including all clauses and subclauses
under it.
All exposed surfaces shall be straight and smooth. All joints shall be fully welded and no spot welding shall
be used for the Works. All welds shall be finished smooth and secured.
All galvanised steel surfaces shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one
coat of lead and chromate-free primer and then painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of
enamel paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.

27.7

GALVANISED STEEL L-ANGLE TO ALL CORNERS OF COLUMNS AND WALLS

Provide and fix galvanised steel L-angle and mild steel flat to all internal corners of columns and walls
(next to driveways and ramps including 500mm walls) to the dimensions and details as shown in the
Drawings. The L-Angle shall be flushed against the finished surfaces of walls or columns. Paint
galvanised steel angles with two coats of luminous paint approved by the Land Transport Authority. The
colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.

27.8

SIGNBOARDS
All signboards and letterings shall be as shown in the Drawings. These shall be installed at positions as
decided by the SO Rep or as stated in the Drawings.

27.9

TRAFFIC SIGNS
Traffic signs shall be of retro-reflective material and of brightness as approved by the Land Transport
Authority. Letterings, plates and details shall be as shown in the Drawings. Galvanised steel pipes
specified in the Drawings shall comply with SS17. Samples of the traffic signs shall be approved by the
SO Rep.

27.10

PAINTING
(A)

External Painting And Warranty

Paint all external plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces with water based algae resistant
emulsion paint in accordance with Clause 23.2 "External Painting" including all subclauses under it.
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the work on the same terms and conditions as
stipulated in the Deed of Warranty For External Painting as produced in Appendix A5 and/or
A5(TC) as decided by the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S27.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 27-5
27.10

PAINTING (CONT'D)
(B)

Internal Painting
Paint all internal plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces with one priming coat and two
subsequent coats of approved acrylic emulsion paint. The priming coat may be with thinning of up
to 20% of clean water by volume. Subsequent coats shall not be diluted.

(C)

Painting Of Sample
Prior to the commencement of the painting work, submit the colour chart of approved paint to the
SO Rep for selection of colour scheme. The Contractor shall then paint one or more panels of the
multi-storey carpark parapets for the approval of the SO Rep.

27.11

TRAFFIC LINES, ARROWS AND DIRECTIONAL ARROWS ON FLOORS

Unless otherwise specified, all traffic lines, arrows and directional arrows on floors shall be of reflectorised
thermoplastic road marking as approved by the Land Transport Authority.
The thermoplastic material shall comply with SS 498:Part 1:2002 "Specifications for Hot Applied
Thermoplastic Road Marking Materials". The reflectorised thermoplastic road marking shall be provided
strictly in accordance with the supplier's instructions.
Samples shall be approved by the SO Rep before full implementation.

27.12

CAR PARKING BAYS

Paint white lines, red lines, numbers and letterings of the parking bays as shown in the Drawings or as
instructed by the SO Rep.
Unless otherwise specified, the paint shall be quick drying chlorinated rubber based and shall comply with
the requirements specified in SS221 "Specification for Road Marking Paint".

27.13

FORMWORK TO MULTI-STOREY CARPARK

In addition to complying with the requirements specified in Clause 4.19 "Formwork" including all
subclauses under it, the Contractor shall also comply with the following requirements for formwork to MultiStorey Carpark/Garage :
(a)

Propping to the slabs and beams at the lower floor deck shall not be removed until the slabs and
beams of the upper floor deck have been cast for 3 days.

(b)

The Contractor shall check and ensure that propping to the slabs and beams is adequate at all
times.

Total pages for this Section :

5
Section 28/.....

BLDG04/S27.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 28-1
SECTION 28
ELECTRICAL SUB-STATION/UTILITIES CENTRE/DUSTBIN COMPOUND

28.1

ELECTRICAL SUB-STATION

28.1.1

General
Electrical Substation shall be deemed to include Electrical Substation, Ring Main Substation, Transformer
Room, Generator Room, Tank Storage Room and all other utility rooms for electricity transmission,
whether located separately or within a building block.
Where metal roofing is used, it shall be as specified in Clause 13.3 "Metal Roofing And Insulation Sheet"
including all subclauses under it.

28.1.2

Construction Time
Commence work immediately when site is handed over and shall complete the electrical substation
including fencing as shown, not later than the Expiry of the Time for Completion as specified in the
Contract. Where no such date is stipulated, the substation including fencing shall be completed not later
than six calendar months before the Expiry of the Time for Completion of the earliest phase of the contract
or the Expiry of the Time for Completion of the earliest dwelling block if the Works is to be completed as a
single phase.

28.1.3

Cable Room of Electrical Substation

Where shown in the Drawings, the cable room shall be cast in waterproof concrete with precaution taken
to render it watertight. In the case where the water table is high, provide drainage for the cable room after
consulting with the SO Rep.

28.1.4

Cable Ducts
Provide and lay 155mm UPVC pipes in numbers, positions and lengths as shown and encased all round
with mass concrete to serve as cable ducts.
All UPVC pipes shall be of at least Class C type complying with the requirement of SS 141 or other
approved by PowerGrid. Both ends of the UPVC pipes shall be sealed with removable water-tight plugs.
The cable ducts shall be extended at least 600mm beyond the apron and adjacent drain.
Prior to the laying of ducts, check the ground conditions and should the ground be soft, inform the SO Rep
who shall decide whether piling is required or not.

28.1.5

Cable Trenches, Drains And Switch Gear Floor Openings

Cable trenches, drains and switch gear floor openings shall be provided with removable heavy duty A1
chequer plates or heavy duty GS gratings as shown in the Drawings capable of supporting a minimum
load of 100 kg.
Depth of trenches shall be as shown in the Drawings. After the completion of cable installation by
PowerGrid, all entries shall be sealed and water tight to the requirements of PowerGrid. Sand or granite
chips shall be provided to fill cable trenches.

28.1.6

Concrete Paved Areas

Surrounding concrete paved area within fence shall be 75mm thick 1:2:4 concrete reinforced with 1 layer
No. A6 welded steel fabric on 100mm consolidated hardcore.

BLDG04/S28.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 28-2
28.1.7

Reinforced Concrete Drain And Crossing

Construct length of surface drain in reinforced concrete to details as shown. Precast concrete drain
covers shall be 75mm thick reinforced with 2 layers No. A6 welded steel fabric or approved reinforcement
with main reinforcement spanning across drain.

28.1.8

Hollow Glass Blocks

Build hollow glass block panels shown in the Drawings and in accordance with the Manufacturer's printed
instructions. The size of the glass block shall be 150mm x 150mm x 100mm and approved by the SO
Rep. Fix 'EXMET' 60mm No. 20 or other approved reinforcing strip at every second course. Carry
reinforcements into brickwork or leave dowel bars of 4mm galvanised wire in reinforced concrete structure
to lap with reinforcement.
Mortar shall be in accordance with Clause 12.1 "Mortar Mix For Block And Brickworks" and pointed with
white Portland Cement. Paint openings around panel with bitumen before laying glass blocks.

28.1.9

Bronze Anodised Extruded Aluminium Vents To Electrical Substation

Provide and install bronze anodised extruded aluminium vent together with all necessary components to
all electrical substations as indicated in the Drawings. The aluminium frames and louvre blades shall be
extruded with the minimum thickness of 2.3mm and finished with 25 microns (minimum) anodic coating

28.1.10

Finishing To Internal Floors, Landings And Steps

All internal floors except basement landing, steps and transformer plinth shall be provided with 50mm thick
cement rendering including a smooth 20mm thick granolithic finish of 1 part cement, 1 part fine granite
chippings and 1 part sand with the addition of approved hardener all mixed in accordance with the
Manufacturer's printed instructions.
All walls and columns shall be provided with minimum 18mm cement plastering.

28.1.11

Time For Rendering

Allow for carrying out rendering after PowerGrid has installed their floor frames, switch gears and
equipment which may be some time after the sub-station is handed over to PowerGrid after the Date of
Substantial Completion for the sub-station.
The PowerGrid Engineer-in-charge shall be notified prior to final rendering of the switch room floor.

28.1.12

Finish To Flat Roof

Lay screed to flat roof with minimum fall of 1 in 60 of 1:3 cement:sand mix gauged with approved
waterproofing compound to the Manufacturer's printed instructions. Screed shall be minimum 18mm
thick.

28.1.13

Painting External And Internal Walls And Ceiling

Paint all vents, fascias, columns and beams, skimmed and plastered surfaces as specified in Section 23
"Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

28.1.14

Final Coat Painting And Touching Up

Allow for waiting until PowerGrid has installed sub-station equipment before applying final coat of painting
and touching up. This work may not be carried out within the Time for Completion of this part of the
Works.

BLDG04/S28.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 28-3
28.1.15

Electrical Installation
(A)

General
Provide and install electrical installation and fittings shown including earthing systems for the
electrical installation. Installation shall be carried out by a licensed electrician to the satisfaction of
the SO Rep and complying with the requirements of PowerGrid. All wiring shall run in galvanised
steel exposed conduits (not smaller than 20mm diameter) with spacer bar saddles and bases to BS
729.

(B)

Application For Testing

The installation shall be tested/verified by and to the requirements of HDB's Electrical Testing Unit
and approved by the SO Rep before handing over to PowerGrid. For all tests, at least seven (7)
working days advance notice shall be given to the SO Rep.

(C)

Retesting
Any omissions or Defect or faults detected during the day of testing shall be rectified and the
Contractor shall arrange for re-testing within three working days from the date of the last test.

28.1.16

Ironmongery
All ironmongery shall be as shown in the Drawings.

28.1.17

Fence And Gate

Where shown in the Drawings, fencing shall be carried out in accordance with Section 12 "Brickwork And
Blockwork" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
The gates shall be hung on clay brick piers and run on rollers over rails all as shown in the Drawings.
Chainlink perimeter fencing shall be of the PVC. covered type (green or grey) wire mesh. The base
support of the fencing shall be embedded in 150mm concrete kerb.
Ironmongery to gate shall be as shown in the Drawings.

28.1.18

Painting Fence And Gate

Paint all metal work and gate as specified in Section 23 "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses
and subclauses under it.

28.1.19

Fire Extinguisher
Unless otherwise specified, provide and fix 1 No. 9 kg dry powder fire extinguisher to each tank storage
room and generator room. All fire extinguishers provided shall be of the brand and type approved by the
FSSD.

28.1.20

Catch For Trap Door In Switch Room Floor

Provide and fix brass hook and eye for trap door.

28.1.21

Cat Ladder And Handle

Provide and fix mild steel cat ladder and handrail as shown.

28.1.22

Stainless Steel Pipe Handrail

Provide and fix stainless steel pipe handrail of 50mm diameter to locations as shown in the Drawings.

BLDG04/S28.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 28-4
28.1.23

Doors To Electrical Substation

(A)

Extruded Anodised Aluminium Doors

Provide and fix extruded natural anodised aluminium doors with anodic coating not less than 25
micron (including all components, shoot bolt etc) as shown and in accordance with the detailed
Drawings.

(B)

Acoustic Doors To Generator Rooms

Provide and fix extruded natural anodised aluminium doors infilled with 38mm thick rockwool
insulation material of density 150 kg per m (10% tolerance). The noise reduction coefficient shall
be NRC 0.76 within the sound range of 180-2800 Hz. Moisture resistance shall not be more than
0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire hazard indices at Class O.
Where rockwool is shown in the Drawings, the rockwool shall be of "Bradford Rockwool, FibertexR60"; or other approved. Doors (including all components, shoot bolt etc) shall be of natural
anodised aluminium of anodic coating not less than 25 micron and constructed to resist any water
penetration into the cavity of the door. Provide and fix heavy duty door hinges capable of bearing
80 kg of load per leaf.
The Drawings shown shall serve as a guide. Submit workshop drawings showing all the detailed
sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to
installation.

28.2

UTILITIES CENTRE/DUSTBIN COMPOUND

28.2.1

General
Construct Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound to details as shown in the Drawings unless specified
otherwise. Timber benches, shelves, notice board, lockers, etc., shall be provided and fixed to locations
all as shown in the Drawings.

28.2.2

Floor Slab
The floor slab shall be cast in Grade 40 structural concrete. Compliance criteria and specifications shall
follow Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
The slab shall be finished with a minimum 3 passes of a power trowel strictly without sprinkling of cement
dust, cement grout or water. Provide a sufficient team of workmen to finish the work before final set. The
slab shall be immediately cured for seven days with approved curing compound or other approved
methods. The surface shall be hardened with approved liquid hardeners strictly in accordance with the
Manufacturer's instruction. The liquid hardeners shall have zinc and/or magnesium fluorosilicates as its
active ingredients.
The scupper drain shall be finished with rendering of 1 part cement to 3 parts sand by volume. The
rendering shall be laid to fall towards water outlets. The rendered surface shall then be finished with two
coats of liquid hardeners (with zinc and/or magnesium fluorosilicates as its active ingredients).

28.2.3

Finish To Reinforced Concrete Flat Roof

Provide and lay screed of 1:3 cement:sand mix gauged with approved water-proofing compound to the
Manufacturer's instructions to reinforced concrete flat roof with minimum fall of 1 in 180. Screed shall be
of a minimum of 18mm thick.

BLDG04/S28.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 28-5
28.2.4

Roller Shutter To Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound

(i)

Motorised Roller Shutter For Door Height Four (4) Metres And Above
Provide and install motorised roller shutter complete with channel guide, shutter motor, angle bolts,
bottom rail and other necessary components in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions to
utilities centre/dustbin compound of door opening height 4 metres and above unless otherwise
specified :
(a)

Material
The motorised roller shutter shall be of 0.8mm thick minimum galvanised steel or 1.6mm
thick natural anodised aluminium interlocking slats with end clips to secure slats laterally or
0.5mm thick minimum Zincalume steel curtain permanently lock-seamed to form a
continuous curtain.
Provide a seamless PVC weatherseal at the base of the rail. Secure the curtain top and
wrap it around the drum assembly. Provide box housing of similar material with the curtain
to house the entire drum assembly and integral chainwheel complete with galvanised steel
chain or other approved for manual operation.
Provide perforation slots of 100mm x 25mm spaced at 400mm apart to approximately the
top one-third of the curtain height to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide edge-treatment to
prevent metal to metal contact between the curtain and the guides during operation.

(b)

Coating
Aluminium shutter shall be natural anodised to 25 microns (minimum). Zincalume steel and
galvanised steel shutter shall be finished with 25 microns (minimum) colorbond silicone
modified polyester coating. The finishing colour of the coating shall be selected by the
SO Rep.

(c)

Power Supply And Operation System

Tap the power supply for the motor from a 10 Amperes TPN isolator in the utilities
centre/dustbin compound. Connect with electrical wiring from the isolator to the motor.
Provide a built-in auto-stop safety device to the system so that the roller shutter shall
automatically stop when it is obstructed during the closing operation.
Provide push-button switches enclosed in a weatherproof control box and mount it outside
at 1.6m measured from the floor to the base of the control box and on the right hand side of
the utilities centre/dustbin compound viewing from the front. Provide the control box with
Camlock model "L & F" A/CR 11 or 16 with key no. 01/3S/N65; or other approved. The
control box shall contain "Up", "Down", and "Stop" buttons. Indicating arrows pointing
upwards and downwards shall be marked indelibly beside the "Up" and "Down" buttons. The
motorised roller shutter shall stop immediately after the end of "Up" or "Down" operation.

(d)

Workshop Drawings
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Submit workshop drawings
showing all the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep
for approval prior to the ordering of the system.

(ii)

Manually Operated Roller Shutter For Door Height Below Four (4) Metres
Provide and install zincalume steel or galvanised steel or natural anodised aluminium roller shutter
complete with channel guides, angle bolts, bottom rails and other necessary components in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to utilities centre/dustbin compound of door
opening height below four (4) metres unless otherwise specified.
(a)

Material
The roller shutter shall be of 0.8mm thick minimum galvanised steel or 1.6mm thick natural
anodised aluminium interlocking slats with end clips to secure slats laterally or 0.5mm thick
minimum Zincalume steel curtain permanently lock-seamed to form a continuous curtain.
Provide a seamless PVC weatherseal at the base of the rail. Secure the curtain top and
wrap it around the drum assembly. The drum assembly shall consist of suitably graded oiltempered torsion springs secured to drumwheels moulded from engineering plastics.
Provide box housing of similar material with the curtain to house the entire drum assembly
and integral chainwheel complete with galvanised steel chain or other approved for manual
operation.

BLDG04/S28.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 28-6
28.2.4

Roller Shutter To Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound

(Cont'd)
(ii)

Manually Operated Roller Shutter For Door Height Below Four (4) Metres
(Contd)
(a)

Material (Contd)
Provide perforation slots of 100mm x 25mm spaced at 400mm apart to approximately the
top one-third of the curtain height to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide edge treatment to
prevent metal to metal contact between the curtain and the guides during operation.
Locking device with master key shall be provided at waist level.

(b)

Coating
Aluminium shutter shall be natural anodised to 25 microns (minimum). Zincalume steel and
galvanised steel shutter shall be finished with 25 microns (minimum) colorbond silicone
modified polyester coating. The finishing colour of the coating shall be selected by the
SO Rep.

(c)

Operation System
The shutter shall be hand chain operated. The raising and closing of the shutter shall be
250mm minimum per metre chain-pull.

(d)

Workshop Drawings
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Submit workshop drawings
showing all the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep
for approval prior to the ordering of the system.

28.2.5

Bronze Anodised Extruded Aluminium Vents To Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound

Provide and install bronzed anodised extruded aluminium vents together with all necessary components
as indicated in the Drawings. The aluminium frames and louvre blades shall be extruded with the
minimum thickness of 2.3mm and finished with 25 microns (minimum) anodic coating.

28.2.6

Ceramic Floor Tiles

Provide and lay 200mm x 200mm (nominal size) x 8mm thick glazed ceramic floor tile Grade "C" with
qualities in accordance with SS301:1985 to wash area and toilet all as shown in the Drawings.

28.2.7

Key Boards
Provide and install one 1200mm x 1200mm keyboard consisting of Kapor frame, plywood backing,
plywood door panel all as shown in the Drawings for every block of Utilities Centre. Provide angle hooks
for keys fixed 75mm centres both ways and 2 no. brass hangers to each board. Paint woodwork
according to Section 23 "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and subclauses under it).

28.2.8

Fire Extinguisher To Utilities Centre

Provide and fix 1 no. 2.5 kg ABC Dry Powder fire extinguisher to utilities centre. The fire extinguisher shall
be of the brand and type approved by the FSSD.

Total pages for this Section :

6
Section 29/.....

BLDG04/S28.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 29-1
SECTION 29
EATING HOUSE

29.1

FLOOR FINISHES
Except for the "Store" and "room" the whole floor of Eating houses shall be finished in ceramic tiles as
specified in sub-clause 19.4.3 "Schedule Of Ceramic Floor Tiles".
Tiles shall continue up doorways to abut external floor rendering. The colour and pattern of the tiles shall
be approved by the SO Rep. The quality and laying of the tiles shall be as specified in Clause 19.4
"Ceramic Floor Tiles Outside Dwelling Units" and Clause 19.6 Laying Of Ceramic Floor Tiles including all
subclauses under them.

29.2

CERAMIC TILE WALL (EATING HOUSES)

Except for the "store" and "room", all internal surfaces of walls and columns in the refreshment area and
stalls of eating houses shall be finished with 197mm x 197mm x 8mm (work size) glazed ceramic wall tiles
to a height of 2100mm above reinforced concrete floor level.
Where shown in the Drawings, provide and lay 197mm x 197mm x 8mm glazed ceramic wall tiles to a
height of 600mm above the stainless steel sink and draining board or to the window cill height if the sink
and draining board is located along the window. Provide and lay 197mm x 197mm x 8mm (work size)
glazed ceramic wall tiles to kitchen, toilets/bath/wc, bin area and wash area. The height of glazed ceramic
wall tiles shall be as shown in the Drawings.
All glazed ceramic wall tiles shall be of the quality as specified in Clause 20.13 "Ceramic Wall Tiles
Outside Dwelling Units" including all subclauses under it.

29.3

BRICK/BLOCKWORK AND PLASTERING

Construct walls as shown in the Drawings and as specified in Section 12 "Brickwork And Blockwork"
including all clauses and subclauses under it. Plastering where shown shall be as specified in Section 20
"Wall Finishes" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

29.4

PAINTING
Painting shall be as specified in Section 23 "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and
subclauses under it.

29.5

DOORS AND IRONMONGERY

Doors to eating houses shall be as shown in the Drawings, complete with ironmongery as specified in
Section 16 "Ironmongery" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

29.5.1

Timber Doors
All timber doors where shown in the Drawings shall be constructed as specified in Section 15 "Carpentry
And Joinery" including all clauses and subclauses under it. Sizes are nominal.
Plywood panels shall be of grade 2 moisture resistant quality.

29.5.2

PVC Doors
Extruded PVC doors to common water closets and bathroom shall be as specified in Clause 15.15 "Full
Panel Extruded PVC Swing Doors".
Except for bath/w.c. in room and main entrance door to toilets, each common w.c. door shall be fixed with
a pair of aluminium alloy eyes for hanging on to mild steel hooks and rides built into masonry. Provide
and fix plastic male and female toilet signs with thickness and sizes all as shown in the Drawings.

BLDG04/S29.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 29-2
29.6

PREPARATION TABLES
Construct preparation tables in Grade 25 and 100mm thick in-situ concrete slabs reinforced with one layer
of No. A6 welded steel fabric supported on 90mm thick solid concrete block wall finished with 200mm x
200mm x 8mm (nominal size) thick ceramic tiles with mosaic cove tiles for returned edges all as shown in
the Drawings.

29.7

COOKING SLABS
Where shown, cooking slabs shall be constructed and finished as specified in Clause 29.6 "Preparation
Tables".

29.8

FAN HOOKS
Cast fan hooks into positions as shown, bent out of 13mm diameter mild steel rod to ceiling of eating
houses.

29.9

EXHAUST FAN OPENING

Provide opening for exhaust fans in positions shown and trim with Kapor frame rebate and bead. Fill with
12mm thick calcium silicate boards.
Paint frame and panel as specified in Section 23 "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and
subclauses under it.

29.10

EXTRACTOR FANS AND DUCTS

Extractor fans and ducts are not included in this Contract unless as specified otherwise.

29.11

ALUMINIUM ROLLER SHUTTER

Where shown in the Drawings, provide and install aluminium roller shutters to eating houses as specified
in Clause 18.8 "Aluminium Roller Shutter".

29.12

ALUMINIUM CASING TO DISCHARGE STACKS/PIPES

AND ALUMINIUM SHEET COVERING
Where shown in the Drawings, the aluminium casing to discharge stacks/pipes enclosure and aluminium
sheet covering shall be constructed with 50mm x 25mm x 1.2mm thick aluminium frame and lined with
1.2mm thick (18 SWG) natural anodised aluminium sheet. The anodic coating shall be 15 microns
minimum. Access panels shall be provided as shown in the Drawings and at the positions of the cleaning
eyes.

29.13

ADJUSTABLE AND FIXED GLASS LOUVRES

Where shown in the Drawings, provide and install natural anodised aluminium frame adjustable and fixed
glass louvres. The anodic coating shall be 25 microns minimum. Glazing shall be in accordance with
Section 22 "Glazing" including all clauses under it.

29.14

PLYWOOD SHELVES
Where shown, the 19mm thick plywood shelves to store shall be supported by 31mm x 31mm x 1.2mm
thick mild steel hollow sections.

BLDG04/S29.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 29-3
29.15

METAL ROOFING AND INSULATION

Where shown in the Drawings, the metal roofing and the insulation shall be provided and laid as specified
in Clause 13.3 "Metal Roofing And Insulation Sheet" including all subclauses under it.

29.16

SUSPENDED CEILING
Provide and fix 1200mm x 600mm x 16mm thick non-combustible mineral fibre board to stalls with
aluminium T section and be supported by 14 SWG galvanised steel hanger wire all as shown in the
Drawings. Each panel shall be reinforced with 2 no. of spline glued to the back of the board.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 30/.....

BLDG04/S29.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 30-1
SECTION 30
MISCELLANEOUS (BUILDING)

30.1

GROUND FLOOR FACILITIES

Provide and fix the facilities (eg. table tennis table, kiosks, tables, benches etc.) at 1st storey all as shown
in the Drawings. Painting to timber and metal work shall be as specified in Section 23 "Painting And
Decorating" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 31/.....

BLDG04/S30.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 31-1

SECTION 31
RESERVED

SECTION 32
RESERVED

SECTION 33
RESERVED

SECTION 34
RESERVED

SECTION 35
RESERVED

Total page for these Sections :

Section 36/.....

BLDG04/S3135.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 36-1
SECTION 36
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SANITARY,
WATER, GAS AND OTHER PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS

36.1

WORKS BY REGISTERED PLUMBER AND LICENSED WATER SERVICE PLUMBER

It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete operating system. The
omission from the Specifications or Drawings of any details in construction, installation materials, or
specialities necessary for a complete operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from
furnishing and completing the same in place all at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations or standards,
the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works.
All sanitary, water and gas installation Works shall be carried out by a Registered Plumber (LP) and
Licensed Water Service Plumber (LWSP) and Licensed Gas Service Worker (LGSW) and shall comply
with all current Code-of-Practices, Bye-Laws, Requirements and Regulations of the relevant Authorities.

36.2

SANITARY AND WATER SUPPLY

Sanitary and water installation, drain lines, inspection chambers, waste sumps and water supply services
shall be provided by the Contractor unless specified otherwise. Allow for leaving holes for pipes and traps
as shown in the Structural Drawings.

36.3

WATER CONNECTION UNDER APRON

Allow for the Public Utilities Board's water connection under the concrete apron or the first storey slab
within the building to be completed before concreting the apron and the floor slab.

36.4

GAS PIPE THROUGH RC BEAM

Provide and install UPVC pipe sleeves through RC beam as shown in the Drawings for the provision of
gas pipes. In the event that the gas pipe is not to be installed, the UPVC sleeves shall be capped with
UPVC capping all as shown in the Drawings.

36.5

CERTIFICATE FROM SEWERAGE DEPARTMENT, PUB

Apply in writing to Sewerage Department, PUB for final inspection of the sanitary installation and obtain
the final approval before the Expiry of the Time for Completion.
On completion of the whole of the installation Works, obtain a Certificate from Sewerage Department,
PUB certifying that the work has been carried out complying fully with their Regulations and Requirements
before the Final Payment can be released.
Failure by the Contractor to apply for such inspection on time, shall render him liable for damages or loss
suffered by the Employer due to the delay in approving the sanitary installation by PUB, arising out of or in
connection with the Contractor's failure to apply for such inspection on time. Notwithstanding the above,
the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge
against the Contractor.

36.6

INSPECT DRAWINGS AND MAKE ALLOWANCE

Examine carefully all Drawings, including the Civil and Structural Drawings and ascertain all probable
obstructions such as pile caps, foundations, beams footings, etc. which may necessitate diversions of
drain lines, inspection chamber positions and other fittings, from the lines and positions shown in the
Drawings. Allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses arising from necessary additional lengths
of drain pipes, bends, etc which are required to cater for such adjustments in alignment and running of
drain lines, inspection chambers, other fittings, etc. No claims for extras shall be entertained by the SO
Rep for non-compliance or misinterpretation of this Clause by the Contractor.

BLDG04/S36.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 36-2
36.7

DIAMETER OF PIPES
Unless otherwise stated, the sizes of copper, stainless steel, ductile iron and UPVC pipes shall mean their
nominal sizes.

36.8

CONTRACTOR TO GIVE NOTICES AND SUBMIT DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL

Submit all necessary application forms, drawings and give all notices required in connection with the
Works.
Submit sanitary drawings, water service drawings and gas installation drawings with application forms to
the Sewerage Department, Water Department, PUB; and City Gas respectively for approval not later than
14 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance.
A copy of the application shall be sent to the SO Rep for information.

36.9

EXCAVATE TRENCHES AND REMOVE EXCESS EARTH

Excavate all trenches and pits for drain-lines and inspection chambers as shown. The soil condition shall
be inspected by the SO Rep. After drain-lines have been tested and approved by the SO Rep, backfill the
soil, properly consolidated to original levels and cart away surplus earth promptly and in any case not later
than 7 days from the date of instruction by the SO Rep. Where the ground is soft, provide hardcore, bakau
piling etc to drain-lines, inspection chambers/waste sumps and unless specified in the Contract, such
works shall be treated as a variation under the Contract.

36.10

WORK THROUGH CONCRETE STRUCTURE

Every care shall be taken in drilling, coring holes through concrete structure so as not to disrupt the
concrete and steel. Seek approval from the SO Rep before carrying out such Works.
Where, in the opinion of the SO Rep, concrete structure has been affected or unnecessarily disrupted,
reinstate at own expense the affected parts of structure to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

36.11

DRILLING OR CORING ON FINISHED AREAS

Where drilling or coring of holes are to be carried out on areas where tiles, or other types of finishing had
been completed, take all precaution and care to ensure that damage is minimised. In the event of any
damage, make good the damage to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and
expense.

36.12

PROVISION OF HOLES IN CONCRETE STRUCTURE OR WALLS

Where holes are provided, enlarge the holes to the diameter and position as required without damaging
the surrounding area. All damage shall be made good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

36.13

PATCHING UP
Patch up hacked portions and drilled holes of structure with grade 30 concrete mixed with water reducing
admixture in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and of workmanship at least equal to that
of the surrounding parts. Where pipes penetrate floor or roof slab, brush away loose particles on concrete
and pipe. Brush on one coat neat, thick cement grout immediately before patching. Any leakages through
such patching shall be made good by the Contractor.
All patching up work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S36.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 36-3
36.14

TESTING OF WATER AND SANITARY INSTALLATION

Test the whole sanitary and water installation as specified hereunder.

36.14.1

Water Test
As soon as PUB water supply is available, carry out water test to the following items, in accordance with
the procedure described below and complete the water test, including making good all Defect, within 10
days from the date PUB water supply is available :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

Water supply pipe;

Direct supply pipe;
Joints between floor slab and floor trap in bathrooms and kitchens and joints
between branching-off for WCs and floor slab;
Water pumping Plant.

36.14.2

Procedure Of Water Test

36.14.2.1

Water Supply Pipe

Test all water supply pipes for leaks.

36.14.2.2

Direct Supply Pipe

Where required, apply to PUB and pay all fees for installing meters to the lower floors with direct water
supply for the purpose of testing for leaks in the pipe.

36.14.2.3

Floor Traps
The gratings to the floor traps in bathrooms and kitchens shall be blocked temporarily with polythene
sheets or by other suitable means and the floor flooded with about 10mm depth of water above the
gratings. The amount of water shall be maintained for about 2 hours, replenished when necessary,
during which the underside of the floor slab shall be checked for signs of leaks. Towards the end of this
test, the water shall be allowed to drain off. During this process there shall be no sign of chokage and
leakage in the system. The water test shall be carried out 3 days after the laying of floor finishes.

36.14.2.4

Water Pumping Plant

Arrange with the SO Rep for test on the whole pumping Plant including transfer pump and booster
pump for signs of leak and proper performance of the pumps. Rectify all the Defect found during the
inspection immediately so that a re-inspection can be carried out. Arrange for the test to be carried out
not later than four weeks before the buildings are handed over to the Employer. Provide electricity for
operating the pumps, provide temporary piping, connections, fittings and accessories necessary for the
test to be carried out.

36.14.3

Hydrostatic Test Of Underground Mains

Arrange for hydrostatic test of all underground ductile iron pipes after PUB bulk meter according to CP
48.
After laying, jointing and anchoring of the main and before any backfilling or concreting, charge the
piping system slowly and carefully with potable water so that all air is expelled. Test the mains under
pressure.
Before testing the main, fit all open ends of the main with blank flange and secure them with struts or
otherwise to resist the end thrust of the water pressure in the main. Apply a test pressure of 125m head
or the maximum working pressure plus 50% whichever is the greater, by means of manually operated
test pump or by power-driven test pump.
Maintain the test pressure by the pump for 1 hour and check the main for any leakage. General
leakage shall not exceed 2 litres per cm of pipe diameter per km of pipe per 100m head per 24 hours.
Notwithstanding the above, rectify all visual leaks detected.

BLDG04/S36.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 36-4
36.14.4

Sterilisation Of Underground Water Distribution Mains

Sterilisation of underground distribution water mains shall be carried out in accordance with CP 48 "Code
of Practice for Water Services" and to the requirements of PUB.
The water samples shall be taken for bacteriological and chemical testing by a PSB or SAC accredited
laboratory.
Two days after taking such samples, flush the underground distribution mains and further water samples
shall be taken for testing as described in the foregoing requirements. Provide the water examination and
analysis report to the SO Rep and the result of water analysis shall be within the acceptance limits for
human consumption. The underground distribution mains shall only be commissioned after two
consecutive tests are satisfactory, otherwise the sterilisation procedure shall be repeated until such
requirements are met.

36.15

WATER FITTINGS

36.15.1

General Requirements
All water fittings shall comply with the standards stipulated by PUB and its use in water service
installations shall conform to the Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and SS:CP 48.

36.15.2

Marking Of Information
All water fittings shall be legibly marked with the following :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

36.15.3

Manufacturer's identification mark, either on the body or plate;

Marking of appropriate national standards, eg. BS EN 545:1995;
Nominal size and direction of flow;
Colour codes for hot and cold water supply.

Non-Metallic Material
All non-metallic material in contact with water shall comply with SS 375:2001 and valves with non-metallic
seat washers shall also comply with BS 3457:1973.

36.15.4

Metallic Material
All metallic material in contact with water shall comply with the test on "Extraction of Metals - App H" of
AS/NZS 4020:1999.

36.15.5

Copper Alloy Water Fittings

All copper alloy water fittings shall be of gunmetal, or bronze or DZR brass materials only. Gunmetal or
bronze water fittings shall comply with BS EN1982:1999. Water fittings of the Dezincification Resistant
(DZR) type shall comply with the tests on "Composition" and "Resistance to dezincification" of BS
EN 12163:1998 or BS EN 12165:1998 or BS EN 12420:1999. Such fittings shall have the additional
marking of "DZR" or "CR".

36.15.6

Water Fittings With Elastomeric Seals

All water fittings with elastomeric seals for joints in pipework and pipeline shall comply with SS 270:1996.

36.16

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
All structural concrete shall be as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and
subclauses under it.

BLDG04/S36.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 36-5
36.17

PSB PRODUCT LISTING SCHEME

All wc, pipes and fittings for sanitary installations; and manhole/inspection chamber's cover and frame,
shall be listed in the PSB Product Listing Scheme.

36.18

AS-BUILT DRAWINGS FOR CONCEALED WATER PIPES

AND EXPOSED GAS PIPE INSIDE UNIT

36.18.1

Concealed Water Pipes And Exposed Gas Pipe Inside Unit

The Contractor shall prepare and produce the as-built drawings for the concealed water pipes and
exposed gas pipe inside each dwelling unit. These as-built drawings shall be provided inside each
dwelling unit before completion of the works for each building block. The size of the as-built drawings shall
be A3 size. The as-built drawings shall be duly checked, certified and endorsed by the Contractor's
LP/LGSW.
The A3 size as-built drawings for each dwelling unit shall show the following :
(a)

block number and unit number;

(b)

the single-line drawing of the concealed water pipes and exposed gas pipe installation inside the
unit (scale 1:100).

The A3 size as-built drawings shall be kept inside a specially-designed and durable envelope and fix
adjacent to the unit's consumer unit.
36.18.2

Sanitary/Water/Gas Installations
The Contractor shall also submit to the SO Rep one set of A1 size as-built tracings, three sets of A1 size
as-built prints, two CDROMs in dwg format, and two CDROMs in pdf format. Except for the CDROMs in
"dwg" format, the tracings, prints and CDROMs in "pdf" format shall all be duly checked, certified and
endorsed by the Contractor's LP/LGSW.
The as-built drawings shall include but not limited to the following information where applicable :
(a)

position of pump rooms

(b)

routes of all rising mains and pipes

(c)

piping and equipment arrangement inside the pump room

(d)

schematic diagram of the rising main hydraulic circuit showing the positions of each pump, valve,
pressure switch, flow switch and etc.

(e)

schematic circuit diagram and single line diagram of the overall system wiring

The Contractor shall submit a listing of the as-built tracings and prints and a letter certifying that the
submitted tracings and prints are true records of the works as-built. Without this certification letter, the asbuilt tracings and prints will not be accepted.
2

The thickness of the as-built tracings shall be such that its weight is approximately 110 gram per m . The
ink in the as-built tracings shall be permanent and not of the powdered-type. The details in the tracings
shall be legible and shall not have double or faded images. The as-built tracing will be rejected if found to
be of poor quality.

BLDG04/S36.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 36-6

36.19

SUBMISSIONS BY REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER (PE)

AND LICENSED WATER SERVICE PLUMBER (LWSP)
The Contractor shall engage a Registered Professional Engineer (PE) to be fully responsible for all
matters relating to the water service Works.
The Contractors PE shalll notify PUB prior to the commencement of water service Works and submit to
PUB site plans and schematic drawings of water reticulation systems involving water storage cisterns
(water storage tanks) and/or pumping equipment and certify compliance with SS CP 48 Code of Practice
for Water Services, Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and other PUB requirements. The PE shall
supervise the water service installations carried out by the Licensed Water Service Plumber (hereinafter
referred to as LWSP for the purposes of this clause). Upon completion, the PE shall inspect the water
service installations and lodges a Certificate of Satisfactory Completion with PUB to certify the satisfactory
completion of the water service installations and in compliance PUB requirements.
The Contractors LWSP shall notify PUB prior to the commencement of water service Works and submit to
PUB site plans and schematic drawings of water reticulation systems for minor water service Works which
does not involve installation of water storage cisterns (water storage tanks) and/or pumping equipment
and certify compliance with SS CP 48 Code of Practice for Water Services, Public Utilities (Water
Supply) Regulations and other PUB requirements. Upon completion, the LWSP shall submit a Certificate
of Satisfactory Completion to PUB certifying that the work has been carried out in accordance with PUB
requirements

36.20

SYSTEMATIC LAYOUT OF ALL SERVICE PIPES AND ELECTRICAL CONDUITS (M&E SERVICES) AT
BUILDING ROOFTOP
The Contractor shall prepare a coordinated services layout plan showing the overall layout of all the M & E
service pipes and electrical conduits at the roof top in consultation with the SO Rep. The layout of the
service pipes and electrical conduits at the roof top shall ensure good accessibility and neat arrangement
to facilitate the movement of the maintenance workmen, besides meeting all technical and statutory
requirements.
The Contractor shall submit the coordinated roof top services layout to the SO Rep for approval before
installation. Ensure that all the pipes/conduits are arranged in a systematic and orderly manner, and the
access to the water tanks, lift motor rooms, pumps, and other services at the rooftop is not obstructed by
service pipes and electrical conduits. Work by the various trades at the roof top shall be supervised and
coordinated by the Contractor. In areas where pipes are causing obstruction, the contractor is to provide
chequered-plate platform and steps over the pipes in accordance with the Drawings. The platform shall be
installed at locations furthest away from the building edge and in such a way as not to pose danger to the
maintenance workmen.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 37/.....

BLDG04/S36.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 37-1
SECTION 37
SANITARY INSTALLATION

37.1

SCHEDULE OF UPVC PIPES FOR FITTINGS FOR SANITARY INSTALLATION

Unless specified otherwise, all UPVC pipes and fittings provided for sanitary installations shall be in
accordance with the following schedule :

Sanitary Installation
(Including Waste/Rain Water
Down-Pipe System)

Types Of Pipe/Fitting
( SS : Singapore Standard )
SS 213

SS 141
Class D

Underground Sanitary Drainage

System-Main/Branch Drain Lines
Above Ground Sanitary Plumbing
System (Soil/Waste to I/C) :
(a) All except Void Decks

(b) Void decks

- Discharge stacks
- Discharge pipes & fittings

Remarks

SS 272
*

Anti-Mosquitoes
Devices, Socket
Sleeves and Pipe
Skirtings to be used.
SS 213/SS 141
Adaptor to be used.

*
*

Waste/Rain Water Down-Pipe

System (RWDP) :
(a) 200 diameter pipes for RWDP
system

*
(White)

Rectangular Section
Fittings to be used.

(b) Underground pipes/fittings

for 200 diameter pipes (RWDP)
(c) Above ground pipes/fittings
connected to 200 diameter
RWDP system

Roof Outlet to be used.

(d) 50, 80, 100 & 150 diameter

waste discharge (balcony, lift
lobby, etc) pipes/fittings :
i.

Above ground except void

decks and MSCPs

ii. Void decks and MSCPs

- Down pipes
- Discharge pipes/fittings
- Underground pipes/fittings

*
SS 213/SS141 Adaptor
to be used.

*
*
*

*Denotes the specified pipes/fittings.

37.2

MAIN AND BRANCH DRAIN LINES

Unless otherwise stated, all pipes for main and branch lines shall be UPVC conforming to SS 272 and free
from breakage, distortions or cracks and of sizes specified in Clause 37.6 "Drain Sizes".
All drain-lines shall be laid on grade 30 concrete bed at least 150mm thick, fully haunched with 150mm
thick grade 30 concrete all round and reinforced with a layer of BRC A10 or other approved as shown in
the Drawings unless otherwise stated.

BLDG04/S37.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 37-2
37.2

MAIN AND BRANCH DRAIN LINES (CONT'D)

All drain-lines under roads and carparks shall be cement mortar lined ductile iron pipes complying with BS
EN 598 and laid on grade 30 concrete bed at least 150mm thick, fully haunched with 150mm thick grade
30 concrete all round and reinforced with a layer of BRC A10 or other approved as shown in the Drawings
unless otherwise stated. Jointing of pipes of different materials in branch drain- lines or in the continuous
length of main drain-lines in between two inspection chambers shall not be allowed unless otherwise
shown in the Drawings. The section of main drain lines under roads and carparks shall be constructed
under the supervision of the SO Rep and the Contractor shall arrange for the inspection by and approval
of the SO Rep before covering up.
All drain-lines for eating establishments such as eating houses, restaurants, food stalls, etc shall be
constructed with cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe to BS EN 598 . The floor traps for the eating
establishments shall be of stoneware type or cast iron.
The trenches for main and branch drain-lines shall be backfilled with quarry dust and finished as shown in
the Drawings.

37.3

GRADIENT FOR DRAIN-LINES

Unless otherwise stated or approved by the Sewerage Department, PUB, the gradient of drain-lines shall
be as follows :
(a)

Branch Drain-Lines
Diameter of Branch Drain-Lines

(b)

UPVC

Ductile Iron

Maximum Gradient
Upstream at
Back Drop Tumbling Bay

110mm

110mm

1 in 20 to 1 in 60

160mm

150mm

1 in 70

1 in 30 to 1 in 90

Allowable Gradient
in other cases

Main Drain-Lines
Diameter of Main Drain-Lines

37.4

Allowable Gradient
in other cases

UPVC

Ductile Iron

Maximum Gradient
Upstream of
Back Drop/Tumbling Bay

160mm

150mm

1 in 70

1 in 30 to 1 in 90

250mm

250mm

1 in 90

1 in 49 to 1 in 150

JOINTS FOR DRAIN-LINE PIPES

Only flexible jointed pipes shall be used for drain line pipes.

37.5

JUNCTIONS IN DRAINS
All junctions between drains shall be of curved junctions or obtuse angled junctions made at sides of
pipes.

37.6

DRAIN SIZES
All drain branches from building to inspection chamber shall be 160mm diameter pipes or as shown in
Drawings. Main drain-lines shall be 160mm diameter UPVC pipes to SS 272:1983 unless specified
otherwise.

BLDG04/S37.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 37-3
37.7

WATER TEST FOR DRAIN-LINES

Water test all drainlines before they are surrounded and covered. Drainlines shall be perfectly watertight
and it is essential that every length of pipes be tested when completed with water before haunchings and
backfilling. For water test, the drainline shall be subjected to a pressure of 1.2 metre head of water and
such pressure shall be maintained for half an hour without leakage in excess of 1.0 litre for each length of
drainline between the inspection chambers. The fact that the pipes have been tested shall not relieve the
Contractor from his responsibility to locate any leak and make good the section, including re-excavation,
timbering, backfilling and making good.

37.8

BEDDING AND HAUNCHING TO BRANCH AND MAIN DRAIN-LINE

The pipes which have been tested and found satisfactory shall be bedded and haunched with grade 30
concrete to details as shown in Drawings. Provide break joints at pipe joints not greater than 6m intervals
and at the first pipe joint next to inspection chamber, all to the requirements of the Sewerage Department,
PUB.
Carry out all Works in accordance with the requirements of the Sewerage Department, PUB.

37.9

BREAKING UP ROADS AND CARPARKS FOR LAYING OF DRAIN-LINES

The Contractor shall provide for breaking up roads and carparks for laying of drain-lines etc. and
reinstatement of damages all to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

37.10

INSPECTION CHAMBERS AND DRAIN LINES

37.10.1

General Requirements
The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum for all Sanitary Works required under the Contract
comprising either one or both of the following systems :
(a)
(b)

37.10.2

suspended from building and / or ;

supported on piling

Suspended From The Buildings

Where the Inspection Chambers and main drain lines are required to be suspended from the building, it
shall be constructed according to the details as shown in the Drawings.

37.10.3

Supported On Piling
This clause supersedes subclause 37.10.3 "Supported On Piling" of the Standard Specifications For
Building Works And Other Installations.
Where piles are required to support the Inspection Chambers and drain-lines as shown in the Drawings,
the Contractor shall ascertain the pile penetration lengths required and allow in the Contract Sum for all
costs and expenses incurred on the piling work. The contractor shall plan and incorporate the duration
required for the piling work into the Programme for the Works or revised Programme, if any, for the
submission to the SO Rep for approval, as required under the contract.
In ascertaining the pile penetration lengths, the Contractor may, if he wishes, refer to the Soil Investigation
Report available from the Employer. However, the Contractor shall note that the Soil Investigation Report
does not form part of the Contract or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction
thereof or of the Contract. The Contractor shall also take note that all the information in the Soil
Investigation Report is only indicative of the likely soil conditions to be encountered at the Site. The
Employer shall not be accountable for the accuracy, adequacy or completeness of the information in the
Soil Investigation Report. The Contractor shall at his own cost, ascertain the actual soil conditions and
shall conduct his own site investigations and allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses
whatsoever arising from and/or out of an inaccuracy, inadequacy or incompleteness of the information in
the Soil Investigation Report.

BLDG04/S37.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 37-4
37.10.3

Supported On Piling (Cont'd)

Notwithstanding the pile penetration lengths ascertained by the Contractor, there shall be no adjustment to
the Contract Sum for any difference in pile penetration lengths between those actually provided at the Site
and those ascertained by the Contractor. However, if for whatever causes any pile cannot be driven into
the ground or is not provided at all, omission by way of variation to the Contract shall be effected. For the
purpose of computing the value of such omission, the penetration length of each pile shall be deemed to
be 8.0m.

37.10.4

Requirements For Precast Reinforced Concrete Piles To Inspection Chambers And Drain Lines
Where precast reinforced concrete piles to inspection chambers and drainlines are included in the Works,
the piles provided shall be in accordance with Clause 2.2 "Precast Reinforced Concrete Piling Works".

37.10.5

Inspection Chamber
Construct inspection chambers to details and positions as shown in the Drawings. All inspection
chambers/manhole covers and frames shall comply with the general requirement of SS 30. Heavy duty
cast iron frames and covers (Grade A) shall be used in driveways and carparks and other areas as shown
in the Drawings.
Form open branch/main channels in inspection chambers with half-round vitrified clay purposed made or
cut channels with benching haunched up to the walls of inspection chambers in granolithic concrete 1:1:1
mix and trowel to smooth finish to fall towards the channel. The first inspection chamber of the drainage
system shall have a minimum depth of 1070mm from surface level to invert level unless otherwise
specified. Construct all walls and slabs of inspection chambers with grade 30 reinforced concrete as
shown in the Drawings and to the requirements of the Sewerage Department, PUB. Plaster the internal
walls with approximately 13mm thick 1:2 cement mortar and trowel to a smooth finish.
Connect the invert of the branch drain-line entering the inspection chamber above the horizontal diameter
of the main channels.
Grade C Light Duty covers shall be complete with stainless steel handles as shown in the Drawings and
approved by the SO Rep.

37.11

CONCEALMENT OF SANITARY STACKS, DISCHARGE PIPES AND FITTINGS

All sanitary stacks shall be fully housed within masonry ducts (stack ducts).
Leakage tests to all sanitary stacks, discharge pipes and fittings shall be completed before they are fully
concealed in the stack ducts and ceiling ducts.
All sanitary pipes and fittings at the ceiling shall be fully concealed by ceiling duct of 9mm thick calcium
silicate boards, fixed on galvanised steel angle frames as shown in the Drawings. All screws including
anchor bolts shall be of grade 304 stainless steel. Board joints shall be taped with paper tape and gypsum
compound used to fill screw holes and board joints on the calcium silicate, and this shall be sanded
smooth and not visible after painting. The completed boards shall be finished with base coating and 2
layers of emulsion paint. Lighting diffusers shall be 15mm x 15mm x 10mm thick egg crate chromed
plastic type in powder coated aluminium frames. Detailed workshop drawings showing the type of boards
and fixing methods, including access panels and lighting diffusers, shall be submitted to the SO Rep for
approval prior to their installations
The calcium silicate boards shall comply with the following physical properties :
Physical Properties
Dry density
Weight
Flexural strength across grain
Flexural strength along grain
Moisture movement from normal to saturated
Nominal moisture content-in situ
Thermal conductivity
Alkalinity

Requirements
910 kg per m3, 10%
9.5 kg per m2, 15%
10 MN per m2
6 MN per m2
0.15%
3 to 5%
0.161 W/mk
7 to 10 pH value

The Contractor shall submit a test report showing compliance with the requirements of the physical
properties specified to the SO Rep for evaluation.
BLDG04/S37.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 37-5
37.12

UNPLASTICIZED PVC PIPES AND FITTINGS FOR SOIL,

WASTE AND VENT APPLICATIONS (ABOVE GROUND)

37.12.1

Material

37.12.1.1

General
All unplasticized PVC pipes, fittings and accessories for soil, waste and vent application above ground
shall comply with the requirements of SS 213 and its latest amendments. However, UPVC soil and
waste stack in the void deck/play area shall be UPVC pipes to the requirements of SS 141 and as
shown in the Drawings.
The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth, and reasonably free
from grooving and other Defect that would impair their performance in service.
Provide pipe in standard lengths of 6m + 50mm - 0mm. The pipe shall be provided with ends within 2
degrees of being normal to the main axis of the pipe, free from chips, rough edges and with sharp
edges removed.

37.12.1.2

Dimensions Of Soil, Waste And Vent Pipes To SS 213

Outside Diameter
Nominal
Size

Mean Diameter De
Minimum

32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150

36.2
42.8
55.7
68.7
82.3
110.0
140.0
160.0
Note :

37.12.1.3

Maximum
36.5
43.1
56.0
69.1
82.7
110.4
140.4
160.5

Wall Thickness

Incl Ovality D
Minimum
36.1
42.7
55.5
68.5
82.1
109.6
139.5
159.5

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

2.1
2.3
2.4
2.7
3.0
3.2
3.7
4.0

36.6
43.2
56.2
69.3
83.0
110.8
140.4
161.1

(i) De = mean outside diameter

(ii) D = any measured diameter

Minimum Socket Dimension To SS 213

The minimum socket dimension for 3m length UPVC pipe shall be as follows :

BLDG04/S37.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Nominal pipe size in mm

Minimum socket dimension in mm

32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150

19
21
23
25
29
34
42
45

2.4
2.6
2.7
3.1
3.5
3.6
4.2
4.5

Bldg Spec
Page 37-6
37.12.1

Material (Cont'd)

37.12.1.4

Dimension And Colour Of The Waste And Soil Stack To SS 141 Class D
Nominal
Size

Average Outside Diameter

Wall Thickness
Average Value

Individual Value

Minimum

Maximum

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

80
100
155

88.7
114.1
168.0

89.1
114.5
168.5

5.3
6.8
9.9

4.6
6.0
8.8

5.3
6.9
10.2

All pipes shall be indelibly marked and imprinted longitudinally at interval of not greater than 3m. The
markings shall show the following :
(a)
(b)
(c)

Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark.

the nominal size.
SS 141:1976 Class `D'

The marking of the pipe shall be in accordance with SS 141.

37.12.1.5

Adaptor To Couple The Fitting (To SS 213)

And UPVC Pipes (To SS 141)
An adaptor shall be used to couple the fitting to SS 213 and its latest amendment (Single junction/single
junction with inspection eye) and UPVC pipe to SS 141 to be installed at the void deck. The shape of
the adaptor shall comply with the design as shown in the Drawings. The strength, dimensional tolerance
and thickness of the adaptor shall comply with the standards and specifications laid down in SS 213
(except that the dimensional tolerance for the socket of the adaptor shall comply with SS 174). Obtain
prior approval from the SO Rep before use. Random samples may be chosen for testing at a SAC
accredited laboratory.

37.12.1.6

Swept Junction Fitting

Use only swept junction fittings (single or double cross junction) with 50mm minimum root radius in all
sanitary installation unless otherwise stated.

37.12.2

Installation

37.12.2.1

General
All soil, waste and vent pipes used shall be unplasticized PVC pipes complying with SS 213 or SS 141
and all tests as required by Sewerage Department, PUB. All jointing and fixing requirements shall be in
strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Provide main discharge stack of 150mm diameter and secondary discharge stack of 100mm diameter
as shown in the Drawings. Install double 45 degree bends to SS 272 at the base of the discharge
stacks in accordance with the Drawings.
Install cross ventilating pipes to the required size between the main and the secondary discharge stack
at the specified locations as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings or
required by PUB, anti-syphonage pipes connecting the appliances to the discharge stack are not
necessary.

37.12.2.2

Inspection Openings, Connectors And Fittings

All inspection openings shall be screw and washer type with proper adaptors where necessary.

BLDG04/S37.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 37-7
37.12.2

Installation (Cont'd)

37.12.2.3

Floor Traps
Unless as required otherwise, fit all floor traps with 150mm square body, circular hinged UPVC gratings
with frames having a 30mm deep collar protruding below to fit into the opening of the floor traps. The
grating shall comply with SS 213 and complete with an Anti-Mosquito Device approved by the Vector
Control and Research Dept., PUB.
The gratings for floor traps shall be fixed at 5mm below the graded floor level and as shown in the
Drawings.

37.12.2.4

Method Of Fixing
The method of fixing UPVC pipes shall be as follows :
(a)

All pipes shall be cut square with the edge chamfered 15 degrees using approved pipe cutting
tools prior to its installation. The pipe cutting tool shall be able to produce square cut and 15
degree chamfer in one continuous operation. The pipe cutting tools shall be portable and able to
cut pipes of all sizes.

(b)

Clean the pipe ends and sockets in pipes or fittings with cleaning fluid or methylated spirit and
allow them to dry.

(c)

Mark the pipes and fittings with a marker at a distance to the depth of the socket in the fittings or
to the depth of the socket formed in pipes.

(d)

Coat all pipe ends and the internal faces of sockets fully with solvent cement and insert the pipe
into the socket immediately. The socket edge of the fittings must touch the marking at the pipes.
Remove surplus solvent cement from the socket using a dry cloth.

(e)

After jointing, hold the joint firmly for a period of 30 seconds and do not disturb it for at least 5
minutes.

(f)

All joints shall be jointed with sockets recommended by the pipe manufacturer. In situations
where a pipe and socket joint is not possible, a coupling or an adaptor shall be used.

(g)

No socket belling shall be allowed when jointing UPVC pipes.

(h)

The type of solvent used shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.

For the jointing of UPVC pipes to other materials, the bonding agent used shall be those recommended
by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the SO Rep.
Carry out all fixing work in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's instructions.
37.12.2.5

Solvent Cement For Jointing UPVC Pipes And Fittings

Solvent cement used for jointing UPVC pipes and fittings shall be approved by the SO Rep and comply
with BS 4346:Part 3. The solvent cement shall be in light approved colour to enable visual inspection.
The Contractor shall submit a test report of the solvent cement to be used on the Site, for approval by
the SO Rep before the commencement of the sanitary and water installation Works.
The tests shall be carried out by an SAC accredited testing laboratory and shall include :
(a)

Shear Strength;

(b)

Film Properties;

(c)

Long-term Hydrostatic Pressure.

BLDG04/S37.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 37-8
37.12.2

Installation (Cont'd)

37.12.2.6

W.C. Joint
Place rubber seal over the spigot of the w.c. outlet with the open and facing towards the pan.
Lubricate the outer surface of the seal and insert pan spigot complete with seal into connector socket.
Snap plastic cover over rim of connector socket.
Use pan collar connectors in cases where P-traps are utilised. Apply silicone sealant to groove and
recess at pan collar and cover to prevent stagnation of water at groove and recess.

37.12.2.7

Fixing Of Bosses
Use bosses for jointing waste and vent pipe into the soil stack. Use bosses for jointing of waste pipe
from basin or kitchen sink to the hopper of floor waste or floor trap. Cut the appropriate sized hole in
the position required using special hole cutters such as mechanised drill which is attached to a circular
hole-saw by a mandrill.
Apply solvent weld cement and clean mating surfaces of the boss and pipe.
Insert the inner portion of the boss from inside the pipe with the outer portion located. Apply and tighten
the toggle clamp and leave it in position for fifteen minutes.
When fixing into the stack, ensure that the 92 degree marks on both parts are upper-most.
Ensure that the angles marked on the inner and outer portions of the boss coincide and that the boss is
assembled in the correct sequence to give an angle of fall to the stack pipe.

37.12.2.8

Access Doors
Access doors may be fitted to pipe or straight portion of branches. Mark positions of holes with
template and cut the holes with a fine tooth keyhole saw.
Clean the edges of the hole before inserting the access door. The inner portion of the access door shall
be set in the hole to locate the unit before it is tightened into position.

37.12.2.9

Weathering
Where pipes penetrate through either flat or sloping roofs, the normal type of approved weathering
material shall be used. Where necessary, fix an approved weathering apron in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and as shown in the Drawings.

37.12.2.10

UPVC Vent Cowl

Clean the mating surfaces of the pipe fitting before assembling the unit in accordance with normal
solvent weld cement procedure.

37.12.2.11

Provision For Thermal Movement

In cases where the piping is likely to be subjected to any large variations in temperature and to prevent
the slightest movement, use a seal/sleeve ring joint between fixed joints.

37.12.2.12

Support Distances Of UPVC Pipe Lines

Horizontal pipes which exceed 1400mm in length shall be supported with PVC coated mild steel
hangers. Vertical pipes passing from floor to floor shall be supported with PP collars attached to the
pipes as shown in the Drawings. The spacing of the hangers and collars shall not exceed 1400mm for
horizontal pipes and 1800mm for vertical pipes.

BLDG04/S37.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 37-9
37.12.2

Installation (Cont'd)

37.12.2.13

Bonding Keys To Concrete Slab

Provide bonding keys to concrete floor slab where UPVC pipes go through. Roughen the whole surface
of the UPVC pipe which is in contact with the floor slab to form keys. Apply thin coat of solvent cement
and sprinkle fine sand to the whole area of the roughened surface before the solvent cement sets.
Use solvent welded cement method for all jointing assemblies. Carry out all fixing work in strict
accordance with the pipe manufacturer's instructions.
Use UPVC pipes to SS 213 where the stacks continue above roof level. Use UPVC pipes to SS 141
where the stacks continue below the ceiling of the open 1st storey.

37.12.3

Inspection Of Overlapping Between UPVC Pipes

And Fittings For UPVC Sanitary System
The Contractor shall incorporate the easy check double locking system (patent application No.
9905211-0) to the UPVC sanitary system to ensure that the UPVC pipes and fittings are fully
overlapped to minimise leakage at the joints. The Contractor shall arrange for the inspection of all the
joints between the UPVC pipes and the fittings after the installation of the completed system to prove
that all the joints between the UPVC pipes and the fittings are fully overlapped. The pipe joint system
shall include :
(a)

The connection of the pipes and fittings in such a way that the soil and waste will flow smoothly
from the outlet to the fittings, through the horizontal branches and vertical stacks to the main line.
The system shall not allow any possibility of back flow, and stagnation of fluid at the joints due to
insufficient overlapping of UPVC pipes and fittings.

(b)

The overlapped portion at the joints between the UPVC pipes and the fittings shall be exposed
and can be inspected visually after the installation of the system. The Contractor shall ensure
that full overlap between UPVC pipes and fittings is achieved. In the event that the UPVC pipes
and fittings are not overlapped sufficiently, the Contractor shall dismantle the affected portion of
the system and re-installed to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

(c)

Big access openings shall be provided (at least 75 mm diameter) to the fittings (including tees,
cross tees and elbows) to facilitate the easy clearance of the chokage. The access opening
shall be capped with UPVC screw cap with proper rubber seal and PP insert to ensure water and
air tightness at all time.

The Contractor shall submit a full set of shop drawings, samples and mini-mock up, including sectional
view to demonstrate the above requirements to the satisfaction of the SO Rep prior to the installation of
the UPVC sanitary system on the Site.
The Contractor shall also ensure that their UPVC fitting manufacturer is licensed to use the patented
design. A copy of the licensing agreement between the UPVC fitting manufacturer and the patent owner
shall be submitted to the SO Rep together with the shop drawings and the samples.
37.13

UPVC DOUBLE 45 BEND

Provide and fix 150mm diameter UPVC double 45 degree bends to SS 272 encased in 150mm thick
grade 30 concrete and reinforced with a layer of BRC A10 or other approved at the base of each
discharge stack below ground level.
If the discharge stack is of 100mm diameter, use a 150mm x 100mm UPVC taper piece to SS 213 at
above the ground level to connect the 100mm diameter stack to the 150mm single junction fitting with
inspection eye to SS 213.
Provide single junction fitting with inspection eye to discharge stack at 150mm above the finished
ground floor level.
Secure screw down cap of the inspection eye of the single junction fitting with 2 no. of brass screws.

BLDG04/S37.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 37-10
37.14

UPVC GULLIES AND UPVC FLOOR WASTES/TRAPS

WITH UPVC GRATING TO ALL GROUND FLOOR
FACILITIES INCLUDING LINK BUILDING AND MSCP
Where the ground floor wastes discharge into floor trap or apron gully at the ground floor as shown in the
Drawings, the gullies shall be 100mm diameter UPVC fitting with 150mm square UPVC grating and set on
and encased in concrete of minimum 150mm thick and connected to drains discharging into inspection
chambers. The gratings for floor wastes/traps and gully traps shall be of approved UPVC 150mm square
top body with screw-in round grating cover and to the requirements of the Sewerage Dept., PUB; HDB;
and complying with SS 213.
The grating over floor trap and gully trap shall be complete with an Anti-Mosquito Device approved by the
Vector Control and Research Dept., ENV.

37.15

GULLY AND DEEP SEAL TRAP

All floor traps to upper floors shall be deep seal traps minimum 100mm diameter with 75mm deep seal all
to SS 213 and to the requirements of the Sewerage Department, PUB.
No gully or floor traps shall be deeper than 600mm from the top of grating.

37.16

LOW CAPACITY WC SQUATTING PANS

Squatting WC pans shall be of vitreous china complying with the "Singapore Standard For WC Pans For
Use With Low Capacity Flushing Cisterns" and with 'P' or 'S' traps with cleaning eye. The cleaning eye at
ground floor shall be UPVC screw cap to SS 213.
Each pan shall be complete with approved high level plastic flushing cistern to "Singapore Standard on
Low Capacity WC Flushing Cisterns up to 4.5 Litres (Maximum)", and UPVC flush pipe of minimum 32mm
diameter.
Overflow from cisterns shall be drained within the building.
Carry out concrete infill and floor finishes around pans. Provide foot treads where there is no floor tile
finish.

37.17

LOW CAPACITY WC FLUSHING CISTERNS

All flushing cisterns shall comply with the "Singapore Standard on Low Capacity WC Flushing Cisterns up
to 4.5 Litres (Maximum)".
Flushing cisterns shall be approved flushing cistern with flushing capacity of not more than 4.5 litres of
water.

37.18

FIXING LOW AND HIGH LEVEL CISTERNS TO WALL

Provide support brackets and spacer for back fixing of the cistern. All stainless steel support brackets
used for installing cisterns (high or low level type) shall be of suitable design and comply with SS 68. The
stainless steel shall be of grade 304. The spacer shall be of non-corrosive material and firmly adhered to
the back of the cistern shell and the wall. Install support brackets at the base of the cistern.
Fix flush pipe support bracket to the wall for every 600mm run of pipe. When installed, the cistern shall be
free from any movement while the operating lever arm is pulled down for the flushing operation.

37.19

WATER SUPPLY PIPE AND WASTE OUTLETS FOR SINK

The Contractor shall fix and terminate the water supply pipe to sink and provide the waste outlets for sink
at positions and to details all as shown in the Drawings.

BLDG04/S37.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 37-11
37.20

LOW CAPACITY WC SUITE AND WASH BASIN

37.20.1

Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash Basin

Provide and install the following :

Accommodation Type

5 Room

4-Room

Location

Low Capacity
WC Suite

Integral
Culture Marble
Basin & Top

Vitreous China
Wash Basin

Blue and/or
Pink and/or
Beige and/or
Grey#

Blue and/or
Pink and/or
Beige and/or
Grey#

Blue and/or
Pink and/or
Beige and/or
Grey Basin &
Pedestal#

Common
Bathroom/WC

Attached
Bathroom/WC

Common
Bathroom/WC

Attached
Bathroom/WC

*
*

*Denotes the specified type.

#The colour shall be decided by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall provide
the colour range specified for selection and approval by the SO Rep.
The WC suite and wash basin and pedestal shall be of the same brand and approved as a set by the
HDB.
37.20.2

Vitreous China Wash Basin And Pedestal

Provide and install wash basin and pedestal as specified in subclause 37.20.1 "Schedule Of Low Capacity
WC Suite And Wash Basin". The wash basin and pedestal shall be approved 500mm x 400mm vitreous
china (with non-corrosive wall bracket fixings), complying with SS 42, complete with 15mm chrome plated
brass mixer tap and handle conforming to BS 5412, brackets, pop-up waste and 32mm approved UPVC
bottle trap with all necessary washers, seals and nuts. The colour of the wash basin and pedestal (if
applicable) shall be decided by the SO Rep as specified in the foregoing subclause.
The mixer tap shall be completed with the necessary nut and two rubber washers. Fix and secure the
mixer tap firmly on the wash basin. Unless specified otherwise, the waste pipe shall be 40mm diameter
UPVC pipe.

37.20.3

Integral Cultured Marble Basin And Top

(A)

Scope Of Work
Provide and install integral cultured marble basin with monolithic top to bathrooms as specified in
the subclause 37.20.1 "Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash Basin" and in accordance
with the dimensions as shown in the Drawings.

BLDG04/S37.DOC(11)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 37-12
37.20.3

Integral Cultured Marble Basin And Top (Cont'd)

(B)

Material And Product

The integral cultured marble basin and top shall be of solid, non-porous, homogeneous polymeric
material, either of polyester or acrylic base. It shall be of 19mm thick, complete with 75mm
backsplash, 200mm front apron, and with 3 galvanised steel supporting brackets as shown.
Bonding material and sanitary sealants of approved matching colour shall be provided in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
The integral cultured marble basin and top shall be obtained from manufacturers approved by the
SO Rep.

(C)

Physical Properties
The integral cultured marble basin and top shall comply with the following requirements :
Characteristics
1.

Workmanship and
Finish

Shall be free from cracks, crazing, pinholes, porosity,

blisters, chipped areas or moulding defects.

2.

Impact Resistance

Shall not show cracks in the gel coat.

3.

Barcol Hardness

40 unit

4.

Oven Test for Cracking

and Crazing

After oven test at 74C 2C for 10 days, shall not show

evidence of cracking or crazing.

5.

Water Absorption

Shall not absorb water in excess of 0.58% in

24 hours.

6.

Gel Coat (if applicable)

Shall not be less than 0.37mm or more than 0.87mm in

thickness.

7A. Stain Resistance to :

(a) Coffee
(b) Tea
(c) Detergent
(d) Acetone
(e) Olive oil
(f)
Lipstick
(g) Fly spray
(h) Ink, washable
(i)
Urea (6%)
(j)
Alcohol
(k) Iodine (1%)
(l)
Shoe polish
(m) Vinegar

(D)

International Association of Plumbing and

Mechanical Officials (IAPMO PS 18-66) Requirements

)
)
)
)
)
)
) Shall be such that it will withstand all reagents.
)
)
)
)
)
)

7B. Cigarette test

All stain shall be removed without sanding through the gel

coat. If sanding is required, not more than 0.37mm of the
gel coat shall be removed.

8.

Washability

Shall withstand 40,000 cycles in the scrub test

(only slight brush marks are allowable).

9.

Drain fitting connections

Shall withstand the test with no visible damage.

Test Certificate And Compliance Requirements

The Contractor shall submit test certificates by PSB or accredited laboratories in relation to the
physical properties of the integral cultured marble basin and top. The tests shall be in accordance
with the relevant IAPMO PS 18-66 test methods conducted by PSB or accredited laboratories.

BLDG04/S37.DOC(12)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 37-13
37.20.4

Coloured Low Capacity Wc Suite

(A)

Scope
Provide and install close-coupled low capacity WC suite to all the common and attached bathrooms
of all flat types as specified in subclause 37.20.1 "Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash
Basin" and other locations as shown.
The complete system of the close-coupled low capacity WC suite including the WC bowl, cistern,
internal parts and fittings forming the complete flushing mechanism, seat and cover, and all the
necessary accessories needed for the proper installation and functioning of the WC shall be to the
approval of HDB and also to conform with SS 42 "Quality of Vitreous China Sanitary Appliances",
Singapore Standards SS 378 - Specification for Vitreous China WC pans for use with low capacity
WC flushing cisterns up to 4.5 L max, and SS 379 - Specification for Low Capacity Flushing Cistern
up to 4.5 L max.
Close-coupled low capacity WC suite shall be operated with a low flushing volume of 3.5 litres to
4.0 litres per single action flush with S-trap or P-trap outlet as shown in the Drawings. The rigid
plastic seat and cover with buffers and hinging device shall conform to SS 16:1985 "WC Seats
(Plastic)", or its latest amendment. The coloured plastic seat and cover shall match the profile of
the WC bowl and approved by the HDB. The whole pedestal WC suite including the internal parts
and fittings forming the complete flushing mechanism and all the necessary accessories shall be
assembled in the factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site.
The coloured WC Suite shall be listed in the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A and approved
by HDB.
The WC suite model shall have streamlined lower pan body and fully concealed outlet with no
visible WC trap profile.
A copy of the user manual/maintenance instruction shall be supplied with the WC and shall be
affixed onto the WC using plastic bag and heavy duty adhesive tape.

(B)

Installation
Fix the close coupled low capacity WC suite including rigid plastic seat and cover with buffers,
hinging devices and with all necessary accessories and associated works in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions to enable the proper functioning of the system.
Fix the WC onto the floor using 4 no. of the original screws provided together with the WC and seal
the gap between the base of the WC and the floor with approved silicone sealant. The WC shall not
be fixed using cement grout or using other type of screws. Any WC installed using a method not in
accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer shall be dismantled and re-installed in
accordance with the correct method.

37.20.5

Single Lever Basin Mixer And Accessories

All basins shall be complete with 15mm chrome plated ceramic disc cartridge operated by a single lever
mixer tap, with pop-up waste, aerator and bottle trap. It shall be complete with all necessary seals and
nuts, firmly fixed and secured on the basin.
The dimension of the tap spout measured from the centre of the outlet orifice to the centre of the inlet shall
be 90mm minimum and measured vertically from the lowest part of the outlet orifice to the basin top shall
be 25mm minimum.
The Hot/Cold indicator shall be clearly visible. The indicator may either be by colour coding and/or with
character identification. Hot indicator shall be on the left and cold indicator on the right side.
The lever and the body shall be of chrome plated brass.
The operation of the lever shall be smooth and effortless. The lifting of the lever shall not leave any gap
or opening which is likely to trap the finger and/or cause injury.
The mixer tap shall comply with BS 5412 and approved by the PUB and the SO Rep. Bottle trap shall be
approved by the SO Rep and connected to a 32mm diameter UPVC waste pipe discharging into a floor
trap as shown.

BLDG04/S37.DOC(13)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 37-14
37.20.6

Sealant
Silicone sealant shall be used to seal up all gaps between sanitary wares (including cultured marble
basin/top ) and tiled surface. The approved sealant shall be of one-component system, non-sag, class 25
in accordance with ASTM C920-01, and able to be applied without a primer. In addition it shall also meet
the following technical requirements:
S/N

Characteristics/
Properties

Fungal Resistance Test

Test Method
ISO 846:1997 (Method B)

Chemical Resistance
Test:
a)

Household bleach

a)

Concentrated sodium hypochlorite

solution - ANSI Z124.3 : 1986 (spot
covered)

b)

Urea

b)

Urea, 6.0% (Urine) - ANSI Z124.3 :

1986 (spot covered)

Tack Free Time (hrs)

ASTM C679-87 (1997)

Requirements
No growth
)
)
)Surface shall be
)unaffected after 16
)hours of spot
)covered test
)
)
)
4hrs

The Contractor shall submit the brand/range of silicone sealant and proposed method of application to
the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the Works. The Contractor shall also submit
samples of the sealant to the SO Rep for selection of colour to match the sanitary Works

37.21

COLOURED UPVC GRATING OVER FLOOR TRAP/WASTE

OUTLET FOR BATH/WC, KITCHEN AND SERVICE YARD
All UPVC gratings over 100mm or 50mm diameter floor traps/waste outlets in the Bath/WC, Kitchen and
service yard with floor tiles shall be coloured gratings. The colour shall be one of the four basic colours, ie.
Blue, Pink, Beige or Grey and shall be approved by the SO Rep. However, the anti-mosquito device need
not be in colour.

37.22

BIB TAP AND DRAINAGE OUTLET FOR WASHING MACHINE

Provide and fix 15mm diameter chrome plated brass hose union bib tap with cross-head handle at the
kitchen. The bib tap shall comply with BS 5412 and approved by the SO Rep.
50mm diameter outlet for washing machine shall be finished with UPVC adaptor and screw-down cap as
shown in the Drawings.

BLDG04/S37.DOC(14)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 37-15
37.23

LAY SEWER TO CONNECT TO MINOR SEWER

AND SEWER CONNECTION
Lay the last length of main drain-line to join the inspection chamber to the minor manhole connection pipe
provided by the Employer's civil engineering contractor or Sewerage Department, PUB unless otherwise
specified. Allow for the connection to be carried out at a later stage. The connection shall be done under
the supervision of the SO Rep or Sewerage Department, PUB. Where in the case pipe joints are not
provided, the Contractor shall provide the necessary connections by other methods approved by the
Sewerage Department, PUB at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. The last length of the main
drain-line from the inspection chamber to such minor manhole shall be of vitrified clay pipe all as shown in
the Drawings and to the approval of Sewerage Department, PUB. Backfill with quarry dust and finished as
shown.
Apply to the Sewerage Department, PUB for the connection and bear all costs and expenses including the
necessary fees.

37.24

RAINWATER DOWNPIPE (RWDP) SYSTEM

The rainwater downpipe system shall be of UPVC pipes and fittings, all as shown in the Drawings and
approved by the SO Rep. Unless specified otherwise, all rainwater downpipes above ground slab level
shall be 200mm nominal diameter white UPVC pipes. The rainwater downpipe system shall be complete
with downpipes, branch pipes, roof and balcony outlets with gratings, couplings, pipe brackets, swept tee
junctions, access pipes, adaptors, rectangular section bends, underground pipes and Y-branch fittings.
The 200mm nominal diameter white UPVC pipe shall comply with the requirements of SS 272:83 as
shown below :
Measurements/Tests
a) Dimensions

SS 272:83 Requirements
Outside Diameter
Mean-minimum 200.0, maximum 200.6;
Ovality-minimum 196.3, maximum 204.3;
Wall Thickness
minimum 4.9, maximum 6.0.

b) Opacity

Not exceeding 0.2 per cent of visible light.

c) Hydrostatic Pressure

No sign of leakage or any Defect at 70 kPa.

The method of jointing pipes and fittings shall be as specified in subclause 37.12.2.4 "Method of Fixing".
37.25

WASTE AND RAINWATER DISCHARGE FROM BALCONIES,

SERVICE YARDS, LANDINGS, LIFT LOBBIES AND MSCP DECKS
As shown in the Drawings, waste and rainwater discharge from the access balconies, private balconies,
service yards, landings, lift lobbies at the second storey and above, and all multi-storey carpark/garage
decks shall be connected to the rainwater downpipe system or to waste downpipes discharging into
surface drains. All branch pipes and fittings used in the connections shall be of UPVC and comply with
SS 213. The discharge outlets shall be square base, screw-in domical grating type as shown in the
Drawings. All 80mm, 100mm and 150mm nominal diameter outlets for the private balconies/service yards
shall have an adjustable square base of minimum 40mm adjustment. All 50mm nominal diameter outlets
for private balconies shall have flat screw-in gratings.
The method of jointing pipes and fittings shall be as specified in subclause 37.12.2.4 "Method of Fixing".

37.26

WASTE AND RAINWATER DISCHARGE AT GROUND FLOOR

Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, all ground floor surfaces of void decks, play areas, multi-storey
carparks/garages, link buildings, linkways, etc, shall be graded to drain waste water and rainwater into
surface drains.

BLDG04/S37.DOC(15)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 37-16
37.27

PAINTING
Except for sanitary pipes and water supply pipes, all other ferrous metal surfaces of work installed by the
Contractor (eg. mild steel brackets and others) shall be painted with 1 coat of approved primer and 2 coats
of gloss enamel paint. All paint used shall be of those quality controlled by PSB and approved by the SO
Rep.
Allow for numbering to be painted to all sanitary pipes and water supply pipes at void deck.

37.28

MODULAR BRICKS
Where clay bricks are shown in the Drawings, the bricks shall be of modular bricks. The common and
facing clay bricks shall be 190mm x 90mm x 90mm and 290mm x 90mm x 90mm.

37.29

STAINLESS STEEL PIPE RAIL (FOR HANDICAP)

Provide and install stainless steel pipe rail for handicap in public toilets as shown in the Drawings.
The stainless steel shall be of Grade 304, and the internal diameter shall be as shown in the Drawings.
The end of the pipe shall be split to form fishtail and fixed into the wall and complete with stainless steel
capping of the same grade all to the details as shown in the Drawings. The fixing of pipe rail shall be rigid
and secured tightly into the walls.

37.30

CONNECTING TUBE TO PILLAR TAPS AND CISTERNS

The connecting tube shall be flexible stainless steel tube 15mm diameter and complete with UPVC
adaptor coupling where necessary.

37.31

50MM DIAMETER WASTE OUTLET AT ATTACHED BATHROOM

Waste discharge outlet for the 50mm diameter pipe at attached bathroom shall be UPVC screw-in flat
grating with square base as shown in the Drawings.

Total pages for this Section :

16
Section 38/.....

BLDG04/S37.DOC(16)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 38-1
SECTION 38
WATER INSTALLATION

38.1

GENERAL REQUIREMENT
All pipes and pipe fittings shall be approved by Water Department, PUB unless otherwise specified. The
Employer reserves the right to carry out test on materials on the Site as and when required. The test shall
be conducted at PSB accredited or other approved testing laboratory and all costs of testing shall be
borne by the Contractor.

38.2

WATER SUPPLY PIPES

38.2.1

Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings For Water Supply

All ductile iron pipes and fittings for water installation shall comply with BS EN 545 and ductile iron flanges
type PN16 shall comply with BS EN 545.
The pipes and fittings shall be internally cement mortar lined in accordance with the relevant clauses in BS
EN 545.

38.2.2

Stainless Steel Water Pipes

Provide and fix stainless steel water supply pipes to areas as shown in the Drawings. All stainless steel
water pipes, fittings and accessories shall comply with the standards stipulated by PUB and to the
requirements of BS 4127:Part 2.
The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free from Defect.
Cutting and fixing shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All stainless steel
pipes shall not be bent. Support pipes with stainless steel supporting clips or as shown in the Drawings.
Use light gauge stainless steel pipes for water supply unless otherwise specified.
The stainless steel pipe fittings shall be of compression fittings of copper alloy or stainless steel press
fitting joints. Compression fittings of copper alloy shall conform with BS EN 1254 Part 2:1998 . Stainless
steel press fitting joints shall conform with Japanese Waterworks Association (JWWA) G116 "Stainless
Steel Pipe Fittings For Water Works". All fittings shall conform with all PUB latest requirements. Fittings of
15mm size and longer shall be legibly marked with the manufacturer's name or trade mark.
Support pipes with supporting stainless steel clips and hangers. The maximum spacing for horizontal and
vertical support shall be as follows :
Nominal Size

Maximum Horizontal
Support Spacing

Maximum Vertical
Support Spacing

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

600
600
1200
1200

1200
1200
1800
1800

15
20 to 28
35 to 42
54 and above

BLDG04/S38.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 38-2
38.3

CONTRACTOR'S WORK COMMENCES FROM

PUBLIC UTILITIES BOARD MAIN
PUB will provide and lay water main up to the bulk meter for direct and indirect supply or individual meter
points for direct supply as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor's Works shall commence from these
points.

38.4

BULK METER POSITIONS

The exact position of bulk meter, where not fixed by existing mains shall be approved by the SO Rep and
Water Department, PUB before fixing. Otherwise the Contractor shall make good to the proper position
determined by the SO Rep.

38.5

WATER METER POSITIONS

Provide and install live meter connections to all flats and remove the connections at the time when PUB
install the water meters to all flats. The Contractor shall also provide label/tag of unit numbers where one
service duct serves more than two dwelling units per floor. The label or tag shall be a permanent feature,
with the dwelling unit number clearly indicated and firmly attached to the piping.

38.6

BRASS STOPCOCKS, STOP VALVES, GATE VALVES

AND COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY GATE VALVE
Provide and fix to every branch service pipe or main supply pipe, one stop valve to SS 75:Pt 2 or gate
valve to BS 5163. Provide valve with a detachable crutch head.
Where ball stop valves and stopcocks are along public corridors or public access balconies, the upper end
of projecting shank of valves shall be tilted to an angle of 15 degrees towards the wall where such pipes
are tee off from direct up-riser pipes or indirect down supply pipes. The installation shall comply with PUB
regulations. Install copper and copper alloy gate valve to BS 5154 at the down supply pipe on the roof top.
When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remove the detachable levers and deliver them to the
Branch Office or Town Council.

38.7

DIRECT SUPPLY TO FLATS

Run 100mm diameter underground ductile iron distribution main and 80mm ductile iron sub-main
complying with BS EN 545 as shown in the Drawings. From this main, run direct riser of size shown in the
following schedule, each serving only 2 units on each floor unless otherwise shown.
For all Executive Maisonettes, the tee-off shall be 28mm diameter stainless steel pipes, the internal
service UPVC pipes shall be 25mm diameter. Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks before
individual sub-meters.

BLDG04/S38.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 38-3
38.7

DIRECT SUPPLY TO FLATS (CONT'D)

Schedule of Common Direct Riser and Tee Off Pipes
For 3, 4, 5-Room Flats and Executive Apartments
(To be of stainless steel complying with BS 4127:Part 2)
(a)

Storey No.
Served by
Common Riser

Block without Void Deck

1

Size of Riser

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

No. of Storey

1st

1st

1st to 2nd

1st to 3rd

1st to 3rd

1st to 3rd

1st to 3rd

1st to 3rd

*Tee Off Size

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

No. of Storey

2nd

3rd

4th

4th

4th

4th

4th

*Tee Off Size

28mm

28mm

28mm

28mm

28mm

28mm

28mm

Size of Riser

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

No. of Storey

5th

5th

5th to 6th

5th to 7th

*Tee off Size

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

No. of Storey

6th

7th

8th

*Tee Off Size

28mm

28mm

28mm

(b)
Storey No.
Served by
Common Riser

Block with Void Deck

2

Size of Riser

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

No. of Storey

2nd

2nd

2nd to 3rd

2nd to 4th

2nd to 4th

2nd to 4th

2nd to 4th

2nd to 4th

*Tee Off Size

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

No. of Storey

3rd

4rd

5th

5th

5th

5th

5th

*Tee Off Size

28mm

28mm

28mm

28mm

28mm

28mm

28mm

Size of Riser

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

No. of Storey

6th

6th

6th to 7th

6th to 8th

*Tee off Size

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

No. of Storey

7th

8th

9th

*Tee Off Size

28mm

28mm

28mm

* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied through up to the junction of the last fitting within the
flat unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm diameter at fitting all
as shown in the Drawings.

BLDG04/S38.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 38-4
38.8

HOT AND COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPES AND FITTINGS

Hot and cold water supply pipes and fittings shall be provided within the residential units. The
Contractor shall submit the proposed work methods for the installation of concealed water pipes
including information/details of the suppliers and type of materials used for the approval of the SO Rep.
All water pipes within the residential units shall be copper pipes BS EN 1057, approved by the SO Rep.
All pipes shall be chased (embedded) in walls, columns and beams. No pipe shall be exposed within the
residential units. Copper brackets shall be used for securing the water pipes. The spacing between the
copper brackets on the horizontal and vertical pipe run shall not be more than 1m centre to center. In
addition, copper brackets shall also be installed immediately before and after each bend.
Notwithstanding this, the Contractor shall ensure that all the pipes shall be secured firmly.
The nominal size of the water pipes shall be nominal outside diameter of 22mm with nominal wall
thickness of 1.2mm. However, nominal outside diameter of 28mm with nominal wall thickness of 1.2mm
shall be used for the topmost 2 storeys. The water pipe shall be reduced to 15mm nominal outside
diameter with 1mm nominal wall thickness at the tap fittings.
The Contractor shall be responsible for forming all notches, chases, and recesses in walls, columns and
beams.
All fittings required for joints (tees, elbows, etc) on the pipes shall be of capillary fittings complying with
EN1254-1. Bending of copper pipes shall not be allowed. Joining of fittings to pipes shall be by capillary
brazing. Two complete rounds of brazing shall be required for each joint. Before joining, clean the
external surface of the copper pipes and the internal surface of the fittings with sand paper. After
joining, the joints shall be cooled down and cleaned by using wet cloth/sponge.
All pipe works installed shall be hydrostatically tested at 7 bars for 24 hours. The pressure gauge used
for the testing shall be calibrated by the PSB or PSB accredited laboratory. All water pipes including all
pipe fittings (tees, elbows, etc) shall be left exposed for inspection for leakage during testing before
concealment of the pipes and fittings shall be carried out. All pipe works installed shall be hydrostatically
tested at 7 bars again for 4 hours within 7 days before locking up and handing over the completed units
to the Employer.
A cold water pipe shall be tee-off from the distribution pipe to the designated heater position. Hot water
pipes shall be provided from the heater position to all basin and bath mixers and the designated kitchen
sink position. A pressure relief drain-off pipe shall also be provided for discharging to the floor trap.
The cold water inlet, hot water outlet and the drain-off pipes shall be fixed with 30mm x20mm aluminium
tags with engraved markings of cold water inlet, hot water outlet and drain-off respectively.
Light duty coloured masking tapes of 10mm width, shall be fixed on the wall surfaces of all the pipe
routing lines concealed behind walls, columns and beams. Red for hot water pipes, blue for cold water
pipes and black for drain-off pipe. No wall finish shall be damaged by the removal of the tapes. The
Contractor shall also provide suitable equipment to the SO Rep for verification of pipe routing indicated
on the wall surfaces.
For each basin, 15mm diameter isolating ball stopvalves shall be fixed below the tap mixer, connecting
to the hot and cold inlet. 15mm diameter isolating ball stopvalves shall also be fixed at the provision of
hot and cold water inlet for kitchen sink connection.
A bath/shower mixer complete with diverter, adjustable jet shower head, sliding bar, 1.5m flexible hose
(all in chrome finish), and a basin mixer, approved by the SO Rep, shall be provided within each
Bath/WC.

38.9

REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM

38.9.1

Flushing Pipes From Ground Level

Where refuse chute flushing pipes are supplied directly from PUB mains, every refuse chute shall have its
own supply teed off from the distribution mains located at apron. Supply pipe of 35mm diameter stainless
steel pipe to refuse chute shall have a brass stopcock with detachable brass crutch head located outside
at 1.8m above apron. The brass components shall be dezincification resistant complying to BS EN
12163:1998 or BS EN 12165:1998 or BS EN 12420:1999. Such fittings shall have the additional marking
of "DZR" or "CR"

BLDG04/S38.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 38-5
38.9.1

Flushing Pipes From Ground Level (Cont'd)

The flushing pipe shall be 25mm diameter UPVC pipe complying with SS 141 Class E ringing round four
sides of the chute and perforated with 5mm 1mm diameter holes at maximum 50mm centres such that
the water flowing out of the holes are directed at 45 degrees towards the refuse chute wall. The flushing
pipe shall be supported by non-corrosive clips or hangers to each side of the refuse chute wall.

38.9.2

Flushing Pipes To Refuse Chutes From Distribution Mains

At Roof-Top (For Block With Centralised Refuse Chute)

38.9.2.1

Pipe & Fittings

For flushing pipes to centralised refuse chutes from distribution mains at roof-top, the 42mm diameter
stainless steel supply pipes shall be teed off from the distribution main at the roof top as specified in
Clause 38.10 "Indirect Supply From Roof Tanks". One such pipe shall supply only one chute. Provide
each supply pipe with a 40mm full bore ball stop valve and a 40mm solenoid valve. The layout and
arrangement shall be as shown in the Drawings for flushing chutes.
The flushing pipe shall be 25mm diameter UPVC pipe complying with SS 141 Class E ringing round four
sides of the chute and perforated with 5mm 1mm diameter holes at maximum 50mm centres such that
the water flowing out of the holes are directed at 45 degrees towards the refuse chute wall. The flushing
pipe shall be supported by non-corrosive clips or hangers to each side of the refuse chute wall.

38.9.2.2

Solenoid Valve
The approved 40mm solenoid valve shall be electrically operated, two-way, normally closed and capable
of operating at zero differential pressure. The supply voltage shall be 230 V 10% at 50 Hz. The coil shall
be epoxy or plastic encapsulated, of at least class F insulation, and capable of 100% continuous duty.
The enclosure protection shall be at least IP65 (according to BS 5490) and suitable for conduit
connection. The enclosure shall incorporate earthing terminal and terminal block for easy maintenance.
The pipe threads shall comply with BS 21. The operating pressure range shall be 0 to 4 bars.
The valve body shall be of brass, bronze or other approved metal. Parts in contact with water shall be of
stainless steel, brass, bronze or other approved material. All brass components shall be dezincificationresistant complying with BS EN 12163:1998 or BS EN 12165:1998 or BS EN 12420:1999. Such fittings
shall have the additional marking of "DZR" or "CR"
The Contractor's proposed solenoid valve shall be of the type approved by the SO Rep for the refuse
chute flushing systems. Submit technical information of the solenoid valve and other information, as
provided in APPENDIX A14, to the SO Rep for approval.
Where the pressure of water leading to the solenoid valves exceeds 4 bars, such as in some staggered
blocks, provide and install appropriate pressure reducing valves subject to the approval of the SO Rep.

38.9.2.3

Control Board
The design of control board shall follow the Drawings approved by the SO Rep. The control board shall
contain the following :
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.

Relay to control the solenoid valve for refuse chute flushing

MCB unit for control circuit and solenoid valve
30 minute timer
Circuit diagram to be pasted inside the front panel

The front panel shall have :

1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.

Red indicator light to show the flushing is on

Green indicator light to show the power supply is on
Red emergency stop push button
Green push button to start the flushing
Key lock to be approved by the SO Rep.

The enclose protection of the box shall be at least IP 54 (according to BS 5490). The box shall be made
of 1.5mm thick mild steel sheet, electro-galvanised and coated with one layer of epoxy oven-baked paint.
The control board shall be wall mounted inside the refuse chamber next to the consumer unit. The chosen
location shall be approved by the SO Rep.
BLDG04/S38.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 38-6
38.9.2

Flushing Pipes To Refuse Chutes From Distribution Mains

At Roof-Top (For Block With Centralised Refuse Chute) (Cont'd)

38.9.2.4

Electrical Wiring
The power supply to the system shall be from the consumer unit inside the refuse chamber.
Cables and electrical wiring shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 and they shall be carried in their own
conduits. The cables connecting the solenoid valve to the control switch shall be of 1.5 mm2 nominal
cross-sectional area.
The metal conduits shall be of heavy gauge, galvanised steel conduit, (Class 4), complying with BS 4568,
free from internal roughness and burrs. The conduits shall run inside the building and along the staircase
landing. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bars saddles at maximum 1m
centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs. Provide concrete stumps of 50mm diameter
and 100mm high to encase the conduits at every floor level. The conduits to the solenoid valves shall run
along the piping and be properly supported.
All electrical cables and conduits shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout. Earth the
conduits with copper earthwire of appropriate size. The conduit installation shall be completed before the
cables are drawn. The number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed those set out in
PSB Code of Practice CP 5. Earth all non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. Earth
continuity conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5.

38.9.3

Inspection During Progress Of Work

Provide all necessary facilities such as torch lights etc and access leading to the refuse chute flushing
system for inspection by the SO Rep.

38.9.4

Testing Of Installation
One month before the completion of the installation, arrange with the SO Rep for testing of the
performance and installation of the refuse chute flushing system. All Defect notified during inspection
shall be rectified within such time as instructed by the SO Rep.
Take all necessary precautions to prevent any collection of water inside the Refuse Handling Plant during
any testing which involves the flushing of refuse chute.

38.9.5

Testing For Leakages

Carry out leakage test to the following items :
(a)
(b)
(c)

joints between floor slab;

joints between branch off pipes; and
all the water pipes installed.

Complete the tests, including making good of all Defect within 14 days from the date of Substantial
Completion for each building block.
38.10

INDIRECT SUPPLY FROM ROOF TANKS

Where supply is from roof storage tanks, run 100mm diameter ductile iron distribution mains complying
with BS EN 545 with cement lining internally on roof to beyond the last down supply pipes.
From these mains, run down supply pipes of sizes shown in the schedule, "Schedule Of Down Supply
Pipes And Tee Off Pipes For 3, 4, 5-Room Flats And Executive Apartments", each serving only 2 units on
each floor unless otherwise shown.
Pipe joints, fittings and special tee for ductile iron distribution mains and drawout pipes at roof level shall
be of the flanged type. The use of special tee shall be approved by the SO Rep.
For all Executive Maisonettes, the tee off shall be 28mm diameter stainless steel pipes, the internal
service UPVC pipes shall be 25mm diameter. Provide and install the 25mm diameter stopcocks before
individual sub-meters.

BLDG04/S38.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 38-7
38.10

INDIRECT SUPPLY FROM ROOF TANKS (CONT'D)

Schedule of Down Supply Pipes and Tee Off Pipes for 3, 4, 5-Room Flats and Executive Apartments
(To be of stainless steel complying with BS 4127:Part 2)
Where Tank Supply
No. of Storey Below Roof
Size of Down Feed Pipe
No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size
No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size
Size of Down Feed Pipe
No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

1-Storey

2-Storey

3-Storey

4-Storey

5-Storey

6-Storey

7-Storey

8-Storey

9-Storey

42mm
1st
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm
3rd
22mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
3rd to 4th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 5th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 7th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 8th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 5th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
6th to 9th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size
Size of Down Feed Pipe
No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to the junction of last fitting within the flat units as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm
diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawings.
Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks before individual sub-meters for top-most 2 storey dwelling units.

BLDG04/S38.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 38-8
38.10

INDIRECT SUPPLY FROM ROOF TANKS (CONT'D)

Schedule of Down Supply Pipes and Tee Off Pipes for 3, 4, 5-Room Flats and Executive Apartments
(To be of stainless steel complying with BS 4127:Part 2)
Where Tank Supply
No. of Storey Below Roof

10-Storey

11-Storey

12-Storey

13-Storey

14-Storey

15-Storey

16-Storey

17-Storey

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
7th to 10th
22mm

42mm
7th to 11th
22mm

42mm
7th to 12th
22mm

42mm
7th to 13th
22mm

42mm
7th to 10th
22mm

42mm
7th to 10th
22mm

42mm
7th to 10th
22mm

42mm
7th to 11th
22mm

42mm
11th to 14th
22mm

42mm
11th to 15th
22mm

42mm
11th to 16th
22mm

42mm
12th to 17th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size
Size of Down Feed Pipe
No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to the junction of last fitting within the flat unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm
diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawings.
Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks before individual sub-meters for top-most 2 storey dwelling units.

BLDG04/S38.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 38-9
38.10

INDIRECT SUPPLY FROM ROOF TANKS (CONT'D)

Schedule of Down Supply Pipes and Tee Off Pipes for 3, 4, 5-Room Flats and Executive Apartments
(To be of stainless steel complying with BS 4127:Part 2)
Where Tank Supply
No. of Storey Below Roof

18-Storey

19-Storey

20-Storey

21-Storey

22-Storey

23-Storey

24-Storey

25-Storey

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
7th to 12th
22mm

42mm
7th to 12th
22mm

42mm
7th to 10th
22mm

42mm
7th to 10th
22mm

42mm
7th to 10th
22mm

42mm
7th to 11th
22mm

42mm
7th to 12th
22mm

42mm
7th to 12th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
13th to 18th
22mm

42mm
13th to 19th
22mm

42mm
11th to 15th
22mm

42mm
11th to 15th
22mm

42mm
11th to 16th
22mm

42mm
12th to 17th
22mm

42mm
13th to 18th
22mm

42mm
13th to 18th
22mm

42mm
16th to 20th
22mm

42mm
16th to 21st
22mm

42mm
17th to 22nd
22mm

42mm
18th to 23rd
22mm

42mm
19th to 24th
22mm

42mm
19th to 25th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to the junction of last fitting within the flat unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm
diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawings.
Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks before individual sub-meters for top-most 2 storey dwelling units.

BLDG04/S38.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 38-10
38.10

INDIRECT SUPPLY FROM ROOF TANKS (CONT'D)

Schedule of Down Supply Pipes and Tee Off Pipes for 3, 4, 5-Room Flats and Executive Apartments
(To be of stainless steel complying with BS 4127:Part 2)
Where Tank Supply
No. of Storey Below Roof

26-Storey

27-Storey

28-Storey

29-Storey

30-Storey

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
7th to 11th
22mm

42mm
7th to 11th
22mm

42mm
7th to 11th
22mm

42mm
7th to 11th
22mm

42mm
7th to 12th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
12th to 16th
22mm

42mm
12th to 16th
22mm

42mm
12th to 16th
22mm

42mm
12th to 17th
22mm

42mm
13th to 18th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
17th to 21st
22mm

42mm
17th to 21st
22mm

42mm
17th to 22nd
22mm

42mm
18th to 23rd
22mm

42mm
19th to 24th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
22nd to 26th
22mm

42mm
22nd to 27th
22mm

42mm
23rd to 28th
22mm

42mm
24th to 29th
22mm

42mm
25th to 30th
22mm

* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to the junction of last fitting within the flat unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm
diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawings.
Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks before individual sub-meters for top-most 2 storey dwelling units.

BLDG04/S38.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 38-11
38.10

INDIRECT SUPPLY FROM ROOF TANKS (CONT'D)

Schedule of Down Supply Pipes and Tee Off Pipes for 3, 4, 5-Room Flats and Executive Apartments
(To be of stainless steel complying with BS 4127:Part 2)
Where Tank Supply
No. of Storey Below Roof

31-Storey

32-Storey

33-Storey

34-Storey

35-Storey

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
7th to 12th
22mm

42mm
7th to 12th
22mm

42mm
7th to 12th
22mm

42mm
7th to 11th
22mm

42mm
7th to 11th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
13th to 18th
22mm

42mm
13th to 18th
22mm

42mm
13th to 19th
22mm

42mm
12th to 17th
22mm

42mm
12th to 17th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
19th to 24th
22mm

42mm
19th to 25th
22mm

42mm
20th to 26th
22mm

42mm
18th to 23rd
22mm

42mm
18th to 23rd
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
25th to 31st
22mm

42mm
26th to 32th
22mm

42mm
27th to 33th
22mm

42mm
24th to 29th
22mm

42mm
24th to 29th
22mm

42mm
30th to 34th
22mm

42mm
30th to 35th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to the junction of last fitting within the flat unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm
diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawings.
Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks before individual sub-meters for top-most 2 storey dwelling units.

BLDG04/S38.DOC(11)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 38-12
38.10

INDIRECT SUPPLY FROM ROOF TANKS (CONT'D)

Schedule of Down Supply Pipes and Tee Off Pipes for 3, 4, 5-Room Flats and Executive Apartments
(To be of stainless steel complying with BS 4127:Part 2)
Where Tank Supply
No. of Storey Below Roof

36-Storey

37-Storey

38-Storey

39-Storey

40-Storey

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

42mm
1st to 2nd
28mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

42mm
3rd to 6th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
7th to 11th
22mm

42mm
7th to 11th
22mm

42mm
7th to 11th
22mm

42mm
7th to 11th
22mm

42mm
7th to 12th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
12th to 17th
22mm

42mm
12th to 17th
22mm

42mm
12th to 17th
22mm

42mm
12th to 18th
22mm

42mm
13th to 19th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
18th to 23rd
22mm

42mm
18th to 23rd
22mm

42mm
18th to 24th
22mm

42mm
19th to 25th
22mm

42mm
20th to 26th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
24th to 29th
22mm

42mm
24th to 30th
22mm

42mm
25th to 31st
22mm

42mm
26th to 32th
22mm

42mm
27th to 33th
22mm

Size of Down Feed Pipe

No. of Storey Below Roof
* Tee Off Size

42mm
30th to 36th
22mm

42mm
31st to 37th
22mm

42mm
32th to 38th
22mm

42mm
33th to 39th
22mm

42mm
34th to 40th
22mm

* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to the junction of last fitting within the flat unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm
diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawings.
Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks before individual sub-meters for top-most 2 storey dwelling units.

BLDG04/S38.DOC(12)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 38-13
38.11

RESERVED

38.12

SILT TRAP AT FOOT OF DOWN SUPPLY PIPES

Every down supply pipe shall extend at least 250mm below the last tee-off to form a silt trap fitted with a
plug to facilitate cleaning. Provide gate valve with detachable crutch head just before the silt trap.

38.13

PIPEWORKS TO THE STAINLESS STEEL FLANGES

AT THE CONCRETE WATER TANKS
The fixing of pipes, valves and fittings, including bolts, nuts and gaskets, to the stainless steel flanges of
the connecting pipes shall be fixed by the Contractor. Use only stainless steel bolts and nuts. All
stainless steel material shall conform to AISI Grade 316 and flanges shall be in accordance with BS 4504.
Allow for all pipeworks cost and water for sanitary and water installation leakage test.

38.14

PIPING TO HIGH LEVEL TANKS

Provide and install piping to high level water tanks as follows :

38.14.1

Rising Mains
Install 100mm ductile iron pipes to BS EN 545 with cement lining internally from bulk meters or low level
suction tanks at ground level to high level water tank whichever is applicable. The rising mains shall be
connected to a 100mm ball float valve with a 100mm gate valve at inlet. Floats shall be of copper and
approved type.

38.14.2

Distribution Outlet Mains

Install 100mm diameter ductile iron pipe to BS EN 545 with cement lining internally as shown in the
Drawings. Support the pipes on precast concrete block 450mm high and 150mm thick of 1:3:6 mix
concrete, embedded onto 150mm high concrete base by mortar at intervals of not exceeding 2700mm all
as shown in the Drawings. Provide supports at every fitting or bend. Mains shall extend past the last
branching-off of down supply pipe and shall be encased by reinforced concrete end-thrust supports as
shown in the Drawings. Provide and fix ductile iron short pipe 450mm in length with 180mm diameter
ductile iron collar 20mm thick, welded at middle section of the short pipe. Provide approved flange
adaptors along the distribution pipe before each thrust support.
All ductile iron pipe joints, flange adaptor, fittings and special tees shall be of the flanged type in
compliance with BS EN 545 type PN 16.

38.14.3

Interconnecting Pipe
Install 100mm diameter ductile iron pipe to BS EN 545 with cement linings installed between tanks as
shown in the Drawings with 100mm gate valve. The invert level of the connecting pipe shall be 400mm
above the internal base of the water tank unless shown otherwise in the Drawings. Pipe joints, fittings and
special tees shall be of the flanged type ductile iron. Flange type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545.

38.14.4

Overflow Pipes
100mm diameter ductile iron overflow pipes to BS EN 545 with cement lining or one size bigger than the
diameter of the inlet rising main pipe as shown in the Drawings to each tank compartment shall be
connected to washout pipe.
Provide an additional 28mm diameter stainless steel overflow warning pipe for each roof storage tank and
discharging off roof edge at its nearest point preferably at the kitchen side. The pipe shall project 300mm
from eaves of roof as shown in the Drawings.
Cover open end of pipes with mosquito screen.

BLDG04/S38.DOC(13)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 38-14
38.14.5

Tank Washout Pipes

Install 100mm diameter ductile iron washout pipes complying to BS EN 545 with cement lining before the
gate valve from tanks to roof level as shown in the Drawings. The pipes shall discharge direct into roof
rain water gutter and properly drained off through rain water downpipes.

38.14.6

Stop Valves, Sluice/Gate Valves, Copper And Copper Alloy Gate Valves
Provide and install all necessary stop valves to SS 75:Pt 2, gate valves to BS 5163, Copper and Copper
Alloy Gate Valves to BS 5154 and other fittings required to comply with the requirements and regulations
of the Water Department, PUB, regardless of whether such items have been specifically mentioned or not.
The wedge of the gate valves (BS 5163) used shall be of rubber bonded gate. Coat the internal surface of
valve body with approved material. The spindles of the gate valves shall be of stainless steel or high
tensile bronze or other approved type.

38.14.7

Raise Pipes
Install raised pipes to raise and support all horizontal pipes above concrete roof as stated in
subclause 38.14.2 "Distribution Outlet Mains" to a level of not less than 330mm to clear precast secondary
roofing slabs.

38.15

BIB TAP AND STOPCOCK/STOPVALVE

Where shown in the Drawings, provide and fix 15mm diameter brass bib taps conforming with BS 5412
and BS 3457; and 15mm and 25mm diameter stopcocks/stopvalves conforming with SS 75:Part 2 and
BS 3457. Such bib taps, stopcocks and stopvalves shall be approved by the SO Rep and Water Dept,
PUB. Bib taps shall be chrome plated brass body with chrome plated brass operating handles. UPVC tee
and cap for fixing bib tap as shown in the Drawings shall conform with SS 174. Fix the cap to the wall by
"Ramset ED 655" or other approved.

38.16

TAPS IN PUBLIC AREAS

Taps located at the staircase landings, access balconies, wash areas and for civil defence purposes at the
lst storey shall be of 15mm diameter chrome plated hose union bib tap with removable handle, as shown
in the Drawings. The tap shall be approved by the SO Rep and Water Dept, PUB. The handles shall be
handed over to the Employer or the relevant Town Councils as directed by the SO Rep upon handing over
of the building blocks.

38.17

WATER SERVICES TO UTILITIES CENTRE

Run 25mm diameter UPVC pipe from water meter point to the utilities centre. Water pipes inside the
buildings shall be 20mm diameter up to bib taps.
Provide and fix 15mm diameter chrome plated brass self-closing delay-action bib tap over lavatory basin
and 15mm isolating ball stop valve to W.C. cisterns. Bib tap and ball stop valve shall be of brass high
pressure screw down type. Provide similar 15mm bib tap with screw on connecting nozzle for the utilities
centre.

38.18

WATER SERVICES TO CENTRALISED REFUSE CHUTE CHAMBER

Provide and install stainless steel water pipe and stainless steel down supply pipes to the sizes and
locations as shown in the Drawings. The stainless steel pipes shall be approved by the Water
Department, PUB.
Provide and fix brass caps to stainless steel water pipes. Provide and fix approved 15mm bib tap with
screw on connecting nozzle and approved isolating ball stop valve at positions all as shown in the
Drawings.

BLDG04/S38.DOC(14)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 38-15
38.19

FIXING FITTINGS BEFORE HANDING OVER

When required, provide and fix taps, stop valves and other removable fittings immediately before all the
building blocks are handed over to the Employer.

38.20

BRASS WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

Provide and fix PUB approved bronze or brass water pressure reducing valves (NF E29-170) to down
feed pipes where the pressures are more than 35m hydrostatic head, all to be in accordance with the
requirements of Water Department, PUB.
The Contractor shall remove the pressure gauge of the pressure reducing valve and install a plug after
testing.

38.21

SILICONE THIMBLE FOR BASIN TAPS

Silicone thimbles shall be provided for all basin taps except for those in units at the top most 4 storeys and
those units provided with direct water supply. The Silicone thimbles shall be of natural colour food-grade
type and shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep.
Silicone thimbles for the pillar taps shall be of 18.5mm diameter, 2.5mm thick with 4 holes of 2.5mm
diameter each. The silicone thimbles shall be provided between the tap inlets and the stainless steel
flexible tubes.
Silicone thimbles for the tap mixers shall be of 21mm outside diameter, 2.5mm thick with 4 holes of
2.5mm diameter each. The silicone thimbles shall be provided inside the tap outlet aerators.

38.22

CONSTANT FLOW REGULATOR

Constant flow regulators of 8 litres per minute type shall be provided for all bib taps in the common areas
(such as wash areas, staircases, etc), and all bib taps in the Pump Rooms, Centralised Refuse Chambers
and Bulky Refuse Rooms of residential building blocks; except for those at the topmost four storeys. The
constant flow regulators shall be fixed between the tap inlets and the tees or elbow pipe fittings.
The constant flow regulators shall be of the type approved by the SO Rep and comply with the standards
and regulations stipulated by PUB.

Total pages for this Section :

15
Section 39/.....

BLDG04/S38.DOC(15)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 39-1
SECTION 39
GAS PIPE INSTALLATION

39.1

GENERAL REQUIREMENT
The gas pipe installation Works shall refer to the gas pipes after the CityGas Ltd Service Valve (SV) and
which includes buried service pipes, horizontal service pipes, risers and internal gas pipes.
The gas pipe installation work shall be suitable for City Gas Ltd manufactured gas as specified in CP51
Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation and shall be carried out by a Licensed Gas
Service Worker (hereinafter referred to as the "LGSW" for the purposes of this Section including all
clauses and sub-clauses under it) and shall comply with City Gas Ltd requirements.
The Contractor shall engage a Registered PE (Mechanical or Electrical) to be fully responsible for all
matters relating to the gas pipe installation. The Contractor's Registered PE shall liaise with City Gas Ltd
on all matters pertaining to the gas pipe installation.

39.2

CODE OF PRACTICE AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

The Contractor's Registered PE shall supervise the gas pipe installation and ensure that the Works is
carried out in accordance with the following requirements :

39.3

(i)

Public Utilities Act (Chapter 261)

(ii)

Public Utilities (Gas Supply) Regulations

(iii)

Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation, ie. CP51

including any amendments,

(iv)

City Gas Ltd Procedures and Requirements for gas supply; and

(v)

Any other relevant rules, regulations and requirements by the relevant authority
from time to time.

NOTIFICATION FOR COMMENCEMENT OF WORK

Before commencement of the Works, the Contractor's Registered PE shall arrange with the City Gas Ltd
project coordinator and the SO Rep for a site meeting. After the site meeting, the Contractor's Registered
PE shall notify City Gas Ltd before the Works can be carried out.

39.4

SAMPLE UNITS
The Contractor shall put up sample unit for each typical installation for inspection and approval by both the
City Gas Ltd Engineer and the SO Rep. The Contractor's Registered PE shall submit two sets of
drawings of the sample unit to City Gas Ltd before inspection.
The Contractor's Registered PE shall only proceed with the whole installation only after the sample unit
has been inspected and approved by the City Gas Ltd Engineer.

BLDG04/S39.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 39-2
39.5

APPLICATION FOR FINAL PRESSURE TEST OF

GAS PIPE INSTALLATION
The Contractor's Registered PE shall ensure that the gas pipe installation complies with the approved plan
before submitting an application for final pressure test.
The Contractor's Registered PE shall carry out preliminary testing of the completed installation and rectify
all Defect before arranging with the City Gas Ltd project co-ordinator for the final pressure test. All
preparation for the final pressure test shall be made by the Contractor and the Contractor's Registered
PE. The final pressure test shall be conducted by the City Gas Ltd Engineer or his authorised
representative.
The application for final pressure test (City Gas Ltd Form PH-G2 as produced in Appendix A15) must be
accompanied by the following :
(i)

Four sets of as-built drawings duly endorsed by the Contractor's Registered PE.

(ii)

City Gas Ltd Form PH-G1B as produced in Appendix A16 if necessary.

The same endorsed as-built drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for endorsement.
Thereafter the Contractor's Registered PE shall be informed by City Gas Ltd in writing on the approval of
the application for the final pressure test of the gas pipe installation through Form PH-GR2 as produced in
Appendix A17.
A certificate of Final Pressure Test (Form PH-G2A as produced in Appendix A18) shall be prepared by the
Contractor's Registered PE and endorsed by City Gas Ltd once the final pressure test is passed.
A copy of this certificate shall be submitted to City Gas Ltd by the Contractor's Registered PE.
In the event that the installation has failed the final pressure test, the Contractor's Registered PE must
resubmit a fresh application for final pressure test.
After the gas pipe installation has been tested and passed, the Contractor's Registered PE or LGSW shall
affix all plugs, caps and end-points of the installation with warning labels which read 'Gas Pipe Tested. Do
Not Tamper'.
39.6

UNAUTHORISED WORK ON GAS PIPE INSTALLATION

After the gas pipe installation has passed its final pressure test, the Contractor's Registered PE shall
ensure that no person is allowed to carry out any further work without prior written approval from the City
Gas Ltd approving authority. Any further work on the installation, shall render the final pressure test null
and void. If any further work has to be carried out, a new application for the work shall be made together
with the plans.
No person other than an authorised City Gas Ltd employee or authorised City Gas Ltd contractor is
permitted to connect any gas pipe installation onto City Gas Ltd gas main.

39.7

APPLICATION FOR CHARGE-IN/TURN-ON OF GAS SUPPLY

After the gas pipe installation has passed the final pressure test and approved by the City Gas Ltd
Engineer, the Contractor's Registered PE shall apply for charge-in/turn-on of gas supply by submitting City
Gas Ltd Form PH-G3 as produced in Appendix A19.
The Contractor's Registered PE shall attach a copy of the line drawing of the gas pipe installation
indicating the location of the service valves, valves, risers, meters and all installation pipes downstream of
the meter. The line drawing shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S39.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 39-3
39.7

APPLICATION FOR CHARGE-IN/TURN-ON OF GAS SUPPLY (CONT'D)

The line drawing(s) of the gas pipe installation shall be displayed inside the 1st storey gas riser service
duct(s). The line drawing(s) shall be placed and sealed inside an A4 size clear perspex cover and
securely mounted with four stainless steel screws onto the inside of the door(s) of the riser service duct(s).
Thereafter the Contractor's Registered PE shall be informed by City Gas Ltd on the approval and chargein/turn-on of gas supply through Form PH-GR3 & PH-GR4 as produced in Appendix A20 and A21
respectively.

39.8

CHARGE-IN OF GAS
The Contractor's Registered PE must be present during the charge-in of gas. The Contractor's
Registered PE shall arrange for a proof test and set up all necessary equipment, fittings and vent points
for purging and ensure that all necessary safety precautions are taken. After the installation has been
confirmed to be sound with the proof test, the installation is then purged and charged-in with manufactured
gas.
After the charge-in of the gas supply, the Contractor's Registered PE or the LGSW must affix the labels
'Live Gas. Do Not Tamper' to all plugs, caps and other end points of the gas pipe installation.

39.9

USE OF GAS DETECTOR

The Contractor shall use a gas detector which measures the volume of gas in air, when necessary. The
LGSW is responsible for the accuracy and the use of this instrument in all the Works that is carried out by
him.

39.10

PIPES, FITTINGS AND VALVES

All pipes, fittings and valves used in the gas pipe installation shall comply with CP51 and City Gas Ltd
requirements.
The diameter of all pipes as specified in the Specifications and Drawings shall be their nominal diameter.
The diameter of all Polyethylene pipes as specified in the Specifications and Drawings shall be their outer
diameter (OD) and based on a Standard Diameter Ratio (SDR) of 11.
Unless otherwise specified, copper pipes to BS EN 1057 "Copper and copper alloys - seamless round
copper tubes for Water and Gas in sanitary and heating applications" shall be used within the unit for
overhead internal gas supply pipe from the meter to the kitchen of individual unit. Fittings shall be of
compression fittings of copper alloy and shall comply with BS EN 1254 Part 2: 1998 "Capillary and
Compression Tube Fittings for Copper Tubes".
The Contractor shall provide a label/tag showing the unit numbers where one service duct serves more
than two dwelling units per floor. The label or tag shall be a permanent feature, with the dwelling unit
numbers clearly indicated and firmly attached to the piping.
Galvanised steel pipes (heavy) complying with SS17 "Steel Tubes suitable for Screwing to BS 21 Pipe
Threads" or BS 1387 "Screwed and Socketed Steel Tubes and Tubulars and for Plain End Steel Tubes
Suitable for Welding or for Screwing to BS 21 Pipe Threads" shall be used outside the unit for incoming
gas supply pipe, gas riser and horizontal supply pipe.
The galvanised malleable cast iron pipe fittings shall comply with BS 143 and BS 1256 "Specification For
Malleable Cast Iron & Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Pipe Fittings".
Ductile iron pipes shall be of the flexible bolted gland joint type complying with BS EN 545-Class K9. The
gland ring shall be lead tipped nitrile rubber or epichlorhydrin.

BLDG04/S39.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 39-4
39.10

PIPES, FITTINGS AND VALVES (CONT'D)

All galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer
and one coat of lead and chromate free primer. All the exposed galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall
be painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint of a colour to match the background
as instructed by the SO Rep. All galvanised steel and copper pipes including fittings inside service ducts,
inside false ceiling and other enclosures shall be painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat in
Canary Yellow to BS 381C Colour No. 309.
For buried service pipe at the building footway, Polythene pipe sleeve in Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride
(uPVC) pipe shall be used. The uPVC pipe shall conform to JIS 6741 Class AW or SS 141 Class E.
All Polyethylene pipes and fittings shall be of PE80 Polymer and shall be manufactured in accordance with
ISO 4437. The Polyethylene Pipes and Fittings shall be of the City Gas Ltd approved types.

39.11

CATEGORIES OF PIPE
The pipes to be installed is categorised and located in the areas as detailed below :
(a)

Buried Service Pipe

- Pipe connecting to the vertical service pipe and is laid in concrete

channels. The pipe shall extend 600mm beyond the footway drain to
receive City Gas Ltd connection.
The pipe shall be Polyethylene pipe complying to the standards as
specified and shall be sized to OD 63mm. The Polyethylene pipes
shall be sleeved in Diameter 80 mm uPVC pipes, and both ends of the
sleeve shall be stopped with rubber wall grommet.
The pipe-end to receive City Gas Ltd Connection shall be fitted with a
temporary 50mm SS141 Class E uPVC end cap with the Internal
Diameter pre-enlarged (Hot Water treatment) to 63.5mm for close-fit to
the Outer Diameter of the Polyethylene Pipe.
The pipe-end to join to the riser shall be fitted with a 50mm GI BSP
Adaptor X PE 63mm Electrofusion Transition Elbow complying to Gas
Business Engineering specifications GBE/PL3 or equivalent.
Alternatively, the above-mentioned Service Pipe configuration can be
installed by a factory-fitted Above Ground Entry Elbow. It shall be
provided with an assembled 4m Polyethylene tail and a 3.6m uPVC
sleeve; the elbow is zinc plated and a grey fusion bonded epoxy
coated; and the steel nipple is protected by a Polyethylene sleeve and
terminates in a male thread.
All buried/concealed pipes shall be left exposed for City Gas Ltd
inspection, testing and approval before concealment.

(b)

Horizontal Service Pipe - Horizontal pipe runs normally at the ground floor ceiling level and
connecting to all vertical risers. The pipe shall be galvanised steel pipe
to SS 17 or BS 1387.

(c)

Riser

- Rising pipe from ground/first floor to the top shall be provided with a
branch for a meter connection at each floor (a riser supplies gas to
either one or two flats per floor depending on the piping layout). The
pipe shall be galvanised steel to SS 17 or BS 1387.

(d)

Internal Pipe

- Pipe installed after the City Gas Ltd meter.

The pipes shall be copper pipes which complies to BS EN 1057.
Brass compression fittings for copper pipes shall comply to BS 864
Part 2.

BLDG04/S39.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 39-5
39.12

PIPE CHANNEL
Where service pipes have to cross the floor footway before entering the building, such pipes shall be
accommodated in channels in the footway. The channel shall be cleared of all debris and shall be dry
before the gas pipe is laid. The void space between the pipe and the channel shall be filled with cement
mortar. Under no circumstances shall the service pipe be located underneath a ground beam.

39.13

PIPE SUPPORTS/BRACKETS
The Contractor shall provide galvanised steel pipe brackets on horizontal run and at the ground floor
areas at an interval of 3000mm (maximum) or as directed by the SO Rep. The pipe brackets shall be
installed before and after every change of direction of the pipe. The pipe brackets shall also be provided
at an interval of 3000mm (maximum) for vertical riser pipes.
Every riser pipe shall be supported at its base by a duckfoot or similar flange device capable of supporting
the total weight of the riser in accordance to CP51. Where the riser passes through a floor, the floor shall
be haunched up around the riser or its pipe sleeve. The pipe sleeve shall be at least 50mm above the
floor level.

39.14

PIPE SLEEVE ON FLOOR

Where the gas riser pipes are not enclosed in service ducts, a PVC sleeve with a minimum of 300mm
protruding above the floor level shall be provided to accommodate the gas pipe run through the floor slab.
The section of the gas pipe within the sleeve shall be wrapped with petrolatum tape and the gap between
the sleeve and the pipe shall be sealed with water-proofed sealant.

39.15

PIPE JOINTING MATERIALS

All jointing compounds, jointing pastes, thread sealants and other jointing materials for galvanised steel
pipe shall be of the approved type complying with BS 5292.
All Polyethylene pipes shall be jointed only by City Gas Ltd approved types of electrofusion fittings. The
approved types of Electrofusion Control Units shall operate an output voltage of 39.5 volts. All
electrofusion joints shall be carried out by trained workers, certified by the City Gas Ltd Approved Vendors
or the Singapore Power Training Institute.

39.16

THREADED JOINTS
Galvanised iron pipes of 80mm and below and corresponding fittings shall have taper threads except for
connector backnuts to BS 21. Unsintered PTFE (Polytetra fluoro ethylene) tape complying with BS 4375
shall be used on all threaded joints. Prior to jointing, the threads shall be cleaned of all grease and
particles. There shall be a 50% overlap when wrapping threads.

39.17

IDENTIFICATION OF GAS PIPES FOR COMMERCIAL

AND INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
All gas pipes shall be painted Canary Yellow to BS 381C Colour No. 309. In addition, a line diagram shall
be provided at a suitable location indicating the position of meters, pipework, and isolation valves.

BLDG04/S39.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 39-6
39.18

ENTRY OF GAS PIPE BELOW GROUND LEVEL

Direct underground pipe entry into basement shall not be allowed. Gas service pipe shall come up above
ground before entering into the building.
If entry of underground gas pipes through retaining walls below ground level is necessary, a steel sleeve
shall be cast in situ into the retaining wall. The space between the pipe and sleeve shall be sealed at both
ends with cement mortar or any other suitable sealing material. The gas pipe shall also be of heavy
gauge galvanised iron to BS 1387 or SS17-Class C wrapped up with petrolatum tape with a 50% overlap
for buried service pipes 80mm and below. Unsintered PTFE (Polytetra fluoro ethylene) tape complying
with BS 4375 shall be used on all threaded joints.

39.19

SOLID SHAFT FOR METER INSTALLATION

A solid metal shaft shall be installed at each tee-off of the riser where the gas meter is to be installed as
specified in CP51.

39.20

INSTALLATION OF SOLID SPOOL

A solid spool shall be installed at the vertical service pipe from the ground in the building during the
installation stage. The solid spool of 150mm in length shall be installed 600mm above the ground level.
The spool(s) shall be replaced with standard double flanged distant piece(s)/short pipe(s) with Johnson
coupling connectors complying to CP 51 or other approved after the gas pipe installation have passed the
pressure test and the installation is ready for charge-in.

39.21

BRASS BALL AND PLUG VALVES FOR GAS PIPE INSTALLATION

Brass ball stop valves shall be provided to every riser pipe just before the first "Tee-off" pipe and at the
riser tee-off point to every dwelling unit. The ball stop valves shall be suitable for use on City Gas Ltd
town gas. The ball stop valves shall have the following :

39.22

(a)

Two female end connections having BSP threads, tapered in accordance with BS 21 "Specification
For Pipe Threads For Tubes and Fittings Where Pressure-Tight Joints Are Made on the Threads
(Metric Dimensions)".

(b)

Ball and plug valves shall be of the full bore type complying with BS 1552.

GAS PIPE WITHIN THE FALSE CEILING SPACE, BASEMENT

AND CONCEALED AREAS
Where gas pipe is installed within the false ceiling space, basement and concealed areas (these cases to
be specially approved by City Gas Ltd), only steel pipe of heavy gauge complying with BS 3601 or
complying with the American Petroleum Institute (API) Standard 5L Grade B shall be used and shall
comply with the requirements of CP 51.
The pipe shall be welded and full circumferential radiography test shall be carried out on all the welds by
an accredited laboratory engaged by the Contractor to verify that all these welded joints are sound. The
result of radiography tests shall be endorsed and certified by the Contractor's Registered PE and a copy
shall be submitted to the SO Rep.
Stainless steel pipe sleeve, one size larger than that of the gas pipe, shall be provided and exposed by
50mm on both ends of the false ceiling.
All threaded joints, gas valves, fittings and controls shall be installed outside the false ceiling space of the
building.
Where gas pipes pass through air-conditioned areas, it shall be adequately lagged with insulating material
to prevent excessive condensation.

BLDG04/S39.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 39-7
39.23

MECHANICALLY VENTILATED KITCHEN

In a mechanically ventilated kitchen where City Gas Ltd gas is to be used, a solenoid valve shall be
installed before the gas meter. This solenoid valve shall automatically shut off the gas supply whenever
the ventilation fan is switched off or failed to operate.
In the event that the mechanically ventilated kitchen is air-conditioned or linked to an air-conditioned
space adjoining the kitchen, a gas detection system, electrically interlock to the solenoid valve and the
mechanically ventilated system shall be installed. This is to ensure that if there is a gas leak, the gas
supply would be shut off automatically.

39.24

AIR-CONDITIONED AREAS WHERE GAS APPLIANCES ARE INSTALLED

In air-conditioned areas where gas appliances are installed, a leak detection system shall be installed to
monitor the presence of gas. Leak detector used shall comply with BS EN 50054 and BS EN 50057 or
equivalent.
The leak detection system shall be connected to a solenoid valve controlling gas supply to the area. The
leak detection system may be linked to a monitored alarm system if necessary. All detectors and solenoid
valves shall also be explosion proof and shall be certified for use in a hazardous area zone 2 environment
as described under SS 254:Part1 or any equivalent standard having a similar classification. The setting for
the system to cut-out shall not be more than 20% of the Lower Explosive Limit of manufactured gas
(hydrogen).

39.25

PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPES

Gas pipes shall be tested in accordance with the following procedures as specified in CP 51 :
(a)

Cap or plug off all outlets of the system leaving only one opening which shall be fitted with a Tpiece having a gas cock on one end and a manometer (U-gauge)/or a pressure gauge, in the
other;

(b)

Pump air in the system through the gas cock on the T-piece until a pressure of 300mm w.g. is
registered on the U-gauge and shut the cock;

(c)

If there is no pressure drop after 10 minutes, the installation may be deemed sound;

(d)

For the Polyethylene service or installation pipe after the service valve, the required test pressure
is 70 kPa using a 0-200 kPa pressure gauge, and a test duration of 30 minutes;

(e)

If there is no pressure drop after 30 minutes, repeat Point (b) to (c) to complete the testing;

(f)

If there is a fall in pressure at the end of the test, the leak shall be traced with soap solution,
rectified and re-tested.

For chokage test, drop a 15mm diameter ball bearing through each riser from the highest point of the riser
and ensure that the ball bearing is able to fall vertically all the way through without any obstructions from
inside the riser.
After the gas pipe installation had been tested and approved by City Gas Ltd, no further work shall be
allowed unless written approval is obtained from City Gas Ltd. The Contractor's Registered PE shall
arrange with City Gas Ltd for the charging in of gas before the building blocks are handed over to the
Employer.

BLDG04/S39.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 39-8
39.26

PURGING OF PIPES
(a)

Purging of gas must be organised by the Designated Representative and conducted in the
presence of the City Gas Ltd Project Coordinator.

(b)

A proof test shall be carried out immediately preceding to charging in of all pipes.

(c)

Steps must be taken to ensure that there is no naked flame or any other source of ignition in the
vicinity of the purging areas and the areas are well barricaded with relevant warning signs.

(d)

Vent point consisting of standpipes more than 2m long with flame traps and control valves shall be
erected at suitable locations and connected to the appropriate points of the pipework via rubber
hoses or other suitable hoses.

(e)

Every vent point shall be supervised by the Licensed Gas Service Worker and vent points are to be
located such that vent gas cannot drift into buildings.

(f)

A gas detector shall be used to check the mixture content at the end of the standpipe.

(g)

During the purging process, the valve cover shall be left opened.

(h)

Purging is only completed when 100% discharge of gas at the standpipe is achieved.

(i)

On successful completion of the purging process, the standpipe shall be disconnected from the
pipe and the pipe properly plugged off and all valve covers replaced.

(j)

The disturbed joints shall be tested for leakage.

Total pages for this Section :

8
Section 40/.....

BLDG04/S39.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 40-1
SECTION 40
EATING ESTABLISHMENT, MARKET FACILITIES,
RETAIL AND SERVICES FACILITIES

40.1

EATING ESTABLISHMENT
Eating establishment shall include restaurants, eating houses, fast food and family restaurants.

40.1.1

Food Stalls, Kitchen And Wash Area (In Eating House)

40.1.1.1

Sanitary Installation
All drain lines connecting floor traps to waste sumps and grease interceptor shall be cement mortar lined
ductile iron pipe to BS EN 598:1995 and approved by the Sewerage Department, ENV.
Diameter and Type of Drain Line
100mm cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe
150mm cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe
150mm cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe
150mm cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe

From
Floor Trap
Waste Sump
Waste Sump
Grease Interceptor

To
Waste Sump
Waste Sump
Grease Interceptor
Inspection Chamber

All soil, waste and vent pipes serving food stalls and kitchen shall be cement mortar lined ductile iron
pipes or as shown in the Drawings and approved by Sewerage Department, ENV. The grease interceptor
shall be constructed in accordance with ENV drawings and requirements. The floor traps shall be of
stoneware or vitrified clay type approved by ENV, Sewerage Department.
40.1.1.2

Water Installation
All internal service/distribution pipes and fittings shall be stainless steel complying with BS 4127:Part 2
and fittings complying with BS 864:Part 2 all in accordance with Section 38 "Water Installation" including
all clauses and subclauses under it. All concealed pipes shall be copper pipes complying with
BS 2871:Part 1.

40.1.1.3

Sinks
Provide and install sinks to location as shown in the Drawings. All stainless steel sink shall be of HDB
currently approved type complying with SS:40:1971.
Provide and install to each bowl approved 15mm diameter chrome plated brass bib tap to BS 5412 and
brass constant flow regulator rated not more than 12 litres per minute all approved by Water Department,
PUB.

40.1.1.4

(a)

Single bowl stainless steel sink shall be of overall size 432mm x 350mm x 150mm deep.

(b)

Single bowl single drainer (left or right) stainless steel sink shall be of overall size 1500mm x
500mm x 170mm deep.

(c)

Double bowl double drainer stainless steel sink shall be of overall size 1800mm x 500mm x 170mm
deep.

Stainless Steel Bowl Trough To Wash Area In Eating House

Provide and install stainless steel double bowl trough to locations as shown in the Drawings.
The stainless steel double bowl trough shall be of 1.626mm thick and the dimensions shall be 1800mm in
length and 600mm in width. The bowl shall be 500mm x 450mm x 300mm deep. The whole trough shall
be supported by 42mm diameter tubing with adjustable feet and 25mm diameter cross-rail all as shown in
the Drawings.

BLDG04/S40.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 40-2
40.1.2

Staff/Non Public Toilets

40.1.2.1

Sanitary Installation
The requirement shall be the same as those specified in Section 37 "Sanitary Installation" including all
clauses and subclauses under it.
(a)

Pedestal WC Pans
Use approved white vitreous china close-coupled washdown pedestal w.c. pan with vitreous china
flushing cistern conforming to the standards and regulations stipulated by the PUB. The plastic
seat and cover with buffers hinging devices shall comply with SS 16:1985, except that plastic
material shall not be used for hinging devices. The minimum thickness shall be 4.7mm for the seat
and 6mm for the cover respectively.

(b)

Squatting WC Pans
All squatting WC pans shall be as specified in Clause 37.16 "Low Capacity WC Squatting Pans". In
addition, provide a self closing delayed action tap (the flow rate and timing shall not be more than 8
litres per minute and 3 seconds respectively) in the innermost wall of one of the squatting water
closet compartment.

(c)

Urinal Bowls
Urinal bowls shall be approved vitreous china with stainless steel pipes, necessary fittings and
accessories.
High level flushing cisterns shall be vitreous china and shall comply with the standards and
regulations stipulated by the PUB.
Provide urinal trap to serve a maximum four bowl urinals and fix at least one flushing cistern for
four bowl urinals in series.

40.1.2.2

Water Installation
All water installation shall be as specified in Section 38 "Water Installation" including all clauses and
subclauses under it. All internal services/distribution pipes and fittings shall be stainless steel complying
with BS 4127:Part 2:1972 and fitting complying with BS 864:Part 2:1983.

40.1.3

Public Toilets

40.1.3.1

Sanitary Installation
The requirement shall be the same as those specified in Section 37 "Sanitary Installation" including all
clauses and subclauses under it, and shall comply with the "Code of Practice on Sanitary Facilities and
Fittings for Public Toilets", standards and regulations stipulated by the PUB. The Contractor shall submit
samples for approval before commencement of work.
(a)

Pedestal WC Pans
Provide and install approved white vitreous china washdown pedestal wc pan with sensor operated
flush valve. The rigid (heavy duty) plastic seat and cover with buffers and hinging devices shall
comply with SS 16:1985. Plastic material shall not be used for the hinging devices.

BLDG04/S40.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 40-3
40.1.3

Public Toilets (Cont'd)

40.1.3.1

Sanitary Installation (Cont'd)

(b)

Squatting WC Pans
The squatting wc pans shall be of vitreous china complying with SS 378 as specified in Clause
37.16 "Low Capacity WC Squatting Pans" with sensor operated flush valves. Provide squatting
water closet, pans with raised foot rests.
When it is technically not feasible to use flush valves, use white vitreous china flushing cistern with
stainless steel pull chain. The flush pipe shall be made of stainless steel. A self closing delayed
action tap shall be provided in the inner most wall of at least one of the squatting wc pans
compartment.

(c)

Urinal Bowls
Urinal bowls shall be approved vitreous china with sensor operated flush valve, stainless steel
pipes and fittings and accessories.

(d)

Washhand Basins
The single supported approved basin shall be 620mm in length and 445mm in width. The approved
vanity basin shall be 548mm in length and 396mm in width. Taps to all public washhand basins
shall be of 15mm diameter chrome plated brass self closing delay action water saving spring tap
complying with BS 5412 and standards and regulations stipulated by the PUB. The flow rate and
the timing shall not be more than 8 litres per minute and 3 seconds respectively.

(e)

Soap Dispenser
Provide and install stainless steel (Grade 304) soap dispenser to every two washhand basin
subject to a minimum of one soap dispenser. The sample shall be approved by the SO Rep before
the installation. The capacity of soap dispenser shall be one litre minimum.

(f)

Litter Bin
Supply one litter bin to each toilet. The bin shall be 230mm diameter (minimum) and 600mm high
approved Grade 304 stainless steel bin.

(g)

Toilet Paper Holder

Provide and install semi-recessed 150mm x 150mm approved vitreous china toilet paper holder to
each wc. The position shall be determined by the SO Rep.

(h)

Automatic Hand-Dryer Blower

Provide and install an approved automatic hand dryer complete with electrical installation to each
toilet.

40.1.3.2

Water Installation
(a)

Service/Distribution Pipes And Fittings

All internal service/distribution pipes shall be stainless steel pipes approved by Water Department,
PUB and to the requirements of BS 4127:Part 2. The fittings shall be of capillary or compression
fittings of copper alloy and shall comply with BS EN 1254 Part 2:1998 and PUB requirements.
All concealed pipes shall be copper pipes complying with BS EN 1057:1996.

BLDG04/S40.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 40-4
40.1.3

Public Toilets (Cont'd)

40.1.3.2

Water Installation (Cont'd)

(b)

Flush Valves to Public Toilets

Unless otherwise stated, provide and install ENV approved sensor operated flush valves (battery
operated) to all water closets and urinals as shown in the Drawings, all in accordance with the
"Guidelines on Flush Valves" issued by Sewerage Department, ENV, "Code of Practice on Sanitary
Facilities and Fittings for Public Toilets" and "Code of Practice for Water Services". Submit
application and obtain approval from the relevant authorities prior to the installation of the flush
valves.
The flush valve shall be able to operate without sticking, whistling or causing water hammer.
For sensor operated flush valves (battery operated), if required by PUB, engage a licensed
electrical worker to ensure that the installation of sensor/electronic sensor unit complies with SS
CP5 "Wiring of Electrical Equipments of Building" and other relevant regulations or code of
practice.
Each sensor unit shall only operate one flushing unit for a sanitary appliance. The sensor unit when
installed shall not be affected by the operation of adjacent sensor units.
The sensor unit's stable sensing area shall be adjusted for an activating distance that is as follows:
(a)
(b)

600mm for a urinal; and

900mm for a water closet

Flush valves for water closets shall incorporate approved check valves that comply with BS 5154
and approved vacuum breakers that comply with American Society of Sanitary Engineering
Standard No. 1001.
Every flush valve shall be controlled by an approved stopvalve to SS 75 unless it is provided with
an integral shut-off device.
All flush valves shall be so adjusted as to give a flush of not less than 2.5 litres and not more than
4.5 litres of water per stall of bowl urinal or not less than 8 litres and not more than 9 litres of water
for water closets.
Vacuum breaker of the flush valve shall be installed at least 1m above the floor level for squatting
wc pan and at least 300mm above the rim of other types of water closet.
The water supply pipes shall be sized to give a minimum dynamic pressure of 1.0 bar (or higher
depending on the make of flush valve and type of sanitary appliance) at the inlet end of the flush
valve.
Flush valves shall not be directly connected to the service pipes at a height exceeding 112m
reduced level (R.L.). The Licensed Plumber shall check and ensure there is sufficient head and
low rate for effective operation of the flush valves.
The minimum internal diameter of the flush pipe for water closet shall be 25mm.
The concealed (battery operated) sensor-operated flush valves shall be recessed into the wall if the
water service pipes are concealed.
40.1.3.3

Stainless Steel Pipe Rail (For Handicap)

Provide and install stainless steel pipe rail for handicap in public toilets in accordance with the "Code on
Barrier-free Accessibility in Buildings, 1990" and as shown in the Drawings.
The grade of the stainless steel shall be Grade 304, and the internal diameter shall be as shown in the
Drawings. The end of pipe shall be split to form fishtail and fixed into the wall and complete with the same
grade of stainless steel capping all as shown in the Drawings. The fixing of pipe rail shall be rigid and
secure tightly into the walls.

BLDG04/S40.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 40-5
40.2

MARKET FACILITIES
Market facilities shall include supermarkets, mini-supermarkets, market produce lock-up shops etc. The
requirements for Staff Toilets and Public Toilets shall be the same as those specified in Clause 40.1
"Eating Establishment" including all subclauses under it.

40.3

RETAIL AND SERVICES FACILITIES

Retail and services facilities shall include shoplets, precinct shops, shops, departmental stores,
institutions/schools, Branch Office, Town Council Office and commercial complex. The requirements for
Staff/Non-Public Toilets and Public Toilets shall be the same as those specified in Clause 40.1 "Eating
Establishment" including all subclauses under it.

40.4

MIRRORS
Provide and fix 600mm x 600mm (minimum) x 6mm thick approved coppered back mirror in front of each
wash hand basin or as shown. Mirrors shall be fixed on timber ground with chrome plated round head
screw with capping.

40.5

WASHING TAPS FOR WASH AREAS/BIN CENTRES

15mm diameter chrome plated brass bib taps and handles to BS 5412 with tread to fit rubber hose for
washing shall be provided to locations as shown. Locking device shall be provided as shown in the
Drawings.

40.6

BIB TAP TO BATH/WC IN SHOP'S LIVING QUARTERS

Provide and fix 15mm diameter chrome plated brass bib tap to BS 5412 with UPVC tee and cap
complying with SS 174 all as shown in the Drawings.

40.7

TAP FOR PUBLIC SHOWER

Taps to all the public showers shall be self-closing delayed action shower tap. The flow rate and timing
shall not be more than 8 litres per minute and 15 seconds respectively.

Total pages for this Section

Section 41/.....

BLDG04/S40.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 41-1
SECTION 41
MISCELLANEOUS (SANITARY & WATER INSTALLATION)

41.1

WATER SAVING TAPS FOR PUBLIC WASH HAND BASINS AND SHOWERS

41.1.1

Water Saving Taps For Public Wash Hand Basins

Taps to all wash hand basins in staff and public toilets, in swimming complex, sports complex, indoor
stadium, training stadium, training hall, bus interchange etc shall be 15mm diameter chrome plated brass
self-closing delay-action taps complying with the standards and regulations stipulated by the PUB. The
flow rate and the timing shall not be more than 8 litres per minute and 3 seconds respectively.

41.1.2

Water Saving Tap For Public Showers

Taps to all the public showers and showers in swimming complex, sports complex, indoor stadium,
training hall etc shall be of self-closing delayed action shower taps complying with the standards and
regulations stipulated by the PUB. The flow rate and the timing shall not be more than 8 litres per minutes
and 15 seconds respectively.

41.2

FLUSH VALVES
Unless otherwise stated, provide and install sensor operated flush valves (battery operated) to all public
toilets (water closets and urinals only) as shown in the Drawings, all in accordance with the "Guidelines on
Flush Valves" issued by Sewerage Department, PUB, "Code of Practice on Sanitary, Facilities and Fittings
for Public Toilet" and "Code of Practice for Water Services". Submit application and obtain approval from
the relevant authorities prior to installation of the flush valves.

41.3

SOAP TRAYS
Soap trays shall be recessed white vitreous china 150mm x 150mm "Twyfords 3008" or other approved
type, one to each shower compartment. Position of soap trays shall be determined by SO Rep.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 42/.....
BLDG04/S41.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 42-1
SECTION 42
TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM AND
TELEMONITORING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

42.1

SCOPE OF WORK

42.1.1

Water Transfer Pumping Plants

The Works shall include the provision, installation and testing of transfer pumping system, based on the
data given, complete with motors, pipework, valves, switch gears, electrical wiring, control panel and
connections and all necessary accessories.
Details of proposed transfer pumping system shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. All Works
shall comply with the requirements and regulations of the Water Department, PUB and other relevant
Authorities and Standards.

42.1.2

Telemonitoring System
The Works shall include the installation of telemonitoring system as specified in Clause 42.27
"Telemonitoring System For Transfer Pumping System" including all subclauses under it.

42.2

42.3

PUMPROOM - GENERAL
(a)

Water supply mains shall be brought into the building at the positions shown.

(b)

A suction (low level) tank shall receive water from the water supply main through equilibrium ball
float valve. Suction pipes shall then be of individual feed to each pump-set. The pumps shall
deliver water through a vertical rising main direct to the storage (high level) tank at the roof of the
building.

(c)

The pipework shall incorporate appropriate valves and fittings as specified.

(d)

Floatless level control electrodes in the suction (low level) and storage (high level) tanks shall be
arranged to start and stop the pumps on predetermined water levels in the tanks as specified.

(e)

Pumps (duty and standby) shall be operated by electric motors direct-coupled to them and started
by suitable starters in the control panel.

(f)

The whole assembly shall be laid out within the pump room to permit ready access to all
components: tanks, pipework, valves, pumps, motors, control panel, floatless level control
electrodes and wiring for purposes of maintenance and repair. The control panel and pump sets
shall be installed near to the entrance of pump room for this purpose.

APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS AND DETAILS OF

TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM
Submit one set of the following to the SO Rep for approval within two months from the date of the Letter of
Acceptance :
(a)

Detailed proposal shall be submitted in the format as produced in Appendix A22 duly filled and
signed by the Contractor.

(b)

Characteristic curves of every pump to indicate the points of performance.

BLDG04/S42.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 42-2
42.3

APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS AND DETAILS OF

TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM (CONT'D)
(c)

Three sets of fully dimensioned scaled drawings of every pump room to indicate :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)

Piping and pumpset layout in pump room

Position of control panel and floatless level control electrodes
PUB water incoming pipe
Rising main
Sizes of all fittings
Points and details of support for pipes, valves and fittings
Mounting of pumpsets

Submit to the SO Rep, fully dimensioned final drawings of the above within two weeks after the installation
is commissioned by the SO Rep.
42.4

DEVIATIONS FROM APPROVED DRAWINGS AND DETAILS

OF TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM
Works shall commence only after the approval of the proposal by the SO Rep. Seek fresh approval for
any deviation from the approved proposal, failing which the whole installation shall not be accepted by the
SO Rep. The written approval of the Drawings shall in no way vary or relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility or obligations should the Plant or any of its parts proved inadequate with regard to strength,
performance or efficiency.

42.5

BUILDING-IN
The Employer reserves the right to build in any steel supporting members or frameworks for the pumping
system. Supply all relevant dimensions and information on these pumping system and steel member
supports and attend to the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any error or damages found
subsequently.

42.6

PUMPS
All pumps shall be of horizontal spindle, single-stage, end suction centrifugal pumps or vertical multi-stage
centrifugal pumps with mechanical seals and high performance efficiency of not less than 55%, driven by
electric motors through suitably guarded flexible couplings. The whole unit shall be mounted on a
common steel base and secured with galvanised steel plain washers, spring washers and double lock
nuts. The pumpset foundation shall be properly grouted on complete installation. Galvanised steel bolts
and nuts shall be used for mounting the pumpset.
The casing of the end suction centrifugal pump shall be of hard, close-grained cast iron or other approved
metal. The casing of the vertical multi-stage centrifugal pump shall be of stainless steel, bronze or other
approved metal. All internal surfaces of the pump (cast iron type) that come into contact with water shall
be coated (fusion bonded) with an approved layer of non-toxic epoxy complying with SS 375:2001.The
impeller shall be of bronze or stainless steel and the shaft shall be of stainless steel and able to transmit
the required power and to ensure the rigidity of rotating parts. The entire length of the shaft shall be
suitably protected against corrosion and be supported by heavy duty bearings in robust housing well clear
of the rotating parts.
Bearings shall be protected against corrosion and be efficiently lubricated.
The pump shall be of the approved type and able to deliver the required capacity of water based on the
data given in Appendix A22.

BLDG04/S42.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 42-3
42.7

DUCTILE IRON PIPES, FITTINGS AND SPECIAL CASTINGS

All pipes and pipe fittings shall be approved by Water Department, PUB.
All pipes, fittings and special castings in the pump room and to the roof tanks shall be ductile iron
complying with BS EN 545. Ductile iron flanges type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545.
All pipes and fittings shall be internally cement mortar lined in accordance with the relevant clauses in BS
EN 545. The mixture shall be tested according to the relevant clauses in BS EN 545.
Pipe joints and fittings along any section shall be of the flanged type, the thickness and drilling of which
shall comply with BS EN 545 type PN 16. Thickness of sealing compound between the flanged ends shall
be at least 2mm. Galvanised steel bolts, washers and nuts shall be used for the installation.
Ductile iron pipes, socket and spigot type complying with BS EN 545 is permissible only for vertical riser
except that the joint immediately above roof shall be of flanged joint. All vertical risers shall run inside the
buildings along the staircase landing where possible.
All pipes which pass through walls or floors shall be insulated by cork and sealed on the outer 12mm with
approved compound. All pipes which do not pass through the wall or floor but running along the wall shall
be supported with built in clips spaced at maximum 2.7m centres.
Unless otherwise specified, sizes of pipework shall be as follows :
Size of Delivery Piping
100mm

42.8

Size of Suction Piping

80mm

VALVES
An approved 100mm full bore float operated valve shall be fitted directly to the incoming connecting pipe
at the suction tank. It shall be able to operate on a water pressure in the incoming water supply pipe of
not less than 14 bar and shall comply with BS 1212. The dimensions and the flange thickness shall
comply with BS 4504. The pilot mechanism of the float operated valve shall be fully covered with acrylic
material to prevent mosquito breeding.
An approved 100mm globe valve shall be installed before the 100mm full bore float operated valve and at
the vertical run of the incoming pipe inside the pump room. Globe valve shall be of the type complying
with BS 1010. The valve seat shall be of rubber bonded. The internal surface of the valve body shall be
coated with approved material.
Gate valves and check valves shall be of the approved type used in high quality water works practice and
shall comply with BS 5163 and BS 5153 respectively.
The wedge of the gate valves used shall be of rubber bonded gate. The internal surface of valve body
shall be coated with approved material. The spindle of the gate valves shall be stainless steel or high
tensile brass or aluminium bronze or other approved.
Gate valves shall have the directional arrow and the words "open" and "shut" cast on and shall be installed
near the inlets and outlets of each suction low level tank and storage high level tank.
The suction pipe of each pump shall be fitted with an 80mm gate valve followed by an 80mm rubber
expansion joint. The delivery pipe shall be fitted with an 80mm rubber expansion joint, a 80mm spring
loaded check valve and an 80mm gate valve. The check valve and gate valve shall be separated by a
short pipe of 200mm in length. An 80mm to 100mm enlarger shall be provided between the 80mm pipe
and 100mm rising main. An approved 100mm non-slam type check valve shall be fitted along the rising
main in the pumproom followed by a 100mm gate valve. This check valve shall also be separated from
the gate valve by a short pipe of 300mm in length.
All 80mm and 100mm check valves shall be of approved non-slam silent spring loaded type (with stainless
steel spring).

BLDG04/S42.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 42-4
42.9

HIGH PRESSURE AND EXPANSION CONNECTION

80mm rubber expansion joint of approved type shall be used to connect the outlet of the pump and the
delivery pipe and shall be flanged at both ends and be able to sustain a working pressure of not less than
16 bar. The rubber expansion joint shall be limited from expanding excessively in axial direction. The
delivery pipe shall be supported by at least 2 no. of 50mm galvanised mild steel pipe and be properly
secured to the floor or wall for this purpose.
An 80mm rubber expansion joint shall be used to connect the suction pipe and the discharge pipe of each
pump.

42.10

BENDS
All bends used in the pipework shall be of 90 degree long bend flanged at both ends and shall be cement
mortar lined internally in accordance with BS EN 545.

42.11

RESERVED

42.12

FLOAT OPERATED VALVE

Position a 100mm float operated valve as indicated in the Drawings to allow full flow of water from PUB
main.

42.13

POWER SUPPLY
Power supply available for electric motors shall be 400 volts, 3 phase 50 cycles alternating current.

42.14

MOTORS
High efficiency electric motors of approved type shall be squirrel-cage, totally enclosed fan cooled type
with minimum Class F insulation except where specified otherwise and be designed for continuous
maximum rating.
Terminal boxes shall be totally enclosed, of water-tight design and fitted with cable glands.

42.15

MOTOR STARTERS
The starters shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before its installation. The starters shall
provide means of starting or stopping the motors by push-buttons or be automatically activated by the
control electrodes in the suction (low level) and storage (high level) tanks.
The starters shall be wired in such a way that the duty pumpset shall be activated by normal level floatless
control relay unit and the standby pumpset shall be activated by alarm and emergency level floatless
control relay unit. The selection of duty or standby pumpsets shall be determined by a manual selector
switch. Automatic duty change over relay shall also be provided to alternate standby and duty pumpsets
automatically and shall be interconnected to a time setting device to cut off the operation of the pumpset
during night time.

BLDG04/S42.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 42-5
42.15

MOTOR STARTERS (CONT'D)

(a)

Star-Delta Starter (For building blocks below 25-storey)

For building blocks below 25-storey, the starters for motors shall be star-delta starters, capable of
limiting current to 2 times the full load current at (a) standstill (starting up the Plant) and at (b)
changeover (when the starter automatically changes the connections from Star to Delta winding).
Each starter shall have time relay, overload release, no volt release pilot lamp. The operating
voltage of the control coil shall be 230V.
The starting apparatus shall be of "frequent duty" rating and be capable of starting under the above
conditions intermittently up to 40 times per hour at not less than 20 seconds intervals. It shall be
so designed such that under 16 operation hours per day, the Mechanical and Electrical Endurance
is not less than 50,000 operations. A manufacture's certificate to this effect shall be produced
when required.

(b)

Soft Starters (For building blocks with 25-storey & above)

For building blocks 25-storey and above, the soft starters shall be designed to operate at 3-phase
400V 50 Hz and shall be suitable for starting/stopping 3-phase induction motor used for water
pumping system. The soft starters shall provide soft acceleration during the starting of motor and
soft deceleration during the stopping of motor. It shall be able to reset by itself automatically when
power supply is resumed after power failure. Built-in fault indication lights shall also be
incorporated in the soft starters to indicate the fault conditions
The approved soft starters shall consist of three pairs of thyristors with full wave control and shall
be designed for continuous operation above 40C. The soft starters shall also be sized according
to the full load current of the motor and shall comply to IEC 947-4-2 or equivalent as approved.

42.16

TIME SWITCH
Connect digital time switch of approved type within the electric circuit, wired to control the pumping hours
within the preset time. The time switch shall be able to operate on a 24 hour basis with a minimum of 150
hours reserve to cater for temporary power failure.

42.17

FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNITS

Floatless level control electrodes mounted on the suction (low level) and storage (high level) tanks in each
building shall be connected directly to the relay units mounted on the wall beside the tanks. These
floatless level control electrodes shall be positioned near to the manhole of the tank and be easily
accessible for maintenance.
The floatless level control electrodes shall be installed on the storage tanks operating at Normal Demand
Settings. The floatless level control electrodes shall be arranged to start and stop the pumpset at
predetermined high and low levels. A floatless level control relay unit mounted on the wall beside the
suction tank shall be used to provide over-riding control of the storage tank floatless level control relay
units such that at a preset low water level in the suction tank, the storage tank floatless level control relay
units will not start the pump.
The floatless level control relay units shall be interconnected to the motor starters through the pumps'
automatic change over relay. Separate floatless level control relay unit shall be installed for the alarm
system and shall be set to activate the alarm device and standby pumpset when the water falls below a
predetermined level. The floatless level control relay unit shall also activate the alarm device and
deactivate the duty pumpset when the water rises to a predetermined overflow level.
The floatless level control relay unit shall be of the plug-in relay unit type for easy maintenance. The unit
shall have built-in arrester circuit to protect against surge from power source and lightning surge from the
electrodes.

BLDG04/S42.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 42-6
42.17

FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNITS (CONT'D)

Electrodes shall be stainless steel and be provided with adequate electrode separators. The ceiling roses
and flexible cables from the electrode holders shall be legibly marked "NL" and "EA" respectively.
Electrode holders mounted on tanks shall be easily accessible and removable for easy maintenance.
Run the wiring and conduits from the electrodes to the floatless level control relay units and keep them as
short as possible. The wiring to the electrodes shall not run through the same conduit as the power
supply wiring.
Provide wiring and conduits from the switchboard inside the pump-room to each of these floatless control
relay units.
All floatless control relay units shall be of the approved type.

42.18

NUMBER OF FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNITS

Provide a total of three number of floatless level control relay units. Where storage tanks are divided into
two or more separate tanks, at least two separate tanks shall be installed with floatless level control
electrodes.

42.18.1

Floatless Level Control Relay Unit No. 1 (At Storage Tank Room)
Two sets of electrodes for the normal level setting shall be connected so as to activate the starters
independently and to activate the alarm and deactivate the duty pumpset when the water rises to a
predetermined overflow level. The operating points of both sets of floatless level control electrodes shall
be of the same setting.

42.18.2

Floatless Level Control Relay Unit No. 2 (At Storage Tank Room)
Provide two sets of alarm and emergency electrodes to activate the alarm and standby pumpsets in case
the water level falls below a predetermined level.

42.18.3

Floatless Level Control Relay Unit No. 3 (At Pumproom)

Provide one set of electrodes for the suction tank to actuate a warning indicating light and override the
operation of pumpsets when the water level in the suction tank (low level tank) falls below a predetermined
level. Provide one set of electrodes to activate a warning indicating light and alarm when the level in the
suction tank rises to a predetermined overflow level.

42.19

CONTROL PANEL
Provide and install an approved control panel required to serve the pumproom as shown in the Drawings.
Sufficient wall space shall be selected within the pumproom for the wall mounted control panel and it shall
be near to the entrance of the pumproom.
Unless otherwise specified, the panel shall be of the front connected type and manufactured from electrogalvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5mm thickness, using folded section or angle form bracing for
rigidity of construction. The panel shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof. The
construction shall be such that it allows for ready access to the interior of the cubicles for operation and
maintenance purposes.

BLDG04/S42.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 42-7
42.19

CONTROL PANEL (CONT'D)

Provide control panel with rubber bushes at knockout holes for the entry of all incoming and outgoing
cables.
Mount instrument indicating lights, rotary switches, etc. directly on the front panel with locknuts to hold
such items firmly in position under all conditions of operation.
The control panel shall contain the following :
(a)

1 No. ON/OFF control switch.

(b)

1 No. Automatic/off/Manual Selector rotary switch for Auto and Manual operation as described in
Clause 42.15 "Motor Starters".

(c)

2 No. Starters as described in Clause 42.15 "Motor Starters".

(d)

2 Sets ON/OFF isolators with 3 phase MCB unit for each starter.

(e)

2 Sets Manual "START"/"STOP" button switch for the starter with pilot lamps indicating "run" and
"trip" as described in Clause 42.15 "Motor Starters".

(f)

1 No. Pump selector switch as described in Clause 42.17 "Floatless Level Control Relay Units".

(g)

1 No. Digital Time switch as described in Clause 42.16 "Time Switch".

(h)

1 No. Relay for reset of 'alarm bell' and 'light'.

(i)

1 No. Relay to cut off the warning device and pumpsets during night time.

(j)

1 No. Relay to activate overflow warning device.

(k)

2 No. Relays to activate alarm bell for motor overload trip.

(l)

3 No. Relay to control the pumpsets.

(m)

3 No. Relays for testing of alarm bell and indicating panel lights.

(n)

1 No. Automatic change over relay.

(o)

1 No. Suction tank low level warning indicating panel light.

(p)

3 No. Alarm indicating panel light.

(q)

6 No. MCB (4A) units for control circuits.

(r)

3 No. Phase indicating panel light with MCB (2A) unit.

(s)

1 No. MCB (4A) unit for alarm circuit.

(t)

2 No. Hour-run counters for pumpsets.

(u)

1 No. Ammeter with appropriate scale and current transformer (C/T) if required.

(v)

1 No. Phase Selector Switch for Ammeter.

(w)

1 No. Test push button for alarm bell and indicating panel lights.

The whole of the electrical Works shall comply with PUB Regulations and be subject to the approval of the
SO Rep.

BLDG04/S42.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 42-8
42.20

ELECTRICAL WIRING
Install the cables from the electrical mains isolator in the pumproom.
Internal cables and wiring within the pumproom shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 suitable for a 400V 3
Phase 50 cycles 4 wire system and they shall be carried in conduit or cable trunking.
The metal conduit shall be of heavy gauge, galvanised steel conduit (Class 4), complying with BS 4568,
free from internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of
spacer bar saddles at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs.
Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of a screwed socket and smooth bore bush butt to
adaptor boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist of a flanged coupling,
lead washer and smooth bore bush. Where the conduit is in contact with any structural steel work an
efficient and permanent metallic connection shall be made between the conduit and the steelwork. All
conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and shall be efficiently
earthed with copper earthwire (in conduits and 100mm x 50mm trunking) and copper tape (in 150mm x
75mm trunking). Copper earth wire or tape shall be of the appropriate sizes.
Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and shall be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel sheets, in 1.83m
or 2.44m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on one end of each length. The
trunking shall be treated with approved anti-corrosion paint and finishing paint to a minimum thickness of
45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be effected by means of round headed bolts and nuts. 4mm x 20mm
copper earth tape shall be laid in the trunking run. The copper shall be tinned where it is bolted down.
The entire trunking and conduit installation shall be completed before the cables are drawn. The number
of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed those set out in the relevant table in the PSB
Code of Practice CP 5.
Run conduits for the floatless level control relay unit wiring inside the building and along the staircase
landing. Provide an inspection joint for every 10 metres run of conduit. Where exposed to rain, the
inspection boxes, elbows and tees shall be sealed. Provide concrete stumps of 50mm diameter and
100mm high to encase the conduits at every floor level.
All seals shall be tested not less than 24 hours after completion. This test shall be made with insulation
testing equipment of the "Megger" type at 500V and an infinity reading shall be obtained before the
conductors are connected to any apparatus.
Where wiring are to be in conduit or duct buried in the floor, it shall terminate in approved junction boxes
adjacent to the machine or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible conduit enclosing the cables between
motors and junction boxes.
All non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment shall be effectively earthed. Earth continuity
conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5.

42.21

ALARM AND EMERGENCY DEVICE

Alarm device shall be turned on by the alarm and emergency level control relay units at the storage (high
level) tank and the level control relay unit at the suction (low level) tank. This alarm device shall be in the
form of an alarm bell placed beside the control panel in the pumproom and a red bulb placed outside the
pumproom and near the entrance. The bell shall be weather-proof and of heavy duty type. The make and
model shall be approved by the SO Rep.
The alarm bell shall be cut off during night time by the time switch so that only the emergency start
warning light on the switchboard panel shall function at night when the water level falls below the
'emergency level'. Provide a re-set button for the alarm and the warning device.
The location of the warning device shall be approved by the SO Rep. Provide a shield if the SO Rep
deemed necessary all at the Contractor's cost and expense. The design of the shield shall be approved by
the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S42.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 42-9
42.22

INSTALLATION OF PUMP SETS

The water pumpsets shall be properly installed onto the concrete foundation. The 16 mm high tensile
steel foundation bolts shall be cast into the concrete to a minimum depth of :
(a)
(b)

100 mm for motor up to 7.5 KW

150 mm for motor above 7.5 KW

The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the pumpsets are installed according to standard
procedure of installation or according to the pump supplier's recommendation subject to approval by the
SO Rep. The pumpset nearest to the pump room door shall be legibly marked with permanent lettering
and numbering of "P1" and the other "P2", or as directed by the SO Rep.
The pumpsets shall be isolated from the foundation by anti-vibration mounting between the base plate and
the foundation. Provide mechanical insulators to isolate the pumpset from the floor if the vibration is still
substantial. All pumpsets shall be properly aligned and levelled.
The pumpsets shall be isolated from the suction and delivery pipes by rubber expansion joints as specified
in Clause 42.9 "High Pressure And Expansion Connection". The outlet of the suction pipe shall be set in
line with the inlet of the pump and the inlet of the delivery pipes in line with the outlet of the pump. The
delivery pipes shall be properly supported and secured by rigid steel supports.
Check the location of the switch board. Should this location be not at an optimum position, inform the SO
Rep immediately.
All bolts, nuts and washers used for mounting the pumpsets shall be of galvanised steel.
42.23

VIBRATION AND NOISE

The vibration and noise generated by pumpsets shall not be unduly disturbing to dwellers in the adjacent
flats.
Provide and fix all necessary noise and vibration abatement devices and equipments to reduce vibration
and sound.

42.24

INSPECTION DURING PROGRESS OF WORK

Provide all necessary facilities such as torch lights etc and access leading to the tanks for inspections by
the SO Rep during progress of the Works.

42.25

STERILISATION OF PIPES, FITTINGS AND PUMPS BEFORE OPERATION

Clean and flush all pipes, fittings and pumps internally with sufficient chemical to give the water a dose of
50 parts of chlorine to one million part of water (ie. 50 ppm) before the commencement of the operation of
the system, in accordance with PUB requirement.

42.26

TESTING OF TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

One month before the completion of the installation, arrange with the SO Rep for the testing of
performance and installation of the transfer pumping system.
Furnish the data on transfer pumping system as produced in Appendix A23 and submit 2 copies to the SO
Rep one week before the testing of the transfer pumping system.
All Defect notified during the inspection shall be rectified before the building blocks are handed over to the
Employer, failing which appropriate action shall be taken against the Contractor by the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S42.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 42-10
42.27

TELEMONITORING SYSTEM FOR TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM

42.27.1

Scope Of Work
The installation of the telemonitoring system shall involve the production and installation of the
telemonitoring control panel in the transfer-pump room at the ground level and the laying of electrical
cables and conduits to the lift telemonitoring system in the lift room A at the roof-top. Should there be a
second transfer-pump room in the apartment block, provide and install a separate telemonitoring control
panel in the second pump room and lay separate electrical cables and conduits to the lift telemonitoring
system in the lift room B at the roof-top.
The Works shall also include the modifications to the control panel(s) of the transfer pumps and the
necessary connections between relevant control panels.

42.27.2

Circuit
The circuitry shall be as shown in the Drawings.
(A)

Inputs
The fault signals to be monitored shall be input from the control panel of the transfer pumps.
The following inputs are based on negative logic, directly controlling the corresponding source light
emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as "LED" for the purposes of this Clause including all subclauses under it).
Terminal
Nil
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

Function
System Power on Battery
Control Supply Power Failure
Red Phase Power Failure
Yellow Phase Power Failure
Blue Phase Power Failure
Spare
Emergency and Alarm Start
Pump No. 1 Trip
Pump No. 2 Trip
Roof Tank Overflow
Repair Technician's Key Switch On
Spare

The following inputs have their related source LED controlled by the processor.
Terminal
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

BLDG04/S42.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Function
Suction Tank Overflow
Suction Tank Low Level
Duty Pump Failure
Time Switch Control
Starter 1
Starter 2
Spare
Spare

Bldg Spec
Page 42-11
42.27.2

Circuit (Cont'd)
(B)

Outputs
The various fault conditions are to be grouped into 7 levels as follows :
Source
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
-

Condition
System Power on Battery
Control Supply Power Failure
Red Phase Power Failure
Yellow Phase Power Failure
Blue Phase Power Failure
Spare
Emergency and Alarm Start
Pump No. 1 Trip
Pump No. 2 Trip
Roof Tank Overflow
Repair Technician's Key Switch On
Spare
Suction Tank Overflow
Suction Tank Low Level
Duty Pump Failure
Spare
Total Failure

Level
5
5
5
5
5
0
6
4
4
3
0
0
1
2
4
0
7

The circuit shall generate three signals indicating the fault level from 0 to 7 in the form of a 3-bit
binary code; fault level 7 has the highest priority and fault level 0 is the no-fault condition. Fault
level indication is based on the source (not memory) fault condition being on. If more than one
fault condition is present, the highest fault level shall be indicated. Whenever the fault level
changes, fault level 0 (no fault) shall be indicated for 30 secs before the new fault level is indicated.
These three signals shall drive three relays, R1, R2, and R3 in the lift motor room as well as three
LED in the control panel.
When the repair technician's key switch is on, the corresponding LED, which is directly controlled
by the processor, should be on. This signal shall drive a separate relay R4 in the lift motor room.
The circuit shall function such that when there is no fault all the relays R1, R2, R3 and R4 are
energized. Therefore, a by-pass or override switch shall be provided to keep the four relays
energized when the telemonitoring system is to be isolated for maintenance.
42.27.3

The Control Panel

Based on the circuit described above, the telemonitoring system control panel shall consist of the following
:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Battery Compartment and Battery

Logic Board
Indicator Board
Power Supply Section

and are to be laid out in a cabinet as shown in the Drawings.

All items shall be properly secured to the cabinet with means that allow ease of detachment if necessary.
The cabinet is to be manufactured from electro-galvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5mm thickness,
using folded section or angle form bracing for rigidity of construction. It is to provide IP33 protection,
according to BS 5490, whilst allowing for sufficient ventilation. The design and construction must give easy
access to all parts of the control panel so as to minimize any hindrance to maintenance work. The
indicator board shall be mounted such that there is a clear view of the LED and the labels when the
cabinet is closed.

BLDG04/S42.DOC(11)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 42-12
42.27.3

The Control Panel (Cont'd)

The entire door arrangement is to be neat and have the following features :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

a perspex window for viewing the status of the monitored faults;

a key lock to secure the control panel;
a key switch to register the arrival time of the repair technician;
an indicating light for the supply power on, and
an indicating LED for the override switch on.

Sufficient wall space shall be selected within the pumproom for the wall mounted control panel and it shall
be near to the transfer pump control panel.
42.27.4

Battery
The back-up battery shall be of the sealed lead-acid types and shall provide back-up power supply for at
least 12 hours.

42.27.5

Printed Circuit Board

The layout for the printed circuit boards (hereinafter referred to as "PCB" for the purpose of this clause
including sub-clauses under it) shall be as shown in the Drawings. All items used shall be PCB mounted.
All connections made between the boards and power supply shall be of the plugged-in type.
(a)

The Logic Board

The logic board shall contain the plug-in connections for all incoming lines from the control panel of
the transfer pump system and outgoing lines to the lift room. There shall be as much separation as
possible between the high and low voltage lines in the PCB. The board shall contain a Motorola
MC68705P3 microprocessor or other approved.
The pin usage of the microprocessor is as follows :
Port A

Port A is used as the input/output data bus. All 8 lines are connected to the
3 input buffers (74LS244) and the 3 output latches (74LS373).

Port B

Port B is used as the outputs and chip select lines.

Pin

Function

0
1
2
3
4

Memory Error (0 = on)

Flash Output (square wave of 2 Hz)
Chip select for Memory LED 9 to 16
Chip select for Memory LED 1 to 8
Chip select for Fault Level LED, Presence of
Repair Technician and Source LED 13 to 16
Chip select for Inputs 1 to 8
Chip select for Inputs 9 to 12 and Timer DIP Switches
Chip select for Inputs 13 to 20

5
6
7

*Chip Select for Inputs = 0 (1 = Hi-Z)

*Chip Select for Outputs = 1 (0 = latched)

BLDG04/S42.DOC(12)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 42-13
42.27.5

Printed Circuit Board (Cont'd)

(a)

The Logic Board (Cont'd)

Port C

: Port C is used for miscellaneous function.

Pin

Function

0
1
2
3

INPUT : Lamp Test (0 = on)

INPUT : Clear Memory (0 = on)
OUTPUT : Unused
OUTPUT : A square wave of 4 Hz is generated to hold a watchdog
timer in a triggered but not time-out state. The timer is used to reset
the processor should it ever hang. This square-wave output shall be
generated only if the processor is executing the program correctly.
Once the processor hangs, this output shall stop, causing the
watchdog to reset the processor upon time-out. The resetting process
shall not cause any alteration of memory data already present.

In order to prevent corrupted memory data from being taken as correct, a suitable means shall be
employed to constantly verify the data in memory and to turn on the "MEMORY ERROR" LED once
the data is found to be invalid. A suitable means shall also be employed to ensure that the input
data read is valid, thus preventing any spuring data from being used.
On the logic board, two push buttons, "CLEAR" and "LAMP TEST", shall be provided. The "LAMP
TEST" pushbutton shall cause all processor-controlled LED to turn on when pressed. Normal
indication shall resume when the button is released. When the "CLEAR" pushbutton is pressed
momentarily, all timers above 5-sec duration are caused to time-out. This is to assist in testing and
trouble-shooting. When the "CLEAR" pushbutton is held down for 2 secs, all the "Memory" fault
conditions are cleared, including the "MEMORY ERROR" condition.
(b)

The Indicator Board

There shall be a green LED, indicating "SYSTEM POWER ON" which is to be directly controlled by
the 5-V DC power supply, three yellow LED, indicating the binary "FAULT LEVEL CODE", a green
LED, indicating the "PRESENCE OF REPAIR TECHNICIAN", and a red LED, indicating
"MEMORY ERROR".
There shall also be two red LED for each fault. One of them shall be controlled directly or indirectly
by the source and the other solely by the processor. Both LED shall be energized on the
occurrence of their corresponding fault. However, once the fault has been rectified, the source
LED shall be de-energized whilst the processor-controlled LED shall remain energized until the
memory is cleared manually.
"SUCTION TANK OVERFLOW" indication must be delayed for 2 seconds. This is to prevent false
and/or intermittent indication.
"SUCTION TANK LOW LEVEL" indication shall be delayed for the number of minutes set by the
"TIMER" DIP switches. The range of this 4-bit timer shall be 0 to 15 minutes.
"DUTY PUMP FAILURE" indication shall be on only when the logic condition (Duty Pump Failure
Input AND Time Switch Control AND NOT Suction Tank Low Level AND NOT Starter 1 AND NOT
Starter 2) is positive. The Suction Tank Low Level condition shall be taken after the preset delay.
If no other fault condition is present, the "EMERGENCY AND ALARM START" condition shall be
reset when the repair technician is present and for 1 hour after his departure regardless of its input
status. Should another fault come on the indication shall revert to normal. This forced reset shall
be cancelled 1 hour after the technician's departure.
Clear labelling of the faults for each LED shall also be provided on the board.

BLDG04/S42.DOC(13)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 42-14
42.27.6

Power Supply Section

This shall include all items necessary to provide a safe, uninterrupted power supply to the telemonitoring
system and for charging the back-up battery.

42.27.7

Electrical Wiring
The power supply to the system shall be from the blue phase of the transfer pump system after the
isolator.
Cables and electrical wiring carrying 230V shall be of 1.5 mm2 nominal cross-sectional area and PVC
insulated to SS 358.
There shall be seven cables, with 23 strands of 0.2mm diameter and PVC insulated, connecting the
control panel to the four relays (to be provided by the Contractor) in Lift Room A at the roof-top. Should
there be two transfer-pump rooms, the Contractor shall run two sets of cables and conduits. The second
set of cables and conduits shall run to Lift Room B at the roof-top. The colour for these seven cables shall
be red, orange, pink, black, light blue, purple and green. The locations of the termination of the cables
and conduits shall be subjected to the location of the lift telemonitoring system and shall be approved by
the SO Rep.
All cables and electrical wiring shall be carried in their own conduits.
The metal conduits shall be of heavy gauge, galvanised steel conduit (Class 4), complying with BS 4568,
free from internal roughness and burrs. The conduits which run from the control panel to the lift room
shall be 20mm in diameter. The conduits shall run inside the building and along the staircase landing.
Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bar saddles at maximum 1m centres for
horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs. Concrete stumps of 50mm diameter and 100mm high
shall be provided to encase the conduits at every floor level.
All electrical cables and conduits shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout. The
conduits shall be efficiently earthed with copper earthwire of appropriate size. The conduit installation
shall be completed before the cables are drawn. Where applicable, the number of cables to be drawn into
the conduits shall not exceed those set out in the PSB Code of Practice CP 5. All non-current carrying
metal parts of electrical equipment shall be effectively earthed. Earth continuity conductors shall have a
cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5.

42.27.8

Design Work
All design Works necessary in producing the control panel shall be based on the requirements
aforementioned and is subject to the approval of the SO Rep. All designs, including the PCB artworks,
resulting thereof shall be the sole property of the Employer. Two sets of the relevant drawings shall be
submitted if requested by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

42.27.9

Testing Of Installation
The Contractor shall arrange with the SO Rep one month before the completion of the installation for the
testing of the performance and installation of the telemonitoring system.
The Contractor shall provide complete information as produced in Appendix A24 and submit two copies to
the SO Rep one week before the testing of the system.
All Defect notified shall be rectified within such time as instructed by the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S42.DOC(14)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 42-15
42.28

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD

(TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM)
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing routine servicing
and maintenance to the Transfer Pumping System and for providing an efficient call-back service as
specified hereunder for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the
Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred
to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this Clause including all sub-clauses under it.

42.28.1

Making Good Defects And Leakages

During the Defects Liability Period, make good all Defect and leakages found in the system and
installation. Replace and/or repair all defective parts or items whenever required if such replacement or
repair has been necessitated by the reasons of Defect in the Plant and equipment.
The Contractor shall have a supervisor-in-charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be
carried out under this Clause including all sub-clauses under it. The supervisor shall be thoroughly
competent in supervising the service, maintenance and repair of transfer pumping system and the
workmen shall also be skilled in the service, maintenance and repair of transfer pumping system.

42.28.2

Fortnightly And Monthly Inspection

All parts and equipment comprising the complete transfer pumping system shall be maintained and
inspected strictly in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix A25.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the fortnightly and monthly
inspections. Any Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a
Representative from HDB Branch Office to be present during these inspections.
Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for fortnightly and monthly inspections upon
Substantial Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works.
The Contractor's Supervisor shall also sign on the attendance book/card provided by the Employer in the
pump room after completion of each inspection.
Items in the check-list for fortnightly inspection shall include :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)

General condition of the pumprooms

Correct setting of time switch
Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position
Power supply selector switch in "On" position
Control panel indicating lights
Alarm bell and bulb
Suction tank electrode and control module
Motor running current
80mm check valve
80mm gate valve
Alignment of couplings
100mm check valve
100mm gate valve
Ball float valve

Items required to be inspected monthly shall include all items required for the fortnightly inspection
specified in the foregoing requirements in addition to the following :
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
(s)

BLDG04/S42.DOC(15)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Motor insulation
Pump mechanical seal
Pump lubrication oil level (if applicable)
Contactors and relays
Storage tank electrode and control module

Bldg Spec
Page 42-16
42.28.3

Efficient Call-Back Service

Provide an efficient 24 hour (whole day) call-back service. All urgent calls or complaints such as no water
supply or triggering of the alarm bell of the Transfer Pumping System shall be attended to immediately
upon notification by the Representative from the Essential Maintenance Service Unit or Branch Office.
The Contractor shall provide a telephone pager for his maintenance supervisor and the pager number
shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any urgent call-back
service can be met.
Provide a set of standby pump to keep the transfer pumping system functioning when the faulty pumps
are taken back to the workshop for repairs.
In the event that the Contractor fails to :
(a)
(b)
(c)

respond within 30 minutes after being paged; or

attend to an urgent call or complaint immediately upon notification; or
carry out the fortnightly and monthly inspection of the transfer pumping system;

the SO Rep may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be
recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may in addition exercise his
rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the transfer pumping system or to
carry out the routine servicing and maintenance of the transfer pumping system due to or arising out of the
Contractor's failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary or
relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract.
42.29

RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS PRIOR TO ISSUANCE

OF MAINTENANCE CERTIFICATE
One month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with HDB
Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defect listed after this joint inspection shall
be rectified by the end of the succeeding one month commencing from the expiry date of the Defects
Liability Period.
Rectify the outstanding Defect and conduct detailed checks on the Works before arranging for inspection
by the Representative from HDB Branch Office for the purpose of certifying completion of rectification of
Defect.
After the second final inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office, a list of outstanding
Defect shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defect on the list within
fourteen days.
If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defect on the second final inspection, the SO Rep shall
exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the Employer shall in addition have the right to engage his own
workmen or other contractors to rectify and make good all Defect and the cost of rectification and charges
imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor.

Total pages for this Section

16

Section 43/.....

BLDG04/S42.DOC(16)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 43-1
SECTION 43
BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

43.1

SCOPE OF WORK
The Works shall include the provision, installation and testing of booster pumping system, based on the
data given, complete with motors, pipework, valves, flow sensors, switch gears, electrical wiring, control
panels and all necessary accessories.
Details of the proposed booster pump installation shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. All Works
shall comply with the requirements and regulations of Water Department, PUB and other relevant
Authorities and Standards.

43.2

APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS AND DETAILS OF BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM

Submit one set of the following to the SO Rep for approval within two months from the date of the Letter of
Acceptance :
(a)

Detailed proposal complete with information as produced in Appendix A26 duly filled and signed by
the Contractor.

(b)

Characteristic curves of every pump to indicate the point(s) of performance.

The Works shall commence only after the approval of the proposal by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
seek fresh approval for any deviation from the approved proposal, failing which the whole installation shall
not be accepted by the SO Rep. The written approval of the Drawings shall in no way affect vary or
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility or obligations should the Plant or any of its parts proved
inadequate with regard to strength, performance, efficiency or other aspect.
43.3

BUILDING-IN
The Employer reserves the right to build in any steel supporting members or frameworks for the pumping
system. Supply all relevant dimensions and information on these pumping system and steel member
supports and attend to the work all at the Contractor's cost and expense. The Contractor shall be
responsible for any error or damages found subsequently.

43.4

BOOSTER PUMPS AND MOTORS

All booster pumps of approved type shall be of vertical in-line centrifugal pumps with mechanical seals
and high performance efficiency, driven by totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) electric motors except
otherwise specified in the Specifications. The casing of the pump shall be of stainless steel, bronze or
other approved metal. The impeller shall be bronze or stainless steel and the shaft shall be of the
stainless steel type and able to transmit the required power and to ensure the rigidity of rotating parts. The
entire length of the shaft shall be suitably protected against corrosion and be supported by heavy duty
bearings in robust housing well clear of the rotating parts. The shaft seal shall be of the mechanical seal
type. Bearings shall be protected against corrosion and be efficiently lubricated. The make of the pumps
shall be tested and approved by the SO Rep. The electric motors shall be squirrel-cage, totally enclosed
fan cooled type and with at least Class B insulation except where specified otherwise and be designed for
continuous maximum rating.
Terminal boxes shall be totally enclosed, of water-tight design and fitted with cable glands.
The power supply for the electric motors shall be 400 volts, 3 phase 50 cycles alternating current. 230
volts single phase motor shall be used as and when directed and approved by the SO Rep. The power of
the motor shall not be more than 1 kW.

BLDG04/S43.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 43-2
43.4

BOOSTER PUMPS AND MOTORS (CONT'D)

Unless otherwise specified, the design requirements of the booster pumps shall be as follows :
No. of Dwelling Unit served
by Booster Pump

Specified Flow Rate

(l/s)

Pressure Head
(m)

Shut-off Head
(m)

20 or below
Above 20

3
5

9
9

Not less than 12

Not less than 12

The pumpsets shall be marked with permanent letterings "P1" & "P2" respectively.
43.5

PIPE AND FITTINGS

All pipes and pipe fittings shall be approved by Water Department, PUB. All stainless steel pipes, fittings
and accessories shall conform to BS 4127:Part 2. All ductile iron pipes and fittings shall comply with BS
EN 545. Ductile iron flange type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545.
All ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be internally cement lined in accordance with the relevant clauses in
BS EN 545. Test the mixture according to the relevant clauses in BS EN 545. Apply two coats of PUB
approved epoxy to the portion where cement lining is not possible.
Pipe joints, fittings and special tees, for all ductile iron distribution mains and drawout pipes at roof level
shall be ductile iron flanged type. Flanges type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545.
The internal and external surfaces of the stainless steel pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free
from Defect. Cutting and fixing shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Pipes
shall be factory marked with manufacturer's name or identification mark and classification of pipes. Any
unmarked pipes shall not be accepted.
Unless otherwise specified, use light gauge stainless steel pipes for water supply. The stainless steel pipe
fittings shall be of capillary or compression fittings of copper alloy and shall comply with BS 864:Part 2 and
all PUB latest requirements.
All stainless steel pipes shall not be bent. Support pipes with stainless steel supports and clips or
concrete supports. All pipes which pass through walls or floor shall be insulated and sealed with approved
compound. All pipes which do not pass through the wall or floor but running along the wall shall be
supported with built in stainless steel/supports and clips spaced at 1m centres.
Unless otherwise specified, sizes of pipework shall be as follows :
Size of Suction Piping
Size of Discharge Piping
Size of By-Pass Piping

42mm
42mm
15mm

Connect suction pipe of each pump from the 100mm interconnecting pipe of roof storage tanks and
connect the discharge pipe of each pump to the 100mm distribution main which serves the topmost 2
storeys only. No mechanical tee shall be used for connections between suction pipe and interconnecting
pipe and between discharge pipe and distribution main.
Provide end thrust supports at both ends and bends of 100mm distribution main according to the
Drawings. All bolts, nuts and washers used for the ductile iron pipes for installation shall be galvanised
steel whilst those for the stainless steel pipes and supports shall be stainless steel of similar grade.
43.6

VALVES
Provide suction pipe of each pump with a 40mm full bore ball stop valve. Fit the delivery pipe of each
pump with a 40mm full bore spring loaded check valve and 40mm full bore ball stop valve. Provide the
by-pass pipe with a 15mm stop cock. All valves used shall comply with PUB Water Supply Regulations.

BLDG04/S43.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 43-3
43.7

LABELLING STICKERS
Stick aluminium foil stickers of length 75mm and width 40mm bearing the words "DO NOT OPEN" onto
the 100mm gate valves at the draw-out pipes from storage tanks to the 100mm distribution main serving
the top-most 2 storeys.
The base colour of the aluminium foil stickers shall be in white and the wordings shall be in red. The
dimensions of the wordings shall be of height 10mm and width 6mm and the line thickness 1mm. Submit a
sample of the stickers to the SO Rep for approval.

43.8

POWER SUPPLY
Power supply to the booster pumps and control system at the roof storage (high level) tank room shall be
connected from the electrical mains isolator in the roof storage tank room.

43.9

MOTOR SOFT-STARTERS
Soft-starters for motors shall be of the type as approved by the SO Rep. The soft-starters shall provide
means for the soft-start and soft-stop of the motors automatically. The operating voltage of the soft-starter
shall be 230V. Both soft-start time and soft-stop time of the soft-starter shall be set at 3 seconds.
Each soft-starter shall be designed to operate intermittently during the 24 hours of operation per day.
The soft-starters shall be wired in such a way that the duty and standby booster pumps shall be actuated
by flow sensors and floatless level switch. Selection of duty or standby booster pumps shall be
determined by a selector switch. Provide automatic duty change over relay to alternate standby and duty
booster pumps and it shall be interconnected to a flow sensor to start and stop the operation of the
booster pumps according to actual water demand.

43.10

FLOW-SENSORS
The flow sensor shall be of the type approved by the SO Rep. A flow sensor shall be installed at the
central discharge pipe of the booster pumps. Monitoring head of the sensor shall be of stainless steel.
The enclosure protection shall be at least IP 67.
The voltage of the flow sensor shall be 24V DC. The flow rate range shall be set to 115mm per seconds
(adjustable range : 10mm per second to 2m per second).

43.11

FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNIT

Floatless level control electrodes mounted on each storage (high level) tank shall be connected directly to
the relay unit mounted inside the control panel. Position the floatless level control electrodes near to the
manhole of the tank for easy maintenance.
Arrange the floatless level control electrodes to start and stop the pumpset at pre-determined levels.
Interconnect the floatless level switch to the motor soft-starters through the pumps' automatic change over
relay.
The floatless level control relay unit shall be of the plug-in relay unit type for easy maintenance. The unit
shall have built-in arrester circuit to protect against surge from power source and lightning surge from the
electrodes.
Provide stainless steel electrodes with adequate electrodes separators. The ceiling roses and flexible
cables from the electrode holders shall be legibly marked "BP".
Electrode holders mounted on tanks shall be easily accessible and removable for maintenance.
Run the wiring and conduits from the electrodes to the switch board panel and keep them as short as
possible. The wiring to the electrodes shall not run through the same conduit which contains the power
supply wiring.
All floatless control relay units shall be of the approved type.

BLDG04/S43.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 43-4
43.12

CONTROL PANEL
Provide and install approved control panel required to serve the booster pumpsets. Sufficient wall space
shall be selected within the roof storage tank room for the wall mounted control panel and shall be near to
the booster pumpsets subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
Unless otherwise specified, the panel shall be of the front connected type and manufactured from electrogalvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5mm thickness, using folded section or angle form bracing for
rigidity of construction. The panel shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof. The
construction shall be such that it allows for ready and easy access to the interior of the cubicles for
operation and maintenance purposes.
Provide control panel with rubber bushes at knockout holes for the entry of all incoming and outgoing
cables.
Mount instrument indicating lights, rotary switches, etc directly on front panel with locknuts to hold such
items firmly in position under all conditions of operation.
The control panel shall contain the following :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)

1 No. Rotary selector switch for Auto selection

1 No. Rotary key selector switch with 3 points selection
2 No. Soft-Starters as specified in the Clause 43.9 "Motor Soft-Starters"
2 Sets ON/OFF isolators with 3 phases MCB unit for starters
1 No. Delay Timer with 0 to 6 seconds setting
1 No. Timer with 0 to 30 minutes setting
6 No. Relays to control the pumpsets
1 No. Automatic change over relay
5 No. MCB unit for control circuits
3 No. Phase indicating panel light
2 No. Pump "run" indicating panel light
2 No. Pump "trip" indicating panel light
1 No. Low level warning indicating panel light

The whole of the electrical Works shall comply with PUB Regulations and be subject to the approval of the
SO Rep.
43.13

ELECTRICAL WIRING
Install cables from the electrical mains isolator in roof storage tank room or at other locations.
Internal cables and wiring shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 suitable for a 400V 3 phase 50 cycles 4 wire
system and they shall be carried in conduit or cable trunking.
The metal conduit shall be of heavy gauge, GS conduit (Class 4), complying with BS 4568, free from
internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bar
saddles at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs.
Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of a screwed socket and smooth bore bush butt to
adaptors boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist of a flanged coupling,
lead washer and smooth bore bush. In the event that the conduit comes in contact with any structural
steel work, an efficient and permanent metallic connection shall be made between the conduit and the
steelwork. All conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and shall
be efficiently earthed with copper earthwire (in conduits and 100mm x 50mm trunking) and copper tape (in
150mm x 75mm trunking). Copper earth wire or tape shall be of the appropriate sizes.
Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel sheets, in 1.83m or
2.44m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on one end of each length. The
trunking shall be treated with approved anticorrosion paint and finishing paint to a minimum thickness of
45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be effected by means of round headed bolts and nuts. 4mm x
20mm copper earth tape shall be laid in the trunking run. The copper shall be tinned where it is bolted
down.

BLDG04/S43.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 43-5
43.13

ELECTRICAL WIRING (CONT'D)

The entire trunking and conduit installation shall be completed before the cables are drawn. The number
of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed those set out in the relevant table in the PSB
Code of Practice CP 5.
Test all seals not less than 24 hours after completion. This test shall be made with insulation testing
equipment of the `Megger' type at 500V and an infinity reading shall be obtained before the conductors
are connected to any apparatus.
Where wiring is to be in conduit or duct buried in the floor, it shall terminate in approved junction boxes
adjacent to the machine or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible conduit enclosing the cables between
the motors and junction boxes.
Earth all non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. Earth continuity conductors shall have a
cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5.

43.14

INSTALLATION OF BOOSTER PUMPS

Install booster pumpsets on the floor/wall and support and secure them with stainless steel or concrete
supports along the pipes closed to suction and discharge side of the booster pumpsets.
Install pressure gauge of appropriate scales at the discharge pipe of each booster pump. The pressure
gauge shall comply with BS1780 for measuring gauge pressure. The pressure gauge shall be marked
with the manufacturer's trademark or brand name.
The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the booster pumps are installed according to standard
procedure of installation or according to the pump supplier's recommendation subject to the approval of
the SO Rep.
Check the location for the switch board. Inform the SO Rep immediately should this location be not at an
optimum position.

43.15

VIBRATION AND NOISE

Vibration and noise generated by the pumpsets shall not be unduly disturbing to dwellers immediately
below.
Provide and fix all necessary noise and vibration abatement devices and equipments to reduce the
vibration and sound.

43.16

STERILISATION OF PIPES, FITTINGS AND PUMPS BEFORE OPERATION

Clean and flush all pipes, fittings and pumps internally with sufficient chemical to give the water a dose of
50 parts of chlorine to one million parts of water (ie. 50 ppm) before the commencement of the operation
of the system, in accordance with PUB requirement.

43.17

INSPECTION DURING PROGRESS OF WORK

Provide all necessary facilities such as torch lights etc and access leading to the tanks for inspections by
the SO Rep during of progress of the Works.

BLDG04/S43.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 43-6
43.18

TESTING OF BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

One month before the completion of the installation, arrange with the SO Rep for testing the performance
and installation of the booster pumping system.
Furnish data on booster pumping system as set out in Appendix A27 and submit 2 copies to the SO Rep
one week before the testing of the booster pumping system.
All Defect notified during the inspection shall be rectified before the building blocks are handed over to the
Employer, failing which action shall be taken against the Contractor by the SO Rep.

43.19

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD

(BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM)
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing routine servicing
and maintenance to the booster pumping system and for providing an efficient call-back service as
specified hereunder for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the
Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred
to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this Clause including all sub-clauses under it.

43.19.1

Making Good Defects And Leakages

During the Defects Liability Period, make good all Defect and leakages found in the system and
installation, replace and/or repair all defective parts or items whenever required if such replacement or
repair has been necessitated by reasons of Defect in the Plant and equipment.
The Contractor shall have a Supervisor-in-Charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be
carried out under this clause including all sub clauses under it. The Supervisor shall be thoroughly
competent in supervising the service, maintenance and repair of the booster pumping system and the
workmen shall also be skillful in the service, maintenance and repair of booster pumping system.

43.19.2

Monthly Inspection
Maintain and inspect all parts and equipment comprising the complete booster pumping system strictly in
accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix A28.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the monthly inspection. Any
Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. The Contractor shall always arrange for
a representative from HDB Branch Office to be present during these visits.
Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a maintenance schedule for monthly inspection upon Substantial
Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works.
Items in the Check-list shall include :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)

BLDG04/S43.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Flow sensors
Soft-starters, relays and control module
Power supply selector switch in "On" position
Control panel indicating lights
Electrodes in storage tanks
Motor running current
Motor insulation
Pump mechanical seal
Pressure gauges
40mm check valve and ball stop valves
Thrust supports at distribution main

Bldg Spec
Page 43-7
43.19.3

Efficient Call-Back Service

Provide an efficient 24 hour (whole day) call-back service. Attend to all complaints immediately upon
notification by the Representative from the Essential Maintenance Service Unit or Branch Office.
The Contractor shall provide a telephone pager for his Maintenance Supervisor and the pager number
shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any call-back service can
be met.
Provide a set of standby pump to keep the booster pumping system functioning when the faulty pumps are
taken back to the workshop for repairs.
In the event that the Contractor fails to :
(a)
(b)
(c)

respond within 30 minutes after being paged; or

attend to complaint immediately upon notification; or
carry out the monthly inspection of the booster pumping system;

the Employer may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be
recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may in addition exercise his
rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the booster pumping system or carry
out the routine servicing and maintenance of the booster pumping system arising out of the Contractor's
failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the
Contractor's obligations under the Contract.
43.20

RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS PRIOR TO ISSUANCE

OF MAINTENANCE CERTIFICATE
One month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with HDB
Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defect listed after the joint inspection shall
be rectified by the end of the succeeding one month commencing from the expiry date of the Defects
Liability Period.
Rectify all outstanding Defect and conduct detailed checks on work before arranging for inspection by
Representative from HDB Branch Office for the purpose of certifying complete rectification of Defect.
After the second final inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office, a list of outstanding
Defect shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defect in the list within fourteen
days.
If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defect on the second final inspection, the SO Rep shall
exercise his right under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the Employer shall in addition have the right to engage his own
workmen or other contractors to rectify and make good all Defect and the cost of rectification and charges
imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor.

Total pages for this Section

Section 44/.....

BLDG04/S43.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 44-1
SECTION 44
DRY/WET RISING MAIN INSTALLATION

44.1

GENERAL
It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete operating system. The
omission from the Specifications or Drawings of any details in construction, installation materials, or
specialities necessary for a complete operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from
furnishing and completing the same in place all at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations or standards,
the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works.
For buildings under construction, dry/wet rising mains shall be provided according to the requirements of
the FSSD. The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements to enable the officers from
FSSD/BCU to carry out inspection and also to witness the testing during the Time for Completion and any
time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.
The Contractor shall engage a company/firm which is registered under BCA registration head of ME06
(Fire Prevention & Protection System) for the Works. The Contractor shall also engage a PE who shall be
responsible for the necessary submission, supervision, completion, testing and commissioning of the
installations under the Contract as required by the FSSD and/or BCU. The PE shall submit a Certificate of
Supervision and testing and commissioning certificates to the SO Rep according to the requirements of
the FSSD and/or BCU.

44.2.1

Scope Of Work
(a)

Dry rising main shall be installed in building where any floor is at a height beyond 10m and not
exceeding 60m above the ground level. The dry rising main shall be complete with landing valve at
every storey, breeching inlet and breeching inlet cabinet (where applicable).
The minimum nominal bore of a dry rising main shall be :

(b)

(i)

100mm galvanised steel Class 'C' where the rising main does not exceed 45m in height.
The rising main shall be complete with 2 way breeching inlet.

(ii)

150mm galvanised steel Class 'C' where the rising main exceed 45m in height. The rising
main shall be complete with 4 way breeching inlet.

For building which is more than 60m, wet rising main shall be provided according to SS CP 29 and
the requirements as shown in the Drawings.
Fire intercom system shall be provided between the pump rooms of the transfer pumps and the fire
pumps.
Extinguishers with Class C ratings are required in the pump rooms. The number and capacity shall
be in accordance to CP 55.
The Contractor shall provide all technical data as shown in Appendix A29.

44.2.2

Rules And Regulations

Ensure that the installation of dry/wet rising main system is in accordance with the latest requirements of
the following :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)

Building Control Act and the Regulations made thereunder;

Public Utilities Act, and the Regulations made thereunder;
Professional Engineers Act;
Fire Safety Act;
SS CP 29;
Any other relevant rules, regulations and by-laws.

In cases of discrepancies between the various standards, the local standards shall prevail.
BLDG04/S44.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 44-2
44.2.3

Material
Material, appliances and components shall comply with the requirements of the relevant Singapore
Standards, British Standards or their equivalent.
Particular items shall comply with the following requirements or their equivalent :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)

44.2.4

Ball Valves
Boxes for landing valves
Breeching inlets
Landing valves
Pipes
Pipe fittings
Pipe and valve flanges
Pressure gauges
Gate valves
Starting switches (automatic)
Fire safety signs, notices and graphic symbols

BS 1212 : Part 1, 2 or 3
BS 5041 : Part 4, 5
BS 5041 : Part 3
BS 5041 : Part 1, 2
BS 1387, ASTM A120
BS 1740
BS 10 or BS 4504
BS 1780
BS 5163
BS 587
BS 5499 : Part 1

Quality Of Goods And Materials

The quality of goods and materials shall comply with the requirement and regulations of the HDB and the
relevant Authorities and shall also comply with the relevant Code of Practice as stipulated. All materials
used shall be of the approved type unless otherwise specified.
Where products are manufactured under the PSB Batch Inspection Scheme, additional testing shall not
be necessary unless otherwise specified. The SO Rep shall be consulted when in doubt.
Any other relevant requirements issued by the FSSD shall be complied with.

44.2.5

Approval/Submission Of Drawings And Details

Where applicable, submit to the SO Rep for approval two sets of the following documents :
(a)

Detailed installation proposal complete with necessary drawings.

(b)

Technical specifications and samples (if appropriate) of all fittings/equipment employed in the
installation.

(c)

Electrical wiring diagram of the whole installation.

(d)

Technical specifications and characteristic curves of every pump to indicate point/s of performance.

(e)

Fully dimensioned scaled drawings of every pump room to indicate :

(i)

Proposed water levels in the suction tank of which the pump shall start and stop operation.

(ii)

Position of switchboard.

(iii)

Piping/Water tank layout.

(iv)

Sizes of all pipes & fittings.

(v)

Points and details of support for pipes, valves and fittings.

For easy reference, the submission shall be organised according to a summary sheet available on
request. The Works shall only commence upon approval of the Contractor's proposal by the SO Rep but
additional approval shall be sought before any deviations from the approved proposal can be carried out,
failing which the whole installation may not be accepted by the SO Rep. The approval of the proposal
shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility should the installation or any of its parts proved
inadequate in any aspect.

BLDG04/S44.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 44-3
44.2.5

Approval/Submission Of Drawings And Details (Contd)

On completion of the installation, provide three sets of operation and maintenance manuals and the
testing record/results of each installation.
The Contractor shall also submit to the SO Rep one set of A1 size as-built tracings, three sets of A1 size
as-built prints, two CDROMs in "dwg" format, and two CDROMs in "pdf" format. Except for the CDROMs
in dwg format, the tracings, prints and CDROMs in pdf format shall all be endorsed by the Contractor's
PE. The "As Built" drawings of the whole installation shall incorporate the following information where
applicable:

44.2.6

44.2.7

(a)

position of pump rooms

(b)

routes of all rising mains and pipes

(c)

piping and equipment arrangement inside the pump room

(d)

schematic diagram of the rising main hydraulic circuit showing the positions of each pump, valve,
pressure switch, flow switch and etc.

(e)

locations of every landing valve and breeching inlet

(f)

schematic circuit diagram and single line diagram of the overall system wiring

(g)

control circuit diagram of wet riser pump

(h)

circuit diagram of the floatless level control relay units.

Installation
(a)

Seek approval from the SO Rep before any hacking work is to be done.

(b)

For rising main pipe and down-comer (fire fighting) through the floor slabs, provide concrete curb
around the rising main pipe. The concrete curb shall be 100mm high and surrounding the pipe.
Casting of the concrete curb shall be done together with re-casting of concrete slab as one single
operation. The concrete curb and slab shall be water tight.

(c)

The Works shall include hacking, coring, drilling etc, as well as re-casting the concrete slab. The
Contractor shall provide and cast water-proof concrete slab of not lesser strength than the original
slab.

Damage To Existing Roof Structures And Roofing System

For Works to existing building blocks, the Contractor shall liaise with the relevant Branch Office or Town
Council for a joint inspection together with the SO Rep to determine the existing roof condition before the
commencement of the Works. All defects noted shall be recorded in writing and verified by the parties
concerned before the commencement of the Works.
Upon the Substantial Completion of the Works, the Contractor shall engage the same roofing specialist
contractor, who had provided the warranty for the existing roofing system, to replace any broken or
cracked secondary roof slab and carry out all the repairs and reinstatement Works to the damaged
waterproofing membrane and roof structure.
During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall, upon verbal or written notification by the SO Rep,
engage the same roofing specialist contractor, who had provided the warranty for the existing roofing
system, to repair immediately any leakage in the roof caused by the Contractor.

BLDG04/S44.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 44-4
44.3.1

Pipeworks & Fittings

(a)

General
Pipework for dry/wet rising mains shall be galvanised steel conforming to BS 1387 or ASTM A120
and BS 1740. Tubes/pipes and fittings used shall be suitable for pressures up to 21 bars. Mill
certificates shall be produced on request to countercheck with the heat numbers of tubes/pipes at
the Site.
All fittings shall, as far as practicable, be the same size as the pipes connected. Elbows shall be
used, where practicable, in preference to bends; square elbows shall not be permitted. Valves used
shall be UL and FM listed according to the pressure rating of SS CP29.
Valves used shall be UL and FM listed according to the pressure rating of SS CP29. All
fittings/valves used shall be rated at least 1.5 times the system working pressure. All valves shall
be kept securely strapped with padlock.
All underground pipework shall be of ductile iron cement lined or other approved material.
Pipework shall follow the contours of walls and shall be graded to ensure venting and draining. The
clearance between pipework and wall and any other fixtures shall be as shown in the construction
detail of service duct for dry/wet rising main.
Joints shall not be embedded in any wall, floor or ceiling and pipework shall not be embedded in
the structure of floors. Where pipework passes through walls, sleeves shall be provided. Sleeves
shall be of the same metal as the pipe. The space between pipework and sleeve shall be plugged
with an approved sealant.
All entry and exit holes to or from a building for pipework shall be sealed and plugged. The sealant
shall be mastic compound or silicone rubber. Where the pipework enters the building through a
large hole or duct, a mild steel blanking plate not lesser than 6mm thick shall be built into the wall
of the hole or duct; the service pipes shall pass through clearance sockets welded to the plate and
the space between pipe exterior and socket interior shall be sealed and plugged.

(b)

Pipe Joints
All piping shall be installed by means of flanged fittings, mechanical pipe couplings or other
approved means.
Flanges shall be raised face conforming to BS 4504. Flanged joints shall be made with flat ring
gaskets suitable for the pressure and temperature and extending to the inside of the bolt circles.
Mechanical pipe couplings shall be self-centring and engage and lock in place the grooved or
shouldered pipe and pipe fitting ends in a positive watertight couple. Coupling housing clamps
shall consist of two or more metal castings holding in place a composition water sealing gasket so
designed that the internal water pressure increases the watertightness of the seal. The coupling
assembly shall be securely held together by two or more heat treated carbon steel bolts and nuts.
Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with the pipe coupling manufacturer's latest specifications.
The entire coupling installation shall be in accordance with the latest manufacturer's
recommendations. Pipe joined with grooved fittings shall be joined by a listed combination of
fittings, gaskets and grooves.
Couplings and fittings used shall be FM and UL listed according to the pressure rating of SS CP29.

(c)

Pipe Supports
Typical pipework hangers for the dry/wet rising main and down-comer (fire fighting) system shall be
as shown in the Drawings. Support the pipework on main load bearing members of the structure.
The method of support shall be done according to the practice in the industry subject to the
approval of the SO Rep.
Rising main support shall be located at every storey. Horizontal pipe runs shall be provided with
hangers spaced at a maximum distance of 4m.

BLDG04/S44.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 44-5
44.3.1

Pipeworks & Fittings (Contd)

(d)

Painting
Galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall be painted in accordance with the provisions of Section
23.
All pipework shall be stencilled with directional arrows of minimum 200 x 30mm in size.
A sample showing the pipework painting and welded flange shall be provided to the SO Rep for
approval.

44.3.2

Breeching Inlet
Provide inlets with instantaneous male couplings for connection to the Singapore Civil Defence Force's
63.5mm diameter standard hose to each rising main with a two-way breeching inlet for a 100mm, or 4 way
breeching inlet for a 150mm diameter rising main, at a level of about 760mm above ground level.
Each breeching inlet shall conform with the requirements of BS 5041:Part 3.
Enclose all inlets in a rust-proof steel inlet box with glass front. Position the inlet box with its lower edge
between 400mm and 600mm above ground level. The position of inlets shall be indicated on inlet box
using appropriate signs in accordance with BS 5499: Part 1 and using a letter height of at least 50mm.
Inlets shall be painted yellow for dry rising mains. The inlet box shall be installed with key lock. Where
more than 1 stack are provided for the rising main, the labelling of the rising main shall be subject to the
approval of the SO Rep.
Provide all pipework of rising main that falls below inlet box level with an additional 25mm drain valve at
the lowest point of the pipework, together with either fixed piping or an adequate length of flexible tubing
(fitted with a suitable coupling for connection to the valve) to conduct water from the valve to a suitable
drain.
Where such a low level drain is fitted, provide a permanent notice in 25mm (minimum) block letters of a
suitable colour on a contrasting background and place it in a position adjacent to the valve reading 'DRY
RISING MAIN - DRAIN VALVE' or 'WET RISING MAIN -DRAIN VALVE'. Provide another permanent
notice in the inlet box, similar in size to the indicator plates mentioned in BS 5041: Part 5, reading 'LOW
LEVEL DRAIN VALVE IN .........' (state location of the valve). The low level drain valve shall be kept
securely strapped and padlock closed except when in use.

44.3.3

Landing Valve
Provide landing valve with an instantaneous female coupling for connection to the Singapore Civil
Defence Force's 63.5mm diameter standard hose for each rising main as shown in the Drawings.
The SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to remove items vulnerable to be stolen such as
handwheel, blank caps, chain, etc from the landing valves which have already been installed. The
Contractor shall deliver these items for storage at a place to be decided by the SO Rep. No claim for such
Works shall be allowed as all costs and expenses for such work are deemed to be included in the
Contract Sum. The Superintending Officer's decision on which items are considered vulnerable to be
stolen shall be final binding on and conclusive against the Contractor. The landing valve shall be kept
securely strapped and padlock closed except when in use.
(a)

Location
Provide landing valves at a height with its lowest point between 760mm and 1m above the floor
level.

BLDG04/S44.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 44-6
44.3.3

Landing Valve (Contd)

(b)

Recesses And Enclosures For Landing Valves

Enclose landing valves for rising mains within a duct as shown in the Drawings.
Where a landing valve is in an open recess, duct or alcove, and where a landing valve of a rising
main is enclosed in a box, the opening giving access to the landing valve shall not be lesser than
150mm clearance on both sides and not lesser than 230mm below the centre line of the outlet of
the landing valve and not lesser than 250mm clearance above the handwheel. The depth of the
opening shall not be greater than is necessary, and the front edge of the female coupling of the
landing valve shall not be more than 75mm behind the face of the door. Allow adequate space
around the valve to permit easy maintenance and testing.
Signplate in block letters of height not less than 50mm with the words 'DRY RISING MAIN
OUTLET', 'WET RISING MAIN OUTLET' or `DOWN-COMER (FIRE FIGHTING) OUTLET' for the
respective rising mains shall be mounted on the door.
Landing valves shall be painted yellow for dry rising mains and red for wet rising mains and downcomers (fire fighting).

44.3.4

Automatic Air Release Valve For Rising Mains

A suitable automatic air release valve shall be provided at the highest point in each rising main to permit
air in the pipe to discharge to atmosphere when water is pumped in at ground level.
The automatic air release valve shall have gunmetal or brass bodies, non-ferrous or stainless steel floats
and guides, and non-corrodible valves and seats.

44.3.5

Electrical Earthing Of Rising Mains

Rising mains shall be electrically earthed as shown in the Drawings. Joints which do not provide electrical
continuity shall be bonded.
All the rising mains that are situated in the vicinity of any lightning conductor, shall be bonded to the
lightning conductor in accordance with the requirements of the code on lightning protection.

44.3.6

Drain Valves
Provide each breeching inlet with a drain valve in the form of a 25mm gate valve complying with the
requirements of BS 5154, rating PN 16.
For ease of attaching a drain hose, the drain valve outlet shall be positioned so that it faces in the same
direction as, and is at a lower level than, the inlet connections to the breeching inlet.
The outlet of the drain valve shall have 25mm male threads complying with the requirements of BS 21,
and shall be fitted with a female blank cap and chain.

44.3.7

Blank Caps
Provide each inlet with a female instantaneous blank cap acceptable to FSSD. Attach every blank cap to
the breeching inlet and landing valve by a suitable lug, s-hook and chain.

44.3.8

Signboard
The breeching inlets shall be identified by an appropriate sign reading `DRY' or 'WET RISING MAIN'.
Where the inlets are not readily visible from the outside, a sign shall be posted in a conspicuous place
directing the Singapore Civil Defence Force to the inlets subject to the approval of the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S44.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 44-7
44.4.1

Wet Rising Main System

Generally, a water supply capable of providing a minimum of 27 litres per second for a residential building
or 38 litres per second for a non-residential or mixed occupancy building at all times shall be required.
When more than one wet rising main is required in any zone in a building, the minimum common water
supply shall be as stated below :
(a)

For a residential building 27 litres per second for the first rising main and 13.5 litres per second for
each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 135 litres per second.

(b)

For a non-residential or mixed occupancy building 38 litres per second for the first rising main and
19 litres per second for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 190
litres per second.

The supply from the breeching inlets shall discharge openly into the tank and at a level of not less than
150mm above the maximum water level in the tank.
To reduce the risk of hose bursting, provisions shall be made in accordance with BS 5401 : Part 1 so that
when the water is shut off at the nozzle the static pressure in any line of hose connected to a landing valve
does not exceed 8 bar.
To dispose of excess flows and pressures over and above those required (ie. when only one jet is in use)
a pressure control valve shall be incorporated in the body of the landing valve which is then permanently
connected into a relief pipe, where applicable. This relief pipe shall run throughout the length of the wet
rising main installation and shall terminate either back into the suction tank or to drain. The relief pipe
shall be 100mm diameter galvanised steel. All pump control panels shall be of IP 54 enclosures.
44.4.2

Wet Rising Main Water Tank

Unless agreeable by the FSSD, tanks supplying water for domestic purposes shall not be used as suction
or storage tanks for wet rising mains.
The tank shall be compartmented into two separate water-tight sections connected by a valve, normally
kept open, to permit tank maintenance without interruption to the water supply. Nevertheless, when more
than one water tank is provided in parallel to store the required amount of water, tank compartmentation is
not necessary provided the tanks are interconnected with isolating valves which are secured open.
Each tank or tank compartment shall be provided with a ductile iron cement lined overflow pipe of at least
100mm in diameter, adequately supported, and extended to discharge into a suitable drain.
Ductile iron cement lined drain pipe of at least 100mm diameter and controlled by a gate valve shall be
provided for each tank or compartment.
Voltex inhibitors shall be installed where applicable to maintain the required water tank storage capacity
according to SS CP29.
An approved visual level indicator shall be fitted to show the depth of water in each tank or compartment.
A permanent aluminium gooseneck ladder with safety guard extending a sufficient distance above the top
of the tank shall be provided for each tank. UPVC ladder shall also be provided inside each tank.
Reinforced concrete tank shall comply with the requirements specified in Section 9 "Reinforced Concrete
Water Tank" including all clauses & subclauses under it. However, notwithstanding the requirements
specified therein, sterilisation of water is not required.

BLDG04/S44.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 44-8
44.4.3

Wet Rising Main Pumps

The horizontal split case fire pumps for use in wet rising mains and transfer pumps shall be listed by PSB
and UL, FM or LPC. Pumps/motors shall be selected to meet design as well as maximum flow
requirements. All pumps and control panels shall be mounted on at least 150mm height plinths. Spring
type vibration isolators shall be provided for each pump to ensure minimal vibration transmission to the
building structure. The first three pipe supports from the pump discharge shall be the spring mounted
type. Pump control panels near/below pipework shall be protected from water leakage/splash.
The pumps shall have an independent source of power supply and each shall be capable of providing
independently the necessary flow and pressure requirements.
The duty pump (or standby pump, in the event of failure of the duty pump) shall start automatically when
there is a flow of water or when a fall in pressure occurs in the rising main exceeding 5% of the fire pump
churning pressure. The pump shall be fully operational within 30 seconds after starting. Means shall be
provided for manual starting by reproducing the pressure reduction. Once started, the pump shall run
continuously until stopped manually. Means shall be provided for the 'lagging' pump to operate should the
'leading' pump fail to function upon closing of the starting circuit.
(a)

Pressure-sensor switches shall be supplied and fitted on the main supply pipes to initiate automatic
starting of the pumps. Pressure-sensor switches shall be of approved type with provisions for
independent adjustment of high and low pressure settings. The automatic starting of any pump
shall also initiate a visible and audible indication in the main fire alarm panel, if any.

(b)

Floatless level control relay unit complete with electrodes shall be provided for each suction and
storage tank to override the control of all the pressure switches in such a way that at a pre-set low
water level, the pressure switches shall not cause starting of the jockey and wet rising main pumps.
In addition, any pump in operation shall be stopped by the relay unit at that low water level.
The relay unit shall also actuate a visible and audible alarm indication when the water level reaches
a pre-determined high or low limit.

(c)

The associated jockey pump shall be controlled by pressure-sensor switches so as to maintain a

static pressure in the wet rising main about 1 bar (10m) higher than the pressure when the wet
rising main pump is churning. The jockey pump shall be automatically de-energised when any of
the wet rising main pump operates.

All pumps shall be capable of being started and stopped manually.

All pumps shall be primed automatically at all times. This will be effected if the pumps are sited so that at
least two thirds of the effective capacity of the suction tank is above the level of the centre of pump
suction. Where this is not possible, separate priming tanks maintained automatically and foot valves shall
be provided for each pump.
Pumps which are automatically controlled shall be provided with a reliable float-operated air release or
equivalent valve not less than 12mm in size, to automatically release air from the pump.
Means must be provided to allow a continuous flow of water through each pump at a sufficient rate to
prevent overheating of the pump when churning.
The pump motor capacity shall be such that the maximum motor current in any phase under any condition
of pump load and voltage unbalance shall not exceed the motor-rated full-load current multiplied by the
service factor. The maximum service factor at which a motor can be used is 1.15. These service factors
shall be in accordance with NEMA Standard MG-1.
A test valve and direct reading flow meter shall be provided on a pipe connection coupled to the pump
delivery branch downstream of the check valve to test the pump. The test piping shall be sized not less
than the meter size appropriate to the pump rated capacity. The test piping shall discharge to a suitable
drain.
A discharge pressure gauge shall be connected to the discharge of each pump. The gauge shall have a
valve with arrangement for draining. Its indication dial shall have a range of at least twice the rated
working pressure of the pump.

BLDG04/S44.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 44-9
44.4.3

Wet Rising Main Pumps (Contd)

All electrical wiring, including that for the control and monitoring circuits shall be in accordance with PUB
requirements and shall be :
(a)

of the fire-resistive type complying with SS 299 or

(b)

enclosed in a 2-hour fire-rated duct throughout the run to the pump room.

A fire-rated duct may house electrical wiring for other emergency services if the running of the wiring does
not affect the fire-integrity of the duct.
The sharing of a common electrical rising main for the wet rising main and other emergency services is
acceptable provided that there is proper protection by fuses or circuit breakers for each and every
emergency service.
Any switches on the power feed to the motor shall be locked "ON" and clearly labelled "WET RISING
MAIN PUMP - NOT TO BE SWITCHED OFF IN THE EVENT OF FIRE".
Acoustic treatment shall be provided to reduce the noise generated from the pump to be within the ENV
guideline. The proposal for noise reduction shall be approved by the SO Rep before the actual
commencement of the pump room pipework installation.
44.4.4

Wet Rising Main Pumps Control Panels

The Contractor shall prepare fully detailed control wiring diagram for the approval of the SO Rep prior to
the manufacture of control panels.
Provision at the Wet rising main pump Control Panel shall include but not limited to the following :
(a)

For each and every pump, indicating lamps shall be provided to show that power supply is
available on every phase of each motor. Power failure on any phase of the supply to the wet rising
main pumps shall be automatically indicated on the control panel.

(b)

MANUAL/OFF/AUTO rotary selector switches shall be provided for each pump.

(c)

"Start" and "Stop" push-button switches shall be provided for each pump.

(d)

Lead/Lag rotary functions shall be provided for the selection of the duty pumps.

(e)

"Running" and "stop" indicating lamps shall be provided to each pump. Green colour lamps shall
be provided to show the pump "Running" status and red colour lamps shall be provided to show the
"Stop" status.

(f)

Start push button shall be provided for each pump to close the main contactor for the pump motor
mechanically independent of any control circuit.

(g)

Indicator lamps giving indication of the failure of each wet rising main pump to start as monitored
by the flow switch at each pump discharge.

(h)

Indicating lamps giving indication of 'Pump on Demand' as controlled by the pump actuation
pressure switches. The starting of the pump shall not cancel the indication.

(i)

Remote visible and audible indication panel besides the main control panel, if any for the following
conditions :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)

(j)

BLDG04/S44.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Pump on demand
Operation of each wet rising main pump
Power failure on any phase of the supply to each wet rising main pump
Pump fails to start as monitored by the flow switch at each pump discharge
Manual and auto mode selection

Indicating lamps shall be provided to show the high and low water level of the wet rising main
storage tanks.

Bldg Spec
Page 44-10
44.4.4

Wet Rising Main Pumps Control Panels (Contd)

(k)

Indicator lamp and buzzer/bell test push button.

(l)

Fault alarm facilities in addition to the indicator lamps shall be provided for the following conditions :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

Power failure on any phase of the supply to each pump

Pump fail to start
High and low level at suction and storage tanks
Other faults not mentioned above

The fault alarm facilities shall incorporate a fault alarm buzzer audible from 10m away and a buzzer
muting switch. The visual fault alarm indication shall persist unless the fault is rectified. The
occurrence of a further different fault while the buzzer is silenced shall cause the buzzer to resume
the sound again. The restoration of the silencing switch to its normal position whilst a fault exists
shall transfer the fault back to the audible fault warning. In addition, a weatherproof red light bulb
with wire guard shall be installed outside the pump room near the entrance to indicate the above
fault conditions.
(m)

44.4.5

Auxiliary contacts to generator panel to be provided. Volt-free contacts and wiring to relay signals
to Fire Indicator Board where applicable.

Jockey Pump Control Panel

The jockey pump controllers shall be used for pressure maintenance in the installation to prevent
unnecessary cycling of the wet rising main pumps.
The jockey pump controller shall either be housed in a separate compartment within the wet rising main
pump controller or in a totally separate sheet steel cubicle.
The jockey pump controllers shall incorporate incoming MCCB protection, starter with thermal overload
relay, contactors, control relays and the following facilities :

44.4.6

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)

Indicator lamps to show that power supply is available on every phase of the motor
Auto/OFF/Manual rotary selector switch
'Run' and 'stop' indicator lamps
'Start' and 'stop' pushbutton
Pump 'Overload' indicator lamp
Connections to pressure switch
Minimum running period timer to prevent frequent automatic starting of the pump. The timer shall
be set to keep the motor in operation for at least one minute and interlock with the pressure switch.

(h)

Fault alarm facilities shall be provided to indicate fault conditions of pump overload, pump power
supply failure on any phase and pump fail to start.

Wet Rising Main Transfer Pump Control

The Contractor shall prepare fully detailed control wiring diagram for the approval of the SO Rep prior to
the manufacture of control panels.
The transfer pump controllers shall incorporate incoming MCCB protection, starter with thermal overload
relay, contactors and control relays. Provision of transfer pump Control Panel shall include but not limited
to the following :
(a)

Indicator lamps to show that power supply is available on every phase of the motor

(b)

Auto/OFF/Manual rotary selector switch

BLDG04/S44.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 44-11
44.4.6

Wet Rising Main Transfer Pump Control (Contd)

(c)

'Run' and 'stop' indicator lamps

(d)

'Start' and 'stop' pushbutton

(e)

Pump 'Overload' indicator lamp

(f)

Connections to pressure switch

(g)

Fault alarm facilities shall be provided to indicate fault conditions of pump overload, pump power
supply failure on any phase, pump fail to start and high and low water level.

44.5

TEST

44.5.1

Tests On Rising Main System

The Contractor shall submit an application to the SO Rep to witness the inspection and commissioning
test of the complete installation. The application shall include information on the testing appointment date
and statement of completion of the whole Works by the Contractor. The appointed date shall be at least 2
months before the date of Substantial Completion of the building block.
For wet rising main system, the Contractor shall provide the complete information as produced in
Appendix A30 and submit two copies to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the system.

44.5.2

Static Pressure Test

The Contractor shall ensure that the system is in order so that water is allowed to flow through it
discharging via the topmost and/or lowest outlet to flush out any debris that may be present.
The system shall then be completely charged with water to a hydrostatic pressure according to CP 29
(Clause 8.1) for 2 hours. During this period, an inspection of the system shall be made to check that no
leakage of water is taking place at any of the joints or landing valves.
The system shall also be charged to the working pressure and at selected landing valve to be tested for
operational requirements with matching water hose. Landing valves shall be tested randomly on the
proper engagement with matching water hose and hose coupling.
Provide diesel driven pump for the tests. Alternatively, electric driven pump may be used but the
Contractor shall arrange for its own power supply.
The Contractor shall arrange for all the necessary parties such as the FSSD to witness the test as and
when required.
Provide water and all the necessary instruments such as water hose, hose coupling, pressure gauges for
the testing.
Water from the domestic water tank shall not be used. The Contractor shall find other means of providing
the water subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
Instrument for the testing shall be properly calibrated by PSB or PSB accredited laboratory.
The Contractor shall ensure that all pipes are securely anchored before carrying out any pressure test.

BLDG04/S44.DOC(11)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 44-12
44.5.3

Flow Test (Wet Rising Mains Only)

The following minimum water supply flow-rate shall be maintained in the wet rising system when 3 landing
valves within the system are in the fully-open position :
(a)
(b)

27 litres per second for a residential building.

38 litres per second for a non-residential or mixed occupancy building.

A minimum running pressure of 3.5 bar and a maximum of 5.5 bar shall be maintained at each landing
valve when any number, up to three, are fully opened.
When water is shut off at the nozzle of the hose connected to a landing valve, the static pressure in that
hose line shall not exceed 8 bar.
When more than one wet rising main is required in any zone in a building, the minimum water supply flow
rate shall be as stated below :

44.5.4

(a)

For a residential building, 27 litres per second for the first rising main and 13.5 litres per second for
each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 135 litres per second.

(b)

For a non-residential or mixed occupancy building 38 litres per second for the first rising main and
19 litres per second for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 190
litres per second.

Performance Test
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep two copies of the test results using approved HDB Testing
Form. Additional FSSD requirements shall also be included. Provide a minimum of seven days notice to
the SO Rep to verify the test results on the Site and demonstrate to the SO Rep that the installation fulfils
the function for which it has been designed. Adjust, balance and regulate the Works concerned as
necessary until the required conditions are attained.
Should the SO Rep find discrepancies between the recorded test results and the measurements
demonstrated on the Site, the test shall be repeated by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The test shall be witnessed by the Contractor's PE together with the SO Rep. The testing form shall be
endorsed by the PE.

44.5.5

Remedial Action And Re-Testing

Remedy all Defect within such time as instructed by the SO Rep and arrange for a re-test of the system.

44.6

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

FOR DRY RISING MAIN
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance
service and call-back service to the dry rising main system as specified hereafter for a period of one year
commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works
as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period") for the
purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
Whenever, the rising main system or any portion thereof is out of service for any reason, notice shall be
given immediately to the Singapore Civil Defence Force and a suitable sign shall be displayed at a
prominent position. When the installation is reinstated, the Singapore Civil Defence Force shall again be
informed.
All parts and equipment comprising the complete system shall be maintained and inspected strictly as
specified hereafter and in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix A31.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the routine inspections. Any
Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative
from HDB Branch Office to be present during these inspections.

BLDG04/S44.DOC(12)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 44-13
44.6

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

FOR DRY RISING MAIN (CONTD)
Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for the inspections upon Substantial
Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works.
The Contractor's Supervisor shall also sign on the log book in the pump room after completion of each
inspection.
For inspections at every 6 months, rectify any Defect found after the following inspections :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)

Check and verify operation of breeching inlets.

Check that breeching inlets and landing valves are not obstructed.
Check and verify that landing valves are fully closed and the handwheel are strapped locked.
Check that valve caps are secured in position.
Check rubber washers of the outlets and replace them if missing.
Check handwheel to ensure that they are not jammed, missing or broken.
Inspect the earthing connection and tighten it if necessary.
Check for damaged and any leakage of pipes, landing valves
Check the valve cabinets for damage.
Any other inspection as instructed by the SO Rep.

In addition, wet tests shall be carried out annually when the main can be checked for leaks.
44.7

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES FOR

WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance
service and call-back service to the wet rising main system as specified hereafter for a period of one year
commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works
as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period") for the
purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
All parts and equipment comprising the complete system shall be maintained and inspected strictly as
specified hereafter and in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix A32.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the routine inspections. Any
Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative
from HDB Branch Office to be present during these inspections.
Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for the inspections upon Substantial
Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works.
The Contractor's Supervisor shall also sign on the log book in the pump room after completion of each
inspection.
Maintenance of wet rising mains shall include the requirements as specified in Clause 44.6 "Servicing And
Maintenance Procedures For Dry Rising Main" including all subclauses under it.
In addition, the following checks are also required :
(a)

Monthly Tests
Inspect and service all machinery and equipment comprising the complete Plant and ancillary
equipment under this Contract once a month set out in the code of practice, except where
otherwise directed by the SO Rep.
At each such monthly inspection and service of the complete Plant and ancillary equipment, the
minimum items of Works detailed below and in the relevant code of practice shall be performed by
the Contractor. Any special maintenance requirements to Plant and equipment not covered by the
following list but recommended by the manufacturers shall deemed to be included.

BLDG04/S44.DOC(13)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 44-14
44.7

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES FOR

WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM (CONTD)
(a)

Monthly Tests (Contd)

(i)

BLDG04/S44.DOC(14)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Inspect all water pumps, and

(1)

Check all seals, glands and pipe lines for leaks, and rectify as necessary.

(2)

Check all pump bearings and lubricate with oil or grease as necessary.

(3)

Check the alignment and condition of all rubber couplings between pumps and drive
motors, and rectify as necessary.

(4)

Check all bolts and nuts for tightness, and tighten as necessary.

(5)

Check and verify the automatic starting of each pump by actuating the drain and test
valve in a manner to reduce the applied water pressure and the starting device and
simulate a fire condition. Record that the pressure is correct. Keep each pump
running for a period of at least five minutes and verify the operation of the relief
valve.

(6)

Check and verify pump running alarm and phase failure alarm.

(7)

Check pump starting equipment including fuses, circuit breakers and starters.

(8)

Conduct a running pressure test of each pump at full alarm condition by opening the
test valve of the pump testing pipe and recirculate water back to the water tanks.
Run each pump for a period of not less than 1 minute.

(9)

Simulate failure on one of the pump and verify the operation of the duty-standby
changeover mechanism.

(10)

Check and verify no excessive noise and vibration of each pump and motor whilst
the unit is running.

(ii)

Inspect and lubricate with grease as necessary all electric motors.

(iii)

Inspect and check the routine operation of all electrical starters, electrical control gears and
ancillary electrical apparatus, and

(iv)

Inspect and check the routine operation of all automatic controls, gears and relays, and

(v)

Inspect all water suction and storage tank and drains, clean and flush out the tank as
necessary. Check that stop valve and tank inlets interconnecting pipes and pump suction
pipes are secured fully open. Verify the operation of the automatic tank filling mechanism.
Visually check that tank contains requisite amount of water and verify operation of floatless
level control units.

(vi)

Check and inspect breeching inlets.

(vii)

Check and verify operation of water level indicators.

(viii)

At the monthly inspection of control valves, a gauge showing water pressure in the system
shall be read to make sure that normal pressure are being maintained - check the gauges
with an inspection gauge once a year.

Bldg Spec
Page 44-15
44.7

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES FOR

WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM (CONTD)
(b)

Quarterly Test
For quarterly testing, servicing and maintenance, repeat all the testing, servicing and maintenance
requirement as specified in Clause 44.6 "Servicing And Maintenance Procedures For Dry Rising
Main" including all subclauses under it and subclause 44.7(a) "Monthly Tests" above. In addition,
provide the servicing and maintenance as detailed below :

44.8

(i)

Check any relays for correct adjustment and quick effective operation.

(ii)

Thoroughly check the whole system for loose connections, terminals, frayed wires, etc.

(iii)

Replace any broken or faulty equipment as may be required.

(iv)

Enter test results and details of any faulty components, repairs and replacements in the log
book.

(v)

Every pump tank shall be completely flushed out and thoroughly cleaned annually. Other
maintenance as recommended by the tank supplier shall be carried out. The stays, cleats,
bolts and nuts, surface of the plates and other accessories of the tank shall be examined for
rust, corrosion, crack, etc.

(vi)

The water in the whole pipework system shall be completely drained out and filled with fresh
water again.

(vii)

Meggar test the motor winding cables and wiring to check the insulation resistance between
phase to phase and phase to earth.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

For routine tests and inspection during the Defects Liability Period, all parts, Plant and equipment
comprising the complete rising main system shall be maintained and inspected strictly in accordance with
the specifications and check-list as set out in Appendix A31 and A32.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the routine inspection. Any
Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative
from the HDB Branch Office to be present during the inspection.
Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for the routine inspection upon Substantial
Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works.

44.9

CALL-BACK SERVICE
During the Defects Liability Period, provide an efficient 24 hour (whole day) call-back service. All urgent
calls or complaints shall be attended to immediately upon notification by the Representative from the
Essential Maintenance Service Unit or Branch Office.
The Contractor shall provide a telephone pager for his maintenance supervisor and the pager number
shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any urgent call-back
service can be met.
In the event that the Contractor fails to :
(a)
(b)
(c)

respond within 30 minutes after being paged; or

attend to an urgent call or complaint immediately upon notification; or
carry out the routine inspection of the rising main system;

the SO Rep may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be
recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may in addition exercise his
rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the rising main system or to carry out
the routine servicing and maintenance of the rising main system due to or arising out of the Contractor's
failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the
Contractor's obligations under the Contract.
BLDG04/S44.DOC(15)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 44-16
44.10

MAKING GOOD DEFECTS AND LEAKAGES

During the Defects Liability Period, make good all Defect and leakages found in the system and
installation. Replace and/or repair all defective parts or items as produced in Appendix A29 whenever
required if such replacement or repair has been necessitated by the reasons of Defect of the system and
equipment.
The Contractor shall have a supervisor-in-charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be
carried out. The supervisor shall be thoroughly competent in supervising the service, maintenance and
repair of rising main systems and the workmen shall also be skilled in the service, maintenance and repair
of rising main systems.

44.11

RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS PRIOR TO ISSUANCE

OF MAINTENANCE CERTIFICATE
One month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with HDB
Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defect listed after this joint inspection shall
be rectified by the end of the succeeding one month commencing from the expiry date of the Defects
Liability Period.
Rectify the outstanding Defect and conduct detailed checks on the Works before arranging for inspection
by the Representative from HDB Branch Office for the purpose of certifying completion of rectification of
Defect.
After the second final inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office, a list of outstanding
Defect shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defect on the list within
fourteen days.
If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defect on the second final inspection, the SO Rep shall
exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the Employer shall in addition have the right to engage his own
workmen or other contractors to rectify and make good all Defect and the cost of rectification and charges
imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor.

44.12

LOG BOOK
Keep a log book at the pump room in which details of all alarms (genuine, practice test or false), faults,
tests, routine maintenance and repairs carried out shall be recorded. The type of log book and the record
format shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.

44.13

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
Provide the following consumable materials as and when required during the Maintenance Period :
(a)

All oils and grease required for lubrication of pump bearings, motor bearings, pivots and other
moving parts.

(b)

All carbon brushes required to replace worn brushes in electric motors.

(c)

All electric contact points required to replace those points in switch gears, motor starter gears,
electric control gears and electric relays.

(d)

All indicating lamps required to replace blown lamps.

(e)

All cotton waster, soap detergent and other cleaning materials required for cleaning purposes.

Total pages for this Section :

16
Section 45/.....

BLDG04/S44.DOC(16)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-1
SECTION 45
FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATION
45.1

DEFINITIONS
"Electrical Worker" shall mean a qualified competent person to perform electrical work under the Electrical
Workers and Contractors Licensing Act.

45.2

SCOPE OF WORK

45.2.1

General
The fire protection installation Works shall include the provision, installation, testing, commissioning and
maintenance of the Fire Fighting and Protection Installation.
Unless otherwise specified, the Works shall include :
(a)

Fire hose reel system (complete with hose reel, suction tanks, pressure tanks and pumpset)

(b)

Portable fire extinguishers (where applicable)

(c)

Fire hydrants

Pipes shall be made of steel in accordance with BS 1387. However, the pipework for hose reels with
direct water supply from PUB mains shall be copper or stainless steel, notwithstanding other provisions
specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it. For hose reels with direct water
supply from the PUB mains, pumpset and its associated Works including suction tanks and pressure
tanks shall not be part of the scope of fire protection installation Works for the purposes of this Section
including all clauses and subclauses under it.
Extinguishers with Class C ratings are required in the pump rooms. The number and capacity shall be in
accordance to CP 55.
The Drawings shall in part be diagrammatic and when read in conjunction with the Specifications shall be
intended to convey the scope of the Works, indicate the general arrangement of Plant, piping, and the like,
and show approximate sizes of Plant and outlets. The Contractor shall follow the Drawings as closely as
practicable in laying out the Works and in so doing shall co-ordinate all systems to secure the best
possible installation in the available space.
Where Works is specified but the exact location of Plant or control is not specifically shown, obtain the
approval of the SO Rep prior to the installation.
It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete operating system, unless specified
otherwise. The omission from the Specifications or Drawings of any details in construction, installation,
materials, or specialities necessary for a complete operating and safe system shall not relieve the
Contractor from the provision of a complete operating and safe system.
The Contractor shall provide all technical data as produced in Appendix A33.
45.2.2

Regulations And Codes Of Practice

Provide and install the fire hose reel system in accordance with BS 5306 : Part I, EN 671-1, SS CP 29 and
the requirements of local governing authorities such as BCA, FSSB and PUB.
The Contractor shall engage a company/firm which is registered with the BCA under the registration head
of ME06 (Fire Prevention & Protection System) and shall be responsible for all applications to and
arrangements with the local authorities such as PUB and FSSD representatives for the necessary
completion, testing and commissioning of the installation for each building under the Works and all costs
in connection therewith shall be deemed to have been included in the Contract Sum.
Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations or standards, of
the relevant authorities, the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works.

BLDG04/S45.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-2
45.2.3

Weatherproof And Flameproof Designs

Where any apparatus forming part of the installation is situated outdoor or subjected to damp condition,
such apparatus shall be of weatherproof design.
Where any apparatus forming part of the installation is sited in an area where flammable vapour of
explosive gas is liable to occur, such apparatus shall be of flameproof construction.

45.2.4

Provision Of Openings For Electrical Wirings

Provide structural openings through walls, floor and roof for the installation of pipework and electrical
wiring. Make good such openings with non-combustible and waterproof material to the satisfaction of the
SO Rep.

45.2.5

Painting
Galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer
and one coat of lead and chromate free primer and then painted with two coats of approved enamel paint.

45.2.6

Approval Of Drawings And Details Of Pumping Plant

Where applicable, submit to the SO Rep for approval two sets of the following documents :
(a)

Detailed proposal complete with necessary drawings.

(b)

Technical specifications and samples (if appropriate) of all equipment employed in the installation.

(c)

Electrical wiring diagram of the whole installation.

(d)

Technical specifications and characteristic curves of every pump to indicate point/s of performance.

(e)

Fully dimensioned scaled drawings of every pump room to indicate :

(i)
Proposed water levels in the suction tank of which the pump shall start and stop operation.
(ii)
Position of switchboard.
(iii)
Piping/Water tank layout.
(iv)
Sizes of all pipes & fittings.
(v)
Points and details of support for pipes, valves and fittings.

The Works shall only commence upon approval of the Contractor's proposal by the SO Rep but additional
approval shall be sought before any deviations from the approved proposal can be carried out, failing
which the whole installation may not be accepted by the SO Rep. The approval of the proposal shall in no
way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility should the Plant or any of its parts proved inadequate in
any aspect.
45.2.7

Quality Of Goods And Materials

The quality of goods and materials shall comply with the requirement and regulations of the HDB and the
relevant Authorities and shall also comply with the relevant Codes of Practices as stipulated. All materials
used shall be of the approved type unless otherwise specified.
Where products are manufactured under the PSB Batch Inspection Scheme, additional testing shall not
be necessary unless otherwise specified. The SO Rep shall be consulted when in doubt. Prior to the
installation of hose reels at the Site, where corrosion test is not conducted under the PSB Batch
Inspection Scheme, the Contractor shall arrange to submit a sample under the same batch to PSB for the
test. The test report shall be submitted to the SO Rep.
Any other relevant requirements issued by the FSSB shall be complied with.

BLDG04/S45.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-3
45.3

FIRE HOSE REEL SYSTEM

45.3.1

General
(a)

Installation
Fix the hose reels so that the centre is between 0.75 metre and 1.4 metre above floor level.
Mount the hose reels on a swivel bracket suitable for mounting in a 1.6mm thick sheet steel hose
reel cabinet or recesses clearly marked with "FIRE HOSE REEL" in white letters of at least 50mm
high. Hose reel cabinet or recesses shall be painted red.
Any doors provided for hose reel cabinet or recess shall be so hinged that they open approximately
180 degrees and they shall not obstruct the running out of the hose in either direction. The door
shall have a 4mm glass front with spring locked to open from within. The Contractor shall provide
five sets of master keys to the Employer. Where the hose reel is within a service duct, a signplate
with the words "FIRE HOSE REEL" in white letters of at least 50mm height shall be displayed on
the door.

(b)

Rubber Hose
The rubber hose shall be of 25mm internal diameter and shall have a minimum working pressure of
7 bars and shall be of the non-kinking type.
The rubber hose shall be manufactured with an inner tube or lining, a reinforcement braided with
textile material and an abrasion resistant rubber cover. The reinforcement shall consist of a single
rayon braid or double braid of cotton.
The length of rubber hose on the reel shall be 30 metres. There shall be no joints in the length of
the hose.
Samples and certification shall be provided to verify that the hose supplied is manufactured
according to the requirements of BS 3169/EN 694.

(c)

Stop-Valve
Provide and fix 25mm stop-valve for the connection of the hose reel to water supply. An indication
of the open and shut position shall be fixed or permanently marked on the wheel of the valve, and
the body of the valve except for gate valves which shall be marked with a directional arrow
indicating the direction of flow through the valve.

(d)

Shut-Off Nozzle
Provide a shut-off nozzle assembly in accordance with the following requirements :

BLDG04/S45.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

(i)

The assembly shall be constructed of a corrosion resistant metallic material or other

materials approved under EN 671-1.

(ii)

In the absence of a hose reel cabinet, means shall be provided for the secure attachment of
the assembly in a locked enclosure in such a manner that it cannot be disengaged until the
enclosure has been opened.

(iii)

The assembly shall be permanently marked to indicate the open and shut position of the
valve.

(iv)

The internal surface of the nozzle shall be finished to provide a smooth surface.

(v)

The internal diameter of the nozzle shall be 6.35mm.

Bldg Spec
Page 45-4
45.3.2

Hose Reel

45.3.2.1

General
The hose reel shall extend not more than 350mm from the mounting surface and shall have an overall
diameter not greater than 760mm. The side plates of the hose reel shall have a continuous outer rim and
shall be rigid in construction. The side of the reel shall be painted red.
The diameter of the inner core on which the hose is wound shall be not less than 200mm. When the full
length of the hose is coiled on the hose reel without the use of abnormal tension, the rim of the side plates
of the hose reel shall project at least 10mm beyond the external diameter of the coiled hose at any point.
The fittings to which the hose are attached on the hose reel shall be arranged in such a manner that the
hose is not restricted or flattened by the application of additional layers.
The water connection through the rubber hose shall permit the full flow of water to the hose without
external leakage during any rotation of the hose reel. The hose reel waterways connecting the water
supply to the hose, including the inlet pipe after the stop valve, shall be constructed of non-ferrous
material and/or stainless steel and/or galvanised steel. Where hose reels are within service ducts, they
shall be mounted such that their operations are not hindered. The mounting position shall be approved by
the SO Rep.
The clips used to attach the hose to the nozzle and the drum shall be galvanised ear clips.

45.3.2.2

Markings
Mark every hose reel with the following information :
(i)

The manufacturer's name, trade name or mark.

(ii)

Instructions for operation and use which shall include the following :
(1)
Turn on stop valve
(2)
Run out hose
(3)
Turn on water at nozzle
(4)
The hose shall be fully charged before winding it onto the reel
(5)
The year of manufacture
(6)
The test pressure in Bar

All notices and instructions shall be weather and corrosion resistant and shall be set out in letters easily
readable. In addition, the operating instructions "For Emergency Only : Break glass to open the door from
inside" and "TO TURN ON THE INLET VALVE BEFORE RUNNING OUT THE HOSE" shall be of 12mm
height and printed in white on the hose reel cabinet. Where there is no cabinet, the same notice shall be
provided on a 2mm thick aluminium plate affixed to the wall adjacent to the reel.
45.3.2.3

Tests
The hose reel shall be factory tested against water leakage after assembly at a test pressure of 13.8 bars
(200 psi). The Contractor shall furnish documentary evidence of such factory test to the SO Rep before
delivery of the hose reels to the Site on request by the SO Rep.

45.3.3

Pumpset
(a)

Hose Reel Pumpset

The hose reel pumpset shall consist of two sets of fire pumpsets, one duty and one standby to the
approval of the SO Rep. Pumpsets shall be of centrifugal multistage vertical pumps.
Notwithstanding the above requirements, single stage centrifugal end suction pumps shall be used
where applicable. The pumps shall have stainless steel shafts and mechanical seals and shall be
driven through flexible couplings by electric motors with speed of not more than 3000 rpm. Each
pump shall be capable of providing a flow of water of at least 0.8 litres per second in the rising
main.

BLDG04/S45.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-5
45.3.3

Pumpset (Cont'd)
(a)

Hose Reel Pumpset (Cont'd)

Multistage vertical pumps shall have stainless steel outer sleeve and the suction/discharge casing
shall be of cast iron. The pump impeller shall be of either stainless steel or bronze.
Each pump shall also be capable of being started or stopped manually. The standby pump shall
be so arranged that it will operate automatically on failure of the duty pump. The pumpsets shall be
able to withstand 20 times start/stop per hour.
Provide each pump with a ball valve and flexible connection at both the suction and discharge
ends, a spring loaded check valve at the discharge end and a strainer at the suction end. The
suction and discharge connections shall be flanged. Screwed suction and discharge connections
shall have flange adaptors.
Provide pressure gauges at the main discharge pipe. The gauge shall have a range of at least
twice the rated working pressure of the pump.
All pumps shall be automatically primed at all times. This shall be activated if the pumps are sited
so that at least two thirds of the effective capacity of the suction tank is above the level of the
centre of pump suction. Where this is not possible, provide separate priming tanks with foot valves
for each pump.
Submit to the SO Rep for approval the characteristic performance curves of the pumps offered.
The efficiency of the pumpset shall not be less than 50% at the operating conditions.
Mark each pump conspicuously and permanently with letter "P1" or "P2" to the satisfaction of the
SO Rep.
Provide and install all the pipework and accessories connecting the pumpsets to the suction tank
and hose reel riser.
Provide spring type vibration isolation mounting for each pump to ensure minimal vibration
transmission to the building structure.

(b)

Hose Reel Pumps Controls

Provide, install, connect and test all necessary starting and control equipment.
Enclose all such equipment in a front connected wall mounted and manufactured from electrogalvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5mm thickness IP54 cubicle with full locking hinged door.
The cubicle shall be painted in accordance with sub-clause 45.3.6(h)(iv) "Painting".
The sequence of operation of the hose reel pumps shall be as follows :
(i)

The duty pumpset shall automatically come into operation when a pressure switch located in
the branch out pipe feeding the two pressure tanks detects a fall of normal static pressure in
the pipe below a predetermined value.

(ii)

If the duty pump fails to start or the demand for water exceeds the nominal output of the
duty pump (ie. when three or more hose reels operate simultaneously), this drop in pressure
shall be sensed by another pressure switch located adjacent to the first pressure switch,
which shall then start the standby pump. The exact cut-in pressure of the standby pump
shall be varied according to the normal system pressure and the performance curve of the
pump.

(iii)

As the requirements for water reduces, the pressure in the system increases. When there
is no demand to the system and the normal static pressure has been established, this
preset pressure shall be sensed by both pressure switches and the duty and standby pump
shall be switched off respectively.
After each start/stop pumping cycle, the duty pump shall be alternated automatically by the
use of an auto changeover relay to avoid one pump remaining stationary for long period.
Provide a manual selector switch to select the duty or standby pump.

BLDG04/S45.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-6
45.3.3

Pumpset (Cont'd)
(b)

Hose Reel Pumps Controls (Cont'd)

Provide a 7-Day Dial, 2-Hour Dial time switch to start the pumps running for a pre-set duration of
time weekly. At a pre-set time of each week, the time switch shall energise the coil of a solenoid
valve for a pre-set period of time. The solenoid valve shall be located in a by-pass pipe connecting
the main discharge line with both the suction tanks. As the solenoid valve is opened, water shall
be forced to flow back to the water tanks by the system pressure which will then reduce
progressively. This drop in system pressure shall be sensed by the pressure switch which shall
then start the duty pump and the standby pump.
Each pump shall be activated after the other when the solenoid valve is opened at two different
pre-set times on the time switch. Provide a globe valve to throttle excessive pressure upstream of
the solenoid valve.
Install a ball stop valve to enable manual test run of the pumpsets and a pressure relief valve to
avoid excessive build-up of system pressure in parallel with the solenoid valve.
Use the third pressure switch installed next to the above two pressure switches to initiate an
audible and visual alarm in the event that the normal pressure in the pipe falls to 1 bar.
The controller shall be fully wired and mounted within the cubicle requiring only incoming supply,
necessary control and alarm connections. The following starting and control equipment shall be
incorporated in the cubicle :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
(xiii)
(xiv)
(xv)
(xvi)
(xvii)
(xviii)
(xix)

1 no. ON/OFF isolating switch for incoming.

1 no. MCB unit for incoming.
2 sets ON/OFF isolators, each completed with MCB unit for starters.
2 no. direct on line starters.
2 no. thermal overload relays with ambient temperature compensation.
1 no. rotary selector switch for AUTO/MANUAL selection.
1 no. pump selector switch.
2 sets START/STOP button switch for the starters.
8 no. MCB units for control circuits.
1 no. automatic change over relay (100% continuous rating).
2 no. relays to activate alarm bell for motor overload trip.
1 set of cancel alarm pushbutton and cancel alarm relay.
Relays to control the pumpsets.
1 no. water tank low level warning light.
1 no. power supply on light.
2 no. pump "RUN" indicating lights.
2 no. pump "TRIP" indicating lights.
1 no. low pressure warning light.
1 no. 7-Day Dial, 2-Hour Dial Time Switch to control the weekly running
of the pumpsets.
(xx) Voltage-free contacts to relay signal to remote fire indicator board and
initiate a fire alarm when flow switch is actuated.
(xxi) 2 no. relay for lamp and bell test.
(xxii) 1 no. pushbutton for lamp and bell test.
(xxiii) 1 no. 230V/24V AC transformer.
(xxiv) Terminal block for connection to remote equipment.
Submit the control circuit diagram for approval before the installation. Provide the pressure switch
settings on a 240mm x 150mm perspex sheet mounted by self-adhesive tape. The details and
locations shall be approved by the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S45.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-7
45.3.4

Pipes & Fittings

(a)

Scope
This subclause sets out the requirements, standards of workmanship and materials in general for
the piping system for the hose reel system.

(b)

General
Before delivery to the Site, clean all pipes thoroughly so that they are free from scale and rust.
Reject old and damaged pipes and use only new pipes. On the Site, all pipes shall be checked
again and thoroughly wire brushed and prime coated prior to the installation.
Install all pipework so that clearance of approximately 80mm is left between the outside of the pipe
and the nearest wall, ceiling or equipment surface, whenever possible. Pipe joints or fittings shall
not be permitted within the thickness of walls, floors, any partitions or below a beam.

(c)

Materials
Provide and install all pipework as indicated in the Drawings.
The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free from
Defect that would impair their performance. Cutting, bending and fixing shall be in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Pipes shall be factory marked with the manufacturer's name or identification mark and classification
of pipes. Any unmarked pipes shall not be accepted.
Lay pipes outside buildings underground, and the depth of cover measured from the top of the pipe
to the finished surface of the ground level shall not be less than 750mm.
Stainless steel pipes shall comply with BS 4127:Part 2. Stainless steel pipe fittings shall be of
capillary fittings and compression fittings in accordance with BS 864:Part 2. Fittings of 15mm and
longer shall be legibly marked with the maker's name or trade mark. All stainless steel water pipes,
fittings and accessories shall be approved by Water Department, PUB. Ductile iron cement lined
pipes shall comply with BS EN 545 and medium galvanised steel pipes shall comply with SS17.
Joints and connections to galvanised steel pipework of up to and including 65mm diameter shall be
made by means of screwed connections. Join pipes of 80mm diameter and above by means of
flanged connections. Unless otherwise specified, use galvanised steel bolts and nuts for all
supports and flanged connections.
Flanges shall be raised face conforming to BS 4504. All flanges shall be flushed and aligned, and
shall be made with corrugated jointing rings, coated on both sides with the recommended jointing
compound. Use ductile iron cement lined pipes where pipes are concealed such as those within
concrete slabs or below ground.

(d)

Valves
All valves shall either be of bronze, brass or cast steel construction and conforming to the relevant
British Standard and be suitable for the working pressure encountered.
Where valves are located above 2m from the floor level or in an inaccessible location they shall be
operated by chain mechanism.
Valves used for working pressure above 19 bar shall be of the flanged type. All valves shall be
located in accessible positions.
Isolation valves of 50mm diameter and below installed along pipework inside the pump room shall
be of ball stop valves approved by Water Department, PUB.
Valves up to and including 65mm diameter where connected to steel pipe shall be of brass/bronze
with female screwed connections.

BLDG04/S45.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-8
45.3.4

Pipes & Fittings (Cont'd)

(d)

Valves (Cont'd)
Valves of 80mm diameter and above where fitted to steel pipes shall be of the flanged cast iron or
ductile iron type.
Check valves shall be of the spring loaded non-slamming type. The Contractor shall select these
valves in relation to the velocity of the water in the pipe. In all cases the valve shall operate silently
on reversal of water flow.
Solenoid valve shall be of the normally closed, magnetically operated pilot type. Valve body shall
be of brass or bronze and the solenoid coil shall be replaceable on Site without removing the valve
body from pipe fitting. Install "Y-type" strainer upstream of the solenoid valve to trap any dirt and
debris. The power supply of the solenoid valve shall be 24V AC 50Hz.

(e)

Strainers
Install "Y-type" strainers upstream of all pumpsets. Provide all strainers with isolating valves so
that the strainers can be cleaned without draining away the water of the system. Where a system
cannot be shut-down for strainer cleaning, install by-pass in parallel to the strainer.

(f)

Pressure Gauges, Pressure Switches And Flow Switches

Pressure gauges shall be of the 100mm diameter brass cased type. They shall be designed for
pipe mounting and be provided with suitable gauge cocks and snubbers to prevent vibration of the
needles. Pressure gauges shall conform to BS 1780 Part 2.
Pressure gauges shall be of the Bourdon tube type and be calibrated in m-bar. Select suitable
gauges for mid-range indications at normal working pressure and the maximum measurable
pressure shall be twice the maximum working pressure.
Pressure gauges shall have scales with divisions not exceeding 0.2 bar for a maximum scale value
of 10 bars, not exceeding 0.5 bar for a maximum scale value of 16 bars, and not exceeding 1.0 bar
for a maximum scale values in excess of 16 bars.
Pressure switches shall comply with BS 6134 and shall be of automatic reset type. Install pressure
gauge and pressure switches near to the pressure tanks. The enclosures of the pressure switches
shall be of water tight IP 65 construction.
Pressure switches shall be suitable for conduit construction and with terminal block for wire
connection. Power supply for the pressure switches shall be 24V AC 50 Hz.
Failure of pressurized components of the pressure switches shall not result in a build up of
pressure within the enclosure.
The parts in contact with water for the pressure switches and pressure gauges shall be of brass,
stainless steel or other approved corrosion resistant materials.
The pressure switch shall have adjustable and independent high and low pressure settings.

(g)

Pressure Tanks
Two rechargeable pressure tanks of replaceable membrane type and pre-charged according to
operating conditions shall be installed at the discharge of the pumps to keep the hose reel riser
pressurized at any time.
The pressure tank shall be of carbon steel, designed and fabricated to British Standard or Standard
of American Society of Mechanical Engineers for Pressure Vessels. The Contractor shall furnish
the design and detailed calculations for the proposed pressure tanks. The design and construction
of the pressure tanks shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep.
The pressure tanks shall be of the vertical type and the impermeable diaphragm shall be of heavy
duty vinyl or butyl material.

BLDG04/S45.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-9
45.3.4

Pipes & Fittings (Cont'd)

(g)

Pressure Tanks (Cont'd)

The system shall consist of two numbers of interconnected pressure tanks. The capacity of each
tank shall not be less than 50 litres.
The pump shall be started automatically by a pressure switch to recharge the pressure tanks in
response to a drop of storage pressure below a pre-set value according to operating conditions.
The pump shall be stopped automatically when the required storage pressure has been reached in
the pressure tanks.
Provide each pressure tank with safety relief valve.
Technical details including the manufacturer, specification and pressure setting shall be labelled on
metal or plastic plate attached to each of the tank.

(h)

Vibration Isolation Connectors

All pipe connections to pumpsets and any equipment subjected to vibration shall be carried out by
means of flexible neoprene connectors.
Unless specifically permitted by the SO Rep, rigid connections between pipelines and equipment
shall be rejected.
Use neoprene or spring hangers from approved manufacturer for supporting pump delivery and
return mains.

(i)

Pipe Supports And Fittings

Support all pipework by pipe hangers and supports. Unless otherwise stated, all pipe hangers and
supports shall be of mild steel adjustable for height.
Vertical pipe risers penetrating through floor slab shall be supported to each floor by clamp or
collars. All vertical pipe risers shall have foot elbows or concrete block supports at their lowest
point.
The spacing of fixings of pipe supports shall not exceed the following :

Material of Pipe

Diameter of Pipe
(mm)

Maximum Spacing
Horizontal
(m)

Vertical
(m)

Galvanized Steel Pipe

10 to 15
20 to 25
32
40 to 50
65 to 80

1.75
2.5
2.75
3.0
3.5

2.5
3.0
3.0
3.5
4.5

Ductile Iron Pipe

75 to 100

2.75

2.75

Stainless Steel Pipe

10 to 15
20 to 25
32
40 to 50
65 to 80

1.75
2.5
2.75
3.0
3.5

2.5
3.0
3.0
3.5
4.5

Fixing shall wherever possible be built into the building structure. Alternatively, they shall be
secured to the building structure by means of expansion or power driven bolts.

BLDG04/S45.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-10
45.3.4

Pipes & Fittings (Cont'd)

(j)

Pipework, Testing And Cleaning

All pipework shall be flushed with clean water before final topping up and putting into service.
All pipework shall be hydrostatically tested to 10 bars or two times the working pressure whichever
is the greater before lagging or putting into service. The test pressure shall be maintained for a
minimum duration of 24 hours.

45.3.5

Suction Tanks
(a)

General
Tank supplying water for domestic purposes shall not be used as suction for hose reel installation.
Lay a separate line from the PUB bulk meter position to supply water to the suction tanks or the fire
hose reels directly in case boosting of the PUB water pressure is not required. The line shall serve
the fire hose reel system only. To prevent contamination, provide approved double check valves
assembly complete with drain cocks in accordance with the Drawings.
The effective water capacity of two suction tanks with automatic inflow shall not be less than 1100
litres. Effective water capacity shall be labelled on the tanks as directed by the SO Rep.
The tanks shall be constructed of reinforced concrete and flanged stainless steel (AISI Grade 316)
pipe connections. The interconnecting pipes for the tanks shall be correspondingly aligned.
Nominal pipe thickness for stainless steel pipe shall be 4mm complying with JIS G3459 Schedule
20S.
Provide and install piping to each suction tank of nominal diameter as follows :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)

1 no. 54mm diameter stainless steel incoming pipe from PUB bulk meter;
1 no. 50mm diameter galvanised steel outlet pipe to fire hose reel booster pump;
1 no. 32mm diameter galvanised steel by-pass pipe;
1 no. 100mm diameter ductile iron washout pipe;
1 no. 100mm diameter ductile iron over-flow pipe. The over-flow pipe shall be connected
to the washout pipe if suction tanks are situated at the 2nd storey and above.
1 no. 28mm diameter stainless steel over-flow warning pipe if suction tanks are located at
2nd storey and above; and
1 no. 100mm diameter cement mortar lined cast iron or ductile iron interconnecting pipe.

Provide a 100mm diameter UPVC air vent to each tank. All air vents shall be fitted with elbow end
and covered by mosquito netting.
Provide a 100mm diameter UPVC pipe to each tank for the mounting of level control electrodes.
(b)

Level Control
(i)

Ball Float Valve

Approved 50mm equilibrium ball float valve shall be fitted in the suction tank and bolted
directly to the incoming water supply pipe. It shall be able to operate on a water pressure in
2
the incoming water supply pipe of not less than 700 KN per m and shall be approved by the
PUB. The fulcrum and lever shall be of bronze with copper ball float. The internal valve
shall be of bronze with leather trim and the packing plate shall be of gun metal with winged
guide and links. The body shall be of cast iron with bronze lines and gun metal seal ring
and the flange shall be at right angle and drilled to BS 4504 or BS 10 with approved rating.

BLDG04/S45.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-11
45.3.5

Suction Tanks (Cont'd)

(b)

Level Control (Cont'd)

(ii)

Floatless Level Control Relay Units

Connect floatless level control electrodes mounted on each suction tank directly to the relay
units mounted on the wall beside the tank.
Arrange floatless level control electrodes to stop the pumpset at pre-determined low level.
Use a floatless level control relay unit mounted on the wall beside the suction tank to
provide over-riding control of pressure switches such that at a pre-set low water level in the
suction tank, the pressure switches shall not start the pump. At that low water level, even a
pump in operation shall be stopped by the relay unit.
The floatless level control electrodes shall also actuate a warning indicating light and an
alarm bell when the water level in the suction tank falls to a predetermined level.
The floatless level control relay unit shall be of plug-in relay unit type.
Electrodes shall be stainless steel and provided with electrode separators.
Electrode holders mounted on tanks shall be easily accessible and removable to facilitate
maintenance and shall be installed to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Run the wiring in conduits from the electrodes to the floatless level control relay units and
keep it as short as possible. The wiring to the electrodes shall not run through the same
conduit as the power supply wiring.

(c)

Alarm And Emergency Device

Install alarm device to be turned-on by the floatless level control relay unit which shall be activated
when low water level in the suction tanks and/or low pressure relay and/or thermal overload relays
for the pump motors are encountered. This alarm device shall be in the form of an alarm bell
placed beside the control panel in the pumproom and a red bulb placed outside the pumproom and
near the entrance or other location as directed by the SO Rep. The bell shall be weatherproof and
of heavy duty type.
The alarm bell shall give a distinctive sound different from that of any fire alarm sounder and the
audible fault alarm at the fire indicator board. Provide a pushbutton to cancel the alarm bell.
The make and model shall be approved by the SO Rep.

45.3.6

Power Supply
(a)

General
The power supply available for electric motors is 415 volts, three phase, 50 cycles alternating
current.

(b)

Motors
The electric motors shall be squirrel-cage totally enclosed fan cooled type with minimum Class F
insulation unless specified otherwise and shall be designed for continuous maximum rating. Motor
type and model shall be approved by the SO Rep before the installation.
Terminal boxes shall be totally enclosed, of water-tight design and fitted with cable glands.
The motor efficiency and power factors of the motors shall be more than 90% and 0.85 respectively
at full load and shall comply with the current PUB Regulations.

BLDG04/S45.DOC(11)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-12
45.3.6

Power Supply (Cont'd)

(c)

Motor Starters
The starters for the motors shall be direct on-line type.
The starter shall provide means of starting or stopping the motors by push-button or be
automatically actuated by the pressure switches in the main riser pipe.
Each starter shall have time relay, undervoltage release, no volt release, adjustable and ambient
compensated (-5C to 50C) thermal overload protection with manual reset and pilot lamp. The
starter shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before the installation. The operating voltage
of the control coil shall be 230V.
The starting apparatus shall be of "frequent duty" rating and be capable of starting under the above
conditions intermittently up to 40 times per hour at not less than 20 seconds intervals. The
mechanical and electrical endurance of the starter shall be not less than 50,000 operations.
Provide the manufacturer's certificate to this effect when requested by the SO Rep. The starters
shall be wired in such a way that the floatless level control relay unit shall be able to override other
pump controls and actuate the pumps according to different pre-set conditions.

(d)

7-Day Dial, 2-Hour Dial Time Switch

Use an approved type of time switch. Connect the time switch to control the coil of the solenoid
valve. Time switch shall be able to operate on a 7-day basis with a minimum 24 hours reserve to
cater for temporary power failure. The time switch shall be capable of providing at least two on-off
operations per week.
Time switches shall incorporate a 7-day dial and a 2-hour dial with a shortest switch period of not
more than 3 minutes for the 2-hour dial. Provide ON/OF lever transfer switch for each time switch
to facilitate manual ON/OFF to override control without disturbing the preset schedule. The power
supply for the timer shall be 230V AC 50 Hz.
Provide time switch with a clear plastic front cover.

(e)

Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary relays shall be suitable for AC operation and shall have silver contacts with an inherent
self cleaning action.
Auxiliary relays shall close satisfactorily at 80% nominal volts and hold in satisfactorily at 65%
nominal volts.
Auxiliary relays with functions common to a number of circuits and which are fitted to a common
panel as referred to previously shall be of the plug-in type.
Auxiliary relays fitted to demountable units shall be of the plug-in type where possible. Fixed relays
are acceptable if they are a design feature of the units.
Auxiliary relays shall have a minimum of 6 contacts rated at 5 Amps minimum for an inductive load.
Contacts shall be capable of carrying and breaking without damage, the inrush and operating
currents of contactor or starter coils they are switching. The contact arrangement shall be easily
alterable.

(f)

Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons shall be of the oil tight pattern heavy duty unless otherwise specified and rated at a
minimum of 5 Amps inductive. Pushbuttons shall consist of an actuating button assembly coupled
to an interchangeable contact assembly of sufficient poles to suit the application. Pushbutton
bezels shall be black.
Employ the following colour codes :
Green
Red
Black

BLDG04/S45.DOC(12)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

"START" or "ON"
"STOP" or "OFF"
Reset

Bldg Spec
Page 45-13
45.3.6

Power Supply (Cont'd)

(g)

Indicator Lamps
Indicator lamps shall be 24V rating. Each lamp shall be clearly labelled to indicate the designation
of service, circuit and locations.
Indicating lamps shall be of the domed glass or plastic lens type rated at 6 watts. The indication
shall be clearly visible from the sides or front.
Indicating lamps shall have black bezels. The bodies of indicator lamps shall be ventilated to
ensure efficient heat dissipation. Connection to lamps shall be by screws or clamp terminals;
soldered terminations shall be rejected.
Employ the following colour codes :
Green
Amber
Red

(h)

"ON" status
"OFF" status
"FAULT", "FAILURE", "ALARM" status

Hose Reel Pump Control Panel

(i)

Construction
Provide and install approved switchboard required to serve the booster pumpsets. The wall
mounted switchboard cabinet shall be installed in the pumproom and it shall be near to the
entrance of the pumproom. The location shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
The cabinet shall be of front connected type and unless otherwise specified, manufactured
from minimum 2mm gauge sheet steel using folded section or angle form bracing for rigid
construction. The cabinet shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof.
The construction shall be such that it permits ready access to the interior of the cubicles for
operation and maintenance purposes. The opening of a panel door shall allow access to
that compartment only. Provide continuous mild steel to complete separate adjacent
cubicle.
Provide switchboard cabinet with rubber bushes at knockout holes for the entry of all
incoming and outgoing cables. Schematic wiring and field connection diagrams shall be
permanently secured to the inside of the enclosure door.
Instrument indicating lights, rotary switches, selector switches, push buttons, isolating
switches, etc shall be mounted directly on the front panel with locknuts to hold such items
firmly in position under all conditions of operation. Indicating lights shall be of the
transformer type.
Isolating switch shall be mechanically interlocked so that the enclosure door cannot be
opened with the handle in the `ON' position.
Carry out the whole of the electrical Works in compliance with the PUB Wiring Regulations
and subject to the approval of the SO Rep.

(ii)

Internal Wiring
The control panel shall all be internally wired, including all wirings between individual units
and between units and terminal strips located near the room entrance.
Number all terminals on the strips and these numbers shall correspond with the numbers on
the wiring and field connection diagrams permanently secured to the inside of the enclosure
door.
Wiring shall be multi-strand of not less than 1.5 mm2 copper conductors, PVC insulated,
colour coded and numbered for identification.

BLDG04/S45.DOC(13)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-14
45.3.6

Power Supply (Cont'd)

(h)

Hose Reel Pump Control Panel (Cont'd)

(ii)

Internal Wiring (Cont'd)

Identification shall be by means of moulded ferrules or sleeves at both ends of the cables.
The ferrules or sleeves shall be of insulating materials with white glossy finish and black
lettering. The ferrules or sleeves shall be unaffected by oil or damp. The numbering shall
be approved by the SO Rep. No PVC tapes shall be used for colour coding of cables.
Each wire shall be separately terminated with tinned (but not soldered) crimped lugs of
approved type. Conductor terminations need not be provided where insertion or tunnel type
terminals are employed. Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, connect only one wire
to each terminal of insertion or tunnel type block. Terminals shall be identified using an
approved marking and numbering system.
Run all control circuit wirings separately from power circuit wiring and protect them by using
MCB units or fuses.

(iii)

Labelling
Provide each supervisory control panel with a main label mounted in a prominent position.
Labels shall be easily replaceable and shall be secured with brass screws or rust proofed
steel screws or in other approved manners.
Unless otherwise specified, all labels shall be black lettering engraved on white traffolyte.
The size of lettering and the wording of the labels shall be approved by the SO Rep. Submit
schedule to the SO Rep for approval prior to manufacture.
Labels shall designate circuit number and equipment function.
Label terminal strips to identify the circuit number, phase connection, terminal number and
function - eg. control, indication, protection, etc.
Label clearly all control relays, timers, fuses and other items of switchgear located on
common panels to identify circuit number, function and rating.

(iv)

Painting
After degreasing, apply one coat of etch primer, follow by one undercoat and two top coats
of synthetic enamel. All coats shall be stoved baked to paint manufacturer's requirements.
The finished colour of internal and external surfaces shall be red.
Make good all damages occurred during transit or installation to a standard equal to that
manufactured originally.

(v)

Wiring
The wiring shall comply with SS CP 5.
Label clearly isolation switches and circuit breakers on the power feed to the pumps : "Fire
Hose Reel Pump Supply - Do Not Switch Off In Case Of Fire".
Install the cables from the pumproom electrical mains isolator to the pump's starting and
control switchboard.
Trunking cables and wiring within the pumproom shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 suitable
for a 230V single phase 50 cycles system and they shall be carried in conduit or cable
trunking.

BLDG04/S45.DOC(14)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-15
45.3.6

Power Supply (Cont'd)

(h)

Hose Reel Pump Control Panel (Cont'd)

(v)

Wiring (Cont'd)
The metal conduit shall be of heavy gauge, G.I. conduit (Class B), complying with BS 4568,
free from internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by
means of spacer bar saddles at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres
for vertical runs.
Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of screwed socket and smooth bore butt
to adaptor boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist of a
flanged coupling, lead washer and smooth bore bush. Where the conduit is in contact with
any structural steel work, make permanent metallic connection between the conduit and
steel work.
All conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and
shall be earthed with matching standing copper link.
Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and shall be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel
sheet, in 1.83m or 2.44m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on
one end at each length. Treat the trunking with anti-corrosion paint and finishing paint to a
minimum thickness of 45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be by means of round headed
bolts and nuts. Lay 4mm x 20mm copper earth tape in the trunking run. The copper shall
be tinned where it is bolted down.
Complete the entire trunking and conduit installation before the cables are drawn. The
number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall comply with SS CP 5.
Test all seals not less than 24 hours after completion. This test shall be made with
insulation testing equipment of the "Megger" type at 500V or other approved and obtain an
infinity reading before the conductors are connected to any apparatus.
Terminate wiring in conduit and duct in the floor in approved junction boxes adjacent to the
machine or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible tubing enclosing the cables between
motors and junction boxes.
Earth all non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. Earth continuity conductor
shall have cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in Table D1 of CP 5.

45.4

PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

Provide and install portable fire extinguisher with dry powder fire extinguisher agents under pressure as
shown in the Drawings. Provide and install each fire extinguisher complete with horn, wall bracket and
visual indicator (indicating whether the extinguisher has been used). All fire extinguishers shall comply
with SS 232 and shall be approved for use by all relevant local authorities including the PSB, URA, FSSB
and Factory Inspectorate.
Good practice as recommended in BS 5306:Pt 3 shall be observed and implemented where applicable.
Install fire extinguisher at a height of 1m above the floor level on the hangers/brackets supplied together
with the fire extinguisher. They shall be placed in a manner such that their operating instructions face
outward. The operating instructions shall be simple and shown clearly in pictorial form. Fire extinguisher
shall be embossed with 2 number of HDB logo not smaller than 30mm x 30mm on the external face of
every extinguisher. The logo shall be red and white. No stick-on logo shall be acceptable as a substitute.
House each fire extinguisher in a 1.6mm thick sheet steel case complete with front hinged door, 3mm
thick glass panel and handle master lock. The case shall be coated with 2 coats of red paint. Lettering
such as "FIRE" or "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" shall be eminently and permanently marked on the case and
shall be of approved sizes and colour. Provide 5 sets of master keys for the door lock. Provide each case
with a master key placed inside a recess covered by a front break glass and the recess shall be mounted
on the front hinged door.

BLDG04/S45.DOC(15)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-16
45.5

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

45.5.1

General
The Contractor shall submit an application to the SO Rep to witness the inspection and commissioning
test of the completed installation. The application shall include information on the testing appointment
date and statement of completion of the whole Works by the Contractor. The appointed date shall be at
least 2 months before the Substantial Completion of the building block.
The Contractor shall provide complete information as produced in Appendix A34 and submit two copies to
the SO Rep one week before the testing of the system.
Provide a complete set of testing equipment. The minimum requirements of which shall be set out below :
(a)
(b)
(c)

Tachometer with accessories for measurement of pumps and motor shaft speeds.
Meter-Recorder for measuring flow rate through orifice plate.
All necessary electrical testing equipment such as insulation resistance tester.

The whole of the instruments and equipment and labour required for conducting these tests and
demonstrations shall be provided by the Contractor and the cost thereof shall be included in the Contract
Sum. The test instruments and equipment shall remain the property of the Contractor.
45.5.2

Test Records
The records shall include :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)

45.5.3

date and time for inspection or test

person carrying out the test
test results noted
any external factors significantly affecting the results
follow-up actions required
work carried out as a result of (e) above with date and result of re-test

Pipework
All water pipework and other fittings shall be hydrostatically tested to 10 bar or 2 times the working
pressure whichever shall be the greater, and this test pressure shall be maintained for 24 hours. Allowable
pressure drop during the 24 hour testing shall be decided by the SO Rep but generally shall not exceed
3% of test pressure. During tests, all welded joints shall be hammered.

45.5.4

Control Equipment
Set and calibrate all limit switches, pressure switches, time switches, etc. as required to ensure that
operating directions are correct. Test and verify the time and control sequence.

45.5.5

Pumps
Check all pumps for alignment, flow rates, pressure and speed and their balance to comply with the
required flow and head.

45.5.6

Performance Test
On Substantial Completion of the Works, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep two copies of the test
results using approved HDB Testing Form. Provide a minimum of seven days notice to the SO Rep to
verify the test results on the Site and demonstrate to the SO Rep that the installation if adjusted and
regulated correctly fulfils the function for which it has been designed. Adjust, balance and regulate the
Works concerned as necessary until the required conditions are attained.
Should the SO Rep find discrepancies between the recorded test results and the measurements
demonstrated to him on the Site, the test shall be repeated by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the SO
Rep.

BLDG04/S45.DOC(16)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-17
45.5.7

Electrical Commissioning Tests

Test the complete installation, both before and after the connection, to the requirements of the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all electrical tests at the Site in the presence of the SO Rep during
the whole of the period required for the tests.
All materials and equipment provided or installed which fail the tests shall be replaced or rectified at once
by the Contractor and the tests shall be repeated.
Conduct all tests to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Provide all necessary instruments, apparatus, connections, skilled and unskilled labour required for the
tests to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Make accurate records of all tests and furnish test certificates and a schedule of the results in an
approved form. Two copies of such schedules and of each test certificate shall be required.
Make good any circuit or section of the installation which fails to comply with the required standard for
acceptance.
The site tests to be carried out on each completed section of the electrical installation where applicable,
shall be as follows :

45.5.8

(a)

Insulation resistance tests to earth and between conductors of cables and wires

(b)

Continuity tests.

(c)

Tests to prove correct operation of interlocks, tripping and closing circuits, indications, etc.

(d)

Test operation of alarm devices.

(e)

Rotational tests on all motors.

(f)

Insulation resistance test on any electrical apparatus supplied and/or installed before and
after connecting such apparatus to the supply.

Hose Reel Tests

(a)

Flushing Out
Before any water is introduced into the hose reel, it shall be thoroughly flushed out to ensure that
no harmful matter is passed into the reel. After flushing out, the tubing shall be run out and the
water turned on to establish that the assembly is fully operational.

(b)

Procedure For Direct PUB Mains Supplies

The most hydraulically remote reel shall provided a jet of at least 10m in length at a flow rate of at
least 0.4 litres per second.

(c)

Procedure For Boosted Supplies

The most hydraulically remote reel shall provided a jet of at least 10m in length at a flow rate of at
least 0.4 litres per second. Check and verify pump running alarm.
Repeat the test with simulated mechanical or electrical failure of the duty pump. Check and test
the ability of the standby pump to come into service automatically and to maintain the required
outputs. Check and verify pump failure warning indicated on local control panel and remote fire
indicator board.
Test the various control features of the hose reel booster pump to verify that they function correctly.

BLDG04/S45.DOC(17)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-18
45.5.8

Hose Reel Tests (Contd)

(d)

Putting Into Operational Readiness

When the tests have been satisfactorily completed, restore the system to its normal operating
state. Reels shall never be left under pressure and, where practicable, drain the hose prior to
returning it to the drum.
Restore the hose on the drum, pay particular attention to automatic hose reels to ensure that the
automatic valve is fully closed when the hose has been restored. Where an isolation valve has
been incorporated, close the isolation valve on completion of storage, and complete the nozzle
interlock, where fitted.

45.5.9

Final Drawings And Operating Manuals

On completion of the installation, provide three sets of operation and maintenance manuals and the
testing record/results of each installation.
The Contractor shall also submit to the SO Rep one set of A1 size as-built tracings, three sets of A1 size
as-built prints, two CDROMs in "dwg" format, and two CDROMs in "pdf" format. Except for the CDROMs
in "dwg" format, the tracings, prints and CDROMs in "pdf" format shall all be duly checked, certified and
endorsed by the Contractor. The "As Built"drawings of the whole installation shall incorporate the following
information where applicable:

45.6

(a)

position of pump rooms

(b)

routes of all hose reel risers and pipes

(c)

piping and equipment arrangement inside the pump room

(d)

schematic diagram of the hose reel booster pump hydraulic circuit showing the positions of each
valve, pressure switch, flow switch and hose reels. A copy of the schematic diagram in laminated
A2 size shall be hard mounted in the hose reels pump room.

(e)

locations of every hose reel and portable fire extinguisher

(f)

schematic circuit diagram and single line diagram of the overall system wiring

(g)

control circuit diagram of hose reel booster pump

(h)

circuit diagram of the floatless level control relay units.

SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE (FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM)

The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance
service and call-back service to the Fire Protection System as specified hereunder, for a period of one
year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the
Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for
the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it).

45.6.1

General
During the Maintenance Period, provide all consumables/materials and make good all Defect and
leakages found in the system/Plant/equipment. Replace and/or repair all defective parts or items as
produced in Appendix A33 whenever required if such repair or replacement has been necessitated by
reasons of Defect in the system/Plant/equipment.

45.6.2

Workmanship And Materials

The service and maintenance Works shall be performed by workmen skilled in the service, maintenance
and repair of pumping Plant and fire protection systems of all types.
All materials to be provided in connection with such service and maintenance Works shall be new and
unused, and shall generally be of the best quality as regards manufacture and performance.

BLDG04/S45.DOC(18)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-19
45.6.3

Supervision
Provide a foreman to take charge of the service, maintenance and repair Works. This foreman shall be
thoroughly competent in supervising the service, maintenance and repair of pumping Plant and fire
protection system, and shall be in the direct employment of the Contractor, and acceptable to the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall have in his direct employment, workmen who shall be skilled in the service,
maintenance and repair of pumping Plant and fire protection system.

45.6.4

Servicing And Maintenance Schedule

For monthly tests and inspection, all parts, Plant and equipment comprising the complete hose reel
pumping system shall be maintained and inspected strictly in accordance with the Specifications and
check-list as set out in Appendix A35.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the monthly inspection. Any
Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative
from the HDB Branch Office to be present during the inspection.
Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for monthly inspection upon Substantial
Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works.
The Contractor's foreman shall also sign on the attendance book/card provided by the Employer in the
pump room after completion of each inspection.
Items in the check-list for the monthly inspection shall include :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
(xiii)
(xiv)
(xv)
(xvi)
(xvii)
(xviii)

45.6.5

General condition of the pumprooms

Correct setting of the time switch
Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position
Power supply selector switch in "On" position
Control panel indicating lights
Alarm bell and bulb
Suction tank electrode and control module
Motor running current
Check valves
Gate valves
Alignment couplings
Ball float valves
Motor insulation
Pump mechanical seal
Pump lubrication oil level (if applicable)
Contactors and relays
Hose reel
Pressure and flow switches

Call-Back Service
Provide an efficient 24 hour (whole day) call-back service. All urgent calls or complaints shall be attended
to immediately upon notification by the Representative from the Essential Maintenance Service Unit or
Branch Office.
The Contractor shall provide a telephone pager for his maintenance supervisor and the pager number
shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any urgent call-back
service can be met.
In the event that the Contractor fails to :
(a)
(b)
(c)

BLDG04/S45.DOC(19)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

respond within 30 minutes after being paged; or

attend to an urgent call or complaint immediately upon notification; or
carry out the routine inspection of the rising main system;

Bldg Spec
Page 45-20
45.6.5

Call-Back Service (Contd)

The SO Rep may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be
recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may in addition exercise his
rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the Fire Protection System or to carry
out the routine servicing and maintenance of the Fire Protection System due to or arising out of the
Contractor's failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary or
relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract.

45.6.6

Rectification Of Defects Prior To Issuance

Of Final Completion Certificate
One month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with HDB
Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defect listed after this joint inspection shall
be rectified by the end of the succeeding one month commencing from the expiry date of the Defects
Liability Period.
Rectify the outstanding Defect and conduct detailed checks on the Works before arranging for inspection
by the Representative from HDB Branch Office for the purpose of certifying completion of rectification of
Defect.
After the second final inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office, a list of outstanding
Defect shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defect on the list within
fourteen days.
If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defect on the second final inspection, the SO Rep shall
exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the Employer shall in addition have the right to engage his own
workmen or other contractors to rectify and make good all Defect and the cost of rectification and charges
imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor.

45.6.7

Log Book
Keep a log book at the pump room in which details of all alarms (genuine, practice test or false), faults,
tests, routine maintenance and repairs carried out shall be recorded. The type of log book and the record
format shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.

45.6.8

Consumable Materials
Provide the following consumable materials as and when required during the Maintenance Period :
(a)

All oils and grease required for lubrication of pump bearings, motor bearings, pivots and other
moving parts.

(b)

All carbon brushes required to replace worn brushes in electric motors.

(c)

All electric contact points required to replace those points in switch gears, motor starter gears,
electric control gears and electric relays.

(d)

All indicating lamps required to replace blown lamps.

(e)

All cotton waster, soap detergent and other cleaning materials required for cleaning purposes.

BLDG04/S45.DOC(20)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 45-21
45.7

FIRE HYDRANTS
Private Fire Hydrants where so required by The Fire Authority shall be provided within the perimeter of the
building lot. The Contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer (PE) who shall be responsible for the
design and submission of plans to the Relevant Authorities for approval. Where any part of the base
design contravene with the code requirements, the onus is on the Contractor to make amendments to the
design prior to submission to Relevant Authorities. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in the
Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for such amendments. The Contractor's Professional Engineer
shall be responsible for the supervision of the installation until the Certificate of Statutory Completion is
obtained.
The fire hydrant shall be positioned to be within 50 m from an entry to the building and not more than 50 m
apart. In the case of a building where rising mains are installed, the 50 m distance shall be measured up
to the breeching inlets of the rising mains. The siting and type of fire hydrants shall comply fully with the
requirements stated in SS CP 29: Code of Practice for Fire Hydrant Systems and Hose Reels.
Fire hydrants shall be of suitably corrosion protected and sufficiently robust material. Their works parts
shall be of gunmetal to BS 1400 or other suitable material. The fire hydrant shall be installed on concrete
plinths with size of 750 mm x 750 mm x 150 mm thickness. A control valve shall be installed to each
hydrant. The control valve shall be able to open and closed from the surface of the ground.
Fire hydrant mains shall be of heavy duty ductile iron with cement lining type conforming to BS 4772. The
hydrant mains routes and locations shown on the Drawings are approximate and intended to indicate the
general runs and locations only. The exact routes and locations of the mains shall be determined at the
Site all at the Contractors cost and expense. Any mains that are routed in basement of building shall be in
protective enclosure. The protective enclosure to the mains shall have the same fire resistance as the
elements of structure of the building where the mains are located. The protective enclosure to the hydrant
mains shall be labelled with the word " HYDRANT MAIN " of minimum 50 mm height at suitable intervals.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for such
protective enclosures.
The fire hydrants shall be painted on the stem with a 100 mm yellow band, the lower edge of which is 300
mm from the ground.
The outlets shall be provided with protective standard caps of cast iron or other suitable material and
attached to the standpipe by stainless steel chains. The topmost part of the valve shall not exceed a depth
of 1000 mm from the ground level.
The water supply for the fire hydrant shall comply with the requirements stated in latest Code of Practice
for Fire Precautions in Buildings.
Valve pits shall be of adequate size, and readily accessible for inspection, operation, testing and
maintenance and removal of equipment contained therein. They shall be so constructed and arranged as
to properly protect the installed equipment from ground movement and accumulation of water as specified
in SS CP 29. For fire hydrants sited in roadways, care shall be taken that the pits and covers are capable
of bearing the heaviest vehicle that may use the road.

Total pages for this Section :

21

Section 46/.....

BLDG04/S45.DOC(21)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 46-1

SECTION 46
RESERVED

SECTION 47
RESERVED

SECTION 48
RESERVED

Total pages for these Sections

Section 49/.....

BLDG04/S4648.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 49-1
SECTION 49
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS

49.1

REGULATIONS
The electrical works include electrical installation, lighting installation, lightning protection works,
telephone/data cabling, fire alarm system and other miscellaneous electrical works.
The electrical installation works shall comply with all statutory rules, regulations and requirements of the
EMA, SP Services Ltd and PowerGrid, current at the date of submission of the Tender and to the
complete satisfaction of the SO Rep.
In particular, the electrical installation works shall comply with the Electricity (Electrical Installations)
Regulations 2002 made under The Electricity Act (CAP. 89A) including any subsequent updates and
amendments of the Regulations.

49.2

INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS
It is the intention of the Drawings and/or Specifications to provide a complete and safe operating system.
The omission from the Drawings and Specifications of any details in construction, installation, materials or
specialities necessary for a complete, operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from
furnishing and completing the same in place all at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
Before submitting the Tender, and also prior to the execution of the Works, the Contractor and his LEW
and/or PE shall study the Drawings and inspect the Site to satisfy themselves that the Works could be
carried out as specified. Should it be deemed necessary to make modifications to the Drawings, method
of installation or site adjustments to suit the structural and site constraints and to ensure compliance with
the Statutory Rules and Regulations, the Contractor shall inform the SO Rep of his recommendations
within two weeks from the commencement of the Contract and to obtain the concurrence of the SO Rep
before proceeding with the modifications.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for
complying with the requirements of this clause. The Drawings and/or Specifications indicate the minimum
requirements of the Employer only. Should the requirements of the Drawings and/or Specifications
conflict with the requirements of the Statutory Rules and/or Regulations, the most stringent of the
requirements shall govern the Works.

49.3

AMBIENT CONDITIONS
All Plant and equipment or materials specified in the Specifications and any other Plant and equipment or
materials provided under the Contract shall be fully tropicalised and suitable for use in Singapore. The
local climate is tropical with a mean shade temperature of 27.8C. The normal maximum shade
temperature is 31C and the minimum shade temperature is 23.9C.
The mean relative humidity is 80%, the maximum and minimum being 100% and 65.1% respectively.

49.4

ITEMS OF ANY ONE CLASSIFICATION

Any items, fittings or accessories which are used in quantity, shall in each case be the product of one
manufacturer and shall be used only for the service recommended by the manufacturer.

BLDG04/S49.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 49-2
49.5

INCOMING SERVICE CABLES

The incoming service cables will be provided by PowerGrid up to and terminated at the incoming service
panel provided by the Contractor.
For service entries where there are no switch rooms, the Contractor shall provide weatherproof enclosures
to house the incoming service terminations. The enclosures shall have hinged doors and facilities for
locking. Where necessary, the Contractor shall provide concrete pedestal bases to the requirements of
SPSL/PowerGrid for mounting the weatherproof enclosures. The Contractor shall provide jumper or
consumer terminal service (CTS) cables connecting the Employer's installation to the weatherproof
enclosure.
For service entries terminated directly at the main switch board, inside a switch room, the Contractor shall
provide suitable cable end boxes for the termination.

49.6

FIXING SCREWS
All screws used for fixing meter boards, moulded or steel boxes, switches, socket outlets, consumer
control units etc shall be in brass.

49.7

SWITCH ROOMS
Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings, all switch rooms shall be provided with at least a lighting point
controlled by a switch, a 13 Amp switch socket-outlet, a consumer control unit, a fluorescent batten
luminaire complete with tube and emergency battery/inverter pack (2 hours), a glass framed single line
diagram of the electrical installation in at least A3 size (the wordings of the diagram shall be legible), a 2.5
kg CO2 fire extinguisher of Class C rating complying with CP 55, first aid chart and a 900mm wide rubber
mat complying with SS 298:1985. The rubber mat shall be placed all around the floor standing switch
board and indoor service electrical distribution box if any. All switches, socket-outlets and consumer
control units shall be metal clad.
All final sub-circuit wirings to lighting and power points in the switch rooms/meter rooms shall be run in
metal conduit.
Wirings for public lighting circuits shall be grouped and taped together according to their circuits. The
circuits shall be bunched and secured on the cable tray by means of plastic fixing ties.
All other cables shall run on metal cable trays. The cables shall be neatly secured on the trays by plastic
fixing ties or PVC coated metal saddles at regular intervals not exceeding 300mm. No over lapping of
cables shall be allowed except for crossing of different circuits which shall be kept to a minimum.

49.8

POWER SUPPLY POINTS OUTSIDE SWITCH ROOMS

AND AT STAIRCASE LANDINGS
A 15 Amp metal-clad switch socket-outlet housed in a metal enclosure shall be installed outside each
switchroom and at staircase landings or as indicated in the Drawings. These power supply points shall be
connected to a separate way of the consumer control unit in the switchroom. The wiring to the power
supply point shall be installed concealed unless shown otherwise in the Drawings.
The metal enclosure shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet steel of 1.2mm thickness. It shall be
treated with a coat of finishing paint giving an overall paint thickness of not less than 45 microns. A
sample of the metal enclosure shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before installation. The
enclosure shall be semi-recessed such that use by external electrical plug is convenient and easy. The
Contractor can propose alternative solution to the metal enclosure so long as there is locking
provision/facility for these public power supply points. The alternative solution shall be subjected to
approval by the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S49.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 49-3
49.9

TESTING OF INSTALLATION

49.9.1

General
The following work of the electrical installation shall be inspected and tested on Site after completion :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

Main Switchboard and Mains Cables

Earthing System
Unit's Wiring & Final Circuit Wiring
Lightning Protection System

All electrical tests including continuity, insulation resistance, polarity, earth fault loop impedances, phasing
and earth electrode resistance shall be made in a manner prescribed in Singapore Standard CP 5 or other
relevant standard specifications and Codes of Practice. Where no Standard/Code/Regulation is
applicable, the tests shall be conducted in a manner approved by the SO Rep.
For new wiring installations, the value of insulation resistance shall be as follows :
(a)
(b)
(c)

Main Switchboard and Mains Cables shall be more than 10 Megaohms

New underground cables shall be more than 5 Megaohms
Unit's Wiring & Final Circuit Wiring shall be more than 1 Megaohms

Prior to applying for testing, the Contractor shall check and test the installation to ensure that it is
complete and complies with the requirements of the Specifications, the EMA and SPSL.
lnspection or approval of tests by the SO Rep of any Plant and equipment, work or installation shall not
relieve the Contractor from his obligation to supply the complete Plant and equipment, and complete the
Works and installation in accordance with the Specifications.
The Contractor shall supply all necessary instruments, apparatus, consumable stores, connections, skilled
and unskilled labour and services with proper, reasonable and safe facilities required for the tests. If site
electricity supply is not available for testing or setting protection relays, the Contractor shall provide a
portable diesel generator set for the purpose. Any costs which may be involved in the tests shall be
deemed to be included in the Contract Sum by the Contractor.
49.9.2

Application For HDB Testing

For tests to be conducted by the HDB Electrical Testing Unit, the Contractor shall apply to the SO Rep at
least 7 working days in advance.

49.9.2.1

Verification test shall be conducted on main switchboards, risers, distribution boards, etc including the
earthing system. The Contractor shall apply for the tests after his LEW has completed the same tests and
before the LEW submission to SPSL for turn-on of supply.

49.9.2.2

The electrical installation to individual residential unit shall be tested by HDB Electrical Testing Unit. The
following shall be submitted at the time of application for testing :

49.9.3

(a)

A block layout plan showing the types of residential units on each floor and a schedule of electrical
installation for each residential building block;

(b)

One Certificate Of Fitness For Turn-On For Residential Units in each building block.

Re-Testing And Charges

Any omissions or Defect or faults or failure to meet test requirements detected during the testing shall be
rectified by the Contractor who shall then arrange for re-testing within three (3) working days.
If the Contractor fails the first testing/re-tests due to omissions or Defect or faults or failure to meet test
requirements the Employer shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to
impose charges against the Contractor.

BLDG04/S49.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 49-4
49.9.4

Application For SPSL Testing

For tests required to be conducted by LEW or approved testers and witnessed by SPSL, the Contractor
shall engage such authorised licensed electrical worker of the appropriate grade to conduct the tests in
the latter case. The endorsed test reports shall be submitted to the SO Rep and SPSL in conjunction with
the application for turn-on of electricity supply. All costs relating to the above shall be deemed to be
included in the Contract Sum.

49.10

CONTRACTOR'S LICENSED ELECTRICAL WORKER (LEW)

The Contractor shall engage a LEW of the appropriate grade to produce and endorse all electrical
drawings necessary for submission to SP Services/PowerGrid, for approval and endorsement and also to
EMA Inspectorate Division for the Electrical Installation Licence where required.
The Contractor's LEW shall conduct the electrical testing of the main switchboards, risers, distribution
boards etc including the earth system and protective Plant and equipment setting/operation. After the
Works have been successfully tested, the Contractor's LEW shall issue the Certificate of Compliance and
arrange with the SP Services Ltd for the energisation of the electricity supply. The LEW shall also arrange
for the installation of the electricity utility meters and attend on the date of turn-on of electricity supply by
SP Services Ltd and acknowledge as the LEW in the Statement of Turn On of Electricity.
The Contractor and his LEW shall be responsible for the electrical installation until the handing over of the
Works to the Employer.
All costs and expenses incurred by the Contractor in their submissions to SP Services Ltd and PowerGrid
for approval of the Drawings and application for the Electrical installation Licences including all fees
payable to the EMA, MSSL, SP Services Ltd, PowerGrid shall be deemed to be included in the Contract
Sum.

49.11

SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICITY SUPPLY TARGET DATES

For building blocks with lifts, Main Distribution Frame (MDF) room, Telecommunication Equipment Room
(TER) and Consumer Switch Room (CSR), the main switchboards including the lift electricity cables and
the supply cables for the MDF room, TER and CSR shall be energised at least 9 weeks before the date of
Substantial Completion of building blocks not more than 30 storeys and 10 weeks before the date of
Substantial Completion of building blocks more than 30 storeys. This is to allow time for the testing and
commissioning of the lifts and telephone systems by others to meet the date of Substantial Completion of
the building blocks. All electrical tests shall be completed and electricity supply to all other parts of the
electrical installation shall be energised at least 2 weeks before the date of Substantial Completion of the
building blocks.

49.12

WIRING/TRUNKING ROUTES AND POSITION OF ELECTRICAL

PLANT AND EQUIPMENT/ACCESSORIES AND FITTINGS
The wiring/trunking routes where indicated in the Drawings and the positions of electrical Plant and
equipment/accessories and fittings where indicated in the Drawings are meant to serve as a guide only.
The actual routes or positions shall be determined on the Site subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
There shall be no variations to the Contract or adjustments to the Contract Sum arising from the selection
of a more suitable route or position which might differ from those indicated in the Drawings. The
Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses for complying with these
provisions specified herein.
The Contractor shall ensure a minimum clearance distance of 100mm between the electrical
trunking/fitting and the ventilation opening at the Gas and Water (G&W) duct so as not to block such
ventilation opening.

BLDG04/S49.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 49-5
49.13

MAINS CABLE INSTALLATION AT GROUND FLOOR AND RISER DUCT

Mains cable installation at the ground floor and riser ducts shall be encased in metal trunking of standard
widths of 300mm, 200mm, 150mm and 75mm and standard height of 75mm.
CATV cables shall be installed in separate 75mm x 75mm metal trunking throughout. Along the ground
floor ceiling where the CATV trunkings and electrical trunkings are installed adjacent to each other, the
CATV trunking shall be installed on the side nearer the service duct. For CATV cables to cross inside the
metal trunking of electrical mains, 20mm diameter metal conduits for the crossing shall be installed as
close to the trunking base as possible. The ends of the metal conduits shall be secured to the trunking
sides using locknuts and female brass bushes. Only one metal conduit is allowed for each CATV cable.

49.14

SEGREGATION OF METERED SUPPLY CABLES

Metered supply cables after the electricity kWH meters shall be installed in their own separate
trunkings/conduits or if installed in a common trunking with other unmetered supply cables, then they shall
be installed in the manner hereinafter specified. The metered supply cables shall be grouped and secured
together by plastic fixing ties. These shall be tagged and identified as metered supply cables within each
removable sections of the trunkings.

49.15

AS-BUILT DRAWINGS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS

During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall record and update all wiring routes, circuiting,
circuitry, electrical points, legends, lightning protection system and all other electrical works based on
actual site installations for the production of as-built drawings.
The Contractor shall provide two batches of as-built drawings.
The first batch of the as-built drawings is for the electrical installation of each individual dwelling unit.
These shall be provided inside each dwelling unit before completion of the works for each building block.
The size of the as-built drawings shall be A3 size.
The as-built drawings for the dwelling unit shall show :
(a)

block number and house number of the unit;

(b)

the single-line drawing ( SLD ) of the electrical installation inside the unit;

(c)

the concealed conduit routes in the ceiling slab for the electrical, telephone/data and television
services ( scale between 1:50 and 1:100 );

(d)

the concealed conduit routes in the floor slab for the electrical, telephone/data and television
services ( scale between 1:50 and 1:100 );

(e)

legend used.

Each as-built drawing shall be duly checked, certified and endorsed by the Contractors LEW.
The as-built drawings shall be kept inside a specially - designed and durable envelope and fix adjacent to
the unit's consumer unit. For detail arrangement, the Contractor shall liaise with the SO Rep.
The second batch of as-built drawings is for the complete electrical works and shall be submitted in the
following:
1. Two CDROMs containing the as-built drawings in "dwg" format
2. Two CDROMs containing the as-built drawings in "pdf" format. Every "pdf" drawing must show the
"As-Built" stamp plus the LEW's Certification/Stamp.
3. One set of as-built tracings. Every tracing must be stamped "As-Built" plus the LEW's
Certification/Stamp.
4. Three sets of as-built prints. Every print must be stamped "As-Built" plus the LEW's
Certification/Stamp.

BLDG04/S49.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 49-6
49.15

AS-BUILT DRAWINGS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS (CONT'D)

These as-built drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep. on a block-to-block basis not later than two
weeks upon the handing over of each building block. The LEW/PE shall submit a listing of the as-built
drawings submitted and a letter certifying that the submitted drawings is a true record of the works asbuilt. Without this certification letter, these as-built drawings will not be accepted.
The thickness of these as-built tracings shall be such that its weight is approximately 110 gram per m2.
The ink in the as-built tracings shall be permanent and not of the powered-type. The details in the tracings
shall be legible and shall not have double or faded images. These as-built tracings will be rejected if found
to be of poor quality.

49.16

SAMPLE WORK
The Contractor shall put up sample work for the approval of the SO Rep and SPSL before proceeding with
the entire installation.
The actual positions of all electrical fittings and accessories shall be determined at site by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall inform and obtain approval from the SO Rep when installing lighting and accessories.
The Contractor shall notify the SO Rep at least two days in advance between putting up the following
sample work so that specific instructions may be given :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)

Sample unit wiring to all different types of flats

Mains trunking
Rising mains and horizontal mains
Wiring for public lighting
Lightning protection system
Driving of earth electrodes
Other wiring or installation as instructed by the SO Rep

Failure to inform and obtain approval from the SO Rep may result in the rejection of the installation work
and no claim for compensation shall be entertained by the Employer.
49.17

TEMPORARY STORES
The Contractor shall provide suitable temporary store/s at the Site for the safe-keeping of fittings and
materials and for their protection against damage or loss by weather or other causes. The location and
type of store/s shall be approved by the SO Rep who will have the discretion to exclude in his payment
certificates, payment for any fitting or material which is not stored to his satisfaction.

49.18

SUBMISSION OF DETAILS
The Contractor's Tender where applicable shall be accompanied by details of the proposed system
including details on the technical and performance aspects of the Plant and equipment (antenna, preamplifier, mixer, amplifier, splitter, etc). Single line diagrams of the distribution system with the signal
strengths in dbFV, for all the distribution points and the proposed underground cable route (if underground
system is involved) shall be submitted together with the Tender or when requested by the SO Rep.
The approval, with or without amendments, by the SO Rep of the Contractor's System shall not in any way
affect vary or relieve the Contractor's liabilities or obligations to ensure compliance of the System with the
specified technical performance standards.

BLDG04/S49.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 49-7
49.19

NEW MATERIALS, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

If the Contractor intends to use Plant and equipment and materials which have not been approved
previously by the HDB, he shall arrange with the manufacturer or supplier to submit the items for approval
prior to the acceptance of the tender.
Each article which is submitted for approval shall be accompanied by a full description and technical
specification with supporting performance and test data from the manufacturer.
In addition, a report of type tests conducted on the article in accordance with the relevant standards by the
PSB, and a letter of approval from the PUB Electricity Department shall be submitted.
Each article shall be suitably marked for identification and will be retained by the SO Rep for record
purposes. When the article is required to be returned, the Contractor shall submit a photograph or
illustration suitable for identification and record.

49.20

49.21

PLANT, EQUIPMENT/PARTS
(a)

The Contractor shall confirm the brands and models of the Plant and equipment and accessories to
be used for the Contract within one week from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. At the same
time, the Contractor is also required to place order for the Plant and equipment early.

(b)

At the time of tendering, the Contractor shall only offer in his main offer items which have already
been approved by the HDB. If the Contractor offers items in his main offer which have not been
approved, the tender may be treated as non-compliance with the Specifications and the Employer
reserves the right to reject the tender.

(c)

If the Contractor proposed to use a product other than those specified in the Specifications and/or
indicated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall submit a sample of the proposed product to the SO
Rep for approval not later than one week after the date of the Letter of Acceptance. The provision
of subclause 1.2.5 shall be applied accordingly.

TYPE TEST
Type test reports issued by the following third-party certified laboratories are acceptable :
y PSB and their Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) partners;
y Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS accreditation;
y Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS-MRA partners accreditation;
y Laboratories participating in IECEE CB scheme.
[SAC also signs Mutual Recognition Agreement (MRA) with other national accreditation bodies.
IECEE stands for IEC System for Conformity Testing and Certification of Electrical Equipment. The
IECEE operates the CB (Certification Body) Scheme which is a multilateral certification system based
on standards prepared by the International Electrotechnical Commission.]

49.22

SYSTEMATIC LAYOUT OF ALL SERVICE PIPES AND ELECTRICAL CONDUITS (M&E SERVICES) AT
BUILDING ROOFTOP
The Contractor shall prepare a coordinated services layout plan showing the overall layout of all the M
& E service pipes and electrical conduits at the roof top in consultation with the SO Rep. The layout of
the service pipes and electrical conduits at the roof top shall ensure good accessibility and neat
arrangement to facilitate the movement of the maintenance workmen, besides meeting all technical
and statutory requirements.
The Contractor shall submit the coordinated roof top services layout to the SO Rep for approval
before installation. Ensure that all the pipes/conduits are arranged in a systematic and orderly manner,
and the access to the water tanks, lift motor rooms, pumps, and other services at the rooftop is not
obstructed by service pipes and electrical conduits. Work by the various trades at the roof top shall be
supervised and coordinated by the Contractor. In areas where pipes are causing obstruction, the
contractor is to provide chequered-plate platform and steps over the pipes in accordance with the
Drawings. The platform shall be installed at locations furthest away from the building edge and in such
a way as not to pose danger to the maintenance workmen.
Total pages for this Section :

7
Section 50/.....

BLDG04/S49.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 50-1
SECTION 50
SWITCHBOARDS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND SWITCHGEARS

50.1

SWITCHBOARDS

50.1.1

General
The switchboards shall be suitable for use on a 400/230V 3 phase 4 wire 50 Hz supply system and shall
comply with the requirements of SS 293:Part 1.
The switchboards shall incorporate all the items as set out in the Drawings. All costs relating to testing,
testing fees and miscellaneous charges necessary for the completion and commissioning of the
switchboards ready for continuous operation at its designated Site positions shall be included in the
Contract Sum.

50.1.2

Drawings
Detailed construction drawings and circuit and wiring diagrams of all switchboards shall be submitted to
the SO Rep for approval before construction. These drawings and diagrams shall indicate clearly the
following (where applicable) :
(i)

Plant and equipment

(ii)

Current ratings including short circuit capacities

(iii)

Colour of indicating lamps

(iv)

Position of switches

(v)

Internal connections of all apparatus with all terminal markings

(vi)

All Plant and equipment to be shown in the open or de-energised position

(vii)

All secondary or primary plugged contacts

(viii)

Wire ferrule numbers

(ix)

Size, type and colour of wire

(x)

Current transformer terminal markings and outputs

(xi)

Ammeter and voltmeter scaling

(xii)

Relay settings

(xiii)

The main physical dimensions showing all necessary clearances required for removing covers,
opening doors and withdrawing compartments.

(xiv)

Position of all Plant and equipment on panel faces indicating whether flush or projecting

(xv)

Identification of all Plant and equipment with the appropriate label engraving describing
function and coding

The quantities, sizes and ratings of Plant and equipment incorporated within the switchboards shall be as
indicated in the Drawings.
50.1.3

Construction
The switchboards shall be of enclosed assembly design, suitable for indoor use in the form of free
standing or wall mounting, self-contained, flush fronted cubicles sectionalised as necessary to facilitate
easy transportation and erection. The assembly shall be Type Tested Assembly (TTA) or Partially Type
Tested Assembly (PTTA) in accordance with the type tests listed in SS 293. The main incoming unit,
functional units of metered and unmetered supply, the metered and unmetered busbar sections shall be
separately housed in their own cubicles.

BLDG04/S50.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 50-2
50.1.3

Construction (Cont'd)
Wall mounting switchboards shall be suitable for front access only and the maximum height shall be 2.0m.
Floor mounting switchboards shall be suitable for front and back access.
The cubicle sections shall be constructed of electro-galvanised sheet steel frames of minimum thickness
of 2.0mm and the panels shall be constructed from electro-galvanised sheet steel of minimum thickness of
1.6mm. It shall be able to withstand a fault level of 36 KA for 1 second unless specified otherwise in the
single-line-diagrams. The enclosures for the switchboards shall provide a degree of protection IP 4X.
Each cubicle unit shall be incorporated with a removable cover with hidden hinges. The front cover shall
have apertures for the protrusion of operating handles of circuit breakers. The covers shall be constructed
of folded electro-galvanised sheet steel of minimum thickness of 1.6mm.
The various units comprising a complete switchboard shall be grouped in a multi-tier arrangement
including cabling and wiring chamber of ample dimensions to accommodate terminal boards, cable boxes
and gland plates.
The switchboards shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint giving a total paint thickness of not less
than 50 microns. All coats of paint shall be oven baked and dried.

50.1.4

Busbars
Four pole air insulated busbars of uniform cross-sectional area throughout their length with a continuous
rating or dimensions not less than that indicated in the Drawings shall be arranged neatly.
The busbars and busbar connections between the busbars and various items of the switchgear shall be
manufactured from copper complying with BS 159.
All busbars shall be tinned, and continuous lengths without connections shall be insulated with heat
shrinking sleeves.
Busbars shall be mounted on non-hygroscopic, anti-tracking insulators strong enough to endure, without
damage, forces set up by any thermal expansion within the bars under normal operating conditions and
forces created by prospective fault currents.
Busbars shall be housed in separate compartments and these compartments shall not contain any wiring
or apparatus other than that required for coupling to the busbars.
Access to busbars and busbar connections shall be gained only by the removal of a cover secured by
bolts. Behind the covers, an insulating sheet with warning labels bearing the word "DANGER" in bold
letters and the lightning symbol shall be provided so that final access can be gained only through
removing this sheet secured by round head screws.
In addition, for the chambers housing the main busbars, the insulating sheet shall be of transparent
material with the word "Danger" in bold letters and the lightning symbol. The material for the transparent
sheet shall be of minimum 3mm thick clear polycarbonate similar to "LEXAN" Model MR5 sheet or other
approved with the following properties :
(a)

greater than 86% light transmittance

(b)

special treatment for high abrasive resistance

(c)

high self ignition temperature.

The busbars shall, where necessary, have built-in facilities near the load side of the incomer to enable
PowerGrid to fit their metering transformers and sealing of this compartment.

BLDG04/S50.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 50-3
50.1.5

Circuits And Connections

All connections between busbars and the switchgears shall be copper busbars or PVC insulated copper
cables of minimum cross-sectional area of not less than the rating of outgoing cables connected to the
switchgear. All cable connections shall be terminated with proper cable lugs and shrouded with heat
shrunk PVC sleeves of the appropriate phase identifying colour.
Small wiring shall be neatly bunched and cleated in harness form, or shall be enclosed in plastic purpose
made small wiring trunking or trough.
Supplies for control circuits shall be taken from within the compartment of the related item of the
switchgear. A HRC fuse shall be fixed within the respective compartment to protect the control circuit.
Where control circuits pass through auxiliary contacts the fuse shall also be used to isolate the terminals
of these contacts.
Where auxiliary contacts are used for interlocking purposes and supplies are derived from other sources,
isolating facilities shall be provided to render the auxiliary switches safe.
This isolation shall be in the form of auxiliary switches mounted on the respective compartment isolating
device or a separate isolator mounted within the respective compartment.
All small wiring shall be of multi-stranded copper not less than 1.5mm2 (7/0.50mm) with PVC insulation.
All control wiring shall be identified with numbered ferrules. These numbers shall be shown on the
schematic wiring diagram.
All fuses shall be of the HRC type complete with bridges, terminal shrouds and carriers.
Small wiring associated with external control circuits shall be connected to terminal strips which shall be
conveniently arranged to facilitate the termination of incoming multi-core cables.
Each connection shall have separate incoming and outgoing terminals and no more than two wires shall
be connected to any outgoing.
Each terminal block for external wiring shall have a minimum of 10% spare capacity.
All wiring diagrams shall show the terminal blocks in terminal sequence.

50.1.6

Earth Bar
A solid, tinned copper earth bar shall be provided at the base of the switchboard. The minimum crosssectional dimensions of the earth bar shall be 25mm x 3mm. It shall run the length of the switchboard and
shall be easily accessible by removing the bottom front panels of the switchboard.
All earth continuity conductors of the mains cables shall be terminated by means of appropriate cable lugs
at the earth bar. The earth terminal of any cubicle of the switchboard shall also be connected to the earth
bar by an adequately-sized earth continuity conductor.
The earth bar shall be connected by a PVC insulated 70mm copper earth cable to the main earth bar in
the switch room.

50.1.7

Metering, Instruments And Accessories

Facilities shall be provided on the switchboards for PowerGrid to carry out their metering. The cubicle for
housing PowerGrid meters, fuses, cut-outs and neutral links shall comply with the requirements of
PowerGrid/SPSL. Where required, the Contractor shall collect and install the meters for PowerGrid all at
the Contractor's cost and expense.
Where indicated, voltmeters and ammeters shall be provided. Indicating instruments shall comply with BS
89, Class Index 2.5. Instruments shall be of the moving iron type, with external zero adjustment. They
shall be flush-mounted and housed in a pressed steel or plastic case with shield plate. Instrument
terminals shall be shrouded.

BLDG04/S50.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 50-4
50.1.7

Metering, Instruments And Accessories (Cont'd)

Voltmeters shall be incorporated with selector switches for phase to phase and phase to neutral indication.
Ammeters shall be of the current transformer operated type and shall be incorporated with selector
switches for indication of all phase currents.
Switches shall be of the rotary wafer type.
Where maximum demand ammeters are specified, they shall be of the bimetallic type with thermal delay
to suppress the short-term current and indicate the average effective value. The response time of the
maximum demand ammeter shall be 8 minutes. The maximum pointer shifted by the bimetallic
mechanism shall be reset manually by means of an external knob. Maximum demand ammeter shall be
provided for each phase.
Phase indicator lamps shall be of the light emitting diodes (LED) types, operating on direct 230 volts or on
step-down voltage provided by a step-down transformer.

50.1.8

Current Transformers
Current transformers shall be of the straight through type with suitable ratio, output and class of accuracy
for their function and shall comply with SS 318:1987. Measuring current transformers shall have accuracy
of Class 1 and protective transformers shall have an accuracy of 5P10.
Groups of current transformers used on three phase systems shall have their secondary connections
starred and earthed. When measuring line current values using a common meter with a selector switch,
they shall be connected so that the current transformers shall be shorted out when not being used for
indication. This shall be carried out in the selector switch by "make before break" contacts.

50.1.9

Earth Fault
Digital Protection Relay
The digital protection relays offered shall be in compliance with the following :
Parameters
Operating temperature
Humidity
Vibration
Shock and Bump
Seismic
Insulation

Relevant
Standard
IEC 60068
IEC 60068
IEC 60255
IEC 60255
IEC 60255
IEC 60255

Transient Overvoltage

IEC 60255

High frequency Disturbance

IEC 60255

Electrostatic Discharge
Radio Frequency
Disturbance
Fast Transient
Enclosure Protection
EMC Compliance

IEC 60255
IEC 60255

Dielectric withstand

IEC 60255
SS IEC 529
EN50081-1,2
EN50082-1,2
89/336/EEC
IEC60255

Impulse voltage

IEC60255

BLDG04/S50.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Requirements
-10C to +55C
56 days at 40C and 95% RH
class I
class I
class I
2kVrms for 1 min between all terminals and earth
2kVrms for 1 min between independent circuits
1kVrms for 1 min across NO contacts
class III,
5kV 1.2/50s between all terminals and earth
without damage or flashover.
2.5kV common mode <3% deviation
1.0kV series mode <3% deviation
8kV direct without mal-operation or damage
20MHz to 1 GHz at 10V/m and <5% deviation
class IV ,4kV 5/50ns <3% deviation
IP52 minimum

2KV common mode

1KV differential mode
5KV common mode
1KV differential mode

Bldg Spec
Page 50-5
50.1.9

Earth Fault (Contd)

Digital Protection Relay (Contd)
All protective relays shall be mounted in dust-proof cases, which shall be earthed. The relay front shall be
protected by a transparent cover and shall be designed for flush mounting at the door of the low voltage
compartment of switchgear panel. In the event of a failure, the faulty module can be replaced without the
need of soldering.
The relays shall have an integrated keypad with LCD or LED display. The LCD display shall be
backlighted during reading of relay parameter. There must be at least one LED with one indicating trip
(red). Resetting of LEDs indications shall be possible with front cover closed. When the relay front cover
is closed, only the reading of relay settings is possible. Changing of relay settings shall require the
removal of relays front cover.
The LCD or LED display shall give a clear message of the fault type by indicating the affected phase and
the type of operation such as instantaneous, DTL earth fault or IDMTL overcurrrent. Fault code is not
preferred and where this is inevitable, a non-fading, waterproof self-adhesive label is to be provided next
to the relay. The relay shall be able to store the last fault record.
The digital protection relays shall display load current and maximum demand current in primary values.
Panel meter shall be used to display primary current. The relay shall be suitable for operation in a 50 Hz
system.
The relay shall have at least two contacts for direct tripping of the circuit breakers. Relay contacts shall
make firmly without bounce. The relay parameter and setting relay parameter shall be intact in the event
of power failure.
All relays shall be suitably marked, visible from the front of the relay without removing the cover with the
following information :
(a)
(b)
(c)

Function of relay (e.g. IDMTL overcurrent/ DTL earth fault relay)

Maximum demand current
Rated frequency

All digital relays provided shall have at least 2 binary outputs for external telemonitoring connections.
The contractor may in lieu of digital protection relay provide electromechanical protection relays complying
with the below requirements :
Electromechanical Earth Fault Relay
Earth fault protection shall be afforded by instantaneous attracted armature earth fault relay with a flag
indicator that can be reset by hand.
The earth fault relay shall operate at primary fault current not exceeding 140 Amps. Adjustment of
operating time lag shall be provided by a solid-state delay timer with a setting range of 0.1 to 1 second.
The time lag setting shall not exceed 0.5 second unless otherwise indicated.
The relay shall be flush-mounted and located in a cubicle adjacent to the incoming circuit breaker.
Electromechanical Overcurrent Relay
Overcurrent relays shall be Inverse Definite Minimum Time Lag (IDMTL) relay or Definite Time Lag (DTL)
relay as indicated in the Drawings.
IDMTL relay shall be heavily damped induction disc units with time/current characteristics in accordance
with BS 142. Its accuracy shall be calibrated at 50 Hz to fall into error class index E7.5 as given in BS 142.
The relay shall be suitable for flush or project mounting and shall be tropicalised and protected against
dust, shock and vibration. It shall remain operative up to an ambient temperature of 50oC without
deterioration of its performance characteristics.
DTL relay shall have adjustable current setting of 2 Amp to 7 Amp and adjustable delay time setting of 0
second to 1 second. Setting accuracy for current shall be less than 5% at full scale and setting accuracy
for time shall be less than 10% at full scale. The relay shall be incorporated with a test button, rest button
and indicating lamp.

BLDG04/S50.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 50-6
50.1.10

Identification Of Equipment And Circuits

Each item of switchgear, including each switch forming part of a switchboard or panel shall be clearly
labelled externally, to identify its relation to Drawings details.
Labels shall be of "Formica" engraving laminate or other approved or similar material having black
characters on white background, with 5mm minimum height characters. They shall be secured to the front
of the panel by instrument headed screws or adhesive or epoxy glue.
All circuits shall be phase identified at their terminations by means of colour coded heat shrunk sleeves.

50.1.11

Tests
(i)

Type Tests
(a)

Switchboards shall be subjected to type tests to verify compliance with the requirements laid
down in the Specifications. The type tests shall include the following :
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

(b)

(ii)

Verification of temperature rise unit

Verification of dielectric properties
Verification of short circuit strength
Verification of the continuity of the protective circuit
Verification of clearances and creepage distances
Verification of mechanical operation
Verification of degree of protections.

The type tests shall be conducted by independent testing authority which shall be a member
of the Association of Short Circuit Testing Authority (ASTA) or by PSB accredited testing
laboratories. The type test certificate shall be accompanied by a complete type test report
which shall include amongst other information, on arrangement and details of switchboard
construction, calibration oscillograms of short circuit test, temperature rise measurements.

Factory and Delivery Tests

With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators and MCCB closed and power fuses fitted,
the switchboard panels shall be subjected to a pressure test of 2.5kV for one minute, across the
following points :
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Phase to phase
Phase to neutral
Phase to earth
Neutral to earth

The above tests shall be conducted at the place of manufacture and witnessed by the SO Rep. A test
certificate by the switchboard manufacturer shall be issued on completion of the tests.
The site tests of main switchboards and setting of the protective relays shall be also witnessed by the SO
Rep.
Approval of the tests and test certificates received by the SO Rep shall not in any way affect, vary or
relieve the Contractor's obligations to supply the complete Plant and equipment assembly in accordance
with the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings.

BLDG04/S50.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 50-7
50.2

INDOOR SERVlCE ELECTRICAL DISTRlBUTlON BOX

50.2.1

General
Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall supply and incorporate an indoor service electrical
distribution box (overground pillar type box) with each main switchboard.
The indoor service electrical distribution panel shall be totally segregated and compartmentalised from
other panels of the main switchboard. It shall be located next to the main switchboard or in a room
adjacent to the switchroom. Electrical connections shall be made by the Contractor between the
distribution panel to the incoming circuit breaker.

50.2.2

Type And Design

The distribution panel shall be the indoor type comprising :
(a)

Housing or enclosure

(b)

Phase and neutral busbars and earth bar

(c)

Three numbers of strip fuse-way distribution units with link units

(d)

Phase barriers and insulated covers for contacts

(e)

Six numbers of solid links of 630 Amp rated normal current and three numbers of
HRC fuse links

(f)

Accessories

The rated insulation level of the distribution panel shall comprise of the highest rated voltage of 600V and
the one minute power frequency withstand voltage of 2.5 kV.
The rated normal currents of the busbars shall be 630 Amp.
The overground distribution panels shall be protected by fuses located at transformer sources. The
maximum fuse rating shall be 630 Amp and the cut-off current shall be of the order of 55kA peak based on
a 60kA (rms) prospective fault current. All components shall be capable of withstanding a short circuit
current of this rating without damage.
50.2.3

Housing
The housing shall be manufactured from electro-galvanised steel sheet frames of minimum thickness of
2.0mm.
The panel shall consist of :
(a)
(b)
(c)

A shell
A root or frame support for the shell
A pocket

Ventilation of the distribution panel shall be ensured by suitable screened apertures at the side panels.
The door shall be provided with a push-button panel lock with flush handle which can be opened only with
an approved master key. The door shall be made detachable from the panel.
The distribution panel shall be of compact design and shall have the dimensions not less than 750mm W x
350mm D x 1420mm H.

BLDG04/S50.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 50-8
50.2.4

Busbars
Busbars shall be of tinned hard-drawn high conductivity copper complying with BS 159. Busbars shall be
securely mounted at the rear of the panel behind the strip fuse-way distribution units and also mounted on
non-hygroscopic, anti-tracking insulators, strong enough to endure without damage, forces set up by any
thermal expansion within the busbars under normal operating conditions and forces created by
prospective fault current.
2

The cross-sectional area of each phase or neutral busbar shall be at least 45 x 10 mm and its minimum
length shall be 500mm.
The busbars shall be of sufficient length so as to allow for the installation of an additional strip fuse-way
distribution unit, where required. Spare holes complete with M12 nuts and bolts shall be provided and
shall be positioned such that the required clearances and creepage distances can be achieved with the
installation of an additional strip fuse-way distribution unit. The bolts shall be permanently secured onto
the busbar such that they will not fall off during removal of the nuts.
Phase busbars shall be colour marked in sequence from top to bottom, red, yellow, blue and the neutral
busbar mounted at the bottom shall be coloured black. The colouring of the busbars shall not be
continuous and shall be such that it cannot be mistaken for an insulating covering.
For the neutral busbar, four holes complete with M12 bolts and nuts shall be drilled. The bolts shall be
permanently secured onto the busbar such that they will not fall off during the removal of the nuts.
For busbars and busbar connections in air, the clearances and creepage distances shall be not less than
25mm between live conductors and not less than 20mm between live conductors to earth. Where these
clearances cannot be obtained, or where special risks exist, adequate non-inflammable solid insulation
shall be provided.
50.2.5

Strip Fuse-Way Distribution Units

The strip fuse-way distribution unit shall comply with the requirements of DlN 43623. It shall be
independently supported at the rear by cross metal supports.
It shall be of the Form B type with downward connections at the bottom of the strip fuse-way. lt shall be of
the vertically arranged triple-pole construction.
The link unit of each pole shall be of the DlN type fusing with spring silver-plated copper contacts suitable
for DlN size 2 fuse links.
The triple-pole fuse base shall be manufactured from proven durable insulating material having adequate
mechanical strength and resistance to heat.
The distribution unit shall have cable terminals for direct cable connection at the bottom of each unit. The
cable terminals shall be drilled complete with M12 bolts and nuts. The bolts shall be permanently secured
onto the busbar such that they will not fall off during the removal of the nuts.
For each strip fuse-way distribution unit, six numbers of DlN size 2 knife type solid links (tinned plated)
and three numbers of DlN size 2, HRC fuse links shall be provided.
The solid links and fuse links shall comply with the requirements of VDE 0660 Pt 4 and DIN 43620. The
dimensions of the solid links shall be not less than 150mm L x 32mm W x 6mm thick. The rated breaking
capacity of the HRC fuses shall be at least 80 kA at 500V rms. The HRC fuses shall be of class
(time/current range) GT (slow) and of maximum power dissipation of 28 watts.
Insulated dividing barriers shall be provided between the phase contact assemblies in each distribution
unit. These shall be securely fixed to the distribution unit.
Plastic covers shall be provided to prevent accidental touching of the live contacts of the link units. These
shall be of a type which can be pushed onto the contacts easily and snap into position automatically.
A circuit label of insulating material shall be mounted on the barrier between the red and yellow phases of
each distribution unit. This label shall be securely held without the use of screws and it shall be possible
to slot into position and remove the label from the front of the barrier.
The distribution units shall be secured onto the busbars and metal supports by bolts and nuts. The bolts
shall be permanently secured onto the busbars and metal supports such that they will not fall off during
the removal of the units.

BLDG04/S50.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 50-9
50.2.6

Cable Clamps
Three solid metallic cable clamps shall be provided in each distribution panel adequate to support the
cable in normal service. The centre line of the cable clamps shall not be less than 450mm below the
fixing centre of the cable lug on the neutral busbar.

50.2.7

Earth Bar
A tinned copper earth bar shall be provided to facilitate earthing of the steel wire armour of the cable. The
minimum cross-sectional dimensions of the earth bar shall be 31.5mm x 6.3mm and its minimum length
shall be 500mm. The earth bar shall be rigidly bolted onto the top of the metal cable clamp. There shall
be electrical continuity between the earth bar, the metal cable clamp and the housing of the distribution
panel. On the earth bar, five holes equally spaced shall be drilled to accommodate M10 bolts.
Two lengths of 70mm2 cross-sectional area flexible tinned copper braid shall be provided for each
distribution panel. The length of each braid shall be 400mm. One end of the braid shall be crimped with a
70mm2 tinned copper lug. The stud hole of the lug shall be suitable for M10 stud size.

50.3

TAP-OFF BOXES

50.3.1

General
The tap-off boxes shall be purpose made according to the details given in the Drawings and shall comply
with the following subclauses. The tap-off box shall be type tested and passed by PSB. A sample of the
tap-off box shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval.

50.3.2

Design And Dimension

The overall dimensions and essential details of the tap-off boxes shall be according to the Drawings. The
tap-off boxes shall comply with SS 293:Part 1.
The internal layout may be re-arranged to suit the type of electrical accessories used in the box.
Tap-off boxes shall have hinged access door facilities for locking with a master key system. Four master
keys shall be handed over to the relevant Branch Office by the Contractor on Substantial Completion of
the Contract.
All line-branch connectors shall be adequately sized for the cables used. It shall allow the main and
branch cables to be separately secured to the connecting block with the main cable continuous and uncut.

50.3.3

Metal Box
The metal box shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped sheet steel. The body of
the box shall be of 1.2mm thickness and the mounting plate for electrical Plant and equipment shall be of
1.5mm thickness. It shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint of thickness not less than 45 microns
and shall be oven baked and dried.
The metal box shall comply with Parts 13 and 32 of SS 5.

50.3.4

Phase Marking
All line-branch connectors shall be identified with their respective phase colours after completion of
installation.

BLDG04/S50.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 50-10
50.4

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
Distribution boards shall be of the 400/230V type, of appropriate size, and they shall house the number of
ways and miniature circuit breakers or HRC fuses as indicated in the Drawings.
Distribution boards shall have hinged access doors with suitable dustproof seals. Each board shall have
insulated protective shields to prevent accidental contact with live parts.
Neutral and earth busbars shall have an outgoing terminal for each neutral or earth conductor connected
to them.
Each distribution board shall have an approved circuit list fixed on the inside of the door. Labels shall also
be supplied for each distribution board screwed to the front giving board reference.
The construction of distribution boards shall comply with the requirements for the construction of
switchboards.
Miniature circuit breaker distribution boards shall comply with the requirements of BS 5486 Part 12.

50.5

MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB)

All MCCB shall comply with IEC 947-2. Triple pole MCCB shall be rated at 400V ac and double pole
MCCB shall be rated at 230V ac. The rated service short circuit breaking capacity (lcs) shall be at least
50% of the rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (lcu) for all MCCB.
The fault level of the incoming breaker at the main switchboard shall be assumed to be 36 kA at rated
voltage of 400V unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings. All other MCCB within the main switchboard
shall be rated to comply with the calculations based on the above starting fault level or the level as
indicated otherwise in the Drawings.
The main incoming MCCB shall be fitted with a round type external handle. The handle shall incorporate
provisions for locking the handle in either the "OFF" or "ON" position and for interlocking with the hinged
door of the compartment. There shall be a marking plate to indicate the "ON", "OFF", "RESET" and
"TRIP" modes. It shall be possible to adjust the instantaneous tripping of the main incoming MCCB from 2
to 8 times of its rated current. It shall also be incorporated with shunt trip facility where external earth fault
protection is required.
Each triple pole MCCB shall be provided with a neutral link housed in the same compartment. The neutral
link shall be constructed of tinned copper bar of suitable cross-section to match the circuit conductors with
a bridged piece to facilitate disconnection without removal of the connection cables during testing.
Connection of cables to the neutral link shall be by cable lugs, bolts and nuts.
All MCCB shall be mounted and installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations.

50.6

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

All MCB shall be of the thermal magnetic type with a toggle-type tripping switch and shall comply with the
requirements of IEC 898.
The MCB shall be rated for phase voltage of 230V, 50 Hz operation and shall have an interrupting
capacity of at least 6 KA (M6) unless stated otherwise.

50.7

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS (RCCB)

The RCCB shall be double-pole and of the high sensitivity direct-acting current-operated type with a
tripping time not exceeding 0.1 second. It shall comply with the requirements of SS 97. The RCCB
shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark and PSB Test Mark. or other
approved equivalent.

BLDG04/S50.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 50-11
50.8

SWITCH FUSES, ISOLATORS AND ISOLATING SWITCHES

Switch fuses, isolators and isolating switches shall be of the quick-made and break type, suitable for the
rating of the Plant and equipment served.
Switch fuses shall comply with IEC 947-3 and shall be fitted with fuses to BS 88, bolted type, Class Q1,
certified for 400V and category of Duty AC23.
Isolators and isolating switches shall comply with BS 5419. For isolating switches, solid copper links shall
be fitted in place of fuses.

50.9

CONTACTORS
Contactors shall be suitable for use on three-phase four-wire 400/230V 50 Hz supplies and fitted with 220
- 250V ac coils, unless otherwise specified. Contactors shall comply with BS 5424:Part 1.
Contactors shall be rated for intermittent periodic or intermittent duty Class 0.3. The utilization category
shall be AC-3.

50.10

BLOCK CONNECTORS
All block connectors used for branching of circuits or neutral links shall be tinned brass blocks contained
within phenolic moulded cases. They shall be rated for the load current of the circuits.
The cable entries and terminals of the connector shall be of the correct size for the termination of the
conductors. Not more than one cable shall be terminated into each terminal of the connector. All exposed
parts of the connection shall be covered and sealed.
Terminals shall be designed to clamp the conductor between the metal surfaces with sufficient contact
pressure but without causing damage to the conductors.
The Contractor shall ensure that the cables are properly terminated and all terminations are tightened at
each conductor. He shall make good all damages resulting from loose or faulty connections.
All block connectors shall pass PLS Class 2 or approved equivalent.

Total pages for this Section :

11

Section 51/.....

BLDG04/S50.DOC(11)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 51-1
SECTION 51
MAINS AND SUB-MAINS CABLES

51.1

CABLES

51.1.1

General
All cables ,except for fire rated cables shall have the PSB Test Mark or approved equivalent. Fire rated
cables shall be listed under PLS Class 1A.
The cable conductors shall be annealed copper. Identification trade marks, voltage rating and crosssectional area of the conductor shall be embossed or printed on the surface of the sheathing of the cable.
Every coil or drum of cable shall have a tag as label attached giving the following information :
(a)

Name and type of cable

(b)

Cross-sectional area and number of core

(c)

Length

(d)

Manufacturer's name, mark or other trademark

(e)

Rated operating voltage

All cables shall be new and unused and shall be delivered to the Site with the manufacturer's seals, labels
or other proof of origin intact.
All cables shall be of the size and type specified in the Drawings or Specifications.
51.1.2

PVC-Insulated Cables
All PVC-insulated cables shall comply with the following standards unless specified otherwise in the
Drawings :

51.1.3

(a)

Single core PVC-insulated non-sheathed cables shall comply with SS 358 with all the latest
amendments. The cable shall be rated at 450/750 Volts.

(b)

Single and multi-core PVC-insulated, PVC sheathed cable shall comply with IEC 502 with all the
latest amendments. The cable shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts.

(c)

Underground cable shall be PVC/SWA/PVC copper cables and shall comply with BS 6346. The
cable shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts.

Fire Rated Cables

All fire rated cables use in fire safety measures to maintain integrity of main supplies shall comply with SS
299 and approved by FSSB.
Fire rated signal cables shall be rated at least to 300/500V. The rating of other fire rated cables used in
230V and 400V systems can be 450/750V or 600/1000V. They shall be single or multicore cables as
shown in the Drawings, each comprising stranded circular annealed copper conductors and a fire resisting
barrier. Cable sizes of 1.5mm 2 to 4mm 2 can be single insulated and cable sizes of 6mm 2 and above
shall have both insulation and sheath. The thickness of the insulation and sheath shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer's technical specification where the relevant BS or IEC standards are not applicable.
Further, the construction of the cables shall be in accordance with its relevant SS, BS or IEC standards
and a type test report shall be submitted.

BLDG04/S51.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 51-2
51.2

CABLE INSTALLATION

51.2.1

Cable Installation - General

All cables shall be installed generally along the routes and in the manner indicated in the Drawings and in
accordance with the notes and instructions therein.
Notwithstanding the above requirement, all cable routes shall be approved by the SO Rep before any work
commences.
All cables shall run directly from point to point without joints unless the length required is in excess of the
length obtainable in one piece from the cable manufacturer. In such cases, the position of each and every
joint shall be approved by the SO Rep. No other joints, whether straight through or tee, will be permitted.
All cables shall be run neatly and truly vertical, horizontal or parallel with the features of the building. The
cables shall be laid in flat formation and touching each other.
Where a cable has no change direction, whether in a horizontal or a vertical plane, the radius of the bend
in the cable shall not be less than the minimum laid down in CP 5 or the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Unless otherwise specified, all materials, supports, fixings, attachments and other items associated with
the installation of cables, together with all of the work involved, shall be provided by the Contractor
whether or not it is or they are specifically mentioned in the Specifications.

51.2.2

Mains Cables Installation

Mains cables shall be encased in metal trunking supported on walls, ceilings or structural steelwork where
surface mounted unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings or elsewhere in the Specifications. Cables
shall be laid flat or trefoil in the trunking and clipped together in sets with nylon cable ties, PVC covered
metallic cable ties or stainless steel cable ties. However, only PVC covered metallic cable ties and
stainless steel cable ties shall be used to secure fire-resistant cables. No overlapping of set of cables will
be permitted. Cables shall be fixed to the perforated steel bridges provided at the base of the trunking.
Before placing an order for the trunking, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for approval his
proposals relating to the arrangement of the cables in the trunking and the sizes of the trunkings. The SO
Rep shall have the right to reject any such proposals if, in his opinion, the metal trunking is of inadequate
size to facilitate ease of installation of cables in the trunking.
All mains cables shall be run continuously without any joint or break. Branching of horizontal sub-mains or
load cables shall be made by the removal of the PVC insulation and sheath of the main cables to facilitate
connection at line-taps in tap-off units.

51.2.3

Installation Of Underground Cables

51.2.3.1

Installation Of Underground Cables - General

Underground cables shall be laid direct in the ground or drawn into pipe ducts as indicated in the
Drawings.
The Contractor shall excavate trenches for the laying of cables and/or the installation of cable ducts, and
subsequently backfilling them.
He shall also dispose of surplus debris arising from the excavations and reinstate the ground surfaces to
match adjacent surface finishes.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that due care is taken when excavating in the vicinity of
existing buried services, and shall bear the cost and expense of any damages incurred.

BLDG04/S51.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 51-3
51.2.3

Installation Of Underground Cables (Cont'd)

51.2.3.1

Installation Of Underground Cables - General (Cont'd)

All cables buried direct in the ground shall be laid at a depth such that the vertical distance from the top of
the cable to the ground surface is not less than 750mm.
Before cable laying commences, all cable trenches shall be drained, the bed graded and tamped, and all
loose stones and similar debris removed.
After laying, the cable shall be covered with finely sifted sand to provide a 50mm cover after tamping. All
cables shall be further protected by a continuous layer of PVC cover plates.

51.2.3.2

PVC Cover Plates

The cable cover plates shall be of standard lengths of 1.0m and 2.0m. Each cover plate shall be nominal
150mm in width and nominal 2.0mm in thickness.
The cable cover plates shall be made of high impact resistant hard PVC. The colour of the plate shall
preferably be yellow and shall remain permanent and non-fading. Each cable cover plate shall be linked
to the adjacent cover plates at both ends to form a continuous chain.
The cable cover plates shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest revision
of the following standards or their equivalent.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

Description
Impact Test
Tensile Strength
Vicat Softening Temperature
Accelerated Ageing

Standard
Clause 7.3 of E6530 (Austrian Standard)
Clause 7.4 of E6530 (Austrian Standard)
ASTM D1525
ASTM D3045

The PVC cover plates shall have the following properties :

(a)

Three fully processed specimens tested for their impact strength should not have more than 3
cracks respectively (5 drop hammer tests per specimen). And the drop hammer should not
penetrate the specimens more than 100mm for more than 3 times in a series of 15 drop hammer
tests. If these requirements are not met, the same test series are repeated on the specimens.
Should the specimens tested on the second series of test also fail to meet the requirements, the
whole test is to be considered as failed.

(b)

The longitudinal connections (linking mechanism) of the fully processed specimens shall withstand
a tensile strength of minimum 100 newtons.

(c)

The Vicat softening temperature of the fully processed samples shall not be less than 72C (Rate A
at 50C 5C per hour).

(d)

The fully processed specimens shall be aged at 70C for 168 hours. Aged specimens shall also be
tested for their tensile strength in the longitudinal connections. The change in properties shall be
less than 25% of the original value.

All cables shall run at least 300mm clear of all other services, regardless of whether these other services
are laid parallel with or transversely to the cable trench.
Cables shall, in general, pass below all intersecting piped services which cross the cable route, unless this
would mean the cables descending to a depth of more than 2.0m. In such cases the cables shall be run
according to the directions of the SO Rep.
Where cables cross roads or carparks, or enter buildings, or elsewhere as indicated in the Drawings, they
shall be drawn into underground UPVC pipes of minimum 100mm diameter. Where such pipes are not
provided by others, they shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor all at the Contractor's cost and
expense. All UPVC pipes shall be Class "B" type in accordance to SS 141.

BLDG04/S51.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 51-4
51.2.3

Installation Of Underground Cables (Cont'd)

51.2.3.2

PVC Cover Plates (Cont'd)

The installation of underground cables shall be carried out in the "loop-in" principle. All cable joints shall
be carried out at the terminal boxes and fuse cut-outs. No underground joints shall be permitted without
the prior approval of the SO Rep.
The cables shall be terminated in brass compression glands with clamping device for the armour. The
glands shall be of approved design and of the correct size.
At all cable terminations, the armouring of the cables shall be solidly bonded to earth by means of properly
designed clamps and a copper conductor of cross-sectional area not less than the requirements of CP5.
For excavation work involving existing roads, carparks, paved areas or other services such as gas and
water, the Contractor shall seek prior approval from the relevant authorities before commencing any work.

51.2.3.3

Cable Glands
All armoured PVC insulated cables shall be properly terminated with brass compression glands of suitable
size for clamping the steel wire armour. The glands shall comply with the requirements of BS 6121.
All cable glands shall be provided complete with shrouds, brass locknuts and earth tags.
The earth tags shall be solidly connected together and to the earth terminal by a PVC insulated copper
conductor of cross-section not less than the requirements of CP5.

51.2.3.4

Underground Cable Joints for Armoured PVC Insulated Cables

Underground cable joints shall only be permitted where the length of the cable required is in excess of the
length of cable obtainable in one piece from the cable manufacturer, or, in special circumstances where
approved in writing by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep of any proposed underground cable joints and the position of all
joints shall be approved by the SO Rep before any work commences.
The underground cable joint shall be made with a resin type joint kit complete with thermoplastic mould
and accessories and the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for approval, full details of the joint kit
which he proposes to supply, together with a full jointing specification.
All jointing work, once commenced, shall be completed and sealed in the shortest possible time, without
interruption. No jointing work, shall commence without the prior approval and visual observation of the SO
Rep.
All joints shall be made exactly in accordance with the cable joint kit manufacturer's instructions, using
only the materials approved in the manufacturer's specifications and kit.
To ensure continuity and full conductivity of the steel wire armour, a copper lead of minimum crosssectional area as the cable conductors shall be used in conjunction with the armour bond kit available
from the cable joint manufacturer.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 52/.....

BLDG04/S51.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 52-1
SECTION 52
CABLES SUPPORTING SYSTEMS

52.1

METAL TRUNKING

52.1.1

Metal Trunking - General

All metal trunking and associated fittings shall comply with SS 249.
They shall have removable lids extending over their entire lengths. Lids shall be lipped and fixed at
intervals not exceeding 1m by means of brass or steel screws which are protected against corrosion by a
finish of zinc coating or equivalent to zinc coating. Electro-brass plated screws shall not be used.
Trunkings encased by cement when passing through floor slabs shall be of separate sections such that
the exposed lids not encased shall be removable.
Perforated steel bridges shall be spot welded at the base of the trunking for the fixing of cables. Two rows
of perforations of different sizes shall be provided. The bridges shall be spaced at intervals of 400mm and
at not more than 200mm from ends.
All trunking and fittings shall be manufactured from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped steel and
treated with epoxy powder paint giving a paint thickness of not less than 45 microns.
The thickness of the sheet steel used in the fabrication of trunking and fittings shall not be less than those
specified in the following table :

Nominal Width of Trunking

(mm)
50mm and below
75mm to 100mm
125mm to 175mm
Above 175mm

Nominal Thickness of Sheet Steel

Thickness of Body
(mm)

Thickness of Cover
(mm)

1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6

1.0
1.2
1.2
1.4

The standard depths of the trunking used shall be 50mm and 75mm. The standard length shall not be
less than 2m.
At the ground floor of the buildings, the size of the metal trunking installed from the consumer switch room
to all service ducts shall be at least 300 mm by 75 mm throughout. Inside the service ducts, the size of the
metal trunkings for the lift risers and flat risers shall be at least 150 mm by 75 mm throughout from the
ground floor level to the roof level. Lift risers shall be installed in the Lift and Mechanical (L&M) service
duct, located near the lift lobby, where such ducts are provided. Otherwise, a separate metal trunking shall
be provided inside the Electrical & Services (E&T) duct next to the flat riser.
Notwithstanding the above requirements, the figure in percentage of the sum of the overall cross-sectional
areas of cables (including insulation and sheath) to the internal cross-sectional area of the trunking in
which they are installed shall not exceed 35%.
Cables shall be installed in trefoil, neatly tied together in each set and secured to the bridges at the base
of the metal trunkings. The sets shall be clearly labelled for easy identification of its usage and shall be
arranged so that the spare space is reserved on one side. The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for
approval his proposal relating to the installation of cables in the metal trunking.

BLDG04/S52.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 52-2
52.1.2

Metal Trunking - Installation

Metal trunking shall be run vertical, horizontal or parallel with the features of the building.
In general, the trunking shall be installed on the ceiling or along the wall just below the ceiling. For very
high ceiling, the trunking may be installed lower but in any case, it shall be at least 2.2m high.
The manufacturers' standard fittings shall be used for bends, angles, offsets, cross-overs and other nonstandard runs. The practice of cutting and bending trunking to form flanges and attachments shall not be
permitted.
Trunking shall be properly aligned and securely fixed by gun tool method or rawl plug fitted at regular
intervals not exceeding 600mm and at not more than 300mm from the ends.
Where the trunking is suspended from the ceiling, wall or structure, it shall be supported by mild steel
angle or channel iron brackets at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5m. The brackets shall be finished to
the same standard as the trunking. Each individual piece of trunking on straight runs shall be
independently supported.
Where bends, angles or offsets occur, additional fixings shall be supplied at a distance of not exceeding
150mm on either side of the accessory.
Any bonding links and their fastening supplied to satisfy electrical continuity conditions shall not cause any
electrolytic corrosion.
Trunking connectors shall span the complete internal surface of the trunking and shall be so designed that
the trunking sections mate with butting joints.
Where the trunking passes through a floor slab or beam, the portion of the trunking which is to be
embedded in the floor or beam opening shall have a permanently fixed lid to form a steel sleeve at least
250mm long.
Where the trunking crosses expansion joints, a trunking joint shall be made. The connector at this point
shall be made with slotted fixing holes to permit a movement of 10mm in both the horizontal and vertical
planes.
Where any cutting or damage is caused during erection, the finish shall be made good. All burrs and
rough edges shall be removed. Where any corrosion has occurred, it shall be removed and the area
treated with a rust proofing agent. After this, it shall be treated by the application of a zinc epoxy and
followed by a coat of colour matching paint.
Holes cut in the trunking for the passage of PVC covered cables shall be treated as above and provided
with grommets, or alternatively bushed or lined to prevent damage to the PVC covering.

52.2

CABLE TRAY

52.2.1

Cable Tray - General

Cable trays and accessories shall be perforated and manufactured from hot rolled mild steel conforming to
BS 1449:Part 1 or JIS G3131 SOHC with hot dip galvanised finish to BS 729.
Electrolytic zinc coated steel sheet conforming to JIS G3313 SECC and coated with epoxy powder paint
giving a paint thickness of not less than 45 micron can be used in indoor environment.

BLDG04/S52.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 52-3
52.2.1

Cable Tray - General (Cont'd)

The thickness of the sheet steel used in the fabrication of the cable tray and accessories shall not be less
than those specified in the following table :
Nominal Width of Tray
(mm)

Nominal Thickness Sheet Steel

(mm)

100
150
210
300
360
450
600

1.0
1.0
1.2
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.0

The standard length of cable tray shall not be less than 2.4m.
52.2.2

Cable Tray - Installation

All accessories including bends (vertical and horizontal), intersections, tees, risers and reducing sections
shall be purpose made by the tray manufacturer.
Where site conditions necessitate site fabrication, obtain the specific approval of the proposals from the
SO Rep before commencement of the fabrication and the standards of fabrications and finish shall not be
less than that of the manufacturers' standard items.
Sections of cable tray and accessories shall be jointed using mushroom-head roofing bolts, nuts and
washers. The joint screws, nuts and washers shall all be galvanised or sherardized steel. Brass shall not
be used.
The cable tray shall be of adequate size to meet the installation requirements. Cables shall be installed
on trays in a single layer leaving 25% of the tray width spare for future use. The Contractor shall submit to
the SO Rep for approval his proposal relating to the installation of cables on the tray and the width of the
trays.
Cable trays shall preferably be installed such that they offer direct support to cables.
Fixings and supports shall be installed at regular intervals not exceeding 1200mm and 150mm from all
bends, tees, intersections and risers. They shall be fabricated from mild steel flat bar or angle iron or
channel iron, and treated with one coat of lead and chromate free primer and then painted with one
undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint to give a paint thickness of not less than 45 microns.
Where horizontal runs of cable tray cross building or structure expansion joints, then the tray shall be cut
between supports installed on either side of the expansion joint. The tray sections shall then be jointed
with bolts, nuts and washers installed in elongated holes permitting a lengthwise movement of 10mm
from the initial fastening position.
Cable trays shall be cut along a line of plain metal and not through perforations. Burrs or sharp edges
shall be removed prior to the installation of the tray sections or accessories. The cut or damaged metal
shall be made good by the Contractor by first treating the surfaces with a suitable rust proofing agent and
then applying finishes comparable to the remainder of the surface.
Cables shall be secured to the cable tray by means of plastic fixing ties or saddles at intervals of 400mm
and at not more than 200mm from the ends.
Cable tray and accessories shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout its length.
Sections of cable tray shall be thoroughly cleaned before overlapping and secured with a minimum of two
screwed fixings. The remote ends of the cable tray shall be effectively bonded to the earthing system.

BLDG04/S52.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 52-4
52.3

PVC TRUNKING

52.3.1

General
All PVC trunking shall be of a non-flame propagating type complying with the dimensions and
performance requirements of SS 275. The PVC trunking shall be made in white base and white clip-on
cover from high impact PVC and shall be supplied in nominal lengths of 2.0m or more.
All PVC trunking shall be listed under PLS Class 2 or other approved equivalent.

52.3.1.1

Single Compartment Trunking

The nominal external dimensions of the PVC trunking shall be 40mm, 32mm and 25mm width and the
height shall be in accordance with SS 275. The downdrop for the domestic socket outlets and lighting
switches shall be of 32mm by 16mm size except where two-compartment trunking is used. The ceiling
tees to lighting points shall be of 25mm by 12.5mm size.

52.3.1.2

80mm x 32mm Two-Compartment Trunking

The overall dimensions and essential detailing of the trunking shall be according to the Drawings. The
trunking shall have two compartments, one for electrical power cables and the other for telephone and
CATV/SCV cables. The space between the cover and the two compartments is reserved for the crossing
of these services within the trunking. This space should used for the crossing of these cables only if
allowed by CP 5 and IDA COPIF.

52.3.1.3

60mm x 20mm Two-Compartment Trunking

This trunking shall have two compartments, 40mm wide and 20mm wide. The larger compartment is for
electrical power cables while the smaller is for telephone and CATV cables.

52.3.2

PVC Trunking - Installation

52.3.2.1

General
The PVC trunking shall run truly horizontal, vertical or parallel to the building lines.
In general, the trunking shall be installed on the ceiling or along the wall just below the ceiling. For very
high ceiling, the trunking may be installed lower but in any case, it shall be at least 2.2m high.
For the two-compartment trunkings, the Contractor shall liaise closely with the PTL and other parties
involved such that all wiring works could proceed smoothly and the cover is installed after all the wiring
works by all other parties (where applicable) are installed. The Contractor shall not in any circumstances
be absolved from his responsibility for replacing any trunking or cover found damaged or defective.
The PVC trunking shall be installed continuously through beam openings so as to ensure segregation of
the low voltage and extra low voltage. Where this is not possible, individual PVC sleeves shall be
provided for the protection of the different voltage categories of cables. The trunking cover passing
through the beam shall be a short piece so as to facilitate removal of the cover for easy maintenance and
replacement or addition of cables.

52.3.2.2

Single Compartment Trunking - Installation

The PVC trunking shall be surface mounted and fixed with masonry nails at regular intervals not
exceeding 400mm and at not more than 100mm from the ends. The fixings shall be staggered across the
width of the trunking base.
Cables shall be secured with purpose-made PVC clips at interval of 250mm and at not more than 125mm
from the ends except for the two trunking sizes of 32mm by 16mm and 25mm by 12.5mm which do not
require PVC clips.

BLDG04/S52.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 52-5
52.3.2

PVC Trunking - Installation (Cont'd)

52.3.2.3

80mm x 32mm Two-Compartment Trunking - Installation

The trunking shall be surface mounted and fixed with masonry nails, staggered across the two
compartments at regular spacing of 200mm and at not more than 100mm from the ends.
The electrical compartment shall be separately enclosed with PVC cover while the other compartment
shall be provided with PVC clips at interval of 250mm and at not more than 125mm from the ends.
The trunking shall be provided from the electrical tap-off unit, telephone and CATV distribution boxes to all
dwelling units at each floor as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall liaise with the PTL to
determine the exact locations of their distribution boxes. In addition, the Contractor shall install a short
length of trunking above the electrical meter board or outside the units to house the telephone rosette and
CATV connectors where applicable.

52.3.2.4

60mm x 20mm Two-Compartment Trunking - Installation

The trunking shall be surface mounted and fixed with masonry nails at regular spacing of 200mm and at
not more than 50mm from the ends.
Cables shall be secured with PVC clips at intervals of 250mm and at not more than 125mm from the ends.

52.4

METAL CONDUIT
All metal conduit shall be heavy gauge screwed steel conduits complying with BS 4568:Part 1 and shall
have minimum Class 4 protection against corrosion.
All flexible steel conduit and adapters shall comply with BS 731 including all its latest amendments.
All conduit fittings shall comply with BS 4568:Part 2 and indelibly marked with the name or trademark of
the item. Bushes and plugs shall be of brass. All other fittings and components shall be galvanised and
having Class 4 protection against corrosion.
The metal boxes for the enclosure of the electrical accessories shall comply with BS 4662 with heavy
protection both inside and outside.
All conduit shall be free of rust patches or other Defect on delivery and protected from mechanical
damage and weather when stored on the Site.
No conduit smaller than 20mm diameter shall be used.
Spacer bar saddles shall be hot dip galvanised steel with a minimum thickness of 0.8mm.
Retaining screws for saddle tops shall be of brass or steel zinc plated. Electro-brass plated screw shall not
be used.
The inner radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 2.5 times the external diameter of the conduit.
Where the conduit has to be bent, it shall be bent using an approved bending machine such that the
conduit section shall not be altered. No more than 2 numbers of 90 degree angle bends shall be installed
in any run of conduit without a conduit box.
All metal conduits and its fittings shall pass type and batch test. They shall bear the PSB Test Mark or
other approved equivalent

BLDG04/S52.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 52-6
52.5

RIGID PVC CONDUIT

All rigid PVC conduit shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 50086-2-1. All conduit shall be of the
high impact heavy mechanical strength type. PVC conduit used in surface wiring shall be white where
required to match the adjacent PVC trunking. Otherwise, PVC conduit can be of any colour and as
specified.
All conduit fittings shall comply with the requirements of BS 4607 Pt 1 and Pt V and indelibly marked with
the name of the manufacturer or trademark of the item. Conduit, fittings and accessories shall be from the
same manufacturer.
No conduit smaller than 20mm diameter shall be used.
All conduit joints shall be made using standard couplers and PVC solvent supplied by the manufacturer of
the conduit and to the method laid down by the manufacturer. All such joints shall be watertight. The
same conditions apply to joints between conduit, fittings and accessories. Dipping of conduit or fittings into
solvent adhesives is forbidden. Before joints are made, conduit ends shall be cut square and all burrs and
sharp edges shall be removed. Care shall be taken to remove all damp, grease, cement dust and oil from
all faces of conduit and accessories prior to the jointing. Conduits shall be entered fully into box spouts
and butted into couplers, other than expansion couplers, for jointing purposes.
Screwed PVC conduit shall not be used unless specifically called for or when the PVC conduit is to be
connected to metal Plant and equipment, conduit and fittings with screwed entries. Where such entries
are not available, non-screwed male bushes and couplers shall be used.
Expansion couplers shall be used where straight runs of conduit exceed 8m. Within such couplers, a
space of not less than 10mm shall be allowed between the ends of the conduit. The solvent adhesive
used in such joints shall allow for movement caused by expansion without affecting the watertightness of
the joint. A similar system shall be employed when conduits cross building expansion joints in any
situation and the couplers shall span the joints.
All bends shall be made using the correct size spring. Conduit sizes of 25mm and below may be set cold
but all larger sizes shall be set hot. A pipe vice shall not be used during this or any other operation. The
radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 4 times the outside diameter of the conduit. Naked
flames shall not be used directly to heat conduit for bending purposes and the manufacturer's
recommendations shall be followed.
Spacer bar saddles shall be of PVC with bases. The fixings shall be such that the conduits may be taken
into accessories without sets or bends.
All rigid PVC conduit and PVC conduit fittings shall bear the PSB Test Mark or other approved
equivalent.

52.6

INSTALLATION OF RIGID CONDUIT

52.6.1

Installation Of Rigid Conduit - General

The Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordinating his work with other trades and for working to any
conduit layout in the Drawings that may be issued. Where such Drawings are not issued, the Contractor
shall prepare and submit drawings showing all conduit routes to the SO Rep for approval prior to
commencing the erection.
The maximum number of cables drawn into any one conduit shall not exceed those allowed by reference
to the relevant regulations and tables in the current CP 5. The size of the conduits shall be decided on
this basis unless otherwise stated.
The whole of the conduit system in any particular section shall be completed and swabbed through to
remove any dirt or loose matter before cables are drawn in.
All sub-circuit cables drawn into one conduit shall be connected to the same phase. In the case of three
phase circuits, all three phases and the neutral shall be contained in the same conduit.
Conduits shall be supported at intervals not greater than 600mm for vertical run exposed to touch and not
greater than 1m for others. Where conduit connects to surface-mounted Plant and equipment or
accessories, it shall be additionally supported within 150mm of either side of the item.

BLDG04/S52.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 52-7
52.6.1

Installation Of Rigid Conduit - General (Cont'd)

Where bends and sets occur, the conduit shall be fixed at a distance of 150mm, either side of such
diversion.
The inner radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 2.5 times the external diameter of the conduit.
Where the conduit has to be bent it shall be bent without altering its section, using an approved bending
machine. No more than 2 numbers of 90 degree angle bends shall be installed in any run of conduit
without a conduit box.
Where conduits connect to distribution boards, trunking, switch fuse units, consumer control units, switch
boxes, etc they shall be secured to the apparatus by means of flanged couplings.
Where conduits cross the expansion joints they shall be installed so as not to resist relative movement
between the sections. A suitable arrangement is to use a flexible conduit and adaptors in these positions.
The adaptors shall be earth bonded by a PVC insulated copper conductor of not less than 2.5mm2.
Final connections from the conduit installation to all motors, other apparatus subject to vibration and as
specified elsewhere, shall be made using watertight, PVC sheathed, rustproof flexible conduit.

52.6.2

Surface-Mounted
Surface-mounted conduit shall be run truly horizontal, vertical or parallel to the building lines.
Conduits shall be fixed by means of spacer bar saddles.
Conduits boxes shall be fixed to the structure of the building independently of the conduit.
Inspection type elbows, bends or tees shall be installed so that they can remain accessible for purposes
such as the withdrawal of existing cables or the installing of new or additional cables.
Where metal conduit has been cut or otherwise damaged, including exposed threads and connections, it
shall be repaired by application of a zinc rich epoxy to generously overlap the existing sound metal
coating.
Open ends of metal conduit shall be free from burrs and so bushed such that the cables are not damaged.

52.6.3

Concealed
Conduit buried in concrete shall have a minimum of 25mm depth of cover. Conduit buried in plaster shall
have a 5mm minimum depth of cover. Dimensions other than the above shall be subject to prior approval
by the SO Rep. For conduits to be concealed in walls, reference shall also be made from CP 5 on
locations in a wall where conduits are permitted. For any other locations in a wall, the minimum depth of
cover shall be increased to at least 50mm. Where concealed conduits run to an electrical point on a wall,
particular attention shall be given to provide the minimum of at least 50mm depth of cover from the
reverse surface of the wall, since the electrical point cannot be seen from that direction.
For conduit concealed in suspended type ceilings, the weight of the conduit shall, under no circumstances
be carried by the suspended ceiling. Suitable fixings and hangers shall be installed direct to the structure
by the Contractor only after they have been approved by the SO Rep.
Concealed conduit work in concrete or composition slabs, walls, cast in-situ and in plaster shall be offered
to the SO Rep for inspection prior to concealment. The Contractor shall give the SO Rep two days notice
that a reasonable section of concealed conduit work will be ready for inspection.
Where conduits are laid in concrete or composition slabs, cast in in-situ slabs, walls, beams, etc, the
Contractor shall arrange for a competent person to be in attendance whilst the pouring operation is being
carried out, in order to avoid any damage which may be caused to the conduits.
Where it is necessary to hack chases for conduit runs, the Contractor shall mark out the proposed runs at
site and shall seek the approval of the SO Rep before commencing any work.

BLDG04/S52.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 52-8
52.6.3

Concealed (Cont'd)
Immediately on completion of erection of each conduit run, all exposed terminations shall be plugged
effectively against the ingress of water and dirt.
All concealed conduit work shall be installed on the "loop-in" system. Inspection elbows or bends and tees
shall not be allowed. Where it is impracticable to set conduit, normal factory made bends may be used
but only with the approval of the SO Rep.
Draw-in boxes shall be provided to give access to all conduits for the drawing in or out of any cable; these
shall be of ample size to enable the cables to be neatly diverted from one conduit to another without
undue cramping. No joints shall be allowed in draw-in boxes under any circumstances.
Ceiling point boxes or draw-in boxes on a concealed installation shall finish flush with the underside of the
ceilings.
All conduit boxes not carrying lighting or other fittings shall be installed with a suitable cover fixed with
brass or stainless steel roundhead screws.
Where any surface mounting control gear or other Plant and equipment is to be installed in conjunction
with concealed conduit work, the conduit shall be terminated at a flush mounted adaptable box. The back
of the Plant and equipment shall be drilled and bushed for back entry and the Plant and equipment
mounted so as to conceal the adaptable box.

52.6.4

Pliable PVC Conduit (Embedded In Concrete)

Pliable PVC conduit for use in concealed wiring system shall comply with the requirements of this
subclause.
The pliable PVC conduit shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 50086-2-2. All pliable conduit shall
be of the high impact, heavy duty and high mechanical strength type.
All conduit fittings shall comply with the requirements of BS 4607 Pt 1 and Pt V and indelibly marked with
the name or trademark of the item. The conduit, fittings and accessories shall be from the same
manufacturer.
No conduit smaller than 20mm diameter shall be used.
All conduit joints shall be made in accordance to the recommended methods laid down by the
manufacturer of the conduit. All such joints shall be watertight. The same requirements shall also apply
to joints between conduit, fittings and accessories. Dipping of conduit or fittings into solvent adhesives is
forbidden. Before joints are made, the conduit ends shall be cut square and all burrs and sharp edges
shall be removed. Care shall be taken to remove all damp, grease, cement dust and oil from all faces of
the conduit and accessories prior to jointing. Conduits shall be entered fully into box spouts and butted
into couplers for jointing purposes.
Couplers shall be used where straight runs of conduit exceed 8m.
The radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 3 times the outside diameter of the conduit.
Spacer bar saddles shall be of PVC with bases. The fixings shall be such that the conduits may be taken
into accessories without sets or bends.
All pliable PVC conduit and its fittings shall be listed under PLS Class 1A or 1B or approved
equivalent.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 53/.....
BLDG04/S52.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 53-1
SECTION 53
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES AND FIXTURES

53.1

SWITCHES
Switches shall be of 6-amp rating designed specifically for use on ac inductive circuits and complying
with SS 227.
Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, switches shall be single-pole, one-way, rocker operated
and of white square plate pattern. Where two or more switches are to be fixed adjacent to each other,
multi-gang switches on a single cover plate shall be used.
For flush mounting installation, the front plate of the switch shall not be more than 4mm thick or other
approved decorative model and the fixing screws shall be concealed.
All switches shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark and PSB Test Mark.
or other approved equivalent

53.2

SWITCH SOCKET-OUTLETS
Each power point shall be a switched socket-outlet of similar construction by the same manufacturer and
product range to match the switches.
The switched socket-outlet shall comprise a combined switch and 3-pin shuttered type outlet. The 13 amp
and 15 amp switched socket-outlet shall comply with the requirements of SS 145 and SS 472 respectively.
For flush mounting installation, the front plate of the switch socket outlet shall not be more than 4mm thick
or other approved decorative model and the fixing screws shall be concealed.
All 13 amp and 15 amp switched socket outlets shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the
Safety Mark and PSB Test Mark. or other approved equivalent

53.3

WATER HEATER POINT

For water heater point, a double pole switch and a connection unit shall be provided. Both the switch and
connection shall be rated at 20 amperes. The switch shall comply with SS 227 and complete with a neon
light indicator and a durable mark "Water Heater". The water heater switch shall be of similar construction
by the same manufacturer and product range to match other accessories. The connection unit shall have
a three terminal connection block with white moulded cover plate and cable clamp included. The
connection unit shall be typed tested to SS 241.
For flush mounting installation, the front plate of the switch shall be 4mm thick or less and the fixing
screws shall be concealed.

53.4

BELL PUSH POINT

Bell push shall be of a similar construction to match the lighting switch, with push to make mechanism.
The bell push shall be rated at 5 amp and complying with SS 227. The bell point shall be terminated on a
connection block and marked "Bell Point" with approved sticker or tag.

53.5

MOULDED BOX
Moulded boxes used for casting in concrete for flush mounting of switches, switched socket outlets and
other accessories shall comply with the requirements of IEC 670 and the dimensions as specified in BS
4662. The maximum temperature during the building process is assumed to be less than 90C.
Surface and flush mounting moulded boxes not used for casting in concrete shall comply with BS 4662.
Such boxes shall be suitable for the mounting surface.
The colour appearances and the profile of the moulded boxes shall match the switches, switched socket
outlets and other accessories.

BLDG04/S53.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 53-2
53.6

BATTEN LAMPHOLDERS
Batten lampholders shall be white moulded insulated bayonet-type complete with a skirt, two terminals
and a loop-in earth terminal. It shall be rated at 2 ampere and shall have a temperature rating of at least
T1 complying with SS 125.

53.7

CONSUMER CONTROL UNIT

A consumer control unit as indicated in the Drawings shall be provided for each unit. The enclosure box
shall be surface-mounted and complete with mounting, rail, multi-terminal earth bar, busbar, busbars
insulating shield, neutral terminal block, circuit identification label, miniature circuit breakers and RCCB.
The consumer control unit shall comply with BS EN 60439-3. Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, a
main switch shall be provided and placed before the RCCB in the consumer unit.
The main switch shall be a double-pole M6 Type B miniature circuit breaker with contact position indicator
to indicate the positions of the moving contacts. Where the operating means of the main switch is used to
indicate the positions of the contacts, the operating means when released shall automatically take up the
position corresponding to the position of the contact. For automatic opening, a third distinct position of the
operating means may be provided.
The main switch shall have in the opening position a minimum isolating distance of 3mm between the
contacts.
The miniature circuit breakers shall be of the thermal magnetic type with a toggle type tripping switch, and
shall comply with the requirements of IEC 898. The MCB shall be rated for 230V, 50 Hz operation. They
shall possess a Type B tripping characteristic and shall have an interrupting capacity of at least 6 KA
(M6).
The RCCB shall be double-pole and of the high sensitivity direct-acting current-operated type with a
tripping time not exceeding 0.1 second.
All RCCB shall comply with SS 97 and shall registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark
and PSB Test Mark or other approved equivalent.

53.8

APPROVAL OF ITEMS
Switches, switched socket-outlets, water heater switches and connection units and bell push shall be of
the same manufacturer and product range.
Consumer control unit shall bear the PSB Test Mark or other approved equivalent.
Surface mounting moulded boxes, flush mounting moulded boxes, polarised plugs, socket connectors,
batten lamp holders, water heater switches and connection units and bell push shall pass type tests.

53.9

POLARISED PLUG AND SOCKET CONNECTOR

Each pole of the polarised plug & socket connector shall have two screw terminals. Where there is only
one cable connected to each pole of the plug and one cable connected to each pole of the socket, each
pole of the polarised plug and socket connector may have one screw terminal.
The polarised plug & socket connector shall be tested to comply with the relevant clauses of BS 5733 or
IEC 998-1 and 2-1.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 54/.....
BLDG04/S53.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 54-1
SECTION 54
LUMINAIRES

54.1

GENERAL
The quantity and types of fitting shall be ascertained from the Drawings. All control gears shall be
provided together with the fittings by the lighting supplier or using approved control gears specified by the
supplier where such control gears are not provided together with the fitting.

54.2

INSTALLATION
All lighting fittings shall be securely hung or mounted as follows :
(a)

Surface and wall mounted fittings shall be secured with metal threaded studs complete with two
lock nuts and washers using approved metal studs cartridge hammer. The threaded metal stud
shall penetrate into the ceiling surface to a depth of at least 32mm. Alternatively, the light fittings
may be installed in accordance with the installation method recommended by the lighting fitting
manufacturer and using the mounting accessories supplied by the manufacturer.

(b)

For pendant fittings, the downrods shall be securely fixed to the ceiling with conduit terminating
boxes.

(c)

Recessed fitting shall be supported independently. The false ceiling grid system shall not be used
to support light fittings. There shall be no noticeable ceiling deflection when the fittings are
installed in place. Steel wires tied to metal studs that are penetrated into the concrete surface at a
depth of at least 32mm shall be used to support the fittings.

The above represents the minimum requirements and the Contractor shall take further precautions if the
fittings to be mounted are exceptionally heavy such as high bay fittings. The Contractor shall ensure that
all fittings are securely mounted.
All light fittings shall be wired from a light point unless otherwise specified. A 3-core cable of 1.5 mm2 in
flexible PVC conduit shall be used for the interconnection from the lighting point to the fitting. This
connecting cable shall be suitably rated for operation at the surrounding steady state temperature in the
light fitting.
The Contractor shall ensure all metal parts of components of the fittings be effectively earthed.
54.3

LIGHTING LUMINAIRES
All luminaires shall be pre-wired and complete with lamps, control gears, lampholders, capacitors and
diffusers. The exact type and rating of the luminaires shall be as specified in the Drawings. All luminaires
shall be power factor corrected up to 0.85 lagging or higher.
Fluorescent luminaires shall comply with the following standards where applicable :
SS 263 Part 3: Particular requirements for general purposes luminaires.
SS 490 Part 2 & SS 491 : Ballast for fluorescent lamps on AC 50 Hz supplies.
Tubular fluorescent fittings shall be type tested to SS 263 Part 3. Ballast for tubular fluorescent lamps
shall be low loss type with a maximum 7 watts loss at rated voltage and wattage.
Where lighting luminaires are specified with two or more lamps, each of the lamps shall be provided with
its own control gears unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings.
All ballasts shall pass type tests. All ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps shall be registered with Spring
Singapore and bear the Safety Mark and PSB Test Mark. or approved equivalent.

BLDG04/S54.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 54-2
54.4

FLUORESCENT LAMPS
(a)

All tubular fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 81:Tubular fluorescent lamps for general
lighting service.

(b)

The fluorescent lamp shall be of the Bi-Pin lamp cap with G13 base and the following information
shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

Trademark or mark of origin;

Nominal Wattage/Voltage;
Colour Definition; and
Colour Rendering Index.

(c)

The operational life span of the fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 8000 hours at a mortality
rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 5000 hours.

(d)

The fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics :

Lamp Wattage
(W)
18
36

Length
(mm)
600
1200

Diameter
(mm)
26
26

Output
(Lumen)
1300 or better
3300 or better

Colour Rendering
Index
80 or better
80 or better

The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The output after
2000 burning hours shall not fall below 10% of the value at 100 burning hours.

54.5

(e)

The correlated colour temperature of the fluorescent lamp shall be 4000K unless indicated
otherwise in the Drawings.

(f)

The metallic part of the Bi-Pin lamp cap shall be either non-corroding or suitably protected against
corrosion.

COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

(a)

All compact fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 901 : Single-capped fluorescent lamps Performance Specifications.

(b)

The compact PL-S or PL-C fluorescent lamp shall be single ended and shall have a 2 pin base
complete with a built-in starter and a radio frequency interference suppression capacitor.
The following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

Trademark or mark of origin;

Nominal Wattage/Voltage;
Colour Definition; and
Colour Rendering Index.

(c)

The operational life span of the compact fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 8000 hours at a
mortality rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 5000 hours.

(d)

The compact fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics :

Wattage/Type
(W)
9W PL-S
11W PL-S
13W PL-C
18W PL-C
26W PL-C

Overall Length
(mm)
167
237
140
154
173

Base
G23
G23
G24d-1
G24d-2
G24d-3

Output
(Lumen)
600
900
900
1200
1800

Colour Rendering
Index
80 or better
80 or better
80 or better
80 or better
80 or better

The output quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The output after 2000
burning hours shall not fall below 10% of the value at 100 burning hours.
(e)

BLDG04/S54.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

The correlated colour temperature of the compact fluorescent lamp shall be 3000K unless
indicated otherwise in the Drawings.

Bldg Spec
Page 54-3
54.6

STARTERS FOR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

All starters shall be of the glow-switch type and shall comply with the safety and performance
requirements of IEC 155. The starters shall be suitable for use with fluorescent lamp of wattage from 4 to
65W at 220-240V.
The starter shall have the following distinctly and durably marked on the canister :
(i)
(ii)

Trademark or mark of origin; and

Nominal Wattage/Voltage.

54.7

EMERGENCY EVACUATION LIGHTING

54.7.1

General
All emergency lighting, emergency exit lighting and emergency lighting conversion kits shall comply with
SS CP19 and approved by FSSB.
The Contractor shall engage a PE to supervise and test the emergency evacuation lighting and ensure
that the installation complies with the requirements of SS CP19 and the Code of Practice for Fire
Precautions in Building. On completion of the Works, the PE shall submit certifications to FSSB or HDBs
SO Rep, where required and as directed, in accordance with FSSD requirements.

54.7.2

Exit Sign And Exit Lighting

All exit lighting and exit signs shall be of white LED type unless shown otherwise in the Drawings,
complete with 2 hour nickel cadmium batteries, IP 30 or other approved and shall comply with the
requirements of SS CP 19. All luminaires for the exit lighting and exit sign shall be approved by the FSSD
under the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1. The duration of the battery operation shall be for the
continuous rated period of 2 hours

54.7.3

Emergency Lighting And Conversion Kit

All emergency lighting including lighting conversion kits shall comply with the requirements of SS CP19.
They shall be approved by the FSSD under the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1. The duration of the
battery operation shall be for the continuous rated period of 2 hours.
Emergency lighting conversion kits shall be provided for some of the lighting luminaires as shown in the
Drawings. The luminaire shall be pre-wired in such a manner that, under healthy supply condition, the
luminaire shall operate normally, but under supply interruption, the fluorescent/PL or PLC tubes are
connected to the emergency lighting conversion kit. Wiring of the conversion kit shall be arranged so as
to allow easy removal of the kit, where required, without affecting the normal operation of the luminaire.
Terminal blocks shall be provided for this purpose.
The emergency lighting conversion kit shall incorporate a charging and changeover device and shall be
powered by sealed nickel cadmium batteries. The charging device shall be designed to charge the
batteries and keep it in a charged state from a 230 volts 50 Hz supply. The conversion kit shall be located
away from the ballasts.
The lumen output of the fluorescent/PL or PLC tube shall not fall below one-third of its normal output when
connected to the emergency lighting conversion kit.
A separate unswitched "live" wire which shall be of the same phase as the normal supply, shall be run to
provide the line condition monitoring. Such separate unswitched "live" wire shall be clearly marked as
"live" and "unswitched" and with a "danger" sign. It shall be terminated at the terminal block before the
connection to the conversion kit.

BLDG04/S54.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 54-4
54.8

AIRCRAFT OBSTRUCTION LIGHT (AOL)

This new clause shall be added under Section 54 "Luminaires" of the Standard Specifications For Building
Works And Other Installations.
General
The AOL system shall comply with the requirement of "Visual Aids For Denoting Obstacles" specified in
the standard of International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) and its amendments, and the regulations
issued by the Civil Aviation Authority of Singapore (CAAS) and Ministry Of Defence.
The works shall include the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the AOL system as shown in
the Drawings. Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations
or standards, the more stringent of the requirements shall govern the works.
Where any apparatus/equipment forming part of the installation is situated outdoor or subjected to damp
condition, such apparatus/equipment shall be of weatherproof design.
AOL System
The AOL system consists of a main AOL, a standby AOL, control circuit panel and remote monitoring
panel. The AOL system shall be either of the following 2 types:
(a)

low intensity AOL -- where both the main and standby AOL shall be LED low intensity type operate
on a DC power supply.

(b)

medium/high intensity AOL -- where the main AOL (medium/high intensity) operates on a AC
power supply of 230 volts with standby AOL of LED low intensity type operates on a DC power
supply.

The DC power supply shall be provided by sealed type maintenance free lead acid batteries, maintained in
an adequately charged condition by a AC/DC rectifier/charger.
Control Circuit Panel
The control circuit panel shall be located at roof level. It shall be weatherproof type and mounted on a wall
sheltered from the rain where possible.
The control circuit panel shall have the following functions:
(a)

Time Of Operation
The AOL system shall be switched on by means of photocell connected to the Light Sensitive
Switch. It shall be switched on during hours of low visibility (eg. haze, rain and night). In the event
the photocell is faulty the system shall automatically by pass the photocell.

(b)

Change Over Relay

When the AOL system is switched on the main AOL shall be triggered. In the event the main AOL
is faulty the change over relay mechanism shall automatically switched on the standby AOL.

(c)

Daily Test Relay

After the event the main AOL is switched off, the daily test relay mechanism shall automatically
switched on the standby AOL for a few seconds to test the functionality of the standby AOL.

BLDG04/S54.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 54-5
54.7

AIRCRAFT OBSTRUCTION LIGHT (AOL) (CONTD)

Control Circuit Panel (Contd)
(d)

Fault Relay
The fault relay mechanism shall send signals to activate the indicating lamps on the remote
monitoring panel in the event the following occurs:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)

main AOL faulty

standby AOL faulty
AC/DC rectifier/charger faulty

The reset button shall be fixed at the control circuit panel. The reset button shall be unable to reset
the fault relay mechanism until the AC/DC rectifier/charger is rectified or replaced.
(e)

Mains Power Failure

In the event there is a mains power failure the following shall occur:
(i)
(ii)

for a low intensity AOL, the system shall switch over to DC supply to operate the main AOL.
for medium/high intensity AOL, the system shall automatically switch over to the DC supply
and operate the standby LED AOL.

The system shall automatically switch back to the mains power supply once the mains power
supply is restored. The standby batteries should be designed to be able to last for at least 6 hours.
Remote Monitoring Panel
The remote monitoring panel shall be located in the switchroom. The remote monitoring panel shall
contain the following:
(i)

1 No. of push button for lamp test (Main and Standby AOL);

(ii)

3 No. of indicating lamps for main AOL, standby AOL & fault occurence;

(iii)

1 set of contacts for remote warning lamp.

Indicating Lamp
Indicating lamp installed on the panels shall be of light emitting diode (LED) type.
Remote Warning Lamp & Warning Notice
An amber warning lamp to indicate occurrence of fault shall be extended from the remote monitoring panel
to outside of the switchroom. The warning lamp shall be mounted on a wall near the ceiling and clearly
visible from the void deck. A warning notice shall be mounted directly under the warning lamp.
Labels
All panels, push buttons and lamp indicators shall be labelled clearly with an identification tag made of
durable material.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 55/.....
BLDG04/S54.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 55-1
SECTION 55
EARTHING SYSTEM

55.1

MAIN EARTH BAR

The Contractor shall provide and fix to the wall of the switch room a tinned copper earth bar of crosssectional dimensions 31.5mm by 6.3mm mounted on porcelain insulators. The main earth bar shall be at
least 240mm long with six holes complete with M6 bolts and nuts. Alternatively, the main earth bar can be
an extension of the earth bar of the switchboard such that it is exposed and located on the external of the
switchboard.
From the main earth bar, two lengths of 25mm by 3mm copper tape shall be run to two separate earth
electrodes outside the switchrooms. The earth electrodes shall be interconnected by copper tape to form
2
a loop. A PVC insulated 70mm green earth cable shall connect the main earth bar to the earth bar within
the main switchboard.

55.2

EARTH ELECTRODE

55.2.1

General
The Contractor shall install a minimum of 2 earth electrodes for the earthing system. Each earth electrode
shall comprise two sections of nominal 16mm diameter copper-weld, steel earth rods suitably coupled to
form a continuous 3.6m length.
Earth rods shall be driven into the ground using a suitable mechanical hammer. During the driving
process, the Contractor shall fit an appropriate driving accessory in order to ensure that there is no
damage to the top of the electrode. The two electrodes shall be connected to the main earth bar and
interconnected by 25mm by 3mm copper tape, forming a loop. Copper tape shall be connected to the
electrode with purpose made clamp complying with SS 322.
Parallel connected earth electrodes shall be spaced at a horizontal distance not less than the buried
length.
The resistance to earth of the electrode system shall not exceed 1 ohm. If the resistance exceeds this
value, the Contractor shall, at his own cost and expense, drive in extra electrodes complete with
interconnecting conductors, clamps, inspection pits, to reduce and achieve the value of earthing
resistance.

55.2.2

Earth Rod
Each sectional rod shall have a copper-weld, steel earth rod with a nominal size of 16mm x 1800mm. The
copper shall be molecularly bonded into the steel core and shall have a thickness of not less than 0.25mm
at any point. The proportion of copper maintained on those parts of a sectional rod intended for
permanent connecting linkage with other sectional rods shall be such that no bare steel shall be visible
with a 4x magnifying aid.
The rod shall pass a type test conducted by PSB in accordance with the requirements of the American UL
467 Standard.
All earth rods shall be listed under PLS Class 2 or approved equivalent.

55.2.3

Coupling
Rod section couplings shall be of bronze counterbored to completely enclose threads, protecting them
from damage and corrosion and exhibiting mechanical strength and electrical continuity between sections.

BLDG04/S55.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 55-2
55.2.4

Earth Inspection Pit

The top of each earth electrode shall be housed in a purpose made hot dipped galvanised lid inspection
pit to facilitate inspection. The pit assembly shall consist of a galvanised mild steel frame, a galvanised
steel hinged cover and a plastic moulded pot. The steel used shall be 3mm thick. The plastic moulded
pot shall be secured to the steel frame by rivets. The dimensions of the cover shall be 250mm by 250mm.
It shall be reinforced by 3 intermediate stiffeners and shall have an 8mm diameter opening for lifting up.
For each pit, an identification tag made of durable plastic or metal shall be fixed onto the inside top. The
tag shall include information of the block number, street name, types of earthing (whether main electrical
or lightning and etc), value of earth, number of earthing points (e.g. 1 of 4) and the date of testing. All
wordings shall be engraved and shall be durable.
Where pits are located on the building apron, it shall be sunk flushed with the finish level. Further, all its
positions are to be chosen such that they are aligned and co-ordinated with other services' inspection pits,
apron line, apron joints, apron drains, building lines or any other immediate features. Earth electrode
inspection pits shall not be located within footpath, linkways, shelters and pavilions.
The Contractor shall submit a sample of the galvanised pit assembly to the SO Rep for approval before
commencing installation.
The pit shall be installed such that the bottom is not concreted so that any accumulated water can seep
through. After installation and testing, all earth inspection pits shall be filled up with sand or other
approved aggregates to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The earth inspection pit shall be listed under PLS Class 2 or approved equivalent

55.3

PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS
For each electrical circuit, circuit protective conductors shall be provided. It shall be installed along the
route of its respective circuit conductors. Throughout the electrical installation, protective bonding
conductors are also required in accordance with CP 5. The cross sectional area of all such protective
conductors shall be calculated in accordance with CP 5.
All protective conductors shall be copper. Joints in protective conductors are not permitted other than at
terminal points.
Connectors between earth bars, Plant and equipment frames etc and stranded copper cables shall be
made with the appropriate lug, bolt, washers, nut and lock nut.
The earth terminal of all switched socket outlets shall be connected to the protective conductor of the final
sub-circuits.
For ring circuit, then the circuit protective conductors shall also be run in a ring.
An earthing point shall be provided at each lighting point and connected to the circuit protective conductor.

55.4

BONDING (ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION)

All non-conducting metal work forming part of the electrical installation shall be effectively bonded to the
earth system. Similarly, other metal work which under fault conditions, could become live or constitutes
an alternative earth fault return path shall be bonded to the earth system. The main water pipes and main
gas pipes entering the building block shall be bonded to the main earth bar immediately after their stop
valves.
In addition, all direct water supply pipes entering the building block shall be bonded at the ground floor and
all indirect water supply pipes shall be bonded at the topmost floors.

BLDG04/S55.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 55-3
55.4

BONDING (ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION) (CONTD)

The water service pipe and gas pipe to each unit shall be bonded to the earth terminal of the meter
box/meter board/consumer unit whichever is practical. The bonding connections shall be made as near
as practical to the point of entry of the service and, where possible, keeping a minimum distance of
150mm away from any pipe joints to prevent the pipes from being deformed and thus giving rise to gas or
water leakage at the joints For service ducts serving more than one unit, all bonding connections within
the service duct shall be tagged to indicate the units they are bonding.
All bonding connections to the water and gas pipes shall be made with purpose made clamps complying
with SS 322.

55.5

SEGREGATION FROM EXPOSED METALWORK OF OTHER SERVICES

Metal trunking, tray and conduit shall be kept as far away as possible from exposed metalwork of other
services. Where metal trunking, tray and conduit have to run in close proximity of these other services,
they shall be electrically bonded to the fixed metalwork of these services.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 56/.....

BLDG04/S55.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 56-1
SECTION 56
LIGHTNING PROTECTION

56.1

GENERAL
The lightning protection system shall comply with the requirements of SS CP33:and its amendments, the
Specifications and the regulations issued by the Building Control Authority (BCA).
The Contractor shall engage a PE to supervise the installation of the lightning protection system and
ensure that the lightning protection system installed is in accordance with SS CP33: On completion of the
Works, the PE shall issue Certificate of Supervision (COS) to the SO Rep and if so required, such as COS
shall also be issued to BCA and FSSD..

56.2

CONDUCTORS
The air termination network and down conductors shall be high conductivity aluminium tape of crosssectional area 25mm x 3mm.
Aluminium strip conductors shall be fixed with purpose-made aluminium clips with base strips at intervals
not exceeding 0.6m. The aluminium base strip shall be fastened to the masonry surface by a single set
screw and the aluminium clip shall be secured on the base strip by two screws. The thickness of the base
strip and clip shall be 3mm and 1.5mm respectively.
Screws and nails for securing clips and base strips shall be of aluminium alloy or stainless steel. Coated
or plated steel screws or nails are not acceptable.

56.3

AIR TERMINALS
Air terminals shall be installed in the positions indicated on the Drawings or where specifically approved by
the SO Rep.
Each air terminal shall consist of a taper pointed aluminium rod, 16mm in diameter and 300mm in length.
The rod shall be tapered to a sharp point and concentric on a centre line of the air terminal point. The
distance of the taper shall be a minimum of 4 times the diameter of the rod.
Air terminal bases shall adequately support the point and provide a strong secure continuous connection
to the connecting conductor. The base shall be of aluminium of cast or stamped construction. Points
shall be attached to the base by male threads to a female hub on the base. Fixing bolts and screws for
the air terminal bases shall be of aluminium alloy or stainless steel.

56.4

AIR TERMINATION NETWORK

Conductors shall be located along ridges, around the perimeter, behind or on top of parapets and across
large open areas of the roof, as indicated in the Drawings. They shall be run parallel to the building lines
in such a way as to join each air terminal to all the rest including those on projections above the roof, and
form a closed network. For tile roofing, aluminium tape shall be secured by purpose made fasteners and
not cement mortar. For metal roofing, aluminium tapes shall be secured by purpose-made fasteners and
care must be taken not to puncture the metal roofing sheets.

56.5

JOINTS
Joints in conductors shall be kept to a minimum and shall not be permitted without the permission of the
SO Rep. Joints shall be both electrically and mechanically sound.
Joints between aluminium strips shall be made by overlapping clean tinned joint faces and securing with a
purpose-made bolted clamp. The length of the overlap shall not be less than 25mm. Alternatively, joints
shall be made using welding process such as "Furseweld" exothermic powder ignition method or other
approved. The welding process shall be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.

BLDG04/S56.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 56-2
56.5

JOINTS (CONTD)
For cross-over or T-joints, the aluminium strip conductors shall be secured using a purpose-made square
tape clamp similar to Furse Cat No. CT005 or other approved.
Joints between dissimilar metals shall be effected by bi-metallic joints as recommended in BS PD 6484
(commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation).

56.6

BONDING
The Contractor shall bond all exposed metal work on the roof of the building to the air termination network.
The metal work includes lamp poles, railings, metal roofing, gutters, flashings, etc. Bonding leads shall be
of the same cross-sectional area as the roof conductors. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, the
Contractor shall take precautions to prevent electrolytic corrosion. Bonding shall be effected by means of
purpose made bonding clamp complying to SS322 where applicable.
For external facade which are metal clad, the Contractor shall bond the metallic structure to the lightning
protection system.

56.7

DOWN CONDUCTORS
Down conductors shall be distributed round the outside walls of the building in the positions indicated in
the Drawings or where specifically approved by the SO Rep. A down conductor shall follow the most
direct path possible between the air termination and the earth termination.
Each down conductor shall be connected by an earthing lead of copper tape of cross-sectional
dimensions 25mm x 3mm to an earth electrode. The copper earthing lead of the down conductor shall be
"ramset" to prevent unauthorised removal. In particular, all conductors below ground shall be copper
tape. Appropriate copper or brass clips with base strips shall be used to fasten the copper strip conductor
above ground.
A bi-metallic aluminium/copper connector which is friction welded and designed for connecting the two
dissimilar metals shall be provided for the connection of the aluminium down conductor to the copper
earthing lead. The bi-metallic connector which also serves as a test link shall be located at a height of
2.5m above ground. Where recommended by the manufacturer, a non-water soluble, non-petroleum
based polymer grease or inhibiting compound shall be used with the connector clamp to seal the electrical
connections from the ingress of moisture and air.

56.8

EARTH ELECTRODE
Earth rods and earth inspection pits shall comply with the relevant clauses and subclauses specified in
Section 55 "Earthing System".

56.9

COUPLING
Rod section couplings shall be of bronze alloy. The coupling shall be of sufficient length to completely
enclose the threads of two rods coupled together to protect them from damage and corrosion. Couplings
shall be suitable for use on the earth electrodes, as recommended by the earth electrode manufacturer or
otherwise approved by the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S56.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 56-3
56.10

RESISTANCE TO EARTH
The overall resistance to earth of the lightning protection system, before bonding to any metal services in
or on the structure shall be less than 10 ohms.
In addition, each earth termination which is not interconnected at or below ground level shall have a
resistance to earth not exceeding 20 ohms.
If it is not possible to achieve the 10 ohm overall resistance to earth or the 20 ohm resistance to earth
requirement for each individual electrode, then the Contractor shall provide up to two additional earth
electrodes per down conductor, all at the Contractor's cost and expense, to reduce the value of earth
resistance. The additional earth electrode(s) shall then be connected to the first electrode with
25mm x 3mm copper strip buried at 450mm below ground level, and shall be complete with the necessary
earthing clamp and earth inspection pit.
Where more than one earth electrode per down conductor are needed to be installed, then, where
applicable, they shall be equally spaced at a horizontal distance of not less than the buried length, in a line
parallel to the base of the structure.

56.11

COPPER CONDUCTOR
The clauses in this Section are also applicable if copper conductors are used. The conductor shall be
copper tape of dimensions 25mm x 3mm or stranded copper conductors of cross sectional area as
indicated in the Drawings. All materials used including joints and fasteners shall be copper based and
complying with SS CP 33.

56.12

APPROVAL OF ITEMS
Earth rod clamp, pipe bonding clamp and earth rod coupling shall be approved under the PLS Class 2 or
other approved equivalent.
The approval for earth rod and earth inspection pit shall comply with the relevant clauses and subclauses
specified in Section 55 "Earthing System".

Total pages for this Section :

Section 57/.....

BLDG04/S56.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 57-1
SECTION 57
PUBLIC LIGHTING

57.1

GENERAL
This section including all clauses and subclauses under it covers the installation of public lighting for the
corridors, staircases, ground floor play areas and other public areas in the building blocks. Unless shown
otherwise in the Drawings, surface wiring in PVC conduit/PVC trunking shall be used.

57.2

WIRING
All wiring for public lighting shall be in 1.5 mm2 PVC insulated cables unless otherwise indicated in the
Drawings.
The conductor shall be annealed copper, preferably stranded.
All wiring shall be carried out on the 'loop-in' principle with the fixed lighting points terminated in
accordance to CP 5.
(a)

Surface Wiring
For surface wiring of public lighting, the cables shall be installed in PVC trunking in all exposed
public areas except that it shall be enclosed in a PVC conduit when passing vertically through
floors and when installed behind false ceilings. A square knock-out box or purpose made
transformation piece shall be provided at such PVC conduit and PVC trunking interface.

(b)

Concealed Wiring
Concealed wiring for public lighting shall be installed as shown in the Drawings and in accordance
with the Specifications.

57.3

TIME SWITCH
All public lighting circuit shall be controlled through a contactor energised by time switch. The time switch
shall be powered using AC supply and have programmable input and output conditions per line and have
minimum three inputs and three outputs. The output shall have a relay switching capacity of 5A at 240V
AC with independent common. The time switchs central processing unit shall be provided with built-in
real-time clock and calendar functions. The real time clock shall have an accuracy of +/- 6 minutes
maximum per year.
The data of real time clock, calendar and counter present value shall be held for a minimum of 48 hours
for prolonged power interruptions. The time switch must also be able to store its program and system
setting data to prevent loss during power failure. A LCD display with backlight that will be automatically
cut-off through adjustable settings shall be provided. Password protection function should also be included
to prevent unauthorized modification of time switch programs and settings.
The time switch shall support communication via RS232C communication port to devices like computer
and personal digital assistant (PDA). It shall allow downloading of program and setting through the
RS232C port or infrared port. Windows based (windows CE for PDA) software programming tools and
drivers for the set-up of the communication between the time switch and the host devices shall be
provided.
The time switch shall have self-diagnostic functions and shall be able to display the message on its LCD
and communicate all error message back to host devices via RS232C communication port.

57.4

LUMINAIRES
Public lighting luminaires shall be provided as shown in the Drawings.

Total pages for this Section :

1
Section 58/.....

BLDG04/S57.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 58-1
SECTION 58
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF DWELLING UNITS AND PREMISES

58.1

INDIVIDUAL ELECTRICITY METERING

For all dwelling units provided with the electrical service ducts, the Contractor shall provide a meter board
inside the service duct for each unit unless otherwise shown in the Drawings. All meter boards shall be
clearly labelled to indicate the house numbers served by it. The meter boards shall comply with the
relevant clauses and subclauses specified in this Section.
For all dwelling units not provided with electrical service ducts, the Contractor shall provide a meter box
just outside the unit or at other locations as shown in the Drawings. The meter boxes shall be clearly
labelled to indicate the house numbers served by it. The meter boxes shall comply with the relevant
clauses and subclauses specified in this Section.
For other premises, the Contractor shall supply an incoming service MCB for electricity Kwh meter
protection, rated as shown in the Drawings. All such MCB shall also comply with SPSL/Grid
requirements. The service MCB shall be provided with a suitable protective cover for wall mounting. The
protective cover shall have an opening for the toggle switch and provision of knock-outs for the supply and
load cables. Sealing of the toggle switch in the OFF position shall be possible. Protective cover, if
fabricated from sheet steel, shall have a minimum thickness of 0.8mm. Instructions for the re-setting of
the MCB in case of overload or other abnormal conditions shall be provided and fixed adjacent to the MCB
switch. Mounting bracket shall be provided for the MCB. The bracket shall have a terminal for earthing.
The service MCB shall be clearly labelled to indicate the house numbers served by it.
The labels of the house numbers shall be of "Formica engraving laminate" or other approved material
having black characters on white background with minimum 5mm height characters. They shall be
secured to the front of the panel by riveting and shall be tamper-proofed.

58.2

ELECTRICAL METER BOARDS INSIDE SERVICE DUCTS

58.2.1

General
Provide and fix electrical meter board to each individual unit of flat and other premises as indicated. Such
meter boards are located inside the service ducts. The construction of the meter board shall comply with
SPSL/Grid requirements and shall be approved by them for use.
The overall dimensions and essential details of the electrical meter boards shall be in accordance with the
Drawings.
The service MCB shall be of the thermal magnetic type, with toggle-type tripping switch mounted on DINrail and approved by SPSL/Grid for meter protection use.

58.2.2

Construction
Electrical meter boards shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped sheet steel. The
body of the meter board shall be of 1.2mm thickness and the front panel shall be of 1.5mm thickness. It
shall be finished with epoxy powder paint giving a total thickness of not less than 45 micron. All coats of
paint shall be individually oven baked and dried. The metal box shall pass the salt spray and scratch test
as specified in SS5:1979 Part 13 and Part 32. The removable front meter panel shall be mounted on
hinges either on the left or right as required according to the site conditions. Mounting holes for the fixing
of electricity Kwh meter shall be provided as indicated.
The isolator and the service MCB for the meter protection shall be totally enclosed and compartmentalise
with separate covers for the isolator and MCB. The isolator and the MCB shall be individually lockable.
Instructions for the resetting of the operating handle of the MCB in case of overload or other abnormal
conditions shall be displayed adjacent to the operating handle as shown in the Drawings. The electrical
meter boards shall comply with BS 5486:Part 1:1986.

BLDG04/S58.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 58-2
58.2.2

Construction (Cont'd)
The temperature rise of the terminals shall not exceed 35C when carrying the rated current. The live
parts or exposed terminals in the installed position shall not be accessible in accordance with the standard
test finger specified in BS 3042.
The earth terminals shall be of sufficient size and ways for termination of all protective conductors.
Marking and suitable colour code for live, neutral and earth shall be provided at the appropriate terminals.

58.2.3

Type Testing
All electrical meter boards shall be type tested and passed by PSB. A sample of the electrical meter
board shall also be submitted to SPSL/Grid for prior approval before they are delivered to the Site for
installation.

58.3

ELECTRICAL METER BOXES

58.3.1

General
Provide and fix electrical meter box to each individual unit of flat and other premise as indicated.
The overall dimensions and essential details of the electrical meter boxes shall be in accordance with the
Drawings. The internal layout may be rearranged to suit the type of electrical accessories used in the box.
The electrical meter boxes shall comply with BS 5486:Part 1:1986.
The service MCB shall be of the thermal magnetic type, with toggle-type tripping switch mounted
on DIN-rail and approved by SPSL/Grid for meter protection use.

58.3.2

Construction
The electrical meter box may be of metallic or non-metallic material or a composite of both.
Boxes of steel material shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet steel of thickness not less than
1.2mm. They shall then be finished with epoxy powder paint, giving a total paint thickness of not less than
45 micron. All coats of paint shall be individually oven baked and dried. The metal box shall pass the salt
spray and scratch tests as specified in SS 5:1979 Part 13 and Part 32. Non-metallic boxes shall be of
glass reinforced polyester or other materials of adequate mechanical strength and resistant to ultra violet
or chemical deterioration.
The front edges of the box shall have rounded profile with the 4 corners rounded. A clear transparent
polycarbonate inspection window of minimum dimension 120mm x 160mm shall be provided to allow
reading of the Kwh meter. The transparent polycarbonate shall be stabilized against ultra-violet rays. A
solid teak board of at least 20mm thick shall be provided for the mounting of PUB Kwh meter. Other
alternative mounting methods shall be subject to SPSL/Grid approval. The box shall be provided with
hinged door and locking facilities. The locking device shall be opened by a special tool or by a master
key. The Contractor shall hand over to the Branch Office four numbers of such tool or master key for
each contract. All sharp edges either inside or outside the box shall be filed smooth such that it will not
cause injury to users or to workers.
The isolator and the service MCB for the meter protection shall be totally enclosed and compartmentalised
with separate covers for the isolator and MCB. The isolator and the MCB shall be individually lockable.
Instructions for the resetting of the operating handle of the MCB in the case of overload or other abnormal
conditions shall be displayed adjacent to the operating handle as shown in the Drawings.
The temperature rise of the terminals shall not exceed 35C when carrying the rated current. The live
parts or exposed terminals in the installed position shall not be accessible to the standard test finger as
specified in BS 3042.

BLDG04/S58.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 58-3
58.3.3

Terminal Blocks
Terminal blocks shall be of the insulated, DIN-rail mounted, feed-through type of terminal blocks with
screw clamp connections in which conductors can be connected without any special preparation. They
shall comply with the relevant requirements of SS 241, IEC 685-1 and 2, DIN 57611 and DIN 57609.
All current carrying parts of the terminal blocks shall be of copper or other materials at least equivalent
with regard to its conductivity and resistance to corrosion. All other metallic parts shall be electroplated or
otherwise specially treated to prevent corrosion.
The terminal blocks for each of the incoming live and neutral mains shall contain integral cross-connection
facility to form a minimum of 3 way connections : 2 ways suitable for 25mm copper cables and one way
for 10mm copper cable. The terminal blocks for the earth terminal shall contain similar integral crossconnections to cater for outgoing circuit protective conductors. Marking and suitable colour code for live,
neutral and earth shall be provided at the appropriate terminals.

58.3.4

Type Testing
All electrical meter boxes shall be type tested and passed by PSB. A sample of the electrical meter box
shall also be submitted to SPSL/Grid for prior approval before they are delivered to the Site for installation.

58.4

CONCEALED WIRING FOR FLATS

Except for services rooms, all wiring within the blocks shall be run in concealed PVC conduit unless
otherwise specified. The concealed conduit system shall allow for easy rewiring. The concealed wiring
shall include the following services:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

Electrical
CATV (Central Antenna Television System)
Telephone
Bell

All flush boxes for the mounting of switches, switch-socket outlets, CATV outlets and telephone outlets
shall be of the galvanised steel type. The galvanised steel flush boxes in the household shelters shall be
anchored to the reinforced concrete with galvanised steel 'fishtail' as shown in the Drawings, or other
approved method to tie back within the reinforced concrete. In addition, all conduits leading to the outside
of the household shelters shall be sealed at both ends for a minimum of 100mm with sealant approved for
shelter use to ensure air tightness.
58.5

FINAL SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING

All final sub-circuit wiring for dwelling units and premises shall be in PVC insulated cables unless
otherwise indicated in the Drawings. The conductors shall be annealed copper, preferably stranded. The
insulation of the conductors shall be colour identified throughout in accordance with CP 5 and the
requirements of SPSL/Grid.
Wiring shall be carried out on the "loop-in" principle with terminating points at consumer control units,
socket outlets, switches and connection units and at the fixed lighting points in accordance to CP 5. No
joint between the terminal points shall be permitted.

58.6

BONDING
The bonding of the water service pipe and gas pipe to each unit shall be done in accordance with all the
relevant clauses and subclauses specified in Section 55 "Earthing System".

BLDG04/S58.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 58-4
58.7

SURGE PROTECTOR FOR THE DWELLING UNITS

This new clause shall be added to Section 58 Electrical Installation of Dwelling Units and Premises
of the Standard Specifications For Building Works and Other Installations.
Double-pole surge protector shall be installed in each dwelling unit for the suppression of common
mode transient (longitudinal transient) induced by lightning. The device shall be of the plug-in DIN rail
mounting module type complete with indicator. It shall be of at least service requirement category B,
with minimum nominal discharge current of 20 kA (8/20 microsecond) peak current. The device shall
be type tested for compliance with the recommendation outlined in IEC 61643-1 and Appendix C of
BS 651:1992.
In addition, the device shall be batch tested to verify that the let-through voltage is less than 1 kV
when subjected to combination wave of test voltage 6 kV (1.2/50 microsecond) and test current of 3
kA (8/20 microsecond).

Total pages for this Section :

Section 59/.....

BLDG04/S58.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 59-1
SECTION 59
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION TO MULTI-STOREY CARPARKS (MSCP),
GARAGES AND PLANT ROOMS

59.1

GENERAL
The plant rooms shall include consumer switch rooms, lift motor rooms, pump rooms, dustbin centres,
refuse centres, water tank rooms, generator rooms, telephone MDF rooms, telephone equipment rooms,
etc. The Contractor shall liaise with the appropriate contractors/PTL/occupiers of the plant rooms to
determine the desired positions of the isolator and consumer control unit in each plant room.

59.2

MAINS CABLES
The mains cables shall be installed in metal trunking or metal conduit from the switch room to the plant
rooms in accordance with the Drawings.

59.3

ELECTRICAL PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

The mains cables for the electrical Plant and equipment shall be terminated in metal-clad isolators.

59.4

LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER

The mains cables for lighting and small power for multi-storey carparks/garages and plant rooms shall be
terminated in a metal-clad consumer unit or distribution board.
The wiring for lighting and small power in the plant rooms and multi-storey/basement carparks/garages
shall be installed in metal trunking/metal conduits. All switches and switch socket-outlets shall be of the
metal-clad type. Lighting points shall be carried out on the "loop-in" principle with the fixed lighting points
terminated in accordance to CP 5.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 60/.....

BLDG04/S59.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 60-1
SECTION 60
OUTDOOR AMENITIES LIGHTING

60.1

SCOPE
This Section including all clauses and subclauses under it covers the installation, diversion and removal of
outdoor amenities lighting.

60.2

STEEL LIGHTING COLUMN

60.2.1

General
The general dimensions, arrangements and details of the columns shall be as shown in the Drawings.
Unless approved or indicated otherwise, all columns supplied shall be of the straight planted type.
The design of the lighting columns provided in the Drawings shows the minimum requirements only. The
Contractor and his QP shall be responsible for determining and ensuring that the lighting column is
structurally adequate to cater to the overall weight, brackets and the luminaire, bending moment as well as
the environment and soil conditions. Where these factors necessitate improvements or modifications to
the design of the lighting columns, the Contractor and his QP shall provide the necessary modifications or
improvements. It is deemed that the Contractor has included the cost and expense for the improvements
and modifications in the Contract Sum. The Contractor and his QP shall certify that the lighting columns
and bracket arms are designed, constructed and installed in compliance with BS 5649.
The thickness of the steel shall be as specified in the Drawings. The tolerance on the thickness of the
material shall be 10% of the thickness.
The steel tubes shall be formed either by continuous welding or one of the seamless processes. The
tubes so formed shall be free from all injurious Defect.
The circular column shall be made of steel tubes of suitable lengths swaged together when hot, or by any
other acceptable processes.
The exposed edge of each joint shall be welded and shall be chambered off at an angle of 45 degrees.
The cross-section of the column shall be nearly as circular as possible and except at joints and door
openings, the tolerance on the external diameter of the column shall be +3.0%.
The nominal height of the column as shown in the Drawings shall be the distance between the centre line
of the point of entry of the lantern and the intended ground level. The columns shall be planted in the
ground to the specified depth.
The complete column shall not deviate from straightness by more than 2mm per metre length.
A weatherproof door shall be provided with a locking device, over the door opening at the base of the
column as shown.
A baseboard made of sheet steel shall be provided and fitted in each column for the mounting of the
control gear and cut-out as shown in the Drawings.
A corrosion resistant earthing terminal as a bolt of not less than 8mm in diameter and 20mm long shall be
provided inside the column as shown in the Drawings. Two suitably sized washers and two nuts shall also
be provided.
Each planted column shall have a baseplate securely fixed to its base to prevent the column sinking into
the ground and to help prevent the column overturning. The details of the baseplate, planting depths and
buried concrete block shall be in accordance with the Drawings.

BLDG04/S60.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 60-2
60.2.1

General (Cont'd)
Surface mounted columns secured on top of concrete or other structures shall comply with BS 5649
unless shown otherwise in the Drawings.
A cable entry slot of dimensions 150mm x 50mm shall be provided in the column, the lower end of the slot
being about 500mm below the intended ground level.
Other non-standard columns can be used. Such columns shall comply with the requirements of BS 5649
and approved by the SO Rep.

60.2.2

Columns With Bracket Arms

The completed column shall include the bracket arm connected to the column. The bracket arm (single or
double) shall be manufactured as separate units suitable for mounting or fixing on to the column.
The tolerance on the total length of the columns with bracket arms and planted sections shall be 1%.
The single or double bracket arms shall be formed from one continuous steel tube section or two separate
steel tube sections, which will permit electrical wiring to reach the lanterns mounted at the end of the
bracket arms.
The bracket projection (horizontal distance from the point of entry to the lantern to a vertical line passing
through the centre of the cross-section of the column) shall be 2m and the tolerance on bracket projection
shall be 2% (without spigot).
The bottom end of the curved arm shall slip onto the top of the lighting column and shall be fixed by
means of bolts to prevent rotational movement. The top end of the curved arm shall finish with a spigot of
outside diameter of dimension to suit the specified lantern.
The fixing angle of the lantern fixing axis, from the horizontal shall be within 2 degrees of the angle
specified. The lantern fixing angle shall be 5 or 15 degrees as indicated in the Drawings.

60.2.3

Post Top Columns

For post top columns, the tolerance on the total length of the columns with planted sections shall be the
greater value of 0.5% or 50mm.
The top end of the column shall finish with a spigot of outside diameter to suit the specified lantern or
mounting bracket for the lantern.

60.3

TAPERED OCTAGONAL COLUMNS

The Contractor shall be required to supply tapered octagonal hot-dip galvanised lighting column as shown.
The mounting height and all other requirements shall be similar to those earlier prescribed.
In addition, each column section shall be machine-formed and longitudinally welded by continuous
automatic gas shielded electric arc process.
The bracket arm shall be octagonal in shape and finish with round pipe at the smaller end. The bottom
end of the curved arm shall slip into the top section of the main column. The smaller end of the curved
arm shall finish with a spigot for the safe mounting of the required lantern.
The Contractor shall submit the column and arm design including the design calculations (if necessary),
test reports, certificates and furnish a test certificate from the manufacturer to show all base metal, zinc
coating weight or other test conform to the Specification requirements. Columns which fail to comply with
the Specifications shall be rejected and replaced by the Contractor.

BLDG04/S60.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 60-3
60.4

CORROSION PROTECTION FOR STEEL COLUMNS

60.4.1

Hot Dip Galvanizing

All steel columns and brackets shall be protected against corrosion by hot dip galvanizing internally and
externally in accordance with BS 729. Unless otherwise indicated, all welding work for columns and
brackets shall be done before galvanising.
The treatments prior to galvanizing shall include degreasing, rinsing, pickling, then rising and fluxing.
The minimum average zinc coating weight shall be 450 g per m2 and the minimum thickness of zinc
coating shall be 65 microns. The coating shall be adherent, smooth, continuous and free from flux stains.
All bolts shall be galvanized after screwcutting.
The Contractor shall furnish a test certificate from the galvanizer, ensuring that all base metal, zinc coating
weight or other tests conform to the specification requirements of BS 729. If the lighting column is not in
conformity with the specified requirements, the columns shall be rejected and be replaced by the
Contractor.
Where the length of the column exceeds 10m and the length of the galvanizing bath, the column shall be
galvanized in two sections. The joining of the two sections by welding after galvanizing will only be
permitted with the approval of the SO Rep.
The welded metal and adjacent damaged areas of the zinc coating shall be applied with zinc rich paints
conforming to BS 4652. The surface shall be prepared by removing any welding slag with a chipping
hammer followed by vigorous wire brushing. The paint is applied by brush in two coats to give a total paint
film thickness of about 100 microns.
Any damage to the coating of the galvanised columns and brackets during transportation and erection
shall be made good by applying two coats of zinc rich paint.

60.4.2

Bitumen Coating
Two coats of bitumen paint shall be applied internally and externally to the planted section on top of the
galvanised coating/epoxy powder coating/synthetic enamel paint. It shall be applied over the length of the
buried ground section and for a distance of 200mm above the ground level. For lighting columns not
exceeding 4m heights where the aesthetic appearance is of concern, then, the latter distance above the
ground level can be reduced to about 100mm.
The Contractor shall refer to the Standard Drawings for the various lengths of the planted sections
corresponding to the lighting column's heights so as to determine the level of the bitumen coatings.
The surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all contaminations before application of bitumen coatings.
The bitumen painting shall comply with BS 3416:1975 or approved equivalent. The first coat shall be dried
before applying the second coat, which shall be applied at right angle to the first. The application for the
two coats shall be at the rate of approximately 6 square metres per litre. The overall dry film thickness of
the bitumen coats shall be at least 300 microns.
The sections of the lighting columns with bitumen shall be wrapped with durable plastic covering so as to
prevent the bitumen from smudging the clean sections of other columns during transportation and storage.
The plastic coverings need not be removed during the installation of the columns.

BLDG04/S60.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 60-4
60.4.3

Glass Fibre/Reinforced Polyester Lighting Column

Glass fibre/reinforced polyester column shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 5469 and shall
include the following features :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

High mechanical strength and high impact strength.

Corrosion resistance, impervious to ground decay and insect attack etc.
Uniformity in colour.
Maintenance free.

The Contractor shall provide complete details of the proposed column, base plate assembly and details of
assembly procedure etc including all dimensional and weight measurements of the column. The expected
life span of the column shall also be included in the particulars.
The expected life span of the column shall also be included in the particulars.
The Contractor shall also submit a test certificate from the manufacturer to prove conformity to the
Specifications.
60.5

POSITION OF LIGHTING COLUMNS

Before erection, the Contractor shall peg up the positions of the lighting columns as indicated in the
Drawings.
The Contractor shall then confirm with the SO Rep that the positions of the lighting columns are well clear
from the way of tree, pavements, walkways, roads, etc, failing which any necessary repositioning of the
columns shall be carried out at the cost and expense of the Contractor.

60.6

ERECTION
The columns shall be planted in the ground to the specified depth as shown in the Drawings.
Excavation of trial holes to locate the buried UPVC pipes of the road crossing, cable entries to the switch
rooms including backfilling and making good shall be carried out by the Contractor.
Erection of the columns shall include excavation of pit to the required depth, concrete footing, backfilling,
concrete skirting around the base of the columns where required, reinstatement of ground surfaces, the
transportation and disposal of surplus earth from the site and the painting of identification numbers on the
external surface of the column.
For the erection of columns or laying of underground cables which affect the building apron, the
Contractor shall ensure that provisions are made before the apron is concreted. For existing apron and
other concrete surfaces, the Contractor shall include the cost and expense of reinstatement of these
surfaces in the Contract Sum. Any hacking and reinstatement shall be carried out in neat, rectangular
panels to minimise the mismatch of surface texture.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that due care is taken when excavating in the vicinity of
existing buried services, and shall bear all the cost and expense arising thereof.
The door opening of the column shall be positioned parallel to the bracket arm on the side away from the
direction of traffic.

60.7

POWDER COATING AND PAINTING

Before the galvanised lighting column is delivered to the Site, the Contractor shall confirm with the SO
Rep regarding the colour of the column, if not already specified.
All columns of 6m and below shall be powder coated. Polyester powder coating suitable for outdoor
application, with resistance to atmospheric ageing and ultra-violet light, shall be used. The thickness of the
polyester powder coating shall be between 50 to 80 microns. The mentioned work shall be done off- site in
a factory with the appropriate facilities. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the
finishing during transportation, installation and before handing over to the Employer. No painting shall be
allowed on the Site, with the exception of painting of the identification number.

BLDG04/S60.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 60-5
60.7

POWDER COATING AND PAINTING (CONT'D)

For column of length above 6m, only approved lead and chromate free primer conforming to SS 494:
2001and synthetic enamel paint shall be used. Before painting, the surfaces shall be thoroughly clean, dry
and free from grease and oil.
Non-oily soils and dirt shall be removed by brushing or scrubbing followed by thorough rinsing by clean
water. Grease and oil shall be removed by swabbing generously with a suitable hydrocarbon solvent such
as white spirit or mineral turpentine, using several clear swabs on each area.
The Contractor shall then apply one coat of lead and chromate free primer, one synthetic enamel
undercoat and one synthetic finishing coat to the galvanised steel surfaces.
The Contractor shall ensure that the correct types of finishing or paint work are provided and the
preparation of galvanised steel surfaces for painting is properly carried out, failing which the column shall
be rejected and the Contractor shall make good the Defect.
Identification number shall be painted on all lighting columns.

60.8

WIRING AND ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

All lighting columns shall be provided with the following wiring and electrical accessories :

60.9

(a)

a 25 Amp 440V cut-out with provision for looping in of two numbers of phase, neutral and earth
conductors and looping out of one number of phase, neutral and earth conductors of up to 25 mm2
and a 5 Amp 'HRC' fuse as shown in the Drawings.

(b)

internal wiring of minimum size of 2 x 1.5 mm2 PVC/PVC complete with 1.5 mm2 PVC (green) earth
connecting the cut-out to the luminaires.

(c)

brass compression glands for armoured PVC insulated cables, complete with brass locknuts and
earth tags and support bracket as shown in the Drawings.

CONCRETE FOOTING
Concrete footing shall follow the dimensions as indicated in the Drawings for lighting column. All mass
concrete used shall compose of cement, fine aggregate and coarse aggregate in the ratio of 1:3:6.
The cement shall be ordinary Portland Cement of an approved brand and manufacture and shall comply in
every respect with SS 26.
Fine aggregates shall be well washed by fresh water or pit sand, free from clay, organic matters and other
impurities. It shall comply with SS 31.
Coarse aggregate shall be crushed granite, angular in shape, free from quarry refuse and other impurities
and comply with SS 31. It shall not exceed 40mm in size.
The ratio of water to cement in all mixes shall not exceed a maximum value of 0.6.
Concrete shall be mixed in batch-type mixers until the concrete is uniform in colour. The mixing time shall
not be less than that specified by the manufacturer. When ready mixed concrete is used, it shall conform
to SS 119 and approval shall be sought from the SO Rep.

60.10

BONDING OF LIGHTING COLUMNS

All lighting columns inside the concrete surfaces of the playground and hardcourt shall be electrically
bonded to its weldmesh. The Contractor shall ensure proper bonding is done.

60.11

REMOVAL OF LIGHTING COLUMNS

Removal of lighting columns shall include excavation, uprooting the columns, baseplates and concrete
footings, backfilling, reinstatement of ground surfaces, and the transportation and disposal of surplus earth
and columns from the Site.

BLDG04/S60.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 60-6
60.11

REMOVAL OF LIGHTING COLUMNS (CONT'D)

Electricity supplies shall be cut-off and the cables made dead, isolated or abandoned before work
commences.
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain such traffic signs, lamps, barriers, flashing lights, guards
etc and other measures as may be necessary in the removal work, for the safety and convenience of the
public and others.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that due care is taken when excavating in the vicinity of
existing buried services, and all cost and expense arising thereof shall be borne by the Contractor.
The columns shall be lifted and removed using suitable mechanical handling Construction Equipment or
cranes.
After the columns have been removed, the holes in the ground shall be filled in with suitable earth and
compacted with mechanical rammers and the ground surfaces shall be reinstated to match existing
adjacent surface finishes.

60.12

LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

Lighting distribution boards shall be of the 400/230V type, and of adequate size to house the number of
HRC fuses, miniature circuit breakers, contactors, time switch, isolator, by-pass switch, and associated
Plant and equipment, as indicated in the Drawings.
The miniature circuit breakers shall be rated for 240V, 50HZ operation and shall have an interrupting
capacity of at least 6kA (M6).
The distribution board shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet steel of thickness not less than
1.6mm. It shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint and oven dried to finish with a paint thickness of
not less than 45 microns.
The distribution board shall have a hinged front access door with suitable dustproof seals and facilities for
locking. Insulated protective shields shall be provided to prevent accidental contact with live parts when
the door is in the open position.
Neutral and earth busbars and connecting blocks shall have an outgoing terminal for each neutral or earth
conductor.
A removable copper plate of thickness not less than 1.6mm shall be provided at the base of the
distribution board. Suitable sized holes shall be punched for the termination of armoured PVC insulated
cables, where necessary.
The Contractor shall submit layout drawings in three elevations, circuit diagrams and wiring diagrams to
the SO Rep for approval prior to the fabrication of the lighting distribution boards.
The distribution board shall have an approved circuit diagram fixed on the inside of the door. Formica
engraving laminated labels shall also be supplied and screwed to the front of the distribution board to
provide board references.
For outdoor lighting distribution control board, the board shall be weatherproof and mounted on concrete
pedestal. Suitable cable box terminations shall be arranged to receive the incoming underground cables.
A separate earth system shall be provided for each outdoor distribution control board. Identification
number shall be printed on the outdoor distribution board.
The Contractor shall carry out all wiring and connections between the lighting distribution board and the
main switch board. All wiring shall be protected throughout their lengths by a continuous enclosure of
metal conduit or metal trunking except where the cables are installed within the enclosure of electrical
Plant and equipment.

BLDG04/S60.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 60-7
60.13

TURFING
The Contractor shall reinstate the turfing affected by the excavation to match existing adjacent turfing
when directed by SO Rep.
All topsoil shall be of good quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps, or other extraneous matter, be friable
and porous in texture.
The clay content of the approved sub-soil which is the soil strata found just below the top soil, shall not be
greater than 45%.
The unwashed sand to be used shall be free from any debris, stones or other foreign materials.
Soil mixture shall be three parts of topsoil with one part of soil conditioner and 1 kg per m of granular
fertilizer NPK (15:15:6.4) or 4:2:1 subsoil, unwashed sand and soil conditioner with 1 kg per m of granular
fertilizer NPK (15:15:6.4).
The minimum thickness of soil mixture shall be 150mm (including 25mm of original soil attached to the
turf) at the time of construction. A 125mm layer of soil mixture shall be spread over the prepared surface,
followed by the planting of fresh turf.
Provide turfing materials of size 300mm x 300mm and with about 25mm of original soil adhering to the
roots, be of good quality, free from pests or diseases and of vigorous growth. The type of turf shall be
Cow Grass (Axonopus Compressus).
The turf shall be planted promptly to avoid desiccation.
Close turfing shall apply to all of the turfing area to be reinstated. Turfs shall be firmly sunk into the
ground attached together without any gaps. Water turf immediately after planting until the turf is thriving.
When the level of the completed turfing work is undulating or uneven, the turfed areas except those on
steep slopes shall be properly rolled out with garden roller or other approved means. The turfing shall
give a uniform even surface on completion. Rolling shall be carried out when the turf is established after
the second grass cutting.
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for maintaining all reinstated
turfing Works as specified hereunder, provided under the Contract. All reinstated turfing Works shall be
maintained during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed
under the Contract and shall be maintained for a further period of six months commencing from the Date
of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the
Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this
clause). The maintenance service provided by the Contractor shall be the watering, weeding and mowing
whenever required. The Contractor shall replace dying, old or missing turves from the original source
during the Maintenance Period.

60.14

MAKING GOOD
The Contractor shall make good, patch up and paint all building damages and any openings or recess in
the building walls and other part of the structures affected by the Works to the complete satisfaction of the
SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 61/.....

BLDG04/S60.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-1
SECTION 61
CENTRAL ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEM INSTALLATION

61.1

GENERAL
The Section covers the whole installation and maintenance of the Central TV Antenna System (hereinafter
referred to as "CATV" for the purposes of this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it).
The CATV installation shall comply with all statutory rules and regulations of the Info-communications
Development Authority of Singapore (IDA), Singapore Broadcasting Authority (SBA), PSB Corporation
(PSB), Government Authorities, Statutory Authorities, current at the date of submission of the Tender and
to the complete satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The SO Rep reserves the right to amend any clauses and subclauses under this Section, due to the
advancement of technology.

61.2

THE SYSTEM
(a)

The System shall provide television reception on Band I, III, IV and Band V, as well as Frequency
Modulated Sound on Band II.

(b)

The System shall be rated for continuous operation and levels maintained so that the short term
stability is within 0.5 dB and the long term gain stability is with 1.5 dB.
Note :
The signal level of 1 FV shall be the reference 0 dBFV and all other levels shall be related to this
reference.

(c)

All components used in the CATV System shall be suitably matched electrically and mechanically
into the distribution system to avoid discontinuities in the transmission. Unless otherwise stated, all
the components of the System shall have a voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) of 1.5 to 1 or
better over the specified frequency range.

(d)

The minimum output at each subscriber's outlet with all outlets operating shall be 63 dBFV (mean
vision carrier level) on all TV channels in Bands I, III, IV and V and 54 dBFV (at 92.4 MHz) in
Band II. In locations such as Jurong, Clementi, Bukit Batok, etc, where the ambient signal is
strong, the output shall be increased to more than 78 dB unless approved by the SO Rep.
Frequency conversion shall only be used as the last resort. The Contractor shall make allowances
for such situations.

(e)

Under normal circumstances, the maximum output for each subscriber's outlet with all outlets
operating shall be 80 dBFV.

(f)

In addition, the minimum, maximum output and minimum C/N at the subscriber's outlet with all
outlets operating for digital TV signal shall be 45 dBFV, 65 dBFV and 20 dB respectively.

(g)

The maximum signal level on any transmission line shall not exceed 120 dBFV or 1 V (mean vision
carrier level).

(h)

For any subscriber's outlet, the maximum difference in the signal levels of the wanted vision
carriers shall not exceed 6 dB between any 2 non-adjacent channels within the VHF Band and
within the UHF bands. It shall also be less than 3 dB between adjacent channels. The maximum
difference in the signal levels between any channel in the VHF band and that in Band IV shall not
exceed 10 dB.

(i)

Within the same building block, for any 2 subscriber outlets, the maximum difference in signal
levels between any two channels in VHF Bands shall not exceed 10 dB and the difference in the
UHF signals for the same or different channels shall not exceed 15 dB.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-2
61.2

61.3

THE SYSTEM (CONT'D)

(j)

For FM signals, the maximum difference in signal levels between any two outlets within the
building block shall not exceed 8 dB (for the same station).

(k)

The video and the audio receptions at any outlet of the system shall not be significantly degraded
with respect to the results which could be obtained directly from the antenna. In the case of the
video component, the impairment shall be limited so as not to be visible at a distance of 2 m away
from the television with a screen of 360mm.

(l)

The signal-to-noise ratio of the system shall be equal to or better than 45 dB.

(m)

The intermodulation products at the outputs of the single channel amplifiers shall be less than 54 dB for video signals and less than -50 dB for audio signals.

(n)

The ghost and echo effect due to transmission discontinuities shall be less than -36 dB below the
picture carrier level.

(o)

The radiation from the system shall not exceed 1 X 10-10W (-70 dBmW) within the operating
frequency range of that system, when measured in accordance with pr EN 50083-2:1992 or other
standards specified by the SO Rep.

(p)

All components installed shall be adequately protected from theft. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the safety of the equipment before the installation is officially taken over by the
Branch Office.

(q)

A TV monitoring point shall be provided at the head-end equipment box.

(r)

Signal isolation (mutual attenuation) between any two TV ports within the CATV system shall be
equal to or better than 33 dB.

(s)

Signal isolation (mutual attenuation) between any TV and FM ports on different isolator within the
CATV system shall be equal to or better than 46 dB.

THE ANTENNAE AND ANTENNA MOUNTING BRACKET

(a)

The Contractor shall provide three (3) sets of RC plinths at the main roof level. The Contractor
shall submit the location of the RC plinths to the SO Rep before casting at the main roof.

(b)

The Contractor shall study the location carefully and select a suitable antenna site. The antenna
mounting position shall be located as soon as the water tank room or the main building structure is
completed, even though the electricity supply may not be available.

(c)

Portable TV sets shall be used for positioning the antenna at a position where the signal strength is
substantially strong and steady with no observable ghosting, and where the local interference is
minimal. The search by the Contractor for the best antenna mounting position shall be done early.
No extension of Time for Completion shall be granted for such delays.

(d)

For pitch roof building, if the antennae cannot be mounted in the usual manner or if they are
required to be mounted through the metal roof or at the edge of the building, the Contractor shall
consult the SO Rep to determine the best location to mount the antenna and the anchoring points
for the approved number of guy wires.

(e)

Where there is height restriction, antenna installation shall be carefully planned and carried out at
the appropriate time and special anchoring brackets (hot-dip galvanised) shall be mounted on the
reinforced concrete plinths constructed on the main roof slab or elsewhere before the roofing work
commences. The Contractor shall be liable for all additional costs and expenses arising from his
failure to properly plan and carry out the Works specified herein.

(f)

Where no suitable site can be found because of `shadowing' by other taller buildings, an aerial
tower may be erected to 'see' the transmitting station. No linking by overhead cable from another
block shall be allowed; underground linking to another block with better TV reception is allowed.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-3
61.3

THE ANTENNAE AND ANTENNA MOUNTING BRACKET (CONT'D)

(g)

Single Channel or 2-channels Antennae shall be required for the TV channels 3,5,7,8,10 and 12.
Two separate UHF antennae shall be provided for the reception of channels 24, 28, 29, 30 and
channels 32, 34, 36, 37, 38 respectively. If the reception of any channel is unsatisfactory, a
separate Band IV and Band V antenna shall be used. In addition, an FM antenna is required for
the FM radio reception. The SO Rep may request for a filter to be installed for each antenna, if the
pick-up signals from other channels are strong, all at the Contractors cost and expense. VHF
wide-band or broadband antennae, subject to the approval of the SO Rep may be used, if less
ghosting can be achieved or when there is lack of mounting space.

(h)

The characteristics of the antennae shall at least meet the following requirements :

Channel

3
5
7
8
10
12
FM
21 to 69

Type

Single/2-channel(s)
Single/2-channel(s)
Single/2-channel(s)
Single/2-channel(s)
Single/2-channel(s)
Single/2-channel(s)
Band II
Band IV/V

Maximum
Forward
Gain

6.0 dB
9.5 dB
9.5 dB
9.5 dB
10.0 dB
9.5 dB
4.5 dB
15.0 dB

Front-to-Back
Ratio
(Average)

15 dB
20 dB
20 dB
20 dB
20 dB
20 dB
10 dB
25 dB

Half Power
Angle
Horizontal
Plane
(degrees)
< 68
< 46
< 46
< 46
< 46
< 46
< 76
< 45

Maximum Wind
Loading
(Horizontal)
Wind Speed
125 km/hr
160N
140N
140N
140N
140N
140N
110N
180N

(i)

Antennae shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminium or other anodised metals which are rust
resistant. Household types of antenna are not acceptable.

(j)

Where possible, the coaxial cable terminations at the dipoles shall also be sealed or sprayed with
plastic/silicon sealant or other approved moisture repellant compound.

(k)

All the antennae including the FM antenna shall have a 75 output impedance. The 300/75
matching transformer/device shall be built-in at the dipole terminal box. Matching transformers
made of very fine wires (less than 0.5mm diameter) shall not be used unless approved by the SO
Rep.

(l)

The dipole terminal box shall be made of high quality plastic or other material that can withstand
exposure to the sun without cracking ie. shall be ultra violet stabilised.

(m)

All the antennae shall preferably come with dipole which are directly and electrically connected to
the antenna booms.

(n)

The antennae shall be mounted at an approximate spacing of 0.8m between one another.

(o)

The antenna mounting bracket shall be hot-dip galvanised, painted with 1 coat of paint after the
bracket has been mounted and the interior of the mast holder be painted with approved zinc
enriched paint or other equivalent. Care shall be taken not to block the drainage hole at the base
of the bracket. The Contractor shall arrange with SO Rep to inspect the completed bracket for
random checking at the sole discretion of the SO Rep.

(p)

The antenna bracket shall be secured to the roof by the expansion type masonry anchors such as
Rawbolts or Dynabolts or other approved that are rust-resistant. The mounting bolts shall also be
sealed with silicon compound or grease. The dynabolts shall be zinc plated and passivated with
gold chromate finish or of equivalent finish to withstand 72 hours of neutral salt spray in
accordance with AS1791.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-4
61.3

61.4

61.5

THE ANTENNAE AND ANTENNA MOUNTING BRACKET (CONT'D)

(q)

The gap between the antenna mast and the mast holder shall be sealed with silicon rubber or
other approved waterproofing compound.

(r)

The U-bolts and turnbuckles for securing the guy wires shall be the hot-dip galvanised type and
they shall be also treated with waterproofing compound or grease.

(s)

Only approved guy wires shall be used to support the antenna mast. They shall be spaced at
equal angles. Approved L-brackets shall be provided for anchoring the guy wires especially at
places where anchoring is a problem. The brackets shall be hot-dip galvanised.

(t)

One spare lead cable (coaxial cable) runs from the antenna mast to the amplifier box shall be
provided for reception of future UHF transmission. The end of the cable shall be sealed with
silicon rubber.

(u)

Hot-dip galvanised steel pipe or water pipe with a minimum wall thickness of 2mm and a minimum
internal diameter of 32mm/25mm shall be used for the base and top sections of the antenna mast.
Sample shall be approved by the SO Rep before the installation. The antenna mast shall be
approximately 5.5m high and shall consist of 2 sections ie. telescopic. Two sets of guy wires shall
be used. Antenna mast that are mounted through the metal roofs shall be provided with a longer
and thicker wall. Where there is height constraint, the height of the mast is allowed to be
shortened, without any cost adjustment.

(v)

The lightning conductor (tape) shall be connected to the main lightning protective system of the
building by means of approved type of connectors or tape clamps. The tape mounting bracket at
the mast shall also be hot-dip galvanised. Stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers shall be used for
securing the tape and bracket contacts at the antenna mast. They shall be sprayed with anti-rust
or anti-corrosive chemicals.

FILTERS
(a)

The Contractor shall provide an external filter at the input of the channel processor if the wanted
signal is lower than the unwanted signal of the adjacent or alternate adjacent channel or when
interference exists.

(b)

The return loss of the filter(s) shall be equal or better than 18 dB.

(c)

The "BBC" filter shall attenuate frequencies from 91 MHz to 108 MHz by 15 to 20 dB.

THE AMPLIFIERS
(a)

The input and output nominal impedance of all the amplifiers shall be 75 .

(b)

All unused input and output terminals of the amplifiers shall be terminated with 75 terminators.

(c)

Amplifiers shall have proper labelling and shall be of good quality. Poorly labelled amplifiers will
not be accepted even if the performance is satisfactory.

(d)

The respective contract no., block no., and the "HDB" marking shall be clearly and permanently
engraved on all the amplifiers. The amplifiers shall also be sprayed with an approved paint so as
to deter theft.

(e)

The Contractor shall check and align the channel processor, FM amplifier and broadband
amplifiers in his workshop before installation and testing.

(f)

Channel processors and FM amplifier shall be installed at the headends. The channel processors
shall be used for channels 3, 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 24, 28, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 37, 38 and 2 spares.
Channel processors of unused channels shall be submitted to Employers CATV laboratory for
storage.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-5
61.5

THE AMPLIFIERS (CONT'D)

61.5.1

Channel Processor
(a)

The channel processor shall preferably be able to program with buttons at the front panel of each
module with the programming steps indicated on the display. For channel processor with portable
programming unit, the Contractor shall submit one programming unit per building tender to the SO
Rep.

(b)

The channel processor shall be freely programmable at the input from 47 MHz to 862 MHz (in
steps of 0.25 MHz) as well as the output shall also be freely programmable within the frequency
range 47 MHz to 862 MHz (in steps of 0.25 MHz).

(c)

The channel processor shall also act as a single channel amplifier or channel converter; the
Automatic Gain Control (herein referred to as "AGC" for the purposes of this Section including all
clauses and sub-clauses under it) shall cover input level, fading from 50 dBV up to 90 dBV
(output tolerance to be 0.5dB), and suitable for reception of NICAM 728 transmission stereo.

(d)

The noise figure shall be less than or equal to 9 dB with AGC.

(e)

The adjacent channel suppression shall be greater than or equal to 40 dB.

(f)

The return loss shall be greater than or equal to 14 dB (output stage).

(g)

The channel processor shall be able to receive DVB-T signal.

(h)

The performance characteristic of the broadband amplifier of the channel processor shall be as
follows :
- Noise Figure : 10 dB
- Flatness
: 1 dB
- Gain
: > 25 dB

(i)

Only one brand of channel processor shall be used for each head end system. Mixing of different
brands with each system may be allowed only in very exceptional cases as approved by the SO
Rep.

(j)

Trunk Distribution Amplifier

(i)

The amplifier shall have a built-in return module, operating in the frequency range from 5 MHz
to 42 MHz and minimum 18dB reverse gain.

(ii)

The amplifier designs shall be based on parallel hybrid device (PHD) integrated circuits. The
amplifier designs shall be based on hybrid, power doubling integrated circuits. Each hybrid
shall be capable of independent output level operation.

(iii) The distribution amplifiers that are to be cascaded shall be operated with moderated trunk
output levels in order to reduce the effects of accumulated distortions.
(iv) The amplifier shall be capable of having one trunk output and two bridger outputs - user
configurable to four outputs). The operating level of the bridger outputs shall be 50 dBmV at
824 MHz and 39 dBmV at 54 MHz. The trunk output shall be 42 dBmV at 824 MHz and 31
dBmV at 54 MHz.
(v)

Carrier-to-composite triple beat at operating output levels of 50 dBmV and 39-dBmV output at
824 MHz and 54 MHz respectively, 60 channels loading, shall be greater than 62 dB.

(vi) The carrier-to-composite (second order) at operating output levels of 50 dBmV and 39 dBmV
at 824 MHz and 54 MHz respectively, 60 channels loading, shall be greater than 60 dB.
(vii) The minimum performance characteristics of the high gain amplifier shall be as follows:
Noise figure with equaliser; less or equal to 10 dB
Flatness in unity gain configuration: 1dB
Forward bandwidth (downstream): 54 824 MHz

BLDG04/S61.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-6
61.5.1

Channel Processor (Cont'd)

(j)

Trunk Distribution Amplifier (Cont'd)

(viii) Amplifiers housings shall be equipped with suitable means to prevent RF ingress and egress.
When the cover is secured fastening, the housing shall have RF shielding effectiveness in
excess of 80 dB when measured using Dipole Antennae procedure, or in excess of 70 dB
when measured using the Absorbing Clamp Method. The housing shall be of watertight
construction, sealed with moisture blocking gaskets.
(ix) Amplifiers shall provide for the use of appropriate equalisers (input and/or interstage) and
shall contain diplex filters providing sufficient isolation to avoid interaction between forward
and reverse transmission.
(x)

(k)

Where remote cable powering is required, the amplifier shall be able to carry up to 95 Vac and
a maximum continuous current passing of 12Aac per port.

Bridgier Distribution Amplifier

(i)

The amplifier shall have a built-in return module, operating in the frequency range from 5 MHz
to 42 MHz and minimum 18dB reverse gain.

(ii)

The amplifier designs shall be based on parallel hybrid device (PHD) integrated circuits. The
amplifier designs shall be based on hybrid, power doubling integrated circuits. Each hybrid
shall be capable of independent output level operation.

(iii) The amplifier shall be capable of having two bridger outputs - user configurable to four
outputs). The operating level of the bridger outputs shall be 50 dBmV at 824 MHz and
39 dBmV at 54 MHz.
(iv) Carrier-to-composite triple beat at operating output levels of 50 dBmV and 39-dBmV output at
824 MHz and 54 MHz respectively, 60 channels loading, shall be greater than 62 dB.
(v)

The carrier-to-composite (second order) at operating output levels of 50 dBmV and 39 dBmV
at 824 MHz and 54 MHz respectively, 60 channels loading, shall be greater than 60 dB.

(vi) The minimum performance characteristics of the high gain amplifier shall be as follows:
Noise figure with equaliser; less or equal to 10 dB
Flatness in unity gain configuration: 1dB
Forward bandwidth (downstream): 54 824 MHz
(vii) Amplifiers housings shall be equipped with suitable means to prevent RF ingress and egress.
When the cover is secured fastening, the housing shall have RF shielding effectiveness in
excess of 80 dB when measured using Dipole Antennae procedure, or in excess of 70 dB
when measured using the Absorbing Clamp Method. The housing shall be of watertight
construction, sealed with moisture blocking gaskets.
(viii) Amplifiers shall provide for the use of appropriate equalisers (input and/or interstage) and
shall contain diplex filters providing sufficient isolation to avoid interaction between forward
and reverse transmission.
(ix) Where remote cable powering is required, the amplifier shall be able to carry up to 95 Vac and
a maximum continuous current passing of 12Aac per port.
61.6

POWER PACK UNIT

(a)

The units shall supply an electronically stabilised output voltage to the amplifiers. The stabilisation
shall be less than 5% and the efficiency shall be 87% or better.

(b)

Under normal circumstances, the built-in protective circuit against over-voltage, over-current,
overload and short-circuit shall be able to offer protection to the rest of the circuit for at least
48 hours without damaging the components. The supply to the output may be cut off when there is
a fault. Manual resetting is permitted but automatic resetting is preferred.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-7
61.6

61.7

POWER PACK UNIT (CONT'D)

(c)

All power supply units shall be of high quality not only in the output capability but also in the circuit
design, printed board layout, components used and the construction of the chassis. The SO Rep
may request for power supply units made by other manufacturers if he is not satisfied with the
design, layout, finish or performance of the unit offered by the Contractor all at the Contractor's
cost and expense.

(d)

No separate power supply is required for FM amplifier unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep.

SPLITTERS & TEE UNITS

(a)

Markings shall be clearly and indelibly marked with :

- Manufacturer's name, trade mark, or identification;
- Manufacturer's model or type reference.

(b)

The input and output nominal impedance of the splitter and tee units shall be 75 .

(c)

The frequency response of all passive devices, including taps, splitters, directional couplers and
power inserters shall be minimally (5 to 860) MHz.

(d)

All the splitters, directional couplers, power inserters and multi-tap combinations shall provide the
minimum requirements as specified hereunder :
5-10

11-20

21-400

401-500

501-600

601-860

Isolation (dB)*

Frequency (MHz)

18

23

23

23

20

19

Return Loss (dB)+

14

14

14

14

14

14

* Isolation between any two output ports.

+ Return loss at any port with all unused ports properly terminated.

61.8

(e)

All the splitters, directional couplers, power inserters and multi-tap combinations shall have a
minimum of 80 dB of shielding (screening) effectiveness in order to minimise signal leakage
(egress) from the installation.

(f)

The taps shall be of the transformer or directional type.

(g)

Where remote cable powering is required, the outdoor types of taps, splitters, directional couplers
and power inserters shall be able to carry up to 60 Vac and a current capacity of 12A.

(h)

Splitters, Tees, Directional Couplers and Power Inserters shall be proof against humid conditions,
ie. relative humidity between 91% to 95%, with the temperature of the air at 40C 2C, which may
occur in normal applications. Under such conditions, the splitters, taps, directional couplers and
power inserters shall show no damage.

(i)

All taps shall be outdoor type with the following features :

(a) 1 GHZ bandwidth with low loss characteristics.
(b) Glass epoxy printed circuit board.
(c) Faceplates interchangeable with 600 MHz passives.
(d) Power routing path printed on pc board .
(e) 5/8 x long entry ports.
(f) 360 aluminum alloy housing with two polyurethane coatings.

THE CABLES
(a)

Coaxial cable for service drops shall pass Type and Batch Tests. Type test reports issued by the
following third party certified laboratories are acceptable:
(i)
(iii)
(iii)
(iv)

BLDG04/S61.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

PSB and their Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) partners;

Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS accreditation;
Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS-MRA (Mutual Recognition Agreement) partners
accreditation
Laboratories participating in IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme

Bldg Spec
Page 61-8
61.8

61.8.1

THE CABLES (CONT'D)

(b)

Approval of the cables shall also depends on the availability of suitable cable connectors.

(c)

All cables shall be clearly and indelibly marked with :

- Manufacturer's name, trade mark, or identification;
- Manufacturer's model or type reference.

Main Coaxial Cable

(a)

The main distribution cables used for the system shall comply with the following requirements :
Construction
Dielectric
Nominal impedance
Nominal attenuation
Structural Return Loss
Screening factor
Nominal Velocity of Propagation

61.8.2

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Coaxial Type
Micro-cellular Foam Polyethylene
75 2 (5-824 MHz)
Less than 9.5dB/100m (5-824 MHz)
At least 20dB (5-824 MHz)
At least 80dB
At least 87%

(b)

The centre conductor of the cable shall copper clad aluminium with a nominal diameter of 2.26mm
for horizontal main cable and 3.15mm for vertical main cable or other approved by the SO Rep.

(c)

The outer conductor shall be solid, aluminium sheath, either seamless or with continuously RF
welded seam with a nominal thickness of 0.64mm for horizontal main cable and 0.343mm for
vertical main cable or other approved by the SO Rep.

(d)

Cables with semi-air spaced dielectric may be considered if the SO Rep considers them to be
suitable.

(e)

The characteristics of the cable shall be non-deteriorating during its normal life span, that is, it shall
be ageing resistant. The PVC material used for the outer sheath (Jacket) shall be anti-migrating.

(f)

The nominal diameter over the jacket of the main vertical distribution cable shall be at least
15.49mm (eg. 540 cable)

Distribution Cable (RG-11 Cable)

(a)

The service drop cables used for the system shall comply with the following requirements :
Construction
Dielectric
Nominal impedance
Nominal attenuation
Structural Return Loss
Screening factor
Nominal Velocity of Propagation

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Coaxial Type
Gas expanded Foam Polyethylene
75 2 (5-824 MHz)
< 14 dB/100m (5-824 MHz)
At least 20dB (5-824 MHz)
At least 80dB
At least 82%

(b)

The centre conductor shall be copper-clad steel or equivalent.

(c)

The outer conductor (shield) shall comprise of polypropylene laminated tape, with overlap, bonded
to dielectric, and an outer shield comprising bare braid wire with at least 60% coverage.

(d)

The characteristics of the cable shall be non-deteriorating during its normal life span, that is, it shall
be ageing resistant. The PVC material used for the outer sheath (Jacket) shall be anti-migrating.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-9
61.8.3

Coaxial Cable For Service Drops (RG-6 Cable)

(a)

The service drop cables used for the system shall comply with the following requirements :
Construction
Dielectric
Nominal impedance
Nominal attenuation
Structural Return Loss
Screening factor
Nominal Velocity of Propagation

61.8.4

61.8.5

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Coaxial Type
Gas expanded Foam Polyethylene
75 5 (5-824 MHz)
Less than 20 dB/100m (5-824 MHz)
At least 20dB (5-824 MHz)
At least 80dB
At least 82%

(b)

The centre conductor shall be copper-clad steel or equivalent.

(c)

The outer conductor (shield) shall comprise at least an inner shield of polypropylene laminated
tape, with overlap, bonded to dielectric, and an outer shield comprising of a layer of braid wire of
90% coverage.

(d)

The characteristics of the cable shall be non-deteriorating during its normal life span, that is, it shall
be ageing resistant. The PVC material used for the outer sheath (Jacket) shall be anti-migrating
and the shrinkage shall be less than 9.5mm after tested for jacket longitudinal shrinkage.

(e)

The dielectric strength between the conductors shall not breakdown. It shall withstand up to 1kVac
for 1 minute at 50 Hz.

(f)

Leakage current flowing through the Jacket shall be less than 10mA at 1.5kVac 50 Hz for 90
seconds.

(g)

The minimum insulation resistance shall be 1524 M-km.

(h)

The maximum height of damage shall be 244 cm when the cables are tested to vertical-tray flame
test of UL 1581. It shall bear the PSB Test Mark or other approved equivalent.

Antenna Cable
(a)

Antenna cable with a cable loss of 12 dB or less at 200 MHz and 25 dB or less at 800 MHz are
allowable.

(b)

All the lead wires (coaxial cables) from the antennae to the amplifiers shall have an outer sheath
made of black polyethylene (PE) PVC with "carbon black" compound or PVC with a corrosion
resistant barrier. The coverage by wire braid of the cable shall be more than 50%.

(c)

The screening factor of the antenna cable shall be better than 80 dB at places where the direct
pick-up signals are very strong.

Feeder Cable
The Contractor shall provide a 2.0m length of feeder RG6 cable (PSB Tested Cable), for each TV
subscriber outlet. The feeder cable shall be factory made with a coaxial plug at one end and an
F-connector at the other end.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-10
61.8.6

The Underground Cable

(i)

The underground cables used for the system shall comply with the following requirements :
Construction
Dielectric
Nominal impedance
Nominal attenuation
Structural Return Loss
Screening factor
Nominal Velocity of Propagation

61.9

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Coaxial Type
Gas Expanded Foam Polyethylene
75 2 (5-824 MHz)
Less than 9.5 dB/100m (5-824 MHz)
At least 30dB (5-824 MHz)
At least 80dB
At least 87%

(ii)

The centre conductor of the cable shall consist of a circular solid plain annealed copper wire
insulated with solid Polyethylene dielectric. The sheath shall be made of extra thick and higher
quality polyethylene or other approved material.

(iii)

The outer conductor shall be solid, aluminium sheath, either seamless or continuously RF welded
seam.

(iv)

The characteristics of the cable shall be non-deteriorating during its normal life span, that is, it shall
be ageing resistant. The PVC material used for the outer sheath (Jacket) shall be anti-migrating.

(v)

The Contractor shall produce the manufacturer's specifications to prove that the particular type of
underground cable which they are offering is suitable for underground use.

(vi)

Where direct buried or armoured cable is installed as an underground cable, it is not necessary to
run the underground cable in conduits as specified in the Specifications and/or Drawings. Under
such case, no cost adjustment shall be made to the Contract Sum.

THE SUBSCRIBER'S OUTLET (ISOLATOR/BOX)

(a)

All TV/FM isolator shall pass Type and Batch Tests. Type test reports issued by the following thirdparty certified laboratories are acceptable:
(i)
PSB and their Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) partners;
(iii)
Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS accreditation;
(iii)
Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS-MRA (Mutual Recognition Agreement) partners
accreditation
(iv)
Laboratories participating in IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme
It shall bear the PSB Test Mark or other approved equivalent.

(b)

The TV/FM front plate of the isolators shall be made of white polycarbonate, urea or other material
approved by the SO Rep and match the colour of the electrical/telecoms outlets and having the
same brand/finishes. The polycarbonate, urea or other approved material shall be UV stabilised
and shall not discolour within the Defects Liability Period even if the outlet is exposed to sunlight.

(c)

Both the isolator box and the front plate shall not emit toxic fumes or support combustion when
burnt. The flame shall extinguish as soon as the flame is withdrawn.

(d)

The printed board shall be fibreglass type. It shall be 'masked', 'tin-resisted'.

(e)

The isolator shall be clearly and indelibly marked with :

- Manufacturer's name, trade mark, or identification
- Manufacturer's model or type reference

(f)

The isolator shall be clearly and indelibly engraved on as TV and FM on the front to indicate the
television and FM radio ports. It is preferred that the markings be made below the ports.

(g)

Separate ports shall be provided for TV and FM receptions. The spacing between the ports shall
preferably be 25.4mm. The two ports are preferably to be positioned horizontally.

(h)

The isolator shall be capable of accepting coaxial cables having "F" type connector.

(i)

The isolator shall be designed to operate in both the VHF and UHF bands.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-11
61.9

THE SUBSCRIBER'S OUTLET (ISOLATOR/BOX) (CONT'D)

(j)

The isolator of both the TV and FM ports shall have 75 (nominal) impedance. It shall have a
frequency range of 5 to 860 MHz. Its electrical performance shall comply with the requirements as
stated in Table1.
Table 1
Mutual
Attenuation

Insert Loss
Type

Description
TV

Isolator

1 TV
&
1 FM
Socket

VHF < 1.5 dB

UHF < 2 dB

FM

Between TV &
FM Sockets of
Same Isolator

10 dB

> 10 dB

Return Loss
at Input &
Output

VHF 17 dB
UHF 12 dB

(k)

The electrical performance shall also comply with the requirements as stated in Table 1 above over
the temperature range of 20C to 40C.

(l)

For safety isolation, isolating transformer or blocking capacitors, shall be provided at the centre
conductor.

(m)

The isolator shall be proof against humid conditions, ie. relative humidity between 91% to 95%,
with the temperature of the air at 40C 2C, which may occur in normal applications. Under such
conditions, the isolator shall show no damage.

(n)

The insulation resistance between the isolator plate and each conductor of the socket isolator shall
be more than 5 M at 500V DC for the duration of 1 minute in accordance with SS 255:1981.

(o)

Every isolator unit shall be capable of withstanding a voltage of 2 kV of approximately sine wave
form a frequency of approximately 50 Hz applied for one minute. The cut-off current shall not be
more than 5mA.
No flashover or breakdown shall occur during the test.

61.10

(p)

The isolator shall include the required safety isolator, and shall be constructed and installed so as
to maintain shielding (screening) integrity and moisture sealing of the connector ports. The isolator
shall utilise female F type connectors for TV and FM ports. The isolators shall have a minimum of
60 dB RF shielding (screening). The shielding effectiveness test should cover the range of 55MHz,
200MHz, 400MHz, 600MHz and 750MHz, when measured in accordance with BS EN 500832:1995 Part 2 "Electromagnetic Compatibility for Equipment".

(q)

The quality and workmanship of the isolator shall be acceptable to the SO Rep.

THE INSTALLATION
(a)

The subscriber's outlet shall normally be mounted next to the 13-Amp socket outlets. The SO Rep
may request for the outlets to be installed at other locations and the Contractor shall be deemed to
have allowed in his Contract Sum for all costs arising thereof.

(b)

Subscriber's outlets shall be provided as follows, even if the details are not indicated in the
Drawings :
- one outlet at the living room and one outlet to each bedroom/study room and one outlet at the
kitchen for all residential units;
- two outlets at each eating house (where eating house is included in the Works);

BLDG04/S61.DOC(11)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-12
61.10

THE INSTALLATION (CONT'D)

(b)

Cont'd
- two outlets at each kindergarten or child care centre (where kindergarten and/or child care
centre is included in the Works);
- two outlets at each Senior Citizens' Home or Home for the Aged (where Senior Citizens' Home
and/or Home for the Aged are included in the Works);
- two outlets at each Recreation Hall (where Recreation Hall is included in the Works);
- two outlets at the Community Centre (where Community Centre is included in the Works);
- two spare outlets with metal enclosure shall be located in the service duct (one in each service
duct). A plastic holder with the CATV single-line diagram shall be provided in every CATV spare
point;
- one outlet at each household shelter;
- one outlet in each shop and Resident Committee Centre (where shop and/or Resident
Committee Centre are included in the Works);
- one outlet in each shop or restaurant in the multi-storey carpark/garage (where shop and/or
restaurant in multi-storey carpark/garage are included in the Works);
- one outlet is required to be provided for all types of commercial and industrial units.

(c)

PVC or porcelain tubes may be used for threading through walls.

(d)

The roof-top conduit pipes if any, shall be supported either by 100mm diameter PVC conduit pipe
filled with cement mixed with sand and anchored to the roof by means of a rust resistant dynabolt
with an approved anchor or with hot-dip galvanised angle brackets of approved design. The
supports shall be spaced approximately one metre apart.

(e)

No joint is allowed for coaxial cables laid underground. Under normal circumstances, joints are not
allowed for cables laid above the ground. Where joints are inevitable, the approval of the SO Rep
shall be obtained. Such joints may only be made by using the correct type of RF couplers, cable
splice or connectors and heat shrunk or cold shrunk sleeves. The RLR of the couplers or
connectors shall be better than 20 dB for both the VHF and UHF frequencies.

(f)

The positions of the outlets, distribution conduits and trunking shown on the Drawing are only
approximate. The Contractor shall provide and install these at the exact positions as determined
at the Site by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

(g)

All the lead cables (coaxial cables) from the dipoles of the antennae to the base of the antenna
masts shall be neatly strapped to the antenna booms and the masts at 300mm intervals. Only
black weather resistant type of cable ties of 7mm (minimum) in width and complete with a metal
reinforcement strip or 2.5mm2 PVC cables may be used for the strapping. Where PVC cables are
used, the antenna cable must first be taped with at least 3 layers of PVC tape. All the lead cables
from the base of the masts to the amplifier box shall be run in two 32mm diameter GS conduits.
The conduit shall be supported by hot-dip galvanised L-brackets at intervals of 1000mm. Drips
(inverted "U" bend) shall be provided at the open ends to prevent water from entering into the
conduit.

(h)

No cable shall be suspended between piles and buildings unless the SO Rep gives specific
approval.

(i)

The Contractor shall patch up holes after installing the conduits through the main roof. The
Contractor shall be held responsible for any leakage or damage to the roof. The open ends of the
conduits shall be properly sealed to prevent water from seeping in.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(12)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-13
61.10

THE INSTALLATION (CONT'D)

(j)

Hacking of holes in walls and floor slabs shall be carried out only after approval has been obtained
from the SO Rep. Care shall be taken to avoid making holes bigger than necessary. No hammer
exceeding 1.0 kg weight may be used. Drilling or coring is preferred. The hacking and patching
shall be completed before the final coating of paint is applied. The Contractor shall be held
responsible for any delay. Where required, approved type of waterproofing additives shall be
added to the cement for patching up the holes all at the Contractor's cost and expense. Extra care
shall be taken while working at prefabricated building blocks.

(k)

A 3-gang switched socket outlet shall be required in the amplifier box.

(l)

A label shall be provided for every TV subscriber outlet, strictly adhering to the format and lettering
as follows :
Cable TV Ready System
Do not alter or tamper
For assistance, please call SCV
Tel: 68732828

(m)

Metal base boxes shall be provided for CATV isolators installed in household shelters. The boxes
shall be sufficiently strong to resist mechanical damages and the service conditions specified. The
boxes shall be constructed in such a way that they cannot be readily deformed. The Contractor
shall submit samples to the SO Rep for approval :
- All sheet metal threaded to receive a screw shall have sufficient thickness to allow not less than
two full threads.
- All metal boxes shall be appropriately protected against rust and corrosion. Such protection
shall apply to both the inside and outside of the boxes.
- Provision shall be made for holes in the base of the boxes for securing it to a mounting surface.

(n)

The tee units shall be earthed to the earthing bar in the electrical service box or other earthing
point.

(o)

The size of the earthing cable shall be 2.5mm2 PVC. The Contractor shall not dismantle the
earthing connection of the electrical installation and the electrical service box shall be properly
fixed back after the earthing connection.

(p)

To prevent unnecessary disruption of power supply to the CATV equipment, a label with the words
"DO NOT SWITCH OFF POWER SUPPLY FOR CATV SYSTEM" shall be indicated at the main
electrical distribution board as well as at the consumer unit that provides power supply to the CATV
equipment.

(q)

The Contractor shall select and provide one set of head-end equipment, antennae and its
accessories to one block for every 4 blocks. For example, two sets of head-end equipment,
antennae and its accessories shall be provided to two different headened blocks for a total of 5-8
blocks, etc, for each contract, or otherwise specified by the SO Rep. Under such cases, there shall
be no cost adjustment to the Contract Sum, if the need arises to install more H/E equipment and
the Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for
complying with these requirements. (Note that the location of the head-end system(s) is/are not
indicated in the Single Line Diagrams).

(r)

The Contractor shall also ensure that the structural integrity and the waterproofing of the affected
retaining walls is safeguarded, for linking (via underground or linkway) from the nearby block
through any of the retaining wall.

(s)

All splitter/tee units shall be sprayed with an approved paint and properly mounted to the splitter
box so as to deter theft.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(13)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-14
61.11

61.12

61.13

TEE SYSTEM - VERTICAL DISTRIBUTION

(a)

For apartment building blocks where there is no service duct, 2 sets of (50 x 50) mm metal trunking
shall be provided to house all the vertical distribution cable.

(b)

For vertical trunking along the staircase or common corridor, cement skirting and saddles over the
metal trunking shall be required for protection against water.

TEE SYSTEM - HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION

(a)

The horizontal main distribution cables linking the vertical distribution shall be installed at the
ground floor. The horizontal main distribution cable shall be installed in the metal trunking adjacent
to electrical trunking. Different sizes of metal trunking (75 x 75) mm, (75 x 50) mm, etc., shall be
used in accordance with the width of the adjacent electrical trunking. The cable supports or
saddles shall be spaced approximately 200mm apart.

(b)

In the case where crossing of CATV cable through the electrical trunking is inevitable, a 20mm
conduit shall be installed as close to the trunking base as possible to facilitate the crossing. Only
one metal conduit is allowed for each CATV cable. Other means of ensuring physical separation
of the CATV cables and electrical cables can be considered subject to approval by the SO Rep.

(c)

The Contractor shall provide (75 x 50) mm metal trunking for SCV at the ground floor through all
service ducts. In the event that Coaxial Distribution Duct (CDD) is provided at the ground floor, the
metal trunking shall be provided through all the service ducts, TER/MDF and CDD. The openings
through all RC beams/walls shall be cast 50mm away from the opening for electrical and CATV
trunking.

(d)

The Contractor shall also provide (75 x 50) mm metal trunking openings through the ceiling slab for
SCV.

SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM/SYSTEM DRAWINGS

The single line diagram/systems are designed for standard type of building block. The Contractor shall
make provisions in the Contract Sum for the additional material and equipment that may be required due
to site conditions.

61.14

CONDUIT SYSTEM
(a)

The number and sizes of the cables installed in the conduits shall not exceed the guidelines
specified in (b) below.

(b)

Guidelines for some of the sizes of conduits and the maximum number of coaxial cables permitted
to be drawn into the particular sizes of conduits are as follows :
- For vertically mounted conduits only
Nominal Diameter of Conduit
20mm (minimum)
25mm
32mm
38mm

Maximum Number of Cables

1
2 to 3
4 to 5
6 to 8

)
) maximum nominal
) diameter of 7.5mm
)

- For horizontally mounted conduits only

Nominal Diameter of Conduit
24mm (minimum)
32mm
38mm

BLDG04/S61.DOC(14)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Maximum Number of Cables

1 to 2
2 to 4
5 to 7

) maximum nominal
) diameter of 7.5mm
)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-15
61.14

CONDUIT SYSTEM (CONT'D)

(b)

Cont'd
The above guidelines are only applicable to conduits with no bend or a limited number of minor
bends (where change of direction is less than 45). Where the bends are sharp (for internal angle
of less than 145) and numerous, the size of the conduits shall be increased accordingly so as to
permit easy drawing-in of the cables.

(c)

Where the bending of conduits is unavoidable, the following guidelines shall be followed :
- not more than two bends shall be made in any unbroken length of conduit;
- the minimum bending radius of the conduit shall be 150mm or more depending on the minimum
bending radius of the cables;
- the maximum length of unbent conduit between junction boxes shall not exceed 10 m;
- junction boxes shall be approximately (150 x 150 x 50) mm; they shall be treated with anti-rust
paint and shall have a water-proof cover;
- junction boxes shall be used at sharp bend;
- if the junction box is within 1 m of a bend, the change in direction shall not exceed 90 and in
other cases where the distance is less than 1 m, it shall not exceed 45;
- 90 moulded elbow joints and tee joints shall not be used.

(d)

The jagged ends of the conduits shall be filed or bushed so that the sharp edges do not damage
the cable.

(e)

Where roof top conduits are required :

- they shall have a nominal diameter of 32mm throughout, the size of the conduits shall be
increased accordingly to maintain in a space factor of 35%.
- they shall be painted with at least one coat of anti-rust paint and one coat of enamel paint. The
Contractor shall request the Clerk-of-Works to verify that the approved anti-rust coating has
been completed before applying the finishing coat.
- they shall be supported by approved steel (hot-dip galvanised) or PVC supports and cement mix
at every one metre interval. Conduit joints shall be tight and the edges of junction boxes shall be
sealed and waterproofed. Lock nuts shall be provided. PVC support with cement mix shall also
be provided for every vertical conduit that protrude through the main roofing slab and for every
conduit joint.

(f)

Conduits passing through the roofing slab and the treaded portion of the conduits shall be painted
with at least one coat of approved enamel paint or other waterproofing compound before they are
installed.

(g)

All vertical distribution, conduits or PVC trunking shall be extended to the ceiling of the ground floor
(inside or outside the service ducts). The end of the conduits shall be plastered with wire mesh
reinforcement.

(h)

The galvanized steel conduits shall comply with SS 100:1974 (or BS 4568 Part 1 and 2). The
Contractor shall submit samples to the SO Rep for approval.

(i)

Conduit pipes shall be properly secured to the junction metal boxes by means of lock nuts. Two
nuts shall be used to secure each section of the conduit pipe to the metal/ABS box. Where it is not
possible to install 2 lock-nuts, the SO Rep may permit one lock-nut to be used without adjustment
to the Contract Sum.

(j)

Metal conduits and casings shall be earthed at two or more positions approved by the SO Rep.
The diameter of the bonding cable shall be 10mm2 tinned copper wires.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(15)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-16
61.14

61.15

CONDUIT SYSTEM (CONT'D)

(k)

The resistance between any point of the metal conduit to earth shall be less than one ohm.

(l)

All the conduits, trunkings, splitter and junction metal boxes shall be painted with the approved
paint. The colour of the paint shall be similar to the surroundings.

THE UNDERGROUND SYSTEM

(a)

Where building blocks are 'shadowed' by taller buildings nearby, the system for these affected
blocks shall be fed by underground cable from the head-end located at the taller building. The
Contractor shall take into consideration that buildings are completed and handed over block by
block. The head-end shall be located at building blocks that are scheduled to be completed first or
are already completed. The Contractor shall be required to provide overhead cables or a
temporary set of antenna if the low-rise building blocks are completed before the head-end building
block.

(b)

Cables laid underground shall be 850mm below the finished level. They shall be run in GS or
heavy duty PVC conduits and protected by high impact resistant hard PVC cover plates. The
minimum diameter of the conduits shall be 50mm. The cover plate shall be at least 1m long and
170mm wide. All the conduit joints shall be carefully sealed and waterproofed. The wall thickness
of the conduits shall be greater than 2.5mm.

(c)

At carparks and road crossings, if the tunnelling (boring) method is used, two numbers of
galvanised steel pipes (thickness of 2.0mm or more) of 50mm diameter shall be laid. The two
pipes shall be spaced at least 200mm apart. Where open trenches are dug, two 100mm GS pipes
shall be laid. Road crossing pipes shall be laid before the final stages of the road construction.
The Contractor shall apply and obtain written approval from the relevant authorities before carrying
out the road crossings.

(d)

The Contractor shall lay the underground conduits/duct before the pavements and drains are
concreted. No hacking is permitted.

(e)

Moulded type 90 jointing sockets for the PVC conduits shall not be used.

(f)

The minimum bending radius of the underground conduits shall be 1000mm. The unbroken length
of conduit may be bent.

(g)

90 bends shall be avoided and double-Z or double-S bends are not permitted.

(h)

Above-ground junction boxes or junction boxes buried in "man-holes" filled with sand, shall be
provided if the routes are long and consist of many bends. The SO Rep shall decide on the
number of boxes required all at the Contractor's cost and expense. The height and position of the
above-ground junction box shall be decided by the SO Rep.

(i)

All the underground trenches, conduits and cables shall be inspected by the SO Rep before they
are back-filled and covered up. If the Contractor back fills the trenches without the knowledge of
the SO Rep, the SO Rep may instruct the Contractor to open up the trenches for inspection.

(j)

The Contractor shall provide approved markers with a chequer plates of 200mm diameter along
the underground cable routes and road crossing. They shall be installed at every five metre
interval or when there is a change of direction or where the SO Rep directs. The Contractor shall
replace the PVC conduits and cable at his own cost and expense even though the Works may
have been certified as Substantially Completed, if it is found that:
- Cables are damaged by other parties because cable markers were not sufficiently installed to
indicate the presence of the cable;
- If the cables are not buried deep enough; or
- If the PVC conduits are bent at very sharp angles that makes replacement of cables difficult.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(16)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-17
61.15

61.16

61.17

THE UNDERGROUND SYSTEM (CONT'D)

(k)

The Contractor shall not damage or cut down any tree, shrub or plants while digging trenches. In
case of doubt, he should consult the NParks.

(l)

The Contractor shall submit the detailed underground cable route plan (A3 size) to the SO Rep
within two weeks after the installation is completed. Detailed measurement of all the cable marker
locations with reference to fixed reference points such as walls and columns shall be indicated on
the plan.

(m)

Equalisers shall be used for all sections of the underground systems and for all repeater amplifiers.

(n)

The underground conduit/duct which runs from the turfing area/pavement to the switch room may
share the cable duct which is provided for the entry of the carpark lighting cable to the switch room.
Where it is not possible to share the cable duct, the Contractor may run the conduits above the
ground floor beams. PVC conduits of 32mm diameter may be used. However, the Works shall be
carried out before the apron is completed.

AMPLIFIER BOX
(a)

All the holes on the amplifier box shall be factory made and those unused holes shall be provided
with rubber or plastic plugs.

(b)

All the amplifier boxes shall be made of electro-galvanised steel with a coating of approved epoxy
powder paint, Class I and oven baked. The colour of the box shall either be greyish green or ivory.

(c)

Where the amplifier box is mounted across the opening of the wall of the water tank room, an
additional piece of aluminium sheet shall be mounted behind the amplifier box so as to protect the
amplifier box from rain water. The aluminium sheet shall be painted with approved matt black paint
or colour paint that match the surrounding walls.

(d)

Each amplifier box shall have a single CATV line diagram securely attached. A hard cover log
book shall also be provided.

(e)

All the amplifier boxes that are mounted outdoors shall be provided with shelters.

(f)

The amplifier box shall be constructed of metal sheet having a minimum thickness of 1.6mm. The
dimension of the amplifier box for the headend equipment shall be approximately (1000 x 600 x
260) mm. All the necessary mounting bars/brackets, security bars, locks and accessories shall be
provided.

(g)

Under normal circumstances, cable entries to the amplifier box shall be made through the factory
made openings at the sides.

(h)

A plastic label bearing the following: Non-ELCB protected power points, for CATV EQUIPMENT
ONLY shall be mounted on the front door of the amplifier box. The size of the label on the
Drawings is only indicative.

(i)

Amplifier box shall not be required for the installation of broadband amplifier in the service duct.
However, all the necessary mounting bars/brackets, security bars, locks and accessories shall be
provided to secure all the equipment. The material used shall be rust resistant and painted with at
least one coat of approved anti-rust paint. The design shall be submitted to the SO Rep for
approval before installation.

(j)

The Contractor shall bond all metallic boxes to earth.

TEE BOX
(a)

The tee box shall be of sufficient size to house the tee unit and the associated cables without
excessive bending.

(b)

Four small drainage holes shall be provided at the corners of the box for outdoor installation.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(17)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-18
61.17

61.18

61.19

TEE BOX (CONTD)

(c)

All the openings on the box shall be factory made. Any unused holes shall be sealed.

(d)

The size of the tee box shall be approximately (180 x 180 x 350) mm. The SO Rep may allow for a
change in the dimension, all at the Contractor's cost and expense, if there is site constraint.

(e)

For indoor and outdoor installations, the box shall be made of at least 1.0mm thick galvanised
sheet or other material that is rust resistant. It shall be painted with at least one coat of approved
anti-rust paint and one coat of approved enamel paint.

(f)

The Contractor shall provide one tee box for every storey of each service duct.

(g)

The Contractor shall bond all metallic tee boxes to earth.

SPLITTER BOX
(a)

The splitter box shall be of sufficient size to house the splitters and the associated cables without
excessive bending.

(b)

All the openings on the box shall be factory made. Any unused holes shall be sealed.

(c)

The size of the splitter box shall be approximately (180 x 120 x 300) mm. The SO Rep may allow
for a slight change in the dimension, all at the Contractor's cost and expense, if there is site
constraint.

(d)

For indoor installations, the box shall be made of at least 1.0mm thick galvanised sheet or other
material that is rust-resistant. It shall be painted with at least one coat of anti-rust paint and
matched the electrical box colour.

SURGE DIVERTERS & EARTHING BARS

(a)

All the lead wires (coaxial cables) from the antennae shall be connected to surge diverters before
they are connected to the amplifiers. Surge diverters shall be provided for one future UHF
channel. All the surge diverters (10 no.) shall be mounted in a nickel chrome plated or other
approved box. F-connectors shall be used for connections. The RLR of the surge diverter unit
shall be equal to or better than 17 dB for VHF and 14 dB for UHF.

(b)

The box housing the surge diverters shall be connected to the lightning protection system of the
building by means of high conductivity aluminium tape of 25mm x 3mm.

(c)

Where possible, surge diverter box and the amplifier box shall be separated by at least 300mm
apart.

(d)

The power supply units shall also be protected by surge diverters.

(e)

The surge diverter box shall have a hinged door and shall be painted with at least one coat of antirust paint before being spray painted. Approval by the SO Rep is required.

(f)

All the protective devices shall be approved by the SO Rep.

(g)

The earthing conductors that are connected to lightning protection system and that which are
connected to the electrical earthing system shall be separated. A minimum isolation of 2 kV shall
be required.

(h)

Gas filled surge diverters which will operate at a potential of 60V (RMS) or less shall be connected
between the centre conductors of the incoming and outgoing cables and the earth.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(18)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-19
61.20

61.21

LABELLING OF COAXIAL CABLE

(a)

All the lead wire from the antennae to the amplifiers including those at the surge diverter box shall
be labelled.

(b)

All cables in the junction or splitter/tee boxes shall be labelled according to the markings given on
the circuit diagram at the amplifier box. The floor and the last 2 digits of the unit number shall be
used for marking the cables to the apartments.

(c)

Only approved cable markers may be used. The Contractor shall submit samples to the SO Rep
for approval before use.

SCREWS
Screws and washers used to mount the tee, splitter, trunkings and outlet boxes shall be of brass type or
equivalent that do not corrode easily.

61.22

61.23

61.24

PVC TRUNKING
(a)

UPVC trunking with a minimum dimension of 50mm x 50mm shall be used to house the vertical
CATV trunk cables for building blocks provided with recesses for the CATV riser. Trunking with
detachable covers shall be used if the trunking are enclosed in service ducts. 50mm x 50mm
trunking with detachable covers shall be used for threading through the floor slabs. All the
exposed UPVC trunking shall be painted with one coat of enamel paint of similar colour as the
surrounding.

(b)

The Contractor shall provide UPVC trunking with a minimum dimension of 100mm x 50mm (W x D)
for building blocks provided with recesses for the CATV riser, 100mm x 50mm trunking with
detachable covers shall be used to house the vertical SCV trunk cables which run in parallel with
the 50mm x 50mm trunking at the CATV riser. 100mm x 50mm trunking with detachable covers
shall be used for threading through the floor slabs. The 100mm x 50mm trunking is reserved for
the installation of SCV trunk cables in the future and no CATV cable shall be run inside this
trunking.

(c)

All UPVC trunking and accessories shall comply with SS 275.

TEST EQUIPMENT
(a)

A stereo colour TV set with teletext and a screen of 360 mm or more shall be used to assess the
quality of the picture, stereo sound reception and Teletext reception. TV sets manufactured by
"Thomson"; or "LG"; or "Samsung" or other approved shall be used.

(b)

The Field Strength Meter shall have the facilities to measure the FM signals. The meter shall be
calibrated yearly by the approved authorities.

(c)

To supply a portable generator for testing where the power supply is not available.

(d)

The SO Rep may reject the testing equipment if it is not in a good working condition. The
Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of Time for Completion arising from or in
connection with the rejection of the testing equipment by the SO Rep. The testing may also be
considered as failed if it is found that the Contractor has failed to carry out the necessary
preparations before the testing.

(e)

Band V signals shall be tested at Channel 68 or 69. The Contractor shall provide the required
frequency converters for the testing.

COAXIAL PLUGS
(a)

The coaxial plugs shall be of good quality and rust-resistant.

(b)

Coaxial plugs used for the amplifiers shall be nickel plated or other equivalent.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(19)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-20
61.25

FREQUENCY CONVERSION
(a)

For locations near transmitting stations and locations which experience strong ambient signals, the
Contractor shall convert the frequencies with approval from the SO Rep in the following order:
Channel 3 to Channel 6
Channel 5 to Channel 2
Channel 8 to Channel 11
Channel 10 to Channel 9
Channel 12 to Channel 4
Channel 24 to Channel 43
Channel 28 to Channel 45
Channel 34 to Channel 47
Channel 36 to Channel 49

(b)

61.26

61.27

The Contractor shall seek the approval of the SO Rep to use frequency conversion for those
building blocks where the signal received by the antenna is more than 100 dB or if left hand
ghosting is observed in one or more apartments.

MIXER OR SEPARATOR
(a)

The minimum return loss of the VHF/UHF mixer or separator shall be 20 dB for VHF and 16 dB for
UHF.

(b)

The insertion loss of the units shall be less than 1 dB for VHF and less than 1.5 dB for UHF.

SIGNAL LEVELS AT SUBSCRIBER OUTLETS

The Contractor shall comply with the requirements specified in subclauses 61.2(h) and 61.2(i). If the
SO Rep is satisfied that the design is the best and no simple alteration or addition of booster amplifiers,
equalisers, etc will further improve the CATV system performance or when there is a strong ambient
signal which requires the VHF signals to be set at a higher level, the SO Rep may permit the maximum
difference between the VHF channels and the UHF channels to be 15 dB. However the difference in
signal levels within any 100 MHz in the UHF band shall not exceed 8 dB.
The Contractor shall test and ensure that all coaxial cables installed at the Site are free of Defect such as
short circuit, open circuit and cable kink. The test report for the unit signal level measurements shall be
submitted to the SO Rep for the satisfactory completion of the installation.

61.28

RF CABLE CONNECTORS

61.28.1

Trunk Connector
(a)

The construction shall be :

- Heavy duty, alloy aluminium construction, superior alloy for corrosion resistance
or other approved type;
- Ultra Violet Resistant O-rings;
- Contacts : Brass with Brite Nickel Plate for long life impervious to ageing and
extreme environmental conditions or other approved type;
- Withstands minimum 40 PSIG pressurisation;

(b)

The nominal impedance shall be 75 2 ;

(c)

The Return Loss should be better than -30 dB up to 824 MHz.

(d)

At extreme temperatures (-40C to +60C) high RF integrity maintained, with shielding

effectiveness better than 80 dB.

(e)

Connector Holding Power maintained over the full temperature range, without damage to cable.

(f)

Positive weather seal with controlled O-Ring compression.

(g)

Each connector individually stamped to identify connector size and type.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(20)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-21
61.28.2

Drop Connector
(a)

The construction shall be :

- High quality brass or other equivalent;
- Cadmium plated with iridescent chromate coating for maximum corrosion resistance or
other equivalent;
- Ultra Violet Resistant plastic and O-rings providing a reliable environmentally sealed product;
- Contacts : Long life impervious to ageing and extreme environmental conditions.

61.29

(b)

The nominal impedance shall be 75 2 .

(c)

The Return Loss shall be better than -20 dB up to 824 MHz.

(d)

The shielding effectiveness better than 80 dB.

(e)

Connector to cable retention 40 pounds minimum.

(f)

F-nuts/connectors shall be of the long-sleeve type, snap-and-seal or 360 full compression

connectors shall be used. The Contractor shall use the specially designed tool to clamp the Fnuts/connectors.

(g)

Each connector individually stamped to identify connector size and type.

LOW-RISE APARTMENT BLOCKS

The lower building blocks shall tap the TV signals from the taller building blocks. However, owing to site
conditions or due to delay of completion of the head-end building blocks, the SO Rep may instruct the
Contractor to tap TV signals from another nearby building block at no additional cost to the Employer. The
Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for such Works in the Contract Sum.

61.30

61.31

SPACE PROVISION FOR SCV

(a)

A Coaxial Distribution Duct (CDD) shall preferably be provided next to or adjacent to TER or MDF
room (CDD Ratio : 4 block : 1 CDD). The minimum internal dimension of the CDD shall be
approximately 1000mm (width) x 500mm (depth) with the base inclination of 5 for water escape as
indicated in the Drawings.

(b)

The CDD shall be provided with louvres door, well ventilated, dry and secured by an approximately
lock. In particular, it shall be protected against rain or flooding.

(c)

A complete electrical circuit from the CSR unmetered busbar to CDD with 3 no. of 13 Amp power
point, ELCB/MCB and a lamp in CDD and MCB with meter board in CSR.

(d)

Earth bar/rod - 1 no. of clean earth with less than 1 shall be provided in the CDD.

(e)

Lead-in-pipes - 3 no. of lead-in-pipes (110mm diameter) from the apron of the building block and
into the CDD shall also be provided, even if it is not shown in the Drawings.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE
The Contractor shall allow for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance of the Central Antenna
Television System Installation and for providing an efficient call-back service as specified hereunder for a
period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or subphase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance
Period" for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it).
The maintenance service shall include all the items specified hereunder during the Maintenance Period.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(21)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-22

61.31.1

(a)

The Contractor shall provide an efficient call-back service on a 24-hour basis everyday without
charge. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for the cost and expense of all such
call-back services in the Contract Sum. The Contractor shall respond to the SO Rep, EMSU
(ie. ESMACO Pte Ltd and/or EM Services Pte Ltd), Branch Offices or other HDB appointed
agent(s) within 30 minutes after they have been notified through their receptionists, telephone
recording machines or pager/handphone, failing which the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under
Clause 1.6 Nuisance and Irregularities to impose charges against the Contractor.

(b)

The Contractor shall be responsible for informing the SO Rep, EMSU (ie. ESMACO Pte Ltd and/or
EM Services Pte Ltd), Branch Offices or other HDB appointed agent(s) within one hour after a case
has been referred to him, to report on :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)

extent and nature of repair;

when work can commence;
when repair is expected to be completed.

(c)

The Contractor shall also feedback on the work completed or any work that cannot be completed
to the SO Rep, EMSU (ie. ESMACO Pte Ltd and/or EM Services Pte Ltd), Branch Offices or HDB's
appointed agent(s).

(d)

The Contractor shall attend to and rectify all the faults promptly after they have been informed by
the SO Rep, EMSU (ie. ESMACO Pte Ltd and/or EM Services Pte Ltd), Branch Offices or other
HDB appointed agent(s). For failure of the whole system, the Contractor shall rectify the failures
within 3 hours.

61.31.2

All urgent calls (ie. breakdown of one or more channels or when there are 3 or more complaints from the
same block) shall be attended to within the same day.

61.31.3

The Contractor shall check any of the following items when requested by the SO Rep and make minor
adjustments all at the Contractor's cost and expense :
(a)

Check conditions of elements of antennae and tighten all loose parts and connections.

(b)

Check all connections at the input and output of the head-end equipment.

(c)

Check the wiring at the water tank room, untidy wires shall be neatly saddled.

(d)

Check the reception at any units.

(e)

Compare the outputs of the amplifiers with the original settings and make the necessary
adjustments if so required.

(f)

Check the antenna mast/bracket and its mounting for firmness and rust. The rusted fixtures shall
be scrapped and painted.

(g)

Check the lightning conductor and earth wire connections to ensure that they are clean and tight.

(h)

Check the guy wires for tautness, adjust the turnbuckle if necessary.

(i)

Grease or lubricate the turnbuckles and the bolts at the antenna mounting bracket.

(j)

Check all conduits and saddles on roof-top, common corridors and other places. Rusted portion
shall be scrapped and painted. Non-rusted conduits shall be painted at least once every 12
months.

BLDG04/S61.DOC(22)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 61-23

61.31.4

The Contractor shall obtain the Employer's permission before carrying out any modification work to the
CATV antenna system. However, in the event of emergency repairs, the Contractor is expected to carry
out the works.

61.31.5

Should the Contractor fail to attend to an urgent call within the same day or fail to attend to other faults
within 24 hours on receipt of the complaint, the Employer reserves the right to engage another contractor
to carry out the works. The cost of the repair and replacement plus the Employer's charges shall be
borne by the Contractor.

61.31.6

If the Contractor fails to rectify the faults successfully after three (3) attempts, the SO Rep reserves the
right to engage another contractor to carry out the works. The costs of the repairs plus the Employer's
charges shall be borne by the Contractor.

61.31.7

If the Contractor makes false claims, the SO Rep shall exercise its right under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and
Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.

61.31.8

The Contractor shall exercise tact and not quarrel with tenants/lessees when he is attending to
complaints.

61.31.9

The Contractor shall not discard replaced parts, boxes, conduits, etc on the roof top. He shall be held
responsible for any injury caused to the persons below if any of the objects were to fall off the roof or
arising from Works carried out by him.

61.31.10

The Contractor shall provide standby equipment to keep the system functioning when the faulty
equipment are taken back to the workshop for repairs.

61.31.11

The Contractor shall provide radio pagers for his maintenance supervisor and standby technicians.

61.31.12

If the Contractor fails to carry out the maintenance service of the CATV systems, the SO Rep reserves the
right to impose charges against the Contractor under Clause 1.6 Nuisance and Irregularities for service
that is not carried out or not carried out to the satisfaction of the SO Rep, EMSU (ie. ESMACO Pte Ltd
and/or EM Services Pte Ltd), Branch Offices or other HDB appointed agent(s).

61.31.13

The Employer reserves the right to tap the signals from the head-end equipment or other sources to feed
the system at another block as long as the tapping does not cause any disruption to the system.

61.31.14

The Employer also reserves the right to engage another contractor to carry out any portion or the whole of
the Works.

61.31.15

The Contractor shall take and fully comply with all instructions from the SO Rep on all matters pertaining
to repair, replacement, modification and maintenance of the CATV systems.

Total pages for this Section :

23

Section 62/.....

BLDG04/S61.DOC(23)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 62-1
SECTION 62
TELEPHONE CABLING

62.1

Scope of Work
The telephone cabling works shall be undertaken by a licensed telecommunication wiring contractor. The
Works shall comply with IDA Code of Practice and meet the requirements of PTLs/TSLs and in
accordance with the Drawings. The PTLs/TSLs shall install their block telephone cabling from their main
distribution frames in the Main Distribution Frame room (MDF room) or Telephone Equipment room (TER)
to their risers Distribution Points (DP) at the upper floors. The DPs are normally located inside the service
ducts.
The telephone cabling Works under the contract shall include the telephone cabling from the PTLs/TSLs
DP to the internal of the residential units, and testing and commissioning of the telephone cabling works.

62.2

General
The Contractor shall provide all necessary labour, tools and materials required for the telephone cabling
works. All materials for the telephone cabling works shall be as approved by IDA. It shall match the
electrical wiring accessories and of the same construction.

62.3

Installation of Telephone Cables

DP outside the residential units.
For each residential unit, the Contractor shall install two 6-wire cables (each cable has one service pair
and two spare pairs) from the Distribution Points (DP) to the 5-pair block terminal (5-pr BT) inside the
residential unit. All the units telephone sockets shall then be wired from the 5-pr BT. At the 5-pr BT, the
service pairs of the two incoming cables are required to be terminated together; one at the top row and
one at the bottom row. At the DPs, the loose ends of the two cables shall be of sufficient lengths for
proper termination on the furthest DP of the PTLs/TSLs. Telephone cables shall be installed in separate
concealed conduits or separate compartment of the multi-compartment trunking as shown in the
Drawings.
Numbering sleeves shall be fixed to cables at the ends terminating at the DP and the 5-pr BT. The
numbering scheme shall be standardised with the telephone wiring for the smallest house number being
labelled with the smallest collect pair number.
Telephone cables shall be segregated from electrical cables at all crossovers. Insulation sleeves shall be
provided for telephone cables resting on electrical cables inside the trunking and where telephone cables
pass through beams/walls, PVC sleeves shall be provided to segregate them from electrical cables.
Plastering of cables at beam openings shall not be allowed.
DP not outside the residential units
Under such cases, the DPs are usually located at the staircase landings. A block terminal is installed just
outside each residential unit to demarcate the start of the internal telephone cabling. This block terminal
shall be fixed inside the dummy multi-compartment trunking above the unit's electrical meterboard or at a
location decided on the Site all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
The Contractor shall install the two 6-wire cables from the DPs to the units block terminal, and from this
block terminal to the 5-pair block terminal (5-pr BT) inside the residential unit. All the units telephone
sockets shall then be wired from the 5-pr BT. At the 5-pr BT, the service pairs of the two incoming cables
are required to be terminated together; one at the top row and one at the bottom row. At the block
terminal, all service pairs of the two cables shall be terminated. At the DPs, the loose ends of the two
cables shall be of sufficient lengths for proper termination on the furthest DP of the PTLs/TSLs. Telephone
cables shall be installed in separate concealed conduits or separate compartment of the multicompartment trunking as shown in the Drawings.
Numbering sleeves shall be fixed to cables at the ends terminating at the DPs, block terminals and the 5pr BT. The numbering scheme shall be standardised with the telephone wiring for the smallest house
number being labelled with the smallest collect pair number.

BLDG04/S62.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 62-2
62.3

Installation of Telephone Cables (Cont'd)

DP not outside the residential units (Cont'd)
Telephone cables shall be segregated from electrical cables at all crossovers. Insulation sleeves shall be
provided for telephone cables resting on electrical cables inside the trunking and where telephone cables
pass through beams/walls, PVC sleeves shall be provided to segregate them from electrical cables.
Plastering of cables at beam openings shall not be allowed.

62.4

Installation of Telephone Point in Lift Motor Room

Telephone points shall be provided in the lift motor rooms of residential blocks, multi-storey car park and
as shown in the Drawings. For each telephone point, the Contractor shall install two numbers of 6-wire
cables from the nearest PTLs/TSLs DP to the telephone block terminal (BT) and to the telephone socket
next to the BT. The telephone point shall be located next to the lift isolator. At the DP, the free ends of
both cables shall be installed directly into the metal trunking of the PTLs/TSLs neatly, with sufficient
lengths for termination at the furthest DP.
The telephone point for the lift motor room shall be identified with sleeves marked as "lift motor
room/TMS". This telephone point shall be installed in concealed conduit from the service duct of the DP to
the lift motor room and to any other telephone extension points in other lift motor rooms where shown in
the Drawings.

62.5

Fixing of Telephone Socket

The telephone socket shall be installed inside the unit at a position as indicated in the Drawings.

62.6

Fixing of 20mmx9mm Telecom Casing

Where surface trunking is required to be installed, the 20mm x 9mm PVC casing shall be extended
independently from the 60mm x 20mm multi-compartment trunking to the telephone socket. A minimum of
7 nails shall be used to fix a standard length of 2 m casing.

62.7

Sample Units
Sample units of the telephone cabling Works from the DP to the 5-pair BT and sockets inside the dwelling
unit, shall be set up for inspection and approval by the SO Rep.

62.8

Earth Bars in MDF and TER Rooms

The Contractor shall provide an earthing bar of at least 460 mm long with 6 mm screw holes spaced at 60
mm centre to centre inside every MDF room and Telephone Equipment Room (TER) of each building
2
block. This earth bar shall be connected by an earth cable of 50 mm to an external earth electrode
system. The earth resistance of this earthing grid shall be 1 ohm or less. The Contractor shall submit the
certified result of the earthing system together with actual layout diagrams showing the earthing
arrangement to the PTLs/TSLs during the handing over of the rooms to them.

62.9

Testing and Completion

Upon completion of the telephone cabling Works, the Contractor shall submit an endorsed testing report
by their licensed telecommunication wiring contractor to the SO Rep; and inform the SO Rep and
PTLs/TSLs for a joint site inspection. The PTLs/TSLs may conduct an acceptance test on the cabling to
check for insulation, continuity and correct termination during the inspection. The Contractor shall rectify
all defects reported during the inspection within one week.

Total pages for this Section :

2
Section 63/.....

BLDG04/S62.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 63-1
SECTION 63
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

63.1

SCOPE OF WORK

63.1.1

General
The work include the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the electrical fire alarm system
installation as shown in the Drawings.
The fire alarm system shall comply with SS CP 10, BS EN54 : Part 2 & 4 and the requirements of the local
authorities.
All fire alarm panels shall be approved by FSSD.
All fire alarm accessories shall be type tested.
Where any apparatus forming part of the installation is situated outdoor or subjected to damp condition,
such apparatus shall be of weatherproof design.
The Contractor shall engage a PE who shall be responsible for the necessary completion, supervision,
testing and commissioning of the fire alarm installation under the Contract. The PE shall submit a
Certificate of Supervision and testing and commissioning certificates to the SO Rep, URA and BCA if so
required all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

63.1.2

Approval Of Drawings And Details

The Contractor shall submit two sets of the following documents within one month from the date of the
Letter of Acceptance to the SO Rep for approval :
(a)

Layout and construction of main alarm panel and sub-alarm panel including the battery
compartment.

(b)

Technical specifications and samples (if required) of all Plant and equipment employed in the
installation.

(c)

Other information of the system as specified in the Specifications or required by the SO Rep.

Work shall only commence upon approval of the Contractor's proposal by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding
the approval given by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remain liable for providing the panel and other
Plant and equipment fitting on the Site that meet the operating requirements under the said Code of
Practice and the relevant Authorities.
63.2

SYSTEM OF OPERATIONS

63.2.1

General
The fire alarm system shall be a closed circuit continuously monitored installation, comprising essentially
of a main alarm panel, triggering devices and alarm bells, fed from a continuously charged DC power
supply source.

BLDG04/S63.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 63-2
63.2.2

Alarm Operation
The operation of one or more trigger devices shall result in an immediate fire alarm given by :
(i)

an audible/visual alarm from all the alarm bells/strobe lights situated in the entire building;

(ii)

a visible indication for each zone in which a trigger device operates.

Where a number of alarm signals are received in quick succession, or simultaneously, the Plant and
equipment shall be designed so that a general audible alarm continues or resounds as each visible
indication commences.
The alarm state shall be maintained by the main alarm panel without a continued signal from the trigger
device so that even destruction of a connection after the trigger device operates shall not discontinue the
sounding of the alarm.
63.2.3

Alarm Silencing Switch

The audible and visual alarms shall continue until silenced by the manual operation of a silencing switch;
they shall not be automatically silenced. The design of the silencing switch shall be such that the audible
alarm can only be silenced after 3 minutes of sounding. The principle of design shall be such that no
other control is able to override the silencing switch during the 3 minutes of sounding.
The operation of a silencing switch while an alarm condition exists shall not cancel the visual indication of
the fire alarm nor shall the operation of the silencing switch prevent the proper receipt of alarms from any
zone(s) not yet providing an alarm signal. Further, its operation shall not prevent the transmission of the
alarm signal to the monitoring station.
There shall be only one switch for the silencing of the audible and visual fire alarm. In addition, the
operation of the audible and visual fire alarm re-sounding system shall not require the activation of any
other manual switches and devices.
The restoration of the silencing switch to its normal position whilst an alarm condition exists shall transfer
the alarm to the fire alarm bells.

63.2.4

Fault Warning
The fire alarm system shall be capable of detecting fault automatically whenever it develops in any of the
circuits and a fault warning shall be given by both an audible warning from a buzzer and a visible
indication in the main alarm panel. This buzzer in the main alarm panel shall be distinctive and of a
different character from fire alarm bells.
The buzzer warning shall be cancelled by a single silencing switch solely designed for this purpose and
unless the fault is rectified, the visual indication shall persist. The removal of a fault shall automatically
reset the audible fault warning circuit. The occurrence of another further fault while the buzzer is silenced
shall cause the buzzer to sound again. Similarly, the restoration of the silencing switch to its normal
position whilst a fault exists shall transfer the fault back to the audible fault warning of the system.
Any fault warning shall not prevent a fire alarm being given at the same time. At any time, an alarm of fire
shall take priority over any other indication such as fault warning.
A distinct visible and audible fault signal shall be given on the main alarm panel in the event of any of the
following situations :
(i)

failure or disconnection of the normal power supply to the main alarm panels;

(ii)

failure such as low/high voltage or disconnection of the standby battery;

(iii)

failure such as low/high voltage or disconnection of the battery charger;

(iv)

triggering circuit faults such as open circuit, short circuit, earth fault of the +ve or -ve line in the
wiring between trigger devices and the main alarm panel including the removal of any trigger
devices;

BLDG04/S63.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 63-3
63.2.4

Fault Warning (Contd)

(v)

bell circuit faults such as open circuit, short circuit, earth fault of the +ve or -ve line in the wiring
between alarm bells and the main alarm panel including the removal of any bells;

(vi)

open circuit in any of the looping circuits that control the networking of general alarm, silencing and
reset function;

(vii)

rupture or disconnection of any fuse or the operation of any protective devices that would prevent a
fire alarm being given.

Should any of the above situations from (i) to (vii) (inclusive) occur in the respective sub-alarm panels a
distinct visible signal shall also be given on the main alarm panel.
63.3

MAIN ALARM PANEL

63.3.1

General
The main alarm panel (MAP) shall be of the solid state electronic type. Other equivalent types may be
proposed, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep. It shall be approved by the FSSD under the PSB
Product Listing Scheme Class 1.The MAP shall contain the following Plant and equipment :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)

Switches and indicating facilities for zones

"System On" indicator
"Mains Fault", "Earth Fault", "Charger Fault", "Battery Fault" and "Sounder Fault" indicators
A voltmeter to indicate battery voltage
Fire alarm buzzer
Silencing switch for fire alarm complete with indicator
Audible fault warning buzzer
Silencing switch for fault warning buzzer complete with indicator
Indicator for bell circuit fault
Evacuation switch to energise all alarm bells complete with indicator
Light indicator test facility
System reset switch
Auxiliary contacts complete with isolation switch and indicator
A separate indicator for each sub-alarm panel to indicate that its isolation switch is activated.

The main alarm panel shall be accommodated in a well-finished self-sustained sheet cabinet constructed
from at least 1.5mm thick hot dipped galvanised sheet steel. The cabinet housing shall be coloured bright
red and shall be fitted with a hinged, glazed door which shall be locked. All alarm zone indicators and
associated switches shall be visible behind the locked door. The manufacturer's name shall be clearly
and permanently marked on the front of the cabinet.
Two spare zones or 10% of the total zone, whichever is the higher, shall be provided for the alarm panels.
Facilities shall be provided in the main alarm panel so that easy connection to extension unit can be made
when future expansion of the main alarm panel becomes necessary.
A manual call point and an alarm bell/strobe light shall be provided adjacent to the main alarm panel.
All main alarm panel shall incorporate the automatic facilities to receive, interpret and operate the signals
from their fire fighting systems installed in the building blocks.
Letterings using reversed silk screen designating the alarm zone, the functions of the various indicators,
apparatus and switches shall be provided for every main alarm panel. All manual controls shall be clearly
labelled to indicate their functions. An information chart listing the system operating instruction shall be
fixed inside each board. Other type of labelling may also be used subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
Approved silk screen white perspex sheet with reduced scale coloured drawings of approved sizes
showing the boundaries and locations of the alarm zone shall be provided by the Contractor and located
next to each main alarm panel, sub-alarm and repeater board.

BLDG04/S63.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 63-4
63.3.1

General (Contd)
Locations of fire protection Plant and equipment such as main alarm panel, sub-alarm panel, portable fire
extinguishers, fire hose reels, dry riser, etc shall also be indicated on the white perspex coloured drawings
in the form of clear and distinctive symbols. Escape routes including corridor, staircase, etc shall be
clearly indicated.
The main alarm panels and sub-alarm panels of the automatic alarm system shall be provided with an
alarm verification feature complying with CP10 and approved by the relevant Authority.

63.3.2

Alarm Zone - Zone Switches And Indicating Facilities

The following switches and indicating facilities shall be provided for each alarm zone or group :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

63.3.3

Fire alarm indicator

Fault indicator
Isolation indicator
Isolation position switch

Fire, Fault And Isolation Indicators

The fire alarm indicator shall be twin light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as "LED" for the
purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it). The fault indicator and isolation indicator can
each be a separate single LED or a single LED incorporating both the fault indicator and isolation
indicator. The LED shall light up upon actuation and remain lit until manually reset.
The fire alarm indicator shall be coloured red and clearly labelled with the word "FIRE". The fault warning
indicator and the isolation indicator shall be coloured yellow and clearly labelled with the words "FAULT"
and "ISOLATED" respectively.

63.3.4

Isolation Switch
A switch shall be provided for the deliberate isolation of each individual alarm group from the main alarm
panel common circuitry. Operation of the isolation switch shall prevent the alarm group from initiating
either alarm or fault signals and shall not impair the normal functioning of any other alarm groups. Unless
normal conditions have been restored, operation of the isolation switches shall not cause the associated
alarm groups to be isolated if the switches are operated after on alarm activation of the respective zones.

63.3.5

Indicators
Lamp indicators shall be the light emitting diode (LED) type.
The arrangement of indicator circuits and the design of the apparatus shall be such that the operation of
one indicator does not prevent the proper and separate operation of other indicators.
The operation of any alarm bell or the transmission of fire alarm signal to approved monitoring station shall
not be prevented by any faulty indicator and shall not depend on the operation of any indicator.

63.3.6

Connection Of Ancillary Services

Ancillary services shall not affect the functioning of the Plant and equipment.
A 24V DC supply may be provided from the fire alarm control panel to operate a relay or similar operating
device controlling the ancillary Plant and equipment. The mechanism shall be such that it does not
impose a continuous load on the battery under non-alarm conditions.
Provision for the interface between the main alarm panel and auxiliary Plant, control Plant and equipment
or external devices which require to be operated or disconnected in the event of an alarm shall also be
made by the use of at least two separate and uncommitted relays. Each relay shall provide 2 sets of
voltage free changeover contacts having minimum rating of 5A 30V dc.
Outputs to any ancillary services shall be fused or similarly protected to ensure the safety of the control
Plant and equipment.

BLDG04/S63.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 63-5
63.3.7

Sub-Alarm Panel
The construction and requirements of the sub-alarm panel shall be similar to the main alarm panel. Subalarm panel shall contain indicators together with associated switches and indicating facilities for zones.
The sub-alarm panel shall have additional facilities for transmitting a sector signal to the main alarm panel.
Where sub-alarm panel is provided in a sector of a premise, the sector in which an alarm originates shall
be shown on the main alarm panel, and the zone of origin of the alarm shall be shown on the sub-alarm
panel. Where both sector and zone indication are provided on one main alarm panel, clear differentiation
shall be made between the two functions.

63.3.8

Power Supply
The fire alarm system shall be operated on a DC power supply of 24 volts provided by sealed type
maintenance-free lead-acid batteries which are maintained in an adequately charged condition by a
230 volts AC/24 volts DC rectifier/charger.
A double-pole 230 volts rated switch with neon indicator shall be provided for the direct termination of the
incoming mains supply. This supply shall be exclusive to the fire alarm system and connected to a
separate circuit from the main switchboard and the controlling circuit breaker shall be clearly labelled
"FIRE ALARM : DO NOT SWITCH OFF".
The batteries shall be suitable for standing on open circuit or floating across a constant voltage supply and
discharging at infrequent intervals.
The capacity of the battery used to energise the alarm system shall be such that in the event of mains
failure, the battery is capable of maintaining the system in normal working condition for at least 24 hours.
Thereafter it shall be capable of supplying an additional load resulting from an alarm originating in two
separate alarm zones or groups for a period of half an hour and, if utilised to supply emergency
evacuation alarms, it shall in addition, be capable of supplying the full emergency evacuation alarm load
for a period of at least 10 minutes.
Calculations for ascertaining the capacity of the batteries and the design of the battery charging the Plant
and equipment to meet the above requirements shall be submitted to the SO Rep.
The battery terminal pillars and intercell connectors, bolts, nuts and washers used for fastening of intercell
and terminal connectors shall be made of highly conductive and corrosion-free materials.
The cell container of the battery shall be enclosed and made of rugged and self-extinguishing type plastic.
The battery shall be arranged in the compartment in such a way as to allow easy maintenance so that the
inspection of batteries shall not require removal of the cells and connections from the battery assembly.
A label containing the following information shall be securely fixed within the battery enclosure :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)

63.3.9

Type of cell
Number of cells
Ampere hour capacity
Nominal voltage
Final voltage
Float voltage of battery charger
Output current and limit of battery charger
Date supplied and recommended date of replacement

Battery Charger
The battery charger shall be of constant voltage current limiting type with automatic boost charge by
voltage level sensing and capable of functioning under the following environmental conditions :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)

BLDG04/S63.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Temperature
Relative humidity
Abnormal foreign potential

:
:
:

10C to 40C
20% to 95%
Power line surge

Bldg Spec
Page 63-6
63.3.9

Battery Charger (Contd)

The charger circuit shall be designed to suit the local climate.
The charger shall be capable of supplying any possible load of the system while maintaining the battery in
a fully charged condition and recharging the battery as prescribed below. The charging system shall be
the current limiting constant voltage type.
The rating of the battery charger shall be such that :
(i)

after the battery has been discharged from the fully charged state by supplying the load as
specified in the aforementioned requirements, and

(ii)

after recharging for a period of not more than 24 hours, the battery shall have recovered to the
extent that it shall be capable of sustaining a further discharge of supplying the same load as
specified in the aforementioned requirements.

The output voltage provided by the battery charger shall be maintained within 0.1% of the preset value
whilst operating within any combination of the conditions described below and whilst delivering a current
within the range of values required for float charging :
(i)
(ii)

Voltage
Frequency

:
:

230 rms +10%

50 Hz +5% single phase

The battery charger shall keep the battery under constant voltage charge. It shall incorporate automatic
control features with output designed to charge and maintain the cells of the battery within the limits
specified by the battery manufacturer, taking into account any quiescent load imposed by the associated
system.
The voltage output of the charger shall be adjustable to 20% of the nominal voltage. The battery
maximum allowable charging current shall be designed to suit the selected battery size at fixed current
limitation. The trimmers shall be arranged so that adjustment can be done without removing any circuit
boards or obstacles.
All electronic parts including rectifiers, power transistors and resistor shall be designed to function at the
case temperature below 75C unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
Printed circuit boards, fuses, relays and other electrical parts employed in the battery charger shall be
mounted and connected in such a way that facilitate inspection of them without any need to dismantle
them from their operating positions.
An approved self-resetting low voltage cut-off device with adjustable low voltage setting shall be installed
in the circuit between the battery and the system if the system is not self-resetting.
This under-voltage protection device shall disconnect the battery from supplying the system if the pre-set
low voltage limit as recommended by the battery manufacturer is reached.
63.4

MANUAL CALL POINTS

Manual call points shall be of the "break-glass" type complying with the requirements of BS 5839:Part 2
and notwithstanding this, be of a type approved by the relevant statutory authorities.
The casing of the call point shall be of shatterproof corrosion resistant plastic, finished in red. The front
glass fitted shall be replaceable and shall be such that the possibility of accidental breaking is reduced to
a minimum.
Manual call point installed outdoors shall be of approved weatherproof to at least IP65 and watertight steel
box construction complete with screwed conduit entry hole. The word "FIRE" shall be embossed on the
front surface.
For fire alarm systems which are not connected to monitoring stations (DECAM), provide a "IN CASE OF
FIRE, CALL 995" signage at every manual call point.

BLDG04/S63.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 63-7
63.5

FIRE ALARM DETECTORS

Fire alarm detectors shall be of the types approved by the relevant statutory authorities. The detectors
shall preferably be flushed mounted where possible and installed in a manner that each can be readily
removed for servicing without affecting the effectiveness of the remaining detectors and the system
operation.
In addition, all heat detectors shall comply with the CP 10:1993, Code of Practice for the Installation and
Servicing of Electrical Fire Alarm Systems and the technical specification EN 54:Part 5:2001 "Fire
Detection and Fire Alarm Systems-Part 5: Heat Detectors-Point Detectors" or AS 1603-1:1997 "Automatic
Fire Detection And Alarm Systems:Heat Detectors" & relevant parts of AS 2362 "Fire Detection, Warning,
Control & Intercom Systems" or UL Standard 521 "Heat Detectors For Fire Protective Signaling Systems"
or other approved equivalent, except that for the test on heat, endurance and relative humidity (RH), the
specimen shall be subjected up to 98% RH.

63.6

ALARM BELLS AND STROBE LIGHT

Alarm bells shall be of the cast or pressed steel underdome type, finished in red. It shall be complete with
a strobe light on top of the bell cover. The bell shall be the trembling type with a gong diameter of
150mm, and shall be capable of giving a minimum sound level of 90 dBA within a range of 1m
continuously.
The strobe light shall be attached with the alarm bell or mounted directly above it.
The strobe light shall be of a high intensity flashing strobe light with flash rate of 50 to 80 flashes per
minute. The lens cover of the light shall be red or amber in colour.
The bells and light shall be suitable for operation on 24 volts DC.
Alarm bells shall be mounted on conduit boxes above the manual call points.
Alarm bells installed outdoors shall be of approved weatherproof and watertight construction to at least
IP65.

63.7

INSTALLATION WIRING
Wiring of the fire alarm system shall be installed in accordance with the appropriate provisions of SS CP5
except as modified by the relevant clauses in SS CP10.
The wiring of the fire alarm system including the incoming supply mains shall be exclusive to the fire alarm
installation and shall be segregated from the wiring of any other circuit. Fire alarm wiring shall be spaced
at least 50mm away from any other service. The mains feed to the power supply Plant and equipment of
the fire alarm system shall be segregated from the wiring of all other services and also from all other
circuits of the fire alarm system.
Each alarm zone or group shall be separately wired and indicated on the main or sub-alarm panel. Manual
call points shall be connected in an "open" circuit and an "end-of-line" resistor shall be provided to enable
line monitoring.
All wiring, except the low voltage mains feed to the power supply Plant and equipment of the fire alarm
system shall be of fire resistant cables. Fire resistant cables shall be single or multi--core unarmoured
cables rated at 300/500V, comprising plain copper stranded circular conductors, fire barrier tape and
insulated with extruded polythene, or ethylene propylene rubber (EPR), or other approved fire resistant
compound, and an extruded oversheath of PVC. Such fire resistant cables shall be type tested.
All wiring shall be run in steel metal conduits or metal trunking exclusive to the fire alarm system. The PE
shall ensure that the furthest point of the system shall have sufficient supply to facilitate the proper
functioning of the system.
No joint between terminal points shall be permitted, except in long runs, in which case the joints shall only
be made in a suitable enclosed terminal box employing screwed terminations. The box shall be labelled
"Fire Alarm Link Box".
The wiring diagram shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before installation commences.

BLDG04/S63.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 63-8
63.8

SENSING CIRCUIT
A pair of voltage-free normally closed fire-resistant signal cables for sensing the activation of the fire alarm
system shall be provided from the main alarm panel to the lift machine room.

63.9

MONITORING FOR AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Where the automatic fire alarm system is required to be connected to monitoring stations as shown in the
Drawings, the connection shall be done in accordance with the requirements of SS CP 10 and as
approved by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for the one-time rental charge
and installation of the fire alarm transmitter, installation of the fixed leased-line and back-up dialed-up
telephone line from the transmitter to the nearest telephone distribution point and interconnection between
the transmitter and the main alarm panel leading to the commissioning of the complete system. The
transmitter shall be complete with the leased-line transmitter, digital communicator and all associated
power supply units.
The Contractor shall also include in the Contract Sum the first three month rental charges for the leasedline and the back-up telephone line from a PBTS and the first year 24 hour monitoring charge by the
monitoring station, all commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or
sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer.
If other means of DECAM transmission, approved by the Singapore Civil Defence Force, are proposed by
the Contractor, the Contractor shall still be required to install the fixed leased-line and back-up dialed-up
telephone line from the telephone terminal block to the transmitter. In addition, the first three-month rental
charges for such other means of transmission shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum. Such
alternative shall be approved by the SO Rep.

63.10

AS INSTALLED DRAWINGS
On completion of the installation and before the final inspection and testing, the Contractor shall supply to
the SO Rep three sets of suitably scaled "As-Installed" drawings of the complete fire alarm installation.
The drawings shall comprise the following :

63.11

(a)

positions and boundaries of various alarm zones;

(b)

position of main alarm panel, sub-alarm panels, battery charger, transmitter, manual call points,
detectors and bells;

(c)

circuitry diagram of the alarm panels and battery charger;

(d)

legend showing clearly all the symbols and abbreviations used;

(e)

technical specifications of all Plant and equipment used in the system including the manufacturer's
recommended testing requirements for detectors in-situ.

INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

The Contractor shall submit an application to the SO Rep to witness the inspection and commissioning
test of the complete installation. The application shall include information on the testing appointment date
and statement of completion of the whole Works by the Contractor.
The commissioning test shall be carried out by the Contractor and his PE and to be witnessed by the SO
Rep. The format of the test report shall be in accordance with the Specifications. The entire system shall
be tested to ensure that it operates satisfactorily and that :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)

all manual call points, detectors and bells function correctly;

all fault monitoring circuits function correctly;
the battery and battery charger comply with the requirements of the Specifications;
all ancillary Plant and equipment function correctly;
all control features and indicators in the alarm panels function correctly;
cable insulation resistance of all circuits are satisfactory in accordance with SS CP5.

The Contractor shall submit 3 copies of the test report, duly completed and signed, to the SO Rep not
later than 7 days after the test.
BLDG04/S63.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 63-9
63.12

MAINTENANCE SERVICE
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance of
the Fire Alarm System and an efficient call-back service as specified hereunder for a period of one year
commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the
Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for
the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it).
The maintenance during the one year Maintenance Period shall include all items listed in the Schedule
For Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System specified hereunder.

63.12.1

Schedule For Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System

63.12.1.1

Type Of Maintenance Service

This service shall include the following items :
(A)

The Contractor shall provide an efficient call-back service between 9.00 am and 9.00 pm every
day without charge.
On Substantial Completion of the Works as certified by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall install
and maintain one one-way exchange line or apply for the radio paging service from a PTL to
receive calls from the Branch Offices. The telephone numbers allotted to the radio paging
service shall be kept strictly confidential for use by the Employer. All fees and expenses incurred
for the application, installation and maintenance of the one-way exchange line or the radio
paging service shall be borne by the Contractor.

(B)

Emergency call-back service shall be provided by the Contractor at any time and all such urgent
calls shall be attended to within the same day if the Contractor is notified before 9.00 pm. All
other calls shall be attended to within 24 hours on notification by telephone or through the radio
paging service as specified in the aforementioned requirement, otherwise the SO Rep reserves
the right to engage any other person to rectify the fault and all expenses incurred plus the
Employer's charges shall be recovered from the Contractor.

(C)

The Contractor shall provide the following servicing and maintenance :

(a)

Monthly Test And Annual Test

The Contractor shall inspect, test and service the complete fire alarm system under this
Contract at least once a month except where otherwise directed by the Employer.
At each such monthly test and the annual test, the minimum items or work detailed below
shall be performed by the Contractor. Any special maintenance requirements on Plant
and equipment not covered by the following list but recommended by the manufacturers
shall also be included. The result of each test shall be recorded in the test report format
as produced in Appendix A38 "Monthly/Annual Test Report - Maintenance Of Fire Alarm
System" and filed in the log book.

(b)

Monthly Test
For monthly tests, the following inspection and testing procedures shall be carried out
each month :

BLDG04/S63.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

(i)

Simulate fire conditions on all alarm zones and reset the system to normal.
Confirm with the monitoring station when the test has been completed.

(ii)

Check battery voltage and charging current in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.

(iii)

Check batteries and their terminals as specified by the manufacturer to ensure that
they are in good serviceable condition. Where applicable, examine to ensure that
the specific gravity and the level of the electrolyte in each cell is correct.

(iv)

Check condition of battery cabinet for corrosion and to ensure that batteries are
stored in a secure condition.

Bldg Spec
Page 63-10
63.12.1

Schedule For Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System (Cont'd)

63.12.1.1

Type Of Maintenance Service (Cont'd)

(C)

(b)

(c)

Monthly Test (Cont'd)

(v)

Check to ensure that all indicating lights are operating correctly and replace if
faulty.

(vi)

Check operation of all alarm sounders.

(vii)

Disconnect the battery supply and ensure that the visual and audible fault signals
are activated at the main alarm panel.

(viii)

Simulate main power supply failure and ensure that the system will operate
correctly with the standby battery power supply (as specified in the Specifications).

(ix)

Simulate fire alarm conditions and check the output signals available to initiate the
remote auxiliary functions that is required to be in operation in the event of fire as
in accordance with the appropriate codes.

(x)

Simulate fault conditions on all alarm zones to ensure that the main alarm panel is
operating correctly.

(xi)

Check that the main alarm panel is in a clean and operative condition.

(xii)

Visually inspect the condition of components, terminations and cables.

(xiii)

Ensure that faulty parts are replaced and the replacement has been carried out
satisfactorily. Record in the log book any circuit fault that require repair.

(xiv)

Check that all switches are returned to their operating position after the test.

(xv)

The person carrying out the test shall record in the log, any fault(s) identified and
that the above test has been carried out.

Annual Test
For annual tests, carry out all the inspection and testing procedures specified in the
monthly test in the aforementioned requirement and, in addition, the following shall also
be provided :
(i)

The maintenance personnel shall arrange to check the operation of at least 20

percent of the detectors in the installation each year. The selection of detectors to
be tested shall be spread over as many zones as possible and shall be made in
such a way that all the detectors in the installation shall have been checked at
least once in 5 years.
The checking of detectors shall take the form of either :
- the testing of a detector in-situ; or
- the removal of a detector and its replacement by a detector which has been
checked and calibrated by the supplier/manufacturer.

(c)

Annual Test
(ii)

Circuits requiring automatic voltage regulated supplies shall be checked to ensure

correct operation and voltage output.

(iii)

Where the heat-sensitive element of thermal detectors or the enclosure of other

detectors are found to be coated with paint or any other material likely to affect the
operation of the detectors, such material shall be cleaned off or if necessary, have
the detector replaced.

Total pages for this Section :

10
Section 64/.....

BLDG04/S63.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 64-1
SECTION 64
VENTILATION SYSTEM

64.1

SCOPE OF WORK
The Works to be executed shall include the design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the
mechanical ventilation system to food stalls, eating houses and complexes as shown in the Drawings.
The Contractor shall appoint a PE to design the MV system and make necessary submissions to BCD
and/or FSSD and/or BCU. The Drawings shall serve as references only. Where any part of the design
contravenes with Codes and Building Authority requirements, the onus is on the Contractor's PE to make
amendments to the design prior to the submissions to the BCD and/or FSSD and/or BCU. The Contractor
shall be deemed to allow all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for complying with the foregoing
requirements. The Contractor's PE shall also submit all relevant Certificates of Supervision upon
completion of the Works.
The mechanical ventilation system shall be complete with fan, ductworks, silencers, dampers, flexible duct
connections, sound attenuation box, vibration isolators, drain traps and other accessories. The Works
shall be carried out in accordance with the following requirements and Drawings and in compliance with
the current regulations of the Ministry of Environment, the Statutory Authorities of Singapore, and the
Singapore Standard CP 13:1980 on mechanical ventilation and air-conditioning in buildings. Bifurcated
fan shall be used for eating houses and food stall. All standards used in the Specifications shall be of the
latest version.

64.1.1

Related Documents
This Section shall be read in conjunction with Section 65 including all clauses and subclauses under it.

64.2

OTHER WORKS TO BE INCLUDED

The following works shall be included as part of the installation :

64.3

(a)

Provision of openings in wall, floor and roof slabs for the installation of duct as shown in Drawings.

(b)

Where the duct runs through the floor or roof slabs, a raised kerb shall be constructed around the
duct and the duct at the opening should be constructed in such a way as to prevent seepage of
water.

(c)

Patching up and making good all openings to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

(d)

All necessary electrical wiring including accessories to the fan motor.

(e)

Fan motor control panel complete with internal wiring, control Plant and equipment, indication and
motor starters.

(f)

Low level exhaust louvres/grilles are to be protected by metal guards.

WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIAL

All material used shall comply with the relevant British Standard Specification. Certificates of origin for
any material shall be produced by Contractor on demand by the SO Rep. All electrical Plant and
equipment shall be fully tropicalised, suitable for use in a hot humid atmosphere having an ambient
temperature of 32C. Certificates of tests by competent Authorities for all electrical and mechanical
components shall be produced by the Contractor on demand for inspection by the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S64.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 64-2
64.4

DUCTWORK

64.4.1

General
The material, construction and installation of the ductwork shall be in accordance with this Section
including all clauses and subclauses under it.

64.4.2

Materials
All ductwork shall be constructed of best quality galvanised steel sheets with thickness not less than
1.37mm unless otherwise specified.

64.4.3

Construction
All ductwork shall be constructed conforming to the dimensions and methods specified.
Horizontal dimensions of the rectangular ductwork are shown first and all dimensions shown are CLEAR
internal sizes.
Ducts which are internally insulated, shall be constructed such that the nominal dimensions which are
shown in the Drawings are clear internal sizes inside the insulation.
Ductwork shall be free of any waves or buckles. Full size standard galvanised steel sheets shall be used
and any patched, made up, or second-hand sheets shall be rejected.
Unless otherwise specified, all changes in duct size shall be made in a gradual manner with a total angle
of divergence not exceeding 15 degrees whenever possible. Bends shall be made with an inside radius
not less than the duct width in the plane of the bend. Where this is not possible due to limitation of space,
square bends may be used. All bends whether round or square shall be provided with approved turning
vanes.
All duct shall be installed without forming dips or traps which may collect residues.
A residual trap shall be provided at the base of each vertical riser with provisions for cleanout.
Ducts shall be installed with a fall in the direction of flow of not less than 1 in 200. A drain shall be
provided at the lowest point of each run of duct and as indicated in the Drawings.
Each duct system shall constitute an individual system serving only exhaust hoods on one floor.
All duct joints for the eating houses and food stall unless otherwise specified shall be of continuous
external welded constructions and all horizontal welded joints shall be at the upper edge and not the lower
edge except where any two sections of ducts are joined together.
Ducts having width of more than 450mm shall be cross broken or stiffened by approved means.

64.4.3.1

Joints And Seams

Sheet metal ducts shall be properly braced and reinforced. The internal ends of all slip joints shall be
installed in the direction of the flow. All ducts shall be constructed with minimum number of seams.
Ductwork longitudinal joints shall be of an approved air-tight self-locking type. Flat double longitudinal
seams shall be used for ductwork connections.
Rivets shall be spaced at not more than 65mm centres. All duct joints shall be air-tight.
All joints and seams shall be constructed in accordance with approved standard.

64.4.3.2

Flanges
Flanges shall be of rolled structural angles welded at the corners and shall be rivetted to the duct. Spot
welding is not acceptable. The downstream end of the duct shall be bent around the face of the flange.
The upstream end of the duct shall be inserted 50mm into the downstream duct. Flanges shall be jigdrilled or drilled to suit the minimum clearance for bolt. A 5mm rubber gasket shall be installed between
flange joints to prevent air leak.

BLDG04/S64.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 64-3
64.4.3

Construction (Cont'd)

64.4.3.3

Construction Method
The construction method shall be in accordance with the following :
Maximum Size of Duct

Metal Sheet
Gauge

Type of Transverse Joint

Connection

Type of Bracing

Up to 300mm

26 (0.46mm)

S drive, pocket or bar slips

at 2.2m centres

None

301mm to 460mm

24 (0.56mm)

S drive, pocket or bar slips

at 2.2m centres

None

461mm to 760mm

24 (0.56mm)

S Drive, 25mm pocket or

25mm bar slips at 2.2m
centres

761mm to 1070mm

22 (0.71mm)

25mm x 25mm x 4mm

angle iron joints

1071mm to 1400mm

22 (0.71mm)

38mm angle connections

or 38mm Bar Slips with
25mm x 4mm
reinforcement bar at 2.2m
centres

25mm x 25mm x 4mm

angles 1.7m from
joints

1401mm to 1530mm

20 (0.91mm)

33mm angle connections

or 38mm in pockets or
38mm in bar slips at 1m
maximum centres with
35mm x 4mm
reinforcement bar

38mm x 38mm x 4mm

diagonal angles or
38mm x 38mm x 4mm
angles 0.7m from
joints

1531mm to 2150mm

20 (0.91mm)

Ditto

Ditto

Above 2151mm

28 (1.22mm)

Ditto

Ditto

64.5

DAMPERS AND ACCESSORIES

64.5.1

Splitter Dampers

25mm x 25mm x 4mm

angles 1.7m from
joints
Ditto

Splitter dampers shall be installed at branch connections to main ducts. The dampers shall be of
sufficient size to completely close off their respective branch ducts and shall be constructed of galvanised
metal sheet of 1.5mm thick streamlined around a steel shaft of not less than 12mm diameter. The shaft
shall run in brass or nylon bearings fixed to each side of the duct. Each damper shall be fitted with a
quadrant and shall have a locking device to hold the damper in position.
The dampers shaft shall be clearly marked to show the relationship between damper blade and quadrant.
Quadrants and operating handles shall be of die cast aluminium with the words "OPEN" and "CLOSE"
cast on the quadrant.
The whole of the damper assembly shall be rigidly installed to prevent vibration and rattling.
64.5.2

Multi-Blade Dampers
Multi-blade dampers shall be of the opposed blade counter-rotating type. The dampers shall be rigidly
constructed of galvanised metal sheet of not less than 1.5mm thick. The blades shall be mounted in a
separate channel frame and shall be fitted with 12mm steel spindle at each end, carried by sealed
bearing. Bearing shall be accessible for cleaning and lubrication purposes. Each blade shall be linked by
a rigid linkage for operation and control and shall ensure complete closing of all blades in union.

BLDG04/S64.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 64-4
64.6

TURNING VANES
All 90 degree elbow ducts shall be fitted with approved turning vanes. The turning vanes and runners
shall be fabricated of the same sheet metal thickness as those used for the ducts. All turning vanes shall
be spot-welded to the ducts. Rivetting or other methods which require making of holes through the sheet
metal ducts shall not be allowed.

64.7

DUCTWORK TEST HOLES

Test holes shall be provided in the ductwork on the discharge side of each fan, at each floor branch takeoff and each major branch duct handling more than ten percent of the volume of air handled by the fan.
This is to enable pivot tube or velometer readings to be taken.
Screwed and plugged 25mm I.S.O. Metric Thread half-sockets shall be welded to a 50mm x 6mm double
plated fixed to side of the ducts.
This arrangement shall not protect into the air stream and internally insulated ductwork and shall allow
passage for probes.

64.8

FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS

All flexible connections shall be formed from non-combustible, best quality, approved silicone coated glass
fabric suitable for extreme temperature of -50C to 250C type and special care shall be taken to ensure
an air tight seal.
Flexible connections shall be provided on inlet and outlet of duct connections of all fans.
The flexible connections shall have 100mm to 150mm length free of stress and arranged so as to permit
renewal of the fabric without disturbing the ductwork.
Flexible connections shall be of high temperature rated fire retardant type with a minimum thickness of
2mm. Manufacturer's test certificate on the high temperature rating shall be provided.
All ductwork shall be adequately supported adjacent to all flexible connections. Each flexible connector
shall be fastened tautly to matching flanges by adjustable clips/clamp bands.

64.9

DUCT SUPPORTS AND HANGERS

The supports shall be spaced at not more than 2500mm centres. The hangers and supports shall be fixed
to the building structure with "HILTI" HKD flush anchors or other approved fasteners.
Power tool fixing shall only be allowed with the specific approval in writing from the SO Rep. Should the
Contractor fail to comply with this requirement and damage results, all making good shall be at his cost
and expense.
Vertical ducts shall be rigidly supported with structural angles or channels fixed securely to the duct and
building structure in an approved manner.
Horizontal ducts shall be supported with angle iron trapezes, hung with round mild steel rods of not less
than 12mm diameter. The rods shall be threaded at both ends and lock nuts shall be provided to secure
the hangers firmly. The angle iron trapezes shall be of not less than 32mm x 32mm x 3mm for ducts of up
to 700mm width and 38mm x 38mm x 5mm for ducts for 1100mm width upwards. Where non-insulated
ducts sit directly on top of the angle iron trapezes, rubber gaskets of 3mm minimum thickness shall be
provided to prevent direct contact of the metal surfaces.
Where ducts run at floor level, they shall be supported on 50mm x 50mm x 5mm angle iron saddles
securely bolted to the floor. The ducts shall be held in the saddle by 38mm x 3mm steel strips bolted to
the angle supports.

BLDG04/S64.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 64-5
64.10

ACCESS PANELS
The opening shall be large enough to permit cleaning. There shall be one access panel at each change in
direction of the duct or as indicated in the Drawings.
The opening shall be at the sides of the duct. In horizontal sections the lower edge of the opening shall be
not less than 400mm from the bottom of the duct.
Access panels shall be constructed of the same material and thickness as the duct and shall not permit
the passage of grease under any conditions. Access panels shall be hinged with latches for locking.
The opening shall be at least 450mm x 450mm. When the duct is of smaller dimensions than the
opening, the panel shall be the biggest possible.
The contact planes between duct and frame of panel shall be suitably sealed with compressible and noncombustible gasket of minimum 3mm thick to give an air-tight joint.

64.11

CLEANING AND BLOWING OUT OF DUCTWORK

All ducts shall be internally cleaned before starting of fans.
During installation, care shall be taken to prevent ingress of foreign material.
As soon as practicable, the fans shall start to blow out dust which may collect inside the ductwork during
installation.

64.12

DRAIN TAPS
Drain taps shall be provided as indicated in the Drawings and the ducts shall be pitched towards these
drain taps.
The position of drain taps shall be such that it causes minimum inconvenience to people when a duct
cleaning job is in progress.
The drain taps shall be air-tight when the exhaust system is in normal operation.

64.13

BIFURCATED AXIAL-FLOW FAN

Refer to subclause 65.3.4 "Bifurcated Type".

64.14

SILENCER
The Contractor shall provide where indicated in the Drawings cylindrical silencer to attenuate the noise
emanated from the fan.
The casing shall be cylindrical galvanised steel constructed with non-inflammable glass fibre infill with a
non-corroding facing material welded securely in place behind perforated galvanised steel. End rings
incorporating tapped inserts shall be provided for mounting.
The sound absorbent material shall be protected against wet conditions with an impervious covering faced
with perforated stainless steel. This covering shall ensure that the silencer can be steam cleaned.
The silencer shall operate to temperature of at least 80C. The internal diameter of the silencer shall
match that of the fan. Where indicated in the Drawings a centrally mounted absorbent pod in the airway
shall be incorporated for added attenuation. The Contractor shall submit the attenuation data which is
obtained by the test specified in BS 848 Part 2:1980.
Galvanised steel mounting feet and matching flanges corresponding to those supplied for the fan shall be
provided where necessary.
Silencer shall be of the same make as the axial flow fans.

BLDG04/S64.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 64-6
64.15

SPRING HANGERS
Spring hangers shall contain a steel spring and 7mm deflection neoprene element in series. The
neoprene element shall be moulded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box.
Spring diameters and hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree cone before contacting the hole and short
circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated
deflection.

64.16

FAN CONTROL PANEL

The fan control panel shall be located as indicated in the Drawings and be mounted at an appropriate
height.

64.16.1

Construction
The panels shall be fabricated of minimum 2mm steel pressed and rolled to shape having all joints neatly
welded and finished flush. Doors shall be screw lock hinges type with concealed hinges and secured by
approved lock. Doors shall be fitted all around with compression gaskets. The cabinets shall have
adequate ventilation louvre which is vermin proof.

64.16.2

Control Apparatus
The fan control panel shall be provided with the following apparatus, controls and indicating devices for
manual start of all Plant and equipment :

64.16.3

(a)

Circuit breakers for all motors

(b)

Starters for all motors

(c)

Push button stations for manual starting in local mode

(d)

All necessary timers, controls relays and interlocks for starters

(e)

Indicating lights with the following colours :

(i)

Indicating lights for the 3 phase incoming supply shall be RED, YELLOW, BLUE colour
respectively;

(ii)

Indicating lights for all motors when they are running shall be GREEN colour, stop shall be
RED and trip shall be AMBER/YELLOW.

(f)

All internal interconnecting wiring for starters and other Plant and equipment within the control
panel.

(g)

Engraved "Traffolyte" labels for the control panel, all push buttons, selector switches instruments,
indicating lights, etc on the surface of the control panel system.

Layout Of Motor Control Centres

The Contractor shall submit drawings (IN TRIPLICATE) which displays the layout of the instrument, push
buttons indicating lights on the panel, together with the schematic electrical circuit drawings to the SO Rep
for approval.

64.16.4

Fuses
All fuses shall be HRC fuses of Cartridge type.

BLDG04/S64.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 64-7
64.16.5

Motor Starters
The Contractor shall install the type of starter which is specified in the Drawings. Unless otherwise
approved by the SO Rep, all motors which have rating of 2.2kW or more shall be installed with reduced
voltage starters. However, the Contractor shall verify the suitable starter type based on the mechanical
and electrical characteristics of the load and motor with the consent of the SO Rep should there be any
deviation from the Specifications.

64.16.5.1

Direct-On-Line Starters
Direct-on-line starter shall be equipped with adjustable and ambient compensated (-5C to 50C) triple
pole thermal overload protections with manual reset, local start/stop push buttons, contactors, etc.

64.16.5.2

Star-Delta Starter
Star-Delta starters shall be close transition type with star and delta contactors mechanically and
electrically interlocked to prevent simultaneous operation, one adjustable and ambient compensated (5C to 50C) triple pole thermal overload relay and one adjustable and calibrated solid state timer with
at least 0 to 30 seconds period to control the star-delta operation. The resistor banks shall be wire
welded porcelain core of sufficient thermal rating. Resistance values shall be chosen to suit the
mechanical and electrical characteristic of the driven loads. It shall allow 3 consecutive starts followed
by 15 minutes rest.

64.16.6

Contactors
Contactors used in the starters shall be of the heavy duty type with silver or silver alloy contacts. The
contacts shall be non-sticky when de-energised and be free from undue noisy operation.
Contactors shall comply with BS 5424 and IEC 158-1, of duty AC3 double break and chatter free type.
Contactors shall be manufactured and tested to on-load factor 60% with mechanical life of over ten
million operations at 3600 operations per hour.
Contactors shall satisfactorily close at a minimum of 80% nominal voltage and thereafter remain closed
satisfactorily with a minimum of 65% nominal voltage.

64.16.7

Protective Relays
All relays shall be of approved manufacture and type tested at factory and generally conform to
BS 145/66 "Electrical Protective Relays".

64.16.8

Thermal Overload Relays

Thermal overload relay for three phase motors shall be three pole manual reset type with inherent
temperature compensation (-5C to 50C) and be easily adjustable within the range of 10% of nominal
setting.
Thermal overload relay for single phase motor shall consist of a bi-metallic trip mechanism.

64.16.9

Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary relays shall be suitable for AC operation and shall have silver contacts with an inherent selfcleaning action. It shall close satisfactorily at 80% nominal voltage and hold satisfactorily at 65%
nominal voltage. They shall be of the plug-in type. Fixed relays are acceptable if they are a design
feature approved by the SO Rep. They shall have a minimum rating of 5 Amps inductive load for its
contacts. There shall be at least one spare contact for each auxiliary relay.

64.16.10

Time Delay Relays

Time delay relays shall be of the electronic plug-in type. It shall have selectable time ranges of 0 to 10
seconds; 0 to 60 seconds and whatever other ranges that are required for the satisfactory operation of
the control system. The contacts shall have a minimum rating of 5 Amps inductive and be energized
satisfactorily at 80% nominal voltage and hold satisfactorily at 65% nominal voltage.

BLDG04/S64.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 64-8
64.16.11

Transformer
Transformer necessary for stepping down the voltage to 24V for controls and indicating lights, shall be
provided by the Contractor. It shall be protected by a suitable current breaker. The Plant and
equipment shall be of sufficient capacity and shall be suitable for continuous operation.

64.16.12

Earthing Of Switchboard
The switchboard metal casing shall be effectively bonded to the earth bar. Contact surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned before fitting the earth connection. Cable terminations shall be made with tinned
copper or approved rustless cable lugs.

64.16.13

Push Buttons
Push buttons shall be of the oil tight pattern heavy duty unless otherwise specified and rated at a
minimum of 5 Amps inductive. Push buttons shall consist of an actuating button assembly coupled to
an interchangeable contact assembly of sufficient poles to suit the application.
Colour codes shall be :
"Start" or "On"
"Stop" or "Off"
"Reset"

:
:
:

Green
Red
Black

Push button bezels shall preferably be black.

64.16.14

Indicator Lamps
Indicator lamps shall be 24V rating. Each lamp shall be clearly labelled to indicate the designation of
service, circuit and locations.
Indicating lamps shall be of the domed glass or plastic lens type with lamps rated at 6 watts. The
indication shall be clearly visible from either the sides or front.
Indicating lamps shall preferably have black bezels.
The bodies of indicator lamps shall be ventilated to ensure efficient heat dissipation. Connection to
lamps shall be by screws or clamp terminals; soldered terminations are unacceptable.

64.16.15

Internal Wiring
The control panel shall be completely internally wired, including all wirings between individual units and
between units and terminal strips located in a convenient and easily accessible positions.
All terminals on the strips shall be numbered and these numbers shall correspond with the numbers on
the wiring and field connections diagrams permanently secured on the inside of the enclosure door.
Wiring shall be multi-strand of adequate section but in no case less than 1.0 sq. mm copper conductors,
PVC insulated, colour coded and numbered for identification. Identification shall be by means of
moulded ferrules or sleeves at both ends of the cables. The ferrules or sleeves shall be of insulating
materials with white glossy finish and black lettering. The ferrules or sleeves shall be unaffected by oil
or dampness. The numbering scheme shall be approved by the SO Rep. No PVC tapes shall be used
for colour coding of cables.
Each wire shall be separately terminated with suitable tinned (but not soldered) crimped lugs of
approved type. Conductor terminations need not be provided where insertion or tunnel type terminals
are employed. Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, only one wire shall be connected to each
terminal of insertion or tunnel type block. Terminals shall be identified using an approved marking and
numbering system.
All control circuit wirings shall be run separately from power circuit wiring and adequately protected by
MCB units or fuses.

BLDG04/S64.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 64-9
64.16.16

Labelling
Each control panels shall be fitted with a main label mounted in a prominent position.
Labels shall be easily replaceable and shall be secured with brass screws or rust proofed steel screws
or in other approved manners.
Unless otherwise specified, all labels shall be white lettering engraved on black traffolyte. The size of
lettering and the wording of the labels shall be approved by the SO Rep. Schedules shall be submitted
to the SO Rep prior to manufacture.
Labels shall designate circuit number and Plant and equipment function.
Terminal strips shall be labelled to identify the circuit number, phase connection, terminal number and
function, eg. control, indication, protection, etc.
Control relays, timers, fuses and other items of switchgear located inside and on the door of panels
shall be clearly labelled to identify circuit number, function and rating.

64.17

PAINTING (GENERAL)
Unless otherwise specified or indicated in the Drawings, all exposed metal surfaces of ductwork, Plant
and equipment, grilles, etc shall be cleaned, prime coated and painted regardless of their locations.
All painting shall be carried out in a neat, thorough and workmanlike manner by experienced tradesmen.

64.17.1

Preparation Of Surface
All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly wire brushed to remove loose rust, scale and dirt and shall be
free from grease and oil stains, etc. An approved solvent shall be used to remove grease, oil stains, etc
if found necessary. The Contractor shall take measures to ensure that original galvanised or rust-proof
coat shall not be damaged during surface cleaning. All steel structure after fabrication, shall be
thoroughly wire brushed at the welds and other exposed surfaces shall be immediately treated with a
coat of primer.

64.17.2

Application Of Paint
The first coat of paint shall be applied immediately after cleaning and the interval between subsequent
coats shall not be less than the paint manufacturer's recommendation.
Before despatch from the manufacturer's factory, the whole of the metal work of the fan control panels
shall receive painting and finishing with materials of approved make, composition and colour. All coats
shall be stove baked to paint manufacturer's requirements.
The application for various types of steel surfaces shall be as specified in the table below :
No. of Coats of
Etching
Primer

Lead And
Chromate Free
Primer

Gloss
Enamel
Paint

Exposed Galvanised Sheet Metal Ductwork

Exposed Non-Galvanised Steel Surfaces of

Ductwork Construction

Plant and Equipment Surfaces Factory Spray

Painted but with Damaged Paintwork

Fan Support

Type of Surface to be painted

64.17.3

Colour Scheme
All Plant and equipment, ductwork, accessories and components shall be painted to colour approved by
the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S64.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 64-10
64.18
64.18.1

TESTING AND BALANCE

General
The Contractor shall perform all tests and balancing necessary to ensure that the system installed
conform to the Specifications and that such tests are adequate to demonstrate that Plant and equipment
will comply with the requirements of the Specifications.
All necessary testing and measuring Plant and equipment shall be supplied by the Contractor.
All testing and balancing shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

64.18.2

Air Quantity Balancing

All exhaust and supply air outlets shall be correctly adjusted to give the final design air volumes unless
otherwise directed.
All fixed dampers shall be set and the final position shown with a painted arrow, and saw cut.

64.18.3

Test Log Sheets

The Contractor shall submit full detailed test log sheets for inspection and approval by the SO Rep.
The test log sheet shall present a clear and precise record of all tests carried out during the
commissioning of the Works.
It shall include, but not be limited to where applicable, the following data :
Fan type, speed, static pressure reading, running current, sound levels and fan curve shall be included to
indicate the running condition.
All other items of Plant and equipment shall be recorded and tested so that a true indication is given for
the Plant and equipment performance.

64.18.4

Performance Test
A performance test shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of the SO Rep, to show that the
system installed fulfills all requirements of the Specifications.

64.19

MAINTENANCE PERIOD

64.19.1

Attendance To Complaints
During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall attend to any complaint calls promptly at no cost
and expense to the Employer.
After the attendance of complaint calls and completion of repair Works, two copies of the fault reports or
service chit duly signed by the Contractor shall be forwarded to the SO Rep for information and record.

64.19.2

Replacement Of Defective Parts

The Contractor shall replace all defective or damaged parts of the Plant and equipment and system with
NEW ones during the Defects Liability Period at no additional cost and expense to the Employer. This
subclause shall override any standard warranty condition of the Contractor or his supplier of Plant and
equipment. Any additional cost and expense incurred in complying with this requirement shall be deemed
to be included in the Contract Sum.

BLDG04/S64.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 64-11
64.19.3

Stock Of Spares
The Contractor shall keep adequate stock of spare parts for the installation and system to ensure that the
system down-time in the event of breakdown will be minimized.

64.19.4

Contractor's Obligation
The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused to the installation or the Employer's property
during servicings or attendance to complaints through the act of negligence of his workmen except where
it can be proven that it is no fault of theirs. All damages shall be made good at Contractor's own expense.

64.19.5

Final Inspection
One month prior to the expiry of Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with the SO Rep for
a joint inspection on the Plant and equipment and system to note all the outstanding Defect. These Defect
shall be rectified within one month after the expiry of the Defects Liability Period.

64.20

SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE (MECHANICAL VENTILATION SYSTEM)

The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance and
emergency repair to the Ventilation System as specified hereunder for a period of one year commencing
from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by
the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this
clause including all sub-clauses under it).

64.20.1

General
The works covered by this Clause and sub-clauses are for the supply of all Plant, Construction Equipment,
materials, appliances, labour and necessary incidentals for the service and maintenance of the
mechanical ventilation system during the Maintenance Period.

64.20.2

Workmanship And Supervision

The Contractor shall have a foreman in charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be carried
out under this Clause including all sub-clauses under it. This foreman shall be thoroughly competent in
supervising the service, maintenance and repair and shall be in the direct employment of the Contractor.

64.20.3

Scope Of Work
All machinery, Plant and equipment comprising the complete systems and ancillary equipment provided
under Section 64 "Ventilation System" including all clauses and subclauses under it shall be serviced and
maintained strictly in accordance with the Servicing and Maintenance Schedule as specified hereunder.
The Contractor shall advise the SO Rep on any Defect in any part of the complete Plant and Ancillary
Equipment observed during the routine inspection and service, and shall repair such Defect if required to
do so by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall also provide emergency repair services during normal working hours and also during
overtime hours.
A log book shall be kept at each separate building block included in the Works, in which details of all
alarms (genuine, practice test or false), faults, service tests and routine attention given shall be carefully
recorded. The exact location within each building block where the log book is to be kept shall be subject
to the approval of the SO Rep.

BLDG04/S64.DOC(11)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 64-12
64.20.4

Servicing And Maintenance Schedule

64.20.4.1

Quarterly Tests
For quarterly tests, inspection and service, the Contractor shall inspect and service the complete Plant
and ancillary equipment provided under Section 64 "Ventilation System" including all clauses and
subclauses under it once every three months after the certified Substantial Completion of the Works
except where otherwise directed by the SO Rep.
At each such quarterly inspection and service of the complete Plant and Ancillary Equipment, the
minimum items of work detailed below shall be performed by the Contractor. Any special maintenance
requirements on Plant and equipment not covered by the following list but recommended by the
manufacturers or directed by the SO Rep shall also be included :
(i)

Inspect all electric motors, and

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

(ii)

Inspect and check the routine operation of all electrical starters, electrical control gears and
ancillary electrical apparatus, and
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

(iii)

Check all motor bearings, and lubricate with grease as necessary.

Check carbon brushes and clip rings, if any, of all motors and clean as necessary,
Renew carbon brushes as necessary.
Check safety devices fitted to all motors, and clean, adjust and lubricate as
necessary.
Check and record motor speed running current and operating voltage.
Check motor load characteristics to ensure normal operation.

Clean, adjust and lubricate all bearings, pivots and other moving parts as necessary.
Clean or renew electric contactors as necessary.
Renew electric fuses as necessary.
Clean and adjust overload elements and oil dashpot controls.

Inspect and check the routine operation of all automatic controls, gears and relays and :
(a)
(b)
(c)

Clean, adjust and lubricate all bearings, pivots and other moving parts as necessary.
Clean or renew electric contactors as necessary.
Renew electric fuses as necessary.

(iv)

Check and adjust all limit switches, time switches, sequence controllers.

(v)

Inspect and clean damper linkages and adjust when necessary.

(vi)

Inspect keyways, keys and belts on all pulley drives and check alignment.

(vii)

Ensure that faulty parts are replaced and the replacement has been carried out satisfactorily.
Note in the log book any circuits that are subject to repair, alteration or extension.

(viii)

Check that all switches are returned to their normal operating position.

(ix)

Inspect and clean fan housing and fan motor. The fan shall be examined to ensure that there is
no build-up of dirt or other matter that would cause overheating of the motor or obstruct the
impeller track.

(x)

Inspect ductwork system. Investigate and rectify any leakage and abnormal vibrations. Tighten
any loose hangers, supports and brackets.

(xi)

Check vibration isolators for correct action and setting.

(xii)

Check for correct volume flow rate through any outlets/inlets.

(xiii)

Check for presence of any excessive abnormal noise and vibration. Investigate and report on
causes and initiate remedial measures.

(xiv)

Inspect and check correct setting and function of volume control dampers, fire dampers, splitter
dampers, etc.

(xv)

Clean all grease filters and replace if necessary. The cost of the new grease filters shall be
borne by the owner.

BLDG04/S64.DOC(12)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 64-13
64.20.4

Servicing And Maintenance Schedule (Cont'd)

64.20.4.1

Quarterly Tests (Cont'd)

(xvi)

Clean all oil traps after removing all the trapped oil.

(xvii) Clean all ducts, exhaust hoods, silencers and exhaust air fans.
(xviii) Submit service and maintenance report to the Employer. The report shall be written in a format
approved by the Owner and shall include but not limited to the following information.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
64.20.4.2

Performance data of all Plant and equipment such as fans, etc. The scope and extent of
performance data shall be approved by the owner but generally shall include physical
measurements such as air pressures, flow rate, speed, running current and voltage etc.
All gauge and meter readings.
Any Defect observed, their causes and remedial action taken.
Any adjustments, regulations and repairs carried out.
All work carried out in accordance with the Schedule.

Annual Service And Maintenance

For annual servicing and maintenance, in addition to carrying out the regular monthly/quarterly
inspection, and service as specified in the foregoing requirements, the Contractor shall also perform the
annual servicing and maintenance as specified hereunder:

64.20.5

(i)

All the monthly/quarterly inspection and testing procedures specified above.

(ii)

Tests shall be carried out to ensure that the insulation resistance to earth and between
conductors of cables and wires is satisfactory and that the resistance of associate earthcontinuity circuits is not excessive.

(iii)

Meggar test the motor winding to check the insulation resistance between phase to phase and
phase to earth.

Consumable Materials
The Contractor shall provide the following consumable materials as and when required :
(i)

All oils and grease required for lubrication of motor bearings, pivots and other moving parts.

(ii)

All carbon brushes required to replace worn brushes in electric motors.

(iii)

All electric contact points required to replace those points in switch gear, motor starter gears,
electric control gears and electric relays.

(iv)

All indicating lamps required to replace blown lamps.

(v)

All cotton washer, soap detergent and other cleaning materials required for cleaning purposes.

The costs of these consumable materials shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.

Total pages for this Section :

13

Section 65/.....

BLDG04/S64.DOC(13)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 65-1
SECTION 65
FANS FOR GENERAL VENTILATION

65.1

GENERAL
Values of the resistance to air flow of items of Plant and equipment, ductwork and/or the total distribution
system indicated in the contract documents are approximate. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to verify these values based on the Plant and equipment offered and provide fans capable of
delivering the required air volume when operating against the actual total system resistance. Any required
modification to the system (fan, motor, switch gear, cables etc) necessary to meet the required duties and
space conditions shall be entirely at the Contractor's expense, except where modification is brought about
by written instruction by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall submit fan static pressure calculation for
approval.
All fans shall be type tested to the latest British or International Standard. Fan manufacturer shall furnish
published curves showing performance that will be achieved when tested to ISO 5801:Part 1, BS 848:Part
1 and equivalent to AMCA standard 210, and sound power level data that will be achieved when tested to
BS 848:Part 2 and equivalent to AMCA standard 300-858 Part1.
Fans shall be selected at maximum efficiency from the available range of fans. Motor shall be at least
20% higher than the fan brake power absorbed at design conditions.
The high temperature fans must have successfully completed an extensive program of high temperature
tests in accordance with BS7346 Part2 and independently witnessed by authorities such as LPCB(UK),
CITCM(France) or TU(Germany).
Fans installed in the Civil Defence stations shall also comply with the CD requirements specified in the
"Civil Defence Requirements" section of the Technical Specification. Equipments which are required to be
operated during CD operation shall remain fully functional after being subjected to the shock loads
specified in the "Civil Defence Requirements" section of the Technical Specification.
Motors used for basement carpark exhaust fans, smoke stop lobbies, smoke control and any other high
temperature application from FSSD requirement shall be of Class 'H' insulation with minimum 250C.
temperature rating for at least 2 hours.
Motors used for ventilation fans of battery charging room town and LPG gas and areas with corrosive gas
shall be explosion proof and corrosion resistance.

65.1.1

Construction
All fans should be constructed to a fully developed design and shall be capable of withstanding the
pressures and stresses developed during continuous operation at the selected duty. The fan shall be
provided with protective casing/guard to belts, pulleys, chains, gears couplings, projecting set screws,
keys and other rotary parts for safety of personnel. Additionally, all belt driven fans shall be capable of
running continuously at ten per cent in excess of the selected duty speed.
Each fan shall be provided with factory fabricated hot-dip galvanised support baseframe or mounting feet
to facilitate site installation. Name plates shall be of metal sheet and securely attached on each fan and
show manufacturer's name, serial and model number, date of manufacture and country of manufacture.
Unless otherwise stated, motor requirements are stipulated in clause 65.8 "Motors" including all
subclauses under it.

65.1.2

Installation
Fans shall be installed using bolts, nuts and washers with all "as cast" bearing surfaces for bolt heads and
washers counterfaced. Holding-down bolts for fans and motors shall be provided with means to prevent
the bolts turning when the nuts are tightened. Anti-vibration mountings shall be in accordance with Clause
64.5 "Dampers And Accessories" including all subclauses under it. Fans heavier than 20 kg shall be
provided with eyebolts or other purpose made lifting facilities.

BLDG04/S65.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 65-2
65.1.3

Inlet Guide Vane

Where indicated, fans shall be fitted with variable inlet vanes which shall be matched to the fan
performance to give stable control. Vanes shall be closely interlocked to ensure movement in unison and
operation shall be manual or automatic as indicated. Where manual control is indicated the operating
device shall facilitate positive locking in at least five different positions. Vane blades shall not vibrate or
flutter throughout their movement and the construction of the linkage system shall minimise friction and
lost motion.

65.1.4

Impellers
The shaft and impeller assembly of all centrifugal, axial flow and mixed flow fans shall be statically and
dynamically balanced. All propeller fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced where the impeller
diameter is 750mm or greater. Where indicated, limits of vibration severity shall be in accordance with BS
4675 Part 1.

65.1.5

Bearings
Fan bearings shall be of a type suitable for the installed attitude of the fan. They shall be grease/oil ball
and/or roller type or alternatively oil lubricated sleeve type. All bearing housings shall be precision located
in position and arranged so that bearings may be replaced without the need for realignment. Bearing
housings shall be protected against the ingress of dust and, where fitted with greasing points, they shall
be designed to prevent damage from over-greasing. For grease lubricated systems the bearings shall be
provided with grease in amount and quality recommended by the bearing manufacturer. For oil lubricated
systems, the housings shall be provided with an adequate reservoir of oil and shall include an accessible
drain plug. All bearings lubricators shall be located to facilitate maintenance.

65.1.6

Flexible Connectors
Flexible connectors used for duct connections to fan unit shall have temperature rating same as that of the
associated fan unit and ductwork system. Approved oil and high temperature resistance and flame
retardant flexible connectors shall be employed for kitchen exhaust fan.

65.1.7

Quality Assurance
Furnish fans that are the product of a manufacturer who has proven experience of manufacturing fans of
similar types and duties for a period of at least ten years. The manufacturer must be a company
committed to Quality Assurance and are registered to BS EN ISO 9001.94.
Reference Codes and Standard :
- ISO 5801 Method for Testing air performance.
- BS 848 Part 1 Method for Testing air performance.
- AMCA standard 210 Method for testing air performance.
- BS 848 Part2 Method of noise testing.
- AMCA standard 300 Method of noise testing.
- Fans must comply with EMC regulations.
Fans and all parts thereof shall be capable of satisfactorily withstanding the effect of all stress and loads
under starting, operating and, where applicable, reversing conditions, for the installations as shown on the
Specification and/or Drawings. These capabilities shall be verified by submission of design calculations
and basis of design for all components and the complete fan assembly to the SO Rep for clearance. Whirl
tests shall be performed for all axial fans with design air delivery of l0 cubic metre per second or above for
a minimum of 15 minutes duration at 125% of maximum rated fan speed. Manufacturer shall certify and
submit the test record to the SO Rep.
Type tests shall be carried out in the manufacturer's factory for each fan type and size. Tests shall verify
fan performance such as RPM, volume flow rate, total air pressure, noise level, motor current and shall be
conducted at the design conditions stated on the Schedules except that air temperature entering fan shall
be corrected to 20C or the specified operating temperature. Manufacturer shall certified and submit the
test record.

BLDG04/S65.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 65-3
65.1.8

Submittals
Submit certified technical data and performance ratings including but not limited to the following :
(a)

Complete catalogue and material specification.

(b)

Certified performance curves for each fan Shall be plotted over the entire range from shut-off to
free delivery as static pressure, in Pa. total efficiency in percentages, and operating kW against air
flow in m3/h. Curves shall rise continuously with decreasing air flow between free delivery and 15
percent above maximum specified pressure in accordance with fan schedules.

(c)

Plotted curves or tables of the Octave band sound power level at static pressure corresponding to
specified capacity with decibels (dB re 10-12 watt) as ordinate versus octave-band center
frequency from 63 Hz to 8000 Hz as abscissa.

(d)

Certificates confirming that the fans are rated and tested in accordance with relevant standards
from BSI, AMCA or approved internationally recognised institution.

(e)

Certificates confirming that all smoke extraction fans, carpark exhaust air fans, smoke free lobby
exhaust fans, and fume extraction fans meet the high temperature requirement. Such as
certificates from LPCB(prEN12101-3 Part 3:1997 - Testing specification for powered smoke and
heat exhaust ventilation) must be submitted.

(f)

Factory type test reports for all fans. Reports shall be less than 5 years.

(g)

Submit manufacturer's quality assurance/quality control program for the entire manufacturing
process, site installation, and testing/commissioning

(h)

Manufacturing shop drawings including wiring diagram and support details.

(i)

Submit 1-50 scale shop drawing of fan installation within fan room complete with ductwork,
vibration isolators, electrical work etc indicating clearance for maintenance purpose.

(j)

Comprehensive method statement for installation of the fan units.

(k)

Submit copies of installation, operation and maintenance manuals.

(l)

Submit Radiography inspection record of the fan blades.

65.2

CENTRIFUGAL FANS

65.2.1

Fan Type
Centrifugal fans for high-velocity high-pressure systems shall be backward bladed type.

65.2.2

Efficiency
Unless otherwise indicated, centrifugal fans consuming more than 7.5kW at the fan shaft shall be of the
backward bladed type having a fan total efficiency not less than 75%.

65.2.3

Fan Casings
Fan casings shall be constructed to permit withdrawal of the fan impeller after fan installation. Fans other
than those in air handling units shall be provided with flanged outlet connections and spigoted inlet
connections unless otherwise indicated, except that for negative pressures greater than 500 Pa, inlet
connections shall be flanged. A plugged drain point shall be fitted at the lowest point in the fan casings.
Permanent indication shall be provided to show the correct direction of rotation of the fan impeller. Fan
casings shall be provided with removable access panels which shall incorporate purpose made air seals.
The sizes of access panels shall be such as to facilitate cleaning and maintenance of the impeller.

65.2.4

Material
Impellers shall be of mild steel or aluminium alloy of riveted, welded or other approved construction, with
spiders or hubs of robust design.

BLDG04/S65.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 65-4
65.3

AXIAL FLOW FANS

Axial flow aerofoil fan shall be either single or multi-stage to suit the performance duty specified. Two
stage fans shall have contra-rotating impellers and each impeller shall be driven by separate motor. The
axial fan shall be pad mounted type.
Fan shall be supplied complete with mounting feet and vibration isolator. The fans offered are to meet ISO
2372 vibration standard for class 2 quality grade C machines. The impellers shall be balanced to G6.3 or
better as defined in ISO 1940/1 (6.3mm/s peak to peak or 4.5 mm/s rms).

65.3.1

Fan Casings
Axial flow fan casings shall be rigidly constructed of mould steel or aluminium alloy, stiffened and braced
where necessary to obviate drumming and vibration. Mounting feet shall be provided where necessary for
bolting to a base or to supports. Inlet and outlet ducts shall terminate in flanges to facilitate removal. For
in-duct mounting fans the length of the fan casing shall be greater than the combined length of the
impeller(s) and motor(s) and electrical connections to the motors shall be through an external terminal box
secured to the casing.
The fan casing and mounting assemblies shall be manufactured from mild steel to BS 1449 Part 1 Grade
HR14 with integral rolled flanges. They should have minimum thickness of 2.5mm for fan diameters up to
560mm, 3mm to 5mm thickness for fan diameter 630mm and above.

65.3.2

Impellers
Impellers shall be of steel or aluminium and the blades shall be secured to the hub or the blades and the
hub shall be formed in one piece. The hub shall be keyed to the shaft. Blades shall be aerofoil section or
laminar and capable of pitch adjustment. The pitch angle selected shall be less than 24 degrees.
Each cast aluminium impeller is X-rayed using Real Time Radiography inspection prior to assembly. The
impeller shall be secured to the drive shaft by a key and key way. Axial location shall be provided by a
collar or shoulder on the drive shaft together with a retaining washer and screw fitted into a tapped hole in
the end of the shaft. The screw shall be locked in position.

65.3.3

Drive
Where axial flow fans are driven by motors external to the casings of the fans the requirements for drives
and guards shall be met. Unless otherwise indicated, a guard is not required for any part of a drive which
is inside the fan casing. An access panel with purpose made air seal shall be provided in the fan casing;
the access panel shall be sized to facilitate maintenance.
Terminal boxes welded to the casing shall be provided for electrical connection to fan motor complying
with BS 4999 Part 20 for dust and weatherproof conditions.

65.3.4

Bifurcated Type
The fan shall give the specified air flow at the design static pressure and tested to BS 848 Part 1.
The Contractor shall submit performance curves for the fans. The performance curves shall show the
duty point and include data about static pressure, efficiency, power consumption and noise versus air
volume at different pitch angle. The noise data shall be based on tests carried out in accordance with BS
848:Part 2.
The fan shall be of the bifurcated axial flow design, capable of withstanding air temperature of at least
320C continuously. The aerofoil shaped impellers shall be directly coupled to a purpose design motor,
the latter being enclosed in a protection tunnel to isolate it from the oil and particle laden air. The tunnel
shall be kept ventilated by ambient air drawn in by an auxiliary fan mounted on a shaft extension at the tail
end of the motor. The external terminal box and fan casing shall be made of hot dipped galvanised steel.
The motor shall be directly coupled to the hub and placed at the discharge side of the fan. The blades
shall be securely mounted onto the hub and the pitch angle shall be adjustable at the Site.

BLDG04/S65.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 65-5
65.3.4

Bifurcated Type (Contd)

The impellers shall be die-cast in aluminium alloy and give a non-overloading characteristics and have an
adjustable pitch. All the casings are manufactured in hot-dipped galvanised.
The motor shall be totally enclosed, squirrel cage induction design and rated for continuous operation in
ambient temperature of 40C. The motor shall be fitted with ball bearings of generous size to permit
mounting of the fan in any position through 360 degrees. Insulation shall be to Class F specification of
BS 2757. Performance and rating shall conform to BS 5000 and IEC 34-1, with protection to IEC 34-5
Group IP 54. Reduced voltage starter shall be provided for motors which has rated kW of 2.2kW or more.
The motor shall be pad mounted to the fan casing. Foot-mounted fan motor shall not be acceptable.
The fan shall be able to withstand severe moisture-laden conditions. The fan shall be suitable for cleaning
by steam jet.
High temperature rated flexible connectors shall be provided both at the inlet and outlet of the fan. The
Contractor shall observe closely all the manufacturer's instructions for the installation of the fan and
frequency/type of lubricant to be used.

65.4

PROPELLER FANS

65.4.1

Impeller
Propeller fans shall be ring mounted or diaphragm mounted as indicated. Impellers shall be of steel or
aluminium and the blades shall be secured to the hub or the blades and hub shall be formed in one piece.
The impeller shall be designed to give maximum volume with minimum noise level and minimum power
consumption and made of Aluminised Clad Steel. The fan shall be completed with anti-vibration mounting
plate and motor side guard.
The motor should be airstream rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures up to 50C and
insulation material to Class F specification.
Wire guards made of heavy gauge steel wire or rod with all joints and crossings welded and hot-dip
galvanised after manufacture shall be fitted to impeller side or motor side or both where appropriate.
Where a fan is directly mounted to an external wall. a louvre shutter shall be furnished.

65.5

IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL AND MIXED FLOW FANS

Mixed flow fan casings shall be rigidly constructed of mild steel, or aluminium alloy stiffened and braced
where necessary to obviate drumming and vibration. Mounting feet shall be provided where necessary for
bolting to a base or supports. Inlet and outlet shall terminate in flanges to facilitate removal. Stator vanes
shall be of mild steel or aluminium alloy. The unit shall be designed to facilitate access to the impeller.
Drives and guards shall be provided in accordance with Section 64 "Ventilation System" including all
clauses and subclauses under it where motors are mounted external to casings. An access panel with a
purpose made air seal shall be provided in the fan casing. The access panel shall be sized to facilitate
maintenance.
In-Line duct fans shall be of direct driven type and have non-overloading characteristics.
Motors shall be totally enclosed with squirrel cage induction type with Class F insulation and shall be rated
for continuous operation in ambient temperature of 50C and in humid air conditions up to 100% relative
humidity.

BLDG04/S65.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 65-6
65.6

ROOF EXTRACT UNIT

65.6.1

Weather Cap And Base

The weather cap and base shall be moulded ultra violet stabilised glass reinforced polyester resin,
rendered fire retardant to BS 476:Part 7. Colourant shall conform to BS 4800-08B-21. The unit shall be
load tested to ensure a generous structural factor of safety enabling the unit to withstand all normally
encountered weather conditions. The caps shall be secured to the mounting frame by stainless steel
screws. It shall be arranged in side discharge.

65.6.2

Anti-Backdraught Shutters
The unit shall be equipped with anti-backdraught shutters all around the discharge area. Shutters shall be
aluminium opened by air movement and closed by gravity. Synthetic rubber buffers shall be provided to
ensure quiet operation.

65.6.3

Impeller

65.6.3.1

Impeller Type
The impeller shall be based on propeller type design. The fan blades shall be made of pressed sheet
steel not more than four numbers. The blades and the hub shall be one continuous steel structure without
any screw, rivet and other mechanical bonding. The whole impeller shall be finished with stoved epoxy
powder paint. The impeller shall be mounted on to the motor shaft in a direct drive manner. All screws
shall have anti-loosen device on moving parts.

65.6.3.2

Centrifugal Type
The impeller shall be based on backward curved centrifugal design. The impeller shall be mounted onto
the motor shaft in a direct drive manner. All screws shall have anti-loosen device on moving parts.

65.6.3.3

Mountings
Fan support arms shall be made of mild steel finished with stoved epoxy powder paint and resiliently
mounted to the base.

65.6.3.4

Mounting Position
The unit shall be designed to operate efficiently when mounted horizontally or on a pitch roof up to an
angle of 30 degrees from a horizontal plane.

65.6.4

Motor

65.6.4.1

Totally Enclosed Motor

The motor shall be squirrel cage induction type for direct on line starting. The motor shall be pad mounted
with an isolator fixed in the cowl conforming to IP54 protection. The motor shall have minimum Class F
insulation. The motor shall be single phase capacitor start and run.
Motors shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperature of 50C and in humid air conditions
up to 100% relative humidity.

65.6.4.2

Flameproof Motor
Flameproof motor shall be certified to zone 2 hazard where flammable gas is likely to be present only in
abnormal conditions. All petrol storage shall be installed with flameproof motor complying with BS 4683.
The motor shall be Class F Insulation with tapped hole for cable entry.

BLDG04/S65.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 65-7
65.7

WALL/WINDOW FANS

65.7.1

Construction
The impellers, shutters, fans ducts and outer grilles shall be moulded plastic. The outer grilles shall be
projected more than 35mm from external surface. It shall have a solenoid operated backdraught shutter
controlled by the ON/OFF switch.

65.7.2

Motor

65.7.2.1

Totally Enclosed Motor

The motor shall be squirrel cage induction type for direct on line starting. It shall be capacitor start and
run for fan diameter 230mm or above.

65.7.2.2

Flame Proof Motor

Flame proof motor shall be certified to zone 2 hazard where flammable gas is likely to be present only in
abnormal conditions. All petrol storage shall be installed with flameproof motor complying with Ex.d
requirement, BS 4683. It shall have tapped hole for cable entry.

65.8

MOTORS

65.8.1

General
All motors larger than 0.75kW (1 hp) output shall be three phases and designed for operation on
415 volts/3 phases/50 Hz AC supply.
All motors shall comply with the current regulations of the Electricity Department PUB and CP 5. The
motor power factor shall be more than 0.85.
The following types of motor shall be used for different range of power input :
Power Input

Type of Motor

Up to 30 kW

Squirrel cage induction type design for:

(i) Direct-on-line starting
(ii) Reduce voltage starting

Above 30 kW

Wound rotor slip-ring induction type

designed for Rotor Resistance starting

Motors shall be continuously rated to BS 5000 Pt 99 and IEC 34-1 and windings of motors shall have
Class F insulation conforming to BS 2757 and IEC Publication No. 85 and shall be specially suitable for
the high humidity experienced in Singapore. Hydroscopic materials shall not be used either as insulating
material or as winding supports. Varnishes shall be inorganic and suitable for tropical service.
Electric motors shall be adequately rated to drive the fans under all normal conditions without overloading.
Motor speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm. Terminal boxes shall be totally enclosed of water-tight design
and fitted with cable glands.
65.8.2

Motor Enclosure
Except for motors employed in driving fans, all motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type with IP 54
protection according to IEC 34-5.

BLDG04/S65.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 65-8
65.8.3

Motor Bearings
Motors up to 5kW shall have ball bearings. Motors of 5kW and above shall have roller bearings at the
driving end and deep groove ball bearings at the non-driving end.
Thrust bearings shall be incorporated where end thrusts are encountered. Bearings shall be of medium
duty rating provided with a readily accessible grease nipple and a visible grease relief valve to show when
grease charge has been changed and allow greasing without overheating while motor is operating and to
prevent over-greasing.

65.8.4

Motor Starters
Motor starter shall be provided on each phase with combined thermal overload devices with adjustable
time lags. Under-voltage protection shall not be incorporated in the motor starter.
All motor starters shall comply with the current regulations of Electricity Department, PUB.
Motor starters shall comprise the followings :
(a)

Contactors rated in accordance with BS 775 as under :

(i)
(ii)
(iii)

(b)

Class II mechanical duty

Class UR current rating
Category A4 making and breaking

Thermal type adjustable overload relays with adjustable time lags, one in each phase line.

Starters shall be of the electro-magnetically operated type complying with BS 587 and BS 4941 and be
rated for frequent intermittent duty.
Star-Delta or auto transformer starter shall be provided for motor with a rating of 2.2kW or more.
Star-Delta starters shall be close transition type with contactor, star and delta contactors mechanically and
electrically interlocked to prevent simultaneous operation, one triple pole overload relay and one
adjustable and calibrated solid state timer with at least 0-30 seconds period to control the star-delta
operation. The resistor banks shall be wire wound porcelain core of sufficient thermal rating. Resistance
values shall be chosen to give high starting torque and low transient current.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 66/.....

BLDG04/S65.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 66-1
SECTION 66
REFUSE HANDLING PLANT INSTALLATION

66.1

SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of Works shall include the provision, installation, testing, commissioning of Refuse Handling
Plant (screw type), complete with chute connection, control panels and other necessary mechanical and
electrical parts and accessories (hereinafter referred to as "Refuse Handling Plant") for the purposes of
this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it.
The Contractor shall engage a Specialist from the HDB Approved Refuse Handling Equipment Suppliers
to carry out the Works.

66.2

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

66.2.1

General
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the Specifications and shall be in compliance with the
requirements of ENV and other relevant authorities in Singapore. The design concept shall incorporate the
following points :

66.2.2

(a)

one man operation, particularly by the driver of the refuse collection truck,

(b)

the Refuse Handling Plant shall be able to store a minimum of 4.2 m3 of refuse and discharge
refuse directly into refuse collection of truck. The Refuse Handling Plant shall be designed to
operate during the refuse collection time only,

(c)

the Refuse Handling Plant shall be incorporated with a screw to automatically discharge refuse
directly into the refuse collection truck,

(d)

the connection between the bottom of the centralised refuse chute and the Refuse Handling Plant
shall be vertical and larger than the dimension of the refuse chute opening,

(e)

emphasis shall be given to minimise odour, noise and vibration,

(f)

sullage water control,

(g)

automatic fire protection system,

(h)

automatic washing of discharge chute,

(i)

automatic/manual control of the operation,

(j)

easy and minimal maintenance,

(k)

reliability of system.

Capacity
The Refuse Handling Plant shall have an effective storage capacity of not less than 4.2 m3 of refuse.

66.2.3

Discharge Operation
The minimum discharge rate of the Refuse Handling Plant shall be 1 m3 per minute. The discharge
operation shall be synchronised with the sweeping cycle of the compaction blade of the refuse collection
truck such that there is no overspillage of refuse onto the floor of the refuse chamber during the discharge
process. There shall be no remnants of refuse on the discharge chute upon completion of the discharge
process.
The whole discharge process shall not be longer than five minutes. This is to shorten the time the refuse
is exposed to the atmosphere and minimise the problem of foul odour.

BLDG04/S66.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 66-2
66.2.4

Drainage
The Refuse Handling Plant shall be designed with an effective and efficient drainage system such that
sullage water and washwater can be discharged to the gully directly. As the refuse chute is flushed once
a week, the Contractor shall consider this in his design of the drainage system. The flushing rate is
between 45 to 60 litres per minute.

66.2.5

Level Indication
A sight glass shall be installed to each Refuse Handling Plant for monitoring whether the refuse in the
Refuse Handling Plant is full.

66.2.6

Odour Control
The Refuse Handling Plant shall be so designed to contain or minimise the emanation of foul odour into
the immediate environment. This is especially important as there are apartments directly above the refuse
chamber.

66.2.7

Noise And Vibration Control

Vibration and noise suppression and/or isolation to the Refuse Handling Plant and building structures shall
be given due consideration such that residents living near the refuse chamber are not inconvenienced or
distressed.
The noise level at a distance of 1m from the open entrance of the refuse room shall not exceed 60 dBA at
any point in time.
The necessary sound and vibration measuring instruments for the Refuse Handling Plant shall be
provided at the time of testing.

66.2.8

Maintenance, Repair And Replacement

The Refuse Handling Plant shall be so designed for good accessibility to all its major parts for
maintenance, repair and replacement purposes.
In case of blockage in the Refuse Handling Plant, the maintenance personnel or workers shall be able to
clear the blockage without having to take apart the Refuse Handling Plant or involving any other major
works that require specialist expertise
The Refuse Handling Plant shall be designed such that it can be isolated or removed from the refuse
chute for maintenance and repair purposes. All greasing points shall be readily accessible for ease of
maintenance.
Each Refuse Handling Plant shall be identified by code numbers (location & block number), which shall be
approved by the SO Rep, for the ease of fault reporting.

66.2.9

Safety Feature
The Refuse Handling Plant shall be designed and built with an emergency stop facility, anti-jamming
feature and safety feature against possible damages due to accidental collision with the refuse collection
truck. It shall also be built to withstand repeated direct impact from falling refuse from a height of 30
storeys without damage to it. A safety shutter shall also be fixed permanently at the top of each unit of the
Refuse Handling Plant so that the Refuse Handling Plant can be isolated from the refuse chute for
maintenance and repair purposes.

BLDG04/S66.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 66-3
66.2.10

Materials And Workmanship

The Refuse Handling Plant shall be manufactured of structural steel to BS 4360 at least Grade 50 or its
equivalent. The panels subjected to direct impact from the refuse and bottom panel of Refuse Handling
Plant shall have minimum thickness of 12mm. The blades of the screw shaft shall be at least 12mm thick.
Other body Works of Refuse Handling Plant shall be made of BS 4360 Grade 43 or its equivalent and the
thickness shall not be less than 6mm unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
All bolts, nuts, washers, screws and fasteners shall be made of stainless steel.
All materials used in the manufacture of the Refuse Handling Plant shall be new and of the best quality of
their respective kinds available. They shall be of correct dimensions, sizes and gauges approved by the
SO Rep and free from any Defect or damage upon completion of fabrication, assembly and delivery of the
unit.
All internal welds shall be continuous unless otherwise specified or approved by the SO Rep. All welds
shall be smoothly and securely finished. For all welds performed, if in the opinion of the SO Rep that
certain portion of the weld shall be reinforced or redone, the Contractor shall complete the Works as
instructed at his own cost and expense and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
No approval or any acceptance by the SO Rep shall relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the
Contract for the quality of materials and the standard of workmanship in the Works.
All materials used or to be used in the manufacture of the Refuse Handling Plant and the workmanship
shall be subjected from time to time to such tests as the SO Rep may direct, whether at the place of
manufacture or fabrication or on the Site or at such other place or places as the SO Rep may require. The
cost of any test (including destructive tests) shall be borne by the Contractor and such cost and expense
shall be deemed to have been allowed for in the Contract Sum.

66.2.11

Automatic Washing System

An automatic washing system shall be installed to wash the adjustable discharge chute of the Refuse
Handling Plant for a preset time after the completion of the discharge of refuse into the refuse collection
truck.

66.2.12

Automatic Fire Protection System

An automatic fire protection system shall be installed in the refuse chamber of the Refuse Handling Plant.
The system shall be automatically activated if fire is detected in the refuse chamber of the Refuse
Handling Plant.
The automatic fire protection system shall include heat detector, automatic control valve, spraying nozzles
and alarm system. Two spraying nozzles shall be installed at the top of the Refuse Handling Plant. One
shall be centrally located in front and the other at the rear of the Refuse Handling Plant. The main water
supply pipe to the nozzles shall be made of 22mm diameter stainless steel and it shall be painted in red.
An alarm bell shall be installed on the Refuse Handling Plant.

66.2.13

Stainless Steel Water Pipes

The Contractor shall supply and fix stainless steel water supply pipes from the provision of tee-off in the
refuse chamber for automatic fire protection system and automatic washing system for discharge chute.
The water supply pipe for fire protection system shall be painted in red and shall be installed with double
check valves. The check valves used shall be of the type approved by PUB Water Department.
All stainless steel water pipes, fittings and accessories shall be approved by Water Department, PUB and
to the requirement of BS 4127:Part 2 and its latest amendments.
The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free from Defect
that would impair their performance in service. Cutting and fixing shall be in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. All stainless steel pipes shall not be bent.
Unless otherwise specified, light gauge stainless steel pipes shall be used for water supply.

BLDG04/S66.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 66-4
66.2.13

Stainless Steel Water Pipes (Contd)

The stainless steel pipe fittings shall be of capillary or compression fittings of copper alloy and shall
comply with BS 864:Part 2 and all PUB latest requirements. Fittings of 15mm size and above shall be
legibly marked with the manufacturer's name of the trade mark.
Pipes shall be well supported by stainless steel supporting clips or hangers.
Nominal Size
(mm)
15
20 to 28
35 to 42
54 and above

66.3

Maximum Horizontal
Support Spacing
(mm)
600
600
1200
1200

Maximum Vertical
Support Spacing
(mm)
1200
1200
1800
1800

GEARED MOTOR
The Refuse Handling Plant shall be powered by a heavy duty 3-phase AC geared motor of minimum class
B insulation which shall be at least splashproof. The motor shall be capable of performing intermittent
duty without overheating, degradation or degeneration in torque, speed or overall performance. The
geared motor shall be at least 4kW and the service factor shall not be less than one.

66.4

ELECTRICAL WIRING
The Contractor shall run the electrical wiring from a 3-phase 20A electrical isolator provided in the
centralised refuse chute chamber. All wiring run shall be continuous and new with no splices permitted.
They shall be of the correct sizes and grouped neatly. All wiring installed shall be such that the removal of
an electrical device can be made without the removal or relocation of the wiring bundles and harnesses
adjacent to the device being removed.
All wiring shall be labelled with wiring identification shown on the electrical control and wiring drawings
which shall be endorsed by an appropriate grade of PUB Licensed Electrical Worker for the whole system.
Wire labels shall be the non-metallic sleeve type or hot-stamped into the insulation.
All circuit breakers, disconnectors and switching-type terminal blocks shall be labelled according to the
electrical Drawings. All power wiring shall be PVC insulated to SS50. All wiring shall be carried in metal
conduit or cable trunking. The metal conduit is to be heavy gauge, G.I. conduit (class B) complying with
BS 4568, free from internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means
of spacer bars saddled at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs.
Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of a screwed socket and smooth bore bush. Where the
conduit is or may be in contact with any structural steel work, an efficient and permanent metallic
connection shall be made between the conduit and steel work. All conduits and trunking shall be
electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and shall be efficiently earthed with copper earthwire
and copper tape in conduits/trunking. Copper earthwire or tape shall be of the appropriate sizes.
Cable trunking and associated fitting shall comply with SS 249. All trunking and fittings shall be
manufactured from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped steel and treated with epoxy powder paint
giving a paint thickness of not less than 45 microns.
Joining of trunking shall be effected by means of sound bolts and nuts or screws. Copper earth tape shall
be laid in the trunking run. The copper shall be tinned where it is bolted down.
The entire trunking and conduit installation shall be completed before the cables are drawn. The number
of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed those set out in the relevant table in the PSB
Code of Practice CP5.

BLDG04/S66.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 66-5
66.4

ELECTRICAL WIRING (CONTD)

All cables shall be tested with insulation testing equipment at 500V and a reading of more than 50 megaohm must be obtained before the conductors are connected to any apparatus.
Where wiring are to be in conduit or duct buried in floor, it shall be terminated in approved junction boxes
adjacent to the Refuse Handling Plant or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible tubing enclosing the
cables between motors and junction boxes.
All non-current carrying metal parts of electrical Plant shall be effectively earthed. Earth continuity
conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in Table D.2 of CP5.

66.5

CONTROL PANELS
The Refuse Handling Plant main control panel shall be provided with the following apparatus, controls and
indicating device for automatic and manual operations.
(a)

Circuit breakers.

(b)

Auto/Off/Manual key selector switch.

(c)

For automatic operation, push buttons for start, stop and emergency stop of the Refuse Handling
Plant shall only be provided; for manual operation, push buttons for individual functions shall be
provided so that independent operation can be carried out.

(d)

All necessary timers, control relays, interlocks for starters and contactors.

(e)

Approved LED indicating lights with the following colours shall be used :
(i)
(ii)

The colour of the indicating lights for 3-phase incoming supply shall be
RED, YELLOW and BLUE respectively.
Indicating lights for motor shall be GREEN when running, RED for trip.

(f)

All internal inter-connecting wiring for starters and other Plant and equipment within the control
panel including all necessary protection.

(g)

Voltmeter indicating the phase voltage.

(h)

Ammeter with appropriate ampere range.

(i)

Engraved "Traffolyte" labels for the control panel, all push buttons, selector switches, instruments,
indicating lights, etc on the surface of the control panel.

(j)

Electrical control and wiring drawings of the whole system.

(k)

Buzzer to indicate overload, breakdown & jamming etc.

A separate fire control panel with all the necessary circuit breakers and control relays etc shall also be
provided. A cancel alarm button shall be fixed on the fire control panel for cancelling of alarm. The water
however shall continue to spray until a system reset button is pressed. The alarm bell shall be located at
a location approved by the SO Rep for the maximum audio effect and the unauthorised intervention.
All the electrical components used shall be of the HDB approved type.
The control panels shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5 mm thickness.
It shall be adequately braced to form a rigid housing and be damp and dust proof to IP 54.
The control panels shall be located on the right side of the Refuse Handling Plant viewing from the front
and shall be mounted at an appropriate height of at least 1 m above the finished floor level. The locations
of control panels shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. A single common key shall be used
for the Auto/Off/Manual key selector switch, main control panel and fire control panel.

BLDG04/S66.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 66-6
66.6

PAINTING
(a)

General
All steelwork shall be painted to protect them from corrosion. All painting shall be done in
accordance with the relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice or their equivalents.
The paint or coating manufacturer's written recommendations with regard to mixing, painting,
application procedures and equipment, drying times, curing times and overcoating times of each
coat shall be strictly adhered to.

(b)

Surface Preparation
All steel surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly degreased with water-based oil and grease
remover, and washed with fresh clean potable water to remove all emulsified residues, dust and
other contamination and foreign matters.
All weld areas shall be completely removed of welding flux slag, flux fumes, heat oxides and weld
splatter. All sharp edges, weld seams, millscales and heat oxides shall be grounded off. All loose
rust, non-adherent millscales shall be thoroughly removed.
All steel surfaces to be painted shall be grit-blasted to near white metal equivalent to Swedish
Standard SIS 05 5900 1967 Sa 2 or its equivalent.
Before applying the paint system, it shall be ensured that all the steel surfaces to be painted are
thoroughly dry and well cleaned, free from all dust, rustscales and millscales.

(c)

External Surfaces Of Refuse Handling Plant

The external surfaces of the Refuse Handling Plant shall be painted with the following paint
system :

(d)

(i)

one full coat of fast drying polyamide-cured epoxy zinc phosphate primer of 50 microns dry
film thickness;

(ii)

one full coat of polyamide-cured epoxy pigmented with micaceous iron oxide of 100 microns
dry film thickness, and

(iii)

one full coat of polyamide-cured high built epoxy mastic of 100 microns dry film thickness.

Coating Specification
(i)

Epoxy Zinc Phosphate Primer

It shall be a two-component epoxy polyamide-cured primer with excellent adhesion to steel.
It shall be suitable for epoxy systems used on structural steel. It shall contain zinc
phosphate with iron oxide pigments. Its volume solid content shall not be less than 53%
volume solids. Its minimum overcoating time shall not be less than 16 hours.

(ii)

Epoxy Micaceous Iron Oxide Primer

It shall be high build, two pack epoxy polyamide-cured coating containing micaceous iron
oxide. It shall give excellent durability, toughness and abrasion resistance. The volume
solid content shall not be less than 65% volume solids. Its minimum overcoating time shall
not be less than 16 hours.

(iii)

High Build Epoxy Mastic

It shall be high build, two packs epoxy polyamide-cured coating which offers long term
protection to exposed steelwork against fumes and spillages of mild acids, alkalis, salts and
solvents. The coating shall also offer excellent toughness and durability. The volume solid
content shall not be less than 60% volume solids. Its minimum overcoating time shall not
be less than 16 hours.

(e)

Internal Surfaces Of Refuse Handling Plant

To prevent corrosion the internal surfaces of the Refuse Handling Plant shall be painted or coated
with manufacturer's recommendation of paint system, complete with written recommendations with
regard to mixing, painting, application procedures and equipment, drying times, curing times and
overcoating times of each coat.

BLDG04/S66.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 66-7
66.7

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

One month before the completion of the installation, arrange with the SO Rep for the test of performance
and installation of the Refuse Handling Plant.
All Defect notified during the inspection shall be rectified before the building blocks are handed over to the
Employer, failing which appropriate action shall be taken against the Contractor by the SO Rep.

66.8

MAINTENANCE OF REFUSE HANDLING PLANT

66.8.1

The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing routine servicing
and maintenance of the Refuse Handling Plant by the Specialist in accordance with the terms and
conditions of the Conditions of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A44;
except for clause 23 "Payment" for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial
Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer
(hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purpose of this clause including all subclauses
under it). For the avoidance of doubt, notwithstanding the requirements of the said Clause 23 "Payment"
of the Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A44, the
Contractor shall not be entitled to any payment for such servicing and maintenance Works during the
Maintenance Period.

66.8.2

Without prejudice to the Contractor's obligations and liabilities under the Contract, the Contractor shall
ensure that his Specialist shall carry out the service and maintenance of the Refuse Handling Plant for an
additional period of five years commencing after the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period in
accordance with the terms and conditions of the Articles Of Agreement For Comprehensive Maintenance
For Refuse Handling Plant and Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in
Appendix A43 and/or Appendix A43(TC); and A44 respectively.

66.8.3

In this respect, subject to the rights of the Employer or such other party or such Town Council(s)
exercising their discretion as hereinafter provided, the Contractor shall ensure that his Specialist enter into
a separate maintenance agreement with the Employer or such other party or such Town Council(s) as the
SO Rep may at his sole discretion decide. In the event the Specialist is to enter into a separate
maintenance agreement with such Town Council(s), the Contractor shall ensure that his Specialist submit
such Articles Of Agreement For Comprehensive Maintenance For Refuse Handling Plant and Conditions
Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A43(TC) and A44 respectively to
such Town Council(s). The Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses including stamp fees for the
preparation and execution of the maintenance agreement.

66.8.4

In the event that the Specialist fails to enter into a separate maintenance agreement with the Employer or
such other party or such Town Council(s) before the expiry of the Maintenance Period, the Employer or
such other party or such Town Council(s) shall be entitled to arrange for their own maintenance contractor
to carry out the service and maintenance and all additional costs and expenses incurred in carrying out
the same shall be recoverable from the Contractor.

66.8.5

The Employer or such other party or such Town Council(s) shall have the absolute discretion of not
requiring the Contractor's Specialist to provide the service and maintenance of the Refuse Handling Plant
after the Defects Liability Period. The Contractor agrees that the Employer or such other party or such
Town Council(s) may exercise the said discretion at any time before the expiry of the Defects Liability
Period.

BLDG04/S66.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 66-8
66.9

MAINTENANCE AGREEMENTS AND PAYMENT

FOR MAINTENANCE SERVICES
The Employer and/or Town Council shall have the option of accepting the comprehensive maintenance
services offered by the Contractor's Specialist for the Refuse Handling Plant for a period of five years
commencing after the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period. The Contractor hereby agrees that the
option is opened for acceptance up to the end of the Defects Liability Period. The Contractor shall refer to
the Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A44 and shall be
deemed to include in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses of other maintenance requirements
which are necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, but not reflected in Schedule B of the
Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement.
Upon the acceptance of the maintenance services offered by the Contractor's Specialist, the Contractor
shall ensure that the Specialist enters into a separate maintenance agreement with the Employer and/or
Town Council, body or corporation for the maintenance service for a period of five years commencing after
the expiry of the Defects Liability Period at a monthly maintenance fee of ONE HUNDRED Dollars
($100.00) per unit of Refuse Handling Plant and payments shall only be made upon satisfactory
completion of the maintenance services. The Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses including
stamp fees for the maintenance agreement.

Total pages for this Section :

Section 67/.....

BLDG04/S66.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 67-1

SECTION 67
RESERVED

SECTION 68
RESERVED

SECTION 69
RESERVED

Total pages for these Sections :

Section 70/.....

BLDG04/S6769.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 70-1
SECTION 70
LISTS OF APPENDICES

Appendix
A1 and/or A1(TC)

Deed Of Warranty For Pre-Treatment Of Soil For Protection Of Buildings Against

Sub-Terranean Termites

A2 and/or A2(TC)

Deed Of Warranty For Metal Roofing

A3 and/or A3(TC)

Deed Of Warranty For Clay Roof Tiles

A4 and/or A4(TC)

Deed Of Warranty For Complete System Of Waterproofing Treatment And

Panel Roofing

A5 and/or A5(TC)

Deed Of Warranty For External Painting

A6 and/or A6(TC)

Deed Of Warranty For Cast-In-Situ EPDM Rubber Floorinh for Children's Playground

A7 to A10

Reserved

A11

Instruction On Workmen's Compensation Policy

A12

Request For Revision Of Protected Quantity Of Concreting Materials

A13

Conditions For the Supply Of Materials From The Employer

A14

Technical Information On Refuse Chute Flushing System

A15

Application For Final Pressure Test Of Gas Pipe Installation

A16

Appointment of Designated Representative (DR) For Gas Pipe Installation

A17

Approval For Final Pressure Test

A18

Certificate Of Final Pressure Test

A19

Request For Charge-In/Turn-On Of Gas Supply

A20

Approval For Charge-In/Turn-On Of Gas Supply

A21

Statement Of Turn-On Or Charge-In Of Gas Supply

A22

Data On Transfer Pumping System

A23

Testing Data On Transfer Pumping System

A24

Testing Data On Installation Of Telemonitoring System For Transfer Pumping System

A25

Fortnightly/Monthly Routine Inspection Report On Transfer Pumping System During

Maintenance Period

A26

Data On Booster Pumping System

A27

Testing Data On Booster Pumping System

A28

Monthly Routing Inspection Report On Booster Pumping System During

Maintenance Period

BLDG04/S70.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Bldg Spec
Page 70-2
SECTION 70
LISTS OF APPENDICES
(CONT'D)
Appendix
A29

Schedule of Technical Data

A30

Testing Data On Wet Riser System

A31

Bi-Yearly Routine Inspection Report On Down-Comer/Dry Riser System During

Maintenance Period

A32

Monthly/Quarterly Routine Inspection Report On Wet Rising Main System During

Maintenance Period

A33

List "A" - Schedule Of Technical Data

A34

Testing Data On Hose Reel System

A35

Monthly Routine Inspection Report On Hose Reel Pumping System During

Maintenance Period

A36

List of Relevant British Standards

A37

Schedule of Recommended Gauges For Rectangular Duct Installation

A38

Monthly/Annual Test Report - Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System

A39

Mechanical Ventilation System - Preliminary Inspection

A40

Anchor Torque Test For Ventilation System

A41

Ventilation Fan Commissioning Test Record

A42

Schedule "A" - Schedule Of Technical Data Of Plant And Equipment

A43 and/or A43(TC)

Articles Of Agreement For Comprehensive Maintenance For Refuse Handling Plant

A44

Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement

A45

Procedure To Obtain StarHub Manhole Cover

A46

Performance Compliance Certificate

Total pages for this Section :

BLDG04/S70.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A1

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR PRE-TREATMENT OF SOIL FOR

PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS AGAINST SUB-TERRANEAN TERMITES

To :

Housing & Development Board

Republic of Singapore
STAMP
if stamp duties required

....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :
(1)

........................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)

....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)

...................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)

....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Pre-Treatment of Soil for
Protection of Buildings Against Sub-Terranean Termites (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract
with the consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)
Pursuant to Clause ...................... of ........................................................................................................
of the Contract, the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Employer as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of five (5) years (hereinafter
called the Warranty Period) that the Works shall remain free from subterranean termite infestation (hereinafter
referred to as "defects") (restriction to soil treatment by virtue of compliance with ENV's requirements
notwithstanding).
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.

BLDG04/A1.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A1
Page 2

The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;

(b)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;

(c)

their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and

(d)

the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.

3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Employer
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Employer to order such damage or defects as are referred to
in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Employer's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Employer or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Employer shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work
which the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, a person nominated
by him in writing may determine as occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Employer or third party, and the
valuation of such work or such part of the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the
methods mentioned below in descending order of priority :
(a)

by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or

(b)

if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.

6
The approval by the Employer of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.

BLDG04/A1.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A1
Page 3

7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against
all loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Employer in relation to any damage to property or injury
to person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against any compensation payable by
the Employer under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising
out of rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this
Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's
Compensation Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
work on account of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Employer.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, by a
person nominated in writing by him. Any decision by the Chief Executive Officer or his nominee under this Clause
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may
arise under this Warranty unless otherwise determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this
Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two
documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
14
The Employer shall have the absolute discretion to assign the benefit of this Warranty to any third parties
without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20

BLDG04/A1.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

day of

APPENDIX A1(TC)

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR PRE-TREATMENT OF SOIL FOR

PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS AGAINST SUB-TERRANEAN TERMITES

To :

.....................................................
.....................................................
Republic of Singapore
STAMP
if stamp duties required

....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................
WHEREAS :
(1)

........................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)

...................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)

...................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)

...................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Pre-Treatment of Soil for
Protection of Buildings Against Sub-Terranean Termites (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract
with the consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)

Pursuant to Clause ........................ of ....................................................................................................

of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the ...................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Council") this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Council as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of five (5) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall remain free from subterranean termite infestation (hereinafter
referred to as "defects") (restriction to soil treatment by virtue of compliance with ENV's requirements
notwithstanding).
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.

BLDG04/A1T.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A1(TC)
Page 2

The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;

(b)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;

(c)

their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and

(d)

the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.

3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Council
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Council's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Council to order such damage or defects as are referred to in
such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Council's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Council or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Council's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Council shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work which
the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, a person nominated by him in writing may determine as
occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Council or third party, and the valuation of such work or such part of
the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in
descending order of priority :
(a)

by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or

(b)

if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.

6
The approval by the Council of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.

BLDG04/A1T.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A1(TC)
Page 3

7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against all
loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Council in relation to any damage to property or injury to
person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against any compensation payable by the
Council under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising out of
rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this Warranty. The
Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's Compensation
Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
works on account of the Contractor's and/or Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Council.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, by a person nominated in writing
by him. Any decision by the Chairman or his nominee under this Clause shall be final and binding on and conclusive
against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may arise under this Warranty unless otherwise
determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two
documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20

BLDG04/A1T.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

day of

APPENDIX A2

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR METAL ROOFING

To :

Housing & Development Board

Republic of Singapore
STAMP
if stamp duties required

....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :
(1)

........................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)

...................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)

...................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)

....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Metal Roofing Works
(hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of
both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)
Pursuant to Clause ...................... of ......................................................................................................
of the Contract, the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Employer as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of ten (10) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall be watertight, leakproof and waterproof and/or remain free from
defects, including but not limited to perforation due to rust and/or corrosion by weathering in the natural elements.
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.

BLDG04/A2.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A2
Page 2

The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;

(b)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;

(c)

their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and

(d)

the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.

3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Employer
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Employer to order such damage or defects as are referred to
in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Employer's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Employer or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Employer shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work
which the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, a person nominated
by him in writing may determine as occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Employer or third party, and the
valuation of such work or such part of the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the
methods mentioned below in descending order of priority :
(a)

by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or

(b)

if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.

6
The approval by the Employer of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.

BLDG04/A2.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A2
Page 3

7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against
all loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Employer in relation to any damage to property or injury
to person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against any compensation payable by
the Employer under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising
out of rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this
Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's
Compensation Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
work on account of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Employer.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, by a
person nominated in writing by him. Any decision by the Chief Executive Officer or his nominee under this Clause
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may
arise under this Warranty unless otherwise determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this
Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two
documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
14
The Employer shall have the absolute discretion to assign the benefit of this Warranty to any third parties
without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20

BLDG04/A2.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

day of

APPENDIX A2(TC)

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR METAL ROOFING

To :

.....................................................
.....................................................
Republic of Singapore
STAMP
if stamp duties required

....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :
(1)

..................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)

.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)

..................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)

.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Metal Roofing Works
(hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of
both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)

Pursuant to Clause ........................ of ....................................................................................................

of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the ....................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Council") this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Council as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of ten (10) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall be watertight, leakproof and waterproof and/or remain free from
defects, including but not limited to perforation due to rust and/or corrosion by weathering in the natural elements.
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.

BLDG04/A2T.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A2(TC)
Page 2

The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;

(b)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;

(c)

their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and

(d)

the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.

3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Council
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Council's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Council to order such damage or defects as are referred to in
such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Council's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Council or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Council's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Council shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work which
the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, a person nominated by him in writing may determine as
occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Council or third party, and the valuation of such work or such part of
the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in
descending order of priority :
(a)

by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or

(b)

if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.

6
The approval by the Council of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.

BLDG04/A2T.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A2(TC)
Page 3

7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against all
loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Council in relation to any damage to property or injury to
person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against any compensation payable by the
Council under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising out of
rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this Warranty. The
Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's Compensation
Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
works on account of the Contractor's and/or Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Council.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, by a person nominated in writing
by him. Any decision by the Chairman or his nominee under this Clause shall be final and binding on and conclusive
against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may arise under this Warranty unless otherwise
determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two
documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20_

BLDG04/A2T.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

day of

APPENDIX A3

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR CLAY ROOF TILES

To :

Housing & Development Board

Republic of Singapore
STAMP
if stamp duties required

....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :
(1)

...................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)

.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)

..................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)

...................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Clay Roof Tiles Works
(hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of
both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)
Pursuant to Clause ...................... of ....................................................................................................
of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Employer as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of ten (10) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall be watertight, leak-proof and waterproof and/or remain free from
defects, including but not limited to discolouration, deformation and perforation due to weathering in the natural
elements.
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.

BLDG04/A3.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A3
Page 2

The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;

(b)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;

(c)

their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and

(d)

the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.

3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Employer
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Employer to order such damage or defects as are referred to
in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Employer's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Employer or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Employer shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work
which the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, a person nominated
by him in writing may determine as occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Employer or third party, and the
valuation of such work or such part of the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the
methods mentioned below in descending order of priority :
(a)

by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or

(b)

if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.

6
The approval by the Employer of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.

BLDG04/A3.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A3
Page 3

7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against
all loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Employer in relation to any damage to property or injury
to person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against any compensation payable by
the Employer under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising
out of rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this
Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's
Compensation Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
work on account of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Employer.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, by a
person nominated in writing by him. Any decision by the Chief Executive Officer or his nominee under this Clause
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may
arise under this Warranty unless otherwise determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this
Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two
documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
14
The Employer shall have the absolute discretion to assign the benefit of this Warranty to any third parties
without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20

BLDG04/A3.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

day of

APPENDIX A3(TC)

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR CLAY ROOF TILES

To :

.....................................................
.....................................................
Republic of Singapore
STAMP
if stamp duties required

....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :
(1)

......................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)

....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)

..................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)

....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Clay Roof Tiles Works
(hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of
both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)

Pursuant to Clause ........................ of .....................................................................................................

of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the ....................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Council") this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Council as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of ten (10) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall be watertight, leak-proof and waterproof and/or remain free from
defects, including but not limited to discolouration, deformation and perforation due to weathering in the natural
elements.
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.

BLDG04/A3T.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A3(TC)
Page 2

The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;

(b)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;

(c)

their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and

(d)

the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.

3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Council
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Council's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Council to order such damage or defects as are referred to in
such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Council's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Council or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Council's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Council shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work which
the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, a person nominated by him in writing may determine as
occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Council or third party, and the valuation of such work or such part of
the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in
descending order of priority :
(a)

by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or

(b)

if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.

6
The approval by the Council of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.

BLDG04/A3T.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A3(TC)
Page 3

7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against all
loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Council in relation to any damage to property or injury to
person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against any compensation payable by the
Council under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising out of
rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this Warranty. The
Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's Compensation
Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
works on account of the Contractor's and/or Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Council.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, by a person nominated in writing
by him. Any decision by the Chairman or his nominee under this Clause shall be final and binding on and conclusive
against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may arise under this Warranty unless otherwise
determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two
documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20

BLDG04/A3T.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

day of

APPENDIX A4

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR

COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING
TREATMENT AND PANEL ROOFING

To :

Housing & Development Board

Republic of Singapore
STAMP
if stamp duties required

....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :
(1)

...................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)

......................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)

...................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)

.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Complete System of
Waterproofing Treatment And Panel Roofing (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the
consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)
Pursuant to Clause ...................... of .......................................................................................................
of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Employer as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of ten (10) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall be watertight, leakproof and waterproof, and/or remain free from
defects, including but not limited to any premature failure of all components of the roof system.
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.

BLDG04/A4.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A4
Page 2

The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;

(b)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;

(c)

their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and

(d)

the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.

3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Employer
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Employer to order such damage or defects as are referred to
in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Employer's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Employer or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Employer shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work
which the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, a person nominated
by him in writing may determine as occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Employer or third party, and the
valuation of such work or such part of the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the
methods mentioned below in descending order of priority :
(a)

by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or

(b)

if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.

6
The approval by the Employer of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.

BLDG04/A4.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A4
Page 3

7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against
all loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Employer in relation to any damage to property or injury
to person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against any compensation payable by
the Employer under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising
out of rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this
Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's
Compensation Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
work on account of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Employer.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, by a
person nominated in writing by him. Any decision by the Chief Executive Officer or his nominee under this Clause
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may
arise under this Warranty unless otherwise determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this
Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two
documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
14
The Employer shall have the absolute discretion to assign the benefit of this Warranty to any third parties
without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20

BLDG04/A4.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

day of

APPENDIX A4(TC)
DEED OF WARRANTY FOR
COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING
TREATMENT AND PANEL ROOFING

To :

.....................................................
.....................................................
Republic of Singapore
STAMP
if stamp duties required

....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................
WHEREAS :
(1)

..................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)

....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)

...................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)

....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Complete System Of
Waterproofing Treatment And Panel Roofing (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the
consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)

Pursuant to Clause ........................ of ....................................................................................................

of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the ....................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Council") this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Council as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of ten (10) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall be watertight, leakproof and waterproof, and/or remain free from
defects, including but not limited to any premature failure of all components of the roof system.
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.

BLDG04/A4T.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A4(TC)
Page 2

The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;

(b)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;

(c)

their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and

(d)

the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.

3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Council
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Council's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Council to order such damage or defects as are referred to in
such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Council's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Council or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Council's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Council shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work which
the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, a person nominated by him in writing may determine as
occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Council or third party, and the valuation of such work or such part of
the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in
descending order of priority :
(a)

by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or

(b)

if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.

6
The approval by the Council of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.

BLDG04/A4T.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A4(TC)
Page 3

7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against all
loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Council in relation to any damage to property or injury to
person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against any compensation payable by the
Council under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising out of
rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this Warranty. The
Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's Compensation
Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
works on account of the Contractor's and/or Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Council.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, by a person nominated in writing
by him. Any decision by the Chairman or his nominee under this Clause shall be final and binding on and conclusive
against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may arise under this Warranty unless otherwise
determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two
documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20

BLDG04/A4T.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

day of

APPENDIX A5

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR EXTERNAL PAINTING

To :

Housing & Development Board

Republic of Singapore
STAMP
if stamp duties required

....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :
(1)

........................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)

.........................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)

.......................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)

.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of External Painting Works
(hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of
both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)
Pursuant to Clause ...................... of ........................................................................................................
of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Employer as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of Six (6) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall remain free from defects, including but not limited to blistering,
algae growth, uneven fading, peeling, discolouration and chalking.
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.

BLDG04/A5.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A5
Page 2

The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;

(b)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;

(c)

their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and

(d)

the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.

3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Employer
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Employer to order such damage or defects as are referred to
in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Employer's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Employer or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Employer shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work
which the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, a person nominated
by him in writing may determine as occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Employer or third party, and the
valuation of such work or such part of the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the
methods mentioned below in descending order of priority :
(a)

by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or

(b)

if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.

6
The approval by the Employer of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.

BLDG04/A5.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A5
Page 3

7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against
all loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Employer in relation to any damage to property or injury
to person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against any compensation payable by
the Employer under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising
out of rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this
Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's
Compensation Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
work on account of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Employer.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, by a
person nominated in writing by him. Any decision by the Chief Executive Officer or his nominee under this Clause
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may
arise under this Warranty unless otherwise determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this
Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict
between the two documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
14
The Employer shall have the absolute discretion to assign the benefit of this Warranty to any third parties
without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20

BLDG04/A5.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

day of

APPENDIX A5(TC)

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR EXTERNAL PAINTING

To :

.....................................................
.....................................................
Republic of Singapore
STAMP
if stamp duties required

....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :
(1)

........................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)

.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)

...................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)

.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of External Painting Works
(hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of
both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)

Pursuant to Clause ........................ of .....................................................................................................

of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the ....................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Council") this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Council as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of six (6) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall remain free from defects, including but not limited to blistering,
algae growth, uneven fading, peeling, discolouration and chalking.
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.

BLDG04/A5T.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A5(TC)
Page 2

The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;

(b)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;

(c)

their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and

(d)

the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.

3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Council
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Council's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Council to order such damage or defects as are referred to in
such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Council's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Council or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Council's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Council shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work which
the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, a person nominated by him in writing may determine as
occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Council or third party, and the valuation of such work or such part of
the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in
descending order of priority :
(a)

by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or

(b)

if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.

6
The approval by the Council of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.

BLDG04/A5T.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A5(TC)
Page 3

7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against all
loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Council in relation to any damage to property or injury to
person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against any compensation payable by the
Council under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising out of
rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this Warranty. The
Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's Compensation
Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
works on account of the Contractor's and/or Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Council.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, by a person nominated in writing
by him. Any decision by the Chairman or his nominee under this Clause shall be final and binding on and conclusive
against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may arise under this Warranty unless otherwise
determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two
documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20

BLDG04/A5T.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

day of

APPENDIX A6

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR CAST IN - SITU EPDM

RUBBER FLOORING FOR CHILDRENS PLAYGROUND

To :

Housing & Development Board

Republic of Singapore
STAMP
if stamp duties required

....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :
(1)

........................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)

.........................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)

.......................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)

.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Cast-In-Situ EPDM
Rubber Flooring For Childrens Playground (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the
consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)
Pursuant to Clause ...................... of ........................................................................................................
of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Employer as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of five (5) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall remain free from defects, including but not limited to blistering,
fissure, peeling, delamination, disintegration, uneven fading and discolouration.
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.

BLDG04/A5.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A6
Page 2

The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;

(b)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;

(c)

their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and

(d)

the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.

3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Employer
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Employer to order such damage or defects as are referred to
in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Employer's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Employer or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Employer shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work
which the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, a person nominated
by him in writing may determine as occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Employer or third party, and the
valuation of such work or such part of the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the
methods mentioned below in descending order of priority :
(a)

by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or

(b)

if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.

6
The approval by the Employer of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.

BLDG04/A5.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A6
Page 3

7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against
all loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Employer in relation to any damage to property or injury
to person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against any compensation payable by
the Employer under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising
out of rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this
Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's
Compensation Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
work on account of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Employer.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, by a
person nominated in writing by him. Any decision by the Chief Executive Officer or his nominee under this Clause
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may
arise under this Warranty unless otherwise determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this
Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict
between the two documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
14
The Employer shall have the absolute discretion to assign the benefit of this Warranty to any third parties
without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20

BLDG04/A5.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

day of

APPENDIX A6(TC)

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR CAST IN - SITU EPDM

RUBBER FLOORING FOR CHILDRENS PLAYGROUND

To :

.....................................................
.....................................................
Republic of Singapore
STAMP
if stamp duties required

....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :
(1)

........................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)

.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2)

...................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)

.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Cast-In-Situ EPDM
Rubber Flooring For Childrens Playground (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the
consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3)

Pursuant to Clause ........................ of .....................................................................................................

of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the ....................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Council") this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Council as follows :
1
The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of five (5) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall remain free from defects, including but not limited to blistering,
fissure, peeling, delamination, disintegration, uneven fading and discolouration.
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.

BLDG04/A5T.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A6(TC)
Page 2

The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;

(b)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;

(c)

their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and

(d)

the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.

3
It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Council
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4
Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or
duration specified by the Council's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or
Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within
the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Council to order such damage or defects as are referred to in
such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or
Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions
shall be issued without prejudice to the Council's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the
Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5
In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Council or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Council's notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Council shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work which
the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, a person nominated by him in writing may determine as
occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Council or third party, and the valuation of such work or such part of
the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in
descending order of priority :
(a)

by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or

(b)

if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits.

6
The approval by the Council of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.

BLDG04/A5T.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A6(TC)
Page 3

7
It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against all
loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Council in relation to any damage to property or injury to
person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against any compensation payable by the
Council under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising out of
rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this Warranty. The
Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's Compensation
Policy for the execution of such works.
9
This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
works on account of the Contractor's and/or Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Council.
10
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, by a person nominated in writing
by him. Any decision by the Chairman or his nominee under this Clause shall be final and binding on and conclusive
against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may arise under this Warranty unless otherwise
determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this Warranty.
11
This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12
This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two
documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13
The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the
20

BLDG04/A5T.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

day of

APPENDIX A11
Page 1

INSTRUCTION ON WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION POLICY

1.

The Policy shall be issued in the prescribed form produced in Appendix A11 (please do not re-type).

2.

The Policy shall include the following requirements :

(a)

The Insured shall be "(Name of Contractor to insert) as Contractor and all his sub-contractors, and
the Housing & Development Board as Principal FTRR & I".

(b)

The period of insurance shall commence from the date the site is handed over to the Contractor and
shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract.

BLDG04/A11.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A11
Page 2

Policy No. :
Insurer's Company Stamp :

WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION POLICY

BLDG04/A11.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A11
Page 3
Policy No. :
Insurer's Company Stamp :

WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION POLICY

WHEREAS the Insured carrying on the Business described in the SCHEDULE and no other for the purpose of this
insurance by an application which shall be the basis of this contract and is deemed to be incorporated herein has
applied to the Insurer for the insurance hereinafter contained and has paid or agreed to pay the Premium stated in the
SCHEDULE as consideration for such insurance.
NOW THIS POLICY WITNESSETH that if any workman in the Insured's employment shall sustain personal injury by
accident or disease caused during the Period of Insurance and arising out of and in the course of his employment by
the Insured in the Business, the Insurer will subject to the terms exceptions conditions and warranties, and any
memorandum if applicable, contained herein or endorsed hereon (all of which are hereinafter collectively referred to
as the Terms of this Policy) indemnify the Insured against all sums for which the Insured shall be liable to pay
compensation either under the Legislation or at Common Law, and will in addition pay all costs and expenses incurred
by the Insured with the written consent of the Insurer.
In the event of the death of the Insured the Insurer will indemnify the Insured's legal personal representatives in
accordance with the Terms of this Policy in respect of liability incurred by the Insured provided that such personal
representatives shall as though they were the Insured observe comply fulfil and be subject to the Terms of this Policy
in so far as they can apply.
PROVIDED ALWAYS that in the event of any change in the Legislation or the substitution by other Legislation
therefor this policy shall remain in force and the Insurer reserves the right to charge additional premium therefor.
JURISDICTION
1.

This Policy shall be governed by the laws of the Republic of Singapore.

2.

The indemnity under this Policy shall not apply in respect of judgements which are not in the first instance
delivered by or obtained from a court of tribunal of competent jurisdiction within the Republic of Singapore.
AVOIDANCE OF CERTAIN TERMS AND RIGHT OF RECOVERY

Nothing in this Policy or any endorsement hereon shall affect :

(a)

the right of any person entitled to indemnity under this Policy; or

(b)

the right of any other person to recover compensation,

under or by virtue of the Legislation.

BUT the Insured shall repay to the Insurer all sums paid by the Insurer which the Insurer would not have been liable to
pay but for the Legislation.

BLDG04/A11.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A11
Page 4
Policy No. :
Insurer's Company Stamp :

EXCEPTIONS
The Insurer shall not be liable in respect of :
(a)

the Insured's liability to employees of independent contractors engaged by the Insured;

(b)

any employee of the Insured who is not a "workman" within the meaning of the Legislation unless such
employee of the Insured is covered under this Policy by virtue of Clauses 11 and 12 of the Conditions;

(c)

any injury by accident or disease attributable to war hostilities (whether war be declared or not) invasion act
of foreign enemies rebellion revolution insurrection or military or usurped power or civil war;

(d)

any liability of whatsoever nature directly or indirectly caused by or contributed to by or arising from :
(i)

ionising radiations or contamination by radioactivity from any nuclear fuel or from any nuclear waste
from the combustion of nuclear fuel radio-active toxic explosive or other hazardous properties of any
explosive nuclear assembly or nuclear component

(ii)

pressure waves caused by aircraft or other aerial devices travelling at sonic or supersonic speeds

(e)

any injury to any employee of the Insured resulting from an accident if it is proved that the injury to the
employee is directly attributable to the employee having been at the time thereof under the influence of
alcohol or a drug not prescribed by a medical practitioner unless the Insured is liable under the Legislation;

(f)

any incapacity or death resulting from a deliberate self-injury or the deliberate aggravation of an accidental
injury.
CONDITIONS

1.

This Policy and the SCHEDULE shall be read together as one contract and any word or expression to which
a specific meaning has been attached in any part of this Policy or the SCHEDULE shall bear such specific
meaning wherever it may appear.

2.

In so far as it is not prohibited by the Legislation the Insured shall at all times observe, comply and fulfil the
Terms of this Policy.

3.

The truth of the statements and answers in the application shall be conditions precedent to any liability of the
Insurer to make any payment under this Policy and shall be the basis of this contract.

4.

Every notice or communication to be given or made under this Policy shall be delivered in writing to the
Insurer.

5.

The Insured shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent accidents and disease to the Insured's
workman and shall comply with all statutory obligations and requirements.

BLDG04/A11.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A11
Page 5
Policy No. :
Insurer's Company Stamp :
6.

(a)

In the event of any accident which may give rise to a claim under this Policy, the Insured shall give
notice of the accident in accordance with the time limits set out by the Legislation to the Insurer with
full particulars.

(b)

In the case of any disease which may give rise to a claim under this Policy the Insured shall give
notice of the discovery of the disease to the Insurer within 30 days of his discovery.

(c)

Every letter claim writ summons and process shall be notified or forwarded to the Insurer immediately
on receipt. Notice shall also be given to the Insurer immediately the Insured shall have knowledge of
any impending prosecution inquest or fatal inquiry in connection with any such accident or disease.

7.

No admission offer promise or payment shall be made by or on behalf of the Insured without the written
consent of the Insurer. The Insurer shall be entitled if it so desires to take over and conduct in the Insured's
name the defence or settlement of any claim or to prosecute in the Insured's name for its own benefit any
claim for indemnity or damages or otherwise and shall have full discretion in the conduct of any proceedings
and in the settlement of any claim and the Insured shall give such information and assistance as the Insurer
may require.

8.

The Insurer may cancel this Policy by giving thirty (30) days' notice by registered letter to the Insured at his
last known address and in such event the Insurer will return to the Insured the premium paid less the actual
premium payable for the period during which the Policy had been in force subject to a minimum premium
#
payment of $
by the Insured.
This Policy may be cancelled at any time by the Insured by giving seven (7) days' written notice to the
Insurer and provided no claim has arisen during the period which the Policy had been in force the Insured
#
shall be entitled to a return of premium subject to a minimum premium payment of $
by
the Insured and subject to any adjustment of premium required by the terms or conditions of this Policy.
The Insurer shall notify the Principal Housing & Development Board before the cancellation of this Policy.

9.

This Policy shall cover all *

's insurance

obligations with regard to Workmen's Compensation stated in the Contract between the Principal Housing &
Development

Board

and

.
10.

(i)

In the event of any workman employed by the within Insured or by the Insured's Contractors as
referred to in (ii) hereon or any dependant of such workman, bringing or making a claim under any
Workmen's Compensation Act for the time being in force in Singapore or at Common Law against the
Principal Housing & Development Board for personal injury or disease sustained whilst at work on
any Contract covered by this Policy which the Insured may be carrying out for the Principal Housing &
Development Board the Insurer will indemnify the said Principal Housing & Development Board
against such claim and any costs charges and expenses in respect thereof. Provided always that the
Insurer shall be entitled to have the sole conduct and control of all proceedings connected with claims
covered by this. Nothing herein shall be construed as affecting the Insured's right to recover
damages in any other way under the said Legislation.

(ii)

The indemnity herein granted is intended to cover the legal liability of the Insured to workmen in the
employment of contractors performing work for the Insured while engaged in the business and
occupation in respect of which the Policy is granted but only so far as regards claims under any
Workmen's Compensation Act for the time being in force in Singapore or at Common Law.
*Name of Contractor to be inserted
#
To be filled in by Insurer

BLDG04/A11.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A11
Page 6
Policy No. :
Insurer's Company Stamp :

11.

In consideration of premium being paid in respect of employees of the Insured in an Occupation described in
the Schedule who are not a workman within the meaning of the Legislation it is hereby agreed that the
Insurer will not in the event of any accident or disease arising out of and in the course of their employment
by the Insured in the Business raise the defence that such employee is not a workman within the meaning of
the Legislation.

12.

In consideration of premium being paid in respect of employees of the Insured in an Occupation described in
the Schedule who are not a workman within the meaning of the Legislation it is hereby agreed that the Policy
is extended to indemnify the Insured in respect of the Insured's liability at common law for any accident or
disease arising out of and in the course of their employment by the Insured in the Business.

13.

All disputes or differences under this Policy shall be referred to Arbitration in accordance with the Arbitration
Act (Chapter 10) or any statutory re-enactment thereof. The making of an Award by an Arbitrator or
Arbitrators as hereinbefore specified shall be a condition precedent to any right of action against the Insurer.

14.

At any time after the happening of any accident or disease giving rise to a claim or series of claims under
this Policy the Insurer may pay to the Insured the full amount of the Insurer's liability and relinquish the
conduct of any claim defence or proceedings and the Insurer shall not be responsible for any damage loss or
liability alleged to have been caused to the Insured in consequence of any alleged act or omission of the
Insurer in connection with such claim defence or proceedings or of the Insurer relinquishing such conduct
nor shall the Insurer be liable for any costs or expenses whatsoever incurred by the Insured or any claimant
or other person after the Insurer shall have relinquished such conduct.
INTERPRETATION

1.

ALL references to "Legislation" in this Policy shall mean the Workmen's Compensation Act (Cap 354),
amendments and re-enactments thereof and any regulations made thereunder.

2.

Words used in the Policy shall have the same meanings as that defined in the Legislation.
WARRANTY

The Insured warrants that in the event of any failure by him to comply with any of the Terms of this Policy, he shall
repay to the Insurer all sums paid by the Insurer which the Insurer would not have been liable to pay but for the
Legislation.
PREMIUM WARRANTY CLAUSE
1.

Notwithstanding anything herein contained to the contrary, and subject only and without prejudice to Clause
2 hereinafter set out, it is hereby declared and agreed that it is a condition precedent to liability under this
Policy, Renewal Certificate, Endorsement or Cover Note that any premium due must be paid and actually
received in full by the Insurer, the registered broker or registered agent through whom this Policy was
effected :
(a)

BLDG04/A11.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

when the period of insurance is 60 days or more, within SIXTY (60) days from the :
(i)

INCEPTION date of the coverage under the Policy, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note; or

(ii)

EFFECTIVE date of the coverage stated on each Endorsement, if any, issued under the
Policy, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note when the effective date of coverage stated on the
Endorsement is on or after the issuance date of the Endorsement; or

APPENDIX A11
Page 7
Policy No. :
Insurer's Company Stamp :

(a)

Cont'd
iii.

ISSUANCE date of each Endorsement, if any, issued under the Policy, Renewal Certificate or
Cover Note where the effective date of coverage under the Endorsement is before the
issuance date;

OR
(b)

Where the total premium under any single Policy exceeds $

and the Insurer has allowed
payment of that premium by instalments within SIXTY (60) days from the :
(i)

INCEPTION date of the cover under the Policy, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note for the first
instalment and thereafter from the agreed dates on which the subsequent instalments become
payable; or

(ii)

EFFECTIVE date of coverage of any Endorsement issued under such Policy, for the first
instalment and thereafter from the agreed dates on which the subsequent instalments become
payable;

OR
(c)
2.

when the period of insurance is LESS than SIXTY (60) days, within the period of insurance specified
in the Policy, Endorsement, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note.

In the event any of the abovementioned premium is not paid in full to the Insurer, registered broker or
registered agent as described above in the manner and within the time stipulated above (the "premium
warranty period"), the cover under this Policy, Renewal Certificate, Endorsement or Cover Note shall be
deemed to have terminated from the expiry of the premium warranty period and the Insurer shall be
discharged from all liability therefrom but without prejudice to any liability incurred before that date and the
#
Insurer will be entitled to a pro-rata time on risk premium subject to a minimum of $
.

BLDG04/A11.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

To be filled in by Insurer

APPENDIX A12
Our Ref

Your Ref

Date

Tel
Fax No.

:
:

Housing & Development Board

Attn : SO Rep, Mr/Ms _____________________(CM i/c)
BY FAX
(Fax No. : 63972457)
Dear Sir
REQUEST FOR REVISION OF PROTECTED QUANTITY OF CONCRETING MATERIALS
CONTRACT NO. : __________________________________
SITE

: __________________________________

1
Pursuant to the Contract clause "Supply Of Concreting Materials From The Employer",
I wish to purchase a higher quantity of the concreting materials than that specified in the
Schedule of Protected Quantity.
2

The details of my request are as follows, for your approval :

No.

Material

Unit

Ordinary Portland Cement

Tonne

20mm Aggregate

Tonne

Concreting Sand

Tonne

Protected Quantity
Specified*
Proposed

*As specified in the Schedule of Protected Quantity

3
I understand that you reserve the right to approve a lower quantity for the respective
materials than the proposed quantity, and I undertake to accept any quantity which you so
approve.
Yours faithfully

________________________
(Signature)
Name

_________________________
(Company Stamp)

: _______________________________

Designation : _______________________________
(NOTE : THIS LETTER SHALL BE FAXED TO THE SO REP (FAX NO. 63972457) WITHIN
ONE (1) MONTH FROM THE DATE OF LETTER OF ACCEPTANCE, FAILING
WHICH THE REQUEST WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED)
BLDG04/A12.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A13
HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD
480 Lorong 6 TOA PAYOH
HDB HUB
SINGAPORE 310480

CONDITIONS FOR THE SUPPLY OF MATERIALS FROM THE EMPLOYER

DEFINITION

1.1

In this "Conditions For The Supply Of Materials From The Employer", the following words and expressions
shall have the meanings hereby assigned to them except where the context otherwise requires :
(a)

"Employer"

means the Housing & Development Board, Republic of

Singapore.

(b)

"Materials"

means Ordinary Portland Cement, Concreting Sand and 20mm

Aggregate to be supplied by the Employer.

(c)

"Surbana"

means Surbana Construction Resources Pte. Ltd., the company

engaged by the Employer for managing the supply &
distribution of Materials to the Contractor.

(d)

"SO Rep"

means the Superintending Officer's Representative. In addition,

for the purposes of managing the supply and distribution of
Materials to the Contractor only, shall also means the General
Manager of Surbana Construction Resources Pte. Ltd.

(e)

"Destination of Delivery"
or "Site"

means the Contract Site and/or any other places within

Singapore as approved by the SO Rep to which the Materials
shall be delivered.

(f)

Employers Supplier

shall mean the Employers supplier of the Materials who shall be

responsible for delivering the Materials to the Site.

1.2

Words importing the singular also include the plural and vice versa where the context requires.

SUPPLY ARRANGEMENT
The Materials shall be supplied by the Employer inclusive of delivery to the Destination of Delivery as
requested by the Contractor and approved by the SO Rep. The Employer's delivery service shall be
provided only for Destination of Delivery within Singapore.

SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS REQUIREMENT

The Contractor shall complete Form A as attached hereafter and submit by fax to the Surbana as
indicated at the top of the Form. The Form must be submitted ONE WEEK before the commencement of
the Contract for all the Materials to be obtained from the Employer. No Materials will be delivered prior to
the receipt of the duly completed Form.

BLDG04/A13.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A13
Page 2
4

MONTHLY ORDERS AND QUANTITY SUPPLIED

4.1

The Contractor shall submit monthly orders for each of the Materials required in separate order forms.

4.2

All monthly order forms shall reach the Surbana within the time indicated in the order forms.

4.3

The monthly order forms may be obtained from Surbana at the following address:
Surbana Construction Resources Pte. Ltd.
Tampines Avenue 10
Singapore 520000
Tel :
6786 1618
Fax :
6786 5996

4.4

Late and/or additional orders/loads may be accepted subject to the availability of supply and transport and
priority will be given to daily schedule. The Employer shall not be responsible for any delay or disruption
to the works as a result of late and/or additional orders. The Contractor shall allow for at least 2 working
days for the processing of any late and/or additional order.

4.5

The monthly ordered quantities shall indicate the quantities of Materials that the Contractor requires based
on the projected progress of work. Notwithstanding the quantities submitted by the Contractor in the
monthly orders, the SO Rep reserves the right to deliver the quantities which the SO Rep considers are
the quantities reflective of the Contractor's work progress. In such an event, the SO Rep shall inform the
Contractor of the allocated quantities.

4.6

The quantity of Materials delivered shall be determined by the Employer's weighbridges or the Employers
Suppliers weighbridges.

4.7

The Contractor shall consume at least 80% of their monthly orders. Any cancellation of the monthly orders
greater than 20% of the monthly orders shall be made in writing to the Surbana.

4.8

Additional orders for any particular month may be accepted only after the Contractor has consumed at
least 80% of the monthly ordered/allocated quantity. The Contractor must submit their written additional
order duly signed by SO Rep before sending to the Surbana (Please refer to 4.4)

4.9

The Contractor shall maintain at least 3 days' stock of Materials at their Site whenever possible.

DAILY DELIVERY OF MATERIALS

5.1

Notwithstanding the submission by the Contractor of the aforementioned Schedule of Materials

Requirement and the monthly orders of Materials or the revisions thereof, the Contractor shall place daily
orders of Materials directly with the Surbana.

5.2

The Contractor shall give at least TWO WORKING DAYS' PRIOR NOTICE for the daily delivery or
cancellation of supply. The notice shall reach Surbana before 4.00pm on weekdays and 12 noon on
Saturdays & the eves of public holidays.

BLDG04/A13.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A13
Page 3
5.3

The delivery of Materials shall be made from 8.00am to 6.00pm on Mondays to Saturdays. For any
delivery of Materials to be made after these hours, the Contractor shall be required to make his own
arrangement with the Employers Suppliers who are under no obligation to deliver after these hours.

5.4

All deliveries shall be made in full lorry loads and the Contractor shall not request delivery of partial lorry
loads in any case. In this respect, the Contractor shall note that delivery will cease at the last lorry load
before exceeding the quantity stipulated or approved in the Contract (hereinafter known as Stipulated
Contract Quantity). The Contractor shall inform Surbana separately in writing for any request for delivery
of an additional lorry load for the purpose of meeting the Stipulated Contract Quantity. For the quantities
exceeding the Stipulated Contract Quantity consequent to such delivery, the Contractor shall agree to pay
to the Employer the rates specified in the Contract for such quantities.

5.5

The Contractor shall sign and stamp the Delivery Orders with the appropriate stamp (see Table 2). If the
Contractor shall fail to observe this requirement, the SO Rep shall take appropriate action and the
Employer shall not be responsible for any resulting delay.

5.5.1

The Delivery Orders can only be stamped once. The Contractor shall inform Surbana immediately and
rectify the error if the Contractor has affixed the wrong Company stamp on the Delivery Orders. The SO
Rep reserves the right to suspend delivery of Material for three (3) days if such default happens more than
three (3) times within a calendar month, or to impose a charge as specified under the "Nuisance And
Irregularities" clause on the Contractor per default including the first three (3) defaults. The SO Rep
reserves the right to immediately suspend the delivery of Material for seven (7) days if the Contractor was
found to have failed to inform Surbana that they have affixed the wrong Company stamp. The Employer
shall not be responsible for any delays resulting from such suspensions.
Table 2
Different Types Of Rubber Stamps To Be Used
Information to be produced
on Contractor's Rubber Stamp

Destination of Delivery

Contract Site

1.
2.
3.

Contractor's Company Name

Contract Site
Contract No.

Ready-Mixed Company

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Contractor's Company Name

Contract Site
Contract No.
RMC Company
RMC Site

Batching Plant Site

1.
2.
3.
4.

Contractor's Company Name

Contract Site
Contract No.
Batching Plant Site

5.5.2

When a Delivery Order is signed by a Contractor's Representative (whether authorised or otherwise) with
the Contractor's Company stamp, the delivery is deemed to have been made to and accepted by the
Contractor and no dispute shall be raised by the Contractor that the said Materials have not been received
and accepted by the Contractor.

5.6

The Contractor shall immediately inform and request Surbana for instructions should there be any load of
Material wrongly delivered to the Site. The Contractor shall not alter any Delivery Order without the
consent of Surbana . The SO Rep reserves the right to take appropriate action against the Contractor for
any unauthorised alteration of the Delivery Orders.

5.7

The Contractor may submit a report to Surbana for appropriate action if the load of Material is unloaded at
a wrong place within the Site. This notwithstanding, the Contractor shall still acknowledge receipt of the
Material.

BLDG04/A13.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A13
Page 4
6

QUALITY OF MATERIALS SUPPLIED

The quality of Materials supplied by the Employer shall comply with the Specifications in the Contract.

WRITTEN APPROVAL FOR DELIVERY TO PLACES OTHER THAN THE CONTRACT SITE
The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the SO Rep for delivery of Materials to ready-mixed
companies, batching plant sites or to any other location or place.

SKETCH MAP AND ACCESS ROAD

8.1

The Contractor shall provide a sketch map in the space provided in Form A, showing the location of the
Site and the stockpile areas where the respective Materials should be delivered.

8.2

The Contractor shall maintain and ensure that all access roads at the Site leading to the stockpile areas
as shown on their sketch map are accessible to the lorries of the Employers Supplier. The Contractor
shall provide all necessary assistance and facilities to the Employers Supplier.

8.3

The SO Rep reserves the right to immediately suspend the supply of Materials if the access road to the
Site is bad or muddy. The SO Rep shall inform the Contractor of the suspension and the Contractor shall
take immediate action to make good the access roads and inform Surbana accordingly before delivery of
Materials can resume. The Employer shall not be responsible for any delay or disruption of the work as a
result of this aforesaid suspension.

8.4

The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay any summon issued by the Ministry Of The
Environment to the Employers Supplier(s) for muddying up public roads due to muddy access within the
Contractor's Site and the Contractor shall keep the Employer fully indemnified against such penalties and
liabilities. The Contractor is advised to employ labourers to wash the lorries of the Employer Supplier(s)
before the lorries leave the Contractor's Site.

ABSENCE OF SITE REPRESENTATIVE OR IN ACCESSIBLE ACCESS

If any load of Materials cannot, upon arrival at Site within the specified time, be unloaded due to the
absence of the Contractor's Site representative or bad access or failure to inform Surbana of any
termination of the usage of ready-mix companies, batching plant sites or to any other location or place, the
load of Material will be returned to Surbana. For such cases, the SO Rep reserves the right to recover
from the Contractor, the costs involved in transporting the Material and to impose a charge on the
Contractor as specified in the "Nuisance And Irregularities" clause in the Specifications.

10

SIPHONING OF MATERIALS
The Contractor shall not siphon Materials obtained from the Employer for his own use. Action shall be
taken by the SO Rep to impose a charge on the Contractor as specified in the "Nuisance And
Irregularities" clause in the event of any such breach.

BLDG04/A13.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A13
Page 5
11

LOSS OF DELIVERY ORDERS

If the Contractor loses any Delivery Order and wishes to request for a duplicate copy of the lost Delivery
Order, the SO Rep reserves the right to impose a fee of $50.00 (DOLLARS: FIFTY ONLY) per occasion.

12

METHOD OF PAYMENT
The Contractor shall pay the Employer in full for the value of Materials supplied every month at the rates
specified in the Contract. The amount owed by the Contractor shall be recoverable from the Contractor by
the Employer or may be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the
Contractor.

13

MISCONDUCT OF CONTRACTOR'S WORKMEN

The Contractor is required to exercise firm control over the conduct of his workmen, agents and staff at
the Site and shall give full cooperation to the Employers Suppliers drivers in the delivery and unloading of
Materials. Any grievances should be directed to the SO Rep in writing. The Contractor shall bear all the
cost plus administrative cost for investigations and other consequential expenses, if their complaints is
proven to be unfounded.

BLDG04/A13.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A13
Page 6
FORM A-1
HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD
(Manager:
Surbana Construction Resources Pte. Ltd
Fax: :67865996)

1)

FOR OFFICIAL USE

BCC Code
Tpt Zone

Site

Contract No.

Arch Ref

Checked By

Certified By

PARTICULARS OF CONTRACT

Nature of Contract (Building/CE/Others)*

Contract No.

Expiry of the Time For Completion

Site

Contractor's Office Address

Site Office Tel. No:

Office Tel. No:

Site Office Fax. No:

HDB Project Manager

Site Rep's Name

HDB Clerk-of-Works
(*) Delete where not applicable

2)

CAPACITY OF SITE STOCKYARD FOR

20mm Aggregate (Tonne)

Concreting Sand (Tonne)

Cement (Tonne)

3)

TIME FOR DELIVERY

Weekdays
From 8.00 a.m. to 6.00 p.m.

4)

Saturdays
From 8.00 a.m. to 6.00 p.m.

SAMPLE OF RUBBER STAMP

(Separate forms must be used if there are multiple locations for each of these destination)

Contract Site

Batching Plant Site

BLDG04/A13.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Ready-Mixed Company

APPENDIX A13
Page 7
FORM A-2
5)

SKETCH MAP
[Separate forms MUST be used for different "Destination of Delivery" and/or
multiple locations of each "Destination of Delivery"]

The sketch below shows the location of our work and stockpile area where the material should be delivered.

Site

Contract No.

Contractor's Stamp

Date

BLDG04/A13.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

P/

APPENDIX A13
Page 8
FORM A-3
SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL'S REQUIREMENT
SITE : ___________________________________________
CONTRACT NO. : __________________________________
S/N

MTH/YR

CONCRETING SAND
(T)

20MM AGGREGATE
(T)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
TOTAL
Note : Please fill in the month/yr and the quantities of each month's requirements for the whole contract.

BLDG04/A13.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

CEMENT (T)

APPENDIX A14
Page 1

TECHNICAL INFORMATION ON REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM

Clause 38.9 "Refuse Chute Flushing System"

The Contractor shall provide the following information when making submission to the SO Rep for approval.
Contract Title

__________________________________________

Contract No.

__________________________________________

SO Rep

__________________________________________

Block No.

__________________________________________

Location

__________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SOLENOID VALVES
Brand

__________________________________________

Type

__________________________________________

Model

__________________________________________

Country of Origin

__________________________________________

Voltage

Coil Insulation

Class _____________________________________

Enclosure Protection

__________________________________________

Flow Rating

Holding Power

Operating Temperature

Ambient temp

degree celcius

Fluid temp

degree celcius

0 to

Operating Pressure Range

BLDG04/A14.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

__

Volts

Hz

l/s when the pressure difference across the value is 1 bar.

w

bars

APPENDIX A14
Page 2

TECHNICAL INFORMATION ON REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM

Clause 38.9 "Refuse Chute Flushing System"

Material - Valve Body

__________________________________________

Plunger

__________________________________________

Diaphragm

__________________________________________

Others (please specify)

__________________________________________
__________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTROL PANEL
Control Panel Manufacturer

__________________________________________

MCB - Make

__________________________________________

- Type

__________________________________________

- Rating

__________________________________________

ELCB - Make

__________________________________________

- Type

__________________________________________

- Tripping Current

__________________________________________

__________________________________________

Printed Circuit Board Manufacturer

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Name of Contractor

__________________________________________

Address

__________________________________________
__________________________________________

Signature

__________________________________________

Name & Position

__________________________________________

Tel No.

__________________________________________

Date

__________________________________________

BLDG04/A14.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A14
Page 3

TESTING DATA ON REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM

Clause 38.9 "Refuse Chute Flushing System"

The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the booster
pumping system

Contract Title

Contract No.

Block No.

Ref No.

Location

Contractor

A. SOLENOID VALVE

C. CONTROL PANEL

1. Brand

1. Timer ( 0 - 30 ) mins

2. Type

2. Control MCB

3. Model

3. Red indicator light

4. Voltage

4. Green indicator light

B. PIPE, FITTING & VALVES

Brand

Brand

Model

5. Control relay AC 230V

1. Pipe

6. Terminal block

2. Fitting
3. 40mm Ball Stop Valve
4. 40mm Stopcock
5. 32mm Check Valve

Recorded & Submitted by :

________________________________
(Contractor's Name)/Company Stamp

_________________________
(Signature)/Date

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
FOR OFFICIAL USE
Solenoid Valve

Tested by :

Pass/Fail

____________________________
(1) TO/HTN/TN (
) Date
(2) TO/HTN/TN (
)

BLDG04/A14.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Checked & Verified by :

_________________________
STO/HTO (
) Date

APPENDIX A15
FORM PH-G2
Our Ref

Date

Tel
Fax

:
:

General Manager
M/s City Gas Pte Ltd
111 Somerset Road
#05-05
Singapore 238164
Attn :

______________________________________
(Name of City Gas Project Coordinator)

Thru' HDB's PMgr

(to be endorsed)
(Fax No.

APPLICATION FOR FINAL PRESSURE TEST OF GAS PIPE INSTALLATION AT

_____________________________________________________________________
(Name of Project and Block No.)
I, hereby, submit my application for testing of the following gas pipe installation work :
(Please tick the appropriate boxes)
External and internal gas service
pipe (at common area)

Internal gas pipe

(dwelling units)

The abovementioned work was carried out by our appointed LGSW (Name : _____________________
__________________________________________________________, Licence No. : ______________________)
The as-built drawings (inclusive of line diagram) duly endorsed is attached.
I will notify all parties of the date for Final Pressure Test.
I certify that the gas pipe installation for the above project has been completed under my supervision and
is in accordance with the approved plan, the Public Utilities Act 1995, the Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe
Installation, Singapore Standard, CP 51, the Procedures and Requirements for Gas Supply and all relevant acts,
regulations and rules, and is ready for the Final Pressure Test.
Yours faithfully
_______________________________________
Name & Signature of Contractor's PE
PE No.

: __________________

Contact No.

: __________________

Notes :

(a) The applicant shall be the Contractor's Professional Engineer.

(b) The DR(LGSW) must attend the final inspection and Final Pressure Test.

cc CA, HDB

(Attn : _____________________________)

CEME, HDB

(Attn : _____________________________)

CPM, HDB

(Attn : _____________________________) / CAD Reg

Unit PTO/STO Mr _____________________

BLDG04/A15.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A16
FORM PH-G1B
Our Ref

Date

Tel
Fax

:
:

General Manager
M/s City Gas Pte Ltd
111 Somerset Road
#05-05
Singapore 238164
Attn :

___________________________________
(Name of City Gas Project Coordinator)

Thru' HDB's PMgr :

(to be endorsed)
)

(Fax No.
Dear Sir

APPOINTMENT OF DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE (DR) FOR GAS PIPE INSTALLATION

AT __________________________________________________________________________
(Name of Project with Block No.)
I hereby appoint the following Licensed Gas Service Worker (LGSW) to be my Designated Representative
(DR) to liaise directly with your Project Coordinator on all matters relating to gas pipe installation. However I am still
fully responsible for all gas pipe installation matters in this project.
Name of DR (LGSW)

___________________________

Licence No.

___________________________

Address

___________________________

Tel No.

___________________________

Fax No.

__________________________

Yours faithfully

__________________________________________
NAME & SIGNATURE OF CONTRACTOR'S
PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER (PE)
PE NO.

_____________________

CONTRACT NO. :

_____________________

cc
CPM, HDB

(Attn: _________________) / CAD Reg

CEME, HDB (Attn: _________________)

Note :

This Form is to be used by the Contractor's PE if he wishes to delegate part of his responsibility
to the DR(LGSW).

BLDG04/A16.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A17
FORM PH-GR2

To :

Our Ref

Your Ref

Date

Tel
Fax No.

:
:

_______________________________ (PE / DR)

_______________________________
_______________________________

Dear Sir
APPROVAL FOR FINAL PRESSURE TEST AT
_________________________________________
(Name of Project & Block No.)
1
We are pleased to inform that your application for Final Pressure Test dated _______________ for gas
supply has been approved.
2

The test will be carried out on __________________ at _____________.

3
As the Designated Representative, you are required to be present. You are also required to notify all
parties of the date and time for the Final Pressure Test.
4

For clarification, please contact our Project Coordinator Mr _______________ at Tel _____________.

Yours faithfully

for SENIOR MANAGER

(CUSTOMER SUPPLY)

cc
CPM, HDB (Attn : ________________)

BLDG04/A17.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A18
FORM PH-G2A
To :

General Manager
City Gas Pte Ltd

CERTIFICATE OF FINAL PRESSURE TEST

Project at

___________________________________________________

Block Nos.

___________________________________________________

As-built Drawing Nos.

___________________________________________________

This is to certify that the above gas pipe installation has passed the Final Pressure Test on _____________.
No person shall be allowed to carry out any further work on the installation without prior written approval from
M/s City Gas Pte Ltd.

Confirmed by

________________________________________________
(Signature of LGSW)

Name of LGSW

________________________________________________

Licence No.

________________________________________________

Certified by

________________________________________________
(Signature of Professional Engineer)

Name of PE

________________________________________________

PE No.

________________________________________________

In the presence of

________________________________________________
(Signature of Clerk-of-Works)

Name of Clerk-of-Works

________________________________________________

Approved by

________________________________________________
(Signature of City Gas' PC)

Name of City Gas' Project Coordinator

________________________________________________

Date

________________________________________________

cc
CPM, HDB

(Attn :

CEME, HDB (Attn :

M/s Main Building Contractor (Attn : PE)

BLDG04/A18.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

) / HU _______(

)/CAD Reg

) - For your information.

APPENDIX A19
FORM PH-G3
Our Ref

Date

Tel
Fax

:
:

General Manager
M/s City Gas Pte Ltd
111 Somerset Road
#05-05
Singapore 238164
Attn :

____________________________________
(Name of City Gas Project Coordinator)

REQUEST FOR CHARGE-IN / TURN-ON OF GAS SUPPLY TO

______________________________________________________
(Name of Project & Block No.).
AS-BUILT PLAN NOS. : __________________________________
1
I certify that the block is ready to receive gas. I further certify that the gas pipe installation has passed the
Final Pressure Test, no further work would be carried out on the gas pipe installation after the Final Pressure Test and
is safe for CHARGE-IN / TURN-ON.
2
After charge-in / turn-on of the gas supply to the above project, I will inform all relevant parties accordingly
not to tamper with the gas pipe installation. I also undertake to affix warning labels at all end-points of the gas pipe
installation.
3
I attach a copy of the line drawing of the installation covered under this application. A copy of the line
diagram has been displayed at strategic location within the block.
4

The number of end-points in the gas pipe installation for the block is _______________________.

______________________________________________
Signature of Contractor's Professional Engineer

___________________
Date

Name of PE
:
________________________
PE No.
:
________________________
Tel. No.
:
________________________
Fax No.
:
________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONSENT BY OWNER (HDB's P. Mgr) AND MAIN CONTRACTOR
We consent to the above application.
(1)

(2)

Signature & Date

_________________________________

Name of HDB's P. Mgr.

_________________________________

Signature & Date

_________________________________

Name of Main Contractor's Rep.

_________________________________

cc
CAD Reg
C/W i/c ___________________________

BLDG04/A19.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A20
FORM PH-GR3

To :

Our Ref

Date

Tel
Fax

:
:

____________________________________________ (PE / DR)

____________________________________________
____________________________________________

Dear Sir
APPROVAL FOR CHARGE-IN / TURN-ON OF GAS SUPPLY AT
_______________________________________________________
(Name of Project & Block No.)
1
We refer to your application for charge-in/turn-on dated __________________ for gas supply to the above
project / block.
2
We are pleased to inform you that your application has been approved and the work will be carried out on
__________________ at ___________.
3

You are required to notify all relevant parties to witness the charge-in.

Yours faithfully

for SENIOR MANAGER

(CUSTOMER SUPPLY)

cc
CPM, HDB (Attn :

BLDG04/A20.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A21
FORM PH-GR4

To :

Our Ref

Date

Tel
Fax

:
:

________________________________________ (PE / DR)

________________________________________
________________________________________

Dear Sir
STATEMENT OF TURN-ON OR CHARGE-IN OF GAS SUPPLY TO
______________________________________________________________
(Name of Project & block no)
1
This is to inform you that in response to your application for turn-on/charge-in of gas supply to the above
premises, we have on __________________(date) at ______________(time) introduced gas into the above gas pipe
installation. Kindly notify all relevant parties that gas has been turned on / charged in to the above premises.
2
You are hereby informed that no further work on the above gas pipe installation can be undertaken without
our written approval.
Yours faithfully
_____________________________________
Name & Signature of authorised officer
City Gas Pte Ltd
I acknowledge that gas has been turned on / charged in on the date and time as indicated above.
________________________________
Signature & Company Stamp of
Applicant / Designated Representative
________________________________
Name & NRIC / Passport No
Witnessed by HDB's C/W (applicable to gas mains only)
_________________________________
Name & Signature of HDB's C/W

cc
CPM,

HDB (Attn : ____________________) / CAD Reg

CEME, HDB (Attn : ____________________)

BLDG04/A21.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A22
Page 1
DATA ON TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM
Clause 42.3 "Approval of Drawings and Details Of Transfer Pumping System"
The Contractor shall furnish the following data for all transfer pumping systems when making submission to the
SO Rep.
Contract Title

Contract No.

SO Rep

Building Block No.

No. of Storeys
:
___________________________________________________________________________________________
WATER SUPPLY
PUB direct water supply to :

storey

No. of dwelling units to be supplied from roof tanks

F = _______________________

Vertical Head from ground floor to inlet of roof tank

H =

metres

ROOF TANKS
(a)

Total effective capacity of roof tanks required C1 = 700F =

(b)

No. of separate Tank groups (to be interlinked) =

(c)

Tank internal dimension (Length x Width x Height)

Litres;

m3

Tank 1 =

m3

Tank 2 =

or;
(d)

No. x 11.83 m3 =

Precast tanks =

m3

SUCTION TANKS
(a)

m3

Capacity of suction tank =

Tank internal dimension (Length x Width x Height) =

x _________

or
(b) Precast tank =
No. x 3.731 m3 =
m3
___________________________________________________________________________________________
PUMP ROOM
Location

Platform Level

Floor space available

BLDG04/A22.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

_____________________________
m
Length x Width

m2

Height

APPENDIX A22
Page 2
DATA ON TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM
Clause 42.3 "Approval of Drawings and Details of Transfer Pumping System"

PUMP
Discharge Capacity Required

Q1 = 0.05F =

l/sec

Vertical Head

H1 =

m water

Proposed Pumps

Make

___________________________

Type

___________________________

Model ___________________________
Flow

Q2

l/sec

Total Head

H2

m water

Speed

rpm

Impeller Diameter

mm

Power required

KW

Pump efficiency

%
(Please attach characteristics curve for pumps)

The Contractor must proposed the pump to operate at maximum pump efficiency. However, the flow rate shall
preferably not exceed 10 l/s and the pump efficiency shall not in any case be less than 55%.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
MOTOR
Make

________________________________

Type

________________________________

Model

________________________________

Rated Output

________________________________ KW

Voltage/Phase/Frequency

________________________________

No-Load Speed

________________________________ RPM

Insulation Class

________________________________

Line Current at Full Load

: ________________________________ amp
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COUPLING
Make and Type

________________________________

Main Dimension

________________________________

BLDG04/A22.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A22
Page 3
DATA ON TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM
Clause 42.3 "Approval of Drawings and Details of Transfer Pumping System"
CONTROL PANEL
MCB for main incoming supply

Starter

Make

_________________________________________

Type

_________________________________________

Rating

_________________________________________

MAKE, TYPE AND MODEL __________________________

Capacity ________________________________________
Overload release ratings ___________________________
Approximate KW ratings:

KW at

ph

Floatless Level Switch

MAKE, TYPE & MODEL ___________________________

Time Switch

MAKE, TYPE & MODEL ___________________________

Reserve for

hrs

Selector Switch

MAKE, TYPE & MODEL ___________________________

Automatic Change Over Relay

_________________________________________

PIPELINES
Diameter of Suction Pipe :
Total Length of Suction Line :
No. and Type of Valves Along Suction Line :
Diameter of Discharge Pipe :
Diameter of Rising Main :
Total Length of Discharging Line :
No. and Type of Valves Along Discharge Line :

Remarks :

Name of Contractor

_________________________________________________

Address

_________________________________________________

Signature

Name :

___________________________

Telephone No.

Date

___________________________

BLDG04/A22.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A23
Page 1
TESTING DATA ON WATER TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM
Clause 42.26 "Testing of Transfer Pumping System Installation"

Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the transfer
pumping system.
Contract Name :

Contract No :

Block No :

Ref No :

Street Name :

Contractor :

Building Data
No. of Storey :

Dwelling units per storey :

Direct Supply :

storey

Total dwelling units from tanks (F) :

Total Head :

Required pumping capacity (0.05xF) :

l/s

Suction Tank: Precast Tank - Base Area of 2.865 m2

Pump / Motor Data

Type

Motor

Pump

TEFC

End Suction/Multi-stage

Brand
Model
Serial No 1
Serial No. 2
Coupling (brand / size )
Rated Output (kW)
Volt / Phase / Frequency
Insulation Class/Speed (rpm)

NA
415 / 3 / 50 Hz
/

Rated Current (A)

rpm

NA
NA

Impeller Diameter (mm)

NA

Specified capacity (l/s)

NA

Fittings Data

NA

80mm (Brand)

100mm (Brand)

Rubber expansion joint

NA

Suction gate valve

NA

Delivery gate valve

Check valve

BLDG04/A23.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A23
Page 2
Control Panel Data
Starter

- Brand/Model
- Type

Starter Changeover Relay

- Brand/Model

Starter MCB

- Brand/Model

Overload Relay

- Brand/Model
- Setting Range

Time switch

- Brand/Model
- Serial No

Latching Relay

- Brand/Model

8-Pin / 11-Pin Relay

- Brand/Model

Suction Tank Module

- Brand/Model

Storage Tank Module

- Brand/Model

Suction Tank Electrode Holder

- Brand

Storage Tank Electrode Holder

- Brand

Recorded & Submitted by :

(Contractor's Name)/Company Stamp

(Signature)

_________
Date

FOR OFFICIAL USE

Motor

Motor 1

Starting/Changeover Current (A)

Running Current (A) R/Y/B

Pump

Pump 1

Time for

Motor 2

/
/

Pump 2

mm of water

Approximate Capacity (l/s)

Tested by: _________________

1) TO/HTn/Tn (

) Date

2) TO/HTn/Tn (

Electrode Length (mm)

ST

NL

EA

BP

E0

Checked & Verified by :

E1

__________________________

E2

STO/HTO (

E3

BLDG04/A23.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

NA

) Date

APPENDIX A24
TESTING DATA ON INSTALLATION OF TELEMONITORING SYSTEM
FOR TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM
Clause 42.27.9 "Testing Of Installation"
Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the
Telemonitoring System for Transfer Pumping System.
Contract Title

Contract No.

Block No.

Ref No.

Street Name

Contractor

CONTROL PANEL

BACKUP BATTERY

Brand

Brand

Printed Circuit Board (PCB)

Model

Microprocessor (CPU)

Voltage

Panel Door Key No.

Ampere Hour (AH) Rating

Repair Technician's Key No.

TRANSFORMER
Primary Voltage

RELAYS IN LIFT MOTOR ROOM

Brand

Secondary Voltage

Model

Voltage Ampere (VA) Rating

Voltage

Submitted by :

_____________________
Name & Company's Stamp
Signature/Date
__________________________________________________________________________________________
FOR OFFICE USE ONLY
TYPE OF FAULTS

FAULT CODE

1.

SYSTEM POWER ON BATTERY

5 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY

2.

CONTROL SUPPLY POWER FAILURE

5 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY

3.

RED PHASE POWER FAILURE

5 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY

4.

YELLOW PHASE POWER FAILURE

5 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY

5.

BLUE PHASE POWER FAILURE

5 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY

6.

EMERGENCY & ALARM START

6 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY

7.

PUMP No. 1 TRIP

4 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY

8.

PUMP No. 2 TRIP

4 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY

9.

ROOF TANK OVERFLOW

3 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY

10.

SUCTION TANK OVERFLOW

1 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY

11.

SUCTION TANK LOW LEVEL

2 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY

12.

DUTY PUMP FAILURE

4 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY

REPAIR TECHNICIAN KEY - SWITCH TURNED ON

0 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY

Tested by

:
*TO/HTN/TN(

Checked and Verified by

) Date

/ _________________________
*TO/HTN/TN(
) Date

: ____________________________
*STO/HTO (
) Date
*Delete whichever is not applicable

BLDG04/A24.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A25
FORTNIGHTLY/MONTHLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON
TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD
Clause 42.28 "Servicing And Maintenance During Maintenance Period
(Transfer Pumping System)"
To :

Head (

Branch Office )

Date of Inspection :

Contract Title : _________________________________

Block No. :

Pump Room : 1/2#

Items

Location : _________________
Remedial
Action/Date

Checked

(A) FORTNIGHTLY
1.

General Condition of Pumproom

2.

Correct Setting of Time Switch

3.

Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position

4.

Power supply selector switch in "On" position

5.

Control panel indicating lights

6.

Alarm bell and bulb

7.

Suction Tank electrode and control module

8.

Motor Running Current

Pumpset 1
*

KW

Rated current :
Motor Output :
9.

Pumpset 2

80mm Check Valve

10. 80mm Gate Valve

11. Alignment of Couplings
12. 100mm Check Valve
13. 100mm Gate Valve
14. Ball Float Valve
(B) MONTHLY
(In addition to items in fortnightly inspection)
1.

Motor insulation (megaohms)

2.

Pump mechanical seal

3.

Pump Lubrication Oil Level (if applicable)

4.

Contractors and Relays

5.

Storage tank electrode and control module

Signature

____________________________________

Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC

/_________________

Name of Contractor

____________________________________

Acknowledge By

____________________________________
HTO/TO/HTn (H&M) (
) Date

#
%
X
*

:
:
:
:

Delete as necessary
Check and found in order
To rectify immediately
Reading by measuring instrument

BLDG04/A25.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A26
Page 1
DATA ON BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM
Clause 43.2 "Approval Of Drawings And Details Of Booster Pumping System"

The Contractor shall furnish the following data for all booster pumping systems when making submission to the
SO Rep.
Contract Title

Contract No.

Superintending Officer's Representative

Building Block No.

No. of Storeys

No. of Dwelling Units Per Storey

No. of Storeys served by Booster Pump

No. of Dwelling Units served by Booster Pumps

No. of Water Tanks on the Roof Top

:
_________________________________________________________________________________________
BOOSTER PUMPS
Discharge capacity required

l/sec

Pressure Head

m water

Shut-off Pressure Head

Ns

m water

Proposed Booster Pumps

Make

_____________________________

Type

_____________________________

Model _____________________________
Speed

rpm

Impeller Diameter

mm

Power required

kw

(Please attach characteristics curve for booster pumps)

_________________________________________________________________________________________

BLDG04/A26.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A26
Page 2
DATA ON BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM
Clause 43.2 "Approval of Drawings and Details of Booster Pumping System"

MOTOR
Make

_____________________________________

Type

_____________________________________

Model

_____________________________________

Rated Output

Voltage/Phase/Frequency

No-Load Speed

Insulation Class

KW
_____________________________________
RPM
_____________________________________

Line Current at Full Load

:
amp
_________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTROL PANEL
MCB for Main Incoming Supply

Make

________________________________________

Type

________________________________________

Rating ________________________________________
Soft-Starters

BRAND AND MODEL ____________________________

CAPACITY _____________________________________

Overload Release Ratings

_______________________________________________

KW Ratings

Floatless Level Switch

BRAND AND MODEL ____________________________

Flow Sensor

BRAND AND MODEL ____________________________

Selector Switch

BRAND AND MODEL ____________________________

kw at

ph

Automatic Change over relay

:
_______________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Name of Contractor

_________________________________________________

Address

_________________________________________________

Signature

Name :

_______________________

Tel No.

Date

_______________________

BLDG04/A26.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A27
TESTING DATA ON BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM
Clause 43.18 "Testing of Booster Pumping System Installation"
Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the booster
pumping system.
Contract Name :

Contract No :

Block No. :

Ref No. :

Street Name :

Contractor :

Pump Data
Brand

Model

Serial No. 1

Rated output

kW

Serial No. 2

Rated current

Amp

Fittings Data
40mm Ball Stop Valve

15mm Ball Stop Valve

40mm Check Valve

15mm Stop Cock

Pressure Gauge Range

Flow Sensor

Control Panel Data

Brand

Model

Serial No./Range

Soft Starter

NA

Overload Relay

Amp

Timer

Min

Delay Timer
Control Module

NA

Control MCB

Amp

Starter MCB

Amp

Control Relay

NA

Latching Relay

NA

Recorded & Submitted by :

(Contractor's Name)/Company Stamp

__________
Date

(Signature)

FOR OFFICIAL USE

Booster Pump Pressure

Mode 1

Passed / Failed

Electrode

E0

Pump No. 1

Mode 2

Passed / Failed

Length/mm

E1

Pump No. 2

Mode 3

Passed / Failed

E2
E3

Tested by :
1) TO/HTn/Tn (
2) TO/HTn/Tn (

BLDG04/A27.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Checked & Verified by :

) Date
)

_________________________
STO/HTO (

) Date

APPENDIX A28

MONTHLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON

BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD
Clause 43.19 "Servicing And Maintenance During Maintenance Period
(Booster Pumping System)"

To :

Head (

Branch Office )

Date of Inspection :

Contract Title: __________________________________

Block No. :

Pump Room : 1/2#

Items

Location : __________________
Remedial
Action/Date

Checked

1.

Flow Sensor

2.

Soft-starter, relay and control module

3.

Power, supply selector switch in "On" position

4.

Control panel indicating lights

5.

Electrodes in storage tanks

6.

Motor Running Current

Pumpset 1

Rated current :

Motor Output :

KW

7.

Motor insulation (megaohms)

8.

Pump mechanical seal

9.

Pressure gauges

Pumpset 2

10. 40mm check valves and bell stop valves

11. Thrust supports at distribution main

Signature : ________________________________________

:

Check and found in order

Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC:

/_______

X : To rectify immediately

Name of Contractor : ________________________________

* : Reading by measuring instrument

Acknowledge By : __________________________________
HTO/TO/HTn (H&M) (
) Date

BLDG04/A28.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A29
Page 1
HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD

SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA

The technical data provided hereunder is for information only and shall not override any requirements specified in the
Specifications. The requirements specified in the Specifications shall be regarded as minimum only and should any
materials or equipment described in this Schedule fall below the minimum requirements, the Specifications shall
prevail. Catalogues should be enclosed to provide more comprehensive information wherever possible.
WET RISING MAIN
1.

WET RISING MAIN PUMPSETS

(The Contractor shall state pump working heads taking into account the systems as designed and all
equipment, etc offered by the Contractor).
Particulars
Pumps
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type & Model No.
Materials
Casing
Shaft
Impeller
Type of Bearings
Nominal Characteristics
Flow rate (l/min)
Discharge head (bar)
KW
Efficiency (%)
Pump RPM
Churning Pressure (bar)

BLDG04/A29.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Fire Pump
Electrical

Fire Pump
Diesel Driven

Transfer Pump
Electrical

Transfer Pump
Diesel Driven

APPENDIX A29
Page 2
1.

WET RISING MAIN PUMPSETS (CONT'D)

Particulars
Motors
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
KW
RPM
Electrical Rating (V/Phase/Hz)
Full load current (A)
Max. Starting Current (A)
Type of Drive/Coupling
Insulation Class
Enclosure Protection Class
Vibration Isolators
Manufacturer
Static Deflection (mm)
Type of Model No.
Motor Starters
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Protecting Devices
Total Operating Wt of
Pumpsets (kg)

BLDG04/A29.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Electrical

Diesel Driven

Transfer Pump
Electrical

Transfer Pump
Diesel Driven

APPENDIX A29
Page 3
2.

JOCKEY PUMPSETS
(The Contractor shall state pump working heads taking into account the systems as designed and all
equipment, etc offered by the Contractor)
Particulars
Pumps
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type & Model No.
Materials
Casing
Shaft
Impeller
Type of Bearings
Nominal Characteristics
Flow rate (l/min.)
Discharge head (bar)
KW
Efficiency
Pump RPM
Type of shaft seal
Motors
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type & Model
KW
RPM
Electrical Rating (V/Phase/Hz)
Full Load Current (A)
Max. Starting Current (A)
Type of Drive/Coupling
Vibration Isolators
Manufacturer
Make/Type/Model
Static Deflection (mm)
Total Operating Wt of Pumpsets (kg)

BLDG04/A29.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Jockey Pump

APPENDIX A29
Page 4
3.

PIPEWORK (N.B. ONLY ONE MANUFACTURER SHALL BE INDICATED)

Ductile
Iron Pipe

Steel Pipes
to BS 3601

Material of
Valve Body

Material
of Valve

Other
Information

Water Level Gauges

NA

NA

Water Motor Alarms c/w

alarm gongs and water
turbines

NA

NA

Fire Brigade Breeching

Inlet

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

Particulars

Black
Steel Pipe

Galvanized
Steel Pipe

Stainless
Steel Pipe

Manufacturer
Local Supplier
Country of Origin
Grade (Thickness)
BS Specification
Manufacturer of Pipe
Fittings

4.

VALVES, GAUGES & PIPE FITTINGS

Particulars

Make

Type

Model

Isolating Gate Valves

Alarm Valves
Non-return Valves
Strainers
Drain Cocks
Gauge Cocks
Combined Drain & Test
Valves
Automatic Air Vents
Anti-Vibration Couplings
Ball Float Valves
Pressure Gauges
Globe Valve
Pressure Relief Valve
Vortex Inhibitor

BLDG04/A29.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A29
Page 5
5.

CONTROL PANELS
Particulars

Manufacturer

Wet Rising Main Pump Control Panel

Wet Rising Main Transfer Pump Control Panel
Jockey Pump Control Panel

6.

D.C. POWER SUPPLY UNITS

Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type/List No./Model
Output Voltage Per Cell

Volt

No. of Cell
Operating Voltage

Volt

Ampere Hour for 10-hour Rating

AH

Dimension

mm

Battery Chargers
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type/List No.
Output Voltage Range

Volt

Charging Rate - Normal

Amp

- Maximum

BLDG04/A29.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Amp

Country of
Origin

Local Supplier

APPENDIX A29
Page 6
7.

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS IN CONTROL PANELS

Particulars

Make

Type

Model

Rated
Voltage

Other
Information

Contactors
Ammeters
Voltmeters
Push Buttons
Key Switches
Selector Switches
MCB
Timers
Relays
Indicating Lamps
(transformer operated)
Terminal Boards
Anti-Condensation Heaters
Current Transformers
HRC Fuses
Isolating Switches
MCCB
Earth Leakage Relay

8.

ELECTRICAL WIRING & ACCESSORIES

Particulars
PVC Cable & Jointing Accessories
Conduit & Accessories
Cable Trunking & Accessories
Cable Tray & Accessories
Floatless Level Control Relay Unit

BLDG04/A29.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Manufacturer

Country of Origin

Local Agent

APPENDIX A29
Page 7
9.

10.

11.

PIPE SPRING HANGER

Make, Type & Model

___________________

Size (mm)

___________________

Rated Capacity (kg)

___________________

Rated Static Deflection (mm)

___________________

Material of Spring

___________________

Spring Constant (kg/m)

___________________

FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTOR

Make, Type & Model

___________________

Material

___________________

Maximum Working Pressure/Temperature

___________________

Maximum Vacuum (mm Hg)

___________________

Minimum burst pressure (Kpa)

___________________

Allowable elongation/compression/transverse movement (mm)

___________________

Allowable Angular Movement

___________________

DIRECT READING WATER FLOW METER

Make/Type/Model

___________________

Operation water flow range (1/min)

___________________

Accuracy (%)

___________________

____________________________________
Signature & Official Stamp of Contractor
Date :

BLDG04/A29.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A30
Page 1
TESTING DATA ON WET RISER SYSTEM
Clause 44.5 "Test On Rising Main System"

The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the wet riser
system.

Contract Title :

Contract No. :

Block No. :

Ref No :

Location :

Contractor :

Building Data
Suction Tank size : ______ x ______ x ______ M

Transfer Tank size : ______ x ______ x ______ M

Total Head :

(m)

Total Head :

(m)

Required pumping capacity :

(l/s)

Required pumping capacity :

(l/s)

Motor Data

Jockey
Pump 1

Fire
Pump 1

Fire
Pump 2

Transfer
Pump 1

Transfer
Pump 2

Jockey
Pump 1

Fire
Pump 1

Fire
Pump 2

Transfer
Pump 1

Transfer
Pump 2

Brand
Type (FM,UL,LPC or other
acceptable by FSSD)
Model
Serial No.
Rated Output (KW)
Volt/Phase/Frequency
Insulation Class/Speed (RPM)
Rated Current (A)

Pump Data
Brand
Model
Type (FM,UL,LPC or other
acceptable by FSSD)
Serial No.
Impeller Diameter (mm)
Specified capacity (l/s)

BLDG04/A30.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A30
Page 2
TESTING DATA ON WET RISER SYSTEM
Clause 44.5 "Testing on Rising Main System"

The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the wet riser
system.
Control Panel Data
Starter

Brand

Starter Change over

Starter MCB

Overload Protector

Fitting
Coupling

Rubber expansion joint

Gate valve

Check valve

Flow switch
Flow meter
Motorize valve
Pressure gauge
Pressure switch

BLDG04/A30.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

11-Pin Relay

Brand

Model

Model

Type

Type

Brand

8-Pin Relay

Brand

Model

Model

Type

Type

Brand

Latching Relay

Brand

Model

Model

Type

Type

Brand

Time Switch

Brand

Model

Model

Setting

Type

Size

Brand

Type

APPENDIX A30
Page 3
TESTING DATA ON WET RISER SYSTEM
Clause 44.5 "Testing on Rising Main System"

The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the wet riser
system.

Fitting

Size

Brand

Type

Limit switch
Landing valve
Breeching Inlet

Recorded & Submitted by :

________________________
(Contractor's Name)/Company Stamp
(Signature)/Date
___________________________________________________________________________________________
FOR OFFICIAL USE
Motor

Jockey
Pump

Fire
Pump 1

Fire
Pump 2

Transfer
Pump 1

Transfer
Pump 2

Jockey
Pump

Fire
Pump 1

Fire
Pump 2

Transfer
Pump 1

Transfer
Pump 2

Starting/Changeover Current (A)

Running Current (A)

R
Y
B

Pump
Approximate Capacity (l/s)

Tested by

__________________________________
1) HTO / TO (
)
Date
2) HTO / TO (
)

Checked & Verified by

__________________________________

BLDG04/A30.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A31
BI-YEARLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON
DOWN-COMER / DRYRISER SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD
Clause 44.6 "Servicing And Maintenance Procedures For Dry Rising Main"

To :

Head (

Branch Office )

Date of Inspection :

Contract Title : ____________________________

Block No. :

Location : ________________________________
Items

Checked

Remedial Action / Date

1. Hydrostatic pressure test for 2 hours*

2. Check and inspect all landing valves
condition (open and shut position)
3. Check landing valve handle secure
with strapper and cap in position
4. Check earthing terminal connection
5. Check Breeching inlets condition
6. Additional requirements from FSSD

Other Comments

#
%
X
*
+

:
:
:
:
:

Delete as necessary
Check and found in order
To rectify immediately
Reading by measuring instrument
Test to be done Yearly

Signature : _____________________________________
Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC :

/_____

Name of Contractor : _____________________________

Acknowledge By : ________________________________
HHMI/HMI (
) Date

BLDG04/A31.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A32
Page 1
MONTHLY/QUARTERLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON
WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD
Clause 44.7 "Servicing And Maintenance Procedures For Wet Rising Main System"

To :

Head (

Branch Office )

Date of Inspection :

Contract Title : __________________________________

Block No. :

Pump Room Location (s) : _________________________

Items

Remedial
Action/Date

Checked

Monthly/Quaterly
1.

General Condition of Pumproom

2.

Correct Setting of Time Switch

3.

Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position

Power supply selector switch in "On" position

5.

Control panel indicating lights

6.

Alarm bell and bulb

7.

Contractors and Relays

8.

Check and tighten control panel wiring +

9.

Suction Tank electrode and control module

10. (i)

Transfer
Pumpset 1

Transfer Pump
Rated current :

Motor Output :

KW

Fire Pumpset 1

Fire Pumpset 2

(ii) Fire Pump

Rated current :

Motor Output :

KW

B
Jockey
Pumpset 1

(iii) Jockey Pump

Rated current :

Motor Output :

KW

11. Pump Running Pressure

Transfer
Pumpset 2

A
Pumpset 1

Pumpset 2

Transfer Pump

(bar)

(bar)

Fire pump

(bar)

(bar)

Jockey Pump

(bar)

BLDG04/A32.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A32
Page 2
MONTHLY/QUARTERLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON
WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD
Clause 44.7 "Servicing And Maintenance Procedures For Wet Rising Main System"

Items

12. Pump / Motor Condition

Remedial
Action/Date

Checked
Jockey
Pump

Fire
Pumpset
1

Fire
Pumpset
2

Transfer
Pumpset
1

Transfer
Pumpset
2

Motor insulation test +

Motor Running condition
Pump mechanical seal
Pump Lubrication Oil Level (if applicable)
13. Alignment of Couplings
14. Ball Float Valve condition

Tank 1

Tank 2

Transfer tank
Fire tank
15. 100mm Check Valve
16. 100mm Gate Valve
17. 150mm Check Valve
18. 150mm Gate Valve
19. Discharge and refill water in riser pipe +
20. Check and inspect all landing valves
condition +
21. Check Breeching inlets condition
22. Update Log Book
23. Additional requirements from FSSD

Other Comments :

#

X
*
+

:
:
:
:
:

Delete as necessary
Check and found in order
To rectify immediately
Reading by measuring instrument
Test to be done quarterly

Signature : _____________________________________
Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC :

/______

Name of Contractor : _____________________________

Acknowledge By : ________________________________
HHMI/HMI (
) Date

BLDG04/A32.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A33
Page 1
LIST "A" - SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA
The Contractor shall provide all technical data as set out below. The technical data provided hereunder is for
information only and shall not override any requirements of the Specifications. The requirements of the Specifications
shall be regarded as minimum only and should any materials or equipment described in this Schedule fall below the
minimum requirements, the Specifications shall prevail. Catalogues should be enclosed to provide more
comprehensive information wherever possible.
1.

2.

HOSE REEL BOOSTER PUMP

Make

__________________________________________________

Country of origin

__________________________________________________

Type

__________________________________________________

Model

__________________________________________________

No. of units

__________________________________________________

Casing material

__________________________________________________

Impeller material

__________________________________________________

Shaft material

__________________________________________________

Flow rate

__________________________________________________

Head

__________________________________________________

Speed (r.p.m.)

__________________________________________________

Impeller diameter

__________________________________________________

Motor rated output

__________________________________________________

Motor make, type and model

__________________________________________________

Voltage/Phase/Frequency

__________________________________________________

Motor insulation class

__________________________________________________

Line current at full load

__________________________________________________

MOTOR STATER
Make, type and model

__________________________________________________

Rating

__________________________________________________

Overload release rating

__________________________________________________
Approx. KW rating ________KW at _______V _______Ph

Voltage/Phase

3.

__________________________________________________

FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNIT

Make

__________________________________________________

Type

__________________________________________________

Model

__________________________________________________

BLDG04/A33.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A33
Page 2
LIST "A" - SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA
4.

5.

PRESSURE TANK
Country of origin

__________________________________________________

Make

__________________________________________________

Type

__________________________________________________

Model

__________________________________________________

Capacity

__________________________________________________

Operating pressure

__________________________________________________

Maximum working pressure

__________________________________________________

Casing material

__________________________________________________

Diaphragm material

__________________________________________________

Internal coating material

__________________________________________________

RUBBER HOSE
Make

6.

Type

__________________________________________________

Material

__________________________________________________

Diameter (internal)

__________________________________________________

Length

__________________________________________________

Working pressure

__________________________________________________

PRESSURE GAUGE
Make, type & model

7.

8.

__________________________________________________

__________________________________________________

Range (Bar)

__________________________________________________

Material in contact with water

__________________________________________________

Enclosure Protection

__________________________________________________

PRESSURE SWITCH
Make, type & model

__________________________________________________

Range (Bar)

__________________________________________________

Maximum working pressure (Bar)

__________________________________________________

Upper limit (Bar)

__________________________________________________

Material in contact with water

__________________________________________________

Enclosure Protection

__________________________________________________

Voltage/Frequency

__________________________________________________

FLOW SWITCH
Make, type, model

__________________________________________________

Rang (L/s)

__________________________________________________

Maximum working pressure (bar)

__________________________________________________

Material in contact with water

__________________________________________________

Enclosure protection

__________________________________________________

Voltage/frequency

__________________________________________________

BLDG04/A33.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A33
Page 3
LIST "A" - SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA
9.

SOLENOID VALVE
Make, type & model

10.

__________________________________________________

Body material

__________________________________________________

Valve seat material

__________________________________________________

Stem material

__________________________________________________

Maximum working pressure

__________________________________________________

Test pressure (Bar)

__________________________________________________

Uv value (MH/Bar)

__________________________________________________

MISCELLANEOUS
Make
a.

Gate valve

Type

Model

_______________

_______________

_______________

b.

Check valve

_______________

_______________

_______________

c.

Strainer

_______________

_______________

_______________

d.

Floatless level control relay unit

_______________

_______________

_______________

e.

Globe valve

_______________

_______________

_______________

f.

Selector switch

_______________

_______________

_______________

g.

Automatic changeover relay

_______________

_______________

_______________

h.

Time switch

_______________

_______________

_______________

i.

Automatic air vent

_______________

_______________

_______________

j.

Ball float valve

_______________

_______________

_______________

k.

Shut-off nozzle

_______________

_______________

_______________

l.

Flexible coupling

_______________

_______________

_______________

m. Pipe spring hanger

_______________

_______________

_______________

n.

Ball stop valve

_______________

_______________

_______________

o.

Alarm bell

_______________

_______________

_______________

p.

Auxiliary relay

_______________

_______________

_______________

q.

Pressure relief valve

_______________

_______________

_______________

r.

Indicator lamp

_______________

_______________

_______________

s.

Pipe

_______________

_______________

_______________

_______________________________________
Signature & Official Stamp of Contractor/s
Date : __________________

BLDG04/A33.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A34
Page 1
TESTING DATA ON HOSE REEL SYSTEM
Clause 45.5 "Testing And Commissioning"

The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the hose reel
system.

Contract Name :

Contract No :

Block No. :

Ref No. :

Location :

Contractor :

Building Data
Suction Tank size :

Suction Tank size :

Total Head :

(m)

Required pumping capacity

(l/s)

Hose Reel Hose Reel

Motor 1
Motor 2

Motor Data

Hose Reel Hose Reel

Pump 1
Pump 2

Pump Data

Brand

Brand

Type (FM, UL, LPC or

other acceptable by FSSD)

Type (FM, UL, LPC or

other acceptable by FSSD)

Model

Model

Serial No.

Serial No.

Rated Output (KW)

Impeller Diameter (mm)

Volt/Phase/Frequency

Specified capacity (l/s)

Insulation Class/Speed (rpm)

Rated Current (A)

Control Panel Data

Brand
Starter

Floatless level control

Relay

Starter MCB

BLDG04/A34.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Model

Brand
11-Pin Relay

Model

Type

Type

Brand

Brand

Model

8-Pin Relay

Model

Type

Type

Brand

Brand

Model

Model

Type

Latching Relay

Type

Model

Model

Setting

Type

APPENDIX A34
Page 2
TESTING DATA ON HOSE REEL SYSTEM
Clause 45.5 "Testing And Commissioning"

The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the hose reel
system.

Fitting

Size

Brand

Type

Coupling

Rubber expansion
joint
Gate valve

Check valve

Flow switch
Flow meter
Solenoid valve
Pressure gauge
Pressure switch
Limit switch
Pressure tank 1
Pressure tank 2
Rubber hose reel

Recorded & Submitted by :

(Contractor's Name)/Company Stamp

BLDG04/A34.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

________________________
(Signature)/Date

APPENDIX A34
Page 3
TESTING DATA ON HOSE REEL SYSTEM
Clause 45.5 "Testing And Commissioning"

The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the hose reel
system.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
FOR OFFICIAL USE

Motor

Hose Reel
Pump 1

Hose Reel
Pump 1

Hose Reel
Pump 1

Hose Reel
Pump 1

Starting/Changeover Current (A)

Running Current (A)

R
Y
B

Pump
Approximate Capacity (l/s)

Tested by

_________________________________
1) HTO / TO (
) Date
2) HTO / TO (
)

Checked & Verified by

_________________________________
DEng (
)
Date

BLDG04/A34.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A35
MONTHLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT
ON HOSE REEL PUMPING SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD
Clause 45.6.4 "Servicing And Maintenance Schedule"
To :

Head (

Branch Office )

Date of Inspection :

Contract Title : __________________________________

Block No. :

Pump Room Location : ___________________________

Items

Remedial
Action/Date

Checked

Monthly
1

General Condition of Pumproom

Correct Setting of Time Switch

Auto/Manual Selector Switch in "Auto" Position

Power Supply Selector Switch in "on" Position

Control Panel indicating Lights

Alarm Bell and Bulb

Suction Tank Electrode and Control Module

Motor Running Current

Pumpset 1

Rated Current :

Motor Output

KW

Check Valves

10

Gate Valves

11

Ball Float Valves

12

Motor Insulation (Megaohms)

13

Pump Mechanical Seal

14

Pump Lubrication Oil Level (if applicable)

15

Contactors and Relays

16

Hose Reel

17

Pressure and Flow Switches

18

Update Log Book

# : Delete as necessary
 : Check and found in order
X : To rectify immediately
* : Reading by measuring instrument

Pumpset 2

Signature : _____________________________________
Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC : _______________
Name of Contractor : _____________________________
Acknowledge By : ________________________________
HHMI/HMI (
) Date

BLDG04/A35.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A36

LIST OF RELEVANT BRITISH STANDARDS

APPLICABLE TO ELECTRICAL WORKS

Current issues of appropriate British Standard Specifications and Codes of Practice with particular reference to this
project for electrical works are :
BS 10

Flanges and Bolting for Pipes, Valves and Fittings

BS 37

Electricity meters

BS 81

Instrument Transformers

BS 88

Electric Fuses

BS 89

Electric Indicating Instruments

BS 142

Electrical Protection Relays

BS 162

Electrical Power Switch Gear and Associated Apparatus

BS 170

The Electrical Performance of Fractional Horsepower Electric Motors and Generators

BS 587

Motor Starters and Controllers

BS 636

Covered Electrodes for the Manual Arc Welding of Mild Steel and Medium Tensile Steel

BS 729

Zinc Coating on Iron and Steel Articles

BS 77

Contactors

BS 848

Methods of Testing Fans for General Purposes

BS 861

Air Break Switches and Isolators

BS 1856

General Requirements for the Metal Arc Welding of Mild Steel

BS 2004

PVC Insulated Cables and Flexible Cords

BS 2613

The Electrical Performance of Rotating Electrical Machinery

BS 2757

Classification of Insulating Materials

BS 3078

Isolators for Alternating Current System

BS 3601

Steel Pipes and Tubes for Pressure Purposes

BS 6207

Mineral Insulated Cables

BS 6346

PVC Insulated Cables for Electricity Supply

BLDG04/A36.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A37

SCHEDULE OF RECOMMENDED GAUGES FOR

RECTANGULAR DUCT CONSTRUCTION

Dimension of
Longest Side of Duct

Steel Metal Gauges

Reinforcement

Thru 250

26

Flat drive slip at 1500 centres

251 thru 300

26

Flat drive slip at 1500 centres

301 thru 350

24

Flat drive slip at 2400 centres

351 thru 450

24

Flat drive slip at 2400 centres

451 thru 500

26

Flat drive slip at 1500 centres

501 thru 650

22

25 x 25 x 2 Steel Angle at 2400 centres

651 thru 750

20

25 x 25 x 3 Steel Angle at 2400 centres

751 thru 900

18

32 x 32 x 3 Steel Angle at 2400 centres

901 thru 1200

16

38 x 38 x 5 Steel Angle at 2400 centres

1201 thru 1350

18

38 x 38 x 3 Steel Angle at 1500 centres

1351 thru 1500

18

50 x 50 x 3 Steel Angle at 1500 centres

BLDG04/A37.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A38
MONTHLY/ANNUAL TEST REPORT
{Pursuant to subclause 63.12.1.1(C)}
MAINTENANCE OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Location :

Time :

_______________________

Type of Test : Monthly/Annual*

Date :

_______________________

Alarm Zone
Test
Thermal

Isolation
In-situ
Test

Smoke

Isolation
In-situ

Detectors+

Test
Flame

Isolation
In-situ
Test

Manual
Call Point

Isolation
In-situ

Main Supply
Charger+
And Batteries

Operative

Non-Operative

Remarks

Battery
Charger
Emergency Lamp On

Alarm Monitoring
Station

Alarm Transmitter
Alarm Sounder

Alarm+
And Ancillary

Ancillary Controls
Fault Buzzer

Remarks :

I hereby certify that the above tests have been

carried out
Tester's Name ___________________________
Signature _______________________________
Witnessed By ____________________________

________________________________________

Signature _______________________________

* Delete if unapplicable.
+ Tick if satisfactory; put asterisk '*' if unsatisfactory and give explanation under the remarks space.

BLDG04/A38.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A39
Page 1

MECHANICAL VENTILATION SYSTEM - PRELIMINARY INSPECTION

Location of Shelter
Estate

______________________________________

Block

______________________________________

Address

______________________________________

Shelter Type

______________________________________

Date & Time of Test

______________________________________

Ventilation Fan
Description

Observation

Remarks

1. To check the size of anchors

2. Fan base to be mounted properly
3. To check the fan could be rotated by hand smoothly
4. Flexible connection to be installed properly
5. Power cable to be connected properly

Ductwork
Description
1. To check the size of expansion
bolts of ductwork support
2. To check on size and rigidity of
support
3. To check on the interval of
support
4. To check the joint connection of
ductwork
5. To check on proper installation of
flexible connection
6. To damper is installed in correct
position
7. To check damper is installed
rigidly

BLDG04/A39.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Design

Actual

Observation

Remarks

APPENDIX A39
Page 2

MECHANICAL VENTILATION SYSTEM - PRELIMINARY INSPECTION

Ductwork (Cont'd)
Description

Design

Actual

Observation

Remarks

8. To check firm sealing around the

damper
9. To ensure damper blade is not
damaged and operate smoothly

Remarks :

______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________

Tested by

Date :

________________

Date :

________________

CONTRACTOR'S
NAME AND SIGNATURE

Witnessed by

:
HDB PROJECT OFFICER'S
NAME AND SIGNATURE

BLDG04/A39.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A40

ANCHOR TORQUE TEST FOR VENTILATION SYSTEM

Location and Shelter

Estate

____________________________________________

Block

____________________________________________

Address

____________________________________________

Date & Time of Test

____________________________________________

S/No

Tested by

Item Tested

Design Torque

Actual Torque

Remarks

Date :

_______________

Date :

_______________

CONTRACTOR'S
NAME AND SIGNATURE

Witnessed by

:
HDB PROJECT OFFICER'S
NAME AND SIGNATURE

Note: Please attach layout of points tested.

BLDG04/A40.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A41
VENTILATION FAN COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD

Location of Shelter
Estate

___________________________________

Block

___________________________________

Address

___________________________________

Date & Time of Test

___________________________________

Plant/Equipment Make/Model

___________________________________

Plant/Equipment Serial No.

___________________________________

Plant/Equipment Year of Manufacture

___________________________________

Test

Design

Actual

Remarks

Air flow (CMH)

Fan static pressure (Pa)
Fan motor starting amperes
Fan motor running amperes
Fan motor operating kW
Fan motor operating voltage
Fan motor speed (rpm)
Noise level (dBA) (at 1m distance)
Efficiency
Condition of ductwork
Vibration isolator
Flexible connection
Supports

Tested By

Approved By

__________________________

Signature

Signature

__________________________

Name of
Contractor

Name of HDB
Project Officer

__________________________

Date

Date

__________________________

BLDG04/A41.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A42
Page 1

SCHEDULE "A"
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
The technical data provided hereunder is for information only and shall not override any requirements of the
Specification. The requirements of the Specification shall be regarded as minimum and should any material or Plant
and equipment described in this Schedule fall below the minimum requirements, the Specification shall prevail.
Catalogues shall be enclosed to provide more comprehensive information wherever possible. All entries shall be
typewritten.
Item

Description

1.

DUCTWORK

(a)

Round Ducting
Type
Make
Country of Origin
Standard
Material

(b)

Acoustical Insulation
Type
Make
Country of Origin
Material
Density

(c)

Diffusers
Make/Model
Type
Material
Finish

(d)

Grilles
Make/Model
Type
Material
Finish

(e)

Flexible Duct Connection

Make/Model
Size
Material

BLDG04/A42.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Particulars

APPENDIX A42
Page 2

SCHEDULE "A"
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Item

Description

2.

AEROFOIL AXIAL FLOW SUPPLY AIR FAN

(a)

Fan
Make/Brand
Type
Model
Air Flow (CMH)
Static Pressure (Pa)
Fan Blade Pitch Angle (Degrees)
Overall Dimension (Diameter x Length)
(mm x mm)
Operating Weight (kg)
Fan Speed (rpm)
Noise Level at 3 Fan Diameter (dB)
Blade Material
Casing Material
Temperature Tolerance of Fan & Motor (C)

(b)

Fan Motor
Make/Brand
Type
Model
Input Power (kW)
Speed (rpm)
Enclosure Protection Class
Class of Insulation
Rating
Lock Rotor Current (Amp)
Full Load Current (Amp)
Voltage (volt)
Frequency (Hz)

(c)

Motor Starter
Make/Brand
Type

BLDG04/A42.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Particulars
Axial Flow

APPENDIX A42
Page 3

SCHEDULE "A"
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Item

Description

2.

AEROFOIL AXIAL FLOW SUPPLY AIR FAN

(CONT'D)

(d)

Vibration Isolator
Make/Brand
Type
Material
Isolation Efficiency (%)
Rated Capacity (kg)
Rated Deflection (mm)

(e)

Sound Attenuators
Make/Brand
Type
Air Qty (CMH)
Pressure Drop (Pa)
L x W x H (mm x mm x mm)
Insertion Loss - dB
Octave band frequency
63 Hz
125 Hz
250 Hz
500 Hz
1000 Hz
2000 Hz
4000 Hz
8000 Hz

(f)

Motor Starter
Make
Type
Air Qty (CMH)
L x W x D (mm x mm x mm)
Material
Efficiency (%)
Initial air resistance (Pa)
Final air resistance (Pa)

BLDG04/A42.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Particulars
Axial Flow

APPENDIX A42
Page 4

SCHEDULE "A"
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Item

Description

3.

AEROFOIL AXIAL FLOW EXHAUST AIR FAN

(a)

Fan
Make/Brand
Type
Model
Air Flow (CMH)
Static Pressure (Pa)
Fan Blade Pitch Angle (Degrees)
Overall Dimension (Diameter x Length)
(mm x mm)
Operating Weight (kg)
Fan Speed (rpm)
Noise Level at 3 Fan Diameter (dB)
Blade Material
Casing Material
Temperature Tolerance of Fan & Motor (C)

(b)

Fan Motor
Make/Brand
Type
Model
Input Power (kW)
Speed (rpm)
Enclosure Protection Class
Class of Insulation
Rating
Lock Rotor Current (Amp)
Full Load Current (Amp)
Voltage (volt)
Frequency (Hz)

(c)

Motor Starter
Make/Brand
Type

BLDG04/A42.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Particulars
Axial Flow

APPENDIX A42
Page 5

SCHEDULE "A"
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Item

Description

3.

AEROFOIL AXIAL FLOW EXHAUST AIR FAN

(CONT'D)

(d)

Vibration Isolator

Particulars
Axial Flow

Make/Brand
Type
Material
Isolation Efficiency (%)
Rated Capacity (kg)
Rated Deflection (mm)
(e)

Sound Attenuators
Make/Brand
Type
Air Qty (CMH)
Pressure Drop (Pa)
L x W x H (mm x mm x mm)
Insertion Loss - dB
Octave band frequency
63 Hz
125 Hz
250 Hz
500 Hz
1000 Hz
2000 Hz
4000 Hz
8000 Hz

________________________________
Signature & Official Stamp of Contractor
Date : _________________

BLDG04/A42.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A43
Page 1
HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD

ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT FOR COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE

FOR REFUSE HANDLING PLANT

STAMP
if stamp duties required

COMPREHENSIVE

MAINTENANCE

BLOCKS _____

THIS AGREEMENT is made the

AGREEMENT

FOR

REFUSE

HANDLING

AT

PLANT

TO
.

day of

20

between THE

HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD (hereinafter called the "Owner") and ______________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") which expression shall where the context so admits includes his legal personal
representatives and permitted assigns.

WHEREAS :
(1)

__________________________________________________________________________________
(Name and Address of Contractor)

(hereinafter called the Contractor") is the contractor of the Owner in respect of the Works described as
_____________
(Contract No.

Neighbourhood

Contract ______________

) (hereinafter referred to as "the Contract").

(2)

The Specialist is engaged by the Contractor in respect of the Refuse Handling Plant Works required under
the Contract with the consent of the Owner given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.

(3)

The Owner is desirous that certain equipment should be maintained, viz system or equipment or machine or
vehicles etc described in this Agreement for the Refuse Handling Plant (hereinafter referred to as the
"Plant").

(4)

Pursuant to Clause
of
of the
Contract, the Contractor shall ensure and the Specialist hereby agrees and undertakes to carry out the
maintenance of such Plant, and where applicable to fabricate, modify and do all such things as are
necessary for such maintenance of the Plant.

BLDG04/A43.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A43
Page 2

In consideration of the premises and of the Owner giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the Contractor and
the Specialist, the Specialist agree with the Owner as follows :
1.

SPECIALIST'S OBLIGATION

1.1

The Specialist warrants that he has the necessary skills, knowledge, expertise and competence to maintain
the Plant herein specified.

1.2

In consideration of the payments to be made by the Owner to the Specialist as hereinafter mentioned, the
Specialist hereby covenants with the Owner to maintain the Plant in all respects in accordance with the
description and terms of this Agreement for the monthly Contract Rate of Singapore Dollars ONE
HUNDRED only ($100.00) per unit of Refuse Handling Plant for a period of five (5) years commencing after
the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period provided under the Contract or such other sum as may become
due under the provisions of this Agreement.

2.

OWNER'S OBLIGATION
The Owner hereby covenants to pay to the Specialist in consideration of the maintenance of the Plant, the
Contract Rate per month or such other sum as may become due under the provisions of this Agreement.

3.

TYPE OF AGREEMENT
This Agreement is a Firm Price Contract and the Contract Rate shall remain firm for the duration of this
Agreement. Save as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement, there shall be no change in the
amount payable by the Owner to the Specialist for maintenance of the Plant.

4.

PRICES TO BE INCLUSIVE
Save as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement, the Contract Rate contained in this Agreement
shall be inclusive of all ancillary and other works and expenditure, whether separately mentioned or
described in this Agreement or not, which are either necessary to carry out and bring to completion of the
works described in this Agreement, or which may become necessary to overcome difficulties before
execution and completion.

5.

CONTRACTS (RIGHTS OF THIRD PARTIES) ACT

Any person, firm, corporation or organization who is not a party to this Agreement shall have no rights
whatsoever under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act.

6.

DOCUMENTS
The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this Agreement viz :
(a)

These Articles of Agreement;

(b)

The Contractor's Offer to the Owner dated

(c)

The Conditions of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A44;

(d)

The Drawings as listed in the Schedule thereto;

(e)

All Amendment/Addendum Letters issued by the Owner;

(f)

The Owner's Letter of Acceptance dated

accepting the said Contractor's Offer
(including any correspondences referred to in the said Letter of Acceptance).

BLDG04/A43.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

in respect of the Contract;

APPENDIX A43
Page 3

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Owner and the Specialist have set their hands the day and year first above written.

Signed by
, for and on behalf
of the Housing & Development Board in the
presence of :

Signed by
for and on behalf of the Specialist in the
presence of :

BLDG04/A43.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

______________________________

______________________________

______________________________

______________________________

APPENDIX A43(TC)
Page 1
ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT FOR COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE
FOR REFUSE HANDLING PLANT

STAMP
if stamp duties required

COMPREHENSIVE

MAINTENANCE

BLOCKS _____

AGREEMENT

FOR

REFUSE

AT

THIS AGREEMENT is made the

PLANT

TO
.

__

day of

20

between the

(hereinafter called the "Owner") and

________________________________________
_

HANDLING

(hereinafter called the "Specialist") which expression shall where the context

so admits includes his legal personal representatives and permitted assigns.

WHEREAS :

(1)

_____________________________________________________________________________________
(Name and Address of Contractor)

(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter
called the "HDB") in respect of the Works described as
Contract

(Contract No.

Neighbourhood _____
) (hereinafter referred to as "the Contract").

(2)

The Specialist is engaged by the Contractor in respect of the Refuse Handling Plant Works required under
the Contract with the consent of the HDB given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.

(3)

The HDB is desirous that certain equipment should be maintained, viz system or equipment or machine or
vehicles etc described in this Agreement for the Refuse Handling Plant (hereinafter referred to as the
"Plant").

(4)

Pursuant to Clause
of
of the
Contract, the Contractor shall ensure and the Specialist hereby agrees and undertakes to carry out the
maintenance of such Plant, and where applicable to fabricate, modify and do all such things as are
necessary for such maintenance of the Plant.

(5)

The Owner has now taken over the management and maintenance of the Plant from the HDB and pursuant
to Clause
of the
of the Contract, the
Contractor shall ensure and the Specialist hereby agrees and undertakes to execute this Agreement with the
Owner.

BLDG04/A43T.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A43(TC)
Page 2

In consideration of the premises and of the HDB giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the Contractor and the
Specialist, the Specialist agree with the Owner as follows :
1.

SPECIALIST'S OBLIGATION

1.1

The Specialist warrants that he has the necessary skills, knowledge, expertise and competence to maintain
the Plant herein specified.

1.2

In consideration of the payments to be made by the Owner to the Specialist as hereinafter mentioned, the
Specialist hereby covenants with the Owner to maintain the Plant in all respects in accordance with the
description and terms of this Agreement for the monthly Contract Rate of Singapore Dollars ONE
HUNDRED only ($100.00) per unit of Refuse Handling Plant for a period of five (5) years commencing after
the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period provided under the Contract or such other sum as may become
due under the provisions of this Agreement.

2.

OWNER'S OBLIGATION
The Owner hereby covenants to pay to the Specialist in consideration of the maintenance of the Plant, the
Contract Rate per month or such other sum as may become due under the provisions of this Agreement.

3.

TYPE OF AGREEMENT
This Agreement is a Firm Price Contract and the Contract Rate shall remain firm for the duration of this
Agreement. Save as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement, there shall be no change in the
amount payable by the Owner to the Specialist for maintenance of the Plant.

4.

PRICES TO BE INCLUSIVE
Save as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement, the Contract Rates contained in this Agreement
shall be inclusive of all ancillary and other works and expenditure, whether separately or specifically
mentioned or described in this Agreement or not, which are either necessary to carry out and bring to
completion of the works described in this Agreement, or which may become necessary to overcome
difficulties before execution and completion.

5.

CONTRACTS (RIGHTS OF THIRD PARTIES) ACT

Any person, firm, corporation or organization who is not a party to this Agreement shall have no rights
whatsoever under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act.

5.

DOCUMENTS

5.1

The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this Agreement viz :

5.2

(a)

These Articles of Agreement;

(b)

The Contractor's Offer to the HDB dated

(c)

The Conditions of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A44;

in respect of the Contract;

(d)

The Drawings as listed in the Schedule thereto;

(e)

All Amendment/Addendum Letters issued by the HDB;

(f)

accepting the said Contractor's Offer

The HDB Letter of Acceptance dated
(including any correspondences referred to in the said Letter of Acceptance).

All references to the Board or Employer in the aforesaid documents shall be deemed to refer to the Owner
and shall be read and construed as such.

BLDG04/A43T.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A43(TC)
Page 3

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Owner and the Specialist have set their hands the day and year first above written.

Signed by
for and on behalf of the
______________________________ Town Council
in the presence of :

Signed by
for and on behalf of the Specialist
in the presence of :

BLDG04/A43T.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

_______________________________

_______________________________

_______________________________

_______________________________

APPENDIX A44
Page 1
HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD
CONDITIONS OF COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

1.

(1)

In the Agreement (as hereinafter defined) the following words and

expressions shall have the meanings hereby assigned to them
except where the context otherwise requires :
(a)

"Agreement"

means the documents identified as

forming the Contract Documents in the
Articles of Agreement and all such
documents together shall be deemed to
form the Agreement.

(b)

"Owner"

means the Housing & Development

Board, Republic of Singapore, or such
Town Council(s) as named in the
Articles of Agreement.

(c)

"Specialist"

means the person or firm or corporation

who is maintaining the Plant and
includes the Specialist's legal personal
representatives and permitted assigns.

(d)

"Works"

means the maintenance works, together

with necessary temporary works,
described in the Agreement, including
all Variations.

(e)

"Plant"

means the system or equipment or

machine or vehicles, etc described in
the Agreement.

(f)

"Contract
Rate"

means the rate named in the Articles

of Agreement.

Definitions

1.

(2)

Words importing the singular also include the plural and vice-versa
where the context requires.

Singular and Plural

1.

(3)

The headings and marginal notes in these Conditions shall not be

deemed to be part thereof or be taken into consideration in the
interpretation or construction thereof or of the Agreement.

Headings and
Marginal Notes

SCOPE OF WORK

2.

The Specialist shall provide and supply all labour, materials, tools, transport
and everything necessary or incidental in so far as they are specified or can
be reasonably inferred, for the maintenance of the Plant as listed in
Schedule A, and for any call-back service mentioned in Clause 5 herein.

BLDG04/A44.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Scope of Works

APPENDIX A44
Page 2

SCOPE OF WORK (CONT'D)

2.

Cont'd
Maintenance shall include all items and frequencies of works as listed in
Schedule B. The Specialist's obligations shall include any other repair
and/or replacement to the Plant or overhaul to the Plant if deemed
necessary.
The costs of any repair and/or replacement or overhauling including the
costs of spare parts and consumables shall be deemed to be included in
the monthly maintenance fee.
The Specialist shall not use as replacements, any parts which are not
original or parts which have not been approved by the Manufacturer of the
Plant unless he has the prior consent of the Owner.

REQUIREMENTS UNDER WORK

3.

The Agreement shall remain in full force and effect for a period stated in
the Appendix. Unless either party hereto shall three months prior to the
expiration hereof have notified the other party hereto in writing to the
contrary then this Agreement shall thereafter continue and remain in full
force and effect which can then be terminated by either party hereto giving
three month's written notice to the other party hereto to that effect.

Commencement
and Duration of
Agreement

4.

The Specialist shall provide the Owner a work programme covering routine
maintenance, repairs and/or replacements, and major overhaul if
applicable, in a form acceptable to the Owner for his agreement. The
commencement dates and times for the Works have to be specified and
the Specialist shall adhere strictly to the works programme approved by the
Owner. The Specialist shall seek the prior approval of the Owner on any
amendment to the work programme.

Work Programme

The proposed work programme shall be submitted to the Owner for

approval at least 14 (fourteen) days in advance. If required, the Specialist
shall submit the programme directly to designated offices as directed by the
Owner from time to time.

5.

Call-out Time/Service Time

5.

(1)

BLDG04/A44.DOC(2)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

The call-out time is the period of time provided in Clause 6 herein

and is the time period allowed within which the Specialist's suitably
qualified maintenance personnel are required to arrive at the site
and start work from the time the fault condition has been reported to
the Specialist by any means such as pager, telephone, telex,
facsimile, mail, agent or other means of communication.

Call-out-Time

APPENDIX A44
Page 3

REQUIREMENTS UNDER WORK (CONT'D)

5.

Call-out Time/Service Time (Cont'd)

5.

(2)

The Specialist shall add no additional cost to the Owner in carrying

out the necessary repairs and/or replacements to the Plant installed
under this Agreement within the number of hours stated in the
Appendix or such further extended time as deemed necessary by
the Owner, such time known as service time to commence at the
time within call-out time the suitably qualified maintenance
personnel of the Specialist arrived at the site.

Service Time

Should the Specialist fail to attend within the call-out time, the
Owner reserves the right to appoint other party or parties to execute
such works and all costs incurred shall be recovered by the Owner
from the Specialist by deduction(s) from any money due or that shall
become due to the Specialist, or payable direct from the Specialist
as a debt due to the Owner PROVIDED that and without prejudice to
any other remedies for breach contained in this Agreement the
Owner shall in addition to recover under this paragraph whatsoever
that may result as a consequence of the Owner having to resort to
the provisions of this paragraph.
The Specialist shall be equipped with a telephone pager. Should
the Specialist fail to respond within one hour after being paged it
shall be deemed that the Specialist has failed to make himself
available in which case the paragraph above shall apply.

6.

Call-out time for attending to breakdown of the Plant shall not exceed the
time stated in the Appendix. Agreed damages stated in the Appendix shall
be imposed should the call-out time be exceeded or in the event the
Specialist fails to rectify the breakdown within the service time stated in the
Appendix or such further extended time deemed necessary by the Owner.

Agreed damages
for failure to
respond within callout time/to rectify
breakdown within
service time

Normal office hours are taken to be between 8.00 am and 5.30 pm from
Monday to Friday and between 8.00 am and 1.00 pm on Saturday.
The provisions of this paragraph shall apply notwithstanding that the
Specialist shall also be liable under Clause 5(2) herein.
In the event this clause becomes inoperable for any reason, then the
Owner shall be at liberty to recover such damages for breach of contract as
the Owner can prove arise from the Specialist's failure to carry out his
obligations herein.

7.

The Specialist shall submit to the Owner a monthly report in such form as
may be approved by the Owner containing details of the periodic
inspections and servicings including all repairs and/or replacements
executed by him. The monthly report shall include a log showing the time
when a report of a fault is received and the time when repair and/or
replacement commences. The Specialist shall record the nature of the
fault and the actual time taken for the necessary repairs and/or
replacements. These records shall be signed by the Owner and the
Specialist shall submit these records to the Owner within the first week of
the following month.

BLDG04/A44.DOC(3)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Service Report

APPENDIX A44
Page 4

REQUIREMENTS UNDER WORK (CONT'D)

8.

9.

(1)

Any replacement of any item or any repair to any breakdown of the

Plant shall only be carried out by the Specialist with the consent of
the Owner.

Replacement and
Repairs

(2)

The Specialist shall be deemed to have included in the Contract

Rate all the necessary cost incurred in providing temporary and
similar substitute Plant for the Owner's use at premises designed by
the Owner during the period of repair and/or replacement, so as to
enable the Owner to continue working/operations without any
disruption or stoppage.

*Substitute Plant

Within 14 days after the acceptance of this Tender, the Specialist shall
deposit free of interest with the Owner the sum stipulated in the Appendix
to be held by the Owner as security for due performance by the Specialist
of each and every liability and obligation owing by the Specialist to the
Owner, whether of a contractual or tortious nature and whether arising
under the Agreement or otherwise, such sum to be retained or otherwise
properly dealt with by the Owner. The said sum or the recoverable balance
thereof shall be returned to the Specialist upon completion of the whole of
the Works.

Security Deposit

Within 14 days after the acceptance of this Tender, the Specialist may in
lieu of the deposit as required under this Clause provided the Owner with a
Security Bond for an equivalent sum drawn in the form approved by the
Owner and issued by a Surety acceptable to the Owner.
The quantum of this Security Deposit/Bond shall be a percentage
(stipulated in the Appendix) of the product of the Contract Rate multiplied
by the period of this Agreement as stated in Clause 3 herein.

10.

The Specialist shall bear all stamp fees and other necessary charges, in
respect of this Agreement and any other document whatsoever to be
executed hereunder.

Specialist to pay all

stamp fees

11.

It is hereby agreed that the Owner shall be at liberty without notice to the
Specialist to assign the full benefits of this Agreement to such person body
or corporation as may in any manner howsoever be entrusted with the
responsibilities of the duties of the Owner in respect of the Works.

Owner's right to
assign

12.

The Specialist shall not assign the Agreement or any part thereof or any
benefit or interest therein without the prior written consent of the Owner.

Assignment or
Sub-lettering

The Specialist shall not make arrangements for the vicarious performance
of any of his duties or functions under the Agreement by any other party,
nor shall any receiver or liquidator of the Specialist be entitled to carry out
such duties or functions.

BLDG04/A44.DOC(4)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A44
Page 5

REQUIREMENTS UNDER WORK (CONT'D)

12.

Cont'd
The Specialist shall not sub-let the whole of the Works. Except where
otherwise provided in the Agreement, the Specialist shall not sub-let any
part of the Works without the prior written consent of the Owner and such
consent if given shall not relieve the Specialist of any of his liabilities or
obligations under the Agreement and he shall be responsible for the acts
defaults and neglects of his sub-contractors their agents servants and
workmen as fully as if they were his own acts defaults or neglects.

GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF THE SPECIALIST

13.

The Specialist is required to exercise firm control over the conduct of his
agents, servants and workmen, and of his sub-contractors, their agents,
servants and workmen employed on the Works for the purposes of this
Agreement.

Behaviour of
Workmen

The Specialist shall use or employ in and about the maintenance of the
Plant only such persons as are careful skilled and experienced in their
several skills, trades and callings and the Owner shall be at liberty to object
to and require the Specialist to remove immediately from the Owner's
premises any such person employed by the Specialist in or about the
maintenance of the Plant who in the opinion of the Owner misconduct
himself or is incompetent or negligent in the proper performance of his
duties or whose continued presence is undesirable or unacceptable and
such opinion shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the
Specialist. Such persons shall not be again used or employed upon the
Owner's premises without the prior written permission of the Owner. Any
person so removed shall wherever necessary, be promptly replaced by a
competent substitute.
The Specialist shall ensure that all workmen employed are able to produce
proper and acceptable identification on demand when admitted to premises
occupied by or on behalf of the Owner.

14.

The Specialist shall keep proper records of all workmen engaged on the
Works and produce them for inspection by the Owner. These records shall
include the following information :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

Name of Workmen (and alias if any

Identity Card No./Passport No.
Address
Work Permit No., if any
Safety Course Orientation Certificate, if any.

This information must be recorded before any workmen is allowed to

commence duty.

BLDG04/A44.DOC(5)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Keeping Records
of Workmen

APPENDIX A44
Page 6

GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF THE SPECIALIST (CONT'D)

15.

The Specialist shall comply with all labour laws regarding the engagement
of all workmen. Work Permits from Ministry of Labour must be obtained
from these workmen. The Specialist shall be held solely liable for and shall
indemnify the Owner in respect of all actions against the Owner for
employing foreign workmen without the required permits.

Labour Laws

The Specialist shall pay his workmen promptly, and observe workmen's
working hours and holidays in accordance with all Acts of Parliament
Regulations Bye-Laws rules or regulations.

16.

Subject to any provision to the contrary contained in the Agreement, none

of the Works shall, save as hereinafter provided, be carried out during the
night or on Sundays or on public holidays without the permission in writing
of the Owner except when such work is unavoidable or necessary for the
saving of life or property or for the safety of the Works in which case the
Contractor shall immediately inform the Owner.

No Night
Sunday or Public
Holiday Work

For the purposes of this Clause, the term "night" shall mean the period from
5.30 pm to 8.00 am.
The Owner reserves the right to require urgent repairs and/or replacement
work to be carried out during the night or on Sundays or on public holidays.
The Specialist is deemed to have provided for such services in the
Contract Rate.

17.

The Specialist shall ensure that no illegal immigrant is employed him and/or
any sub-contractor in the execution of the Works. The Owner shall not be
responsible for such act or acts by the Specialist and/or any of his subcontractors and the Specialist shall indemnify the Owner against all
consequences arising thereof.

Employment of
Illegal Immigrants

For the purpose of this Clause "illegal immigrant" means any person who
has entered into the Republic of Singapore in contravention of the
provisions of the Immigration Act or any statutory modification or reenactment thereof.

18.

The Specialist shall give all notices and pay all fees required to be given or
paid by any Act of Parliament Regulation or Bye-law in relation to the
execution of the Works and by the rules or regulations of any local or
statutory authorities, public bodies or companies whose property or rights
may be affected in any way by the Works.
The Specialist shall ascertain and conform in all respects with the
provisions of any Act of Parliament Regulation and Bye-law that may apply
to the Works and with any rules or regulations of the said local or statutory
authorities public bodies or companies and shall keep the Owner fully
indemnified against penalties and liabilities of every kind arising from the
breach of such Acts Regulations Bye-laws rules or regulations.

BLDG04/A44.DOC(6)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Compliance with
rules and
Regulations

APPENDIX A44
Page 7

GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF THE SPECIALIST (CONT'D)

19.

The Specialist shall give or provide all necessary superintendence during

the execution of the Works and as long thereafter as the Owner may
consider necessary.

Specialist's
Superintendence

The Specialist shall ensure that he is at all times represented on the Works
by a competent and authorised agent who shall be deemed to be approved
by the Owner provided such agent is not expressly objected to by the
Owner in writing within 14 days from the serving of a notice in writing upon
the Owner by the Specialist of the appointment of such agent. Such agent
shall be on the Works when the Specialist is executing works to supervise
the Works.
The Owner shall have the authority to withdraw his approval of the
authorised agent at any time. If such approval shall be withdrawn the
Specialist shall, after receiving notice in writing of, such withdrawal, remove
the agent from the Works forthwith and shall not thereafter employ him
again on the Works in any capacity and shall promptly replace him with a
competent agent approved by the Owner.
Such authorised agent shall be empowered to receive on behalf of the
Specialist directions and instructions from the Owner.
The Specialist shall ensure that his superintending personnel are able to
produce proper and acceptable identification on demand when admitted to
premises occupied by or on behalf of the Owner.

20.

The Specialist shall comply with the Factories Act 1973 (Cap. 104) and the
Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction Regulations
1985, and all amendments and re-enactments thereof.

Safety

It shall be the duty of the Specialist to comply with such requirements of the
Regulations as affect him or any person employed by him and as relate to
any work act or operation performed or about to be performed by him.
The Specialist shall not permit an employee to do anything which is not in
accordance with the generally accepted principles of safe and sound
practice.

21.

The Specialist shall comply with all the provisions under the Workmen's
Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) and any statutory modification
or re-enactment thereof (hereinafter referred to as "the Act").
Notwithstanding any provision in this Contract to the contrary, the Owner
shall not be liable for or in respect of any damages or compensation under
the Act in consequence of any accident or injury to any workman or other
person whether in the employment of the Specialist, his servants or agents
or of his sub-contractors, their servants or agents, and the Specialist shall
indemnify the Owner against all such claims, demands, proceedings,
damages, cost, charges and expenses arising in consequence thereof.

BLDG04/A44.DOC(7)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Workmen's
Compensation

APPENDIX A44
Page 8

GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF THE SPECIALIST (CONT'D)

21.

Cont'd
The Specialist shall at his own cost and expense effect and maintain in the
joint names of the Specialist and the Owner a policy of insurance with an
insurer and on terms approved by the Owner to cover all obligations and to
meet in full the assessment of the Commissioner for Labour in respect of
compensation due upon the death or injury of any workman of the
Specialist, his servant or agents under the Act and in respect of
compensation under Common Law.
The Specialist shall deliver this insurance policy, together with the premium
receipts, to the Owner before proceeding with the Works. Should the
Specialist default in making such delivery upon written request made by the
Owner, the Owner may then effect and maintain such insurance and
deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or become due to the
Specialist or recover the same as a debt due by the Specialist.
If the Specialist fails to maintain and keep in force the insurance required to
be effected under this Clause, then the Owner may effect and keep in force
such insurance and pay such premium or premiums as may be necessary
for the purpose and from time to time deduct the amount so paid from any
monies due becoming due to the Specialist or recover the same as a debt
due by the Specialist.
Notwithstanding the provision of the Act, the Specialist shall give notice in
writing to the Owner within 10 days of the occurrence of any accident which
results in death or temporary incapacity of any workman employed by him
or his sub-contractor(s). If a contractor fails to report the occurrence of the
accident within the stipulated time, the Owner shall impose charges
according to the rates tabulated below :

Date of Notification to the

Owner on the occurrence
of accident

Charges for late reporting

Minimum
Charges

Amount equal to MOM

assessment but subject to
a maximum charge of

More than 10 days but

equal to or less than
30 days from date of
accident

$200.00

$1,000.00

More than 30 days

from date of accident

$200.00

$3,000.00

BLDG04/A44.DOC(8)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A44
Page 9

PAYMENT

22.

The Agreement is awarded on a firm price basis and the Contract Rate as
accepted by the Owner shall remain firm for the duration of the Agreement.
Save as otherwise expressly provided in the Agreement, there shall be no
change in the amount payable by the Owner to the Specialist for the
maintenance to the Plant.

Firm Price
Contract

Save as otherwise expressly provided in the Agreement, the Contract Rate

contained in the Agreement shall be inclusive of all ancillary and other
works and expenditure, whether separately or specifically mentioned or
described in the Agreement or not, which are either necessary to carry out
and bring to execution the Works described in the Agreement, or which
may become necessary to overcome difficulties before execution.

23.

Upon completion of maintenance, the Specialist shall submit his invoice

and the relevant service chits in a form acceptable to the Owner. The
service chits shall indicate the actual works performed in accordance with
the scope of work specified. The Specialist shall ensure all service chits
are duly signed and stamped by the Owner.

Payment

If the Plant are not in working condition for a period longer than the number
of days, stated in the Appendix, in a month or such other time as may be
allowed by the Owner arising from whatsoever cause, the Specialist shall
not be entitled to payment for the maintenance for that month in respect of
such Plant.
Work done by the Specialist under this Agreement shall be payable
MONTHLY upon satisfactory completion of the Works. Provided that the
Specialist comply fully with the requirements stated herein he shall be paid
within 30 days from the date of receipt of the Specialist's bills or invoices by
the Owner.
In addition the Owner shall pay to the Specialist all agreed additional costs
for carrying out such other works as may from time to time be required by
the Owner under Clause 27 herein. The Specialist shall claim and the
Owner shall pay for such costs in accordance with the requirements under
Clause 28 herein.

24.

The Specialist shall duly and punctually pay to the Owner the billed or any
other expenses incurred in respect of the supply of materials, services, etc
necessary for the proper execution of the Works in this Agreement.
Notwithstanding this, the Owner reserves the right to set off such bills and
expenses against monies due or to become due to the Specialist before
payment of the balance, if any, to him. In this respect, all bills and
expenses incurred by the Owner shall have priority over those incurred by
third parties for the benefit of the Specialist.

Payment of
Owner's Bills and
Expenses etc

25.

If at any time during the Agreement the Specialist is found to have claimed
and was paid for more than the value of works done, the Owner reserves
the right to deduct from the Specialist's subsequent payments and the sum
overpaid together with interests at prevailing commercial rates.

Overclaim leading
to Overpayment

BLDG04/A44.DOC(9)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A44
Page 10

PAYMENT (CONT'D)

26.

All damages (including agreed damages), costs, charges, expenses, debts

or sums for which the Specialist is liable to the Owner under any provision
of this Agreement between the Owner and the Specialist may be deducted
by the Owner from monies due or becoming due to the Specialist under the
Agreement, including any retention monies, financial bonds or security
deposits or bonds.

Recovery/
Deduction of
Money

All damages (including agreed damages), costs, charges, expenses, debts

or sums for which the Specialist is liable to the Owner under any provision
of any other Agreement between the Owner and the Specialist may be
deducted by the Owner from monies due or becoming due to the Specialist
under the Agreement, including any retention monies, financial bonds or
security deposits or bonds.

VARIATIONS/MODIFICATIONS

27.

The Owner may instruct variations. No variation required by the Owner or

subsequently sanctioned by him shall vitiate this Agreement.

Variations

"Variation" shall mean any change in the intention of the original

Agreement and shall include any addition, omission, substitution of any
work or alteration of the kind or standard of any material or good to be used
in the Works, and may relate to or include work at other locations than
specified in this Agreement and such variations shall be paid for under the
provisions of the Clause 28 herein.
A variation shall be instructed by means of a Works Order issued by the
Owner to the Contractor.

28.

The value of a variation ordered shall be ascertained in accordance with

one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in descending order
or priority :
(a)

by measurement and valuation at the applicable rates and prices

specified in the Spare Parts Price List in Appendix to Tender Form,
if any, or at analogous or pro-rated rates; or

(b)

if the above method is not applicable, then by measurement and

valuation at fair market rates and prices; or

(c)

if none of the above two methods is applicable, then the valuation

shall be based on the actual cost of necessary materials or goods,
labour and equipment (other than ordinary plant) plus 15% which
percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools,
equipment and existing scaffolding, supervision, overheads and
profits.

Any disagreement on rates under the provisions of this clause shall not
entitle the Specialist a right to refuse to execute the variation work. The
Specialist shall proceed with the variation works with due diligence The
Specialist may refer the disagreement to Arbitration under Clause 36
herein.

BLDG04/A44.DOC(10)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Valuation of
Variation

APPENDIX A44
Page 11

VARIATIONS/MODIFICATIONS (CONT'D)

28.

Cont'd
Upon completion of the variation work to the satisfaction of the Owner, the
Specialist may submit his claim for variation to the Owner. The value of the
variation assessed by the Owner shall be notified to the Specialist in
writing. Provided always the Owner may at any time amend the value of a
variation previously issued in such manner as he may deem necessary,
and any recovery shall be effected under Clause 26 herein. If the
Specialist disagrees with the value assessed by the Owner, he shall submit
to the Owner any objection to the value in writing within 30 days of the date
of notification failing which the value of the variation as assessed by the
Owner shall be final and binding and conclusive against the Specialist.

29.

If the Specialist proposes to modify the Plant or the Works in order to

facilitate repair and/or replacement such that facilities or operating
conditions are affected, he shall notify the Owner and obtain the consent in
writing of the Owner to the proposed modifications. The Owner may agree
to the modifications if it does not result in any increase in the costs of
maintenance or repairs and/or replacements to the modified Plant. If
consent is given the Specialist shall carry out the modifications at his own
expense at such time to be specified by the Owner.

Specialist's
Modification of
Plant or Works

The Specialist fully agrees and accepts that as a condition to approval of

the modification, any cost saving arising from the approved modifications
shall be valued in accordance with Clause 28 herein and be recovered by
the Owner under Clause 26 herein.

LIABILITIES FOR AND INSURANCES AGAINST

INJURIES AND DAMAGES TO PROPERTY

30.

The Specialist shall be responsible for :

(a)

any death of or injury to any person including those employed by the

Owner;

(b)

any injury or damage to property of every kind of the Owner or of any

other person or corporation; or

(c)

any damage to the Plant the subject of this Agreement

from any cause whatsoever arising directly or indirectly out of or in relation

to or in connection with the Works under the Agreement.
In particular and without limiting or prejudicing in any way the generality of
this Clause, the liability of the Specialist under this Clause shall extend to
all damages or injuries which may occur by reason of any act or omission
of the Specialist his servants or agents or of his sub-contractors, their
servants or agents.

BLDG04/A44.DOC(11)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Damage to
Property and Injury
to Persons

APPENDIX A44
Page 12

LIABILITIES FOR AND INSURANCES AGAINST

INJURIES AND DAMAGES TO PROPERTY (CONT'D)

30.

Cont'd
The Specialist shall indemnify the Owner against all losses, injuries or
damages in respect of the liabilities and risks described in this clause and
against all claims, demands, proceedings, damages, costs, charges
expenses arising in consequence thereof.
The indemnities given by the Specialist under this Clause shall not be
defeated or reduced by reason of any negligence or omission of the Owner
in failing to supervise or control the Specialist's operations or methods of
working, or to detect or prevent or remedy or mitigate defective Plant, or to
ensure proper performance of any other obligation of the Specialist.

31.

The Specialist shall at his own cost and expense effect and maintain in the
joint names of the Specialist and the Owner until the completion of the
Works, a Public Liability policy with an insurer and on terms approved by
the Owner for an amount specified by the Owner against all and every
liability and risk described in this Clause and shall deliver the policy and the
receipt for every premium paid by the Specialist to the Owner. The extent
of the insurer's liability under the policy insurance shall be limited in the
manner and to the amount stated in the Appendix.

Insurances against
Injuries to Persons
and Damage to
Property

The existence of any such insurance shall not alter or affect the liability of
the Specialist to the Owner under the provisions of this Clause, and the
Owner may deduct from any monies due or becoming due to the Specialist
all sums that the Specialist may be liable to pay to the Owner under this
Clause, whether or not the same is covered by insurance.
If the Specialist fails to effect and keep in force the insurance required to be
effected under this Clause, then the Owner may effect and keep in force
such insurance and pay such premium or premiums as may be necessary
for that purpose and from time to time deduct the amount so paid from any
monies due or becoming due to the Specialist or recover the same as a
debt due by the Specialist under Clause 26 herein.

REMEDIES IN THE EVENT OF BREACH AND TERMINATIONS

32.

If the Specialist neglects or refuses to maintain any of the Plant to be

performed by him under the Agreement with due diligence and expedition,
or refuses or neglects to comply with any reasonable orders given to him by
the Owner in writing in connection with any such Works, or contravenes
any of the provisions of the Agreement, the Owner may give notice in
writing to the Specialist to make good the neglect, refused or contravention
complained of.

BLDG04/A44.DOC(12)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Remedies in the
event of Breach

APPENDIX A44
Page 13

REMEDIES IN THE EVENT OF BREACH AND TERMINATIONS

(CONT'D)

32.

Cont'd
Should the Specialist fail to comply with the notice within the time specified
therein, the Owner shall be at liberty to employ other party or parties to
execute such part of the said Works as the Specialist may have failed or
neglected to do, or if the Owner shall think fit, it shall be lawful for him,
without prejudice to any other rights he may have under the Agreement, to
take the Works to be performed by the Specialist under the Agreement
wholly or partly out of the Specialist's hands and may himself complete
such Works or any part thereof, or may employ any other party or parties to
complete such Works or any part thereof, and in either of such event the
Owner shall have the free use of such items of maintenance, test and
monitoring equipment and tools as may have been brought on to the
premises of the Owner by the Specialist without being responsible to the
Specialist for fair wear and tear thereof.
The Owner shall also be entitled to retain and apply any portion of the
Contract Rate which may be otherwise due to the Specialist under the
Agreement for the payment of the costs of executing the said Works or part
thereof as the case may be. If the cost of completing the said Works or
any part thereof exceeds the amount payable to the Specialist, the
Specialist shall pay for the excess, failing with such amount shall be
recovered under Clause 26 herein.
The Specialist shall not be entitled to the monthly maintenance rate for the
period within which the default occurs, arising from the Specialist's neglect,
refusal or contravention.

33.

If the Specialist fails to comply with the scheduled number of maintenance

submitted under Clause 4 herein, the Specialist fully agrees and accepts to
a cost deduction per occasion of an amount stated in the Appendix from
the Contract Rate payable in the month in which he was failed to comply
with the scheduled number of maintenance. The Owner may recover such
cost deductions as a debt due by the Specialist or deduct the amount from
any monies due or becoming due to the Specialist under Clause 26 herein.
In the event this clause becomes inoperable for any reason, then the
Owner shall be at liberty to recover such damages for breach of contract as
the Owner can prove arising from the Specialist's failure to carry out the
scheduled number of maintenance.

Non-compliance
with scheduled
number of
Maintenance

34.

If the Specialist shall become bankrupt or have a receiving order made

against him or shall present his petition in bankruptcy or shall make an
arrangement with or assignment in favour of his creditors or shall agree to
carry out the Agreement under a committee of inspection of his creditors or
(being a corporation) shall go into liquidation (other than a voluntary
liquidation for the purposes of amalgamation or reconstruction) or if the

Termination

BLDG04/A44.DOC(13)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A44
Page 14

Specialist shall assign the Agreement without the consent in writing of the
Owner first obtained or shall have an execution levied on his goods or if the
Owner shall certify in writing that in his opinion the Specialist :

REMEDIES IN THE EVENT OF BREACH AND TERMINATIONS

(CONT'D)

34.

Cont'd
(a)

has abandoned the Agreement; or

(b)

without reasonable excuse has failed to commence on the repair

and/or replacement; or

(c)

has suspended the progress of the Works for 14 days after receiving
from the Owner written notice to proceed; or

(d)

has failed to remove materials or goods from the Plant or to pull down
and replace work for 14 days after receiving from the Owner written
notice that the said materials or goods or work have been condemned
and rejected; or

(e)

despite previous warning by the Owner in writing fails to proceed with

the Works with due expedition and without delay or is otherwise
persistently or fundamentally in breach of his obligations under the
Agreement; or

(f)

has assigned to another person or firm or corporation or permits

vicarious performance by another person or firm or corporation of his
duties or functions or has assigned any benefit or interest in the
Agreement without consent of the Owner; or

(g)

has failed or refused to dismiss or expel from the Works a person

whose dismissal has been required pursuant to Clause 13 and Clause
19 herein; or

(h)

has removed tools, temporary works, materials or goods from the

Works without the consent of the Owner in a case where the Owner is
reasonably entitled to refuse consent under the terms of this
Agreement and the Specialist has failed or refused to comply within
14 days' written notice from the Owner requiring him to return the said
tools, temporary works, materials or goods to the Works.

(i)

has previously received a valid and justified written notice under

paragraphs (c) or (e) hereof with which he has complied at the time
but at any time thereafter has again suspended the progress of the
Works or failed to proceed with the Works with due expedition and
without delay; or

(j)

has to the detriment of good workmanship or in defiance or the

instruction of the Owner to the contrary sub-let any part of the
Agreement; or

(k)

has offered or attempted to offer a bribe, commission or gift to any

officer of the Owner; or

BLDG04/A44.DOC(14)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A44
Page 15

(l)

has failed to provide the Security Deposit/Bond in accordance with

Clause 9 herein; or

REMEDIES IN THE EVENT OF BREACH AND TERMINATIONS

(CONT'D)

34.

Cont'd
then the Owner may after giving 7 days' notice in writing to the Specialist
terminate the employment of the Specialist therefrom without thereby
avoiding the Agreement or releasing the Specialist from any of his liabilities
or obligations under the Agreement or affecting the rights and powers
conferred on the Owner by the Agreement and may himself maintain the
Plant or may employ any other contractors to maintain the Plant and the
Owner or such other contractors may use for such maintenance so much of
the tools temporary works and materials or goods. All additional costs
incurred by the Owner in fulfilling the requirements under the Agreement
arising from the terminations of the employment of the Specialist shall be
recoverable by the Owner under Clause 26 herein.

35.

It shall be the express intention of both parties to this Agreement that all
rights and obligations in respect of the Works are distinct and independent
of all rights and obligations in respect of the supply of spare parts for Plant
currently maintained by the Specialist for the Owner and notwithstanding
the termination of the said Agreement pursuant to the provisions of Clause
34 herein the rights and obligations in respect of the said supply of spare
parts for the Plant are absolute and are not discharged or deemed to be
discharged by the termination of the said Agreement and the Owner shall
remain entitled to be supplied with spare parts for the Plant maintained by
the Specialist prior to the termination of the said Agreement, in accordance
with the Spare Parts Price List in Appendix to Tender Form and applicable
to the purpose of the Works as and when required by the Owner for the
continuing maintenance of the Plant.

ARBITRATION

36.

If at any time any question dispute or difference whatsoever shall arise

between the Owner and the Specialist upon, in relation to, or in connection
with the Agreement, either of them shall as soon as reasonably practical
give to the other notice in writing of the existence of such question dispute
or difference and the same shall be referred to the arbitration of a person to
be agreed upon by the parties and failing such agreement, a person to be
appointed by the Minister for National Development of Singapore and any
such reference shall deem to be a submission to arbitration within the
meaning of the Arbitration Act (Cap 10).

BLDG04/A44.DOC(15)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Supply of Spare
Parts after
Termination

APPENDIX A44
Page 16

The existence of arbitration proceedings shall not constitute a reason for

the suspension of the Works.

LAW APPLICABLE/JURISDICTION

37.

The Agreement shall in all respects be governed by and its terms

construed in accordance with the laws of the Republic of Singapore. For
the avoidance of doubt the Specialist agrees that, except for the
enforcement of an award made under Clause 36 herein or a judgement of
the Singapore Courts or an appeal from a judgement of the Singapore
Courts to the Privy Council, no court or other tribunal outside Singapore
shall have jurisdiction to entertain or decide actions disputes or differences
in connection with or arising out of this Agreement. For the further
avoidance of doubt, if a court or other tribunal outside Singapore refuses to
accept the agreement contained in the immediately preceding sentence,
any award of an arbitrator or judgement of the Singapore Courts in
connection with or arising out of this Agreement shall be accepted as
binding upon the parties to this Agreement and shall not be questioned in
any proceeding before a court or other tribunal outside Singapore.

BLDG04/A44.DOC(16)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

Law Applicable/
Jurisdiction

APPENDIX A44
Page 17

SCHEDULE A - WORKS
LOCATION
To be confirmed

DESCRIPTION
Comprehensive maintenance of refuse
handling Plant. Details of maintenance
work shall be provided by the Specialist.

With reference to Clause 2.

BLDG04/A44.DOC(17)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

MODEL/DETAILS

QUANTITY
Final quantity to
be confirmed
based on the
number of
residential blocks
with centralised
refuse chute.

APPENDIX A44
Page 18

SCHEDULE B - ITEMS AND FREQUENCY OF WORK

ITEM OF WORK

FREQUENCY OF WORKS

(a)

A thorough visual inspection of the complete installation for defective

paintwork and signs of corrosion.

Monthly

(b)

Check and ensure that all bolts and nuts for power pack, structure,
discharge gate, etc, are tightened securely

Monthly

(c)

Check and ensure that limit switches, relays, valves, heat detector, etc
are in proper working condition.

Monthly

(d)

Check and ensure that all seals are in good working condition.

Monthly

(e)

Check and ensure that noise and vibration levels are within acceptable
limit.

Monthly

(f)

Check and ensure that the drainage outlet is not blocked.

Monthly

(g)

Check motor bearings for wear and tear.

Yearly

(h)

Carry out insulation test for motor winding.

Yearly

(i)

Carry out ampere test for motor

Monthly

(j)

Lubricate bearings.

Monthly

(k)

Rectify all faults detected and replace all defective or worn parts.

Monthly

With reference to Clause 2.

BLDG04/A44.DOC(18)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A44
Page 19

APPENDIX TO COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT

Ref

Description

Clause No.

(i)

Commencement and Duration of

Agreement

(ii)

Service Time

(iii)

Agreed Damages for failure to

respond within call-out time/to
rectify breakdown within service
time

Anytime during 24 hours of the day

a) Call-out Time
: 2 hours
b) Service Time
: 24 hours
c) Agreed Damages : $10.00 per hour

(iv)

Service Reports

Included

(v)

Substitute Plant

8(2)

Included

(vi)

Security Deposit/Bond

Not applicable

(vii)

Payment

23

14 days in a month during which the Plant is not

in working condition

(viii)

Insurances against Injuries to

Persons and Damages to
Property

31

Included.
Public Liability Policy of $1 Million per claim and
unlimited for the period of insurance.

(ix)

Non-Compliance with Scheduled

No. of Maintenance

33

Cost deduction per occasion of an amount of

$180.00 from the Contract Rate.

BLDG04/A44.DOC(19)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

5(2)

Details

Duration of Agreement = 5 years commencing

from
20
to
20
.
24 hours.

APPENDIX A44
Page 20
CONDITIONS OF COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT
FOR REFUSE HANDLING PLANT
INDEX TO COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT

Clause

Title

Page

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS

1(1)

Definitions

1(2)

Singular and Plural

1(3)

Heading and Marginal Notes

SCOPE OF WORKS
2

Scope of Works

REQUIREMENTS UNDER WORK

3

Commencement and Duration of Agreement

Work Programme

Call-Out Time/Service Time

5(1)

Call-Out Time

5(2)

Service Time

Agreed Damages for Failure to Respond within Call-Out Time/To Rectify

Breakdown within Service Time

Service Reports

8(1)

Replacements and Repairs

8(2)

Substitute Plant

Security Deposit

10

Specialist to Pay All Stamp Fees

11

Owner's Right to Assign

12

Assignment or Subletting

GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF THE SPECIALIST

13

Behaviour of Workmen

14

Keeping Records of Workmen

15

Labour Laws

16

No Night Sunday or Public Holiday Work

17

Employment of Illegal Immigrants

18

Compliance with Rules and Regulations

19

Specialist's Superintendence

20

Safety

21

Workmen's Compensation

BLDG04/A44.DOC(20)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A44
Page 21
CONDITIONS OF COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT
FOR REFUSE HANDLING PLANT
INDEX TO COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT

Clause

Title

Page

PAYMENT
22

Firm Price Contract

23

Payment

24

Payment for Owner's Bills and Expenses, etc

25

Overclaim Leading to Overpayment

26

Recovery/Deduction of Money

10

VARIATIONS/MODIFICATIONS
27

Variations

10

28

Valuation of Variations

10

29

Specialist's Modification of Plant or Works

11

LIABILITIES FOR AN INSURANCES AGAINST

INJURIES AND DAMAGE TO PROPERTY
30

Damage to Property and Injury to Persons

11

31

Insurance against Injuries to Persons and Damage to Property

12

32

Remedies in the Event of Breach

12

33

Non-Compliance with Scheduled Number of Maintenance

13

34

Termination

13

35

Supply of Spare Parts after Termination

15

REMEDIES IN THE EVENT OF BREACH AND TERMINATION

ARBITRATION
36

Arbitration

15

LAW APPLICABLE/JURISDICTION
37

Law Applicable/Jurisdiction

BLDG04/A44.DOC(21)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

16

APPENDIX A45

Procedure To Obtain StarHub Manhole Cover

Contractor to obtain Letter of Authorization

from HDB for obtaining Manhole cover from
StarHub.
(Letter must state clearly the Project Name,
Name of Contractor Company & number of
manhole covers required for the project.)

Contractor brings Letter of Authorization to

StarHub Office.
Address of StarHub Office as follow :
180 Clemenceau Ave #04-00 Haw Par
Centre Singapore 239922
Contact : Mr. Chia Serh Kiong /Mabel Ling
Access Distribution Network
Tel: 8256425 / 8256430

Upon verification from StarHub. A voucher

will be issued to the contractor to collect the
manhole cover from StarHubs warehouse

The contractor will proceed to StarHub

warehouse with the voucher to obtain
Manhole covers.
Address of StarHub warehouse is as follow :
Tan Cheong Moh Electric Co Ltd
13/15 Kung Chong Road
Singapore 159149
Tel : 4798611 / 4741571

END

BLDG04/A45.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)

APPENDIX A46

Town Council
( Name & Address of Town Council )
_____________________________
_____________________________

PERFORMANCE COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

Contract No. _______________________________

Location of Playground: ______________________
Playground Type: ___________________________
Reference Standards:
SS 457: 1999 Playground Equipment For Public Use
SS 495: 2001 Impact Attenuation Of Surface Systems Under And Around Playground Equipment
This is to certify that I, ____________________________________________, a Certified Playground Safety
Inspector have inspected, and hereby certify that the children playground equipments and EPDM Cast-In-Situ
Rubber Flooring are in accordance with SS457: 1999 and SS459: 2001 respectively.

______________________________
Certified Playground Safety Inspector

_________________
Certification Number

_________________
Date

BLDG04/A46.DOC(1)
lkk(181203)
(DPD)